The Bedford Handbook, 8th Edition

This page intentionally left blank The Bedford Handbook For Bedford / St. Martin’s Executive Editor: Michelle M. Cl...

Author: Diana Hacker | Nancy Sommers

1545 downloads 10150 Views 9MB Size Report

This content was uploaded by our users and we assume good faith they have the permission to share this book. If you own the copyright to this book and it is wrongfully on our website, we offer a simple DMCA procedure to remove your content from our site. Start by pressing the button below!
Report copyright / DMCA form

DOWNLOAD PDF

This page intentionally left blank

The Bedford Handbook

For Bedford / St. Martin’s Executive Editor: Michelle M. Clark Senior Development Editor: Barbara G. Flanagan Development Editor: Mara Weible Senior Production Editor: Anne Noonan Senior Production Supervisor: Dennis Conroy Executive Marketing Manager: John R. Swanson Editorial Assistant: Alicia Young Copyeditor: Linda McLatchie Text Design: Claire Seng-Niemoeller Cover Design: Donna Lee Dennison Composition: Nesbitt Graphics, Inc. Printing and Binding: RR Donnelley and Sons President: Joan E. Feinberg Editorial Director: Denise B. Wydra Editor in Chief: Karen S. Henry Director of Marketing: Karen R. Soeltz Director of Editing, Design, and Production: Marcia Cohen Assistant Director of Editing, Design, and Production: Elise S. Kaiser Managing Editor: Elizabeth M. Schaaf Library of Congress Control Number: 2009924937 Copyright © 2010, 2006, 2002, 1998 by Bedford / St. Martin’s All rights reserved. No part of this book may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, except as may be expressly permitted by the applicable copyright statutes or in writing by the Publisher. Manufactured in the United States of America. 4

3

2

1

0

9

f

e

d

c

b

a

For information, write: Bedford / St. Martin’s, 75 Arlington Street, Boston, MA 02116 (617-399-4000) ISBN-10: 0-312-54430-8 0-312-65268-2 0-312-65269-0

ISBN-13: 978-0-312-54430-0 978-0-312-65268-5 978-0-312-65269-2

(Instructor’s Annotated Edition) (hardcover Student Edition) (softcover Student Edition)

Acknowledgments Acknowledgments and copyrights appear at the back of the book on page 820, which constitutes an extension of the copyright page. It is a violation of the law to reproduce these selections by any means whatsoever without the written permission of the copyright holder.

The Bedford Handbook Eighth Edition Diana Hacker Nancy Sommers Harvard University

Contributing Authors Tom Jehn Harvard University

Jane Rosenzweig Harvard University

Contributing ESL Specialist Marcy Carbajal Van Horn St. Edward’s University

BEDFORD / ST. MARTIN’S

BOSTON U NEW YORK


Preface for Instructors

Hacker handbooks have long been recognized as the most innovative and practical college references — the ones that respond most directly to student writers’ questions and challenges. In revising The Bedford Handbook, our goal was to continue to respond to students by helping them make the most of their college writing experiences. Part of our revision plan — crafted with my fellow contributors and Diana Hacker’s longtime editorial team — was to learn firsthand what’s happening in composition classrooms and writing centers across the country. With our plan in mind, I visited more than thirty-five colleges and universities to listen to students, teachers, and tutors talk about the challenges facing today’s college writers. Throughout my travels, I heard students puzzle out the unfamiliar elements of academic writing, particularly those related to working with sources. I watched creative teachers show their students how to build arguments, synthesize sources, and strengthen their ideas through revision. I observed writing center tutors responding to students’ questions about thesis statements and research assignments. And I listened, everywhere, for clues about how to develop a better, more useful reference. The eighth edition is inspired by the students, teachers, and tutors at these schools — and by the candid feedback offered by users of The Bedford Handbook’s earlier editions.

v

vi

Preface for instructors

As you look through this new edition, you’ll find many innovations — large and small — that help students make the most of their experience as college writers. For example, new boxes called Making the most of your handbook pull together advice from different parts of the book to help students complete any college writing assignment. To help students make the most of their teachers’ feedback as they revise, we have created a new feature, Revising with comments, that provides concrete strategies for revision. The comments in this new feature come directly from our interviews with sixty-five students about the comments they receive most frequently. Teachers, students, and tutors asked for more instruction on academic writing and research. In response to their requests for a more detailed treatment of thesis, we expanded the coverage: Section 1e now helps students identify problems in a draft thesis, ask relevant questions, and then revise. Students asked for more guidance in finding, evaluating, and integrating scholarly sources, so we created a case study to illustrate steps in one student’s research process. Teachers asked for attention to synthesis, a key academic skill. The eighth edition features new coverage that models how students use their own language and ideas to position sources in an academic conversation. Finally, teachers and tutors asked us for grammar coverage that’s more accessible and relevant, so we added new hand-edited examples that show typical grammar errors that students make when they use sources. We also completely revised our ESL material. Diana Hacker wanted her handbooks to provide clear, straightforward guidance in response to a college student’s basic question: How do I write a good college paper? The eighth edition of The Bedford Handbook continues to respond, offering even more practical advice and useful models for today’s college writers. Diana taught us well, and I am not alone in saying that her method of teaching one lesson at a time helped me become a more effective composition teacher. Now as lead coauthor on her handbooks, I am honored to continue the Hacker tradition, helping students make the most of their


college writing experiences as they compose their way through college and into the wider world.

Features of the Eighth Edition What’s new Navigation help that makes sense to students UÊ >}ÊÌiÊÃÌÊvÊÞÕÀÊ>`L° These new boxes, run-

ning throughout the book, help students to pull together the advice they need to complete writing assignments in composition and other classes. The boxes teach students to use their handbook as a reference by prompting them to consult related advice and examples from different parts of the book as they write and revise. / REFERENCES IN THE MARGIN HELP STUDENTS FIND RELATED MATERIAL

5b View your audience as a panel of jurors Do not assume that your audience already agre instead, envision skeptical readers who, like a pa will make up their minds a Making the most of your handbook to all sides of the argumen You may need to consider arguing a public policy issu a specific audience for your paper at readers who repres argument. of opinions. In the case of th 0 Analyzing your audience: 1a offshore drilling, for examp 0 Writing in a particular discipline, such as business jury representative of those or psychology: 7 stake in the matter: enviro policymakers, and consume At times, you can deliberately narrow your you are working within a word limit, for exampl not have the space in which to address all the c rounding the offshore drilling debate Or you mig See pages 6 and 109 for additional examples.

vii

viii


UÊ *>>}Õ>}iÊ>Û}>Ì° We have replaced traditional

handbook section titles with familiar terms for quick and easy reference. Terms like main idea, flow, and presenting the other side, placed in the upper right-hand corners of the pages, will help students see at a glance the exact page they need. See page 47 for examples. Concrete strategies for revising UÊ ,iÛÃ}ÊÜÌÊViÌÃ° Based on research with sixty-five

students at colleges and universities across the country, this new boxed feature gives students targeted help with revising in response to instructors’ comments on their drafts. Each box contains a sample student passage with a common instructor’s comment, such as “unclear thesis,” “develop more,” or “cite your source.” We help students understand similar comments by their instructors and give them strategies they can use to revise their 0h0h0 own work. An example appears on page ix. UÊ -«iVwVÊÃÌÀ>Ìi}iÃÊvÀÊÀiÛÃ}ÊÌiÃÃÊÃÌ>ÌiiÌÃ° We

know that college writers often need help reworking thesis statements, no matter the discipline. A new stepped-out approach helps students identify a problem in a draft thesis, ask relevant questions, and revise based on their own responses. See page 28. UÊ

iÜÊVÛiÀ>}iÊvÊ«ÀÌvÊii«}° For students who are asked to maintain and submit a writing portfolio, a new section (2c) covers types of portfolios and offers tips for writing a reflective cover document. See pages 59–61.

Preface for instructors “REVISING WITH COMMENTS” PAGES PROVIDE CONCRETE STRATEGIES

Understanding the comment When a teacher or tutor points out that your thesis is unclear, the comment often signals that readers may have a hard time identifying your essay’s main point. Fathers are more involved in the lives of their children today than they used to be. In the past, the father’s primary role was as the provider; child care was most often left to the mother or other relatives. However, today’s father drives to dance lessons, coaches his child’s baseball team, hosts birthday parties, and provides homework help. Do more involved fathers help or hinder the development of their children?

Onne student wrote thiss introductory paragraph in ressponse to an asssignment that askked her to analyze thee changing roles of moothers or fathers.

A writer’s thesis, or main point, should be phrased as a statement, not a question. To revise, the student could answer the question she has posed, or she could pose a new question and answer it. After considering her evidence, she needs to decide what position she wants to take, state this position clearly, and show readers whyy this position — her thesis — matters.

Similar comments: s s

Revising when yourr thesis is unclear 1. Ask questions. What is the thesis, position, or main point of the draft? Can you support it with the available evidence? 2. Reread your entire draft. Because ideas develop as you write, you may find that your conclusion contains a clearer statement of your main point than your current thesis does. Or you may find your thesis elsewhere in your draft. 3. Try revising your thesis by framing it as an answer to a question you pose, the resolution of a problem you identify, or a position you take in a debate. And put your thesis to the “So what?” test: Why would a reader be interested in this thesis? More help with writing a clear thesis: 1c and 1e

30

See pages 33, 110, and 502 for additional examples.

ix

x


Targeted content for today’s students: Academic writing and research UÊ ÊiÜÊV>ÃiÊÃÌÕ`Þ follows one student’s research and

writing process, providing a detailed, illustrated model for strategizing about sources, using search tools and techniques, evaluating sources, taking notes, thinking critically about how best to use sources in a paper, and integrating a source responsibly. This self-contained section (54b) includes marginal navigation aids directing students to more detailed information throughout the book. The first page of the case study is shown on 0h0h0 page xi. UÊ -ÞÌiÃÃ]Ê>ÊÀiµÕÀiiÌÊÊ>V>ìVÊÜÀÌ}° More of

today’s college writing assignments require that students synthesize—analyze sources and work them into a conversation that helps develop an argument. New coverage of synthesis, with annotated examples in MLA and APA styles (pages 512–15 and 635–38), helps students work with sources to meet the demands of academic writing. UÊ Ìi}À>Ì}ÊiÛìViÊÊ>>ÞÌV>Ê«>«iÀÃ° New coverage in

section 4, “Writing about Texts,” shows students — at the sentence level — how to introduce, include, and interpret a passage in an analytical paper. See pages 94–97. UÊ ÀiÊi«ÊÜÌÊÜÀÌ}Ê>ÃÃ}iÌÃÊÊÌiÀÊ`ÃV«iÃÊ>`Ê ÊÛ>ÀÕÃÊ}iÀiÃ° For students who work with evidence

in disciplines other than English, we have included annotated assignments and excerpts from model papers in psychology, business, nursing, and biology. For an example, see page 136. UÊ

iÜÊ>`ÊÕ«Ì`>ÌiÊ`VÕiÌ>ÌÊìÃ for the sources students are using today — eighty-five new models across the three styles (MLA, APA, and Chicago) — with special attention to new sources such as podcasts, online videos, blogs, and DVD features. Detailed annotations for many

Preface for instructors NEW CASE STUDY FOLLOWS ONE STUDENT’S RESEARCH AND WRITING PROCESS

getting started U forming a research plan U posing questions

573

Making the most of your handbook Highlights of one student’s research process (MLA style) Anna Orlov, a student in a composition class, was assigned a research essay related to technology and the American workplace. The assignment called for her to use a variety of print and electronic sources and to follow MLA style. Orlov immediately thought of her summer internship at an insurance company and her surprise at the strict employee Internet use policy in place there. As she thought about how to turn her experience into a research project, she developed some questions and strategies to guide her research and writing.

¦)PXEP*CFHJOBSFTFBSDIQBQFS § Before getting started, Orlov worked with a writing tutor to break her research plan into several stages. (Section numbers in blue refer to relevant discussions throughout the book.)

"TLXPSUIXIJMFRVFTUJPOTBCPVUNZUPQJD 5BMLXJUIBSFGFSFODFMJCSBSJBOBCPVUVTFGVMUZQFTPG TPVSDFTBOEXIFSFUP±OEUIFN

46b

$POTJEFSIPXFBDITPVSDFDBODPOUSJCVUF UPNZQBQFS

47a

%FDJEFXIJDITFBSDISFTVMUTBSFXPSUIB DMPTFSMPPL

&WBMVBUFUIFTPVSDFT

1b, 46a

47b 47d, 47e

5BLFOPUFTBOELFFQUSBDLPGUIFTPVSDFT

48

8SJUFBXPSLJOHUIFTJT 8SJUFBESBGUBOEJOUFHSBUFTPVSDFT

1c, 50a 1e–1g, 52, 53a

%PDVNFOUTPVSDFT

49, 53b

Orlov began by jotting down the research question she wanted to investigate: Is Internet surveillance in the workplace fair or unfair to employees? She thought the practice might be unfair but knew that she needed to consider all sides of the issue. Her instructor had explained that sources uncovered in the research process would both support and challenge her ideas and ultimately help shape the paper. Orlov knew she would have to be

See pages 573–82 for the entire case study.

1b and 46a: Posing questions for a research paper

xi

xii


models help students see at a glance how to format their citations. See examples on page 553. NOTE: The eighth edition includes up-to-date guidelines for MLA (2009) and APA (2010). UÊ

iÜÊÃÌÞiÊÀiÃi>ÀVÊiÃÃ>Þ (pages 583–88)

UÊ

iÜÊyÜV>ÀÌÊÊÌiiVÌÕ>Ê«À«iÀÌÞ (pages 486–87)

New examples, more accessible grammar coverage UÊ ÀiÊ -Êi«]Ê«ÀiÃiÌi`ÊÀiÊ>VViÃÃLÞ° Part VI,

“Challenges for ESL and Multilingual Writers,” now completely revised, offers more accessible advice and more support for multilingual writers across the disciplines. UÊ À>>ÀÊL>ÃVÃÊVÌiÌÊÃÊÀiÊÃÌÀ>}ÌvÀÜ>À`ÊÌ>ÊiÛiÀ°

Part XI, the handbook’s reference within a reference, now teaches with everyday example sentences and exercise items. UÊ ÀiÊ>V>ìVÊiÝ>«iÃ reflect the types of sentences

students are expected to write in college. A new type of hand-edited example (“Writing with sources”) shows typical errors students make — and how they can correct them — when they integrate sources in MLA, APA, and Chicago papers. See page 240 for an additional example. /

0

Writing with sources MLA-style citation

Deborah Tannen’s research reveals that men and women have different ideas about communication. For example,

5BOOFO FYQMBJOT Q

that a woman “expects her husband to be a new and

?improved version of her best friend” (441). A quotation must be part of a complete sentence. That a woman “expects her husband to be a new and improved version of her best friend” is a fragment — a subordinate clause. In this case, adding a signal phrase that includes a subject and a verb (Tannen explains) corrects the fragment and clarifies that the quotation is from Tannen.


A new collection of resources that helps instructors make the most of their handbook UÊ Teaching with Hacker Handbooks] by Marcy Carbajal Van

Horn, offers practical advice on common topics such as designing a composition course, crafting writing assignments, and teaching multilingual writers. Ten lesson plans, each including strategies and materials that are ready to use or customize, support common course goals such as teaching argument, teaching paragraphs, and teaching peer review. The collection also includes a wealth of handouts, syllabi, and other materials for integrating a Hacker handbook into your course. Available in print and online (hackerhandbooks.com/teaching).

What’s the same

«ÀiiÃÛiÊ VÛiÀ>}iÊ vÊ }À>>À]Ê >V>ìVÊ ÜÀÌ}]Ê >`Ê Ài Ãi>ÀV° A classroom tool and a reference, the handbook is de-

signed to help students write well in any college course. This edition includes nearly one hundred exercise sets, many with answers in the back of the book. Ê LÀivÊ iÕÊ >`Ê >Ê ÕÃiÀvÀi`ÞÊ ìÝ° Students will find help fast by consulting either the brief list of contents on the inside front cover or the user-friendly index, which works even for writers who are unsure of grammar terminology.

Ì>ÌÊ>ÌÊ>Ê}>Vi° Annotated visuals show students where to

find the publication information they need to cite common types of sources in MLA and APA styles. +ÕV>VViÃÃÊV>ÀÌÃÊ>`Ê>ÊÕVÕÌÌiÀi`ÊìÃ}° The eighth edition has what instructors and students have come to expect of a Hacker handbook: a clear and navigable presentation of information, with charts that summarize key content.

xiii

xiv


What’s in the Student Center hackerhandbooks.com/bedhandbook The handbook’s companion Web site has a new name but includes many of the resources students have used before. À>>À]Ê ÜÀÌ}]Ê >`Ê ÀiÃi>ÀVÊ iÝiÀVÃiÃ with feedback for

every item. More than 1,400 items offer students plenty of extra practice, and our new scorecard gives instructors flexibility in viewing students’ results. Ì>Ìi`ÊìÊ«>«iÀÃÊin MLA, APA, Chicago, and CSE styles. Student writers can see formatting conventions and effective writing in traditional college essays and in other common genres: annotated bibliographies, literature reviews, lab reports, business proposals, and clinical documents. ,iÃi>ÀVÊ >`Ê VÕiÌ>ÌÊ "i° This award-winning re-

source, written by a college librarian, gives students a jump start with research in thirty academic disciplines. ,iÃÕÀViÃÊ vÀÊ ÜÀÌiÀÃÊ >`Ê ÌÕÌÀÃ° Checklists, hints, tips, and helpsheets are available in downloadable format. ,iÃÕÀViÃÊvÀÊ -Ê>`ÊÕÌ}Õ>ÊÜÀÌiÀÃ° Writers will find advice and strategies for understanding college expectations and completing writing assignments. Also included are charts, exercises, activities, and an annotated student essay in draft and final form. >}Õ>}iÊ iL>ÌiÃ° Twenty-two brief essays provide opportu-

nities for critical thinking about grammar and usage issues. VViÃÃÊÌÊ«ÀiÕÊVÌiÌ° New copies of the print handbook can be packaged with a free activation code for premium content: The Bedford e-Handbook, a series of online video tutorials,


and a collection of resources that includes games, activities, readings, guides, and more.

Supplements for instructors Practical

Teaching with Hacker Handbooks: Topics, Strategies, and Lesson Plans The Bedford Handbook instructor resources (at hackerhandbooks .com/bedhandbook) Professional

Teaching Composition: Background Readings The Bedford Guide for Writing Tutors, Fifth Edition The Bedford Bibliography for Teachers of Writing, Sixth Edition

Supplements for students Print

Developmental Exercises for The Bedford Handbook Working with Sources: Research Exercises for The Bedford Handbook Research and Documentation in the Electronic Age, Fifth Edition Extra Help for ESL Writers: Supplement for Hacker Handbooks Designing Documents and Understanding Visuals: Supplement for Hacker Handbooks Writing in the Disciplines: Advice and Models Online

The Bedford e-Handbook CompClass for The Bedford Handbook

xv

xvi


Acknowledgments I am grateful for the expertise, enthusiasm, and classroom experience that so many individuals brought to the new edition.

Contributors My fellow coauthors wrote new content and rethought existing content to make sure that The Bedford Handbook reaches an ever broader range of students and meets their various needs. Jane Rosenzweig, a composition teacher and writing center director, revised the coverage of thesis statements, wrote new content for the “Writing about Texts” section, and created many new examples for our innovative “Writing with sources” grammar coverage. Tom Jehn, a composition teacher and writing in the disciplines expert, refined our research coverage and drafted the new case study in the MLA section. Marcy Carbajal Van Horn, online writing lab director, ESL specialist, and experienced composition instructor, improved the ESL coverage in the book, wrote new ESL content for the companion Web site, and is lead author of the new collection of instructor resources, Teaching with Hacker Handbooks.

Reviewers For her careful review of our coverage of research and documentation, I am grateful to Barbara Fister, academic librarian at Gustavus Adolphus College. I am also thankful to a group of colleagues who helped shape our new coverage of revision by talking with us about the comments they write on their students’ papers: Steve Brahlek, Palm Beach Community College; Liz Canfield, Virginia Commonwealth University; Jon Cullick, Northern Kentucky University; Tiane Donahue, Dartmouth College; Anne Fernald, Fordham University; Holly McSpadden, Missouri Southern State University; and Jennifer Whetham, Green River Community College. For their active engagement with new manuscript and for their willingness to share teaching ideas in a Boston-based


focus group, I am grateful to the following instructors: Steve Brahlek and John Ribar, Palm Beach Community College; April Childress and Joanne Messman, Greenville Technical College; Beverly Holmes and James Suderman, Northwest Florida State College; Bobbie Kilbane, Volunteer State Community College; and Chris Twiggs, Florida Community College. Many additional reviewers either answered a detailed questionnaire about the seventh edition or reviewed new manuscript for the eighth edition: Guy Aengus, University of California, Davis; Preston Allen, Miami Dade College; Sandy Archimedes, University of California, Santa Cruz; Chris Arevalo, Austin Community College; John Avery, Green River Community College; Diane Baird, Palm Beach Community College; April Baker, Greenville Technical College; Chelle Bernstein, St. Johns River Community College; Kristin Bivens, Harold Washington College; Laura Black, Volunteer State Community College; Deborah Borchers, Pueblo Community College; Laurie Buchanan, Clark State Community College; Karen Burge, Wichita State University; Nicole Buzzetto-More, University of Maryland Eastern Shore; Andrew Cavanaugh, University of Maryland University College; Pam Clark, Frederick Community College; Victoria Cliett, Henry Ford Community College; Mark Coley, Tarrant County College Southeast; Trish Conard, Hutchinson Community College; Janet Cook, Hutchinson Community College; Brian Cooney, Gonzaga University; Michael Cripps, York College CUNY; Margot Cullen, Ohio Northern University; Bonita Dattner-Garza, St. Mary’s University; Rose Day, Central New Mexico Community College; Darren DeFrain, Wichita State University; Linda Didesidero, University of Maryland University College; Africa Fine, Palm Beach Community College; Bill Fisher, Pensacola Junior College; Jane P. Gamber, Hutchinson Community College; Grace Giorgio, University of Illinois; Shon Grant, Northern Virginia Community College; Miriam Gustafson, University of New Mexico; Karen Hall, Lewiston-Auburn College; Mickey Hall, Volunteer State Community College; Elisabeth

xvii

xviii


Heard, Harold Washington College; John Jebb, University of Delaware; Laura Jeffries, Florida Community College at Jacksonville; Nikki Johnson, University of Northern Iowa; Stephanie Kamath, University of Massachusetts Boston; Kathleen Keating, Greensboro College; Jana Kinder, Florida Community College at Jacksonville; Steven Knapp, Indian River Community College; Carol Koris, Johnson & Wales University; Robert Lietz, Ohio Northern University; Michelle Lisi-D’Alauro, Lewiston-Auburn College; Keming Liu, Medgar Evers College CUNY; Barbara Lutz, University of Delaware; Paul Madachy, Prince George’s Community College; John Magee, Ohio Northern University; Caroline Mains, Palo Alto College; David Marlow, University of South Carolina; Tammy Mata, Tarrant County College; Linda McCloud-Bondoc, Athabasca University; Shellie Michael, Volunteer State Community College; Gayla Mills, Randolph-Macon College; Heidi Moore, Northern Virginia Community College; Rhonda Morris, Santa Fe College; Joan Nakke, Montgomery College; Betty Nelson, Volunteer State Community College; Tom O’Neal, St. Johns River Community College; Michelle Paulsen, Victoria College; Tammy Peery, Montgomery College; Susan Perry, Greenville Technical College; Sharon Prince, Wharton City Junior College; Roberta Proctor, Palm Beach Community College; Ellen Raphaeli, Northern Virginia Community College; Kent Richmond, California State University, Long Beach; Pearl Saunders, Palm Beach Community College; Lisa Shaw, Miami Dade College; Donald Skinner, Indian River Community College; Gary Sligh, Lake-Sumter Community College; Kate Spike, Bowling Green State University; Jeniffer Strong, Central New Mexico Community College; Rebecca Sullivan, St. Johns River Community College; Tom Treffinger, Greenville Technical College; Katherine Turner, Mary Baldwin College; April Van Camp, Indian River Community College; Susan Vergnani, Santa Fe College; Lisa Wilde, Howard Community College; Dennis Williams, College of Charleston; Rita Wisdom, Tarrant County College Northeast.


Students A number of bright and willing students helped us see which instructor comments provide the best guidance for revision. From Green River Community College: Kyle Baskin, Josué Cardona, Emily Dore, Anthony Hines, Stephanie Humphries, Joshua Kin, Jessica Llapitan, James Mitchell, Derek Pegram, Charlie Piehler, Lindsay Allison Rae Richards, Kristen Saladis, Jacob Simpson, Christina Starkey, Ariana Stone, and Joseph Vreeburg. From Northern Kentucky University: Sarah Freidhoff, Marisa Hempel, Sarah Laughlin, Sean Moran, Laren Reis, and Carissa Spencer. From Palm Beach Community College: Alexis Day, Shawn Gibbons, Zachary Jennison, Jean Lacz, Neshia Neal, Sarah Reich, Jude Rene, and Sam Smith. And from the University of Maine at Farmington: Nicole Carr, Hannah Courtright, Timothy Doyle, Janelle Gallant, Amy Hobson, Shawn Menard, Jada Molton, Jordan Nicholas, Nicole Phillips, Tessa Rockwood, Emily Rose, Nicholas Tranten, and Ashley Wyman. We also thank the students who have let us use and adapt their papers as models in the handbook: Ned Bishop, Jamal Hammond, Albert Lee, Luisa Mirano, Anna Orlov, Emilia Sanchez, and Matt Watson.

Bedford / St. Martin’s A comprehensive handbook is truly a collaborative writing project, and it is a pleasure to acknowledge and thank the enormously talented Bedford/St. Martin’s editorial team, whose deep commitment to students informs each new feature of The Bedford Handbook. Joan Feinberg, Bedford’s president and Diana Hacker’s first editor, asks tough questions and offers her superb judgment on every aspect of the book. Joan’s graceful and generous leadership, both within Bedford and in the national composition community, is a never-ending source of inspiration for those who are fortunate to work with her. Michelle Clark, executive editor, combines wisdom with patience, creativity with practicality, and hard work with good

xix

xx


humor. An author could not wish for a smarter editor and collaborator than Michelle. Her voice, vision, and elegance shape each page of the eighth edition. Barbara Flanagan, senior editor, has worked on Diana Hacker’s handbooks for more than twenty-five years and brings to the eighth edition her unrelenting insistence on both clarity and precision as well as her expertise in documentation. Mara Weible, editor, is a close reader extraordinaire, whose intellectual patience and persistence shaped the new case study and synthesis sections. Denise Wydra, editorial director; Karen Henry, editor in chief; John Swanson, executive marketing manager; and Jimmy Fleming, senior English marketing specialist, are treasured sources of thoughtful and innovative ideas. Their passionate commitment to The Bedford Handbook ensures that it will meet the needs of today’s students. Anne Noonan, senior production editor, kept us on schedule and turned a complex manuscript into a superior handbook. Alicia Young, editorial assistant, expertly managed the review process, prepared documents, and edited several ancillaries. And many thanks to Linda McLatchie, copyeditor, for her thoroughness and attention to detail; to Claire Seng-Niemoeller, text designer, who always has ease of use in mind as she designs a Hacker handbook; to Donna Dennison, art director, who has given the cover a fresh new look; and to Sarah Ferguson, new media editor, who developed the book’s Student Center and e-book. And last, but never least, I offer thanks to Maxine Rodburg and Kerry Walk, friends and mentors, for sustaining conversations about teaching writing; Joshua Alper, a most demanding — and forgiving — reader; and to my daughters, Rachel and Alexandra, whose good-natured and humorous observations about the real lives of college writers are a constant source of instruction and inspiration. — Nancy Sommers

How to Use This Book and Its Student Center

Though it is small enough to hold in your hand, The Bedford Handbook will answer most of the questions you are likely to ask as you plan, draft, and revise a piece of writing: How do I choose and narrow a topic? How do I know when to begin a new paragraph? Should I write each was or each were? When should I place a comma before and? What is counterargument? What is the difference between accept and except? How do I cite an online newspaper article? The book’s companion Web site, the Student Center, extends the book beyond its covers. See page xxvi for details.

How to find information with an instructor’s help When you are revising an essay that your instructor has marked, tracking down information is simple. If your instructor indicates problems with a number such as 16 or a number and letter such as 12e, you can turn directly to the appropriate section of the handbook. Just flip through the tabs at the top of the pages until you find the number in question. If your instructor uses an abbreviation such as w or dm instead of a number, consult the list of abbreviations and revision symbols at the end of the book. There you will find the

xxi

xxii

How to use this book and its Student Center

name of the problem (wordy; dangling modifier) and the number of the section to consult. Lund 3 the other snowmobiles” (Johnson 7). Whether such noise adversely affects the park’s wildlife remains a debated question, but the possibility exists.

4NBSUVTFPG DPVOUFSBSHVNFOU

Some who favor keeping the park open to snowmobiles

argue that newer, four-stroke machines cause less air and noise pollution than older models. While this is true, the new machines still pollute more than cars, and their decibel level is reduced only slightly (“Snowmobile” B25). Also, because the newer snowmobiles cost at least $3,000 more than the older ones, it is unlikely that individuals would choose to buy them or that rental companies could afford to upgrade. At present there are no strict guarantees that only the newer models would be allowed into the park.

EN

Like most federal agencies, budget constraints face the National Park Service. Funds that should be used to preserve Yellowstone National Park and its wildlife have been diverted to deal with the snowmobile issue. A single environmental impact study of the problem cost taxpayers nearly $250,000 in early 2002 (Greater Yellowstone Coalition), and the park service estimates that implementing the new plan

Revision Symbols Boldface numbers refer to sections o

BCCS BEK BEE BEW BHS BQQS BSU BXL DBQ DBTF DMJDIn DPI DPPSE DT EFW EN FE FNQI &4-

abbreviation 40 misuse of adjective 26 add needed word 10 misuse of adverb 26 agreement 21, 22 inappropriate language 17 article (a, an, the) 29 awkward capital letter 45 pronoun case 24, 25 cliché 18e coherence 3d coordination 14 comma splice 20 inadequate development 3b dangling modifier 12e -ed ending 27d emphasis 14 English as a second language 28–31 inexact language 18 sentence fragment 19 fused sentence 20

FYBDU GSBH GT A dangling modifier fails to refer logically to any word in the sentence. Dangling modifiers are easy to repair, but they can be hard to recognize, especially in your own writing.

12e Repair dangling modifiers.

How to find information on your own This handbook is designed to allow you to find information without an instructor’s help — usually by consulting the brief menu inside the front cover. At times, you may consult the detailed menu inside the back cover, the index, the Glossary of Usage, the list of revision symbols, or one of the directories to documentation models. The tutorials on pages xxviii–xxxi give you opportunities to practice finding information in different ways.


xxiii

/iÊLÀivÊiÕ° The brief menu inside the front cover displays

the book’s contents. Let’s say that you want to find out how you can write with more active verbs. Your first step is to scan the menu for the appropriate numbered topic — in this case “8 Active verbs.” Then you can use the blue and green tabs at the top of the pages to find section 8.

Brief Menu HOW TO USE THIS BOOK AND ITS STUDENT CENTER

Part I The Writing Process 1 142 1 Exploring, planning, and drafting 2 3

Part II Academic Writing 85 4 5 6 7

8

active

8

Prefer active verbs.

2 Making global revisions; revising sente Building paragraphs 62

Active verbs

Writing about texts 86 As a rule, choose an active verb and pair it w Constructing reasonable arguments names the person or thing doing the action Evaluating arguments 118 Writing in the disciplines 129 press meaning more emphatically and vigo

Part III Clear Sentences 141 weaker counterparts — forms of the verb be o sive voice. 8 Active verbs 142 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Parallelism 147 Needed words 151 PASSIVE Mixed constructions 156 VERB Misplaced and dangling modifiersBEE 16 Shifts 169 Emphasis 176 ACTIVE Variety 191

Part IV Word Choice 16 17 18

197 Wordy sentences 198 Appropriate language 203 Exact words 216

The pumps were destroyed d by a surge A surge of power was responsible fo of the pumps. A surge of power destroyed d the pump

Verbs in the passive voice lack strength beca receive the action instead of doing it. Form

Part V Grammatical Sentences 2 19 20 21

Sentence fragments 226 Run-on sentences 235 S bj t b t (i

t

/iÊìÌ>i`ÊiÕ° The detailed menu appears inside the back

cover. When the numbered section you’re looking for is broken up into quite a few lettered subsections, try consulting this menu. For instance, if you have a question about the proper use of commas after introductory elements, this menu will quickly lead you to section 32b.

xxiv


Once you find the right lettered subsection, you will see three kinds of advice to help you edit your writing — a rule, an explanation, and one or more hand-edited examples.

VII Punctuation

353

Rule

Explanation

Examples

32 The comma ? 354 a with and, but, etc. b introductory elements c series d coordinate adjectives e nonrestrictive 32b Use a comma after an introductory clause elements or phrase. f transitions, The most common introductory word groups are clausesparenthetical and expresphrases functioning as adverbs. Such word groups usually tell sions, absolute when, where, how, why, or under what conditions the main phrases, contrasts action of the sentence occurred. (See 63a, 63b, and 63e.) g direct address, A comma tells readers that the introductory clause or phrase has come to a close and that the main part of theyes sen-and no, interrogative tags, tence is about to begin. h h interjections 0 When Irwin was ready to iron his cat tripped on the h he said etc. ? i dates, addresses, cord. titles, numbers Without the comma, readers may have Irwin ironing his cat. The comma signals that his cat is the subject of a new clause, jnot to part prevent confusion of the introductory one.

0

Near a small stream at the bottom of the canyon the park rangers discovered an abandoned mine.

?

The comma tells readers that the introductory prepositional phrase has come to a close.

/iÊìÝ° If you aren’t sure which topic to choose from one

of the menus, consult the index at the back of the book. For example, you may not realize that the issue of whether to use have or has is a matter of subject-verb agreement (section 21). In that case, simply look up “has vs. have” in the index. You will be directed to specific pages in two sections covering subject-verb agreement. >}Ê ÌiÊ ÃÌÊ vÊ ÞÕÀÊ >`L° You will find your way to helpful advice by using the index, the menus, or the contents. Once you get to where you need to be, you may also find


references to additional related advice and models. These boxes help you pull together what you need from the handbook for each assignment.

xxv

Making the most of your handbook You may need to consider a specific audience for your argument. 0

Analyzing your audience: 1a

0

Writing in a particular discipline, such as business or psychology: 7

/iÊ ÃÃ>ÀÞÊ vÊ 1Ã>}i° When in

doubt about the correct use of a particular word (such as affect and effect), consult the Glossary of Usage at the back of the book. This glossary explains the difference between commonly confused words; it also includes words that are inappropriate in formal written English. ÀiVÌÀiÃÊÌÊ`VÕiÌ>ÌÊìÃ° When you are documenting a research paper with MLA, APA, or Chicago style, you can find documentation models by consulting the appropriate color-coded directories. Directory to Chicago-style notes and bibliography entries Books (print and online)

Directory to APA references (bibliographic entries) General guidelines for listing authors (print and online) 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Single author, 647 Multiple authors, 647 Organization as author, 648 Unknown author, 648 Two or more works by the same author, 648 6. Two or more works by the same author in the same year, 648

24. Introduction, preface, foreword, or afterword, 655 25. Dictionary or other reference work, 655 26. Article in a reference work, 655 27. Republished book, 655 28. Book with a title in its title, 655 29. Sacred or classical text, 655

Online sources 30. Article in an online journal, 656

Articles in periodicals (print) 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16.

Article in a journal, 649 Article in a magazine, 649 Article in a newspaper, 649 Article with three to six authors, 651 Article with more than six authors, 651 Abstract of a journal article, 651 Letter to the editor, 651 Editorial or other unsigned article, 651 Newsletter article, 651 Review, 652

APA, page 645

Directory to MLA works cited models Listing authors (print and online) 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Single author, 532 Two or three authors, 532 Four or more authors, 533 Organization as author, 533 Unknown author, 533 Two or more works by the same author, 534

Books (print) 7. Basic format for a book, 535 8. Book with an author and an editor, 535 9. Book with an author and a translator, 535 10. Book with an editor, 535 11. Graphic narrative or illustrated book, 537 12. Book with an author using a pseudonym, 537 13. Book in a language other than English, 537 14. Entire anthology, 537 15. One or more selections from an anthology, 538 16. Edition other than the first, 539 17. Multivolume work, 539 18. Encyclopedia or dictionary entry 539

1. Basic format for a print book, 701 2. Basic format for an online book, 701 3. Two or three authors, 702 4. Four or more authors, 702 5. Organization as author, 702 6. Unknown author, 702 7. Multiple works by the same author, 702 8. Edited work without an author, 702 9. Edited work with an author, 704 10 Translated work, 704 han the first, 704 multivolume

26. Article in a monthly magazine, 544 27. Article in a weekly magazine, 544 28. Article in a daily newspaper, 544 29. Abstract of a journal article, 545 30. Article with a title in its title, 545 31. Editorial or other unsigned article, 545 32. Letter to the editor, 545 33. Book or film review, 548

Online sources 34. Entire Web site, 548 35. Short work from a Web site, 549 36. Web site with an author using a pseudonym, 551 37. Article in an online scholarly journal, 553 38. Article in an online magazine, 553 39. Article in an online newspaper, 553 40. Work from a database, 553 41. Online book-length work, 554 42 Part of an online book 554

thology, 704 preface, afterword, 705 book, 705 tle in its title, 705 blished 5 es, 705 or dictionary 706 d in i another th

26. Article in an online magazine, 707 27. Magazine article from a database, 708 28. Article in a print newspaper, 708 29. Article in an online newspaper, 708 30. Newspaper article from a database, 708 31. Unsigned article, 708 32. Book review, 709 33. Letter to the editor, 709

Online sources 34. Web site, 709 35. Short work from a Web site, 710 36. Online posting or e-mail, 710 37. Weblog (blog) post, 710 38. Podcast, 710 39. Online audio or visual source, 711

Other sources (including online versions) 40. Government document, 711 41. Unpublished dissertation, 711 42. Personal communication, 712 43 Published or broadcast

Chicago, page 703

MLA, page 530

xxvi


ÃÜiÀÃÊÌÊiÝiÀVÃiÃ° The Bedford Handbook has been designed so that you can learn from it on your own. By providing answers to some exercise sentences, it allows you to test your understanding of the material. Most exercise sets begin with five sentences lettered a through e and conclude with five or ten numbered sentences. Answers to lettered sentences appear in the back of the book, beginning on page 805.

Using the book’s Student Center: hackerhandbooks.com/bedhandbook Throughout The Bedford Handbook, Eighth Edition, you will see references to exercises and model papers on the Student Center, the book’s companion Web site. Here is a complete list of resources on the site. Your instructor may use some of this material in class; each area of the site, however, has been developed for you to use on your own whenever you need it. UÊ 7ÀÌ}ÊiÝiÀVÃiÃ Interactive exercises, including feedback

for every answer, on topics such as choosing a thesis statement and conducting a peer review UÊ À>>ÀÊiÝiÀVÃiÃ Interactive exercises on grammar,

style, and punctuation, including feedback for every answer UÊ ,iÃi>ÀVÊiÝiÀVÃiÃ Interactive exercises, including feed-

back for every answer, on topics such as integrating quotations and documenting sources in MLA, APA, and Chicago styles UÊ ìÊ«>«iÀÃ Annotated sample papers in MLA, APA,

Chicago, and CSE styles UÊ -Êi« Resources, strategies, model papers, and exer-

cises to help multilingual students improve their college writing skills


UÊ Research and Documentation Online Advice on finding

sources in a variety of academic disciplines and upto-date guidelines for documenting print and online sources in MLA, APA, Chicago, and CSE styles UÊ ,iÃÕÀViÃÊvÀÊÜÀÌiÀÃÊ>`ÊÌÕÌÀÃ Revision checklists and

helpsheets for common writing problems UÊ /ÕÌÀ>Ã Interactive resources that teach essential college

skills such as integrating sources in a research paper and revising with peer comments (This area of the Web site requires an activation code.) UÊ >}Õ>}iÊ iL>ÌiÃ Mini-essays exploring controversial

issues of grammar and usage, such as split infinitives UÊ ``Ì>ÊÀiÃÕÀViÃ Print-format versions of the book’s

exercises and links to additional online resources for every part of the book UÊ Re:Writing A free collection of resources for composi-

tion and other college classes: help with preparing presentation slides, avoiding plagiarism, evaluating online sources, and more

xxvii

xxviii


Tutorials The following tutorials will give you practice using the book’s menus, index, Glossary of Usage, and MLA directory. Answers to the tutorials begin on page 804.

1

Using the menus

Each of the following “rules” violates the principle it expresses. Using the brief menu inside the front cover or the detailed menu inside the back cover, find the section in The Bedford Handbook that explains the principle. Then fix the problem. Example:

h

5VUPSTJO

In the writing center, they say that vague pronoun

?reference is unacceptable.

1. A verb have to agree with its subject. 2. About sentence fragments. You should avoid them. 3. Its important to use apostrophe’s correctly. 4. If your sentence begins with a long introductory word group use a comma to separate the word group from the rest of the sentence. 5. When dangling, watch your modifiers.

2

Using the index

Assume that you have written the following sentences and want to know the answers to the questions in brackets. Use the index at the back of the book to locate the information you need, and edit the sentences if necessary. 1. Each of the candidates have decided to participate in tonight’s debate. [Should the verb be has or have to agree with Each?]


2. We had intended to go surfing but spent most of our vacation lying on the beach. [Should I use lying or laying?] 3. We only looked at two houses before buying the house of our dreams. [Is only in the right place?] 4. In some cultures, it is considered ill mannered for you to accept a gift. [Is it okay to use you to mean “anyone in general”?] 5. In Canada, Joanne picked up several bottles of maple syrup for her sister and me. [Should I write for her sister and I?]

3

Using the menus or the index

Imagine that you are in the following situations. Using either the menus or the index, find the information you need. 1. You are a student studying health administration, and you’re editing a report you’ve just written on the benefits of community-based urgent care clinics. You recall learning to put a comma between all items in a series except the last two. But you have noticed that most writers use a comma between all items. You’re curious about the rule. Which section of The Bedford Handbook will you consult? 2. You are tutoring in your university’s writing center. A composition student comes to you for help with her first college essay. She is revising a draft — and struggling with her use of articles (a, an, and the). You know how to use articles, but you aren’t able to explain the complicated rules on their correct use. Which section in The Bedford Handbook will you and the student, a multilingual writer, consult? 3. You have been assigned to write in response to an essay you read for your composition class. Your instructor has asked that you use at least three quotations from the text in your response, which must be written in MLA style. You aren’t quite sure how to integrate words from another source in your own writing. Which section in this handbook will help?

xxix

xxx


4. You supervise interns at a housing agency. Two of your interns have trouble with the -s endings on verbs. One tends to drop -s endings; the other tends to add them where they don’t belong. You suspect that both problems stem from dialects spoken at home. The interns are in danger of losing their jobs because your boss thinks that anyone who writes “the tenant refuse . . .” or “the landlords insists . . .” is beyond hope. You disagree. Where can you direct your interns for help in The Bedford Handbook? 5. You are in a first-semester American literature course, which covers literature from the 1850s to World War II. On two different papers, your instructor has pointed out your tendency to shift between present tense and past tense as you write. When you consult your handbook, what do you discover about the rules for using verb tenses in papers about literature?

4

Using the Glossary of Usage

Consult the Glossary of Usage to see if the italicized words are used correctly. Then edit any sentences containing incorrect usage. If a sentence is correct, write “correct” after it. Example:

BO

The pediatrician gave my daughter a injection for her allergy.

?

1. Changing attitudes toward alcohol have effected the beer industry. 2. It is mankind’s nature to think wisely and act foolishly. 3. This afternoon I plan to lie out in the sun and work on my tan. 4. Our goal this year is to grow our profits by 9 percent. 5. Most sleds are pulled by no less than two dogs and no more than ten.


5

Using the directory to MLA works cited models

Let’s say that you have written a short research essay on the origins of hip-hop music. You have cited the following five sources in your essay, using MLA documentation, and you are ready to type your list of works cited. Turn to page 530 and use the MLA directory to locate the appropriate models. Then write a correct entry for each source and arrange the entries in a properly formatted list of works cited. A book by Jeff Chang titled Can’t Stop, Won’t Stop: A History of the Hip-Hop Generation. The book was published in New York by St. Martin’s Press in 2005. An online article by Kay Randall called “Studying a Hip Hop Nation.” The article appeared on the University of Texas at Austin Web site. The title of the site is University of Texas at Austin. You accessed the site on August 13, 2009; the last update was October 9, 2008. A journal article by H. Samy Alim titled “360 Degreez of Black Art Comin at You: Sista Sonia Sanchez and the Dimensions of a Black Arts Continuum.” The article appears in the journal BMa: The Sonia Sanchez Literary Review. The article appears on pages 15–33. The volume number is 6, the issue number is 1, and the year is 2000. A sound recording entitled “Rapper’s Delight” performed by the Sugarhill Gang on the CD The Sugarhill Gang. The CD was released in 2008 by DBK Works. A magazine article accessed online through the database Expanded Academic ASAP. The article, “The Roots Redefine Hip-Hop’s Past,” was written by Kimberly Davis and published in Ebony magazine in June 2003. The article appears on pages 162–64. You found this article on April 13, 2008.

xxxi


Contents Preface for Instructors How to Use This Book

Part I The Writing Process 1 Explore and plan; then rough out a first draft. >Ê LÊ VÊ `Ê iÊ

v xxi

1 2

Assessing the writing situation Exploring your subject Drafting a working thesis Sketching a plan Drafting an introduction that includes a thesis vÊ Drafting the body }Ê Drafting a conclusion

2 13 19 21

2 Make global revisions; then revise sentences.

35

>Ê Approaching global revision in cycles LÊ Revising and editing sentences; proofreading -/1 /Ê --9Ê

VÊ Preparing a portfolio; reflecting on your writing

3 Build effective paragraphs. >Ê LÊ VÊ `Ê iÊ

Focusing on a main point Developing the main point Choosing a suitable pattern of organization Making paragraphs coherent Adjusting paragraph length

25 32 34

39 49 56 59

62 62 66 67 75 83

xxxiii

xxxiv

Contents

Part II Academic Writing 4 Writing about texts >Ê Reading actively: Annotating the text -* Ê -* Ê

LÊ VÊ `Ê iÊ

"// Ê,/ Ê "// Ê 6 ,/- /Ê

Sketching an outline Summarizing Analyzing Sample student essay: Analysis of an article -* Ê 9--Ê"ÊÊ7,// Ê/ 8/Ê

v

Sample student essay: Analysis of an advertisement

85 86 86 88 89 90 91 93 97 98

-* Ê 9--Ê"ÊÊ6-1Ê/ 8/Ê

100 101

5 Constructing reasonable arguments

104

>Ê Examining your issue’s social and intellectual contexts L Viewing your audience as a panel of jurors V Establishing credibility and stating your position ` Backing up your thesis with persuasive lines of argument i Supporting your claims with specific evidence v Anticipating objections; countering opposing arguments } Building common ground Sample argument paper -/1 /Ê --9Ê

6 Evaluating arguments > Distinguishing between reasonable and fallacious argumentative tactics

104 106 107 108 108 111 114 114 115

118 118

Contents

b Distinguishing between legitimate and unfair emotional appeals c Judging how fairly a writer handles opposing views

7 Writing in the disciplines a b c d e f

Finding commonalities Recognizing questions Understanding evidence Noting language conventions Citing sources Responding to writing assignments in the disciplines

Part III Clear Sentences 8 Prefer active verbs. a Active versus passive verbs b Active versus be verbs c Subject that names the actor

9 Balance parallel ideas. a Parallel ideas in a series b Parallel ideas presented as pairs c Repetition of function words

10 Add needed words. a b c d

In compound structures that In comparisons a, an, and the

11 Untangle mixed constructions. a Mixed grammar

125 126

129 129 130 132 133 135 135

141 142 143 144 145

147 147 148 150

151 152 153 153 155

156 156

xxxv

xxxvi

Contents

L Illogical connections V is when, is where, and reason . . . is because

12 Repair misplaced and dangling modifiers. > L V ` i

Limiting modifiers Misplaced phrases and clauses Awkwardly placed modifiers Split infinitives Dangling modifiers

13 Eliminate distracting shifts. > L V `

Point of view (person, number) Verb tense Verb mood, voice Indirect to direct questions or quotations

14 Emphasize key ideas. > L V ` i v

Coordination and subordination Choppy sentences Ineffective or excessive coordination Ineffective subordination Excessive subordination Other techniques

15 Provide some variety. > L V `

Sentence openings Sentence structures Inverted order Question or quotation

158 159

160 160 161 163 164 165

169 169 171 173 174

176 177 182 184 186 187 189

191 191 192 193 194

Part IV Word Choice

197

16 Tighten wordy sentences.

198

> Redundancies L Unnecessary repetition

198 199

Contents

V Empty or inflated phrases ` Simplifying the structure i Reducing clauses to phrases, phrases to single words

17 Choose appropriate language. > Jargon L Pretentious language, euphemisms, “doublespeak” V Obsolete and invented words ` Slang, regional expressions, nonstandard English i Levels of formality v Sexist language } Offensive language

18 Find the exact words. > L V ` i v

199 200 201

203 204 205 208 208 210 211 215

216

Connotations Specific, concrete nouns Misused words Standard idioms Clichés Figures of speech

216 217 218 219 221 222

Part V Grammatical Sentences

225

19 Repair sentence fragments.

226

> L V `

Subordinate clauses Phrases Other fragmented word groups Acceptable fragments

20 Revise run-on sentences. > Correction with coordinating conjunction L Correction with semicolon, colon, or dash

229 230 231 232

235 238 238

xxxvii

xxxviii

Contents

V Correction by separating sentences ` Correction by restructuring

21 Make subjects and verbs agree. > L V ` i v } i j

Standard subject-verb combinations Words between subject and verb Subjects joined with and Subjects joined with or, nor, either . . . or, or neither . . . nor Indefinite pronouns Collective nouns Subject following verb Subject, not subject complement who, which, and that Words with plural form, singular meaning Titles of works, company names, words mentioned as words, gerund phrases

22 Make pronouns and antecedents agree. > Singular with singular, plural with plural (indefinite pronouns, generic nouns) L Collective nouns V Antecedents joined with and ` Antecedents joined with or, nor, either . . . or, or neither . . . nor

23 Make pronoun references clear. > L V ` i

Ambiguous or remote reference Broad reference of this, that, which, and it Implied antecedents Indefinite use of they, it, and you who for persons, which or that for things

240 240

243 244 244 247 248 249 250 251 252 252 253 254

256 256 258 260 260

262 262 263 264 265 265

24 Distinguish between pronouns such as I and me. 268 > Subjective case for subjects and subject complements

268

Contents

b c d e f g

Objective case for objects Appositives Pronoun following than or as we or us before a noun Subjects and objects of infinitives Pronoun modifying a gerund

269 270 271 271 272 272

25 Distinguish between who and whom.

275

a In subordinate clauses b In questions c As subjects or objects of infinitives

275 277 278

26 Choose adjectives and adverbs with care.

280

a Adjectives to modify nouns b Adverbs to modify verbs, adjectives, and other adverbs c good and well, bad and badly d Comparatives and superlatives e Double negatives

280 282 283 284 286

27 Choose appropriate verb forms, tenses, and moods in standard English. a b c d e f g

Irregular verbs lie and lay -s (or -es) endings -ed endings Omitted verbs Verb tense Subjunctive mood

288 288 292 294 297 298 300 305

Part VI Challenges for ESL and Multilingual Writers

309

28 Verbs

310

a Appropriate form and tense

310

xxxix

Ý

Contents

L V ` i v

Base form after a modal Passive voice Negative verb forms Verbs in conditional sentences Verbs followed by gerunds or infinitives

314 317 319 320 323

29 Articles

327

> L V ` i v

327 328 331 333 334 335

Articles and other noun markers When to use the When to use a or an When not to use a or an No articles with general nouns Articles with proper nouns

30 Sentence structure > Linking verb between a subject and its complement L A subject in every sentence V Repeated nouns or pronouns with the same grammatical function ` Repeated objects, adverbs in adjective clauses i Mixed constructions with although or because v Placement of adverbs } Present participles and past participles Order of cumulative adjectives

31 Prepositions and idiomatic expressions > Prepositions showing time and place L Noun (including -ing form) after a preposition V Common adjective + preposition combinations ` Common verb + preposition combinations

337 337 338 339 340 342 343 344 346

348 348 350 351 351

Contents

Part VII Punctuation 32 The comma > L V ` i v

Independent clauses joined with and, but, etc. Introductory clauses or phrases Items in a series Coordinate adjectives Nonrestrictive elements Transitions, parenthetical expressions, absolute phrases, contrasts } Direct address, yes and no, interrogative tags, interjections he said, etc. i Dates, addresses, titles, numbers j To prevent confusion

33 Unnecessary commas > Between compound elements that are not independent clauses L After a phrase beginning an inverted sentence V Before the first or after the last item in a series ` Between cumulative adjectives, an adjective and a noun, or an adverb and an adjective i Before and after restrictive or mildly parenthetical elements v Before essential concluding adverbial elements } Between a verb and its subject or object Other misuses

34 The semicolon > Independent clauses not joined with a coordinating conjunction

353 354 354 355 358 359 361 366 368 368 369 370

372 372 373 373 374 374 375 376 376

379 379

Ý

Ý

Contents

L Independent clauses linked with a transitional expression V Series containing internal punctuation ` Misuses

35 The colon > Before a list, an appositive, or a quotation L Between independent clauses V Salutations, hours and minutes, proportions, titles and subtitles, bibliographic entries ` Misuses

36 The apostrophe > L V `

Possessive nouns Possessive indefinite pronouns Contractions Not for plural numbers, letters, abbreviations, words mentioned as words i Misuses

37 Quotation marks > L V ` i v }

Direct quotations Long quotations Quotation within a quotation Titles of works Words as words With other punctuation marks Misuses

38 End punctuation > The period L The question mark V The exclamation point

380 381 381

384 384 385

385 385

387 387 388 389 389 390

392 392 393 394 394 394 395 398

400 400 401 402

Contents

39 Other punctuation marks: the dash, parentheses, brackets, the ellipsis mark, the slash 403 > L V ` i

Dash Parentheses Brackets Ellipsis mark Slash

Part VIII Mechanics 40 Abbreviations > L V ` i

Titles with proper names Familiar abbreviations Conventional abbreviations Latin abbreviations Misuses

41 Numbers > Spelling out L Using numerals

403 404 405 406 407

409 410 410 410 411 411 412

413 413 414

42 Italics

416

> L V `

416 417 417

Titles of works Names of ships, spacecraft, and aircraft Foreign words Words mentioned as words, letters mentioned as letters, and numbers mentioned as numbers

417

43 Spelling

418

> L V `

419 423 424 426

The dictionary Words that sound alike Spelling rules Commonly misspelled words

Ý

ÝÛ

Contents

44 The hyphen > L V ` i v

Compound words Hyphenated adjectives Fractions and compound numbers With certain prefixes and suffixes To avoid ambiguity or to separate awkward double or triple letters Word division

45 Capitalization > L V ` i v }

Proper versus common nouns Titles with proper names Titles and subtitles of works First word of a sentence First word of a quoted sentence First word after a colon Abbreviations

428 428 428 429 429 430 430

432 432 434 434 434 435 435 436

Part IX Researched Writing

437

46 Conducting research

438

> Posing questions worth exploring L Mapping out a search strategy V Searching a database or consulting a print index to locate articles ` Consulting the library’s catalog to locate books i Using the Web to find a variety of sources v Using other search tools } Conducting field research

47 Evaluating sources > Determining how a source will contribute to your writing

440 442 446 451 453 458 460

462 463

Contents

b Selecting sources worth your time and attention c Selecting appropriate versions of online sources d Reading with an open mind and a critical eye e Assessing Web sources with special care

48 Managing information; avoiding plagiarism a Maintaining a working bibliography b Keeping track of source materials c Avoiding unintentional plagiarism

464 470 472 474

478 478 480 482

49 Choosing a documentation style

488

Writing MLA papers

491

50 Supporting a thesis a Forming a working thesis b Organizing ideas with a rough outline c Using sources to inform and support your argument d Drafting an introduction for your thesis e Providing organizational cues f Drafting the paper in an appropriate voice

51 Citing sources; avoiding plagiarism a Using the MLA system for citing sources b Avoiding plagiarism when quoting, summarizing, and paraphrasing sources

52 Integrating sources a Using quotations appropriately b Using signal phrases to integrate sources c Synthesizing sources

492 492 493 494 496 497 497

498 499 499

504 504 508 512

xlv

ÝÛ

Contents

53 MLA documentation style > MLA in-text citations L MLA list of works cited V MLA information notes (optional)

517 517 529 568

54 MLA manuscript format; student research process and sample paper

569

> MLA manuscript format L Highlights of one student’s research process V Sample MLA research paper

569 572 582

55 Writing about literature > L V ` i v }

Reading actively Forming an interpretation Drafting a thesis and sketching an outline Using evidence; avoiding plot summary Observing the conventions of literary papers Integrating quotations Documenting sources and avoiding plagiarism Sample literature papers

589 589 593 595 599 601 602 609 610

Writing APA papers

621

56 APA papers

621

> L V ` i v

Supporting a thesis Citing sources; avoiding plagiarism Integrating sources APA documentation style APA manuscript format Sample APA research paper

Writing Chicago papers

57 Chicago papers > Supporting a thesis

621 625 629 638 669 673

685 685 685

Contents

b c d e f

Citing sources; avoiding plagiarism Integrating sources Chicago documentation style Chicago manuscript format Sample Chicago research paper

Part X Document Design

689 693 699 713 717

727

58 Become familiar with the principles of document design.

728

Format options Headings Lists Visuals

728 731 732 733

a b c d

59 Use standard academic formatting. 60 Use standard business formatting. a Business letters SAMPLE BUSINESS LETTER

b Résumés and cover letters SAMPLE RÉSUMÉ

c Memos SAMPLE BUSINESS MEMO

d E-mail messages

738 738 738 741 742 743 744 745 746

Part XI Grammar Basics

747

61 Parts of speech

748

a b c d e

Nouns Pronouns Verbs Adjectives Adverbs

748 749 752 754 755

xlvii

ÝÛ

Contents

v Prepositions } Conjunctions Interjections

62 Sentence patterns > Subjects L Verbs, objects, and complements V Pattern variations

63 Subordinate word groups > L V ` i

Prepositional phrases Verbal phrases Appositive phrases Absolute phrases Subordinate clauses

64 Sentence types > Sentence structures L Sentence purposes Glossary of Usage Answers to Tutorials and Lettered Exercises Index

757 758 759

763 763 766 771

773 773 776 779 780 780

785 785 787 789 804 Index–1

Part I

The Writing Process 1 Explore and plan; then rough out a first draft. 2 2 Make global revisions; then revise sentences. 35 Ê UÊ Student essay 3 Build effective paragraphs. 62

1

2

1

plan

Exploring, planning, drafting

Writing is not a matter of recording already developed thoughts but a process of figuring out what you think. Since it’s not possible to think about everything all at once, most experienced writers handle a piece of writing in stages. You will generally move from planning to drafting to revising, but be prepared to return to earlier stages as your ideas develop.

1

Explore and plan; then rough out a first draft.

Before attempting a first draft, spend some time generating ideas. Mull over your subject while listening to music or driving to work, jot down inspirations, and explore your insights with a willing listener. Ask yourself questions: What do you find puzzling, striking, or interesting about your subject? What would you like to know more about? At this stage, you should be collecting information and experimenting with ways of focusing and organizing it to reach your readers.

1a Assess the writing situation. Begin by taking a look at your writing situation. The key elements of a writing situation include the following: UÊ ÞÕÀÊÃÕLiVÌ UÊ ÌiÊÃÕÀViÃÊvÊvÀ>ÌÊ>Û>>LiÊÌÊÞÕ UÊ ÞÕÀÊ«ÕÀ«Ãi UÊ ÞÕÀÊ>ÕìVi UÊ >ÞÊVÃÌÀ>ÌÃÊi}Ì]Ê`VÕiÌÊìÃ}]Êì>ìÃ® It is likely that you will make final decisions about all of these matters later in the writing process — after a first draft, for example. Nevertheless, you can save yourself time by thinking about as many of them as possible in advance. For a quick checklist, see the chart on page 3.

writing situation

plan

1a

What counts as good writing varies from culture to culture and even among groups within cultures. In some situations, you will need to become familiar with the writing styles — such as direct or indirect, personal or impersonal, plain or embellished — that are valued by the culture or discipline for which you are writing.

Checklist for assessing the writing situation Subject U Has the subject (or a range of possible subjects) been given to you, or are you free to choose your own? U What interests you about your subject? What questions would you like to explore? U Why is your subject worth writing about? How might readers benefit from reading about it? U Do you need to narrow your subject to a more specific topic (because of length restrictions, for instance)?

Sources of information U Where will your information come from: Reading? Personal experience? Observation? Interviews? Questionnaires? U What documentation style is required: MLA? APA? Chicago?

Purpose and audience U Why are you writing: To inform readers? To persuade them? To entertain them? To call them to action? Some combination of these? U Who are your readers? How well informed are they about the subject? What do you want them to learn? U How interested and attentive are they likely to be? Will they resist any of your ideas? U What is your relationship to your readers: Student to instructor? Employee to supervisor? Citizen to citizen? Expert to novice?

6

3

4

1a

plan


Checklist for assessing the writing situation, continued Length and document design U Do you have any length specifications? If not, what length seems appropriate, given your subject, purpose, and audience? U Is a particular document format required? If so, do you have guidelines to follow or examples to consult?

Reviewers and deadlines U Who will be reviewing your draft in progress: Your instructor? A writing center tutor? Your classmates? A family member? U What are your deadlines? How much time will you need to allow for the various stages of writing, including proofreading and printing the final draft?

Subject Frequently your subject will be given to you. In a psychology class, for example, you might be asked to explain Bruno Bettelheim’s Freudian analysis of fairy tales. In a composition course, assignments often ask you to respond to readings. In the business world, your assignment might be to draft a quarterly sales report. When you are free to choose your own subject, it’s a good idea to focus on something you are genuinely curious about. If you are studying television, radio, and the Internet in a communication course, for example, Making the most of your handbook you might ask yourself which of these Effective research writers often subjects interests you most. Perhaps you start by asking a question. want to learn more about the role stream0 Posing questions for research: ing video can play in activism and social 46a change. Look through your readings and class notes to see if you can identify questions you’d like to explore further in an essay. Make sure that you can reasonably investigate your subject in the space you have. If you are limited to a few pages, for

ÜÀÌ}ÊÃÌÕ>ÌÊ UÊ ÃÕLiVÌÊ UÊ vVÕÃÊ UÊ narrowing the subject

plan

1a

Ways to narrow a subject to a topic Subdividing your subject One way to subdivide a subject is to ask questions sparked by reading or talking to your classmates. If you are writing about teen pregnancy, for example, you might wonder why your city and a neighboring city have different rates of teen pregnancy. This question would give you a manageable topic for a short paper.

Restricting your purpose Often you can restrict your purpose. For example, if your subject is preventing teen pregnancy, you might at first hope to call readers to action. Upon further reflection, you might realize that this goal is more than you could hope to accomplish, given your word limit. By adopting a more limited purpose — to show that an experimental health curriculum for sixth graders results in lower rates of teen pregnancy — you would have a manageable topic.

Restricting your audience Consider writing for a particular audience. For example, instead of writing for a general audience on a broad subject such as teen pregnancy, you might address a group with a special interest in the subject: teens, parents, educators, or politicians.

Considering the information available to you Look at the information you have collected. If you have gathered a great deal of information on one aspect of your subject (for example, counseling programs for pregnant teens) and less information on other aspects (such as birth control education), you may have found your topic.

example, you could not do justice to a subject as broad as “videos as agents of social change.” You could, however, focus on one aspect of the subject — perhaps experts’ contradictory claims about the effectiveness of “narrowcasting,” or creating video content for small, specific audiences. The chart on this page

5

6

1a

plan


suggests ways to narrow a subject to a manageable topic for a paper. Whether or not you choose your own subject, it’s important to be aware of the expectations of each writing situation. The chart on page 9 suggests ways to interpret assignments.

Sources of information Where will your facts, details, and examples come from? Can you develop your topic from personal experience alone, or will you need to search for relevant information through reading, observation, interviews, or questionnaires? Reading Reading is an important way to deepen your understanding of a topic and expand your perspective. Reading will be your primary source of information for many college >ÃÃ}iÌÃ]Ê ÜVÊ ÜÊ }iiÀ>ÞÊ LiÊ vÊ ÌÜÊ `Ã\Ê £®Ê >>lytical essays that call for a close reading of one book, essay, ÌiÀ>ÀÞÊÜÀ]ÊÀÊÛÃÕ>Ê>`ÊÓ®ÊÀiÃi>ÀVÊ>ÃÃ}iÌÃÊÌ>ÌÊ>ÃÊ you to find and consult a variety of sources on a topic. For an analytical essay, you will select details from the work, not to inform readers but to support an interpretation. You can often assume that your readers are Making the most of your handbook familiar with the work and have a copy of Academic writing often requires it on hand, but be sure to provide enough that you read critically and cite context so that someone who doesn’t your sources. know the work well can still follow your 0 Guidelines for active reading: page 87 interpretation. When you quote from the 0 Analyzing an essay: 4d work, page references are usually sufficient. When in doubt about the need for 0 Interpreting literature: 55b documentation, consult your instructor. 0 Quoting, paraphrasing, and summarizing sources: 48c For a research paper, you cannot assume that your readers are familiar with your sources. Therefore, you must formally document all quoted, summarized, or paraphrased material. Personal experience If your interest in a subject stems from your personal experience, you will want to ask what it is about

ÜÀÌ}ÊÃÌÕ>ÌÊ UÊ iÝ«À}Ê UÊ w`}ÊvÀ>ÌÊ UÊ «ÕÀ«Ãi

plan

1a

your experience that would interest your audience and why. For example, if you volunteered at a homeless shelter, you might have spent some time talking to homeless children and learned about their needs. Perhaps you can use your experience to broaden your readers’ understanding of the issues, to persuade an organization to fund an after-school program for homeless children, or to propose changes in legislation. Observation Observation is an excellent means of collecting information about a wide range of subjects, such as gender relationships on a popular television program, the clichéd language of sports announcers, or the appeal of a local art museum. For such subjects, do not rely on your memory alone; your information will be fresher and more detailed if you actively collect it, with a notebook, laptop, or tape recorder in hand. Interviews and questionnaires Interviews and questionnaires can supply detailed and interesting information on many subjects. A nursing student interested in the care of terminally ill patients might interview hospice nurses; a political science major might speak with a local judge about alternative sentencing for first offenders; a future teacher might conduct a survey on the use of computers in local elementary schools. It is a good idea to record interviews to preserve any lively quotations that you might want to weave into your essay. Circulating questionnaires by e-mail or on a Web site will facilitate responses. Keep questions simple and specify a deadline ÌÊiÃÕÀiÊÌ>ÌÊÞÕÊ}iÌÊ>ÊÀi>Ã>LiÊÕLiÀÊvÊÀi«iÃ°Ê-iiÊ>ÃÊ {È}°®

Purpose Your purpose will often be dictated by your writing situation. Perhaps you have been asked to draft a proposal requesting funding for a student organization, to report the results of a psychology experiment, or to write about the conÌÀÛiÀÃÞÊÃÕÀÀÕ`}Ê}iiÌV>ÞÊ`wi`Ê®Êv`ÃÊvÀÊÌi

7

8

1a

plan


school newspaper. Even though your overall purpose is fairly obvious in such situations, a closer look at the assignment can help you make a variety of necessary decisions. How detailed should the proposal be? How technical does your psychology professor expect your report to be? Do you want to inform stuìÌÃÊ>LÕÌÊÌiÊÊv`ÊVÌÀÛiÀÃÞÊÀÊV>}iÊÌiÀÊ>ÌÌÌÕìÃÊ toward it? In many writing situations, part of your challenge will be discovering a purpose. Asking yourself why readers should care about what you are saying can help you decide what your purpose might be. Perhaps your subject is magnet schools — schools that draw students from different neighborhoods because of features such as advanced science classes or a concentration on the arts. If you have discussed magnet schools in class, a description of how these schools work probably will not interest you or your readers. But maybe you have discovered that your county’s magnet schools are not promoting diversity as had been planned and you want to call your readers to action. Or maybe you are interested in comparing student performance at magnet schools and traditional schools. Although no precise guidelines will lead you to a purpose, you can begin by asking yourself which one or more of the following aims you hope to accomplish. PURPOSES FOR WRITING

to inform to persuade to entertain to call readers to action to change attitudes to analyze to argue

to evaluate to recommend to request to propose to provoke thought to express feelings to summarize

Writers often misjudge their own purposes, summarizing when they should be analyzing, or expressing feelings about problems instead of proposing solutions. Before beginning any writing task, pause to ask, “Why am I communicating with my readers?” This question will lead you to another important question: “Just who are my readers?”

ÜÀÌ}ÊÃÌÕ>ÌÊ UÊ «ÕÀ«ÃiÊ UÊ understanding assignments

plan

1a

Understanding an assignment Determining the purpose of an assignment Usually the wording of an assignment will suggest its purpose. You might be expected to do one or more of the following in a college writing assignment: U summarize information from textbooks, lectures, or research (See 4c.) U analyze ideas and concepts (See 4d.) U take a position on a topic and defend it with evidence (See 5.) U synthesize (combine ideas from) several sources and create an original argument (See 52c and 56c.)

Understanding how to answer an assignment’s question Many assignments will ask you to answer a how or why question. Such questions cannot be answered using only facts; instead, you will need to take a position. For example, the question “What are the survival rates for leukemia patients?” can be answered by reporting facts. The question “Why are the survival rates for leukemia patients in one state lower than those in a neighboring state?” must be answered with both facts and interpretation. If a list of prompts appears in the assignment, be careful — instructors rarely expect you to answer all the questions in order. Look instead for topics, themes, or ideas that will help you ask your own questions.

Recognizing implied questions When you are asked to discuss, analyze, agree or disagree with, or consider a topic, your instructor will often expect you to answer a how or why question. Discuss the effects of the No Child Left Behind Act on special education programs.

=

How has the No Child Left Behind Act affected special education programs?

Consider the recent rise of attention deficit hyperactivity disorder diagnoses.

=

Why are diagnoses of attention deficit hyperactivity disorder rising?

9

10

1a

plan


Audience Audience analysis can often lead you to an effective strategy for reaching your readers. A writer whose purpose was to persuade teenagers not to smoke began by making some observaÌÃÊ>LÕÌÊiÀÊ>ÕìViÊÃiiÊÌiÊLÌÌÊvÊÌÃÊ«>}i®° This analysis led the writer to focus on the social aspects of smoking rather than on the health risks. Her audience analysis also warned her against adopting a preachy tone that her readers might find offensive. Instead of lecturing, she decided to draw examples from her own experience as a smoker: burning holes in her best sweater, driving in zero-degree weather late at night to buy cigarettes, and so on. The result was an essay that reached its readers instead of alienating them. Of course, in some writing situations the audience will not be neatly defined for you. Nevertheless, many of the choices you make as you write will tell readers who you think they are ÛViÃÊÀÊiÝ«iÀÌÃ]ÊvÀÊiÝ>«i®]ÊÃÊÌÊÃÊLiÃÌÊÌÊLiÊVÃÃÌiÌ° For help with audience analysis, see the chart on page 3. AUDIENCE ANALYSIS

ÜÀÌ}ÊÃÌÕ>ÌÊ UÊ >ÕìViÊ UÊ Ài>ìÀÃ

plan

1a

Academic audiences In the academic world, considerations of audience can be more complex than they seem at first. Your instructor will read your essay, of course, but most instructors play multiple roles while reading. Their first and most obvious roles are as coach and judge; less obvious is their role as an intelligent and objective reader, the kind of person who might reasonably be informed, convinced, entertained, or called to action by what you have to say. Some instructors specify an audience, such as a hypothetical supervisor, readers of a local newspaper, or peers in a particular field. Other instructors expect you to imagine an audience appropriate to your purpose and your subject. Still others prefer that you write for a general audience of educated readers — nonspecialists who can be expected to read with an intelligent, critical eye. Business audiences Writers in the business world often find themselves writing for multiple audiences. A letter to a client, for instance, might be distributed to sales representatives as well. Readers of a report might include persons with and without technical expertise or readers who want details and those who prefer a quick overview. To satisfy the demands of multiple audiences, business writers have developed a variety of strategies: attaching cover letters to detailed reports, adding boldface headings, placing summaries in the margin, and so on. Public audiences Writers in communities often write for a specific audience — the local school superintendent, a legislative representative, fellow members of a social group, readers of a local paper. With public writing, it is more likely that you are familiar with the views your readers hold and the assumptions they make, so you may be better able to judge how to engage those readers. If you are writing to a group of other parents to share ideas for lowering school bus transportation costs, for instance, you may have a good sense of whether to lead with a logical analysis of other school-related fees or with a fiery criticism of key decision makers.

11

12

1a

plan


Length and document design Writers seldom have complete control over length. Journalists usually write within strict word limits set by their editors, businesspeople routinely aim for conciseness, and most college assignments specify an approximate length. Your writing situation may also require certain document designs. Specific formats are used in business for letters, memos, and reports. In the academic world, you may need to learn precise conventions for lab reports, critiques, research papers, and so on. For most undergraduate essays, a standard vÀ>ÌÊÃÊ>VVi«Ì>LiÊÃiiÊx®° In some writing situations, you will be free to create your own design, complete with headings, displayed lists, and perhaps visuals such as charts and graphs. For a discussion of the «ÀV«iÃÊvÊ`VÕiÌÊìÃ}]ÊÃiiÊxn°Ê

Reviewers and deadlines Professional and business writers rarely work alone. They work with reviewers, often called editors, who offer advice throughout the writing process. In colMaking the most of your handbook lege classes, too, the use of reviewers Peer review can benefit student is common. Some instructors play the writers at any stage of the writing role of reviewer for you; others may process. ask you to visit your college’s writing 0 Guidelines for peer review: page 38 center. Still others schedule peer review sessions in class or online. Such sessions give you a chance to hear what other students think about your draft in progress — and to play the role of reviewer yourself. Deadlines are a key element of any writing situation. They help you plan your time and map out what you can accomplish in that time. For complex writing projects, such as research papers, you’ll need to plan your time carefully. By working backward from the final deadline, you can create a schedule of target dates for completing parts of the process. -iiÊ«°Ê{ÎÊvÀÊ>ÊiÝ>«i°®Ê

i}ÌÊ UÊ vÀ>ÌÊ UÊ ÀiÛiÜiÀÃÊ UÊ ì>ìÃÊ UÊ iÝ«À}ÊÃÕLiVÌÃÊ

plan

1b

EXERCISE 1–1 Narrow five of the following subjects into topics that would be manageable for an essay of two to five pages. Ê £°Ê Ê Ó°Ê 3. 4. Ê x°Ê 6. 7. Ê n°Ê 9. £ä°Ê

iÃÌVÊÛiViÊ>`ÊÌiÊVÕÀÌÃÊ *iÀvÀ}Ê>ÃÊ>ÊÕÃV>Ê Treatments for mental illness An experience with racism or sexism

iÊ«iÃÊÊÌiÊV>ÃÃÀÊ Images of women in video games Mandatory drug testing in the workplace "Þ«VÊÃÜiÀÃÊ Presidential campaign funding /iÊwÃÊvÊÌiÊ iÊLÀÌiÀÃÊ

EXERCISE 1–2 Suggest a purpose and an audience for five of the following subjects. Ê £°Ê Ê Ó°Ê Ê Î°Ê 4. Ê x°Ê 6. 7. Ê n°Ê 9. £ä°Ê

À>«VÊÛiÃÊ>ÃÊÌiÀ>ÌÕÀi iiÌVÊ`wV>ÌÊvÊV>ÃÊVÀ«Êv`Ã ÛiÀiÌÊÕÃ}ÊvÀÊÌ>ÀÞÊÛiÌiÀ>Ã The future of online advertising 7À}ÊÜÌÊÃ«iV>Êii`ÃÊV`Ài The challenges facing single parents Obesity prevention and treatment ÀÜ}ÊÕ«ÊÊ>Ê>À}iÊv>ÞÊ The influence of African art on Picasso ÞLÀ`ÊV>ÀÃÊ

hackerhandbooks.com/bedhandbook > Writing exercises > E-ex 1–4

1b Experiment with ways to explore your subject. Instead of just plunging into a first draft, experiment with one or more techniques for exploring your subject, perhaps one of these: UÊ Ì>}Ê>`ÊÃÌi} UÊ >Ì>Ì}ÊÌiÝÌÃÊ>`ÊÌ>}ÊÌiÃ UÊ ÃÌ} UÊ VÕÃÌiÀ} UÊ vÀiiÜÀÌ}

13

14

1b

plan


UÊ >Ã}ÊµÕiÃÌÃ UÊ ii«}Ê>ÊÕÀ> UÊ L}}}Êii«}Ê>Ê7iL}® Whatever technique you turn to, the goal is the same: to generate ideas that will lead you to a question, a problem, or an issue that you want to explore further. At this early stage of the writing process, don’t censor yourself. Sometimes an idea that initially seems trivial or far-fetched will actually turn out to be worthwhile.

Talking and listening Because writing is a process of figuring out what you think about a subject, it can be useful to try out your ideas on other people. Conversation can deepen and refine your ideas before you even begin to set them down on paper. By talking and listening to others, you can also discover what they find interesting, what they are curious about, and where they disagree with you. If you are planning to advance an argument, you can try it out on listeners with other points of view. Many writers begin a writing project by brainstorming ideas in a group, debating a point with friends, or chatting with an instructor. Others turn to themselves for company — by talking into a tape recorder. Some writers exchange ideas by sending e-mail or instant messages or by posting to discussion boards or blogs. You may be encouraged to share ideas with your classmates and instructor in an online workshop. One advantage of engaging in such discussions is that while you are “talking” you are actually writing.

Annotating texts and taking notes When you write about a text, either a written work or a visual, one of the best ways to explore ideas is to mark up the ÜÀÊpÊÊÌiÊ«>}iÃÊvÊ>Ê«ÀÌÊÜÀÊvÊÞÕÊÜÊ>ÊV«Þ®ÊÀÊÊ a photocopy or printout. Annotating a text encourages you to look at it more carefully — to underline key concepts, to note

Ì>}Ê UÊ ÃÌi}Ê UÊ >Ì>Ì}Ê UÊ Ì>}ÊÌiÃÊ UÊ ÃÌ}Ê

plan

1b

15

contradictions in an argument, to raise questions for investigation. Here, for example, is a paragraph from an essay on medical ethics as one student annotated it. Breakthroughs in genetics present us with a promise and a predicament. The promise is that we may soon be able to treat and prevent a host of debilitating diseases. The predicament is that our newfound genetic knowledge may also enable us to manipulate our own nature — to enhance our muscles, memories, and moods; to choose the sex, height, and other genetic traits of our children; to make ourselves “better than well.” When science moves faster than moral understanding, as it does today, *TFWFSZPOF men and women struggle to articulate their unease. SFBMMZVOFBTZ In liberal societies they reach first for the language *TTPNFUIJOH of autonomy, fairness, and individual rights. But BCSFBL this part of our moral vocabulary is ill equipped to UISPVHIJG JUDSFBUFTB address the hardest questions posed by genetic QSFEJDBNFOU engineering. The genomic revolution has induced a kind of moral vertigo. — Michael Sandel, “The Case against Perfection”

8IBUCSFBL UISPVHIT %PBMMCSFBL UISPVHIT IBWFUIF TBNFDPOTF RVFODFT

4UFNDFMM SFTFBSDI

8IBUEPFTIF NFBOCZ¦NPSBM VOEFSTUBOEJOH§

8IJDI RVFTUJPOT )F EPFTOUTFFNUP CFUBLJOHTJEFT

After reading and annotating Michael Sandel’s entire article, the student looked through his annotations for patterns. He noticed that several of his annotaMaking the most of your handbook tions pointed to the larger question of Writing about a text or a visual is whether a scientific breakthrough should a common college assignment. be viewed in terms of its moral conse0 Writing about texts: 4 quences. He decided to reread the article, 0 Advice on taking notes: 48c taking detailed notes with this question in mind.

Listing Listing ideas — a technique sometimes known as brainstorming — is a good way to figure out what you know and what questions you have. Here is a list one student writer jotted down for an essay about funding for college athletics:

16

1b

plan


UÊ ÌL>ÊÀiViÛiÃÊÌiÊÃÌÊvÕ`}ÊvÊ>ÞÊÃ«ÀÌ° UÊ Õ`}ÊViÃÊvÀÊÌViÌÊÃ>iÃ]ÊvÕ`À>ÃiÀÃ]Ê>ÕÊ contributions. UÊ }}iÃÌÊÜi½ÃÊÃ«ÀÌÊÃÊÃVViÀ° UÊ 7i½ÃÊÃVViÀÊÌi>ÊÃÊÞÊÌiÊÞi>ÀÃÊ`ÆÊvÌL>ÊÌi>ÊÃÊ fifty years old. UÊ -VViÀÊ}>iÃÊ`½ÌÊ`À>ÜÊ>ÃÊ>ÞÊv>Ã° UÊ -Õ`ÊvÕ`}ÊLiÊiµÕ>ÊvÀÊ>ÊÌi>Ã¶Ê UÊ Ê>ÕÊ>ÛiÊÌiÊÀ}ÌÊÌÊvÕ`ÊÜ>ÌiÛiÀÊÌiÞÊÜ>Ì¶

The ideas and questions appear here in the order in which they first occurred to the writer. Later she rearranged them, grouped them under general categories, deleted some, and added others. These initial thoughts led the writer to questions that helped her narrow her topic. In other words, she treated her early list as a source of ideas and a springboard to new ideas, not as an outline.

Clustering Unlike listing, clustering highlights relationships among ideas. To cluster ideas, write your topic in the center of a sheet of paper, draw a circle around it, and surround the circle with related ideas connected to it with lines. If some of the satellite ideas lead to more specific clusters, write them down as well. /iÊÜÀÌiÀÊvÊÌiÊ`>}À>ÊÊ«>}iÊ£ÇÊÜ>ÃÊiÝ«À}Êì>ÃÊvÀÊ an essay on obesity in children.

Freewriting In its purest form, freewriting is simply nonstop writing. You set aside ten minutes or so and write whatever comes to mind, without pausing to think about word choice, spelling, or even meaning. If you get stuck, you can write about being stuck, but you should keep your fingers moving. If nothing much happens, you have lost only ten minutes. It’s more likely, though, that something interesting will emerge — perhaps an eloquent sentence, an honest expression of feeling, or an idea worth further investigation. Freewriting also lets you

iÝ«À}Ê UÊ ÃÌ}Ê UÊ VÕÃÌiÀ}Ê UÊ vÀiiÜÀÌ}Ê UÊ >Ã}ÊµÕiÃÌÃ

plan

1b

CLUSTER DIAGRAM

diabetes health problems later in life

heart attacks

"product placement" of foods in popular movies, TV shows

diet

obesity in children

TV ads for unhealthy foods

genetics

popular fast foods available in school vending machines

exercise funding for athletic programs

time spent using computer or watching TV instead of being outside

ask questions without feeling that you have to answer them. Sometimes a question that comes to mind at this stage will point you in an unexpected direction. To explore ideas on a particular topic, consider using a technique known as focused freewriting. Again, you write quickly and freely, but this time you focus on a subject and pay attention to the connections among your ideas.

Asking questions When gathering material for a story, journalists routinely ask themselves Who? What? When? Where? Why? and How? In addition to helping journalists get started, these questions ensure that they will not overlook an important fact. Whenever you are writing about events, whether current or historical, asking questions is one way to get started. One ÃÌÕìÌ]Ê ÜÃiÊ Ì«VÊ Ü>ÃÊ ÌiÊ i}>ÌÛiÊ Ài>VÌÊ Ê ££xÊ ÌÊ

17

18

1b

plan


°Ê7°ÊÀvwÌ½ÃÊÃiÌÊwÊThe Birth of a Nation, began exploring her topic with this set of questions: UÊ UÊ UÊ UÊ UÊ UÊ

Who objected to the film? What were the objections? When were protests first voiced? Where were protests most strongly expressed? Why did protesters object to the film? How did protesters make their views known?

As often happens, the answers to these questions led to another question the writer wanted to explore. After she discovered that protesters objected to the film’s racist portrayal of African Americans, she wondered whether their protests had changed attitudes. This question prompted an interesting topic for a paper: Did the film’s stereotypes lead to positive, if unintended, consequences? In the academic world, scholars Making the most of your handbook often generate ideas by posing quesEffective college writers begin by tions related to a specific discipline: one asking questions. set of questions for analyzing literature, 0 Asking questions in academic another for evaluating experiments in disciplines: 7b social psychology, still another for reporting field experiences in criminal justice. If you are writing in a particular discipline, try to find out which questions its scholars typically explore.

Keeping a journal A journal is a collection of informal, exploratory, sometimes experimental writing. In a journal, often meant for your eyes only, you can take risks. In one entry, for example, you might freewrite. In another, you might pose questions, whether or not you have the answers. You might comment on an interesting idea from one of your classes or keep a list of questions that occur to you while reading. You might imagine a conversation between yourself and your readers or stage a debate to understand positions counter to your own. A journal is also an excellent place to play around with language for the sheer fun of it.

iÝ«À}Ê UÊ >Ã}ÊµÕiÃÌÃÊ UÊ ÕÀ>Ê UÊ L}Ê UÊ ÜÀ}ÊÌiÃÃÊ UÊ >Êì>

plan

1c

Keeping a journal can be an enriching experience in its own right, since it allows you to explore issues without worrying about what someone else thinks. A journal can also serve as a sourcebook of ideas to draw on in future essays.

Blogging (keeping a Weblog) ÌÕ}Ê >Ê L}Ê 7iL}®Ê ÃÊ >Ê ÌÞ«iÊ vÊ ÕÀ>]Ê ÌÊ ÃÊ >Ê «ÕLVÊ writing space rather than a private one. In a blog, you can express opinions, release frustrations, make observations, recap an event, have fun with language, or do some combination of these. You can work through an idea for a paper by blogging about it in different ways or from different angles. One post might be your frustrated comments about the lack of parking for commuter students at your school. Maybe the next post shares a compelling statistic about competition for parking spaces at campuses nationwide. You can continue thinking about the topic as you respond to comments from other readers about alternatives to driving to campus.

1c Draft a working thesis. As you explore your topic and identify questions to investigate, you will begin to see possible ways to focus your material. At this point, try to settle on a tentative central idea. The more complex your topic, the more your focus will change as your drafts evolve. For many types of writing, you will be able to assert your central idea in a sentence or two. Such a statement, which ordinarily appears in the opening paragraph of your finished essay, is called a thesis statement. A thesis is often one or more of the following: UÊ ÌiÊ>ÃÜiÀÊÌÊ>ÊµÕiÃÌÊÞÕÊ>ÛiÊ«Ãi` UÊ ÌiÊÀiÃÕÌÊvÊ>Ê«ÀLiÊÞÕÊ>ÛiÊìÌwi` UÊ >ÊÃÌ>ÌiiÌÊÌ>ÌÊÌ>iÃÊ>Ê«ÃÌÊÊ>ÊìL>Ì>LiÊÌ«V A tentative, or working, thesis will help you organize your draft. Don’t worry about the exact wording because your main point may change as you refine your efforts. Here, for

19

20

1c

plan


example, are one student’s efforts to pose a question and draft a thesis statement for an essay in his film course. QUESTION

In Rebel without a Cause, how does the filmmaker show that Jim Stark becomes alienated from his family and friends? WORKING THESIS

In Rebel without a Cause, Jim Stark, the main character, is often seen literally on the edge of physical danger — walking too close to a swimming pool, leaning over an observation deck, and driving his car toward a cliff.

The working thesis offers a useful place to start writing, but it doesn’t give readers a reason to continue reading. The sentence includes an observation but no indication of why that observation matters. The student’s final thesis is more engaging, reflects an evolution of his ideas, and is a better response to his question. FINAL THESIS

The scenes in which Jim Stark is on the edge of physical danger — walking too close to a swimming pool, leaning over an observation deck, and driving his car toward a cliff — suggest that he is becoming more and more agitated by the constraints of family and society.

Here, another student identifies and responds to a problem in a thesis statement for an argument paper in her composition course. PROBLEM

Americans who earn average incomes cannot run effective national political campaigns. WORKING THESIS

Congress should pass legislation that would make it possible for Americans who are not wealthy to be viable candidates in national political campaigns.

The student has roughed out an idea for how to solve the problem — enacting federal legislation — but her working thesis

ÜÀ}ÊÌiÃÃÊ UÊ >Êì>Ê UÊ ÌiÃÌ}Ê>ÊÌiÃÃÊ UÊ ÕÌ}

plan

1d

Testing a working thesis Once you have come up with a working thesis, you can use the following questions to refine it. U Does the thesis require an essay’s worth of development? Or will you run out of points too quickly? U Is the thesis too obvious? If you cannot come up with interpretations that oppose your own, consider revising your thesis. U Can you support your thesis with the evidence available? U Can you explain why readers will want to read an essay with this thesis? Can you respond when a reader asks “So what?” or “Why does it matter?”

isn’t specific enough. The student’s final thesis offers a specific solution to the problem she identifies and helps her focus her draft. FINAL THESIS

By restricting campaign spending, Congress could enable candidates without personal wealth to compete more effectively in national elections.

Keep in mind as you draft your working thesis that a successful thesis is a promise to the reader; it points both the writer and the reader in a definite direction. For a more deÌ>i`Ê`ÃVÕÃÃÊvÊÌiÊÌiÃÃ]ÊÃiiÊ£i°

1d Sketch a plan. Once you have generated some ideas and formulated a working thesis, you might want to sketch an informal outline to see how you will support your thesis and to figure out a tentative structure for your ideas. Informal outlines can take many forms. Perhaps the most common is simply the thesis followed by a list of major ideas.

21

22

1d

plan


Working thesis: Television advertising should be regulated to help prevent childhood obesity. UÊ `ÀiÊÜ>ÌVÊÀiÊÌiiÛÃÊÌ>ÊiÛiÀ° UÊ ->VÃÊ>ÀiÌi`ÊÌÊV`ÀiÊ>ÀiÊvÌiÊÕi>ÌÞÊ>`Ê fattening. UÊ ``ÊLiÃÌÞÊV>ÊV>ÕÃiÊ`>LiÌiÃÊ>`ÊÌiÀÊ«ÀLiÃ° UÊ Ê i>}ÊÜÌÊÌiÃiÊ«ÀLiÃÊVÃÌÃÊÌ>Ý«>ÞiÀÃÊLÃÊvÊ`lars. UÊ /iÀivÀi]ÊÌiÃiÊ>`ÃÊ>ÀiÊ>VÌÕ>ÞÊVÃÌ}ÊÌiÊ«ÕLVÊiÞ°Ê UÊ ÕÌÊvÊ>`ÛiÀÌÃ}ÊÃÊvÀiiÊÃ«iiV]Ê`ÊÜiÊ>ÛiÊÌiÊÀ}ÌÊÌÊ regulate it? UÊ Ê7iÊÀi}Õ>ÌiÊ>VÊ>`ÊV}>ÀiÌÌiÊ>`ÃÊÊÌiiÛÃ]ÊÃÊÜÞÊ not advertisements for soda and junk food?

Ê vÊÞÕÊLi}>ÊLÞÊÌÌ}Ê`ÜÊ>ÊÃÌÊvÊì>ÃÊÃiiÊ«°Ê£x®]ÊÞÕÊV>Ê turn the list into a rough outline by crossing out some ideas, adding others, and putting the ideas in a logical order.

Planning with headings When writing a long college paper or a business document, consider using headings to guide your planning and to help your readers follow the organization of your Making the most of your handbook final draft. While planning, you can inHeadings can help writers plan and sert your working thesis, experiment with readers understand a document. possible headings, and type chunks of text 0 Using headings: 58b beneath each heading. You may need to 0 Papers organized with headings: try grouping your ideas in a few different 56f, 57f ways to suit your purpose and audience.

When to use a formal outline Early in the writing process, rough outlines have certain advantages: They can be produced quickly, they are obviously tentative, and they can be revised easily. However, a formal outline may be useful later in the writing process, after you have written a rough draft, especially if your topic is complex. A formal outline helps you see whether the parts of your essay work together and whether your essay’s structure is

ÕÌ}Ê UÊ i>`}ÃÊ UÊ vÀ>ÊÕÌi

plan

1d

logical. A formal outline will often make clear which parts of your draft should be rearranged and which parts don’t fit at all. The following formal outline brought order to the research «>«iÀÊ Ê x{V]Ê Ê ÌiÀiÌÊ ÃÕÀÛi>ViÊ Ê ÌiÊ ÜÀ«>Vi°Ê /iÊ student’s thesis is an important part of the outline. Everything else in the outline supports it, either directly or indirectly. Thesis: Although companies often have legitimate concerns that lead them to monitor employees’ Internet usage—from expensive security breaches to reduced productivity—the benefits of electronic surveillance are outweighed by its costs to employees’ privacy and autonomy. I.

Although employers have always monitored employees, electronic surveillance is more efficient. A. Employers can gather data in large quantities. B. Electronic surveillance can be continuous. C. Electronic surveillance can be conducted secretly, with keystroke logging programs. II. Some experts argue that employers have legitimate reasons to monitor employees’ Internet usage. A. Unmonitored employees could accidentally breach security. B. Companies are legally accountable for the online actions of employees. III. Despite valid concerns, employers should value employee morale and autonomy and avoid creating an atmosphere of distrust. A. Setting the boundaries for employee autonomy is difficult in the wired workplace. 1. Using the Internet is the most popular way of wasting time at work. 2. Employers can’t easily determine if employees are working or surfing the Web. B. Surveillance can create resentment among employees. 1. Web surfing can relieve stress, and restricting it can generate tension between managers and workers. 2. Enforcing Internet usage can seem arbitrary.

23

24

1d

draft

IV.


Surveillance may not increase employee productivity, and trust may benefit productivity. A. A company shouldn’t care how many hours salaried employees work as long as they get the job done. B. Casual Internet use can actually benefit companies. 1. The Internet may spark business ideas. 2. The Internet may suggest ideas about how to operate more efficiently. Employees’ rights to privacy are not well defined by the law. A. Few federal guidelines on electronic surveillance exist. B. Employers and employees are negotiating the boundaries without legal guidance. C. As technological capabilities increase, there will be an increased need to define boundaries.

V.

Guidelines for constructing an outline 1. Put the thesis at the top. 2. Make items at the same level parallel grammatically (see section 9). 3. Use sentences unless phrases are clear. 4. Use the conventional system of numbers, letters, and indents: I. A. B. 1. 2. a. b. II. A. B. 1. 2. a. b.

6

ÕÌ}Ê UÊ vÀ>ÊÕÌiÊ UÊ ÌÀ`ÕVÌÊ UÊ ÌiÃÃ

draft

1e

5. Always use at least two subdivisions for a category, since nothing can be divided into fewer than two parts. 6. Limit the number of major sections in the outline; if the list of roman numerals (at the first level) gets too long, try clustering the items into fewer major categories with more subcategories. 7. Be flexible; be prepared to change your outline as your drafts evolve.

1e For most types of writing, draft an introduction that includes a thesis. iiÀ>Þ]Ê ÌiÊ ÌÀ`ÕVÌÊ ÌÊ >Ê «iViÊ vÊ ÜÀÌ}Ê >ÕViÃÊ the main point; the body develops it, usually in several paragraphs; the conclusion drives it home. You can begin drafting, however, at any point. If you find it difficult to introduce a paper that you have not yet written, try drafting the body first and saving the introduction for later. Ê 9ÕÀÊÌÀ`ÕVÌÊÜÊÕÃÕ>ÞÊLiÊ>Ê«>À>}À>«ÊvÊxäÊÌÊ£xäÊ ÜÀ`ÃÊÊ>Ê}iÀÊ«>«iÀ]ÊÌÊ>ÞÊLiÊÀiÊÌ>ÊiÊ«>À>}À>«®°Ê Perhaps the most common strategy is to open with a few sentences that engage the reader and establish your purpose for writing, your main point. The sentence stating the main point is called a thesis°Ê-iiÊ>ÃÊ£V°®ÊÊÌiÊvÜ}ÊiÝ>«iÃ]ÊÌiÊ thesis has been italicized. The debate over athletes’ use of performance-enhancing substances is getting more complicated as biotechnologies such as gene therapy become a reality. The availability of these new methods of boosting performance will force us to decide what we value most in sports — displays of physical excellence developed through hard work or victory at all costs. For centuries, spectators and athletes have cherished the tradition of fairness in sports. While sports competition is, of course, largely about winning, it is also about the means by which a player or team wins. Athletes who use any type of biotechnology give themselves an unfair advantage and disrupt the sense of fair play, and they should be banned from competition. — Jamal Hammond, student

25

26

1e

draft


As the United States industrialized in the nineteenth century, using desperate immigrant labor, social concerns took a backseat to the task of building a prosperous nation. The government did not regulate industries and did not provide an effective safety net for the poor or for those who became sick or injured on the job. However, immigrants and the poor did have a few advocates. Settlement houses such as Hull-House in Chicago provided information, services, and a place for reform-minded individuals to gather and work to improve the conditions of the urban poor. Alice Hamilton was one of these reformers. Her work at Hull-House spanned twenty-two years and later expanded throughout the nation. Hamilton’s efforts helped to improve the lives of immigrants and drew attention to problems and people that until then had been virtually ignored. — Laurie McDonough, student

Ideally, the sentences leading to the thesis should hook the reader, perhaps with one of the following: a startling statistic or an unusual fact a vivid example a description a paradoxical statement a quotation or a bit of dialogue a question an analogy an anecdote Whether you are writing for a scholarly audience, a professional audience, a public audience, or a general audience, you cannot assume your readers’ interest in the topic. The hook should spark curiosity and offer readers a reason to continue. Although the thesis frequently appears at the end of the introduction, it can just as easily appear at the beginning. Much work-related writing commonly begins with the thesis.

ÌÀ`ÕVÌÊ UÊ ÌiÃÃÊ UÊ >Êì>

draft

1e

27

Flextime scheduling, which has proved its effectiveness at the Library of Congress, should be introduced on a trial basis at the main branch of the Montgomery County Public Library. By offering flexible work hours, the library can boost employee morale, cut down on absenteeism, and expand its hours of operation. — David Warren, student

For some types of writing, it may be difficult or impossible to express the central idea in a thesis sentence; or it may be unwise or unnecessary to put a thesis Making the most of your handbook sentence in the essay itself. A personal The thesis sentence is central to narrative, for example, may have a focus many types of writing. too subtle to be distilled in a single sen0 Writing about texts: 4 tence. Strictly informative writing, like 0 Writing arguments: 5 that found in many business memos, 0 Writing research papers: 50 may be difficult to summarize in a thesis. (MLA), 56a (APA), 57a (Chicago) In some academic fields, such as nursing, 0 Writing literature papers: 55c writers may produce reports that do not require a thesis. In such instances, do not try to force the central idea into a thesis sentence. Instead, think in terms of an overriding purpose, which may or may not be stated directly.

If you come from a culture that prefers an indirect approach in writing, you may feel that asserting a thesis early in an essay sounds unrefined and even rude. In the United States, however, readers appreciate a direct approach; when you state your point as directly as possible, you show that you value your readers’ time.

Characteristics of an effective thesis An effective thesis sentence should be a central idea that requires supporting evidence; it should be of adequate scope for an essay of the assigned length; and it should be sharply vVÕÃi`°Ê-iiÊ>ÃÊ£V°®

28

1e

draft


When constructing a thesis sentence, you should ask yourself whether you can successfully develop it with the sources available to you and for the purpose you’ve identified. Also ask if you can explain why readers should be interested in reading an essay that explores this thesis. If your thesis addresses a question or problem that intrigues you, then it will probably interest your readers as well. If your thesis would be obvious to everyone, then your readers will be less compelled to read on. A thesis must require proof or further development through facts and details; it cannot itself be a fact or a description. DRAFT THESISÊ

The first polygraph was developed by Dr. John A. >ÀÃÊÊ£Ó£° PROBLEM The thesis is too factual. A reader could not disagree with it or debate it; no further development of this idea is required. STRATEGY Enter a debate by posing a question about your topic that has more than one possible answer. For example: Should the polygraph be used by private employers? Your thesis should be your answer to the question.

REVISED THESIS

Because the polygraph has not been proved reliable, even under controlled conditions, its use by private employers should be banned.

A thesis should be an answer to a question, not a question itself. DRAFT THESIS

Would John F. Kennedy have continued to escalate the war in Vietnam if he had lived? PROBLEM The thesis is a question, not an answer to a question. STRATEGY Take a position on your topic by answering the question you have posed. Your thesis should be your answer to the question.

REVISED THESIS

Although John F. Kennedy sent the first American troops to Vietnam before he died, an analysis of his foreign policy suggests that he would not have escalated the war had he lived.


draft

1e

A thesis should be of sufficient scope for your assignment; it should not be too broad. DRAFT THESIS

Mapping the human genome has many implications for health and science. PROBLEM The thesis is too broad. Even in a very long research paper, you would not be able to discuss all the implications of mapping the human genome. STRATEGY Consider subtopics of your original topic. Once you have chosen a subtopic, take a position in an ongoing debate and pose a question that has more than one answer. For example: Should people be tested for genetic diseases? Your thesis should be your answer to the question.

REVISED THESIS

Although scientists can now detect genetic predisposition for specific diseases, policymakers should establish clear guidelines about whom to test and under what circumstances.

A thesis also should not be too narrow. DRAFT THESIS

A person who carries a genetic mutation linked to a particular disease might or might not develop that disease. PROBLEM The thesis is too narrow. It does not suggest any argument or debate about the topic. STRATEGY Identify challenging questions that readers

might have about your topic. Then pose a question that has more than one answer. For example: Why should people be tested for genetic diseases? Your thesis should be your answer to this question. REVISED THESIS

Although scientists can now detect genetic predisposition for specific diseases, policymakers should establish clear guidelines about whom to test and under what circumstances.

29

Revising with comments

|

Unclear thesis

Understanding the comment When a teacher or tutor points out that your thesis is unclear, the comment often signals that readers may have a hard time identifying your essay’s main point. Fathers are more involved in the lives of their children today than they used to be. In the past, the father’s primary role was as the provider; child care was most often left to the mother or other relatives. However, today’s father drives to dance lessons, coaches his child’s baseball team, hosts birthday Un cl ea r parties, and provides homework help. Do more th es is involved fathers help or hinder the development of their children?

One student wrote this introductory paragraph in response to an assignment that asked her to analyze the changing roles of mothers or fathers.

A writer’s thesis, or main point, should be phrased as a statement, not a question. To revise, the student could answer the question she has posed, or she could pose a new question and answer it. After considering her evidence, she needs to decide what position she wants to take, state this position clearly, and show readers why this position — her thesis — matters.

Similar comments: vague thesis s state your position s your main point?

Revising when your thesis is unclear 1. Ask questions. What is the thesis, position, or main point of the draft? Can you support it with the available evidence? 2. Reread your entire draft. Because ideas develop as you write, you may find that your conclusion contains a clearer statement of your main point than your current thesis does. Or you may find your thesis elsewhere in your draft. 3. Try revising your thesis by framing it as an answer to a question you pose, the resolution of a problem you identify, or a position you take in a debate. And put your thesis to the “So what?” test: Why would a reader be interested in this thesis? More help with writing a clear thesis: 1c and 1e

30


draft

1e

A thesis should be sharply focused, not too vague. Avoid fuzzy, hard-to-define words such as interesting, good, or disgusting. DRAFT THESIS

The Vietnam Veterans Memorial is an interesting structure. PROBLEM This thesis is too fuzzy and unfocused. It’s difficult to define interesting, and the sentence doesn’t give the reader any cues about where the essay is going. STRATEGY Focus your thesis with concrete language and a clear plan. Pose a question about the topic that has more than one answer. For example: How does the physical structure of the Vietnam Veterans Memorial shape the experience of visitors? Your thesis — your answer to the question — should use specific language that engages readers to follow your argument.

REVISED THESIS

By inviting visitors to see their own reflections in the wall, the Vietnam Veterans Memorial creates a link between the present and the past.

EXERCISE 1–3 In each of the following pairs, which sentence might work well as a thesis for a short paper? What is the problem with the other one? Is it too factual? Too broad? Too vague? £°Ê

Ó°Ê

Î°Ê

4.

>°Ê Ê ÞÊ iÌÜÀ}Ê ÜÌÊ vÀi`Ã]Ê >Ê Ã}iÊ «>ÀiÌÊ V>Ê >>}iÊ ÌÊ strike a balance among work, school, a social life, and family. b. Single parents face many challenges as they try to juggle all of their responsibilities. >°Ê ÊÌÊÌiÊ-«iV>Ê"Þ«VÃ]Ê>ÌiÌiÃÊÜÌÊ`Ã>LÌiÃÊÃÜÊÌ>Ì]Ê with hard work and support from others, they can accomplish anything — that they can indeed be winners. b. Working with the Special Olympics program is rewarding. >°Ê ÊÃÌÀÞÊÓä£]ÊÌ>Õ}ÌÊLÞÊ*ÀviÃÃÀÊ ÀÜ]ÊÃÊvviÀi`Ê>ÌÊ£ä\ääÊ a.m. on Tuesdays and Thursdays. b. Whoever said that history is nothing but polishing tombÃÌiÃÊÕÃÌÊ>ÛiÊÃÃi`ÊÃÌÀÞÊÓä£]ÊLiV>ÕÃiÊÊ*ÀviÃÃÀÊ Brown’s class history is very much alive. a. So far, research suggests that zero-emissions vehicles are not a sensible solution to the problem of steadily increasing air pollution.

31

1f

32

x°Ê

draft


b. Because air pollution is of serious concern to many people today, several US government agencies have implemented plans to begin solving the problem. >°Ê Ê ÀiÝ>ÊiÀÛÃ>ÊÃÊ>Ê`>}iÀÕÃÊ>`ÊÃiÌiÃÊì>`ÞÊi>Ìing disorder occurring mainly in young, upper-middle-class teens. b. The eating disorder anorexia nervosa is rarely cured by one treatment alone; only by combining drug therapy with psychotherapy and family therapy can the patient begin the long, torturous journey to wellness.

hackerhandbooks.com/bedhandbook > Writing exercises > E-ex 1–5 to 1–7

1f Draft the body. The body of the essay develops support for your thesis, so it’s important to have at least a working thesis before you start writing. What does your thesis promise readers? Try to keep your response to that question in mind as you draft the body. You may already have written an introduction that includes your thesis. If not, as long as you have a thesis you can begin developing the body and return later to the introduction. vÊÞÕÀÊÌiÃÃÊÃÕ}}iÃÌÃÊ>Ê«>ÊÃiiÊ£i®ÊÀÊvÊÞÕÊ>ÛiÊÃiÌVi`Ê a preliminary outline, try to block out your paragraphs accordingly. Draft the body of your essay by writing a paragraph about each supporting point you listed in the planning stage. If you do not have a plan, pause for a few moments and sketch iÊÃiiÊ£`®°Ê Keep in mind that often you might not know what you want to say until you have written a draft. It is possible to begin without a plan — assuming you are prepared to treat your first attempt as a “discovery draft” that will be radically rewritten once you discover what you really want to say. Whether or not you have a plan when you begin drafting, you can often figure out a workable order for your ideas by stopping each time you start a new paragraph to think about what your readers will need to know to follow your train of thought. For more detailed advice about paragraphs in the body of an essay, see 3.


|

Be specific

Understanding the comment When a teacher or tutor indicates that you need to “be specific,” the comment often signals that you could strengthen your writing with additional details. There are many cultural differences between the United States and Italy. Italian citizens do not share many of the same attitudes or values as American Be citizens. Such differences make it hard for some sp ec if ic ! Italian students to feel comfortable coming to the United States for extended periods of time, even for an academic year.

In this body paragraph, a student responds to an assignment that asked him to interview a group of international students and describe the challenges of studying in the United States.

The paragraph presents a student’s claim but doesn’t include specific examples or evidence to support the claim. To revise, the student might focus on one specific example of cultural differences between the United States and Italy. The student might then ask: What vivid details illustrate this cultural difference? The answer to that question will provide specific evidence to inform and persuade readers.

Similar comments: need examples s too general s evidence?

Strategies for revising when your writing needs to be more specific 1. Reread your topic sentence to understand the focus of the paragraph. 2. Ask questions. Does the paragraph contain claims that need support? Have you provided evidence — specific examples, vivid details and illustrations, statistics and facts — to help readers understand your ideas and find them persuasive? 3. Choose exact, active, and engaging words as you shape your evidence. And remember that details and examples don’t speak for themselves. You’ll need to interpret your evidence to show readers how it supports your claims. More help with using specific evidence: 5e

33

34

1g

draft


TIP: As you draft, keep careful notes and records of all the ÃÕÀViÃÊ ÞÕÊ Ài>`Ê >`Ê VÃÕÌ°Ê -iiÊ {nL°®Ê vÊ ÞÕÊ µÕÌi]Ê «>À>phrase, or summarize a source, include a citation, even in your draft. You will save time and avoid plagiarism if you follow the rules of citation and documentation while drafting.

1g Draft a conclusion. A conclusion should remind readers of the essay’s main idea without repeating it. Often the concluding paragraph can be relatively short. By the end of the essay, readers should already understand your main point; your conclusion drives it home and, perhaps, gives readers something more to consider. In addition to echoing your main idea, a conclusion might briefly summarize the essay’s key points, propose a course of action, offer advice, discuss the topic’s wider significance, or pose a question for future study. To conclude an essay analyzing the shifting roles of women in the military, one student discusses her topic’s implications for society as a whole. As the military continues to train women in jobs formerly reserved for men, our understanding of women’s roles in society will no doubt continue to change. When news reports of women training for and taking part in combat operations become commonplace, reports of women becoming CEOs, police chiefs, and even president of the United States will cease to surprise us. Or perhaps we have already reached this point. — Rosa Broderick, student

To make the conclusion memorable, you might include a detail, an example, or an image from the introduction to bring readers full circle; a quotation or a bit of dialogue; an anecdote; or a witty or ironic comment. To conclude an essay explaining how credit card companies hook college students, one student brings readers full circle by echoing his thesis and ending with a familiar phrase borrowed from popular culture. Credit cards are a convenient part of life, and there is nothing wrong with having one or two of them. Before signing up for a particular card, however, college students should

VVÕÃÊ UÊ }L>ÊÀiÛÃ

rev

2

35

take time to read the fine print and do some comparison shopping. Students also need to learn to resist the many seductive offers that credit card companies extend to them after they have signed up. Students who can’t “just say no” to temptations such as high credit limits and revolving balances could well become hooked on a cycle of debt from which there is no easy escape. — Matt Watson, student

Whatever concluding strategy you choose, keep in mind that an effective conclusion is decisive and unapologetic. Avoid introducing wholly new ideas at the end of an essay. And because the conclusion is so closely tied to the rest of the essay in both content and tone, be prepared to rework it ÀÊiÛiÊÀi«>ViÊÌ®ÊÜiÊÞÕÊÀiÛÃi°

2

Make global revisions; then revise sentences.

For most experienced writers, revising is rarely a one-step proViÃÃ°Ê L>Ê >ÌÌiÀÃÊpÊvVÕÃ]Ê «ÕÀ«Ãi]Ê À}>â>Ì]Ê VÌiÌ]Ê and overall strategy — generally receive Making the most of your handbook attention first. Improvements in senSeeking and using feedback are tence structure, word choice, grammar, critical steps in revising a college paper. punctuation, and mechanics come later. 0 Checklist for global revision: Many of us resist making global revipage 40 sions because we find it difficult to view 0 Guidelines for peer reviewers: our work from our audience’s perspecpage 38 tive. To distance yourself from a draft, 0 Tips on using feedback: page 42 put it aside for a while, preferably overnight or even longer. When you return to it, try to play the role of your audience as you read. Ask questions like the following: UÊ 7Õ`ÊÀi>ìÀÃÊ`Ã>}ÀiiÊÜÌÊÞÊÌiÃÃ¶ÊvÊÃ]ÊÜÊ}ÌÊ I address their counterarguments? UÊ 7Õ`ÊÀi>ìÀÃÊLiÊVvÕÃi`ÊLÞÊÞÊÀ}>â>Ì¶Ê UÊ >ÛiÊÊ«ÀÛì`ÊiÕ}ÊiÛìViÊÌÊvÀÊÀÊ«iÀÃÕ>ìÊ readers?

36

2

rev

Revising

EXAMPLE OF GLOBAL REVISIONS

Big Box Stores Aren’t So Bad In her essay Big Box Stores Are Bad for Main Street, Betsy Taylor shifts the focus away from the economic effects of these stores to the effects these stores have on the “soul” of America. She claims that stores like Home Depot and Target are bad for America, they draw people out of downtown shopping districts and cause them to focus on consumption. She believes that small businesses are good for America because they provide personal attention, encourage community interaction, and make each city different from the other ones. But Taylor’s argument is not strong because it

is based on nostalgic images rather than true assumptions about the roles

?

that businesses play in consumers lives and communities. Taylor reveals that she has a nostalgic view of American society and does not understand economic realities. She focuses on idealized shoppers and shopkeepers interacting on Main Street rather than the economic realities of the situation. As a result, she incorrectly assumes that simply getting rid of big box stores would have a positive effect on us. For example, in her first paragraph she refers to a big box store as a “25-acre slab of concrete with a 100,000 square foot box of stuff” that lands on a town, evoking images of something strong and powerful conquering something small and weak. But she oversimplifies a complex issue.

4IFJHOPSFTUIFDPNQMFYFDPOPNJDSFMBUJPOTIJQCFUXFFOMBSHF DIBJOTUPSFTBOEUIFDPNNVOJUJFTJOXIJDIUIFZFYJTU

rev

sample revisions

2

37

EXAMPLE OF SENTENCE-LEVEL REVISIONS

3FUIJOLJOH#JH#PY4UPSFT Big Box Stores Aren’t So Bad

OPJUBMJDT

? In her essay¦Big Box Stores Are Bad for Main Street , §Betsy Taylor shifts

MBSHFDIBJO ?CVUPO

GPDVTFTOPUPO ?

the focus away from the economic effects of these stores to the effects these

?

BSHVFT ?

?

stores have on the “soul” of America. She claims that stores like Home Depot

CFDBVTF ? ? and Target are bad for America,they draw people out of downtown shopping *ODPOUSBTU TIF ? ? BOE8BM.BSU

districts and cause them to focus on consumption. She believes that small

?

businesses are good for America because they provide personal attention,

VOJRVF

encourage community interaction, and make each city different from the

VODPOWJODJOH ?

other ones. But Taylor’s argument is not strong because it is based on

JNBHFTPG ?

OPTUBMHJB

?

#ZJHOPSJOH © ? ? UIFJS 5BZMPS ? relationship between large chain stores and the communities in which they ? ? exist. As a result, she incorrectly assumes that simply getting rid of big box "NFSJDB©TDPNNVOJUJFT ? stores would have a positive effect on us. 5BZMPS©TDPMPSGVMVTFPGMBOHVBHF ? Taylor reveals that she has a nostalgic view of American society and does *O 5BZMPS ? not understand economic realities. For example, in her first paragraph she ? ? refers to a big box store as a “25-acre slab of concrete with a 100,000 square BQPXFSGVM ? foot box of stuff” that¦lands on a town,§evoking images of something strong and ? ? NPOTUFSDSVTIJOHUIF"NFSJDBOXBZPGMJGF ? powerful conquering something small and weak. But she oversimplifies a ?complex issue.

nostalgic images—on idealized shoppers and shopkeepers interacting on

PO

?

Main Street—rather than true assumptions about the roles that businesses

play in consumers lives and communities. She ignores the complex economic

38

2

rev

Revising

Guidelines for peer reviewers View yourself as a coach, not a judge. Think of yourself as proposing possibilities, not dictating revisions. It is the writer, after all, who will have to grapple with the task of improving the essay. Work with the writer to identify the strengths and limitations of the draft.

Restate the writer’s main ideas. It’s helpful for the writer to see if you understand the main point of the essay. Restate the thesis for the writer. And try to paraphrase each paragraph of the draft to help the writer see if the essay’s points are clearly expressed.

Where possible, give specific compliments. Vague compliments (such as “I liked your essay”) sound insincere — and they aren’t helpful. Point out specific successes. For example, you might mention that you particularly admire how the writer examines the opposing viewpoint in the second paragraph before challenging it in the third.

Link suggestions for improvement to the writer’s goals. Criticism is constructive when it is offered in the right spirit. For example, you might advise the writer to put the most dramatic example last, where it will have the maximum impact on readers. Or you might suggest that a passage would gain power if the writer replaced abstractions with concrete details.

Ask questions and tell the writer where you would like to hear more. Note passages that you found either confusing or interesting. By asking for clarification, you will help the writer see what needs to be revised. Indicating an interest in hearing more about a topic will often inspire the writer to come up with useful and vivid details.

Express interest in reading the next draft. When your interest is sincere, expressing it can be a powerful motivation for a writer.

«iiÀÊÀiÛiÜÊ UÊ vii`L>VÊ UÊ }L>ÊÀiÛÃÊ UÊ L}Ê«VÌÕÀiÊ UÊ >ÕìVi

rev

2a

If possible, enlist friends or family to play the role of audience for you, or perhaps visit your school’s writing center to go over your draft with a writing tutor. Ask your reviewers to focus on the larger issues of writing, not on word- or sentencelevel issues.

2a Approach global revision in cycles. Making major revisions can be difficult, sometimes even painful. You might discover, for example, that an essay’s first three paragraphs are merely padding, that its central argument tilts the wrong way, and that you sound pompous. But the fact that you can see such problems in your own writing is a sign of hope. Those opening paragraphs can be dropped, the argument’s slant realigned, the voice made more approachable. Because the process of global revision can be overwhelming, approach it in cycles. Five common cycles of global revision are discussed in this section: UÊ }>}}ÊÌiÊ>ÕìVi UÊ ->À«i}ÊÌiÊvVÕÃ UÊ «ÀÛ}ÊÌiÊÀ}>â>Ì UÊ -ÌÀi}Ìi}ÊÌiÊVÌiÌ UÊ >ÀvÞ}ÊÌiÊ«ÌÊvÊÛiÜÊ You can handle these cycles in nearly any order or even skip ÀÊVLiÊÃi°Ê-iiÊÌiÊV>ÀÌÊÊ«>}iÊ{ä°

Engaging the audience Considerations of audience can contribute to global revision. Sometimes a rough draft needs an overhaul because it is directed at no audience at all for no apparent purpose. Readers are put off by such writing because they don’t know why they are reading. A good question to ask yourself is the toughest question a reader might ask: “So what?” If your draft can’t pass the “So what?” test, you may need to rethink your entire approach; in fact, you may even decide to scrap the draft and start over.

39

40

2a

rev

Revising

Checklist for global revision Audience U Does the draft address a question, a problem, or an issue that is of interest to readers? U Is the tone diplomatic and respectful?

Focus U Is the thesis clear? Is it prominently placed? U If there is no thesis, is there a good reason for omitting one? U Are any ideas obviously off the point?

Organization and paragraphing U Are there enough organizational cues for readers (such as topic sentences and headings)? U Are ideas presented in a logical order? U Are any paragraphs too long or too short for easy reading?

Content U Is the supporting material relevant and persuasive? U Which ideas need further development? U Are the parts proportioned sensibly? Do major ideas receive enough attention? U Where might material be deleted?

Point of view U Is the draft free of distracting shifts in point of view (from I to you, for example, or from it to they)? U Is the dominant point of view — I, we, you, he, she, it, one, or they — appropriate?

}L>ÊÀiÛÃÊ UÊ L}Ê«VÌÕÀiÊ UÊ >ÕìVi

rev

2a

Once you have made sure that your draft is directed at an audience — readers who stand to benefit in some way by reading it — you may still need to refine your tone. The tone of a piece of writing expresses the writer’s feelings toward the audience, so it is important to get it right. If the tone seems too self-centered or too flippant, stuffy, bossy, patronizing, opinionated, or hostile, modify it. For example, the following paragraph was drafted by a student who hoped to persuade his audience to buy organic produce. A PARAGRAPH THAT ALIENATES READERS

If you choose to buy organic produce, you are supporting local farmers as well as demonstrating your opposition to chemical pesticides. As more and more supermarkets carry organic fruits and vegetables, consumers have fewer reasons not to buy organic. Some consumers do not buy organic produce because they are not willing to spend the extra money. But if you care at all about the environment or the small farmer, you should be willing to support organic farms in your area.

When he reviewed this draft, the writer saw the need to be more diplomatic. He didn’t want to alienate his readers by accusing them of being unwilling to spend money or uninterested in helping the environment. He revised the paragraph to offer readers positive reasons to support his cause. A PARAGRAPH THAT RESPECTS READERS

By choosing to buy organic produce, you have the opportunity to support local farmers, to oppose the use of chemical pesticides, and to taste some of the freshest produce available. Because more supermarkets carry organic produce than ever, you won’t even have to miss out on any of your favorite fruits or vegetables. Although organic produce can be more expensive than conventional produce, the costs are not prohibitive. For example, a pound of organic bananas at my local grocery store is eighty-nine cents, while the conventional bananas are sixtynine cents a pound. If you can afford this small price difference, you will have the opportunity to make a difference for the environment and for the small farmer. — Leon Nage, student

41

42

2a

rev

Revising

Guidelines for using reviewers’ comments Don’t take criticism personally. Your reader is responding to your essay, not to you. It may be frustrating to hear that you still have more work to do, but taking feedback seriously will make your essay stronger.

Pay attention to ideas that contradict your own. If comments show that a reviewer doesn’t understand what you’re trying to do, don’t be defensive. Instead, consider why your reader is confused and figure out how to clarify your point. Responding to readers’ objections — instead of dismissing them — will strengthen your ideas and make your essay more persuasive.

Look for global concerns. Your reviewers will probably make more suggestions than you can use. To keep things manageable, focus on the comments that relate to your thesis, organization, and evidence. Do your readers understand your main idea? Can they follow your train of thought? Are they looking for more supporting ideas or facts?

Weigh feedback carefully. As you begin revising, you may find yourself sorting through suggestions from many people, including instructors, writing tutors, and peer reviewers. Sometimes these readers will agree, but often their advice will differ. It’s important to sort through all the comments you receive with your original goals in mind — otherwise you’ll be facing the impossible task of trying to incorporate everyone’s advice.

Keep a revision and editing log. Make a clear and simple list of the global and sentence-level concerns that keep coming up in most of your reviewers’ comments. That list can serve as a starting point each time you revise a paper. When you take charge of your own writing in this way, comments will become a valuable resource rather than something to dread.

}L>ÊÀiÛÃÊ UÊ L}Ê«VÌÕÀiÊ UÊ ÀiÛiÜiÀÃÊ UÊ vVÕÃÊ UÊ À}>â>Ì

rev

2a

Sharpening the focus A clearly focused draft fixes readers’ attention on one central idea and does not stray from that idea. You can sharpen the vVÕÃÊ vÊ >Ê `À>vÌÊ LÞÊ V>ÀvÞ}Ê ÌiÊ ÌÀ`ÕVÌÊ iÃ«iV>ÞÊ ÌiÊ ÌiÃÃ®Ê>`ÊLÞÊìiÌ}Ê>ÞÊÌiÝÌÊÌ>ÌÊÃÊvvÊÌiÊ«Ì° Clarifying the introduction Check to see whether the introduction clearly states the essay’s main point. Does it let readers know what to expect as they read on? Does it make the significance of the subject clear so that readers will want to read on? Can readers tell where the introduction stops and the body of the essay begins? Have you perhaps included material in the introduction that really belongs in the body? Is your introduction too broad or unfocused? The most important sentence in the introduction is the ÌiÃÃ°Ê-iiÊ£i°®ÊvÊÞÕÀÊÌiÃÃÊÃÊ«ÀÞÊvVÕÃi`ÊÀÊvÊÌÊìÃ½ÌÊ accurately state the real point of the essay, revise it. If your essay lacks a thesis, add one now or have a good reason for not including one. Deleting text that is off the point Compare the introduction, particularly the thesis sentence, with the body of the essay. Does the body fulfill the promise of the introduction? If not, you will need to adjust one or the other. Either rebuild the introduction to fit the body or keep the introduction and delete any body sentences or paragraphs that stray from its point.

Improving the organization A draft is well organized when its major divisions are logical and easy to follow. To improve the organization of your draft, you may need to take one or more of the following actions: adding or sharpening topic sentences, moving blocks of text, and inserting headings.

43

44

2a

rev

Revising

Adding or sharpening topic sentences Topic sentences state the main ideas of the paragraphs in the body of an essay. -iiÊÎ>°®Ê9ÕÊV>ÊÀiÛiÜÊÌiÊÀ}>â>ÌÊvÊ>Ê`À>vÌÊLÞÊÀi>`}Ê only the topic sentences. Do they clearly support the essay’s main idea? Do they make a reasonable sentence outline of the paper? If your draft lacks topic sentences, either add them or have a good reason for omitting them. Moving blocks of text Improving the organization of a draft can be as simple as moving a few sentences from one paragraph to another or reordering paragraphs. You may also find that you can clarify the organization of a draft by combining choppy paragraphs or by dividing those that are too long for easy read}°Ê-iiÊÎi°®Ê"vÌi]ÊÜiÛiÀ]ÊÌiÊ«ÀViÃÃÊÃÊÀiÊV«iÝ°ÊÃÊ you move blocks of text, you may need to supply transitions to make them fit smoothly in the new positions; you may also need to rework topic sentences to make your new organization clear. Before moving text, consider sketching a revised outline. Divisions in the outline might become topic sentences in the ÀiÃÌÀÕVÌÕÀi`ÊiÃÃ>Þ°Ê-iiÊ£`°® Inserting headings In long documents, such as complex research papers or business reports, headings can help readers follow your organization. Typically, headings are presented as phrases, declarative or imperative sentences, or questions. To draw attention to headings, you can center them, put them in boldface, underline them, use all capital letters, or do some VL>ÌÊvÊÌiÃi°Ê-iiÊ>ÃÊxnL°®Ê TIP: Construct an outline of your draft after you have written it ÃiiÊ£`®°Ê ÞÊ}}ÊÌÀÕ}ÊÞÕÀÊ`À>vÌÊ«>À>}À>«ÊLÞÊ«>À>}À>«Ê and listing the most important ideas in an outline, you can see how the parts work together and whether each paragraph has a clear focus.

Strengthening the content In reviewing the content of a draft, first consider whether your argument is sound. You may need to rethink your argument


|

Narrow your introduction

Understanding the comment When a teacher or tutor points out that your introduction needs to be “narrowed,” the comment often signals that the beginning sentences of your essay are not specific or focused. Sports fans are an interesting breed. They have many ways of showing support for the team they love. Many fans perform elaborate rituals before, during, or after a sporting event. These rituals are performed both privately in homes with family or friends and at the stadiums and arenas where the games take place. Experiencing a sports competition where the fans are participating in rituals to support the team makes the game exciting. Some fans even believe that rituals are necessary and that their actions influence the outcome of a game. However, some fans go beyond cheering, and N a rr ow yo ur their actions, verbal harassment, and chanted slurs in tr od uc tio n reveal a darker side of sports.

One student wrote this introductory paragraph in response to an assignment that asked her to analyze a ritual.

This opening begins with such general statements that the purpose of the essay is unclear. To revise, the student might delete her first few sentences — generalizations about sports fans and rituals — and focus on one specific sports ritual. She might describe how fans who wear lucky clothes, eat certain foods, or chant a particular expression think they can influence the outcome of a game. Using a quotation, a vivid example, or a startling statistic, the student might show how a particular ritual not only unites fans but also reveals a dark side of sports. Whatever “hook” she chooses should lead readers to her thesis.

Similar comments: focus your intro s too general s engage your readers

Revising when you need to narrow your introduction 1. Reread your introduction and ask questions. Are the sentences leading to your thesis specific enough to engage readers and communicate your purpose? Do these sentences lead logically to your thesis? Do they spark your readers’ curiosity and offer them a reason to continue reading? 2. Try revising your introduction with a “hook” that will engage readers — a question, quotation, paradoxical statement, or vivid example. More advice on writing introductions: 1e

45

46

2a

rev

Revising

>ÃÊ ÞÕÊ ÀiÛÃi°Ê -iV`]Ê VÃìÀÊ ÜiÌiÀÊ >ÞÊ ÌiÝÌÊ ÃiÌiViÃ]Ê «>À>}À>«Ã]Ê ÀÊ }iÀÊ «>ÃÃ>}iÃ®Ê ÃÕ`Ê LiÊ >`ì`Ê ÀÊ ìiÌi`]Ê keeping in mind your readers’ needs. Finally, if your purpose is to argue a point, consider how persuasively you have proved your point to an intelligent, discerning audience. Rethinking your argument A first draft presents you with an opportunity for rethinking your argument. You can often deepen your ideas about a subject by asking yourself some hard questions: Is your claim more sweeping than the evidence allows? Have you left out an important step in the argument? Have you dealt fairly with the arguments of the opposition? Is your draft free of faulty reasoning? The more challenging your subject, the more likely you will find yourself adjusting your i>ÀÞÊÌÕ}ÌÃ°ÊÀÊÀiÊ>LÕÌÊÜÀÌ}Ê>À}ÕiÌÃ]ÊÃiiÊx°® Adding text If any paragraphs or sections of the essay are too Ã«ÞÊÌÊLiÊVi>ÀÊ>`ÊVÛV}Ê>ÊVÊy>ÜÊÊÀÕ}Ê `À>vÌÃ®]Ê >``Ê Ã«iVwVÊ v>VÌÃ]Ê ìÌ>Ã]Ê >`Ê iÝ>«iÃ°Ê 9ÕÊ >ÞÊ need to go back to the beginning of the writing process: listing specifics, brainstorming ideas with friends or classmates, perhaps doing more research. Deleting text Look for sentences and paragraphs that can be cut without serious loss of meaning. Perhaps you have repeated yourself or strayed from your point. Maybe you have given too much emphasis to minor ideas. Cuts may also be necessitated by word limits, such as those imposed by a college assignment or by the realities of the business world, where readers are often pressed for time.

Clarifying the point of view If the point of view of a draft shifts confusingly or if it seems not quite appropriate for your purpose, audience, and subject, consider adjusting it. Ê /iÀiÊ>ÀiÊÌÀiiÊL>ÃVÊ«ÌÃÊvÊÛiÜ\ÊÌiÊwÀÃÌÊ«iÀÃÊI or we®]ÊÌiÊÃiV`Ê«iÀÃÊÊÊyou®]Ê>`ÊÌiÊÌÀ`Ê«iÀÃÊhe, she, it,

}L>ÊÀiÛÃÊ UÊ L}Ê«VÌÕÀiÊ UÊ ÀiÌ}ÊVÌiÌÊ UÊ «ÌÊvÊÛiÜ

rev

2a

one, or they®°Ê >VÊ«ÌÊvÊÛiÜÊÃÊ>««À«À>ÌiÊÊ>ÌÊi>ÃÌÊÃiÊ contexts, and you may need to experiment before deciding which one best suits your needs. The third-person point of view Much academic and professional writing is best presented from the third-person point vÊÛiÜÊhe, she, it, one, or they®]ÊÜVÊ«ÕÌÃÊÌiÊÃÕLiVÌÊÊÌiÊ foreground. The I point of view is usually inappropriate in such contexts because, by focusing attention on the writer, it pushes the subject to the background. Consider one student’s first-draft description of the behavior of a species of frog he had observed in the field. INAPPROPRIATE FIRST PERSON

Each frog that I was able to locate in trees remained in its tree during my observation period. However, I noticed that there was considerable movement within the home tree.

Here the I point of view is distracting. The student’s revision focuses more on the frogs and less on himself. APPROPRIATE THIRD PERSON

Each frog located in a tree remained in that tree throughout the observation period. The frogs moved about considerably, however, within their home trees.

Just as the first-person I can draw too much attention to the writer, the second-person you can focus unnecessarily on the reader. In the following sentence from a memo, a supervisor writing to a sales manager needlessly draws attention to the reader. INAPPROPRIATE SECOND PERSON

When you look at the numbers, you can clearly see that travel expenses must be cut back.

This sentence is clearer and more direct when it is revised without the distracting you point of view.

47

48

2a

rev

Revising

APPROPRIATE THIRD PERSON

The numbers clearly show that travel expenses must be cut back.

Although the third-person point of view is often a better choice than the I or you point of view, it is not trouble-free. Writers can run into problems when their writing requires many singular pronouns. Using the pronoun he to include both men and women is no longer acceptable, and using one as a gender-neutral alternative can sound stuffy. Writers should be aware of the awkwardness that third-person singular pronouns create and should try to find graceful alternaÌÛiÃÊÃiiÊ£ÇvÊ>`ÊÓÓ>®° The second-person point of view The you point of view, which puts the reader in the foreground, is appropriate for advising readers directly, as in giving tips or instructions. All imperative sentences, such as the advice for writers in this book, are written from the you point of view, although the word itself is frequently omitted. “Sketch a plan” means “You ÃÕ`ÊÃiÌVÊ>Ê«>°»Ê-iiÊÈÓ>°® In the course of giving advice or instructions, the actual word you may be appropriate and even desired. In a pamphlet designed to motivate students to vote, the second-person you is effective. APPROPRIATE SECOND PERSON

If you have ideas about how the Student Senate should be run and you want yourÊÛViÊÌÊLiÊi>À`]ÊÛÌiÊÊ"VÌLiÀÊ£xÊ>ÌÊÌiÊ field house.

Written in the third-person point of view, the call to vote is far less motivating. INAPPROPRIATE THIRD PERSON

Students who have ideas about how the Student Senate should be run and who want their voices to be heard should vote on "VÌLiÀÊ£xÊ>ÌÊÌiÊwi`ÊÕÃi°

Indefinite uses of you are inappropriate in formal writing. -iiÊÓÎ`°®Ê/iÊÌÀ`Ê«iÀÃÊÃÊÕÃÕ>ÞÊÀiÊ>««À«À>Ìi°

}L>ÊÀiÛÃÊ UÊ L}Ê«VÌÕÀiÊ UÊ «ÌÊvÊÛiÜÊ UÊ ÀiÛÃ}ÊÃiÌiViÃ

rev

2b

INAPPROPRIATE SECOND PERSON

Young Japanese women wired together electronic products on a piece-rate system: The more you wired, the more you were paid. APPROPRIATE THIRD PERSON

The more they wired, the more they were paid.

The first-person point of view If much of a writer’s material comes from personal experience, the I point of view will be most natural. Writers who are aware that the first-person point of view is sometimes seen as inappropriate in academic writing often go to extreme lengths to avoid it. INAPPROPRIATE THIRD PERSON

Mama read with such color and detail that one could fancy oneself as the hero of the story.

Because the paper in which this sentence appeared was a personal reminiscence, the entire paper sounded more natural when the writer allowed himself to use the word I. APPROPRIATE FIRST PERSON

Mama read with such color and detail that I could fancy myself as the hero of the story. TIP: As you write in various disciplines and for a range of audiences, pay attention to the ways in which writers use the firstperson or third-person point of view. For guidelines on point vÊÛiÜÊÊÛ>ÀÕÃÊ`ÃV«iÃ]ÊÃiiÊÌiÊV>ÀÌÊÊ«>}iÊ£Î{° hackerhandbooks.com/bedhandbook > Writing exercises > E-ex 2–1 and 2–2

2b Revise and edit sentences; proofread the final draft. When you revise sentences, you focus on effectiveness; when you edit, you check for correctness. Proofreading is a slow and careful reading in search of spelling errors, typos, and other obvious mistakes.

49

50

2b

rev

Revising

Revising and editing sentences Parts III–VIII in this book offer advice on revising sentences for clarity and on editing them for grammar, punctuation, and mechanics. Some writers handle sentence-level revisions directly at the computer, experimenting on-screen with a variety of possible improvements. Other writers prefer to print out a hard copy of the draft, mark it up, and then return to the computer to enter their revisions. Here, for example, is a rough-draft paragraph as one student edited it on-screen for a variety of sentence-level problems. Although some cities have found creative ways to improve access to public transportation for passengers with physical disabilities, and to fund other programs, there have been problems in our city has struggled with due to the need to address budget constraints and competing needs priorities. This The budget crunch has led citizens to question how funds are distributed.? For example, last year when city officials voted to use available funds to support had to choose between allocating funds for accessible transportation or allocating funds to after-school programs rather than transportation upgrades. , they voted for the after school programs. It is not clear to some citizens why these after-school programs are more important.

The original paragraph was flawed by wordiness, a problem that can be addressed through any number of revisions. The following revision would also be acceptable. Some cities have funded improved access to public transportation for passengers with physical disabilities. Because of budget constraints, our city chose to fund after-school programs rather than transportation programs. As a result, citizens have begun to question how funds are distributed and why certain programs are more important than others.

Some of the paragraph’s improvements do not involve choice and must be fixed in any revision. The hyphen in afterschool programs is necessary; a noun must be substituted for

ÀiÛÃ}ÊÃiÌiViÃÊ UÊ i`Ì}Ê UÊ «ÀvÀi>`}

rev

2b

the pronoun these in the last sentence; and the question mark in the second sentence must be changed to a period. Grammar checkers can help with some but by no means all of the sentence-level problems in a typical draft. Many problems — such as faulty parallelism and misplaced modifiers — require an understanding of grammatical structure that computer programs lack. Even if the grammar checker makes a suggestion for revision, it is your responsibility to decide whether the suggestion is more effective than your original.

Proofreading After revising and editing, you are ready to prepare the final >ÕÃVÀ«Ì°Ê-iiÊxÊvÀÊ}ÕìiÃ°®Ê>iÊÃÕÀiÊÌÊ>ÜÊÞÕÀself enough time for proofreading — the final and most important step in manuscript preparation. Proofreading is a special kind of reading: a slow and methodical search for misspellings, typographical mistakes, and omitted words or word endings. Such errors can be difficult to spot in your own work because you may read what you intended to write, not what is actually on the page. To fight this tendency, try proofreading out loud, articulating each word as it is actually written. You might also try proofreading your sentences in reverse order, a strategy that takes your attention away from the meanings you intended and forces you to think about surface features instead. Although proofreading may be dull, it is crucial. Errors strewn throughout an essay are distracting and annoying. If the writer doesn’t care about this piece of writing, thinks the reader, why should I? A carefully proofread essay, however, sends a positive message: It shows that you value your writing and respect your readers. Spell checkers are more reliable than grammar checkers, but they too ÕÃÌÊLiÊÕÃi`ÊÜÌÊV>ÕÌ°Ê>ÞÊÌÞ«}À>«V>ÊiÀÀÀÃÊÃÕVÊ>ÃÊquiet for quite®Ê>`ÊÃÕÃi`ÊÜÀ`ÃÊÃÕVÊ>ÃÊeffect for affect®ÊÃ«Ê«>ÃÌÊÌiÊÃ«iÊ checker because it flags only words not found in its dictionary.

51

52

2b

rev

Revising

Student essay >ÌÌÊ 7>ÌÃÊ ÜÀÌiÊ ÌiÊ iÃÃ>ÞÊ ºi`Ê Ê Ài`ÌÊ >À`Ã»Ê ««°Ê xÈqx®ÊÊÀiÃ«ÃiÊÌÊÌiÊvÜ}Ê>ÃÃ}iÌ° Ê>ÊiÃÃ>ÞÊvÊxääÊq£]äääÊÜÀ`Ã]Ê`ÃVÕÃÃÊ>ÊÃ}wV>ÌÊ«ÀLiÊ facing today’s college students. Assume that your audience consists of general readers, not simply college students. If you use any sources, document them with in-text citaÌÃÊ>`Ê>ÊÃÌÊvÊÜÀÃÊVÌi`ÊÊÊÃÌÞiÊÃiiÊÃiVÌÊxÎÊÊ The Bedford Handbook®°

When he received the assignment, Watson considered several possibilities before settling on the topic of credit cards. He already knew something about the topic because SAMPLE NOTES

ÃÌÕìÌÊiÃÃ>ÞÊ UÊ ÊiÝ«À}Êì>ÃÊ UÊ Ã>«iÊÀÕ}Ê`À>vÌ

rev

2b

53

his older sister had run up large credit card bills while in college and was working hard to pay them off. Because the assignment required him to discuss a problem, he decided that a good strategy would be to identify a how or why question to answer. To get started on his paper, Watson talked to his sister on ÌiÊ«iÊ>`ÊÌÞ«i`ÊÃiÊì>ÃÊÊÃÊ>«Ì«°Ê-iiÊ«°ÊxÓ°® After he listed these ideas, Watson identified the question that would drive his essay: Why do credit card companies put so many resources into soliciting students, who often have poor credit profiles?

Watson decided that his purpose would be to answer this question for himself and his audience. He wrote his first draft quickly, focusing more on ideas than on grammar, style, and mechanics. Then he made some additions and deletions and fixed a few typos before submitting the draft for peer review. Here is the draft he submitted, together with the most helpful comments he received from classmates. The peer reviewers were asked to comment on global issues — audience appeal, focus, organization, content, and point of view — and to ignore any problems with grammar and punctuation. ROUGH DRAFT

Hooked on Credit Cards Credit card companies love to extend credit to college students. You see ads for these cards on campus bulletin boards and also on the Web. Why do companies market their product to a population that has no job and lacks a substantial credit history? They seem to be trying to hook us on their cards; unfortunately many of us do get hooked on a cycle of spending that leads to financial ruin. Banks require applicants for a loan to demonstrate a good credit history and some evidence of a source of

Good question. Is there more to the answer than you’ve written here? That is, why are these companies trying to hook us? (Mark) Some students do have jobs. (Sara) The assignment asks for a general audience; your thesis shouldn’t be about “us.” (Sara) Shouldn’t your thesis also explain how the companies hook students? (Tim)

54

2b

Good point. I never thought of it that way. (Sara) Mention the solicitors who show up during orientation? (Mark) This sentence sounds less formal than the rest of your essay. (Tim) I like this example. (Mark) Why not give us some numbers here? Just how low and how high? (Sara)

The shift to “you” seems odd. (Sara)

Maybe you could search LexisNexis for some statistical information. (Mark)

This paragraph seems sort of skimpy. (Tim)

This would be more convincing if you provided some evidence to back up your claim. (Mark)

You shift from “you” to “I” here. (Sara) Cite this? (Sara)

rev

Revising

income, but credit card companies don’t. On campus, students are bombarded with offers of preapproved credit cards. Then there are the Web sites. Sites with lots of student traffic are plastered with banner ads like this one: “To get a credit card, you need to establish credit. To establish credit, you need a credit card. Stop the vicious cycle! Apply for our student MasterCard.” Credit card companies often entice students with low interest rates, then they jack up the rates later. A student may not think about the cost of interest. That new stereo or back-to-school wardrobe can get pretty expensive at 17.9% interest if it’s compounded over several months. Would you have bought that $600 item if you knew it would end up costing you $900? Most cards allow the holder to keep a revolving balance, which means that they don’t have to pay the whole bill, they just pay a minimum amount. The minimum is usually not too much, but a young person may be tempted to keep running up debt. The companies also give students an unrealistically high credit limit. I’ve heard of undergraduates who had a limit as high as $4,000. Card companies make money not just from high interest rates. Often they charge fees for late payments. I’ve heard of penalties for going over the credit limit too. Often students discover too late that they are thoroughly trapped. Some drop out of school, others graduate and then can’t find a good job because they have a poor credit rating. There are psychological problems too. Your parents may bail you out of debt, but you’ll probably feel guilty. On a Web site, I read that two students felt so bad they committed suicide.

ÃÌÕìÌÊiÃÃ>ÞÊ UÊ Ã>«iÊÀÕ}Ê`À>vÌ

rev

Credit cards are a part of life these days, and everyone is probably wise to have a charge account for emergencies. But college students must take a hard look at their financial picture. The very things that make those cards so convenient and easy to use can lead to a mountain of debt that will take years to pay off.

2b

55

Your paper focuses on the tactics that the companies use, but your conclusion doesn’t mention them. (Tim)

After rereading his draft and considering the feedback from his classmates, Watson realized that he needed to develop his thesis further. He set out some goals for revising his essay. MATT WATSON’S REVISION GOALS

Answer Mark’s question about what credit card companies gain by hooking students. Expand explanation of both why and how credit card companies market cards to students. Include evidence to back up claims about how credit card companies hook students. Look at reputable Web sites: student loan provider Nellie Mae and the Consumer Federation of America. Rework introduction to explain why credit card companies profit from students who have no steady source of income. Adjust point of view so that essay is appropriate for a general audience, not just for other students.

When he was more or less satisfied with the paper as a whole, Watson worked to polish his sentences. His final draft begins on the next page.

56

2b

rev

Revising

Watson 1 Matt Watson Professor Mills English 101 12 March 2001 Hooked on Credit Cards Introduction hooks readers with interesting details.

Credit card companies love to extend credit to college students, especially those just out of high school. Ads for credit cards line campus bulletin boards, flash across commercial Web sites for students, and get stuffed into shopping bags at college bookstores.

Introduction poses a question that leads readers to the thesis.

Why do the companies market their product so vigorously to a population that lacks a substantial credit history and often has no steady source of income? The answer is that significant profits can be earned through high interest rates and assorted penalties and fees.

Thesis announces Watson’s main point.

By granting college students liberal lending arrangements, credit card companies often hook them on a cycle of spending that can ultimately lead to financial ruin.

Whereas banks require applicants for a loan to demonstrate a Clear topic sentences guide readers good credit history and some evidence of income, credit card through the body of companies make no such demands on students. On campus, students the paper. find themselves bombarded with offers of preapproved cards—and not just on flyers pinned to bulletin boards. Many campuses allow credit card vendors to solicit applications during orientation week. In addition to offering preapproved cards, these vendors often give Essay is doublespaced throughout.

away T-shirts or CDs to entice students to apply. Some companies even offer rewards program bonuses based on a student’s GPA. Students are bombarded on the Web as well. Sites with heavy student traffic are emblazoned with banner ads like this one: “To get a credit card, you need to establish credit. To establish credit, you need a credit card. Stop the vicious cycle! Apply for our student MasterCard.”

Marginal annotations indicate MLA-style formatting and effective writing.

sample final draft

rev

2b

57

Watson 2 Credit card companies often entice students with low “teaser” interest rates of 13% and later raise those rates to 18% or even higher.

Body paragraphs are developed with details and examples.

Others charge high rates up front, trusting that students won’t read the fine print. Some young people don’t think about the cost of interest, let alone the cost of interest compounding month after month. That back-to-school wardrobe can get pretty expensive at 17.9% interest compounded over several months. A $600 trip to Fort Lauderdale is not such a bargain when in the long run it costs $900 or more. In addition to charging high interest rates, credit card companies try to maximize the amount of interest generated. One

Transition serves as a bridge between paragraphs.

tactic is to extend an unreasonably high credit limit to students. According to Nellie Mae statistics, in 1998 undergraduates were granted an average credit limit of $3,683; for graduate students, the

Summary of the source is in Watson’s own words.

figure jumped to $15,721. Nearly 10% of the students in the Nellie Mae study carried balances near or exceeding these credit limits (Blair). Another tactic is to allow students to maintain a revolving

Source is documented with an MLA in-text citation.

balance. A revolving balance permits the debtor to pay only part of a current bill, often an amount just a little larger than the accumulated interest. The indebted student is tempted to keep on charging, paying a minimum amount every month, because there aren’t any immediate consequences to doing so. Once a student is hooked on a cycle of debt, the companies profit even further by assessing a variety of fees and penalties. According to a press release issued by Consumer Action and the Consumer Federation of America, many credit card companies charge late fees and “over the limit” penalties as high as $29 per month. In addition, grace periods are often shortened to ensure that late fees kick in earlier. Many companies also raise interest rates for those who fail to pay on time or who exceed the credit limit. Those “penalty” rates can climb as high as 25% (1-2).

Watson cites a Web article from a reputable source.

58

2b

rev

Revising

Watson 3 Often students discover too late that they are thoroughly hooked. The results can be catastrophic. Some students are forced to drop out of school and take low-paying full-time jobs. Others, once they graduate, have difficulty landing good jobs because of their poor credit rating. Many students suffer psychologically as well. Even those who have parents willing to bail them out of debt often experience a great deal of anxiety and guilt. Two students grew so stressed by their accumulating debt that they committed suicide (Consumer Federation of Amer. 3). Conclusion echoes Watson’s main idea.

Credit cards are a convenient part of life, and there is nothing wrong with having one or two of them. Before signing up for a particular card, however, college students should take time to read the fine print and do some comparison shopping. Students also need to learn to resist the many seductive offers that credit card companies extend to them after they have signed up. Students who can’t “just say no” to temptations such as high credit limits and revolving balances could well become hooked on a cycle of debt from which there is no easy escape.

Ã>«iÊw>Ê`À>vÌÊ UÊÊ «ÀÌvÊ UÊÊ >ÃÃiÃÃiÌ

por

2c

59

Watson 4 Works Cited Blair, Alan D. “A High Wire Act: Balancing Student Loan and Credit Card Debt.” Credit World 86.2 (1997): 15-17. Business Source

Works cited page follows MLA format.

Premier. Web. 4 Mar. 2001. Consumer Action and Consumer Federation of America. “Card Issuers Hike Fees and Rates to Bolster Profits.” Consumer Federation of America. Consumer Federation of Amer., 5 Nov. 1998. Web. 4 Mar. 2001. Consumer Federation of America. “Credit Card Debt Imposes Huge Costs on Many College Students.” Consumer Federation of America. Consumer Federation of Amer., 8 June 1999. Web. 4 Mar. 2001.

2c Prepare a portfolio; reflect on your writing. At the end of the semester, your instructor may expect you to submit a portfolio, or collection, of your writing. A writing portfolio often consists of drafts, revised pieces, and reflective entries that demonstrate a writer’s thinking and learning processes or that showcase the writer’s best work. Your instructor may give you the choice of submitting a paper portfolio, often maintained and submitted in a folder or binder, or an e-portfolio, maintained and submitted as a Web site or as a collection of files on a flash drive or a CD. Your instructor may distinguish between a process portfolio and an evaluation portfolioÊ ÃiÌiÃÊ V>i`Ê >Ê assessment portfolio®°ÊÊ«ÀViÃÃÊ«ÀÌvÊ>ÜÃÊÞÕÊÌÊìÃÌÀ>ÌiÊÞÕÀÊ development as a writer; in it you will collect notes, outlines, brainstorming, reflective journal or blog entries, multiple drafts — in short, the messy stuff. In an evaluation portfolio, you will include a few select final pieces that have perhaps been revised multiple times, along with early drafts of those pieces. At the end of the semester, you may be asked to reshape your process portfolio into an evaluation portfolio.

60

2c

por

Revising

As early in the course as possible, be sure you know the answers to the following questions: UÊ -Õ`ÊÌiÊ«ÀÌvÊLiÊ>Ê«>«iÀÊViVÌÊÀÊ>ÊiiVtronic one? Is it your choice? UÊ 7ÊÌiÊ«ÀÌvÊLiÊ>Ê«ÀViÃÃÊ«ÀÌv]Ê>ÊiÛ>Õ>ÌÊ portfolio, or some combination of the two? UÊ 7ÊÌiÊ«ÀÌvÊLiÊViVi`ÊÀÊ>ÃÃiÃÃi`ÊLivÀiÊÌiÊi`Ê of the term? If so, when or how often? UÊ ÀiÊÞÕÊvÀiiÊÌÊVÃiÊ>ÞÊÀÊ>ÊvÊÌiÊ«iViÃÊÌÊVÕì¶ UÊ ÀiÊÞÕÊvÀiiÊÌÊVÕìÊ>ÊÛ>ÀiÌÞÊvÊÌiÃÊÌÊÕÃÌÊÀÕ}Ê >`Êw>Ê`À>vÌÃÊvÊ«>«iÀÃ®]ÊÃÕVÊ>ÃÊÕÌiÃÊ>`ÊÌiÃ]Ê journal entries, photographs or other visuals, comments from readers, sound files, or video clips? UÊ 7ÊÞÕÀÊÃÌÀÕVÌÀÊLiÊÌiÊ«À>ÀÞÊÀÊÞÊ>ÕìViÊvÀÊ the portfolio? Or will the portfolio be shared with peers or with other instructors? UÊ 7ÊÜÊiÛ>Õ>ÌiÊÌiÊ«ÀÌv¶ Reflection — the process of stepping back periodically to examine your decisions, preferences, strengths, and challenges as a writer — is the backbone of portfolio keeping. Many instructors require writers to submit a number of reflective entries throughout the semester. When you submit your portfolio for a final evaluation or reading, you may be asked to include a reflective opening statement — a cover letter, an introduction, a preface, or an essay. Whatever form your reflective piece takes, it could be your most important writing in the course. You will need to show that you can identify the strengths and weaknesses of your writing, comment on the progress you’ve made in the course, understand your own writing process, and make good writing decisions. Your instructor or other evaluator will expect you to reflect on how the specific pieces in the portfolio show your development as a writer.

«ÀÌvÊ UÊ ÀiyiVÌÛiÊÜÀÌ}Ê

por

2c

Writing a reflective opening statement for your portfolio Your instructor may require a reflective document in which you introduce the pieces in your portfolio and comment on your development as a writer throughout the course. Your document may take the form of an essay, a cover letter, or another introductory statement. Check with your instructor about the form this document should take. For an effective portfolio cover document, you might try one or more of the following strategies: U Discuss, in depth, your best entry. Explain why it is your best and how it reflects what you learned in the course. U Discuss each piece of writing you’ve included, touching on its strengths. U Describe in detail the revisions you’ve made to one key piece and the improvements and changes you want others to notice. Include specific passages from the piece. U Demonstrate what this portfolio illustrates about you as a writer, student, researcher, or critical thinker. U Acknowledge the readers or reviewers who have influenced your portfolio and describe their influence. U Reflect on what you’ve learned about writing, reading, or other topics of the course. U Acknowledge an important challenge you faced in your writing and show how you worked to overcome it. Where possible, include specific references to one or more pieces in your portfolio. U Reflect on how you plan to take the skills and experiences from your writing course into other courses where writing will be assigned. Keep in mind that it is critical to write multiple drafts of the reflective cover document, perhaps getting feedback from a peer, a tutor, or your instructor between drafts.

61

62

3 3

par

Writing paragraphs

Build effective paragraphs.

Except for special-purpose paragraphs, such as introductions >`Ê VVÕÃÃÊ ÃiiÊ £iÊ >`Ê £}®]Ê «>À>}À>«ÃÊ >ÀiÊ VÕÃÌiÀÃÊ vÊ vÀ>ÌÊ ÃÕ««ÀÌ}Ê >Ê iÃÃ>Þ½ÃÊ >Ê «ÌÊ ÀÊ >`Û>V}Ê >ÊÃÌÀÞ½ÃÊ>VÌ®°ÊÊvÀÊ«>À>}À>«ÃÊÌ>ÌÊ>ÀiÊVi>ÀÞÊvVÕÃi`]Ê well developed, organized, coherent, and neither too long nor too short for easy reading.

3a Focus on a main point. A paragraph should be unified around a main point. The point should be clear to readers, and all sentences in the paragraph should relate to it.

Stating the main point in a topic sentence As readers move into a paragraph, they need to know where they are — in relation to the whole essay — and what to expect in the sentences to come. A good topic sentence, a one-sentence summary of the paragraph’s main point, acts as a signpost pointing in two directions: backward toward the thesis of the essay and forward toward the body of the paragraph. Ê iÊ >Ê ÌiÃÃÊ ÃiÌiViÊ ÃiiÊ £VÊ >`Ê £i®]Ê >Ê Ì«VÊ ÃiÌiViÊ is more general than the material supporting it. Usually the Ì«VÊ ÃiÌiViÊ Ì>Vâi`Ê Ê ÌiÊ vÜ}Ê iÝ>«i®Ê ViÃÊ first in the paragraph. All living creatures manage some form of communication. The dance patterns of bees in their hive help to point the way to distant flower fields or announce successful foraging. Male stickleback fish regularly swim upside-down to indicate outrage in a courtship contest. Male deer and lemurs mark territorial ownership by rubbing their own body secretions on boundary stones or trees. Everyone has seen a frightened dog put his tail between his legs and run in panic. We, too, use gestures, expressions, postures, and movement to give our words point. [Italics added.] — Olivia Vlahos, Human Beginnings

«>À>}À>«ÃÊ UÊ >Ê«ÌÊ UÊ Ì«VÊÃiÌiVi

par

3a

Sometimes the topic sentence is introduced by a transitional sentence linking it to earlier material. In the following paragraph, the topic sentence has been delayed to allow for a transition. But flowers are not the only source of spectacle in the wilderness. An opportunity for late color is provided by the berries of wildflowers, shrubs, and trees. Baneberry presents its tiny white flowers in spring but in late summer bursts forth with clusters of red berries. Bunchberry, a ground-cover plant, puts out red berries in the fall, and the red berries of wintergreen last from autumn well into the winter. In California, the bright red, fist-sized clusters of Christmas berries can be seen growing beside highways for up to six months of the year. [Italics added.] — James Crockett et al., Wildflower Gardening

Occasionally the topic sentence may be withheld until the end of the paragraph — but only if the earlier sentences hang together so well that readers perceive their direction, if not their exact point. The opening sentences of the following paragraph state facts, so they are supporting material rather than topic sentences, but they strongly suggest a central idea. The topic sentence at the end is hardly a surprise. Tobacco chewing starts as soon as people begin stirring. Those who have fresh supplies soak the new leaves in water and add ashes from the hearth to the wad. Men, women, and children chew tobacco and all are addicted to it. Once there was a shortage of tobacco in K¸aobawä’s village and I was plagued for a week by early morning visitors who requested permission to collect my cigarette butts in order to make a wad of chewing tobacco. Normally, if anyone is short of tobacco, he can request a share of someone else’s already chewed wad, or simply borrow the entire wad when its owner puts it down somewhere. Tobacco is so important to them that their word for “poverty” translates as “being without tobacco.” [Italics added.] — Napoleon A. Chagnon, Yanomamö: The Fierce People

You will find that some professional writers, especially journalists and informal essayists, do not always use clear

63

64

3a

par

Writing paragraphs

topic sentences. In college writing, however, topic sentences are often necessary Topic sentences let your reader for clarifying the lines of an argument or know how a body paragraph relates to your essay’s thesis. reporting the research in a field. In busi0 Effective thesis statements: 1e iÃÃÊÜÀÌ}]ÊÌ«VÊÃiÌiViÃÊ>}ÊÜÌÊ i>`}Ã®Ê >ÀiÊ iÃÃiÌ>Ê LiV>ÕÃiÊ Ài>ìÀÃÊ often scan for information. Making the most of your handbook

Sticking to the point Sentences that do not support the topic sentence destroy the unity of a paragraph. If the paragraph is otherwise focused, such sentences can simply be deleted or perhaps moved elsewhere. In the following paragraph describing the inadequate facilities in a high school, the information about the chemisÌÀÞÊÃÌÀÕVÌÀÊÊÌ>VÃ®ÊÃÊVi>ÀÞÊvvÊÌiÊ«Ì°Ê As the result of tax cuts, the educational facilities of Lincoln High School have reached an all-time low. Some of ÌiÊLÃÊ`>ÌiÊL>VÊÌÊ£äÊ>`Ê>ÛiÊ}ÊÃViÊÃi`ÊÌiÀÊ covers. The few computers in working order must share one printer. The lack of lab equipment makes it necessary for four or five students to work at one table, with most watching rather than performing experiments. Also, the chemistry instructor left to have a baby at the beginning of the semester, and most of the students don’t like the substitute. As for the furniture, many of the upright chairs have become recliners, and the desk legs are so unbalanced that they play seesaw on the floor. [Italics added.]

Sometimes the solution for a disunified paragraph is not as simple as deleting or moving material. Writers often wander into uncharted territory because they cannot think of enough evidence to support a topic sentence. Feeling that it is too soon to break into a new paragraph, they move on to new ideas for which they have not prepared the reader. When this happens, the writer is faced with a choice: Either find more evidence to support the topic sentence or adjust the topic sentence to mesh with the evidence that is available.


More than one point in this paragraph

Understanding the comment When a teacher or tutor tells you that you have “more than one point in this paragraph,” the comment often signals that not all sentences in your paragraph support the topic sentence. Bringing casino gaming to Massachusetts would benefit the state in a number of ways. First, it would provide needed property tax relief for many of the state’s towns and cities. Casino gaming would also bring in revenue needed to fix the state’s roads and bridges. The speaker of the House of Representatives is blocking the governor’s proposal because he believes the social costs are greater than the economic benefits. Many people agree with the speaker. Most important, casino More than gaming would provide jobs in areas of the state that one point in ph have suffered economically in recent years. this paragra

One student wrote this body paragraph in response to an assignment that asked him to take a position on a current issue.

The topic sentence promises a discussion of benefits, but the detour into risks strays from the point. To revise, the student should focus on the key word in his topic sentence — benefit — because that signals to readers that the paragraph will examine the advantages of casino gaming. He might focus his paragraph by providing specific examples of benefits and deleting references to risks, perhaps using risks as counterpoints in a separate paragraph.

Similar comments: unfocused s lacks unity s hard to follow

Strategies for revising when you have more than one point in a paragraph 1. Reread your paragraph and ask questions. What is the main point of the paragraph? Is there a topic sentence that signals to readers what to expect in the rest of the paragraph? Does each sentence support the topic sentence and logically follow from the one before? Have you included sentences that perhaps belong elsewhere in your paper? 2. Remember the purpose of topic sentences; they serve as important signposts for readers. Make sure that the wording of your topic sentence is precise and that you have enough evidence to support it in the paragraph. More advice on unifying paragraphs: 3d

65

66

3b

par

Writing paragraphs

EXERCISE 3–1 Underline the topic sentence in the following paragraph and cross out any material that does not clarify or develop the central idea. Quilt making has served as an important means of social, political, and artistic expression for women. In the nineteenth century, quilting circles provided one of the few opportunities for women to forge social bonds outside of their families. Once a week or more, they came together to sew as well as trade small talk, advice, and news. They used dyed cotton fabrics much like the fabrics quilters use today; surprisingly, quilters’ basic materials haven’t changed that much over the years. Sometimes the women joined their efforts in support of a political cause, making quilts that would be raffled to raise money for temperance societies, hospitals for sick and wounded soldiers, and the fight against slavery. Quilt making also afforded women a means of artistic expression at a time when they had few other creative outlets. Within their socially acceptable roles as homemakers, many quilters subtly pushed back at the restrictions placed on them by experimenting with color, design, and technique. hackerhandbooks.com/bedhandbook > Writing exercises > E-ex 3–2

3b Develop the main point. Though an occasional short paragraph is fine, particularly if it functions as a transition or emphasizes a point, a series of brief paragraphs suggests inadequate development. How much development is enough? That varies, depending on the writer’s purpose and audience. For example, when health columnist Jane Brody wrote a paragraph attempting to convince readers that it is impossible to lose fat quickly, she knew that she would have to present a great deal of evidence because many dieters want to believe the opposite. She did not write only the following: When you think about it, it’s impossible to lose — as many diets suggest — £äÊ«Õ`ÃÊvÊfat in ten days, even on a total fast. Even a moderately active person cannot lose so much weight so fast. A less active person hasn’t a prayer.

>Ê«ÌÊ UÊ ìÌ>ÃÊ UÊÊ À}>â>ÌÊ UÊ iÝ>«iÃÊ UÊ ÕÃÌÀ>ÌÃ

par

3c

This three-sentence paragraph is too skimpy to be convincing. But the paragraph that Brody did write contains enough evidence to convince even skeptical readers. When you think about it, it’s impossible to lose — as >ÞÊ°Ê°Ê°ÊìÌÃÊÃÕ}}iÃÌÊpÊ£äÊ«Õ`ÃÊvÊfat in ten days, even Ê>ÊÌÌ>Êv>ÃÌ°ÊÊ«Õ`ÊvÊL`ÞÊv>ÌÊÀi«ÀiÃiÌÃÊÎ]xääÊV>ÀiÃ°Ê /ÊÃiÊ£Ê«Õ`ÊvÊv>Ì]ÊÞÕÊÕÃÌÊiÝ«i`ÊÎ]xääÊÀiÊV>ÀiÃÊ Ì>ÊÞÕÊVÃÕi°ÊiÌ½ÃÊÃ>ÞÊÞÕÊÜi}Ê£ÇäÊ«Õ`ÃÊ>`]Ê>ÃÊ>Ê ìÀ>ÌiÞÊ>VÌÛiÊ«iÀÃ]ÊÞÕÊLÕÀÊÓ]xääÊV>ÀiÃÊ>Ê`>Þ°ÊvÊ ÞÕÀÊìÌÊVÌ>ÃÊÞÊ£]xääÊV>ÀiÃ]ÊÞÕ½`Ê>ÛiÊ>ÊiiÀ}ÞÊ ìwVÌÊvÊ£]äääÊV>ÀiÃÊ>Ê`>Þ°ÊÊ>ÊÜii½ÃÊÌiÊÌ>ÌÊÜÕ`Ê>``Ê Õ«ÊÌÊ>ÊÇ]äääV>ÀiÊìwVÌ]ÊÀÊÓÊ«Õ`ÃÊvÊÀi>Êv>Ì°ÊÊÌiÊ days, the accumulated deficit would represent nearly 3 pounds of lost body fat. Even if you ate nothing at all for ten days and maintained your usual level of activity, your caloric deficit ÜÕ`Ê>``ÊÕ«ÊÌÊÓx]äääÊV>ÀiÃ°Ê°Ê°Ê°ÊÌÊÎ]xääÊV>ÀiÃÊ«iÀÊ pound of fat, that’s still only 7 pounds of lost fat. — Jane Brody, Jane Brody’s Nutrition Book

3c Choose a suitable pattern of organization. ÌÕ}Ê«>À>}À>«ÃÊ>`Êìi`ÊÜiÊiÃÃ>ÞÃ®Ê>ÞÊLiÊ«>Ìterned in any number of ways, certain patterns of organization occur frequently, either alone or in combination: examples and illustrations, narration, description, process, comparison and contrast, analogy, cause and effect, classification and diviÃ]Ê>`ÊìwÌ°Ê/iÃiÊ«>ÌÌiÀÃÊÃiÌiÃÊV>i`Êmethods of development®Ê>ÛiÊ`vviÀiÌÊÕÃiÃ]Êì«i`}ÊÊÌiÊÜÀÌiÀ½ÃÊ subject and purpose.

Examples and illustrations Examples, perhaps the most common pattern of development, are appropriate whenever the reader might be tempted to ask, “For example?” Though examples are just selected instances, not a complete catalog, they are enough to suggest the truth of many topic sentences, as in the following paragraph.

67

68

3c

par

Writing paragraphs

Normally my parents abided scrupulously by “The Budget,” but several times a year Dad would dip into his battered black strongbox and splurge on some irrational, totally satisfying luxury. Once he bought over a hundred comic books at a flea market, doled out to us thereafter at the tantalizing rate of two a week. He always got a whole flat of pansies, Mom’s favorite flower, for us to give her on Mother’s Day. One day a boy stopped at our house selling fifty-cent raffle tickets on a sailboat and Dad bought every ticket the boy had left — three books’ worth. — Connie Hailey, student

Illustrations are extended examples, frequently presented in story form. Because they require several sentences apiece, they are used more sparingly than examples. When well selected, however, they can be a vivid and effective means of developing a point. The writer of the following paragraph uses illustrations to demonstrate that Harriet Tubman, the underground railroad’s most famous conductor, was a genius at eluding her pursuers. Part of [Harriet Tubman’s] strategy of conducting was, as in all battle-field operations, the knowledge of how and when to retreat. Numerous allusions have been made to her moves when she suspected that she was in danger. When she feared the party was closely pursued, she would take it for a time on a train southward bound. No one seeing Negroes going in this direction would for an instant suppose them to be fugitives. Once on her return she was at a railroad station. She saw some men reading a poster and she heard one of them reading it aloud. It was a description of her, offering a reward for her capture. She took a southbound train to avert suspicion. At another time when Harriet heard men talking about her, she pretended to read a book which she carried. One man remarked, “This can’t be the woman. The one we want can’t read or write.” Harriet devoutly hoped the book was right side up. — Earl Conrad, Harriet Tubman

Narration A paragraph of narration tells a story or part of a story. Narrative paragraphs are usually arranged in chronological order,

À}>â>ÌÊ UÊ iÝ>«iÃÊ U ÕÃÌÀ>ÌÃÊ UÊ >ÀÀ>ÌÊ UÊ ìÃVÀ«Ì

par

3c

but they may also contain flashbacks, interruptions that take the story back to an earlier time. The following paragraph, vÀÊ>iÊ`>½ÃÊIn the Shadow of Man, recounts one of the author’s experiences in the African wild. One evening when I was wading in the shallows of the lake to pass a rocky outcrop, I suddenly stopped dead as I saw the sinuous black body of a snake in the water. It was all of six feet long, and from the slight hood and the dark stripes at the back of the neck I knew it to be a Storm’s water cobra — a deadly reptile for the bite of which there was, at that time, no serum. As I stared at it an incoming wave gently deposited part of its body on one of my feet. I remained motionless, not even breathing, until the wave rolled back into the lake, drawing the snake with it. Then I leaped out of the water as fast as I could, my heart hammering. Ê pÊ>iÊ`>]ÊIn the Shadow of Man

Description A descriptive paragraph sketches a portrait of a person, place, or thing by using concrete and specific details that appeal to one or more of our senses — sight, sound, smell, taste, and touch. Consider, for example, the following description of the grasshopper invasions that devastated the midwestern landÃV>«iÊÊÌiÊ>ÌiÊ£nÈäÃ°Ê They came like dive bombers out of the west. They came by the millions with the rustle of their wings roaring overhead. They came in waves, like the rolls of the sea, descending with a terrifying speed, breaking now and again like a mighty surf. They came with the force of a williwaw and they formed a huge, ominous, dark brown cloud that eclipsed the sun. They dipped and touched earth, hitting objects and people like hailstones. But they were not hail. These were live demons. They popped, snapped, crackled, and roared. They were dark brown, an inch or longer in length, plump in the middle and tapered at the ends. They had transparent wings, slender legs, and two black eyes that flashed with a fierce intelligence. — Eugene Boe, “Pioneers to Eternity”

69

70

3c

par

Writing paragraphs

Process A process paragraph is structured in chronological order. A writer may choose this pattern either to describe how something is made or done or to explain to readers, step by step, how to do something. The following paragraph describes what happens when water freezes. In school we learned that with few exceptions the solid phase of matter is more dense than the liquid phase. Water, alone among common substances, violates this rule. As water begins to cool, it contracts and becomes more dense, in a perfectly typical way. But about four degrees above the freezing point, something remarkable happens. It ceases to contract and begins expanding, becoming less dense. At the freezing point the expansion is abrupt and drastic. As water turns to ice, it adds about one-eleventh to its liquid volume. — Chet Raymo, “Curious Stuff, Water and Ice”

Here is a paragraph explaining how to perform a “roll cast,” a popular fly-fishing technique. Begin by taking up a suitable stance, with one foot slightly in front of the other and the rod pointing down the line. Then begin a smooth, steady draw, raising your rod hand ÌÊÕÃÌÊ>LÛiÊÃÕìÀÊi}ÌÊ>`ÊvÌ}ÊÌiÊÀ`ÊÌÊÌiÊ£ä\ÎäÊ ÀÊ££\ääÊ«ÃÌ°Ê/ÃÊÃÌi>`ÞÊ`À>ÜÊ>ÜÃÊ>Ê«ÊvÊiÊÌÊ form between the rod top and the water. While the line is still moving, raise the rod slightly, then punch it rapidly forward and down. The rod is now flexed and under maximum compression, and the line follows its path, bellying out slightly behind you and coming off the water close to your feet. As ÞÕÊ«ÜiÀÊÌiÊÀ`Ê`ÜÊÌÀÕ}ÊÌiÊÎ\ääÊ«ÃÌ]ÊÌiÊLiÞÊ of line will roll forward. Follow through smoothly so that the line unfolds and straightens above the water. — The Dorling Kindersley Encyclopedia of Fishing

Comparison and contrast To compare two subjects is to draw attention to their similarities, although the word compare also has a broader meaning

À}>â>ÌÊ UÊ «ÀViÃÃÊ UÊ V«>ÀÃÊ UÊ VÌÀ>ÃÌ

par

3c

that includes a consideration of differences. To contrast is to focus only on differences. Whether a paragraph stresses similarities or differences, it may be patterned in one of two ways. The two subjects may be presented one at a time, as in the following paragraph of contrast. Ê -ÊÀ>ÌÊ>`ÊiiÊÜiÀiÊÊV«iÌiÊVÌÀ>ÃÌ]ÊÀi«ÀiÃiÌing two diametrically opposed elements in American life. À>ÌÊÜ>ÃÊÌiÊìÀÊ>ÊiiÀ}}ÆÊLiÞ`Ê]ÊÀi>`ÞÊ to come on the stage, was the great age of steel and machinery, of crowded cities and a restless, burgeoning vitality. Lee might have ridden down from the old age of chivalry, lance in hand, silken banner fluttering over his head. Each man was the perfect champion of his cause, drawing both his strengths and his weaknesses from the people he led. Ê pÊ ÀÕViÊ >ÌÌ]ÊºÀ>ÌÊ>`Êii\ÊÊ-ÌÕ`ÞÊÊ ÌÀ>ÃÌÃ»Ê

Or a paragraph may proceed point by point, treating the two subjects together, one aspect at a time. The following paragraph uses the point-by-point method to contrast speeches }ÛiÊLÞÊLÀ>>ÊVÊÊ£nÈäÊ>`Ê >À>VÊ"L>>ÊÊÓään° Two men, two speeches. The men, both lawyers, both from Illinois, were seeking the presidency, despite what seemed their crippling connection with extremists. Each was young by modern standards for a president. Abraham Lincoln had turned fifty-one just five days before delivering his speech. Barack Obama was forty-six when he gave his. Their political experience was mainly provincial, in the Illinois legislature for both of them, and they had received little exposure at the national level — two years in the House of Representatives for Lincoln, four years in the Senate for Obama. Yet each was seeking his party’s nomination against a New York senator of longer standing and greater prior reputation — Lincoln against Senator William Seward, Obama against Senator Hillary Clinton. They were both known for having opposed an initially popular war — Lincoln against President Polk’s Mexican War, raised on the basis of a fictitious provocation;

71

72

3c

par

Writing paragraphs

Obama against President Bush’s Iraq War, launched on false claims that Saddam Hussein possessed WMDs [weapons of mass destruction] and had made an alliance with Osama LÊ>ì°Ê pÊ>ÀÀÞÊ7Ã]Êº/ÜÊ-«iiViÃÊÊ,>Vi»

Analogy Analogies draw comparisons between items that appear to have little in common. Writers turn to analogies for a variety of reasons: to make the unfamiliar seem familiar, to provide a concrete understanding of an abstract topic, to argue a point, or to provoke fresh thoughts or changed feelings about a subject. In the following paragraph, physician Lewis Thomas draws an analogy between the behavior of ants and that of humans. Ants are so much like human beings as to be an embarrassment. They farm fungi, raise aphids as livestock, launch armies into wars, use chemical sprays to alarm and confuse enemies, capture slaves. The families of weaver ants engage in child labor, holding their larvae like shuttles to spin out the thread that sews the leaves together for their fungus gardens. They exchange information ceaselessly. They do everything but watch television. — Lewis Thomas, “On Societies as Organisms”

Although analogies can be a powerful tool for illuminating a subject, they should be used with caution in arguments. Just because two things may be alike in one respect, we cannot VVÕìÊ Ì>ÌÊ ÌiÞÊ >ÀiÊ >iÊ Ê >Ê ÀiÃ«iVÌÃ°Ê -iiÊ ºv>ÃiÊ >>}Þ]»Ê«°Ê£Ó£°®Ê

Cause and effect When causes and effects are a matter of argument, they are too V«iÝÊÌÊLiÊÀi`ÕVi`ÊÌÊ>ÊÃ«iÊ«>ÌÌiÀÊÃiiÊ«°Ê£Ó£®°ÊÜever, if a writer wishes merely to describe a cause-and-effect relationship that is generally accepted, then the effect may be stated in the topic sentence, with the causes listed in the body of the paragraph.

À}>â>ÌÊ UÊ >>}ÞÊ UÊ V>ÕÃiÊ UÊ ivviVÌÊ UÊ V>ÃÃwV>ÌÊ UÊ `ÛÃ

par

3c

Ê /iÊv>Ì>ÃÌVÊÜ>ÌiÀÊV>ÀÌÞÊvÊÌiÊÕÌÊ>LiÀÊ sinkholes results from several factors. The holes are fed from aquifers holding rainwater that fell decades — even centuries — ago, and that has been filtered through miles of limestone. The high level of calcium that limestone adds causes the silty detritus from dead plants and animals to cling together and settle quickly to the bottom. Abundant bottom vegetation in the shallow sinkholes also helps bind the silt. And the rapid turnover of water prohibits stagnation. — Hillary Hauser, “Exploring a Sunken Realm in Australia”

Or the paragraph may move from cause to effects, as in this paragraph from a student paper on the effects of the industrial revolution on American farms. The rise of rail transport in the nineteenth century forever changed American farming — for better and for worse. Farmers who once raised crops and livestock to sustain just their own families could now make a profit by selling their goods in towns and cities miles away. These new markets improved the living standard of struggling farm families and encouraged them to seek out innovations that would increase their profits. On the downside, the competition fostered by the new markets sometimes created hostility among neighboring farm families where there had once been a spirit of cooperation. Those farmers who couldn’t compete with their neighbors left farming forever, facing poverty worse than they had ever known. — Chris Mileski, student

Classification and division Classification is the grouping of items into categories according to some consistent principle. For example, an elementary school teacher might classify children’s books according to their level of difficulty, but a librarian might group them by subject matter. The principle of classification that a writer chooses ultimately depends on the purpose of the classification. The following paragraph classifies species of electric fish.

73

74

3c

par

Writing paragraphs

Scientists sort electric fishes into three categories. The first comprises the strongly electric species like the marine electric rays or the freshwater African electric catfish and South American electric eel. Known since the dawn of history, these deliver a punch strong enough to stun a human. In recent years, biologists have focused on a second category: weakly electric fish in the South American and African rivers that use tiny voltages for communication and navigation. The third group contains sharks, nonelectric rays, and catfish, which do not emit a field but possess sensors that enable them to detect the minute amounts of electricity that leak out of other organisms. — Anne and Jack Rudloe, “Electric Warfare: The Fish That Kill with Thunderbolts”

Division takes one item and divides it into parts. As with classification, division should be made according to some consistent principle. The following passage describes the components that make up a baseball. Like the game itself, a baseball is composed of many layers. One of the delicious joys of childhood is to take apart a baseball and examine the wonders within. You begin by removing the red cotton thread and peeling off the leather cover — which comes from the hide of a Holstein cow and has been tanned, cut, printed, and punched with holes. Beneath the cover is a thin layer of cotton string, followed by several hundred yards of woolen yarn, which makes up the bulk of the ball. Finally, in the middle is a rubber ball, or “pill,” which is a little smaller than a golf ball. Slice into the rubber and you’ll find the ball’s heart — a cork core. The cork is from Portugal, the rubber from southeast Asia, the covers are American, and the balls are assembled in Costa Rica. Ê pÊ >ÊÕÌ>]ÊThe Way Baseball Works

Definition A definition puts a word or concept into a general class and then provides enough details to distinguish it from others in the same class. In the following paragraph, the writer defines envy as a special kind of desire.

À}>â>ÌÊ UÊ V>ÃÃwV>ÌÊ U ìwÌÊ UÊ ViÀiViÊ UÊ yÜÊ

par

3d

Envy is so integral and so painful a part of what animates behavior in market societies that many people have forgotten the full meaning of the word, simplifying it into one of the synonyms of desire. It is that, which may be why it flourishes in market societies: democracies of desire, they might be called, with money for ballots, stuffing permitted. But envy is more or less than desire. It begins with an almost frantic sense of emptiness inside oneself, as if the pump of one’s heart were sucking on air. One has to be blind to perceive the emptiness, of course, but that’s just what envy is, a selective blindness. Invidia, Latin for envy, translates as “non-sight,” and Dante has the envious plodding along under cloaks of lead, their eyes sewn shut with leaden wire. What they are blind to is what ÌiÞÊ>Ûi]Ê`}ÛiÊ>`ÊÕ>ÞÊÕÀÌÕÀi`]ÊÊÌiÃiÛiÃ° — Nelson W. Aldrich Jr., Old Money

3d Make paragraphs coherent. When sentences and paragraphs flow from one to another without discernible bumps, gaps, or shifts, they are said to be coherent. Coherence can be improved by strengthening the ties between old information and new. A number of techniques for strengthening those ties are detailed in this section.

Linking ideas clearly Readers expect to learn a paragraph’s main point in a topic sentence early in the paragraph. Then, as they move into the body of the paragraph, they expect to encounter specific details, facts, or examples that support the topic sentence — either directly or indirectly. In the following paragraph, all of the sentences following the topic sentence directly support it. A passenger list of the early years [of the Orient Express] would read like a Who’s Who of the World, from art to politics. Sarah Bernhardt and her Italian counterpart Eleonora Duse used the train to thrill the stages of Europe. For musicians there were Toscanini and Mahler. Dancers Nijinsky and Pavlova were there, while lesser performers like Harry Houdini and the girls of the Ziegfeld Follies also rode the rails.

75

76

3d

par

Writing paragraphs

Violinists were allowed to practice on the train, and occasionally one might see trapeze artists hanging like bats from the baggage racks. — Barnaby Conrad III, “Train of Kings”

If a sentence does not support the topic sentence directly, readers expect it to support another sentence in the paragraph and therefore to support the topic sentence indirectly. The following paragraph begins with a topic sentence. The italicized sentences are direct supports, and the rest of the sentences are indirect supports. Though the open-space classroom works for many children, it is not practical for my son, David. First, David is hyperactive. When he was placed in an open-space classroom, he became distracted and confused. He was tempted to watch the movement going on around him instead of concentrating on his own work. Second, David has a tendency to transpose letters and numbers, a tendency that can be overcome only by individual attention from the instructor. In the open classroom he was moved from teacher to teacher, with each one responsible for a different subject. No single teacher worked with David long enough to diagnose the problem, let alone help him with it. Finally, David is not a highly motivated learner. In the open classroom, he was graded “at his own level,” not by criteria for a certain grade. He could receive a B in reading and still be a grade level behind, because he was doing satisfactory work “at his own level.” [Italics added.] — Margaret Smith, student

Repeating key words Repetition of key words is an important technique for gaining coherence. To prevent repetitions from becoming dull, you V>ÊÕÃiÊÛ>À>ÌÃÊvÊ>ÊiÞÊÜÀ`Êhike, hiker, hiking®]Ê«ÀÕÃÊ ÀiviÀÀ}ÊÌÊÌiÊÜÀ`ÊÊgamblers . . . they®]Ê>`ÊÃÞÞÃÊrun, spring, race, dash®°ÊÊÌiÊvÜ}Ê«>À>}À>«ÊìÃVÀL}Ê«ÌÃÊ among indentured servants in the seventeenth century, historian Richard Hofstadter binds sentences together by repeating the key word plots and echoing it with a variety of synonyms ÜVÊ>ÀiÊÌ>Vâi`®°

ViÀiViÊ UÊ yÜÊ UÊ iÞÊÜÀ`ÃÊ UÊ «>À>iÃ

par

3d

Plots hatched by several servants to run away together occurred mostly in the plantation colonies, and the few recorded servant uprisings were entirely limited to those colonies. Virginia had been forced from its very earliest years to take stringent steps against mutinous plots, and severe punishments for such behavior were recorded. Most servant plots occurred in the seventeenth century: a contemplated uprising was nipped in the bud in York County Ê£ÈÈ£ÆÊ>««>ÀiÌÞÊi`ÊLÞÊÃiÊivÌÜ}ÊvvÃÌÃÊvÊÌiÊ Great Rebellion, servants plotted an insurrectionÊÊÕViÃÌiÀÊ

ÕÌÞÊÊ£ÈÈÎ]Ê>`ÊvÕÀÊi>ìÀÃÊÜiÀiÊVìi`Ê>`Ê executed; some discontented servants apparently joined Bacon’s RebellionÊÊÌiÊ£ÈÇä½Ã°ÊÊÌiÊ£Ènä½ÃÊÌiÊ«>ÌiÀÃÊ became newly apprehensive of discontent among the servants “owing to their great necessities and want of clothes,” and it was feared they would rise up and plunder the storeÕÃiÃÊ>`ÊÃ«ÃÆÊÊ£ÈnÓÊÌiÀiÊÜiÀiÊ«>ÌVÕÌÌ}Êriots in which servants and laborers, as well as some planters, took part. [Italics added.] — Richard Hofstadter, America at 1750

Using parallel structures Parallel structures are frequently used within sentences to ÕìÀÃVÀiÊ ÌiÊ Ã>ÀÌÞÊ vÊ ì>ÃÊ ÃiiÊ ®°Ê /iÞÊ >ÞÊ >ÃÊ LiÊ used to bind together a series of sentences expressing similar information. In the following passage describing folk beliefs, anthropologist Margaret Mead presents similar information in parallel grammatical form. Actually, almost every day, even in the most sophisticated home, something is likely to happen that evokes the memory of some old folk belief. The salt spills. A knife falls to the floor. Your nose tickles. Then perhaps, with a slightly embarrassed smile, the person who spilled the salt tosses a pinch over his left shoulder. Or someone recites the old rhyme, “Knife falls, gentleman calls.” Or as you rub your nose you think, That means a letter. I wonder who’s writing? — Margaret Mead, “New Superstitions for Old”

77

78

3d

par

Writing paragraphs

Maintaining consistency Coherence suffers whenever a draft shifts confusingly from one point of view to another or from one verb tense to anÌiÀ°Ê -iiÊ £Î°®Ê Ê >``Ì]Ê ViÀiViÊ V>Ê ÃÕvviÀÊ ÜiÊ iÜÊ information is introduced with the subject of each sentence. As a rule, a sentence’s subject should echo a subject or an object in the previous sentence. The following rough-draft paragraph is needlessly hard to read because so few of the sentences’ subjects are tied to earlier subjects or objects. The subjects appear in italics. One goes about trapping in this manner. At the very outset one acquires a “trapping” state of mind. A library of books must be read, and preferably someone with experience should educate the novice. Preparing for the first expedition takes several steps. The purchase of traps is first. A pair of rubber gloves, waterproof boots, and the grubbiest clothes capable of withstanding human use come next to outfit the trapper for his adventure. Finally, the decision has to be made on just what kinds of animals to seek, what sort of bait to use, and where to place the traps. [Italics added.]

Although the writer repeats a number of key words, such as trapping, the paragraph seems disconnected because new information is introduced with the subject of each sentence. To improve the paragraph, the writer used the firstperson pronoun as the subject of every sentence. The revision is much easier to read. I went about trapping in this manner. To acquire a “trapping” state of mind, I read a library of books and talked at length with an experienced trapper, my father. Then I purchased the traps and outfitted myself by collecting a pair of rubber gloves, waterproof boots, and the grubbiest clothes capable of withstanding human use. Finally, I decided just what kinds of animals to seek, what sort of bait to use, and where to place my traps. [Italics added.] — John Clyde Thatcher, student

ViÀiViÊ UÊ yÜÊ UÊ VÃÃÌiVÞÊ UÊ ÌÀ>ÃÌÃ

par

3d

Notice that Thatcher combined some of his original sentences. By doing so, he was able to avoid excessive repetitions of the pronoun I. Notice, too, that he varied his sentence openings ÃÌÊÃiÌiViÃÊ`ÊÌÊLi}ÊÜÌÊI ®ÊÃÊÌ>ÌÊÀi>ìÀÃÊ>ÀiÊÌÊ likely to find the repetitions tiresome.

Providing transitions Transitions are bridges between what has been read and what is about to be read. Transitions help readers move from sentence to sentence; they also alert readers to more global connections of ideas — those between paragraphs or even larger blocks of text.

Choose transitions carefully and vary them >««À«À>ÌiÞ°Ê >VÊÌÀ>ÃÌÊ>ÃÊ>Ê`vviÀiÌÊi>}ÊÃiiÊÌiÊ V>ÀÌÊÊ«°Ên£®°ÊvÊÞÕÊ`ÊÌÊÕÃiÊ>ÊÌÀ>ÃÌÊÜÌÊ>Ê>««À«À>ÌiÊ meaning, you might confuse your readers. 0

Although taking eight o’clock classes may seem unappealing, coming to school early has its advan-

'PSFYBNQMF

tages. Moreover, students who arrive early typically

?

avoid the worst traffic and find the best parking spaces.

Sentence-level transitions Certain words and phrases signal ViVÌÃÊLiÌÜiiÊÀÊÜÌ®ÊÃiÌiViÃ°ÊÀiµÕiÌÞÊÕÃi`Ê ÌÀ>ÃÌÃÊ>ÀiÊVÕì`ÊÊÌiÊV>ÀÌÊÊ«>}iÊn£° Skilled writers use transitional expressions with care, making sure, for example, not to use consequently when also would be more precise. They are also careful to select transitions with an appropriate tone, perhaps preferring so to thus in an informal piece, in summary to in short for a scholarly essay. In the following paragraph, taken from an argument that dinosaurs had the “‘right-sized’ brains for reptiles of their body

79


|

Need a transition

When a teacher or tutor points out that you “need a transition,” the comment often signals that readers need bridges — transitional words — to follow the progression from one idea to the next. The United States of America is one of many countries in the world that were created by immigration. This essential characteristic is perhaps America’s greatest weakness and its greatest strength. Our country has the potential to be swallowed up by the diverse beliefs, values, and social practices of its ? immigrants so that nothing is common to anyone. America can benefit from embracing the amazing N ee d a tr a ns it io n cultural diversity within itself.

In this body paragraph, a student responded to an assignment that asked him to analyze a central feature of American identity.

Transitional words or phrases help readers follow the connections between sentences and ideas. To revise, the student might begin by asking: What idea is expressed in each sentence? Does each sentence point clearly back to the previous one? If not, what words or phrases might be added to help readers see how one idea moves to the next? The answers to these questions will help the student recognize that his last two sentences contrast with each other (one about weaknesses, one about strengths) but that he needs to provide a transitional word or phrase, such as however, before the last sentence to make the contrast clear.

Similar comments: something missing? s missing connection s transition?

Revising when you need a transition between sentences 1. Read your paragraph aloud to a peer or a tutor. Ask your listeners what is missing between sentences that would help them follow the progression from one idea to the next. 2. Ask questions. What words or phrases might be added to help readers move from sentence to sentence? For instance, do you need transitions to show addition (furthermore), to give examples (specifically), to compare (similarly), to contrast (however), or to summarize (in summary)? 3. Revise with an appropriate transition to show connections between ideas. More help with transitions: pages 79–83

80

ViÀiViÊ UÊ yÜÊ UÊ ÌÀ>ÃÌÃ

par

3d

Common transitions To show addition: and, also, besides, further, furthermore, in

addition, moreover, next, too, first, second To give examples: for example, for instance, to illustrate, in fact,

specifically To compare: also, in the same manner, similarly, likewise To contrast: but, however, on the other hand, in contrast,

nevertheless, still, even though, on the contrary, yet, although To summarize or conclude: in short, in summary, in conclusion,

to sum up, therefore To show time: after, as, before, next, during, later, finally,

meanwhile, then, when, while, immediately To show place or direction: above, below, beyond, nearby,

opposite, close, to the left To indicate logical relationship: if, so, therefore, consequently,

thus, as a result, for this reason, because, since

Ãâi]»ÊL}ÃÌÊ-Ìi«iÊ>ÞÊÕ`ÊÕÃiÃÊÌÀ>ÃÌÃÊÌ>Vâi`®Ê with skill. I don’t wish to deny that the flattened, minuscule head of large bodied Stegosaurus houses little brain from our subjective, top-heavy perspective, but I do wish to assert that we should not expect more of the beast. First of all, large animals have relatively smaller brains than related, small animals. The correlation of brain size with body size among `Ài`Ê>>ÃÊ>ÊÀi«ÌiÃ]Ê>Ê>>Ã]Êfor example®ÊÃÊ remarkably regular. As we move from small to large animals, from mice to elephants or small lizards to Komodo dragons, brain size increases, but not so fast as body size. In other words, bodies grow faster than brains, and large animals have low ratios of brain weight to body weight. In fact, brains grow only about two-thirds as fast as bodies. Since we have no reason to believe that large animals are consistently stupider than their smaller relatives, we must conclude that large animals require

81

82

3d

par

Writing paragraphs

relatively less brain to do as well as smaller animals. If we do not recognize this relationship, we are likely to underestimate the mental power of very large animals, dinosaurs in particular. [Italics added.] Ê pÊ-Ìi«iÊ>ÞÊÕ`]Êº7iÀiÊ Ã>ÕÀÃÊ ÕL¶» hackerhandbooks.com/bedhandbook > Writing exercises > E-ex 3–3

Paragraph-level transitions Paragraph-level transitions usually link the first sentence of a new paragraph with the first sentence of the previous paragraph. In other words, the topic sentences signal global connections. Look for opportunities to allude to the subject of a preÛÕÃÊ«>À>}À>«Ê>ÃÊÃÕi`ÊÕ«ÊÊÌÃÊÌ«VÊÃiÌiVi®ÊÊÌiÊ Ì«VÊÃiÌiViÊvÊÌiÊiÝÌÊi°ÊÊÃÊiÃÃ>ÞÊºÌÌiÊÀiiÊiÃ]»Ê Jonathan H. Alder uses this strategy in the following topic sentences, which appear in a passage describing the benefits of plastic packaging. Consider aseptic packaging, the synthetic packaging for the “juice boxes” so many children bring to school with their lunch. One criticism of aseptic packaging is that it is nearly impossible to recycle, yet on almost every other count, aseptic packaging is environmentally preferable to the packaging alternatives. Not only do aseptic containers not require refrigeration to keep their contents from spoiling, but ÌiÀÊ>Õv>VÌÕÀiÊÀiµÕÀiÃÊiÃÃÊÌ>Êi£äÌÊÌiÊiiÀ}ÞÊvÊ making glass bottles. What is true for juice boxes is also true for other forms of synthetic packaging. The use of polystyrene, which is comÞÊ>`ÊÃÌ>iÞ®ÊÀiviÀÀi`ÊÌÊ>ÃÊº-ÌÞÀv>]»ÊV>ÊÀiduce food waste dramatically due to its insulating properties. />ÃÊÌÊÌiÃiÊ«À«iÀÌiÃ]Ê«ÞÃÌÞÀiiÊVÕ«ÃÊ>ÀiÊÕVÊ«ÀiviÀÀi`ÊÛiÀÊ«>«iÀÊvÀÊÌ>ÌÊÀ}ÊVÕ«ÊvÊVvvii°®Ê*ÞÃÌÞÀiiÊ also requires significantly fewer resources to produce than its paper counterpart.

Transitions between blocks of text In long essays, you will need to alert readers to connections between blocks of text that are more than one paragraph long. You can do this by

ViÀiViÊ UÊ yÜÊ UÊ ÌÀ>ÃÌÃÊ UÊ «>À>}À>«Êi}Ì

par

3e

inserting transitional sentences or short paragraphs at key points in the essay. Here, for example, is a transitional paragraph from a student research paper. It announces that the first part of the paper has come to a close and the second part is about to begin. Although the great apes have demonstrated significant language skills, one central question remains: Can they be taught to use that uniquely human language tool we call grammar, to learn the difference, for instance, between “ape bite human” and “human bite ape”? In other words, can an ape create a sentence?

Another strategy to help readers move from one block of text to another is to insert headings in your essay. Headings, which usually sit above blocks of text, allow you to announce a new topic boldly, without the need for subtle transitions. -iiÊxnL°®

3e If necessary, adjust paragraph length. Most readers feel comfortable reading paragraphs that range between one hundred and two hundred words. Shorter paragraphs require too much starting and stopping, and longer ones strain readers’ attention span. There are exceptions to this guideline, however. Paragraphs longer than two hundred words frequently appear in scholarly writing, where scholars explore complex ideas. Paragraphs shorter than one hundred words occur in newspapers because of narrow columns; in informal essays to quicken the pace; and in business writing and Web sites, where readers routinely skim for main ideas. In an essay, the first and last paragraphs will ordinarily be the introduction and the conclusion. These special-purpose paragraphs are likely to be shorter than the paragraphs in the body of the essay. Typically, the body paragraphs will follow the essay’s outline: one paragraph per point in short essays, several paragraphs per point in longer ones. Some ideas require more development than others, however, so it is best to be

83

84

3e

par

Writing paragraphs

flexible. If an idea stretches to a length unreasonable for a paragraph, you should divide the paragraph, even if you have presented comparable points in the essay in single paragraphs. Paragraph breaks are not always made for strictly logical reasons. Writers use them for the following reasons as well. REASONS FOR BEGINNING A NEW PARAGRAPH

UÊ ÌÊ>ÀÊvvÊÌiÊÌÀ`ÕVÌÊ>`ÊÌiÊVVÕÃ UÊ ÌÊÃ}>Ê>ÊÃvÌÊÌÊ>ÊiÜÊì> UÊ ÌÊ`V>ÌiÊ>Ê«ÀÌ>ÌÊÃvÌÊÊÌiÊÀÊ«>Vi UÊ ÌÊi«>ÃâiÊ>Ê«ÌÊLÞÊ«>V}ÊÌÊ>ÌÊÌiÊLi}}ÊÀÊ ÌiÊi`]ÊÌÊÊÌiÊ`ì]ÊvÊ>Ê«>À>}À>«® UÊ ÌÊ}}ÌÊ>ÊVÌÀ>ÃÌ UÊ ÌÊÃ}>Ê>ÊV>}iÊvÊÃ«i>iÀÃÊÊ`>}Õi® UÊ ÌÊ«ÀÛìÊÀi>ìÀÃÊÜÌÊ>Êiiì`Ê«>ÕÃi UÊ ÌÊLÀi>ÊÕ«ÊÌiÝÌÊÌ>ÌÊÃÊÌÊìÃi Beware of using too many short, choppy paragraphs, however. Readers want to see how your ideas connect, and they become irritated when you break their momentum by forcing them to pause every few sentences. Here are some reasons you might have for combining some of the paragraphs in a rough draft. REASONS FOR COMBINING PARAGRAPHS

UÊ ÌÊV>ÀvÞÊÌiÊiÃÃ>Þ½ÃÊÀ}>â>Ì UÊ ÌÊViVÌÊVÃiÞÊÀi>Ìi`Êì>Ã UÊ ÌÊL`ÊÌ}iÌiÀÊÌiÝÌÊÌ>ÌÊÃÊÌÊV««ÞÊ

Part II

Academic Writing 4 Writing about texts 86 Ê UÊ Student essay: Analysis of an article Ê UÊ Student essay: Analysis of an advertisement

5 Constructing reasonable arguments 104 Ê UÊ Student essay: Argument 6 Evaluating arguments 118 7 Writing in the disciplines 129

85

86

4

texts

4

Writing about texts

Writing about texts

The word texts can refer to a variety of works, including essays, periodical articles, government reports, books, Web sites, and even visuals such as advertisements and photographs. Most assignments that ask you to respond to Making the most of your handbook a text call for a summary or an analysis Knowing the expectations for a or both. writing assignment is a key first A summary is neutral in tone and step in drafting. demonstrates that you have understood 0 Understanding an assignment: the author’s key ideas. Assignments calling page 9 for an analysis of a text vary widely, but they usually ask you to look at how the text’s parts contribute to its central argument or purpose, often with the aim of judging its evidence or overall effect. When you write about a written text, you will need to read it several times to digest its full meaning. Two techniques will help you move beyond a superficial first reading: (1) annotating the text with your observations and questions and (2) outlining the text’s key points. The same techniques will help you analyze visual texts.

4a Read actively: Annotate the text. Read actively by jotting down your questions and thoughts in the margins of the text or visual or in a notebook. When you annotate a text as you read, you are engaging with the work, not just letting the words slip past you. Use a pencil instead of a highlighter; with a pencil you can underline key concepts, mark points, or circle elements that intrigue you. If you change your mind, you can erase your early annotations and replace them with new ones. (See the chart on the following page for advice about active reading.) On pages 88 and 89 are an article from a consumeroriented newsletter and a magazine advertisement, both annotated by students. The students, Emilia Sanchez and Albert Lee, were assigned to write both a summary and an analysis. Each began by annotating the text.

Ì>}ÊÌiÃÊ UÊ >VÌÛiÊÀi>`}Ê UÊ VÀÌV>ÊÀi>`}

texts

4a

Guidelines for active reading Familiarize yourself with the basic features and structure of a text. U What kind of text are you reading? An essay? An editorial? A scholarly article? An advertisement? A photograph? U What is the author’s purpose? To inform? To persuade? To call to action? U Who is the audience? How does the author appeal to the audience? U What is the author’s thesis? What question does the text attempt to answer? U What evidence does the author provide to support the thesis?

Note details that surprise, puzzle, or intrigue you. U Has the author revealed a fact or made a point that runs counter to your assumptions? What exactly is surprising? U Has the author made a generalization you disagree with? Can you think of evidence that would challenge the generalization? U Are there any contradictions or inconsistencies in the text? U Does the text contain words, statements, or phrases that you don’t understand? If so, what reference materials could you consult?

Read and reread to discover meaning. U What do you notice on a second or third reading that you didn’t notice earlier? U Does the text raise questions that it does not resolve? U If you could address the author directly, what questions would you pose? Where do you agree and disagree with the author? Why?

Apply critical thinking strategies to visual texts. U What first strikes you about the visual text? What elements do you notice immediately? U Who or what is the main subject of the visual text? U What colors and textures dominate? U What is in the background? In the foreground? U What role, if any, do words play in the visual text?

87

88

4a

texts

Writing about texts

ANNOTATED ARTICLE

Big Box Stores Are Bad for Main Street BETSY TAYLOR

0QFOJOH There is plenty of reason to be concerned about the proliferaTUSBUFHZ¥ tion of Wal-Marts and other so-called “big box” stores. The UIFQSPCMFN JTOPUY JU©TZ question, however, is not whether or not these types of stores

create jobs (although several studies claim they produce a net job loss in local communities) or whether they ultimately save 4FOUJNFOUBM¥ consumers money. The real concern about having a 25-acre XIBUJTB DPNNVOJUZ©T slab of concrete with a 100,000 square foot box of stuff land on a town is whether it’s good for a community’s soul. TPVM The worst thing about “big boxes” is that they have -VNQTBMMCJH CPYFTUPHFUIFSa tendency to produce Ross Perot’s famous “big sucking sound” — sucking the life out of cities and small towns across the country. On the other hand, small businesses are great for a community. They offer more personal service; they "TTVNFT BMMTNBMM won’t threaten to pack up and leave town if they don’t get CVTJOFTTFT tax breaks, free roads and other blandishments; and smallBSFBUUFOUJWF business owners are much more responsive to a customer’s -PHJDQSPCMFN needs. (Ever try to complain about bad service or poor quality 8IZDPVMEO©U products to the president of Home Depot?) DVTUPNFSDPN Yet, if big boxes are so bad, why are they so successful? QMBJOUPTUPSF One glaring reason is that we’ve become a nation of NBOBHFS hyper-consumers, and the big-box boys know this. Downtown shopping districts comprised of small businesses take 5SVF some of the efficiency out of overconsumption. There’s all that hassle of having to travel from store to store, and having /PTUBMHJBGPSB to pull out your credit card so many times. Occasionally, we UJNFUIBUJT even find ourselves chatting with the shopkeeper, wandering MPOHHPOFPS into a coffee shop to visit with a friend or otherwise wasting OFWFSXBT precious time that could be spent on acquiring more stuff. But let’s face it — bustling, thriving city centers are fun. $PNNVOJUZWT They breathe life into a community. They allow cities and FDPOPNZ8IBU towns to stand out from each other. They provide an atmoBCPVUQSJDFT sphere for people to interact with each other that just cannot be found at Target, or Wal-Mart or Home Depot. Is it anti-American to be against having a retail giant set up &OETXJUI FNPUJPOBM shop in one’s community? Some people would say so. On the BQQFBM other hand, if you board up Main Street, what’s left of America?

>VÌÛiÊÀi>`}Ê UÊ VÀÌV>ÊÀi>`}Ê UÊ >ÀÌViÊÜÌÊÌiÃÊ UÊ >`ÊÜÌÊÌiÃÊ

texts

4a

89

ANNOTATED ADVERTISEMENT

8IBUTJHOBMTJT .D%POBMETHJWJOH DVTUPNFSTBCPVUJUTNFOV

*T.D%POBMETUSZJOH UPSFNBLFJUTJNBHF XJUIMFUUVDF

"SFBM DVTUPNFS

3FQFUJUJPO PG¦SFBM

-PDBMWT DPSQPSBUJPO .D%POBMET BTGBNJMZ SFTUBVSBOU

0QFO OPUIJOH UPIJEF

5SZJOHUPTIPX JUTDPNNJUNFOUUP DVTUPNFSTFSWJDF

90

4b

texts

Writing about texts

4b Sketch a brief outline of the text. After reading, rereading, and annotating a text, attempt to outline it. Seeing how the author has constructed a text can help you understand it. As you sketch an outline, pay special attention to the text’s thesis (central idea) and its topic sentences. The thesis of a written text usually appears in the introduction, often in the first or second paragraph. Topic sentences often can be found at the beginning of body paragraphs, where they announce a shift to a new topic. (See 1e and 3a.) In your outline, put the author’s thesis and key points in your own words. Here, for example, is the outline that Emilia Sanchez developed as she prepared to write her summary and analysis of the text printed on page 88. Notice that the outline does not simply trace the author’s ideas paragraph by paragraph; instead, it sums up the article’s central points. OUTLINE OF “BIG BOX STORES ARE BAD FOR MAIN STREET”

Thesis: Whether or not they take jobs away from a community or offer low prices to consumers, we should be worried about “big-box” stores like Wal-Mart, Target, and Home Depot because they harm communities by taking the life out of downtown shopping districts. I.

II.

Small businesses are better for cities and towns than big-box stores are. A. Small businesses offer personal service, and big-box stores do not. B. Small businesses don’t make demands on community resources as big-box stores do. C. Small businesses respond to customer concerns, and big-box stores do not. Big-box stores are successful because they cater to consumption at the expense of benefits to the community. A. Buying everything in one place is convenient. B. Shopping at small businesses may be inefficient, but it provides opportunities for socializing. C. Downtown shopping districts give each city or town a special identity.

ÕÌ}Ê UÊ >««}Ê UÊ ÃÕ>Àâ}

texts

4c

Conclusion: Although some people say that it’s anti-American to oppose big-box stores, actually these stores threaten the communities that make up America by encouraging buying at the expense of the traditional interactions of Main Street.

A visual often doesn’t state an explicit thesis or an explicit line of reasoning. Instead, you must sometimes infer the meaning beneath the image’s surface and interpret its central point and supporting ideas from the elements of its design. One way to outline a visual text is to try to define its purpose and sketch a list of its key elements. Here, for example, are the key features that Albert Lee identified for the advertisement printed on page 89. OUTLINE OF MCDONALD’S ADVERTISEMENT

Purpose: To persuade readers that McDonald’s is concerned about its customers’ health. Key features: U A close-up of a fresh, green lettuce leaf makes up the entire background. U Near the center is a comment card with a handwritten question from a “real” McDonald’s customer: “What makes your lettuce so crisp?” U A photograph of a smiling woman is clipped to the card. U Beneath the comment card is the company’s response, which emphasizes the farm-fresh quality and purity of its vegetables and urges customers to ask other candid questions. U At the bottom of the ad is the McDonald’s slogan “I’m lovin’ it.”

4c Summarize to demonstrate your understanding. Your goal in summarizing a text is to state the work’s main ideas and key points simply, briefly, and accurately in your own words. If you have sketched a brief outline of the text (see 4b), refer to it as you draft your summary.

91

92

4c

texts

Writing about texts

Summarizing a written text To summarize a written text, first find the author’s central idea — the thesis. Then divide the whole piece into a few major and perhaps minor ideas. Since a Making the most of your handbook summary must be fairly short, you must Knowing how to summarize a make judgments about what is most imsource is a key research skill. portant. Following is Emilia Sanchez’s 0 Using summaries in researched summary of the article that is printed on writing: 48c page 88. In her essay “Big Box Stores Are Bad for Main Street,” Betsy Taylor argues that chain stores harm communities by taking the life out of downtown shopping districts. Explaining that a community’s “soul” is more important than low prices or consumer convenience, she argues that small businesses are better than stores like Wal-Mart, Target, and Home Depot because they emphasize personal interactions and don’t place demands on a community’s resources. Taylor asserts that big-box stores are successful because “we’ve become a nation of hyper-consumers” (1011), although the convenience of shopping in these stores comes at the expense of benefits to the community. She concludes by suggesting that it’s not “anti-American” to oppose big-box stores because the damage they inflict on downtown shopping districts extends to America itself.

Summarizing a visual text To summarize a visual text, begin with essential information such as who created the visual, who the intended audience is, where the visual appeared, and when it was created. Then, in a few sentences, explain the visual’s main point or purpose and describe the image by pointing to its key features. Following is Albert Lee’s summary of the McDonald’s advertisement printed on page 89. An advertisement for McDonald’s in the July-August 2004 issue of Men’s Health magazine represents an attempt by the restaurant chain to remake its image. The implicit reason for the ad is that McDonald’s world-famous fast food has come under increasingly harsh attack for

texts

ÃÕ>Àâ}Ê UÊ ÕÃ}ÊÞÕÀÊÜÊÜÀ`ÃÊ UÊ >>Þâ}

4d

93

Guidelines for writing a summary U In the first sentence, mention the title of the text, the name of the author, and the author’s thesis or the visual’s central point. U Maintain a neutral tone; be objective. U Use the third-person point of view and the present tense: Taylor argues. . . . U Keep your focus on the text. Don’t state the author’s ideas as if they were your own. U Put all or most of your summary in your own words; if you borrow a phrase or a sentence from the text, put it in quotation marks and give the page number in parentheses. U Limit yourself to presenting the text’s key points. U Be concise; make every word count.

unhealthful processing and preparation. The fresh, spring-green lettuce that dominates this ad is a signal to customers that McDonald’s has changed its menu and now offers food as fresh and healthful as any found in a supermarket. By publicizing this new direction, McDonald’s clearly hopes to attract health-conscious customers. Moreover, by framing this advertisement as a response to an individual customer’s question, McDonald’s attempts to show that the vast size of the chain does not prevent it from tending personally to its customers’ concerns.

4d Analyze to demonstrate your critical thinking. When you analyze, you separate the whole to study the parts. Whereas a summary most often answers the question of what a text says, an analysis looks at how a text makes its point. When an assignment calls for an analysis, read the whole

Making the most of your handbook Writing about a text often requires you to quote directly from the text. 0

Guidelines for using quotation marks: 48c

94

4d

texts

Writing about texts

assignment carefully, along with any models provided, to see what your inWhen you analyze a text, you structor expects. weave words and ideas from the source into your own writing. Typically, an analysis takes the form 0 Quoting or paraphrasing: 51 of an essay that makes its own argument (MLA), 56b (APA), 57b (Chicago) about a text. Include an introduction 0 Using signal phrases: 52b that briefly summarizes the text, a the(MLA), 56c (APA), 57c (Chicago) sis that states your own judgment about 0 Using details for support: 50c the text, and body paragraphs that sup(MLA), 56a (APA), 57a (Chicago) port your thesis with evidence. If you are 0 Analyzing literature: 55 analyzing a visual, examine it as a whole and then reflect on how the individual elements contribute to its overall meaning. If you have written a summary of the text or visual, you may find it useful to refer to the main points of the summary as you write your analysis. Within your body paragraphs, include and interpret individual passages from the text to help support your overall analysis of the text. The following steps can help you do this: Making the most of your handbook

1. In a topic sentence, include a claim about the author’s text. 2. Use a signal phrase to introduce exact language or ideas from the text. Place any exact language in quotation marks. 3. Follow the quotation or ideas with your interpretation. To interpret the text, you may explain its significance, define one of its important terms, or point out what the author is assuming or implying in the passage. 4. Provide a transition to the claim in your next paragraph. (See 3d.)

Using interpretation in an analysis In her paper analyzing the article by Betsy Taylor that appears on page 88, student writer Emilia Sanchez begins by

ÌiÀ«ÀiÌ}Ê UÊ >>Þâ}

texts

4d

Guidelines for analyzing a text Written texts Instructors who ask you to analyze an essay or an article often expect you to address some of the following questions. U What is the author’s thesis or central idea? Who is the audience? U What questions does the author address (implicitly or explicitly)? U How does the author structure the text? What are the key parts, and how do they relate to one another and to the thesis? U What strategies has the author used to generate interest in the argument and to persuade readers of its merit? U What evidence does the author use to support the thesis? How persuasive is the evidence (5e)? U Does the author anticipate objections and counter opposing views (see 6c)? U Does the author fall prey to any faulty reasoning (see 6a)?

Visual texts If you are analyzing a visual text, the following additional questions will help you evaluate an image’s purpose and meaning. U What surprises, perplexes, or intrigues you about the image? U What clues suggest the visual text’s intended audience? How does the image appeal to its audience? U If the text is an advertisement, what product is it selling? Does it attempt to sell an idea or a message as well? U If the visual text includes words, how do the words contribute to its meaning? U How do design elements — colors, shapes, perspective, background, foreground — shape the visual text’s meaning or serve its purpose?

95


|

Summarize less, analyze more

When a teacher or tutor points out that you need to “summarize less, analyze more,” the comment often signals that your readers want to hear your interpretation of a text, not a summary of the text itself.

Growing up as a borderlander, I have always considered myself bilingual. Reading “How to Tame a Wild Tongue” by Gloria Anzaldúa made me rethink that label. In the “El lenguaje de la frontera” section of the essay, Anzaldúa explains the origins of Chicano Spanish, a “border tongue” (326). Then she says that most Chicanos actually speak as many as eight languages. Anzaldúa lists these languages Summarize and then tells which languages she speaks with less, which people in her life. For example, she speaks analyze more Tex-Mex with friends, Chicano Texas Spanish with her mother, and working-class English at school (327). Finally, she talks about her experience with speaking made-up languages.

One student wrote this body paragraph in response to an assignment that asked students to analyze Gloria Anzaldúa’s essay “How to Tame a Wild Tongue.”

The student writer needs to go beyond summary to offer his insights about Anzaldúa’s text. To revise this paragraph, the student might begin by underlining the verbs in his own sentences: explains, says, lists, tells, and talks. These sentences simply restate what Anzaldúa has written. Although the student needs a brief summary to help his readers understand the basis of his analysis, he should move quickly to exploring the meaning of Anzaldúa’s text. In his analysis, the student might ask questions about Anzaldúa’s strategies. For instance, why does she combine Spanish with English? Or why does she list the eight separate languages that most Chicanos speak?

Similar comments: too much summary s show, don't tell s go deeper

Revising when you need to summarize less and analyze more 1. Reread your paragraph and highlight the sentences that summarize. Then, in a different color, highlight the sentences that contain your analysis. (Think about the differences between summary and analysis: Summary

96

answers the question of what a text says; analysis offers a judgment or interpretation of the text.) 2. Reread the text (or passages of the text) that you are analyzing, paying attention to the language and structure of the text. 3. Ask questions. What strategies does the author use? How do these strategies convey the meaning of the text? What insights can you convey to your readers about the text? How can you deepen your readers’ understanding of the text? More advice on analyzing a text: 4d and 55b

summarizing Taylor’s argument. She then states her own thesis, or claim, which offers her judgment of Taylor’s article, and begins her analysis. In her first body paragraph, Sanchez interprets Taylor’s use of language. Topic sentence includes Sanchez’s claim. Quoted material shows the author’s language in quotation marks. Transition to Sanchez’s next point.

Taylor’s use of colorful language reveals that she has a nostalgic view of American society and does not understand economic realities. In her first paragraph, Taylor refers to a big-box store as a “25-acre slab of concrete with a 100,000 square foot box of stuff” that “land[s] on a town,” evoking images of a powerful monster crushing the American way of life (1011). But she oversimplifies a complex issue. Taylor does not consider. . . .

Signal phrase introduces a quotation from the text. Quotation is followed by Sanchez’s interpretation of the author’s language.

4e Sample student essay: Analysis of an article Following is Emilia Sanchez’s complete essay. Sanchez used Modern Language Association (MLA) style to format her paper and cite the source.

97

4e

98

texts

Writing about texts

Sanchez 1 Emilia Sanchez Professor Goodwin English 10 23 October 2009 Rethinking Big-Box Stores Opening briefly summarizes the article’s purpose and thesis.

In her essay “Big Box Stores Are Bad for Main Street,” Betsy Taylor focuses not on the economic effects of large chain stores but on the effects these stores have on the “soul” of America. She argues that stores like Home Depot, Target, and Wal-Mart are bad for America because they draw people out of downtown shopping districts and cause them to focus on consumption. In contrast, she believes that small businesses are good for America because they provide personal attention, encourage community interaction, and make each city

Sanchez begins to analyze Taylor's argument.

unique. But Taylor’s argument is unconvincing because it is based on nostalgia—on idealized images of a quaint Main Street—rather than on the roles that businesses play in consumers’ lives and communities.

Thesis expresses Sanchez’s judgment of Taylor’s article.

By ignoring the complex economic relationship between large chain stores and their communities, Taylor incorrectly assumes that simply getting rid of big-box stores would have a positive effect on America’s communities. Taylor’s use of colorful language reveals that she has a nostalgic view of American society and does not understand economic realities.

In her first paragraph, Taylor refers to a big-box store as a “25-acre Signal phrase introduces quotations slab of concrete with a 100,000 square foot box of stuff” that “land[s] from the source; Sanchez uses an MLA on a town,” evoking images of a powerful monster crushing the in-text citation. American way of life (1011). But she oversimplifies a complex issue. Taylor does not consider that many downtown business districts failed long before chain stores moved in, when factories and mills closed and Sanchez begins to identify and challenge workers lost their jobs. In cities with struggling economies, big-box Taylor’s assumptions.


sample analysis of a text

texts

4e

99

Sanchez 2 stores can actually provide much-needed jobs. Similarly, while Taylor blames big-box stores for harming local economies by asking for tax

Transition to another point in Sanchez’s analysis.

breaks, free roads, and other perks, she doesn’t acknowledge that these stores also enter into economic partnerships with the surrounding communities by offering financial benefits to schools and hospitals. Taylor’s assumption that shopping in small businesses is always better for the customer also seems driven by nostalgia for an old-

Clear topic sentence announces a shift to a new topic.

fashioned Main Street rather than by the facts. While she may be right that many small businesses offer personal service and are responsive to customer complaints, she does not consider that many customers appreciate the service at big-box stores. Just as customer service is better at some small businesses than at others, it is impossible to

Sanchez refutes Taylor’s claim.

generalize about service at all big-box stores. For example, customers depend on the lenient return policies and the wide variety of products at stores like Target and Home Depot. Taylor blames big-box stores for encouraging American “hyperconsumerism,” but she oversimplifies by equating big-box stores with bad values and small businesses with good values. Like her other points, this claim ignores the economic and social realities of American society today. Big-box stores do not force Americans to buy more. By offering lower prices in a convenient setting, however, they allow consumers to save time and purchase goods they might not be able to afford from small businesses. The existence of more small businesses would not change what most Americans can afford, nor would it reduce their desire to buy affordable merchandise. Taylor may be right that some big-box stores have a negative impact on communities and that small businesses offer certain advantages. But she ignores the economic conditions that support big-box stores as well as the fact that Main Street was in decline before

Sanchez treats the author fairly.

100

4f

texts

Writing about texts

Sanchez 3 Conclusion returns to the thesis and shows the wider significance of Sanchez’s analysis.

the big-box store arrived. Getting rid of big-box stores will not bring back a simpler America populated by thriving, unique Main Streets; in reality, Main Street will not survive if consumers cannot afford to shop there.

Sanchez 4 Work Cited Work cited page is in MLA style.

Taylor, Betsy. “Big Box Stores Are Bad for Main Street.” CQ Researcher 9.44 (1999): 1011. Print.

4f Sample student essay: Analysis of an advertisement On the following pages is Albert Lee’s analysis of the McDonald’s ad that appears on page 89.

sample analysis of an advertisement

4f

texts

101

Lee 1 Albert Lee Professor McIntosh English 101 4 November 2009 The Golden Arches Go Green: McDonald’s and Real Lettuce Dominating a McDonald’s advertisement in the July-August 2004 issue of Men’s Health magazine is a highly magnified head of lettuce, the centerpiece of a healthful menu that McDonald’s was promoting. The lettuce looms over the ad’s two other elements, a comment card from

Lee briefly summarizes the content of the ad.

a smiling female customer with a question about lettuce and a friendly note in reply from McDonald’s. For a restaurant chain known for its supersized meals of Double Quarter Pounders with Cheese, the close-up of a lettuce leaf might come as a surprise. A superficial interpretation of the McDonald’s ad would point out that the fast-food giant is attempting to remake its image into a health-conscious restaurant. After all, the greening of the Golden Arches follows a shift in public attitudes toward

Lee suggests a simple interpretation to highlight his more compelling interpretation.

diet and a sometimes environmentally unfriendly food industry. Less obvious are the associations that the ad creates to persuade people that McDonald’s is committed to a product—an entire experience—not usually offered by fast-food restaurants. If fast food has Lee’s thesis offers his analysis of the ad’s become synonymous in many consumers’ minds with the impersonal and message. artificial conditions of modern life—from assembly-line food to robotic exchanges at the counter or drive-through window—then the McDonald’s ad seeks to replace those associations with images of authenticity and familiarity. The ad’s underlying message emphasizes for viewers the real over the artificial, a quality in both McDonald’s food and its relationship with its customers. Through vivid graphics McDonald’s shows, rather than tells, viewers that its ingredients are wholesome. The head of lettuce


102

4f

texts

Writing about texts

Lee 2 Lee describes the that creates the ad’s entire background is the picture of mouthwatering dominant image in the wholesomeness. Enlarged to many times its natural size, the lettuce visual text. reveals its sharp, spring-green edges and beads of water standing on its leaves, presumably from recent washing. The fast-food chain could have bombarded the public with nutritional statistics about its food items, as many other restaurants do, but it seems to recognize that numbers can begin to read like cold data from a science textbook. Instead, McDonald’s invites us to take a closer look at its ingredients, a chance to verify Lee quotes words from the text.

for ourselves that the lettuce is as “pure” and “fresh” as it claims. The lettuce does in fact look “so crisp” that we can easily believe it would produce a “crunch” if we bit into it, just as McDonald’s reports.

Clear topic sentence The ad’s copy suggests that McDonald’s wishes to convince announces a shift to a viewers that its commitment to serving customers’ needs is as genuine new topic. as its lettuce. The prominent repetition of the word real in the tagline expresses McDonald’s policy of plain dealing with individual customers. The picture of a supposedly real customer, a paper clip holding her photograph, and the ragged left edge of the comment card all contribute to a sense that this exchange between customer and McDonald’s is as real, as “pure,” as McDonald’s claims its lettuce is. Lee analyzes the ad’s language.

Indeed, the heading to the comment card, “Ask M,” gives McDonald’s a personal identity, which intensifies the impression of the company’s accessibility. “Ask M” conjures up the image of a straight-shooting, small-town newspaper advice columnist. McDonald’s lettuce, “M” says, comes “from the same place you buy yours.” This comparison with the neighborhood market emphasizes the local presence of the restaurant by association. The lettuce we eat at McDonald’s, the ad suggests, is in fact the very same we would feel confident putting on our family’s plate at home. The opening phrase of the second sentence, “Simply put,” is a signal that McDonald’s earnestly desires to explain its operations to its

sample analysis of an advertisement

4f

texts

103

Lee 3 customers. As with the close-up of the lettuce, the wording suggests that the company has nothing to hide. It might be difficult to imagine that people will be persuaded to abandon their local markets for McDonald’s. But then again, we cannot easily forget the ad’s image of lettuce, its curling, serrated edges and finely branched veins, enlarged to a slightly unsettling size. And if this green image conjures up in our minds a golden “M”—a place where we can reconnect with real people and the bounty

Lee concludes with his interpretation of the ad’s overall effect.

of the land—then maybe one of the most successful companies in history has done it again.

Lee 4 Work Cited McDonald’s Corporation. Advertisement. Men’s Health JulyAug. 2004: 95. Print.

Work cited page is in MLA style.

104

5 5

arg

Writing arguments

Constructing reasonable arguments

In writing an argument, you take a stand on a debatable issue. The question being debated might be a matter of public policy: Should religious groups be allowed to meet on public school property? What is the least dangerous way to dispose of hazardous waste? Should a state require its citizens to have health insurance? On such questions, reasonable people may disagree. Reasonable men and women also disagree about many scholarly issues. Psychologists debate the role of genes and environment in determining behavior; historians interpret the causes of the Civil War quite differently; biologists challenge one another’s predictions about the effects of global warming. When you construct a reasonable argument, your goal is not simply to win or to have the last word. Your aim is to explain your understanding of the truth about a subject or to propose the best solution available for solving a problem — without being needlessly combative. In constructing your argument, you join a conversation with other writers and readers. Your aim is to convince readers to reconsider their opinions by offering new reasons to question an old viewpoint.

5a Examine your issue’s social and intellectual contexts. Arguments appear in social and intellectual contexts. Public policy debates obviously arise in social contexts, conducted among groups with competing values and interests. For example, the debate over offshore oil drilling has been renewed in the United States in light of skyrocketing energy costs

ìL>ÌiÊ UÊ VÌiÝÌÊ UÊ Ìi

arg

5a

105

Some cultures value writers who argue with force; other cultures value writers who argue subtly or indirectly. Academic audiences in the United States will expect your writing to be assertive and confident — neither aggressive nor passive. You can create an assertive tone by acknowledging different opinions and supporting your view with specific evidence. TOO AGGRESSIVE

Of course prayer should be discouraged in public schools. Only foolish people think that organized prayer is good for everyone.

TOO PASSIVE

I might be wrong, but I think that organized prayer should be discouraged in public schools.

ASSERTIVE TONE

Organized prayer should be discouraged in public schools because it violates the religious freedom guaranteed by the First Amendment.

If you are uncertain about the tone of your work, ask for help at your school’s writing center.

and terrorism concerns — with environMaking the most of your handbook mentalists, policymakers, and consumers Supporting your claims with all weighing in on the argument. Most evidence from sources can make public policy debates also have intellecyour argument more effective. tual dimensions that address scientific or 0 Conducting research: 46 theoretical questions. In the case of the drilling issue, geologists, oceanographers, and economists all contribute their expertise. Scholarly debates clearly play themselves out in intellectual contexts, but they have a social dimension too. Scholars respond to the contributions of other specialists in the field, often building on others’ views and refining them, but at times challenging them. Because many of your readers will be aware of the social and intellectual contexts in which your issue is grounded, you will be at a serious disadvantage if you are not informed. That’s why it is a good idea to conduct some research before preparing

106

5b

arg

Writing arguments

your argument; consulting even a few sources can help. For example, the student whose paper appears on pages 115–18 became more knowledgeable about his issue — the ethics of performance-enhancing procedures in sports — after consulting several brief sources.

5b View your audience as a panel of jurors. Do not assume that your audience already agrees with you; instead, envision skeptical readers who, like a panel of jurors, will make up their minds after listening Making the most of your handbook to all sides of the argument. If you are You may need to consider arguing a public policy issue, aim your a specific audience for your paper at readers who represent a variety argument. of opinions. In the case of the debate over 0 Analyzing your audience: 1a offshore drilling, for example, imagine a 0 Writing in a particular discipline, such as business jury representative of those who have a or psychology: 7 stake in the matter: environmentalists, policymakers, and consumers. At times, you can deliberately narrow your audience. If you are working within a word limit, for example, you might not have the space in which to address all the concerns surrounding the offshore drilling debate. Or you might be primarily interested in reaching one segment of a general audience, such as consumers. In such instances, you can still view your audience as a panel of jurors; the jury will simply be a less diverse group. In the case of scholarly debates, you will be addressing readers who share your interest in a discipline such as literature or psychology. Such readers belong to a group with an agreed-upon way of investigating and talking about issues. Though they generally agree about procedures, scholars in an academic discipline often disagree about particular issues. Once you see how they disagree about your issue, you should be able to imagine a jury that reflects the variety of opinions they hold.

>ÕìViÊ UÊ ÌÀ`ÕVÌÊ UÊ ÌiÃÃÊ UÊ >Êì>

arg

5c

107

5c In your introduction, establish credibility and state your position. When you are constructing an argument, make sure your introduction contains a thesis sentence that states your position on the issue you have chosen to Making the most of your handbook debate. In the sentences leading up to When you write an argument, you the thesis, establish your credibility with state your position in a thesis. readers by showing that you are knowl0 Writing effective thesis edgeable and fair-minded. If possible, statements: 1c, 1e build common ground with readers who may not at first agree with your views, and show them why they should consider your thesis. In the following introduction, student Kevin Smith presents himself as someone worth listening to. Because Smith introduces both sides of the debate, readers are likely to approach his essay with an open mind.

Writer is fair-minded, presenting the views of both sides.

Although the Supreme Court has ruled against prayer in public schools on First Amendment grounds, many people still feel that prayer should be allowed. Such people value prayer as a practice central to their faith and believe that prayer is a way for schools to reinforce moral principles. They also compellingly point out a paradox in the First Amendment itself: at what point does the separation of church and state restrict the freedom of those who wish to practice their religion? What proponents of school prayer fail to realize, however, is that the Supreme Court’s decision, although it was made on legal grounds, makes sense on religious grounds as well. Prayer is too important to be trusted to our public schools. — Kevin Smith, student

Smith shows that he is familiar with the legal issues surrounding school prayer.

Smith’s thesis builds common ground.

TIP: A good way to test a thesis while drafting and revising is to imagine a counterargument to your argument (see 5f). If you can’t think of an opposing point of view, rethink your thesis or ask a classmate to respond to your argument.

108

5d

arg

Writing arguments

5d Back up your thesis with persuasive lines of argument. Arguments of any complexity contain lines of argument that, when taken together, might reasonably persuade readers that the thesis has merit. The following, for example, are the main lines of argument that Jamal Hammond used in his paper on performance-enhancing practices in sports (see pp. 115–18). Thesis: Athletes who use any type of biotechnology give themselves an unfair advantage and disrupt the sense of fair play, and they should be banned from competition. SUPPORTING s !THLETICACHIEVEMENTNOWADAYSINCREASINGLY CLAIMS results from biological and high-tech intervention rather than strictly from hard work. s There is a difference between the use of state-of-theart equipment and the modification of the body itself. s )FTHERULESTHATGUARANTEEANEVENPLAYINGFIELDARE violated, competitors and spectators alike are deprived of a sound basis of comparison on which to judge athletic effort and accomplishment. s )FWELETATHLETESALTERTHEIRBODIESTHROUGH biotechnology, we might as well dispense with the human element altogether. CENTRAL CLAIM

If you sum up your main lines of argument, as Hammond did, you will have a rough outline of your essay. In your paper, you will provide evidence for each of these claims.

5e Support your claims with specific evidence. You will need to support your central claim and any subordinate claims with evidence: facts, statistics, examples and illustrations, expert opinion, and so on. Most debatable topics require that you consult some written sources. As you read through the sources, you will learn more about the arguments and counterarguments at the center of your debate. Remember that you must document your sources. Documentation gives credit to the authors and shows readers how

ÃÕ««ÀÌÊ UÊ iÛìViÊ UÊ v>VÌÃÊ U ÃÌ>ÌÃÌVÃÊ UÊ iÝ>«iÃÊ UÊ ÕÃÌÀ>ÌÃ

arg

5e

109

to locate a source in case they want to assess its credibility or explore the issue further.

Using facts and statistics A fact is something that is known with certainty because it has been objectively verified: The capital of Wyoming is Cheyenne. Carbon has an atomic weight Making the most of your handbook of 12. John F. Kennedy was assassinated Sources, when used responsibly, on November 22, 1963. Statistics are colcan provide evidence to support lections of numerical facts: Alcohol abuse an argument. is a factor in nearly 40 percent of traffic fa0 Paraphrasing, summarizing, and quoting sources: 48c talities. More than four in ten businesses 0 Punctuating direct quotations: in the United States are owned by women. 37a As of 2007, more than 50 percent of US 0 Citing sources: 51 (MLA), households owned a digital television. 56b (APA), 57b (Chicago) Most arguments are supported at least to some extent by facts and statistics. For example, in the following passage the writer uses statistics to show that college students carry unreasonably high credit card debt. A 2001 study by Nellie Mae revealed that while the average credit card debt per college undergraduate is $2,327, more than 20% of undergraduates who have at least one credit card maintain a much higher debt level, from $3,000 to $7,000 (Barrett).

Writers often use statistics in selective ways to bolster their own views. If you suspect that a writer’s handling of statistics is not quite fair, read authors with opposing views, who may give you a fuller understanding of the numbers, or track down the original sources for those statistics.

Using examples and illustrations Examples and illustrations (extended examples, often in story form) rarely prove a point by themselves, but when used in combination with other forms of evidence they flesh out an argument and bring it to life. Because they often have an emotional dimension, they can reach readers in ways that statistics cannot.


|

Develop more

When a teacher or tutor suggests that you “develop more,” the comment often signals that you stopped short of providing a full and detailed discussion of your idea. Distancing ourselves from our family is a natural part of growing up. There are many ways in which we try doing so. For essayist Richard Rodriguez, it was his drive for academic success that separated him from his parents and his past (195). In his desire to become educated, he removed himself Develop more from his family and distanced himself from his culture. In his essay “The Achievement of Desire,” he admits regretting the separation from his family and acknowledges the particular challenges of growing up between two cultures.

In this body paragraph, a student responded to an assignment that asked her to explore one theme in Richard Rodriguez’s essay “The Achievement of Desire.”

The student has not included enough evidence or developed a thorough analysis of that evidence. To revise, she might look for specific examples and details from Rodriguez’s essay to support her claim that Rodriguez “removed . . . and distanced himself” from his family. Then she might develop the claim by analyzing how and why Rodriguez’s “desire to become educated” removed him from his family.

Similar comments: undeveloped s give examples s explain s expand

Revising when you need to develop more 1. Read your paragraph to a peer or a tutor and ask specific questions: What more is needed? More evidence? If so, what kind of evidence — specific examples, vivid details, statistics, or facts? Or more analysis? If so, how might you explain the meaning of the evidence you provide? 2. Keep your purpose in mind. You aren’t being asked to restate what you’ve already written or what the author has written. 3. Consider including more evidence from the text and a more thorough exploration of why or how your evidence supports your claims. More advice on using specific evidence: 5e

110

ÃÕ««ÀÌÊ UÊ iÝ«iÀÌÊ«Ê UÊ «ÀiÃiÌ}Ê ÌiÊÌiÀÊÃìÊ UÊ VÕÌiÀ>À}ÕiÌ

arg

5f

In a paper arguing that any athletes who use gene therapy should be banned from competition, Jamal Hammond gives a thought-provoking example of how running with genetically modified limbs is no different from riding a motorcycle in a footrace.

Citing expert opinion Although they are no substitute for careful reasoning of your own, the views of an expert can contribute to the force of your argument. For example, to help him make the case that biotechnology could degrade the meaning of sports, Jamal Hammond quotes the remarks of an expert. Thomas Murray, chair of the ethics advisory panel for the World AntiDoping Agency, says he hopes, not too optimistically, for an “alternative future . . . where we still find meaning in great performances as an alchemy of two factors, natural talents . . . and virtues” (qtd. in Jenkins D11).

When you rely on expert opinion, make sure that your source is an expert in the field you are writing about. In some cases, you may need to provide credentials showing why your source is worth listening to. When including expert testimony in your paper, you can summarize or paraphrase the expert’s opinion or you can quote the expert’s exact words. You will of course need to document the source, as Hammond did in the example just given.

5f Anticipate objections; counter opposing arguments. Readers who already agree with you need no convincing, but indifferent or skeptical readers may resist your arguments. To be willing to give up a position that seems reasonable, a reader has to see that there is an even more reasonable one. In addition to presenting your own case, therefore, you should review the opposing arguments and attempt to counter them. It might seem at first that drawing attention to an opposing point of view or contradictory evidence would weaken

111

112

5f

arg

Writing arguments

your argument. But by anticipating and countering objections to your argument, you show yourself as a reasonable and wellinformed writer. You also establish your purpose, demonstrate the significance of the issue you are debating, and ultimately strengthen your argument. There is no best place in an essay to deal with opposing views. Often it is useful to summarize the opposing position early in your essay. After stating your thesis but before developing your own arguments, you might have a paragraph that takes up the most important counterargument. Or you can anticipate objections paragraph by paragraph as you develop your case. Wherever you decide to deal with opposing arguments,

Anticipating and countering objections To anticipate a possible objection, consider the following questions: U Could a reasonable person draw a different conclusion from your facts or examples? U Might a reader question any of your assumptions? U Could a reader offer an alternative explanation of this issue? U Is there any evidence that might weaken your position? The following questions may help you respond to a potential objection: U Can you concede the point to the opposition but challenge the point’s importance or usefulness? U Can you explain why readers should consider a new perspective or question a piece of evidence? U Should you explain your position in light of contradictory evidence? U Can you suggest a different interpretation of the evidence? When you write, use phrasing to signal to readers that you’re about to present an objection. Often the signal phrase can go in the lead sentence of a paragraph: Critics of this view argue that. . . . Some readers might point out that. . . . But isn’t it possible that . . . ?


|

Consider opposing viewpoints

When a teacher or tutor suggests that you “consider opposing viewpoints,” the comment often signals that you need to recognize and respond to possible objections to your argument. For many American workers, drug testing is a routine part of their working life. In her book Nickel and Dimed, Barbara Ehrenreich observes how random drug testing leads to a hostile work environment (128). In addition, researchers Shepard and Clifton Co ns id er have found that companies using drug-testing op po si ng ts programs are likelier to have lower productivity vie w po in levels than those that have not adopted such practices (1). Drug testing in the workplace has shown no benefits for employers or employees.

In response to an assignment about changes in the workplace, one student wrote this body paragraph.

The student jumps to a conclusion too quickly without recognizing any opposing points of view. To revise, the student might begin by reading two or more sources to gain a different perspective and to learn more about the debate surrounding her topic. As she reads more sources, she might ask: What evidence do those in favor of drug testing provide to support their point of view? How would they respond to my conclusion against drug testing? By anticipating and countering opposing views, she will show herself as a fair and reasonable writer.

Similar comments: what about the other side? s counterargument?

Revising when you need to consider other points of view 1. Read more to learn about the debates surrounding the topic. Ask questions: Are there other sides to the issue? Would a reasonable person offer an alternative explanation for the evidence or provide counterevidence? 2. Be open-minded. Although it might seem counterintuitive to introduce opposing arguments, you’ll show your knowledge of the topic by recognizing that not everyone draws the same conclusion. 3. Try these (or similar) phrases to introduce and counter objections: “Some readers might point out that . . .” or “Critics of this view argue that. . . .” 4. Revise your thesis, if necessary, to account for multiple points of view. More advice on considering opposing viewpoints: 5f and 6c

113

114

5g

arg

Writing arguments

do your best to explain the arguments of others accurately and fairly (see 6c).

5g Build common ground. As you counter opposing arguments, try to seek out one or two assumptions you might share with readers who do not initially agree with your views. If you can show that you share their concerns, your readers will be more likely to acknowledge the validity of your argument. For example, to persuade people opposed to shooting deer, a state wildlife commission would have to show that it too cares about preserving deer and does not want them to die needlessly. Having established these values in common, the commission might be able to persuade critics that a carefully controlled hunting season is good for the deer population because reducing the total number of deer prevents starvation caused by overpopulation. People believe that intelligence and decency support their side of an argument. To be persuaded, they must see these qualities in your argument. Otherwise they will persist in their opposition.

5h Sample argument paper In the paper that begins on the following page, student Jamal Hammond argues that athletes who enhance their performance through biotechnology should be banned from athletic competition. Notice that he is careful to present opposing views fairly before providing his counterarguments. In writing the paper, Hammond consulted three newspaper articles, two in print and one online. When he quotes or uses information from a source, he cites the source with an MLA (Modern Language Association) in-text citation. Citations in the paper refer readers to the list of works cited at the end of the paper. (See 53.) hackerhandbooks.com/bedhandbook > Model papers > MLA argument papers: Hammond; Lund; Sanghvi > MLA papers: Orlov; Daly; Levi

VÕÌiÀ>À}ÕiÌÊ UÊ VÊ}ÀÕ`Ê UÊ sample argument paper

arg

5h

115

Hammond 1 Jamal Hammond Professor Paschal English 102 19 March 2007 Performance Enhancement through Biotechnology Has No Place in Sports The debate over athletes’ use of performance-enhancing substances is getting more complicated as biotechnologies such as

Opening sentences provide background for Hammond’s thesis.

gene therapy become a reality. The availability of these new methods of boosting performance will force us to decide what we value most in sports—displays of physical excellence developed through hard work or victory at all costs. For centuries, spectators and athletes have cherished the tradition of fairness in sports. While sports competition is, of course, largely about winning, it is also about the means by which a player or team wins. Athletes who use any type of biotechnology give themselves an unfair advantage and disrupt the

Thesis states the main point.

sense of fair play, and they should be banned from competition. Researchers are experimenting with techniques that could manipulate an athlete’s genetic code to build stronger muscles or increase endurance. Searching for cures for diseases like Parkinson’s and muscular dystrophy, scientists at the University of Pennsylvania have created “Schwarzenegger mice,” rodents that grew larger-than-

Hammond establishes his credibility by summarizing medical research.

normal muscles after receiving injections with a gene that stimulates growth protein. The researchers also found that a combination of gene manipulation and exercise led to a 35% increase in the strength of rats’ leg muscles (Lamb 13). Such therapies are breakthroughs for humans suffering from muscular diseases; for healthy athletes, they could mean new world records in sports involving speed and endurance—but at what cost to


Source is cited in MLA style.

116

5h

arg

Writing arguments

Hammond 2 Hammond uses specific evidence to support his thesis.

the integrity of athletic competition? The International Olympic Committee’s World Anti-Doping Agency has become so alarmed about the possible effects of new gene technology on athletic competition that it has banned the use of gene therapies and urged researchers to devise a test for detecting genetic modification (Lamb 13).

Opposing views are presented fairly.

Some bioethicists argue that this next wave of performance enhancement is an acceptable and unavoidable feature of competition. As Dr. Andy Miah, who supports the regulated use of gene therapies in sports, claims, “The idea of the naturally perfect athlete is romantic nonsense. . . . An athlete achieves what he or she achieves through

“Qtd. in” is used for an indirect source: words quoted in another source.

all sorts of means—technology, sponsorship, support and so on” (qtd. in Rudebeck). Miah, in fact, sees athletes’ imminent turn to genetic modification as “merely a continuation of the way sport works; it allows us to create more extraordinary performances” (qtd. in Rudebeck). Miah’s approval of “extraordinary performances” as the goal of competition reflects our culture’s tendency to demand and reward new heights

Hammond counters opposing arguments.

of athletic achievement. The problem is that achievement nowadays increasingly results from biological and high-tech intervention rather than strictly from hard work. Better equipment, such as aerodynamic bicycles and fiberglass poles for pole vaulting, have made it possible for athletes to record achievements unthinkable a generation ago. But athletes themselves must put forth the physical effort of training and practice—they must still build

Hammond develops the thesis.

their skills (Jenkins D11). There is a difference between the use of stateof-the-art equipment and the modification of the body itself. Athletes who use medical technology, including drugs, to alter their bodies can bypass the hard work of training by taking on the powers of a machine. If they set new records this way, we lose the opportunity to witness sports as a spectacle of human effort and are left marveling at scientific advances, which have little relation to the athletic tradition of fair play.

sample argument paper

arg

5h

117

Hammond 3 Such a tradition has long defined athletic competition. Sports Transition moves from the writer’s main argument to specific examples. demand similar equipment to referees who evenhandedly apply rely on equal conditions to ensure fair play, from regulations that the rules to all participants. If the rules that guarantee an even playing field are violated, competitors and spectators alike are deprived of a sound basis of comparison on which to judge athletic effort and accomplishment. When major league baseball rules call for solid-wood bats, the player who uses a corked bat enhances his hitting statistics at the expense of players who use regulation equipment. When Ben Johnson tested positive for steroids after setting a world record in the 100-meter dash in the 1988 Olympics, his “achievement” devalued the intense training that his competitors had undergone to prepare for the event. The International Olympic Committee responded by stripping Johnson of his medal and his world record. Likewise, athletes who use gene therapy to alter their bodies and enhance their performance will create an uneven playing field. If we let athletes alter their bodies through biotechnology, we might as well dispense with the human element altogether. Instead of watching the 100-meter dash to see who the fastest runner in the

A vivid example helps the writer make his point.

world is, we might just as well watch the sprinters mount motorcycles and race across the finish line. The absurdity of such an example, however, points to the damage that we will do to sports if we allow these therapies. Thomas Murray, chair of the ethics advisory panel for the World Anti-Doping Agency, says he hopes, not too optimistically, for an “alternative future . . . where we still find meaning in great performances as an alchemy of two factors, natural talents . . . and virtues” (qtd. in Jenkins D11). Unless we are willing to organize separate sporting events and leagues—an Olympics, say, for athletes who have opted for a boost from

Conclusion echoes the thesis without dully repeating it.

6

118

arg

Evaluating arguments

Hammond 4 the test tube and another for athletes who have chosen to keep their bodies natural—we should ask from our athletes that they dazzle us less with extraordinary performance and more with the fruits of their hard work.

Hammond 5 Works Cited Works cited page uses MLA style.

Jenkins, Sally. “The First Item in a Pandora’s Box of Moral Ambiguities.” Washington Post 4 Dec. 2004: D11. Print. Lamb, Gregory M. “Will Gene-Altered Athletes Kill Sports?” Christian Science Monitor 23 Aug. 2004: 12-13. Print. Rudebeck, Clare. “The Eyes Have It.” Independent [London]. Independent News and Media, 27 Apr. 2005. Web. 1 Mar. 2007.

6


In your reading and in your own writing, evaluate all arguments for logic and fairness. Many arguments can stand up to critical scrutiny. Often, however, a line of argument that at first seems reasonable turns out to be illogical, unfair, or both.

6a Distinguish between reasonable and fallacious argumentative tactics. A number of unreasonable argumentative tactics are known as logical fallacies. Most of the fallacies — such as hasty generalizations and false analogies — are misguided or dishonest uses of legitimate argumentative strategies. The examples in this section suggest when such strategies are reasonable and when they are not.

}VÊ UÊ v>>ViÃÊ UÊ >Û`}Ê }iiÀ>â>ÌÃÊ UÊ >Û`}ÊÃÌiÀiÌÞ«iÃ

arg

6a

Generalizing (inductive reasoning) Writers and thinkers generalize all the time. We look at a sample of data and conclude that data we have not observed will most likely conform to what we have seen. From a spoonful of soup, we conclude just how salty the whole bowl will be. After numerous bad experiences with an airline, we decide to book future flights with a competitor. When we draw a conclusion from an array of facts, we are engaged in inductive reasoning. Such reasoning deals in probability, not certainty. For a conclusion to be highly probable, it must be based on evidence that is sufficient, representative, and relevant. (See the chart on p. 120.) The fallacy known as hasty generalization is a conclusion based on insufficient or unrepresentative evidence. HASTY GENERALIZATION

In a single year, scores on standardized tests in California’s public schools rose by ten points. Therefore, more children than ever are succeeding in America’s public school systems.

Data from one state do not justify a conclusion about the whole United States. A stereotype is a hasty generalization about a group. Here are a few examples. STEREOTYPES

Women are bad bosses. Politicians are corrupt. Asian students are exceptionally intelligent.

Stereotyping is common because of our human tendency to perceive selectively. We tend to see what we want to see; we notice evidence confirming our already formed opinions and fail to notice evidence to the contrary. For example, if you have concluded that politicians are corrupt, your stereotype will be confirmed by news reports of legislators being indicted — even though every day the media describe conscientious officials serving the public honestly and well.

119

120

6a

arg


Testing inductive reasoning Though inductive reasoning leads to probable and not absolute truth, you can assess a conclusion’s likely probability by asking three questions. This chart shows how to apply those questions to a sample conclusion based on a survey. CONCLUSION

The majority of students on our campus would volunteer at least five hours a week in a local organization if the school provided a placement service for volunteers.

EVIDENCE

In a recent survey, 723 of 1,215 students questioned said they would volunteer at least five hours a week in a local organization if the school provided a placement service for volunteers.

1. Is the evidence sufficient? That depends. On a small campus (say, 3,000 students), the pool of students surveyed would be sufficient for market research, but on a large campus (say, 30,000), 1,215 students are only 4 percent of the population. If that 4 percent were known to be truly representative of the other 96 percent, however, even such a small sample would be sufficient (see question 2). 2. Is the evidence representative? The evidence is representative if those responding to the survey reflect the characteristics of the entire student population: age, sex, race, field of study, overall number of extracurricular commitments, and so on. If most of those surveyed are majors in fields like social work or counseling, however, the researchers would be wise to question the survey’s conclusion. 3. Is the evidence relevant? Yes. The results of the survey are directly linked to the conclusion. A question about the number of hours students work for pay, by contrast, would not be relevant because it would not be about choosing to volunteer.

}VÊ UÊ v>>ViÃÊ UÊ >Û`}Ê}iiÀ>â>ÌÃÊ UÊ v>ÃiÊ>>}ÞÊ UÊ V>ÕÃiivviVÌ

arg

6a

Many hasty generalizations contain words such as all, ever, always, and never, when qualifiers such as most, many, usually, and seldom would be more accurate.

Drawing analogies An analogy points out a similarity between two things that are otherwise different. Analogies can be an effective means of arguing a point. Our system of judicial decision making, or case law, which relies heavily on previous decisions, makes extensive use of reasoning by analogy. One lawyer may point out, for example, that specific facts or circumstances resemble those from a previous case and will thus argue for a similar result or decision. In response, the opposing lawyer may maintain that such facts or circumstances bear only a superficial resemblance to those in the previous case and that in legally relevant respects they are quite different and thus require a different result or decision. It is not always easy to draw the line between a reasonable and an unreasonable analogy. At times, however, an analogy is clearly off base, in which case it is called a false analogy. FALSE ANALOGY

If we can send a spacecraft to Pluto, we should be able to find a cure for the common cold.

The writer has falsely assumed that because two things are alike in one respect, they must be alike in others. Exploring the outer reaches of the solar system and finding a cure for the common cold are both scientific challenges, but the problems confronting medical researchers are quite different from those solved by space scientists.

Tracing causes and effects Demonstrating a connection between causes and effects is rarely simple. For example, to explain why a chemistry course

121

122

6a

arg


has a high failure rate, you would begin by listing possible causes: inadequate preparation of students, poor teaching, lack of qualified tutors, and so on. Next you would investigate each possible cause. Only after investigating the possible causes would you be able to weigh the relative impact of each cause and suggest appropriate remedies. Because cause-and-effect reasoning is so complex, it is not surprising that writers frequently oversimplify it. In particular, writers sometimes assume that because one event follows another, the first is the cause of the second. This common fallacy is known as post hoc, from the Latin post hoc, ergo propter hoc, meaning “after this, therefore because of this.” POST HOC FALLACY

Since Governor Cho took office, unemployment among minorities in the state has decreased by 7 percent. Governor Cho should be applauded for reducing unemployment among minorities.

The writer must show that Governor Cho’s policies are responsible for the decrease in unemployment; it is not enough to show that the decrease followed the governor’s taking office.

Weighing options Especially when reasoning about problems and solutions, writers must weigh options. To be fair, a writer should mention the full range of options, showing why one is superior to the others or might work well in combination with others. It is unfair to suggest that there are only two alternatives when in fact there are more. Writers who set up a false choice between their preferred option and one that is clearly unsatisfactory are guilty of the either . . . or fallacy. EITHER . . . OR FALLACY

Our current war against drugs has not worked. Either we should legalize drugs or we should turn the drug war over to our armed forces and let them fight it.

}VÊ UÊ v>>ViÃÊ UÊ V>ÕÃiivviVÌÊ UÊ either . . . orÊ UÊ >ÃÃÕ«ÌÃÊ UÊ ÃÃ}ÊV>

arg

6a

Clearly there are other options, such as increased funding for drug abuse prevention and treatment.

Making assumptions An assumption is a claim that is taken to be true — without the need of proof. Most arguments are based to some extent on assumptions, since writers rarely have the time and space to prove all of the conceivable claims on which their argument is based. For example, someone arguing about the best means of limiting population growth in developing countries might well assume that the goal of limiting population growth is worthwhile. For most audiences, there would be no need to articulate this assumption or to defend it. Some religious audiences, however, argue that bringing children into the world is an act of faith. It is a good idea to think through your own assumptions and imagine where they might conflict with those of your audience. There is a danger in failing to spell out and prove a claim that is clearly controversial. Consider the following short argument, in which a key claim is missing. ARGUMENT WITH MISSING CLAIM

Violent crime is increasing. Therefore, we should vigorously enforce the death penalty.

The writer seems to be assuming that the death penalty deters violent criminals — and that most audiences will agree. The writer also assumes that the death penalty is a fair punishment for violent crimes. These are not safe assumptions. When a missing claim is an assertion that few would agree with, we say that a writer is guilty of a non sequitur (Latin for “does not follow”). NON SEQUITUR

Leah loves good food; therefore, she will be an excellent chef.

Few people would agree with the missing claim — that lovers of good food always make excellent chefs.

123

124

6a

arg


Deducing conclusions (deductive reasoning) When we deduce a conclusion, we — like Sherlock Holmes — put things together. We establish that a general principle is true, that a specific case is an example of that principle, and that therefore a particular conclusion about that case is a certainty. In real life, such absolute reasoning rarely happens. Approximations of it, however, sometimes occur. Deductive reasoning can often be structured in a threestep argument called a syllogism. The three steps are the major premise, the minor premise, and the conclusion. 1. Anything that increases radiation in the environment is dangerous to public health. (Major premise) 2. Nuclear reactors increase radiation in the environment. (Minor premise) 3. Therefore, nuclear reactors are dangerous to public health. (Conclusion) The major premise is a generalization. The minor premise is a specific case. The conclusion follows from applying the generalization to the specific case. Deductive arguments break down if one of the premises is not true or if the conclusion does not logically follow from the premises. In the following short argument, the major premise is very likely untrue. UNTRUE PREMISE

The police do not give speeding tickets to people driving less than five miles per hour over the limit. Sam is driving fiftynine miles per hour in a fifty-five-mile-per-hour zone. Therefore, the police will not give Sam a speeding ticket.

The conclusion is true only if the premises are true. If the police sometimes give tickets for driving less than five miles per hour over the limit, Sam cannot safely conclude that he will avoid a ticket. In the following argument, both premises might be true, but the conclusion does not follow logically from them.

}VÊ UÊ v>>ViÃÊ UÊ `À>Ü}ÊVVÕÃÃÊ UÊ iÌ>Ê>««i>Ã

arg

6b

CONCLUSION DOES NOT FOLLOW

All members of our club ran in this year’s Boston Marathon. Jay ran in this year’s Boston Marathon. Therefore, Jay is a member of our club.

The fact that Jay ran the race is no guarantee that he is a member of the club. Presumably, many runners are nonmembers. Assuming that both premises are true, the following argument holds up. CONCLUSION FOLLOWS

All members of our club ran in this year’s Boston Marathon. Jay is a member of our club. Therefore, Jay ran in this year’s Boston Marathon.

6b Distinguish between legitimate and unfair emotional appeals. There is nothing wrong with appealing to readers’ emotions. After all, many issues worth arguing about have an emotional as well as a logical dimension. Even the Greek logician Aristotle lists pathos (emotion) as a legitimate argumentative tactic. For example, in an essay criticizing big-box stores, writer Betsy Taylor has a good reason for tugging at readers’ emotions: Her subject is the decline of city and town life. In her conclusion, Taylor appeals to readers’ emotions by invoking their national pride. LEGITIMATE EMOTIONAL APPEAL

Is it anti-American to be against having a retail giant set up shop in one’s community? Some people would say so. On the other hand, if you board up Main Street, what’s left of America?

As we all know, however, emotional appeals are frequently misused. Many of the arguments we see in the media, for instance, strive to win our sympathy rather than our intelligent agreement. A TV commercial suggesting that you will be thin and sexy if you drink a certain diet beverage is making a pitch

125

126

6c

arg


to emotions. So is a political speech that recommends electing a candidate because he is a devoted husband and father who serves as a volunteer firefighter. The following passage illustrates several types of unfair emotional appeals. UNFAIR EMOTIONAL APPEALS

This progressive proposal to build a ski resort in the state park has been carefully researched by Western Trust, the largest bank in the state; furthermore, it is favored by a majority of the local merchants. The only opposition comes from narrow-minded, do-gooder environmentalists who care more about trees than they do about people; one of their leaders was actually arrested for disturbing the peace several years ago.

Words with strong positive or negative connotations, such as progressive and do-gooder, are examples of biased language. Attacking the persons who hold a belief (environmentalists) rather than refuting their argument is called ad hominem, a Latin term meaning “to the man.” Associating a prestigious name (Western Trust) with the writer’s side is called transfer. Claiming that an idea should be accepted because a large number of people (the majority of merchants) are in favor of it is called the bandwagon appeal. Bringing in irrelevant issues (the arrest) is a red herring, named after a trick used in fox hunts to mislead the dogs by dragging a smelly fish across the trail.

6c Judge how fairly a writer handles opposing views. The way in which a writer deals with opposing views is telling. Some writers address the arguments of the opposition fairly, conceding points when necessary and countering others, all in a civil spirit. Other writers will do almost anything to win an argument: either ignoring opposing views altogether or misrepresenting such views and attacking their proponents. In your own writing, you build credibility by addressing opposing arguments fairly. (See also 5f.) In your reading, you

iÌ>Ê>««i>ÃÊ UÊ «ÀiÃiÌ}ÊÌiÀÊÛiÜÃÊ UÊ ÃÌÀ>ÜÊ>Ê UÊ µÕÌ}ÊÌiÀÃÊv>ÀÞ

arg

6c

can assess the credibility of your sources by looking at how they deal with views not in agreement with their own.

Describing the views of others Writers and politicians often deliberately misrepresent the views of others. One way they do this is by setting up a “straw man,” a character so weak that he is easily knocked down. The straw man fallacy consists of an oversimplification or outright distortion of opposing views. For example, in a California debate over attempts to control the mountain lion population, pro-lion groups characterized their opponents as trophy hunters bent on shooting harmless lions and sticking them on the walls of their dens. In truth, such hunters were only one faction of those who saw a need to control the lion population. During the District of Columbia’s struggle for voting representation, some politicians set up a straw man, as shown in the following example. STRAW MAN FALLACY

Washington, DC, residents are lobbying for statehood. Giving a city such as the District of Columbia the status of a state would be unfair.

The straw man wanted statehood. In fact, most District citizens lobbied for voting representation in any form, not necessarily through statehood.

Quoting opposing views Writers often quote the words of writers who hold opposing views. In general, this is a good idea, for it assures some level of fairness and accuracy. At times, though, both the fairness and the accuracy are an illusion. A source may be misrepresented when it is quoted out of context. All quotations are to some extent taken out of context, but a fair writer will explain the context to readers. To

127

128

6c

arg


select a provocative sentence from a source and to ignore the more moderate sentences surrounding it is both unfair and misleading. Sometimes a writer deliberately distorts a source through the device of ellipsis dots. Ellipsis dots tell readers that words have been omitted from the original source. When those words are crucial to an author’s meaning, omitting them is obviously unfair. (See also 39d.) ORIGINAL SOURCE

Johnson’s History of the American West is riddled with inaccuracies and astonishing in its blatantly racist description of the Indian wars. — B. R., reviewer MISLEADING QUOTATION

According to B. R., Johnson’s History of the American West is “astonishing in its . . . description of the Indian wars.”

EXERCISE 6–1 Explain what is illogical in the following brief arguments. It may be helpful to identify the logical fallacy or fallacies by name. Answers to lettered sentences appear in the back of the book. a. My roommate, who is an engineering major, is taking a course called Structures of Tall Buildings. All engineers have to know how to design tall buildings. b. If you’re old enough to vote, you’re old enough to drink. Therefore, the drinking age should be lowered to eighteen. c. Cable stations that rely on nauseating reality shows, annoying infomercials for useless products, idiotic talk shows, and second-rate movies should have their licenses pulled. d. Most young people can’t afford to buy a house in Silicon Valley because they spend too much money on new clothes and computer games. e. If you’re not part of the solution, you’re part of the problem. 1. Whenever I wash my car, it rains. I have discovered a way to end all droughts — get all the people to wash their cars. 2. Either you can learn how to build a Web site or you won’t be able to get a decent job after college. 3. College professors tend to be sarcastic. Three of my five professors this semester make sarcastic remarks.

µÕÌ}ÊÌiÀÃÊv>ÀÞÊ UÊ ÜÀÌ}ÊÊVi}i

wid

7a

4. Although Bell’s book on Joe DiMaggio was well researched, I doubt that an Australian historian can contribute much to our knowledge of an American baseball player. 5. Slacker co-workers and crazy, big-mouthed clients make our spineless managers impose ridiculous workloads on us hardworking, conscientious employees. 6. If professional sports teams didn’t pay athletes such high salaries, we wouldn’t have so many kids breaking their legs at hockey and basketball camps. 7. Ninety percent of the students oppose a tuition increase; therefore, the board of trustees should not pass the proposed increase. 8. If more people would take a long, close look at businesses like Microsoft and Amazon, they could reorganize their family lives to run successfully. 9. A mandatory ten-cent deposit on bottles and cans will eliminate litter because everyone I know will return the containers for the money rather than throw them away. 10. Researching what voters think during an election campaign is useless because most citizens don’t vote anyway.

7

Writing in the disciplines

Writing is a fact of college life. No matter what you study, you will be expected to write for a variety of audiences in a variety of formats. College courses expose you to the thinking of scholars in many disciplines, such as the humanities (literature, music, art), the social sciences (psychology, anthropology, sociology), and the sciences (biology, physics, chemistry). Writing in any discipline provides the opportunity to practice the methods used by scholars in these fields and to enter into their debates. Each field has its own questions, evidence, language, and conventions, but all disciplines share certain expectations for good writing.

7a Find commonalities across disciplines. If you understand the features that are common to writing in all disciplines, you will have an easier time sorting out the unique aspects of writing in a particular field.

129

130

7b

wid


In every discipline, scholars write about texts. For example, in the humaniWhen writing for any course, keep ties scholars write about texts such as in mind the steps needed to write novels, poems, paintings, and music. In a strong academic paper. the social sciences, texts include journal 0h Communicating a purpose: 1a articles, books and field accounts by re0h Determining your audience: 1a searchers, census reports, case studies, 0h Asking an academic question: 7b and reports on experiments. In the sci0h Making and supporting a claim: ences, researchers write about data taken 5c, 5e from reports that other researchers have 0 Citing sources: 51 (MLA), 56b (APA), 57b (Chicago) published and about data drawn from site results, site surveys, and laboratory experiments. A good paper in any field needs to communicate a writer’s purpose to an audience and to explore an engaging question about a subject. Effective writers make an argument and support their claims with evidence. Writers in most fields need to show readers the thesis they’re developing (or, in the sciences, the hypothesis they’re testing) and how they counter the opposing explanations or objections of other writers. In some fields, such as nursing and business, writers may not put forth an explicit claim or thesis but will still communicate a clear purpose and use evidence to support their ideas. All disciplines require writers to document where they found their evidence and from whom they borrowed ideas. Making the most of your handbook

7b Recognize the questions that writers in a discipline ask. Disciplines are characterized by the kinds of questions their scholars attempt to answer. Social scientists, who analyze human behavior, might ask about the factors that cause people to act in certain ways. Humanities scholars interpret texts within their cultural contexts; they ask questions about the society at the time a text was written or about the connections

ÜÀÌ}ÊÊVi}iÊ UÊ >Ã}ÊµÕiÃÌÃÊ UÊ >ÃÃ}iÌÃ

wid

7b

between an author’s life and work. Historians, who seek an understanding of the past, ask questions about the causes and effects of events and about connections between current and past events. Scientists collect data and ask questions to help them interpret the data. One way to understand how disciplines ask different questions is to look at assignments on the same topic in various fields. Many disciplines, for example, might be interested in the subject of disasters. The following are some questions that writers in different fields might ask about this subject. EDUCATION

Should the elementary school curriculum teach students how to cope in disaster situations?

FILM

How has the disaster film genre changed since the advent of computer-generated imagery (CGI) in the early 1970s?

HISTORY

How did the formation of the American Red Cross change this country’s approach to natural disasters?

ENGINEERING

What recent innovations in levee design are most promising?

PSYCHOLOGY

What are the most effective ways to identify and treat post-traumatic stress disorder (PTSD) in disaster survivors?

The questions you ask in any discipline will form the basis of the thesis for your paper. The questions themselves don’t communicate a central idea, but they may lead you to one. For an education paper, for example, you might begin with the question “Should the elementary school curriculum teach students how to cope in disaster situations?” After considering the issues involved, you might draft the following thesis. School systems should adopt age-appropriate curriculum units that introduce children to the risks of natural and human-made disasters and that allow children to practice coping strategies.

131

132

7c

wid


Whenever you write for a college course, try to determine the kinds of questions scholars in the field might ask about a topic. You can find clues in assigned readings, lecture or discussion topics, e-mail discussion groups, and the paper assignment itself. When in doubt, ask your instructor for guidance.

7c Understand the kinds of evidence that writers in a discipline use. Regardless of the discipline in which you are writing, you must support any claims you make with evidence — facts, statistics, examples and illustrations, expert opinion, and so on. Familiarize yourself with the kinds of evidence most writers use to support claims in your field. UÊ ÀÊ>Ê }ÃÊ«>«iÀÊÌ>ÌÊiÝ>iÃÊÌÀiiÊÌÞ«iÃÊvÊ«>ÀiÌ child relationships in Shakespeare’s King Lear, you would look closely at lines from the play. UÊ ÀÊ>Ê«ÃÞV}ÞÊ«>«iÀÊÊÌiÊViVÌÊLiÌÜiiÊViÀtain medications and suicidal impulses, you might study the results of clinical trials. UÊ ÀÊ>ÊÕÀÃ}Ê«À>VÌViÊ«>«iÀÊ>LÕÌÊÌiÊi`V>ÊV`ÌÊ of a particular patient, you would review the patient’s chart as well as any relevant medical literature. UÊ ÀÊ>ÊÃÌÀÞÊ«>«iÀÊÊ,i>ÃÃ>ViÊ>ÌÌÌÕìÃÊÌÜ>À`Ê>Àriage, you might examine historical documents such as letters, diaries, and church records. The kinds of evidence used in different disciplines often overlap. Students of geography, media studies, and political science, for example, might use census data to explore different topics. The evidence that one discipline values, however, might not be sufficient to support an interpretation or a conclusion in another field. You might use anecdotes or interviews in an anthropology paper, for example, but such evidence would be irrelevant in a biology lab report. The chart

iÛìViÊ UÊ ÃÕ««ÀÌÊ UÊ Ã«iV>âi`ÊÛV>LÕ>ÀÞ

wid

7d

Evidence typically used in various disciplines Humanities: Literature, art, film, music, philosophy U Passages of text or lines of a poem U Details from an image or a work of art U Passages of a musical composition U Critical essays that analyze original works

Humanities: History U Primary sources such as photographs, letters, maps, and government documents U Scholarly books and articles that interpret evidence

Social sciences: Psychology, sociology, political science, anthropology U Data from original experiments U Results of field research such as interviews, observations, or surveys U Statistics from government agencies U Scholarly books and articles that interpret data from original experiments and from other researchers’ studies

Sciences: Biology, chemistry, physics U Data from original experiments U Scholarly articles that report findings from experiments

at the top of this page lists the kinds of evidence accepted in various disciplines.

7d Become familiar with a discipline’s language conventions. Every discipline has a specialized vocabulary. As you read the articles and books in a field, you’ll notice certain words and phrases that come up repeatedly. Sociologists, for example,

133

134

7d

wid


Point of view and verb tense in academic writing Point of view U Writers of analytical or research essays in the humanities usually use the third-person point of view: Austen presents . . . or Castel describes the battle as. . . . U Scientists and most social scientists, who depend on quantitative research to present findings, tend to use the third-person point of view: The results indicated. . . . U Writers in the humanities and in some social sciences occasionally use the first person in discussing their personal experience or in writing a personal narrative: After spending two years interviewing families affected by the war, I began to understand that . . . or Every July as we approached the Cape Cod Canal, we could sense. . . .

Present or past tense U Literature scholars use the present tense to discuss a text: Hughes effectively dramatizes different views of minority assertiveness. (See 52b.) U Science and social science writers use the past tense to describe experiments and the present tense to discuss the findings: In 2003, Berkowitz released the first double-blind placebo study. . . . These results paint a murky picture. (See 56c.) U Writers in history use the present tense or the present perfect tense to discuss a text: Shelby Foote describes the scene like this . . . or Shelby Foote has described the scene like this. . . . (See 57c.)

use terms such as independent variables, political opportunity resources, and dyads to describe social phenomena; computer scientists might refer to algorithm design and loop invariants to describe programming methods. Practitioners in health fields such as nursing use terms like treatment plan and systemic assessment to describe patient care. Use discipline-specific terms

«ÌÊvÊÛiÜÊ UÊ ÛiÀLÊÌiÃiÊ UÊ VÌ}Ê ÃÕÀViÃÊ UÊ >ÃÃ}iÌÃ

wid

7f

135

only when you are certain that you and your readers fully understand their meaning. In addition to vocabulary, many fields of study have developed specialized conventions for point of view and verb tense. See the chart at the top of the previous page.

7e Use a discipline’s preferred citation style. In any discipline, you must give credit to those whose ideas or words you have borrowed. Whenever you write, it is your responsibility to avoid plagiarism by citing sources honestly and accurately. While all disciplines emphasize careful documentation, each follows a particular system of citation that its members have agreed on. Writers in the humaniMaking the most of your handbook ties usually use the system established You will need to document your by the Modern Language Association sources in the style preferred by (MLA). Scholars in some social sciences, your discipline. such as psychology and anthropology, 0 Documenting sources: MLA (humanities), 53; APA (social follow the style guidelines of the Amerisciences), 56d; Chicago can Psychological Association (APA); (history), 57d; CSE (sciences), scholars in history and some humanionline at hackerhandbooks .com/resdoc ties typically follow The Chicago Manual of Style.

7f Respond to writing assignments in the disciplines. When you are asked to write in a specific discipline, become familiar with the distinctive features of the writing in that discipline. Then read the assignment carefully and try to identify the purpose of the assignment and the type of evidence you are expected to use. On the following pages are examples of assignments in four disciplines — psychology, business, biology, and nursing — along with excerpts from student papers that were written in response to the assignments.

7f

136

wid


Psychology ASSIGNMENT: LITERATURE REVIEW 1

2

Write a literature review in which you report on and 2

3

1

evaluate the published research on a behavioral disorder.

1 Key terms 2 Purpose: to report on and evaluate a body of evidence 3 Evidence: research of other psychologists

ADHD in Boys vs. Girls

1

Always Out of Their Seats (and Fighting): Why Are Boys Diagnosed with ADHD More Often Than Girls? Background and explanation of writer’s purpose.

Attention deficit hyperactivity disorder (ADHD) is a commonly diagnosed disorder in children that affects social, academic, or occupational functioning. As the name suggests, its hallmark characteristics are hyperactivity and lack of attention as well as

Evidence from research the writer has reviewed.

impulsive behavior. For decades, studies have focused on the causes, expression, prevalence, and outcome of the disorder, but until recently very little research investigated gender differences. In fact, until the early 1990s most research focused exclusively on boys (Brown,

APA citations and specialized language (ADHD, comorbid).

Madan-Swain, & Baldwin, 1991), perhaps because many more boys than girls are diagnosed with ADHD. Researchers have speculated on the possible explanations for the disparity, citing reasons such as true sex differences in the manifestation of the disorder’s symptoms, gender biases in those who refer children to clinicians, and possibly even the diagnostic procedures themselves (Gaub & Carlson, 1997).

Thesis: writer’s argument.

But the most persuasive reason is that ADHD is often a comorbid condition—that is, it coexists with other behavior disorders that are not diagnosed properly and that do exhibit gender differences.

Marginal annotations indicate appropriate formatting and effective writing.

>ÃÃ}iÌÃÊ UÊ Ã>«iÊ `VÕiÌÃÊ UÊ «ÃÞV}ÞÊ UÊ LÕÃiÃÃ

7f

wid

137

Business ASSIGNMENT: PROPOSAL 2

1

1

Write a proposal, as a memo, for improving or adding a service 2

at a company where you have worked. Address the pros and 3

3

cons of your proposal; draw on relevant studies, research, and 3

your knowledge of the company.

1 Key terms 2 Purpose: to analyze certain evidence and make a proposal based on that analysis 3 Appropriate evidence: relevant studies Memorandum To:

Jay Crosson, Senior Vice President, Human Resources

From:

Kelly Ratajczak, Intern, Purchasing Department

Subject: Proposal to Add a Wellness Program Date:

April 24, 2009

Health care costs are rising. In the long run, implementing a wellness

Writer’s main idea.

program in our corporate culture will decrease the company’s health care costs. Research indicates that nearly 70% of health care costs are from common illnesses related to high blood pressure, overweight, lack

Data from recent study as support for claim.

of exercise, high cholesterol, stress, poor nutrition, and other preventable health issues (Hall, 2006). Health care costs are a major expense for most businesses, and they do not reflect costs due to the loss of productivity or absenteeism. A wellness program would address most, if not all, of these health care issues and related costs.

APA citation style, typical in business. Business terms familiar to readers (costs, productivity, absenteeism).

138

7f

wid


Biology ASSIGNMENT: LABORATORY REPORT 1

1

Write a report on an experiment you conduct on the 1

1

distribution pattern of a plant species indigenous to the 2

3

Northeast. Describe your methods for collecting data 2

and interpret your experiment’s results.

1 Key terms 2 Purpose: to interpret the results of an experiment 3 Evidence: data collected during the experiment

CSE style, typical in sciences.

Distribution Pattern of Dandelion 1 Distribution Pattern of Dandelion (Taraxacum officinale) on an Abandoned Golf Course

Abstract: an overview of hypothesis, experiment, and results.

ABSTRACT This paper reports our study of the distribution pattern of the common dandelion (Taraxacum officinale) on an abandoned golf course in Hilton, New York, on 10 July 2005. An area of 6 ha was sampled with 111 randomly placed 1 1 m2 quadrats. The dandelion count

Specialized language (aggregated, random, uniformly distributed, and so on).

from each quadrat was used to test observed frequencies against expected frequencies based on a hypothesized random distribution. [Abstract continues.] INTRODUCTION

Theoretically, plants of a particular species may be aggregated, Introduction: context and purpose of random, or uniformly distributed in space 1. The distribution type may be experiment. Instead of a thesis, or main claim, determined by many factors, such as availability of nutrients, competition, a lab report interprets distance of seed dispersal, and mode of reproduction 2. the data in a later The purpose of this study was to determine if the distribution Discussion section. pattern of the common dandelion (Taraxacum officinale) on an abandoned golf course was aggregated, random, or uniform.

>ÃÃ}iÌÃÊ UÊ Ã>«iÊ `VÕiÌÃÊ UÊ L}ÞÊ UÊ ÕÀÃ}

7f

wid

139

Nursing ASSIGNMENT: NURSING PRACTICE PAPER 2 1

1

Write a client history, a nursing diagnosis, recommendations 2

1

for care, your rationales, and expected and actual outcomes. 3

3

Use interview notes, the client’s health records, and relevant 3

research findings.

1 Key terms 2 Purpose: to provide client history, diagnosis, recommendations, and outcomes 3 Evidence: interviews, health records, and research findings

ALL and HTN in One Client

1

Acute Lymphoblastic Leukemia and Hypertension in One Client: A Nursing Practice Paper Physical History E.B. is a 16-year-old white male 5'10" tall weighing 190 lb. He was admitted to the hospital on April 14, 2006, due to decreased

Evidence from client’s medical chart for overall assessment.

platelets and a need for a PRBC transfusion. He was diagnosed in October 2005 with T-cell acute lymphoblastic leukemia (ALL), after a 2-week period of decreased energy, decreased oral intake, easy bruising, and petechia. The client had experienced a 20-lb weight loss in the previous 6 months. At the time of diagnosis, his CBC showed a WBC count of 32, an H & H of 13/38, and a platelet count of 34,000. His initial chest X-ray showed an anterior mediastinal mass. Echocardiogram showed a structurally normal heart. He began induction chemotherapy on October 12, 2005, receiving vincristine, 6-mercaptopurine, doxorubicin, intrathecal methotrexate, and then

Specialized nursing language (echocardiogram, chemotherapy, and so on).

high-dose methotrexate per protocol. During his hospital stay, he

6

140

7f

wid


required packed red cells and platelets on two different occasions. He was diagnosed with hypertension (HTN) due to systolic blood pressure readings consistently ranging between 130s and 150s Instead of a thesis, or main claim, the writer gives a diagnosis, recommendations for care, and expected outcomes, all supported by evidence from observations and client records.

and was started on nifedipine. E.B. has a history of mild ADHD, migraines, and deep vein thrombosis (DVT). He has tolerated the induction and consolidation phases of chemotherapy well and is now in the maintenance phase, in which he receives a daily dose of mercaptopurine, weekly doses of methotrexate, and intermittent doses of steroids.

hackerhandbooks.com/bedhandbook > Model papers > APA literature review: Charat > APA business proposal: Ratajczak > CSE laboratory report: Johnson and Arnold > APA nursing practice paper: Riss

Part III

Clear Sentences 8 9 10 11

Prefer active verbs. 142 Balance parallel ideas. 147 Add needed words. 151 Untangle mixed constructions. 156

12 Repair misplaced and dangling modifiers. 160

13 Eliminate distracting shifts. 169 14 Emphasize key ideas. 176 15 Provide some variety. 191

141

142

8

active

8

Prefer active verbs.

Active verbs

As a rule, choose an active verb and pair it with a subject that names the person or thing doing the action. Active verbs express meaning more emphatically and vigorously than their weaker counterparts — forms of the verb be or verbs in the passive voice. PASSIVE

The pumps were destroyed by a surge of power.

BE VERB

A surge of power was responsible for the destruction of the pumps.

ACTIVE

A surge of power destroyed the pumps.

Verbs in the passive voice lack strength because their subjects receive the action instead of doing it. Forms of the verb be (be, am, is, are, was, were, being, been) lack vigor because they convey no action. Although passive verbs and the forms of be have legitimate uses, choose an active verb if it can carry your meaning. Even among active verbs, some are more active — and therefore more vigorous and colorful — than others. Carefully selected verbs can energize a piece of writing.

TXFQU

0

IPPLFE

The goalie crouched low, reached out his stick, and sent the

?

rebound away from the mouth of the net.

?

Although you may be tempted to avoid the passive voice completely, keep in mind that some writing situations call for it, especially scientific writing. For appropriate uses of the passive voice, see page 144; for advice about forming the passive voice, see 28c and 62c.

>VÌÛiÊÛÃ°Ê«>ÃÃÛiÊ UÊ ÃÌÀ}ÊÛiÀLÃÊUÊ >««À«À>ÌiÊ«>ÃÃÛi

active

8a

Grammar checkers are fairly good at flagging passive verbs, such as is used or had been tried. However, because passive verbs are sometimes appropriate, you — not the computer program — must decide whether to change a verb from passive to active.

8a Use the active voice unless you have a good reason for choosing the passive. In the active voice, the subject does the action; in the passive voice, the subject receives the action (see also 62c). Although both voices are grammatically correct, the active voice is usually more effective because it is simpler and more direct. ACTIVE

Hernando caught the fly ball.

PASSIVE

The fly ball was caught by Hernando.

Passive sentences often identify the actor in a by phrase, as in the preceding example. Sometimes, however, that phrase is omitted, and who or what is responsible for the action becomes unclear: The fly ball was caught. Most of the time, you will want to emphasize the actor, so you should use the active voice. To replace a passive verb with an active one, make the actor the subject of the sentence.

"CPMUPGMJHIUOJOHTUSVDLUIFUSBOTGPSNFS

0

The transformer was struck by a bolt of lightning.

? The active verb (struck) makes the point more forcefully than the passive verb (was struck).

5IFTFUUMFSTTUSJQQFEUIFMBOEPGUJNCFSCFGPSFSFBMJ[JOH

0

The land was stripped of timber before the settlers realized

? the consequences of their actions. The revision emphasizes the actors (settlers) by naming them in the subject.

143

8b

144

active

Active verbs

5IFDPOUSBDUPSSFNPWFEUIF 0

The debris was removed from the construction site.

?Sometimes the actor does not appear in a passive-voice sentence. To turn such a sentence into the active voice, the writer must determine an appropriate subject, in this case contractor.

Appropriate uses of the passive The passive voice is appropriate if you wish to emphasize the receiver of the action or to minimize the importance of the actor. APPROPRIATE PASSIVE

Many Hawaiians were forced to leave their homes after the earthquake.

APPROPRIATE PASSIVE

As the time for harvest approaches, the tobacco plants are sprayed with a chemical to retard the growth of suckers.

The writer of the first sentence wished to emphasize the receiver of the action, Hawaiians. The writer of the second sentence wished to focus on the tobacco plants, not on the people spraying them. In much scientific writing, the passive voice properly emphasizes the experiment or process being described, not the researcher. Check with your instructor for the preference in your discipline. APPROPRIATE PASSIVE

The solution was heated to the boiling point, and then it was reduced in volume by 50 percent.

8b Replace be verbs that result in dull or wordy sentences. Not every be verb needs replacing. The forms of be (be, am, is, are, was, were, being, been) work well when you want to link a subject to a noun that clearly renames it or to an adjective that describes it: Orchard House was the home of Louisa May Alcott. The harvest will be bountiful after the summer rains. And be verbs are essential as helping verbs before present participles (is flying, are disappearing) to express ongoing action: Derrick was fighting the fire when his wife went into labor. (See 27f.)

>««À«À>ÌiÊ«>ÃÃÛiÊ UÊ >VÌÛiÊÛÃ°Êbe ÛiÀLÃÊ UÊ ÃÌÀ}ÊÛiÀLÃÊ UÊ >}ÊÌiÊ>VÌÀ

active

8c

If using a be verb makes a sentence needlessly dull and wordy, however, consider replacing it. Often a phrase following the verb will contain a noun or an adjective (such as violation, resistant) that suggests a more vigorous, active verb (violate, resist).

WJPMBUF

0

Burying nuclear waste in Antarctica would be in violation of an international treaty.

?

Violate is less wordy and more vigorous than be in violation of.

SFTJTUFE

0

When Rosa Parks was resistant to giving up her seat on the

?

bus, she became a civil rights hero. Resisted is stronger than was resistant to. Grammar checkers usually do not flag wordiness caused by be verbs. Only you can find ways to strengthen your sentences by using vigorous, active verbs in place of be.

8c As a rule, choose a subject that names the person or thing doing the action. In weak, unemphatic prose, both the actor and the action may be buried in sentence elements other than the subject and the verb. In the following sentence, for example, both the actor and the action appear in prepositional phrases, word groups that do not receive much attention from readers. WEAK

The institution of the New Deal had the effect of reversing some of the economic inequalities of the Great Depression.

EMPHATIC

The New Deal reversed some of the economic inequalities of the Great Depression.

Consider the subjects and verbs of the two versions — institution had versus New Deal reversed. The latter expresses the writer’s point more emphatically.

145

8c

146

active

Active verbs

1

0h

The use of p ure oxygen can cause healing in wounds that

?

are otherwise untreatable. In the original sentence, the subject and verb — use can cause — express the point blandly. Pure oxygen can heal makes the point more emphatically and directly. Writing with sources

Chicago-style citation

'SBODJT-PXFMMCVJMU

0h

In 1813, a large mill was built by Francis Lowell along the

h

Charles River in Waltham, Massachusetts.1

?

When you are writing about historical events, naming the actor in the subject is the clearest and most direct way to get your point across. Instead of burying the actor (Francis Lowell ) in a prepositional phrase, the writer has made Francis Lowell the subject and has changed the verb was built from passive to active voice. (See also 8a on active voice and 57d on Chicago documentation style.)

EXERCISE 8–1 Revise any weak, unemphatic sentences by replacing be verbs or passive verbs with active alternatives and, if necessary, by naming in the subject the person or thing doing the action. Some sentences are emphatic; do not change them. Revisions of lettered sentences appear in the back of the book. Example:

h

5IFSBOHFSEPVTFEUIFDBNQ±SFCFGPSFHJWJOHVT

The campfire was doused by the ranger before we were given

?a ticket for unauthorized use of a campsite. a. b. c. d.

e. 1. 2. 3.

The Prussians were victorious over the Saxons in 1745. The entire operation is managed by Ahmed, the producer. The sea kayaks were expertly paddled by the tour guides. At the crack of rocket and mortar blasts, I jumped from the top bunk and landed on my buddy below, who was crawling on the floor looking for his boots. There were shouting protesters on the courthouse steps. A strange sound was made in the willow tree by the monkey that had escaped from the zoo. Her letter was in acknowledgment of the student’s participation in the literacy program. The bomb bay doors rumbled open, and freezing air whipped through the plane.

>}ÊÌiÊ>VÌÀÊ UÊ «>À>iÃÊ UÊ ÃiÀiÃÊ UÊ ÃÌÃ

4. 5.

//

9a

The work of Paul Oakenfold and Sandra Collins was influential in my choice of music for my audition. The only responsibility I was given by my parents was putting my little brother to bed when they had to work late.

hackerhandbooks.com/bedhandbook > Grammar exercises > Clear sentences > E-ex 8–2 to 8–5

9

Balance parallel ideas.

If two or more ideas are parallel, they are easier to grasp when expressed in parallel grammatical form. Single words should be balanced with single words, phrases with phrases, clauses with clauses. A kiss can be a comma, a question mark, or an exclamation point.

— Mistinguett

This novel is not to be tossed lightly aside, but to be hurled with great force.

— Dorothy Parker

In matters of principle, stand like a rock; in matters of taste, swim with the current.

— Thomas Jefferson

Writers often use parallelism to create emphasis. (See p. 190.)

Grammar checkers only occasionally flag faulty parallelism because they cannot assess whether ideas are parallel in grammatical form.

9a Balance parallel ideas in a series. Readers expect items in a series to appear in parallel grammatical form. When one or more of the items violate readers’ expectations, a sentence will be needlessly awkward.

147

9b

148

0

//

Parallelism

Children who study music also learn confidence,

DSFBUJWJUZ

discipline, and they are creative.

?

The revision presents all the items in the series as nouns: confidence, discipline, and creativity. 0

Impressionist painters believed in focusing on ordinary subjects, capturing the effects of light on those subjects,

VTJOH

and to use short brushstrokes.

?

The revision uses -ing forms for all the items in the series: focusing, capturing, and using. 0

Racing to get to work on time, Sam drove down the middle

JHOPSFE of the road, ran one red light, and two stop signs.

?

The revision adds a verb to make the three items parallel: drove,

ran, and ignored.

In headings and lists, aim for as much parallelism as the content allows. (See 58b and 58c.)

9b Balance parallel ideas presented as pairs. When pairing ideas, underscore their connection by expressing them in similar grammatical form. Paired ideas are usually connected in one of these ways: UÊ ÜÌÊ>ÊVÀ`>Ì}ÊVÕVÌÊÃÕVÊ>ÃÊand, but, or or UÊ ÜÌÊ>Ê«>ÀÊvÊVÀÀi>ÌÛiÊVÕVÌÃÊÃÕVÊ>ÃÊeither . . . or or not only . . . but also UÊ ÜÌÊ>ÊÜÀ`ÊÌÀ`ÕV}Ê>ÊV«>ÀÃ]ÊÕÃÕ>ÞÊthan or as

Parallel ideas linked with coordinating conjunctions Coordinating conjunctions (and, but, or, nor, for, so, and yet) link ideas of equal importance. When those ideas are closely parallel in content, they should be expressed in parallel grammatical form.

ÃiÀiÃÊ UÊ ÃÌÃÊ UÊ «>Ài`Êì>ÃÊ UÊ andÊUÊ either . . . orÊ UÊ than or as 0

//

9b

Emily Dickinson’s poetry features the use of dashes and

UIFDBQJUBMJ[BUJPOPG

capitalizing common words.

?The revision balances the nouns use and capitalization. 0

Many states are reducing property taxes for home owners

FYUFOEJOH

and extend financial aid in the form of tax credits to

?

renters. The revision balances the verb reducing with the verb extending.

Parallel ideas linked with correlative conjunctions Correlative conjunctions come in pairs: either . . . or, neither . . . nor, not only . . . but also, both . . . and, whether . . . or. Make sure that the grammatical structure following the second half of the pair is the same as that following the first half. 0

Thomas Edison was not only a prolific inventor but also was a successful entrepreneur. The words a prolific inventor follow not only, so a successful entrepreneur should follow but also. Repeating was creates an unbalanced effect.

UP

0

The clerk told me either to change my flight or take the train.

?

To change my flight, which follows either, should be balanced with to take the train, which follows or.

Comparisons linked with than or as In comparisons linked with than or as, the elements being compared should be expressed in parallel grammatical structure.

UPHSPVOE

0

It is easier to speak in abstractions than grounding one’s thoughts in reality. To speak is balanced with to ground.

?

149

9c

150

//

Parallelism

XSJUJOH

Writing with sources

0

In Pueblo culture, according to Silko, to write down the

?

stories of a tribe is not the same as “keeping track of all the

MLA-style citation

stories” (290). When you are quoting from a source, parallel grammatical structure — such as writing . . . keeping — helps create continuity between your sentence and the words from the source.

Comparisons should also be logical and complete. (See 10c.)

9c Repeat function words to clarify parallels. Function words such as prepositions (by, to) and subordinating conjunctions (that, because) signal the grammatical nature of the word groups to follow. Although you can sometimes omit them, be sure to include them whenever they signal parallel structures that readers might otherwise miss. 0

Our study revealed that left-handed students were more likely

UIBU

to have trouble with classroom desks and rearranging desks for exam periods was useful.

?

A second subordinating conjunction helps readers sort out the two parallel ideas: that left-handed students have trouble with classroom desks and that rearranging desks was useful.

EXERCISE 9–1 Edit the following sentences to correct faulty parallelism. Revisions of lettered sentences appear in the back of the book. Example: Rowena began her workday by pouring a cup of coffee and

DIFDLJOH

checked her e-mail. a.

?Police dogs are used for finding lost children, tracking criminals, and the detection of bombs and illegal drugs.

Ài«i>Ì}ÊÜÀ`ÃÊ UÊ byÊ UÊ toÊ UÊ thatÊ UÊ iiì`ÊÜÀ`Ã

b. c. d. e. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

add

10

Hannah told her rock-climbing partner that she bought a new harness and of her desire to climb Otter Cliffs. It is more difficult to sustain an exercise program than starting one. During basic training, I was not only told what to do but also what to think. Jan wanted to drive to the wine country or at least Sausalito. Camp activities include fishing trips, dance lessons, and computers. Arriving at Lake Powell in a thunderstorm, the campers found it safer to remain in their cars than setting up their tents. The streets were not only too steep but also were too narrow for anything other than pedestrian traffic. More digital artists in the show are from the South Shore than the North Shore. To load her toolbox, Anika the Clown gathered hats of different sizes, put in two tubes of face paint, arranged a bundle of extra-long straws, added a bag of colored balloons, and a battery-powered hair dryer.


10

Add needed words.

Do not omit words necessary for grammatical or logical completeness. Readers need to see at a glance how the parts of a sentence are connected. Languages sometimes differ in the need for certain words. In particular, be alert for missing articles, verbs, subjects, or expletives. See 29, 30a, and 30b.

Grammar checkers do not flag the vast majority of missing words. They can, however, catch some missing verbs (see 27e). Although they can flag some missing articles (a, an, and the), they often suggest that an article is missing when in fact it is not. (See also 29.)

151

152

10a

add

Needed words

10a Add words needed to complete compound structures. In compound structures, words are often left out for economy: Tom is a man who means what he says and [who] says what he means. Such omissions are acceptable as long as the omitted words are common to both parts of the compound structure. If a sentence defies grammar or idiom because an omitted word is not common to both parts of the compound structure, the simplest solution is to put the word back in. 0

Successful advertisers target customers whom they identify

XIP

through demographic research or have purchased their

?

product in the past.

The word who must be included because whom . . . have purchased is not grammatically correct.

BDDFQUFE

0

Mayor Davis never has and never will accept a bribe.

?

Has . . . accept is not grammatically correct.

JO

0

Many South Pacific islanders still believe and live by ancient laws.

?

Believe . . . by is not idiomatic in English. (For a list of common idioms, see 18d.)

NOTE: Even when the omitted word is common to both parts of the compound structure, occasionally it must be inserted to avoid ambiguity. My favorite professor and mentor influenced my choice of a career. [Professor and mentor are the same person.] My favorite professor and my mentor influenced my choice of a career. [Professor and mentor are two different people; my must be repeated.]

V«Õ`ÃÊ UÊ ÛiÀLÃÊ UÊ «Ài«ÃÌÃÊ UÊ whoÊ UÊ thatÊ UÊ V«>ÀÃÃ

add

10c

10b Add the word that if there is any danger of misreading without it. If there is no danger of misreading, the word that may be omitted when it introduces a subordinate clause. The value of a principle is the number of things [that] it will explain. Occasionally, however, a sentence might be misread without that. 0

In his famous obedience experiments, psychologist Stanley

UIBU

Milgram discovered ordinary people were willing to inflict

?

physical pain on strangers. Milgram didn’t discover ordinary people; he discovered that ordinary people were willing to inflict pain on strangers. The word that tells readers to expect a clause, not just ordinary people, as the direct object of discovered.

10c Add words needed to make comparisons logical and complete. Comparisons should be made between items that are alike. To compare unlike items is illogical and distracting. 0

The forests of North America are much more extensive than

UIPTFPG

Europe.

?Forests must be compared with forests, not with all of Europe.

*

0

EJFE

The death rate of infantry soldiers in the Vietnam War was

BUB

SBUF

?

?

much higher than the other combat troops.

?

The death rate cannot logically be compared to troops. The writer could revise the sentence by inserting that of after than, but the preceding revision is more concise.

153

10c

154

0

add

Needed words

Some say that Ella Fitzgerald’s renditions of Cole Porter’s

TJOHFST

songs are better than any other singer.

?

Ella Fitzgerald’s renditions cannot logically be compared with a singer. The revision uses the possessive form singer’s, with the word renditions being implied.

Sometimes the word other must be inserted to make a comparison logical.

PUIFS

0

Jupiter is larger than any planet in our solar system.

?

Jupiter is a planet, and it cannot be larger than itself.

Sometimes the word as must be inserted to make a comparison grammatically complete.

BT

0

The city of Lowell is as old, if not older than, the neighboring city of Lawrence.

?

The construction as old is not complete without a second as: as old as . . . the neighboring city of Lawrence.

Comparisons should be complete enough to ensure clarity. The reader should understand what is being compared. INCOMPLETE

Brand X is less salty.

COMPLETE

Brand X is less salty than Brand Y.

Finally, comparisons should leave no ambiguity for readers. If more than one interpretation is possible, revise the sentence to state clearly which interpretation you intend. In the following ambiguous sentence, two interpretations are possible. AMBIGUOUS

Ken helped me more than my roommate.

CLEAR

Ken helped me more than he helped my roommate.

CLEAR

Ken helped me more than my roommate did.

V«>ÀÃÃÊ UÊ >ÀÌViÃÊ UÊ a, an, the

add

10d

10d Add the articles a, an, and the where necessary for grammatical completeness. It is not always necessary to repeat articles with paired items: We bought a computer and printer. However, if one of the items requires a and the other requires an, both articles must be included.

BO

0

We bought a computer and antivirus program.

?

Articles are sometimes omitted in recipes and other instructions that are meant to be followed while they are being read. Such omissions are inappropriate, however, in nearly all other forms of writing, whether formal or informal.

Choosing and using articles can be challenging for multilingual writers. See 29.

EXERCISE 10–1 Add any words needed for grammatical or logical completeness in the following sentences. Revisions of lettered sentences appear in the back of the book. Example:

UIBU

The officer feared the prisoner would escape.

? a. b. c. d. e. 1. 2. 3.

A grapefruit or orange is a good source of vitamin C. The women entering VMI can expect haircuts as short as the male cadets. Looking out the family room window, Sarah saw her favorite tree, which she had climbed as a child, was gone. The graphic designers are interested and knowledgeable about producing posters for the balloon race. Reefs are home to more species than any ecosystem in the sea. Very few black doctors were allowed to serve in the Civil War, and their qualifications had to be higher than white doctors. Rachel is interested and committed to working at a school in Ecuador next semester. Vassily likes mathematics more than his teacher.

155

11

156 4.

mix

Mixed constructions

The inspection team saw many historic buildings had been damaged by the earthquake. Lila knows seven languages, but she found English harder to learn than any language.

5.


11

Untangle mixed constructions.

A mixed construction contains sentence parts that do not sensibly fit together. The mismatch may be a matter of grammar or of logic.

Grammar checkers can flag is when, is where, and reason . . . is because constructions (11c), but they fail to identify nearly all other mixed constructions, including sentences as tangled as this one: Depending on our method of travel and our destination determines how many suitcases we are allowed to pack.

11a Untangle the grammatical structure. Once you head into a sentence, your choices are limited by the range of grammatical patterns in English. (See 62 and 63.) You cannot begin with one grammatical plan and switch without warning to another. Often you must rethink the purpose of the sentence and revise. MIXED

For most drivers who have a blood alcohol content of .05 percent double their risk of causing an accident.

The writer begins the sentence with a long prepositional phrase and makes it the subject of the verb double. But a prepositional phrase can serve only as a modifier; it cannot be the subject of a sentence. REVISED

For most drivers who have a blood alcohol content of .05 percent, the risk of causing an accident is doubled.

>Û`}ÊÝi`Ê}À>>ÀÊ UÊ revising awkward sentences

REVISED

mix

11a

Most drivers who have a blood alcohol content of .05 percent double their risk of causing an accident.

In the first revision, the writer begins with the prepositional phrase and finishes the sentence with a proper subject and verb (risk . . . is doubled). In the second revision, the writer stays with the original verb (double) and heads into the sentence another way, making drivers the subject of double.

&MFDUJOH

0

When the country elects a president is the most important

?

responsibility in a democracy. The adverb clause When the country elects a president cannot serve as the subject of the verb is. The revision replaces the adverb clause with a gerund phrase, a word group that can function as a subject. (See 63e and 63b.) 0

Although the United States is one of the wealthiest nations in the world, but more than twelve million of our children live in poverty. The coordinating conjunction but cannot link a subordinate clause (Although the United States . . .) with an independent clause (more than twelve million of our children live in poverty).

Occasionally a mixed construction is so tangled that it defies grammatical analysis. When this happens, back away from the sentence, rethink what you want to say, and then rewrite the sentence. MIXED

In the whole-word method, children learn to recognize entire words rather than by the phonics method in which they learn to sound out letters and groups of letters.

REVISED

The whole-word method teaches children to recognize entire words; the phonics method teaches them to sound out letters and groups of letters.

157

11b

158

mix

Mixed constructions

English does not allow double subjects, nor does it allow an object or an adverb to be repeated in an adjective clause. Unlike some other languages, English does not allow a noun and a pronoun to be repeated in a sentence if they have the same grammatical function. See 30c and 30d. 0

My father he moved to Peru before he met my mother.

0

The final exam I should really study for it to pass the

UIF±OBMFYBN

?

course.

11b Straighten out the logical connections. The subject and the predicate (the verb and its modifiers) should make sense together; when they don’t, the error is known as faulty predication.

5JGGBOZ

0

We decided that Tiffany’s welfare would not be safe living

?

with her mother.

Tiffany, not her welfare, may not be safe.

EPVCMFQFSTPOBMFYFNQUJPOGPSUIF

0

Under the revised plan, the elderly,who now receive a double

?

personal exemption, will be abolished. The exemption, not the elderly, will be abolished.

An appositive is a noun that renames a nearby noun. When an appositive and the noun it renames are not logically equivalent, the error is known as faulty apposition. (See 63c.)

5BYBDDPVOUJOH 0

The tax accountant, a very lucrative profession, requires

?

intelligence, patience, and attention to mathematical detail. The tax accountant is a person, not a profession.

}VÊ UÊ >««ÃÌÛiÃÊ UÊ ÃÊÜiÊ UÊ ÃÊÜiÀiÊ UÊ Ài>ÃÊ°Ê°Ê°ÊÃÊLiV>ÕÃi

mix

11c

11c Avoid is when, is where, and reason . . . is because constructions. In formal English, many readers object to is when, is where, and reason . . . is because constructions on either grammatical or logical grounds. Grammatically, the verb is (as well as are, was, and were) should be followed by a noun that renames the subject or by an adjective that describes the subject, not by an adverb clause beginning with when, where, or because. (See 62b and 63e.) Logically, the words when, where, and because suggest relations of time, place, and cause — relations that do not always make sense with is, are, was, or were.

BEJTPSEFSTVGGFSFECZQFPQMFXIP

0

Anorexia nervosa is where people think they are too

?

fat and diet to the point of starvation. Where refers to places. Anorexia nervosa is a disorder, not a place. 0

The reason the experiment failed is because conditions in the lab were not sterile. The writer might have changed because to that (The reason the experiment failed is that conditions in the lab were not sterile), but the preceding revision is more concise.

EXERCISE 11–1 Edit the following sentences to untangle mixed constructions. Revisions of lettered sentences appear in the back of the book. Example:

a. b. c.

5BLJOH

By taking the oath of allegiance made Ling a US citizen.

?Using surgical gloves is a precaution now worn by dentists to prevent contact with patients’ blood and saliva. A physician, the career my brother is pursuing, requires at least ten years of challenging work. The reason the pharaohs had bad teeth was because tiny particles of sand found their way into Egyptian bread.

159

12

160 d. e. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

mm/dm

Misplaced and dangling modifiers

Recurring bouts of flu among team members set a record for number of games forfeited. In this box contains the key to your future. Early diagnosis of prostate cancer is often curable. Depending on our method of travel and our destination determines how many suitcases we are allowed to pack. Dyslexia is where people have a learning disorder that impairs reading ability. Even though Ellen had heard French spoken all her life, yet she could not speak it. In understanding artificial intelligence code is a critical skill for computer game designers.


12

Repair misplaced and dangling modifiers.

Modifiers, whether they are single words, phrases, or clauses, should point clearly to the words they modify. As a rule, related words should be kept together.

Grammar checkers can flag split infinitives, such as to carefully and thoroughly sift (12d). However, they don’t alert you to other misplaced modifiers (I only ate three radishes) or dangling modifiers (When a boy, my mother enrolled me in tap dance classes).

12a Put limiting modifiers in front of the words they modify. Limiting modifiers such as only, even, almost, nearly, and just should appear in front of a verb only if they modify the verb: At first, I couldn’t even touch my toes, much less grasp them. If they limit the meaning of some other word in the sentence, they should be placed in front of that word.

onlyÊ UÊ hardlyÊ UÊ notÊ UÊ Ã«>Vi`Ê UÊ ÃµÕÌ} 0

mm/dm

12b

The literature reveals that students only learn new vocabulary

POMZ

words when they are encouraged to read.

?

Only limits the meaning of the when clause. 0

St. Vitus Cathedral, commissioned by Charles IV in the

BMNPTU

mid-fourteenth century, almost took six centuries to

?

complete.

Almost limits the meaning of six centuries, not took.

KVTU

0

If you just interview chemistry majors, your picture of the

?

student body’s response to the new grading policies will be incomplete. The adverb just limits the meaning of chemistry majors, not interview.

When the limiting modifier not is misplaced, the sentence usually suggests a meaning the writer did not intend.

OPU

0

In the United States in 1860, all black southerners were not slaves.

?

The original sentence says that no black southerners were slaves. The revision makes the writer’s real meaning clear: Some (but not all) black southerners were slaves.

12b Place phrases and clauses so that readers can see at a glance what they modify. Although phrases and clauses can appear at some distance from the words they modify, make sure your meaning is clear. When phrases or clauses are oddly placed, absurd misreadings can result.

161

12b

162

mm/dm


MISPLACED

The soccer player returned to the clinic where he had undergone emergency surgery in 2004 in a limousine sent by Adidas.

REVISED

Traveling in a limousine sent by Adidas, the soccer player returned to the clinic where he had undergone emergency surgery in 2004.

The revision corrects the false impression that the soccer player underwent emergency surgery in a limousine.

0OUIFXBMMT

0

There are many pictures of comedians who have performed

? at Gavin’son the walls. ?

The comedians weren’t performing on the walls; the pictures were on the walls.

QPVOE

0

The robber was described as a six-foot-tall man with a heavy

?

mustacheweighing 170 pounds.

?

The robber, not the mustache, weighed 170 pounds.

Occasionally the placement of a modifier leads to an ambiguity — a squinting modifier. In such a case, two revisions will be possible, depending on the writer’s intended meaning. AMBIGUOUS

The exchange students we met for coffee occasionally questioned us about our latest slang.

CLEAR

The exchange students we occasionally met for coffee questioned us about our latest slang.

CLEAR

The exchange students we met for coffee questioned us occasionally about our latest slang.

In the original version, it was not clear whether the meeting or the questioning happened occasionally. Both revisions eliminate the ambiguity.

Ã«>Vi`Ê UÊ ÃµÕÌ}Ê U separating subject and verb

mm/dm

12c

163

12c Move awkwardly placed modifiers. As a rule, a sentence should flow from subject to verb to object, without lengthy detours along the way. When a long adverbial word group separates a subject from its verb, a verb from its object, or a helping verb from its main verb, the result is often awkward. " )POH,POH 0h Hong Kong, after more than 150 years of British rule, was

?

transferred back to Chinese control in 1997.

?

There is no reason to separate the subject, Hong Kong, from the verb, was transferred, with a long phrase.

*

0

Jeffrey Meyers discusses, in his biography of F. Scott

? +FGGSFZ.FZFSTEJTDVTTFT

Fitzgerald, the writer’s “fascination with the superiority,

? the selfishness, and the emptiness of the rich” (166). When you quote from a source, the phrase or clause that you use to introduce the source should be as straightforward as possible. There is no reason to separate the verb, discusses, from its object, fascination, with two prepositional phrases.

EXCEPTION: Occasionally a writer may choose to delay a verb or

an object to create suspense. In the following passage, for example, Robert Mueller inserts the after phrase between the subject women and the verb walk to heighten the dramatic effect. I asked a Burmese why women, after centuries of following their men, now walk ahead. He said there were many unexploded land mines since the war. — Robert Mueller

English does not allow an adverb to appear between a verb and its object. See 30f.

FBTJMZ

0

Yolanda lifted easily the fifty-pound weight.

?


12d

164

mm/dm


12d Avoid split infinitives when they are awkward. An infinitive consists of to plus the base form of a verb: to think, to breathe, to dance. When a modifier appears between to and the verb, an infinitive is said to be “split”: to carefully balance, to completely understand. When a long word or a phrase appears between the parts of the infinitive, the result is usually awkward.

*GQPTTJCMF UIF

The patient should try to if possible avoid going up and

0

?down stairs. Attempts to avoid split infinitives can result in equally awkward sentences. When alternative phrasing sounds unnatural, most experts allow — and even encourage — splitting the infinitive. AWKWARD

We decided actually to enforce the law.

BETTER

We decided to actually enforce the law.

At times, neither the split infinitive nor its alternative sounds particularly awkward. In such situations, it is usually better to unsplit the infinitive, especially in formal writing. Nursing students learn to accurately record a patient’s vital

0

BDDVSBUFMZ

signs.

?

EXERCISE 12–1 Edit the following sentences to correct misplaced or awkwardly placed modifiers. Revisions of lettered sentences appear in the back of the book. Example:

JOBUFMFQIPOFTVSWFZ

a.

Answering questions can be annoyingin a telephone survey.

?

?

More research is needed to effectively evaluate the risks posed by volcanoes in the Pacific Northwest.

split infinitive (ÌÊµÕVÞÊ}®Ê U finding dangling modifiers

b. c. d. e. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

mm/dm

12e

Many students graduate with debt from college totaling more than fifty thousand dollars. It is a myth that humans only use 10 percent of their brains. A coolhunter is a person who can find in the unnoticed corners of modern society the next wave of fashion. All geese do not fly beyond Narragansett for the winter. The flood nearly displaced half of the city’s residents, who packed into several overcrowded shelters. Most lions at night hunt for medium-size prey, such as zebra. Several recent studies have encouraged heart patients to more carefully watch their cholesterol levels. The garden’s centerpiece is a huge sculpture that was carved by three women called Walking in Place. The old Marlboro ads depicted a man on a horse smoking a cigarette.


12e Repair dangling modifiers. A dangling modifier fails to refer logically to any word in the sentence. Dangling modifiers are easy to repair, but they can be hard to recognize, especially in your own writing.

Recognizing dangling modifiers Dangling modifiers are usually word groups (such as verbal phrases) that suggest but do not name an actor. When a sentence opens with such a modifier, readers expect the subject of the next clause to name the actor. If it doesn’t, the modifier dangles. 0

Understanding the need to create checks and balances on

UIFGSBNFSTPG

power, the Constitution divided the government into three

?

branches. The framers of the Constitution (not the document itself ) understood the need for checks and balances.

165

12e

166

mm/dm


XPNFOIBWFPGUFOCFFOEFOJFE

0

After completing seminary training, women’s access to the

priesthoodhas often been denied.

?

?

Women (not their access to the priesthood) complete the training.

The following sentences illustrate four common kinds of dangling modifiers. DANGLING

Deciding to join the navy, the recruiter enthusiastically pumped Joe’s hand. [Participial phrase]

DANGLING

Upon entering the doctor’s office, a skeleton caught my attention. [Preposition followed by a gerund phrase]

DANGLING

To satisfy her mother, the piano had to be practiced every day. [Infinitive phrase]

DANGLING

Though not eligible for the clinical trial, the doctor was willing to prescribe the drug for Ethan on compassionate grounds. [Elliptical clause with an understood subject and verb]

These dangling modifiers falsely suggest that the recruiter decided to join the navy, that the skeleton entered the doctor’s office, that the piano intended to satisfy the mother, and that the doctor was not eligible for the clinical trial. Although most readers will understand the writer’s intended meaning in such sentences, the inadvertent humor can be distracting.

Repairing dangling modifiers To repair a dangling modifier, you can revise the sentence in one of two ways: UÊ

>iÊÌiÊ>VÌÀÊÊÌiÊÃÕLiVÌÊvÊÌiÊÃiÌiVi°

UÊ

>iÊÌiÊ>VÌÀÊÊÌiÊ`wiÀ°

ViV}ÊvÀÊ`>}}Ê`wiÀÃÊUÊ fixing dangling modifiers

mm/dm

12e

Checking for dangling modifiers Does an opening phrase suggest an action without naming the actor?

NO

No problem

YES

No problem

YES

Does the subject of the sentence name the actor?

NO

Revise the dangling modifier.

Depending on your sentence, one of these revision strategies may be more appropriate than the other. ACTOR NAMED IN SUBJECT

0h

*OPUJDFE

Upon entering the doctor’s office, a skeleton caught my

?

attention.

0h

?

+JOHNFJIBEUPQSBDUJDF

To satisfy her mother, the piano had to be practiced every day.

?

ACTOR NAMED IN MODIFIER

8IFO+PFEFDJEFE

0h

Deciding to join the navy, the recruiter enthusiastically

h

IJT ? pumped Joe’s hand. ?

167

12e

168

mm/dm


&UIBOXBT

0h

Though not eligible for the clinical trial, the doctor

h

was willing to prescribe the drug for Ethan on

?

IJN

?

compassionate grounds.

NOTE: You cannot repair a dangling modifier just by moving

it. Consider, for example, the sentence about the skeleton. If you put the modifier at the end of the sentence (A skeleton caught my attention upon entering the doctor’s office), you are still suggesting — absurdly, of course — that the skeleton entered the office. The only way to avoid the problem is to put the word I in the sentence, either as the subject or in the modifier.

*OPUJDFE


0h

attention.

?

?

"T*FOUFSFE

0h


?

attention.

EXERCISE 12–2 Edit the following sentences to correct dangling modifiers. Most sentences can be revised in more than one way. Revisions of lettered sentences appear in the back of the book. Example:

BTUVEFOUNVTUDPNQMFUF

To acquire a degree in almost any field, two science courses must be completed.

a. b. c. d. e.

?

?

Though only sixteen, UCLA accepted Martha’s application. To replace the gear mechanism, attached is a form to order the part by mail. Settled in the cockpit, the pounding of the engine was muffled only slightly by my helmet. After studying polymer chemistry, computer games seemed less complex to Phuong. When a young man, my mother enrolled me in tap dance classes.

wÝ}Ê`>}}Ê`wiÀÃÊ UÊ ÃvÌÃÊ U «ÌÊvÊÛiÜÊ UÊ I,ÊÞÕ,ÊiÊ UÊ number

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

shift

13a

While working as a ranger in Everglades National Park, a Florida panther crossed the road in front of my truck one night. By following the new recycling procedure, the city’s landfill costs will be reduced significantly. Serving as president of the missionary circle, one of Sophia’s duties is to raise money for the church. After buying an album by Ali Farka Toure, the rich and rolling rhythms of Malian music made more sense to Silas. Opening the window to let out a huge bumblebee, the car swerved into an oncoming truck.


13

Eliminate distracting shifts.

Grammar checkers usually do not flag shifts in point of view or in verb tense, mood, or voice. Even obvious errors, like the following shift in tense, slip right past the grammar checker: My three-year-old fell into the pool and to my surprise she swims to the shallow end. Sometimes grammar checkers mark a shift from a direct to an indirect question or quotation but do not make any suggestions for revision. You must decide where the structure is faulty and how to fix it.

13a Make the point of view consistent in person and number. The point of view of a piece of writing is the perspective from which it is written: first person (I or we), second person ( you), or third person (he, she, it, one, they, or any noun). The I (or we) point of view, which emphasizes the writer, is a good choice for informal letters and writing based primarily on personal experience. The you point of view, which emphasizes the reader, works well for giving advice or explaining how to do something. The third-person point of view, which

169

13a

170

shift

Shifts

emphasizes the subject, is appropriate in formal academic and professional writing. Writers who are having difficulty settling on an appropriate point of view sometimes shift confusingly from one to another. The solution is to choose a suitable perspective and then stay with it. 0

Our class practiced rescuing a victim trapped in a wrecked car. We learned to dismantle the car with the essential

8F

PVS

?

?

PVS

tools. You were graded on your speed and your skill in freeing the victim.

?

The writer should have stayed with the we point of view. You is inappropriate because the writer is not addressing readers directly. You should not be used in a vague sense meaning “anyone.” (See 23d.)

:PVOFFE

0

One needs a password and a credit card number to access

? the database. You will be billed at an hourly rate. You is an appropriate choice because the writer is giving advice directly to readers. 0

Writing with sources APA-style citation

According to the National Institute of Mental Health

DIJMESFO

(2007), a child with attention deficit hyperactivity disorder

?

may have trouble sitting still and may gradually stop paying attention to their teachers (Symptoms section, para. 2). In describing reports or results of studies, writers are often tempted to generalize with singular nouns, such as child, and then later in the passage find themselves shifting from singular to plural. Here the writer might have changed their to the singular his or her to agree with child, but the revision making both terms plural is more concise. (See also 17f and 22a.)

«ÌÊvÊÛiÜÊ UÊ I, yÕ, heÊ UÊ Ã}Õ>ÀÊÛÃ°Ê«ÕÀ>Ê UÊ VÃÃÌiÌÊÌiÃi

shift

13b

EXERCISE 13–1 Edit the following paragraph to eliminate distracting shifts in point of view (person and number). When online dating first became available, many people thought that it would simplify romance. We believed that you could type in a list of criteria — sense of humor, college education, green eyes, good job — and a database would select the perfect mate. Thousands of people signed up for services and filled out their profiles, confident that true love was only a few mouse clicks away. As it turns out, however, virtual dating is no easier than traditional dating. I still have to contact the people I find, exchange e-mails and phone calls, and meet him in the real world. Although a database might produce a list of possibilities and screen out obviously undesirable people, you can’t predict chemistry. More often than not, people who seem perfect online just don’t click in person. Electronic services do help a single person expand their pool of potential dates, but it’s no substitute for the hard work of romance. hackerhandbooks.com/bedhandbook > Grammar exercises > Clear sentences > E-ex 13–5

13b Maintain consistent verb tenses. Consistent verb tenses clearly establish the time of the actions being described. When a passage begins in one tense and then shifts without warning and for no reason to another, readers are distracted and confused. 0

There was no way I could fight the current and win. Just as I

KVNQFE

was losing hope, a stranger jumps off a passing boat and

TXBN

swims toward me.

?

? The writer thought that the present tense ( jumps, swims) would convey immediacy and drama. But having begun in the past tense (could fight, was losing), the writer should follow through in the past tense.

Writers often encounter difficulty with verb tenses when writing about literature. Because fictional events occur outside

171

13b

172

shift

Shifts

the time frames of real life, the past tense and the present tense may seem equally appropriate. The literary convention, however, is to describe fictional events consistently in the present tense. (See 55.) 0

The scarlet letter is a punishment sternly placed on Hester’s

JT

breast by the community, and yet it was a fanciful and

?

imaginative product of Hester’s own needlework.

EXERCISE 13–2 Edit the following paragraphs to eliminate distracting shifts in tense. The English colonists who settled in Massachusetts received assistance at first from the local Indian tribes, but by 1675 there had been friction between the English and the Indians for many years. On June 20 of that year, Metacomet, whom the colonists called Philip, leads the Wampanoag tribe in the first of a series of attacks on the colonial settlements. The war, known today as King Philip’s War, rages on for more than a year and leaves three thousand Indians and six hundred colonists dead. Metacomet’s attempt to retain power in his native land failed. Finally he too is killed, and the victorious colonists sell his wife and children into slavery. The Indians did not leave records of their encounters with the English settlers, but the settlers recorded some of their experiences at the hands of the Indians. One of the few accounts to survive was written by a captured colonist, Mrs. Mary Rowlandson. She is a minister’s wife who is kidnapped by an Indian war party and held captive for eleven weeks in 1676. Her history, A Narrative of the Captivity and Restoration of Mrs. Mary Rowlandson, tells the story of her experiences with the Wampanoags. Although it did not paint a completely balanced picture of the Indians, Rowlandson’s narrative, which is considered a classic early American text, showed its author to be a keen observer of life in an Indian camp. hackerhandbooks.com/bedhandbook > Grammar exercises > Clear sentences > E-ex 13–6

shift

VÃÃÌiÌÊÌiÃiÊ UÊ `Ê UÊ ÛViÊ

13c

13c Make verbs consistent in mood and voice. Unnecessary shifts in the mood of a verb can be distracting and confusing to readers. There are three moods in English: the indicative, used for facts, opinions, and questions; the imperative, used for orders or advice; and the subjunctive, used in certain contexts to express wishes or conditions contrary to fact (see 27g). The following passage shifts confusingly from the indicative to the imperative mood. 0

The counselor advised us to spread out our core requirements

4IFBMTPTVHHFTUFEUIBUXF

over two or three semesters. Also, pay attention to pre-

?

requisites for elective courses.

The writer began by reporting the counselor’s advice in the indicative mood (counselor advised) and switched to the imperative mood ( pay attention); the revision puts both sentences in the indicative.

A verb may be in either the active voice (with the subject doing the action) or the passive voice (with the subject receiving the action). (See 8a.) If a writer shifts without warning from one to the other, readers may be left wondering why.

HJWFTJU

0h

Each student completes a self-assessment. The self-assessment

HFT FYDIBO?

is then given to the teacher and a copy is exchanged with

a classmate.

?

?

Because the passage began in the active voice (student completes) and then switched to the passive (self-assessment is given, copy is exchanged ), readers are left wondering who gives the self-assessment to the teacher and the classmate. The active voice, which is clearer and more direct, leaves no ambiguity.

173

13d

174

shift

Shifts

13d Avoid sudden shifts from indirect to direct questions or quotations. An indirect question reports a question without asking it: We asked whether we could visit Miriam. A direct question asks directly: Can we visit Miriam? Sudden shifts from indirect to direct questions are awkward. In addition, sentences containing such shifts are impossible to punctuate because indirect questions must end with a period and direct questions must end with a question mark. (See 38b.) 0h

I wonder whether Karla knew of the theft and, if so, did

XIFUIFSTIFSFQPSUFE

she report it to the police?

?

?

The revision poses both questions indirectly. The writer could also ask both questions directly: Did Karla know of the theft and, if so, did she report it to the police?

An indirect quotation reports someone’s words without quoting word for word: Annabelle said that she is a Virgo. A direct quotation presents the exact words of a speaker or writer, set off with quotation marks: Annabelle said, “I am a Virgo.” Unannounced shifts from indirect to direct quotations are distracting and confusing, especially when the writer fails to insert the necessary quotation marks, as in the following example. 0

The patient said she had been experiencing heart palpitations

BTLFENFUP

XBT

?

?

and please run as many tests as possible to find out what’s wrong.

The revision reports the patient’s words indirectly. The writer also could quote the words directly: The patient said, “I have been experiencing heart palpitations. Please run as many tests as possible to find out what’s wrong.”

`ÀiVÌÉ`ÀiVÌÊµÕiÃÌÃÊ>`ÊµÕÌ>ÌÃ

shift

13d

EXERCISE 13–3 Edit the following sentences to make the verbs consistent in mood and voice and to eliminate distracting shifts from indirect to direct questions or quotations. Revisions of lettered sentences appear in the back of the book. Example: As a public relations intern, I wrote press releases, managed

a.

b.

c. d.

e. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

±FMEFEBMMQIPOFDBMMT

the Web site, and all phone calls were fielded by me.

? musician, Ray Charles mastered R&B, An incredibly talented soul, and gospel styles. Even country music was performed well by him. Environmentalists point out that shrimp farming in Southeast Asia is polluting water and making farmlands useless. They warn that action must be taken by governments before it is too late. The samples were observed for five days before we detected any growth. In his famous soliloquy, Hamlet contemplates whether death would be preferable to his difficult life and, if so, is he capable of committing suicide? The lawyer told the judge that Miranda Hale was innocent and allow her to prove the allegations false. When the photographs were taken on the beach at sunset, I intentionally left the foreground out of focus. If the warning sirens sound, evacuate at once. It is not advised that you return to the building until the alarm has stopped. Most baby products warn parents not to leave children unattended. Also, follow all directions carefully. The advertisement promised that results would be seen in five days or consumers could return the product for a full refund. Investigators first need to determine whether there was a forceful entry and then what was the motive?

EXERCISE 13–4 Edit the following sentences to eliminate distracting shifts. Revisions of lettered sentences appear in the back of the book. Example: For many first-year engineering students, adjusting to a

UIFZ

rigorous course load can be so challenging that you sometimes feel overwhelmed.

?

175

14

176 a. b. c.

d.

e.

1. 2.

3. 4. 5.

emph

Emphasis (coordination and subordination)

A courtroom lawyer has more than a touch of theater in their blood. The interviewer asked if we had brought our proof of citizenship and did we bring our passports? The reconnaissance scout often has to make fast decisions and use sophisticated equipment to keep their team from being detected. After the animators finish their scenes, the production designer arranges the clips according to the storyboard. Synchronization notes must also be made for the sound editor and the composer. Madame Defarge is a sinister figure in Dickens’s A Tale of Two Cities. On a symbolic level, she represents fate; like the Greek Fates, she knitted the fabric of individual destiny. Everyone should protect yourself from the sun, especially on the first day of extensive exposure. Our neighbors told us that the island was being evacuated because of the coming storm. Also, take the northern route to the mainland. Rescue workers put water on her face and lifted her head gently onto a pillow. Finally, she opens her eyes. In my first tai chi class, the instructor asked if I had ever done yoga stretches and did I have good balance? The artist has often been seen as a threat to society, especially when they refuse to conform to conventional standards of taste.


14

Emphasize key ideas.

Within each sentence, emphasize your point by expressing it in the subject and verb of an independent clause, the words that receive the most attention from readers (see 14a–14e). Within longer stretches of prose, you can draw attention to ideas deserving special emphasis by using a variety of techniques, often involving an unusual twist or some element of surprise (see 14f).

VL}ÊiµÕ>Êì>Ã

emph

14a

14a Coordinate equal ideas; subordinate minor ideas. When combining two or more ideas in one sentence, you have two choices: coordination or subordination. Choose coordination to indicate that the ideas are equal or nearly equal in importance. Choose subordination to indicate that one idea is less important than another.

Grammar checkers do not catch the problems with coordination and subordination discussed in this section. Not surprisingly, computer programs have no way of sensing the relative importance of ideas.

Coordination Coordination draws attention equally to two or more ideas. To coordinate single words or phrases, join them with a coordinating conjunction or with a pair of correlative conjunctions: bananas and strawberries; not only a lackluster plot but also inferior acting (see 61g). To coordinate independent clauses — word groups that express a complete thought and that can stand alone as a sentence — join them with a comma and a coordinating conjunction or with a semicolon: , and , for

, but , so

, or , yet

, nor ;

The semicolon is often accompanied by a conjunctive adverb such as moreover, furthermore, therefore, or however or by a transitional phrase such as for example, in other words, or as a matter of fact. (For a longer list, see p. 179.) Assume, for example, that your intention is to draw equal attention to the following two ideas. Web sites like Facebook and MySpace offer ways for people to connect in the virtual world. They do not replace traditional forms of social interaction.

177

178

14a

emph


To coordinate these ideas, you can join them with a comma and the coordinating conjunction but or with a semicolon and the conjunctive adverb however. Web sites like Facebook and MySpace offer ways for people to connect in the virtual world, but they do not replace traditional forms of social interaction. Web sites like Facebook and MySpace offer ways for people to connect in the virtual world; however, they do not replace traditional forms of social interaction.

It is important to choose a coordinating conjunction or conjunctive adverb appropriate to your meaning. In the preceding example, the two ideas contrast with each other, calling for but or however. (For specific coordination strategies, see the chart on p. 179.)

Subordination To give unequal emphasis to two or more ideas, express the major idea in an independent clause and place any minor ideas in subordinate clauses or phrases. (For specific subordination strategies, see the chart on p. 180.) Let your intended meaning determine which idea you emphasize. Consider the two ideas about social networking Web sites. Web sites like Facebook and MySpace offer ways for people to connect in the virtual world. They do not replace traditional forms of social interaction.

If your purpose is to stress the ways that people can connect in the virtual world rather than the limitations of these connections, subordinate the idea about the limitations. Although they do not replace traditional forms of social interaction, Web sites like Facebook and MySpace offer ways for people to connect in the virtual world.

emph

ÀÊì>ÃÊ UÊ VL}ÊiµÕ>Êì>Ã

14a

Using coordination to combine sentences of equal importance 1. Consider using a comma and a coordinating conjunction. (See 32a.) , and , for 0

, but , so

, or , yet

, nor

In Orthodox Jewish funeral ceremonies, the shroud is

BOEUIF

a simple linen vestment. The coffin is plain wood.

?

2. Consider using a semicolon with a conjunctive adverb or transitional phrase. (See 34b.) also as a result besides VÃiµÕiÌÞ finally for example for instance furthermore

however in addition in fact in other words in the first place meanwhile moreover nevertheless

next now of course otherwise still then therefore thus

NPSFPWFS TIF

0

? grades and a record of community service.

Alicia scored well on the SAT. She also had excellent

3. Consider using a semicolon alone. (See 34a.)

JO

0

?

In youth we learn. In age we understand.

To focus on the limitations of the virtual world, subordinate the idea about the Web sites. Although Web sites like Facebook and MySpace offer ways for people to connect in the virtual world, they do not replace traditional forms of social interaction.

179

14a

180

emph


Using subordination to combine sentences of unequal importance 1. Consider putting the less important idea in a subordinate clause beginning with one of the following words. (See 63e.) after although as as if because

before even though if since so that

that unless until when where

which while who whom whose

8IFO 0

Elizabeth Cady Stanton proposed a convention to discuss the

?status of women in America. Lucretia Mott agreed. ? 0

UIBUTIF

My sister owes much of her recovery to a yoga program. She

?

began the program three years ago.

2. Consider putting the less important idea in an appositive phrase. (See 63c.)

is a discipline based on the philosophy of nonviolence. ? ? It teaches the art of self-defense.

0h Karate

3. Consider putting the less important idea in a participial phrase. (See 63b.)

/PUJDJOH

0h I

noticed the EpiPen in her tote bag. I asked her if she has

?food allergies.

0h American

?

&

essayist Cheryl Peck was encouraged by friends to

? "NFSJDBOFTTBZJTU$IFSZM1FDL

? in her essays about being overweight.

write about her life. She began combining humor and irony

combining major and minor ideas

emph

14a

EXERCISE 14–1 Use the coordination or subordination technique in brackets to combine each pair of independent clauses. Revisions of lettered sentences appear in the back of the book. Example: Ted Williams was one of the best hitters in the history of

CBTFCBMM CVUIF

baseball. He never won a World Series ring. [Use a comma

?and a coordinating conjunction.] a.

b.

c.

d.

e.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Williams played for the Boston Red Sox from 1936 to 1960. He managed the Washington Senators and Texas Rangers for several years after retiring as a player. [Use a comma and a coordinating conjunction.] In 1941, Williams finished the season with a batting average of .406. No player has hit over .400 for a season since then. [Use a semicolon.] Williams acknowledged that Joe DiMaggio was a better allaround player. Williams felt that he was a better hitter than DiMaggio. [Use the subordinating conjunction although.] Williams was a stubborn man. He always refused to tip his cap to the crowd after a home run because he claimed that fans were fickle. [Use a semicolon and the transitional phrase for example]. Williams’s relationship with the media was unfriendly at best. He sarcastically called baseball writers the “knights of the keyboard” in his memoir. [Use a semicolon.] Williams took time out from his baseball career to serve in the Marines during World War II. He went on active duty a second time during the Korean War. [Use a semicolon and the transitional phrase in addition.] Williams was named most valuable player twice in his career. He was listed as the eighth-best baseball player of all time by the Sporting News in 1999. [Use the relative pronoun who.] Williams hit a home run in his final at bat in September 1960. Then he retired as a player. [Use a comma and a coordinating conjunction.] Williams surprised many people with his 1966 Hall of Fame induction speech. It called for recognition of Negro League players and their inclusion in the Hall of Fame. [Use the relative pronoun which.]

181

14b

182

5.

emph


At the 1999 All-Star game, Ted Williams returned to Fenway Park in Boston to throw out the ceremonial first pitch. For the first time he waved his hat to the cheering fans. [Use a comma and a coordinating conjunction.]

14b Combine choppy sentences. Short sentences demand attention, so you should use them primarily for emphasis. Too many short sentences, one after the other, make for a choppy style. If an idea is not important enough to deserve its own sentence, try combining it with a sentence close by. Put any minor ideas in subordinate structures such as phrases or subordinate clauses. (See 63.) 0h

The Parks Department keeps the use of insecticides to a

CFDBVTFUIF

minimum. The city is concerned about the environment.

?

The writer wanted to emphasize that the Parks Department minimizes its use of chemicals, so she put the reason in a subordinate clause beginning with because. 0h

The Chesapeake and Ohio Canal is a 184-mile waterway

?

constructed in the 1800s. It was a major source of

?

transportation for goods during the Civil War. A minor idea is now expressed in an appositive phrase (a 184-mile waterway constructed in the 1800s).

&

0h

Sister Consilio was enveloped in a black robe with only her

h

face and hands visible. She was an imposing figure.

4JTUFS$POTJMJP

?

Because Sister Consilio’s overall impression was more important to the writer’s purpose, the writer put the description of the clothing in a participial phrase beginning with Enveloped.

choppy

emph

14b

Although subordination is ordinarily the most effective technique for combining short, choppy sentences, coordination is appropriate when the ideas are equal in importance.

BOE

0h

At 3:30 p.m., Forrest displayed a flag of truce. Forrest sent in ahdemand for unconditional surrender.

?

Combining two short sentences by joining their predicates (displayed . . . sent) is an effective coordination technique.

Unlike some other languages, English does not repeat objects or adverbs in adjective clauses. The relative pronoun (that, which, whom) or relative adverb (where) in the adjective clause represents the object or adverb. See 30d. 0

The apartment that we rented it needed repairs. The pronoun it cannot repeat the relative pronoun that.

0

The small town where my grandfather was born there is now a big city. The adverb there cannot repeat the relative adverb where.

EXERCISE 14–2 Combine the following sentences by subordinating minor ideas or by coordinating ideas of equal importance. You must decide which ideas are minor because the sentences are given out of context. Revisions of lettered sentences appear in the back of the book. Example:

a.

Agnes was another girl I worked with. She was a hyper-

?

active child.

?

The X-Men comic books and Japanese woodcuts of kabuki dancers were part of Marlena’s research project on popular culture. They covered the tabletop and the chairs.

183

14c

184

b. c. d. e.

1. 2. 3.

4.

5.

emph


Our waitress was costumed in a kimono. She had painted her face white. She had arranged her hair in a lacquered beehive. Students can apply for a spot in the leadership program. The program teaches thinking and communication skills. Shore houses were flooded up to the first floor. Beaches were washed away. Brant’s Lighthouse was swallowed by the sea. Laura Thackray is an engineer at Volvo Car Corporation. She addressed women’s safety needs. She designed a pregnant crash-test dummy. I noticed that the sky was glowing orange and red. I bent down to crawl into the bunker. The Market Inn is located on North Wharf. It doesn’t look very impressive from the outside. The food, however, is excellent. He walked up to the pitcher’s mound. He dug his toe into the ground. He swung his arm around backward and forward. Then he threw the ball and struck the batter out. Eryn and Maeve have decided to start a business. They have known each other since kindergarten. They will renovate homes for people with disabilities. The first football card set was released by the Goudey Gum Company in 1933. The set featured only three football players. They were Red Grange, Bronko Nagurski, and Knute Rockne.

hackerhandbooks.com/bedhandbook > Grammar exercises > Clear sentences > E-ex 14–5 and 14–6

14c Avoid ineffective or excessive coordination. Coordinate structures are appropriate only when you intend to draw readers’ attention equally to two or more ideas: Professor Sakellarios praises loudly, and she criticizes softly. If one idea is more important than another — or if a coordinating conjunction does not clearly signal the relationship between the ideas — you should subordinate the less important idea. INEFFECTIVE COORDINATION

Closets were taxed as rooms, and most colonists stored their clothes in chests or clothespresses.

IMPROVED WITH SUBORDINATION

Because closets were taxed as rooms, most colonists stored their clothes in chests or clothespresses.

overusing and,ÊLÕÌ, or

emph

14c

The revision subordinates the less important idea (closets were taxed as rooms) by putting it in a subordinate clause. Notice that the subordinating conjunction Because signals the relation between the ideas more clearly than the coordinating conjunction and. Because it is so easy to string ideas together with and, writers often rely too heavily on coordination in their rough drafts. The cure for excessive coordination is simple: Look for opportunities to tuck minor ideas into subordinate clauses or phrases.

8IFOTIBSFIPMEFST 0

Shareholders exchanged investment tips at the company’s

?annual meeting, and they learned that different approaches can yield similar results. The minor idea has become a subordinate clause beginning with When.

OPUJDJOH

0

My uncle noticed my frightened look and told me that

?

?

Aunt Edna had to feel my face because she was blind. The less important idea has become a participial phrase modifying the noun uncle.

"GUFSGPVSIPVST

0

Four hours went by, and a rescue truck finally arrived, but

?by that time we had been evacuated in a helicopter. Three independent clauses were excessive. The least important idea has become a prepositional phrase.

EXERCISE 14–3 The following sentences show coordinated ideas (ideas joined with a coordinating conjunction or a semicolon). Restructure the sentences by subordinating minor ideas. You must decide which ideas are minor because the sentences are given out

185

14d

186

emph


of context. Revisions of lettered sentences appear in the back of the book. Example:

a. b.

c.

d.

e.

1. 2.

3. 4. 5.

XIFSFUIFZ

The rowers returned to shore and had a party on the beach

UPDFMFCSBUF

?

and celebrated the start of the season.

?

These particles are known as “stealth liposomes,” and they can hide in the body for a long time without detection. Irena is a competitive gymnast and majors in biochemistry; her goal is to apply her athletic experience and her science degree to a career in sports medicine. Students, textile workers, and labor unions have loudly protested sweatshop abuses, so apparel makers have been forced to examine their labor practices. IRC (Internet relay chat) was developed in a European university; it was created as a way for a group of graduate students to talk about projects from their dorm rooms. The cafeteria’s new menu has an international flavor, and it includes everything from enchiladas and pizza to pad thai and sauerbraten. Victor switched on his remote-control lawn mower, and it began to shudder and emit clouds of smoke. Iguanas are dependent on ultraviolet rays from the sun, so in the winter months they must be put under ultraviolet-coated lights that can be purchased at most pet stores. The Civil War Trust was founded in 1991; it spearheads a nationwide campaign to protect America’s Civil War battlefields. We did not expect to receive so many large orders so quickly, and we are short on inventory. Mother spread her love equally among us all, but she made each of us feel special in our own way.

14d Do not subordinate major ideas. If a sentence buries its major idea in a subordinate construction, readers may not give the idea enough attention. Make sure to express your major idea in an independent clause and to subordinate any minor ideas.

ÃÕLÀ`>Ì}ÊvÀÊÀÊì>ÃÊ UÊ overusing subordination

emph

14e

187

EFGFBUFE5IPNBT&%FXFZ

0

Harry S. Truman, who was the unexpected winner of the

?

1948 presidential election, defeated Thomas E. Dewey.

?

The writer wanted to focus on Truman’s unexpected victory, but the original sentence buried this information in an adjective clause. The revision puts the more important idea in an independent clause and tucks the less important idea into an adjective clause (who defeated Thomas E. Dewey).

"T 0

I was driving home from my new job, heading down

?Ranchitos Road, when my car suddenly overheated. The writer wanted to emphasize that the car overheated, not the fact of driving home. The revision expresses the major idea in an independent clause and places the less important idea in an adverb clause (As I was driving home from my new job).

14e Do not subordinate excessively. In attempting to avoid short, choppy sentences, writers sometimes go to the opposite extreme, putting more subordinate ideas into a sentence than its structure can bear. If a sentence collapses of its own weight, occasionally it can be restructured. More often, however, such sentences must be divided. 0

In Animal Liberation, Peter Singer argues that animals possess

)

nervous systems and can feel pain and that he therefore

?

?

believes that “the ethical principle on which human equality rests requires us to extend equal consideration to animals” (1). Excessive subordination makes it difficult for the reader to focus on the quoted passage. By splitting the original sentence into two separate sentences, the writer draws attention to Peter Singer’s main claim, that animals should be given “equal consideration” to humans.


14e

188

emph


EXERCISE 14–4 In each of the following sentences, the idea that the writer wished to emphasize is buried in a subordinate construction. Restructure each sentence so that the independent clause expresses the major idea, as indicated in brackets, and lesser ideas are subordinated. Revisions of lettered sentences appear in the back of the book. Example:

"MUIPVHI

Catherine has weathered many hardships, although she has

?rarely become discouraged. [Emphasize that Catherine has rarely become discouraged.] a.

b.

c.

d.

e. 1.

2. 3. 4.

5.

Gina worked as an aide for the relief agency, distributing food and medical supplies. [Emphasize distributing food and medical supplies.] Janbir spent every Saturday learning tabla drumming, noticing with each hour of practice that his memory for complex patterns was growing stronger. [Emphasize Janbir’s memory.] The rotor hit, gouging a hole about an eighth of an inch deep in my helmet. [Emphasize that the rotor gouged a hole in the helmet.] My grandfather, who raised his daughters the old-fashioned way, was born eighty years ago in Puerto Rico. [Emphasize how the grandfather raised his daughters.] The Narcan reversed the depressive effect of the drug, saving the patient’s life. [Emphasize that the patient’s life was saved.] Fatima, who studied Persian miniature painting after college, majored in early childhood education. [Emphasize Fatima’s studies after college.] I was losing consciousness when my will to live kicked in. [Emphasize the will to live.] Using a sliding compound miter saw, the carpenter made intricate edges on the cabinets. [Emphasize the carpenter’s use of the saw.] Ernie was using origami to solve some tricky manufacturing problems when he decided to leave engineering and become an artist. [Emphasize Ernie’s decision.] As the undulating waves glinted in the sun, the paddlers synchronized their strokes. [Emphasize the brightness of the waves.]

hackerhandbooks.com/bedhandbook > Grammar exercises > Clear sentences > E-ex 14–7 and 14–8

ÃiÌiViÊi«>ÃÃÊ UÊ ÃiÌiViÊi`}Ã

emph

14f

14f Experiment with techniques for gaining special emphasis. By experimenting with certain techniques, usually involving some element of surprise, you can draw attention to ideas that deserve special emphasis. Use such techniques sparingly, however, or they will lose their punch. The writer who tries to emphasize everything ends up emphasizing nothing.

Using sentence endings for emphasis You can highlight an idea simply by withholding it until the end of a sentence. The technique works something like a punch line. In the following example, the sentence’s meaning is not revealed until its very last word. The only completely consistent people are the dead. — Aldous Huxley

Two types of sentences that withhold information until the end are the inversion and the periodic sentence. The inversion reverses the normal subject-verb order, placing the subject at the end, where it receives unusual emphasis. (Also see 15c.) In golden pots are hidden the most deadly poisons. — Thomas Draxe

The periodic sentence opens with a pile-up of modifiers and withholds the subject and verb until the end. It draws attention to itself because it contrasts with the cumulative sentence, which is used more frequently. A cumulative sentence begins with the subject and verb and adds modifying elements at the end. PERIODIC

Twenty-five years ago, at the age of thirteen, while hiking in the mountains near my hometown of Vancouver, Washington, I came face-to-face with a legend. — Tom Weitzel, student

189

190

14f

emph


CUMULATIVE

A metaphysician is one who goes into a dark cellar at midnight without a light, looking for a black cat that is not there. — Baron Bowan of Colwood

Using parallel structure for emphasis Parallel grammatical structure draws special attention to paired ideas or to items in a series. (See 9.) When parallel ideas are paired, the emphasis falls on words that underscore comparisons or contrasts, especially when they occur at the end of a phrase or clause. We must stop talking about the American dream and start listening to the dreams of Americans. — Reubin Askew

In a parallel series, the emphasis falls at the end, so it is generally best to end with the most dramatic or climactic item in the series. Sister Charity enjoyed passing out writing punishments: translate the Ten Commandments into Latin, type a thousand-word essay on good manners, copy the New Testament with a quill pen. — Marie Visosky, student

Using punctuation for emphasis Obviously the exclamation point can add emphasis, but you should not overuse it. As a rule, the exclamation point is more appropriate in dialogue than in ordinary prose. I oozed a glob of white paint onto my palette, whipped some medium into it, loaded my brush, and announced to the class, “Move over, Michelangelo. Here I come!” — Carolyn Goff, student

A dash or a colon may be used to draw attention to word groups worthy of special attention. (See 35a, 35b, and 39a.) The middle of the road is where the white line is — and that’s the worst place to drive. — Robert Frost

ÃiÌiViÊi«>ÃÃÊ UÊ «>À>iÃÊ UÊ «ÕVÌÕ>ÌÊ UÊ ÃÀÌÊÃiÌiViÃÊ UÊ ÃiÌiViÊ«i}Ã

var

15a

I turned to see what the anemometer read: The needle had pegged out at 106 knots. — Jonathan Shilk, student

Occasionally, a pair of dashes may be used to highlight a word or an idea. They carried the land itself — Vietnam, the place, the soil — a powdery orange-red dust that covered their boots and fatigues and faces. — Tim O’Brien

Using an occasional short sentence for emphasis Too many short sentences in a row will fast become monotonous (see 14b), but an occasional short sentence, when played off against longer sentences in the same passage, will draw attention to an idea. The great secret, known to internists and learned early in marriage by internists’ wives [or husbands], but still hidden from the general public, is that most things get better by themselves. Most things, in fact, are better by morning. — Lewis Thomas

15

Provide some variety.

When a rough draft is filled with too many sentences that begin the same way or have the same structure, try injecting some variety — as long as you can do so without sacrificing clarity or ease of reading.

15a Vary your sentence openings. Most sentences in English begin with the subject, move to the verb, and continue to the object, with modifiers tucked in along the way or put at the end. For the most part, such sentences are fine. Put too many of them in a row, however, and they become monotonous.

191

15b

192

var

Sentence variety

Adverbial modifiers are easily movable when they modify verbs; they can often be inserted ahead of the subject. Such modifiers might be single words, phrases, or clauses.

0

&WFOUVBMMZB A few drops of sap eventually began to trickle into the

?bucket.

Like most adverbs, eventually does not need to appear close to the verb it modifies (began).

0

+VTUBTUIFTVOXBTDPNJOHVQ B A pair of black ducks flew over the pond just as the sun was

?

?

coming up.

The adverb clause, which modifies the verb flew, is as clear at the beginning of the sentence as it is at the end.

Adjectives and participial phrases can frequently be moved to the beginning of a sentence without loss of clarity.

0

%FKFDUFEBOEXJUIESBXO Edward,dejected and withdrawn, nearly gave up his search

?for a job. 0

"

+PIOBOE*

?

?

John and I, a nticipating a peaceful evening, sat down at the campfire to brew a cup of coffee.

TIP: When beginning a sentence with an adjective or a participial phrase, make sure that the subject of the sentence names the person or thing described in the introductory phrase. If it doesn’t, the phrase will dangle. (See 12e.)

15b Use a variety of sentence structures. A writer should not rely too heavily on simple sentences and compound sentences, for the effect tends to be both monotonous and choppy. (See 14b and 14c.) Too many complex or

ÃiÌiViÊÃÌÀÕVÌÕÀiÃÊ UÊ Ã>iÃÕ`} ÃiÌiViÃÊ UÊ ÛiÀÌi`ÊUÊ ÛiÀLÊLivÀiÊÃÕLiVÌ

var

15c

compound-complex sentences, however, can be equally monotonous. If your style tends to one or the other extreme, try to achieve a better mix of sentence types. The major sentence types are illustrated in the following sentences, all taken from Flannery O’Connor’s “The King of the Birds,” an essay describing the author’s pet peafowl. SIMPLE

Frequently the cock combines the lifting of his tail with the raising of his voice.

COMPOUND

Any chicken’s dusting hole is out of place in a flower bed, but the peafowl’s hole, being the size of a small crater, is more so.

COMPLEX

The peacock does most of his serious strutting in the spring and summer when he has a full tail to do it with.

COMPOUNDCOMPLEX

The cock’s plumage requires two years to attain its pattern, and for the rest of his life, this chicken will act as though he designed it himself.

For a fuller discussion of sentence types, see 64a.

15c Try inverting sentences occasionally. A sentence is inverted if it does not follow the normal subjectverb-object pattern (see 62c). Many inversions sound artificial and should be avoided except in the most formal contexts. But if an inversion sounds natural, it can provide a welcome touch of variety.

0

0QQPTJUFUIFQSPEVDFTFDUJPOJTB A refrigerated case of mouthwatering cheeses is opposite

?the produce section; a friendly attendant will?cut off just the amount you want.

The revision inverts the normal subject-verb order by moving the verb, is, ahead of its subject, case.

193

15d

194

var

Sentence variety

4FUBUUIFUPQUXPDPSOFSTPGUIFTUBHFXFSFIVHF 0

Huge lavender hearts outlined in bright white lights were

?set at the top two corners of the stage.

?

In the revision, the subject, hearts, appears after the verb, were set. Notice that the two parts of the verb are also inverted — and separated from each other (Set . . . were) — without any awkwardness or loss of meaning.

Inverted sentences are used for emphasis as well as for variety (see 14f).

15d Consider adding an occasional question or quotation. An occasional question can provide a change of pace, especially at the beginning of a paragraph, where it engages the reader’s interest. Virginia Woolf, in her book A Room of One’s Own, wrote that in order for a woman to write fiction she must have two things, certainly: a room of her own (with key and lock) and enough money to support herself. What then are we to make of Phillis Wheatley, a slave, who owned not even herself ? This sickly, frail black girl who required a servant of her own at times — her health was so precarious — and who, had she been white, would have been easily considered the intellectual superior of all the women and most of the men in the society of her day. [Italics added.] — Alice Walker

Quotations can also provide variety, for they add other people’s voices to your own. These other voices might be bits of dialogue. When we got back upstairs, Dr. Haney and Captain Shiller, the head nurse, were waiting for us by the elevator. As the nurse hurried off, pushing Todd, the doctor explained to us what would happen next.

VV>Ã>ÊµÕiÃÌÊÀÊµÕÌ>Ì

var

15d

“Mrs. Barrus,” he began, “this last test is one we do only when absolutely necessary. It is very painful and hard on the patient, but we have no other choice.” Apologetically, he went on. “I cannot give him an anesthetic.” He waited for the statement to sink in. — Celeste L. Barrus, student

Or they might be quotations from written sources. Even when she enters the hospital on the brink of death, the anorexic will refuse help from anyone and will continue to deny needing help, especially from a doctor. At this point, reports Dr. Steven Levenkron, the anorexic is most likely “a frightened, cold, lonely, starved, and physically tortured, exhausted person — not unlike an actual concentration camp inmate” (29). In this condition she is ultimately force-fed through a tube inserted in the chest. — Jim Drew, student

Notice that the quotation from a written source is documented with a citation in parentheses. (See 53a.) EXERCISE 15–1 Improve sentence variety in each of the following sentences by using the technique suggested in brackets. Revisions of lettered sentences appear in the back of the book. Example:

5PQSPUFDUFOEBOHFSFENBSJOFUVSUMFT ±TIJOH

Fishing crews place turtle excluder devices in fishing nets ?to protect endangered marine turtles. [Begin the sentence ? with the adverbial infinitive phrase.]

a. b.

c.

d.

The exhibits for insects and spiders are across the hall from the fossils exhibit. [Invert the sentence.] Sayuri becomes a successful geisha after growing up desperately poor in Japan. [Move the adverb clause to the beginning of the sentence.] It is interesting to consider what caused Mount St. Helens to erupt. Researchers believe that a series of earthquakes in the area was a contributing factor. [Change the first sentence to a question.] Ice cream typically contains 10 percent milk fat. Premium ice cream may contain up to 16 percent milk fat and has

195

8

196

e.

1.

2.

3.

4. 5.

active

Active verbs

considerably less air in the product. [Combine the two sentences as a compound sentence.] The economy may recover more quickly than expected if home values climb. [Move the adverb clause to the beginning of the sentence.] The Dust Bowl farmers, looking wearily into the cameras of US government photographers, represented the harshest effects of the Great Depression. [Move the participial phrase to the beginning of the sentence.] The Trans Alaska Pipeline was completed in 1977. It has moved more than fifteen billion barrels of oil since 1977. [Combine the two sentences into a complex sentence.] Mr. Guo habitually dresses in loose clothing and canvas shoes for his wushu workout. [Move the adverb to the beginning of the sentence.] A number of obstacles are strategically placed throughout a firefighter training maze. [Invert the sentence.] Ian McKellen is a British actor who made his debut in 1961 and was knighted in 1991, and he played Gandalf in the movie trilogy The Lord of the Rings. [Make a simple sentence. See also 64a.]

EXERCISE 15–2 Edit the following paragraph to increase sentence variety. Making architectural models is a skill that requires patience and precision. It is an art that illuminates a design. Architects come up with a grand and intricate vision. Draftspersons convert that vision into blueprints. The model maker follows the blueprints. The model maker builds a miniature version of the structure. Modelers can work in traditional materials like wood and clay and paint. Modelers can work in newer materials like Styrofoam and liquid polymers. Some modelers still use cardboard, paper, and glue. Other modelers prefer glue guns, deformable plastic, and thin aluminum and brass wire. The modeler may seem to be making a small mess in the early stages of model building. In the end the modeler has completed a small-scale structure. Architect Rem Koolhaas has insisted that plans reveal the logic of a design. He has argued that models expose the architect’s vision. The model maker’s art makes this vision real.

Part IV

Word Choice 16 Tighten wordy sentences. 198 17 Choose appropriate language. 203 18 Find the exact words. 216

197

16

198

16

w

Wordy sentences

Tighten wordy sentences.

Long sentences are not necessarily wordy, nor are short sentences always concise. A sentence is wordy if it can be tightened without loss of meaning.

Grammar checkers flag wordy constructions only occasionally. They sometimes alert you to common redundancies, such as true fact, but they overlook more than they catch. They may miss empty or inflated phrases, such as in my opinion and in order that, and they rarely identify sentences with needlessly complex structures. Grammar checkers are very good, however, at flagging and suggesting revisions for wordy constructions beginning with there is and there are.

16a Eliminate redundancies. Writers often repeat themselves unnecessarily, thinking that expressions such as cooperate together, yellow in color, or basic essentials add emphasis to their writing. In reality, such redundancies do just the opposite. There is no need to say the same thing twice. 0

Twentysomethings are often thought of or stereotyped as apathetic even though many are active in political and service groups.

XPSLT

0

Daniel is now employed at a private rehabilitation center

?

working as a registered physical therapist.

Though modifiers ordinarily add meaning to the words they modify, occasionally they are redundant. 0

Sylvia very hurriedly scribbled her name, address, and phone number on a greasy napkin. The word scribbled already suggests that Sylvia wrote very hurriedly.

Ài«i>Ìi`Êì>ÃÊ UÊ Ài«i>Ìi`ÊÜÀ`ÃÊ UÊ `ÀiVÌÊ>}Õ>}i

0

w

16c

199

Gabriele Muccino’s film The Pursuit of Happyness tells the story of a single father determined in his mind to pull himself and his son out of homelessness. The word determined contains the idea that his resolution formed in his mind.

16b Avoid unnecessary repetition of words. Though words may be repeated deliberately, for effect, repetitions will seem awkward if they are clearly unnecessary. When a more concise version is possible, choose it. 0

Our fifth patient, in room six, is a mentally ill patient.

0

The best teachers help each student become a better

HSPX

?

?

student both academically and emotionally. 0

A study by the Henry J. Kaiser Family Foundation (2004)

NFBTVSFE

studied the effects of diet and exercise on childhood

?obesity. The repetition of study . . . studied is awkward and redundant. By using the descriptive verb measured instead, the writer conveys more precisely the purpose of the study and suggests its function in her paper.

16c Cut empty or inflated phrases. An empty phrase can be cut with little or no loss of meaning. Common examples are introductory word groups that weaken the writer’s authority by apologizing or hedging: in my opinion, I think that, it seems that, one must admit that, and so on.

0

0

In my opinion, o ur current immigration policy is misguided.

?

Readers understand without being told that they are hearing the writer’s opinion.


16d

200

w

Wordy sentences

Inflated phrases can be reduced to a word or two without loss of meaning.

INFLATED

CONCISE

along the lines of as a matter of fact at all times at the present time at this point in time because of the fact that by means of by virtue of the fact that due to the fact that for the purpose of for the reason that have the ability to in light of the fact that in order to in spite of the fact that in the event that in the final analysis in the nature of in the neighborhood of until such time as

like in fact always now, currently now, currently because by because because for because be able to, can because to although, though if finally like about until

.

0

At this point in time my skills and experience are a perfect

?

match for the position of assistant manager.

16d Simplify the structure. If the structure of a sentence is needlessly indirect, try simplifying it. Look for opportunities to strengthen the verb. 0

The financial analyst claimed that because of volatile market conditions she could not make an estimate of the company’s future profits. The verb estimate is more vigorous and concise than make an estimate of.

ÃiÌiViÊÃÌÀÕVÌÕÀiÊ UÊ ÃÌÀ}ÊÛiÀLÊ UÊ ÕÃ}ÊviÜiÀÊÜÀ`Ã

w

16e

The colorless verbs is, are, was, and were frequently generate excess words.

TUVEJFE

0

Investigators were involved in studying the effect of classical

?

music on unborn babies. The revision is more direct and concise. The action (studying), originally appearing in a subordinate structure, has become a strong verb, studied.

The expletive constructions there is and there are (or there was and there were) can also generate excess words. The same is true of expletive constructions beginning with it. (See 62c.)

"

0

There is another module that tells the story of Charles

?

Darwin and introduces the theory of evolution.

0

"

NVTU

?

?

It is imperative that all night managers follow strict procedures when locking the safe.

Finally, verbs in the passive voice may be needlessly indirect. When the active voice expresses your meaning as effectively, use it. (See 8a.)

PVSDPBDIFTIBWFSFDSVJUFE

0

All too often, athletes with marginal academic skills have

?

been recruited by our coaches.

?

16e Reduce clauses to phrases, phrases to single words. Word groups functioning as modifiers can often be made more compact. Look for any opportunities to reduce clauses to phrases or phrases to single words.

201

16e

202

0

w

Wordy sentences

We took a side trip to Monticello, which was the home of Thomas Jefferson.

UIJT

0

In the essay that follows, I argue against Immanuel

?

QSPCMFNBUJD ?

Kant’s claim that we should not lie under any

?

circumstances,which is a problematic claim.

?

EXERCISE 16–1 Edit the following sentences to reduce wordiness. Revisions of lettered sentences appear in the back of the book. Example:

FWFOUIPVHI

The Wilsons moved into the house in spite of the fact that

?

the back door was only ten yards from the train tracks. a. b.

c. d.

e. 1. 2. 3. 4.

5.

Martin Luther King Jr. was a man who set a high standard for future leaders to meet. Alice has been deeply in love with cooking since she was little and could first peek over the edge of a big kitchen tabletop. In my opinion, Bloom’s race for the governorship is a futile exercise. It is pretty important in being a successful graphic designer to have technical knowledge and at the same time an eye for color and balance. Your task will be the delivery of correspondence to all employees in the company. Seeing the barrels, the driver immediately slammed on his brakes. A really well-stocked bookshelf should have classical literature on it as well as important modern works of the current day. China’s enormously huge workforce has an effect on the global world of high-tech manufacturing of things. A typical autocross course consists of at least two straightaways, and the rest of the course is made up of numerous slaloms and several sharp turns. At breakfast time, Mehrdad always started his day with cantaloupe, lemon yogurt, and black coffee.

ÕÃ}ÊviÜiÀÊÜÀ`ÃÊ UÊ >««À«>ÌiÊ>}Õ>}i

appr

17

EXERCISE 16–2 Edit the following business memo to reduce wordiness. To: From: Subject:

District managers Margaret Davenport, Vice President Customer database

It has recently been brought to my attention that a percentage of our sales representatives have been failing to log reports of their client calls in our customer database each and every day. I have also learned that some representatives are not checking the database on a routine basis. Our clients sometimes receive a multiple number of sales calls from us when a sales representative is not cognizant of the fact that the client has been contacted at a previous time. Repeated telephone calls from our representatives annoy our customers. These repeated telephone calls also portray our company as one that is lacking in organization. Effective as of immediately, direct your representatives to do the following: UÊ , Ê iVÀ`Êi>VÊ>`ÊiÛiÀÞÊVÕÃÌiÀÊVÌ>VÌÊÊÌiÊVÕÃÌiÀÊ database at the end of each day, without fail. UÊ Ê iVÊÌiÊ`>Ì>L>ÃiÊ>ÌÊÌiÊÛiÀÞÊLi}}ÊvÊi>VÊ`>ÞÊÌÊ ensure that telephone communications will not be initiated with clients who have already been called. Let me extend my appreciation to you for cooperating in this important matter. hackerhandbooks.com/bedhandbook > Grammar exercises > Word choice > E-ex 16–3 to 16–6

17

Choose appropriate language.

Language is appropriate when it suits your subject, engages your audience, and blends naturally with your own voice. To some extent, your choice of language will be governed by the conventions of the genre in which you are writing. When in doubt about the conventions of a particular genre—lab reports, informal essays, business memos, and so on—consult your instructor or look at models written by experts in the field.

203

17a

204

appr

Appropriate language

17a Stay away from jargon. Jargon is specialized language used among members of a trade, profession, or group. Use jargon only when readers will be familiar with it; even then, use it only when plain English will not do as well. Sentences filled with jargon are likely to be long and lumpy. To revise such sentences, you must rewrite them, usually in fewer words. JARGON

For years, the indigenous body politic of South Africa attempted to negotiate legal enfranchisement without result.

REVISED

For years, the indigenous people of South Africa negotiated unsuccessfully for the right to vote.

Though a political scientist might feel comfortable with the original version, jargon such as body politic and legal enfranchisement is needlessly complicated for most readers. Broadly defined, jargon includes puffed-up language designed more to impress readers than to inform them. The following are common examples from business, government, higher education, and the military, with plain English alternatives in parentheses. ameliorate (improve) commence (begin) components (parts) endeavor (try) exit (leave) facilitate (help) impact (v.) (affect)

indicator (sign) optimal (best, most favorable) parameters (boundaries, limits) peruse (read, look over) prior to (before) utilize (use) viable (workable)

Sentences filled with jargon are hard to read, and they are often wordy as well. 0

All employees functioning in the capacity of work-study

NVTUQSPWFUIBUUIFZBSFDVSSFOUMZFOSPMMFE

students are required to give evidence of current enrollment.

?

appr

«>Ê>}Õ>}iÊ UÊ >Û`}Ê>À}

UBML

0

17b

XPSLJOH

The CEO should dialogue with investors about partnering

CVZ?

QPPSOFJHICPSIPPET?

?

?

with clients to purchase land in economically deprived zones.

17b Avoid pretentious language, most euphemisms, and “doublespeak.” Hoping to sound profound or poetic, some writers embroider their thoughts with large words and flowery phrases, language that in fact sounds pretentious. Pretentious language is so ornate and often so wordy that it obscures the thought that lies beneath.

VTFPGDPMPSGVMMBOHVBHFSFWFBMTUIBUTIFIBTB

0

Taylor’s employment of multihued means of expression draws

?

WJFXPG

back the curtains and lets slip the nostalgic vantage point

?BOEEPFTOPU

from which she observes American society as well as her lack

VOEFSTUBOE

of comprehension of economic realities.

?

The writer of the original sentence had turned to a thesaurus (a dictionary of synonyms and antonyms) in an attempt to sound authoritative. When such a writer gains enough confidence to speak in his or her own voice, pretentious language disappears.

Related to pretentious language are euphemisms, nicesounding words or phrases substituted for words thought to sound harsh or ugly. Like pretentious language, euphemisms are wordy and indirect. Unlike pretentious language, they are sometimes appropriate. It is our social custom, for example, to use euphemisms when speaking or writing about excretion (I have to go to the bathroom), sexual intercourse (They did not sleep together until they were married), and the like. We may also use euphemisms out of concern for someone’s feelings. Telling parents, for example, that their daughter is “unmotivated” is more sensitive than saying she’s lazy. Tact or politeness, then, can justify an occasional euphemism.

205

206

17b

appr


Most euphemisms, however, are needlessly evasive or even deceitful. Like pretentious language, they obscure the intended meaning. EUPHEMISM

PLAIN ENGLISH

adult entertainment preowned automobile economically deprived negative savings strategic withdrawal revenue enhancers chemical dependency downsize correctional facility

pornography used car poor debts retreat or defeat taxes drug addiction lay off, fire prison

The term doublespeak applies to any deliberately evasive or deceptive language, including euphemisms. Doublespeak is especially common in politics and business. A military retreat is described as “tactical redeployment,” “enhanced interrogation” is a euphemism for “torture,” and “downsizing” really means “firing employees.”

Grammar checkers rarely identify jargon and only occasionally flag pretentious language, so you should be alert to your own use of jargon and pretentious language and simplify it whenever possible.

EXERCISE 17–1 Edit the following sentences to eliminate jargon, pretentious or flowery language, euphemisms, and doublespeak. You may need to make substantial changes in some sentences. Revisions of lettered sentences appear in the back of the book. Example:

NBTUFSFE

After two weeks in the legal department, Sue has worked PG±DF ?IBT QFSGPSNBODF into the routine of the office, and her functional and self-

?

?

?

management skills have exceeded all expectations.

plain language

a. b.

c.

d.

e. 1. 2.

3.

4.

5.

appr

17b

In my youth, my family was under the constraints of difficult financial circumstances. In order that I may increase my expertise in the area of delivery of services to clients, I feel that participation in this conference will be beneficial. The prophetic meteorologist cautioned the general populace regarding the possible deleterious effects of the impending tempest. Governmentally sanctioned investigations into the continued value of after-school programs indicate a perceived need in the public realm at large. Passengers should endeavor to finalize the customs declaration form prior to exiting the aircraft. We learned that the mayor had been engaging in a creative transfer of city employees’ pension funds. After a cursory examination of brand-new research findings on textiles, Patricia and the members of her team made the decision to engage in a series of visits to fashion manufacturers in the local vicinity. The nurse announced that there had been a negative patientcare outcome due to a therapeutic misadventure on the part of the surgeon. A generally leisurely pace at the onset of tai chi exercises can yield a variety of beneficial points within a short period of time. The bottom line is that the company is experiencing a negative cash flow.

EXERCISE 17–2 Edit the following e-mail message to eliminate jargon. Dear Ms. Jackson: We members of the Nakamura Reyes team value our external partnering arrangements with Creative Software, and I look forward to seeing you next week at the trade show in Fresno. Per Mr. Reyes, please let me know when you’ll have some downtime there so that he and I can conduct a strategizing session with you concerning our production schedule. It’s crucial that we all be on the same page re our 2009–2010 product release dates.

207

208

17c

appr


Before we have some face time, however, I have some findings to share. Our customer-centric approach to the new products will necessitate that user testing periods trend upward. The enclosed data should help you effectuate any adjustments to your timeline; let me know ASAP if you require any additional information to facilitate the above. Before we convene in Fresno, Mr. Reyes and I will agendize any further talking points. Thanks for your help. Sincerely, Sylvia Nakamura hackerhandbooks.com/bedhandbook > Grammar exercises > Word choice > E-ex 17–6

17c Avoid obsolete and invented words. Although dictionaries list obsolete words such as recomfort and reechy, these words are not appropriate for current use. Invented words (called neologisms) are too recently created to be part of standard English. Many invented words fade out of use without becoming standard. Bling and blogosphere are neologisms that may not last. Prequel and e-mail are no longer neologisms; they have become standard English. Avoid using invented words in formal writing unless they are given in the dictionary as standard or unless no other word expresses your meaning.

17d In most contexts, avoid slang, regional expressions, and nonstandard English. Slang is an informal and sometimes private vocabulary that expresses the solidarity of a group such as teenagers, rock musicians, or football fans; it is subject to more rapid change than standard English. For example, the slang teenagers use to express approval changes every few years; cool, groovy, neat, awesome, phat, and sick have replaced one another within the last three decades. Sometimes slang becomes so widespread that it is accepted as standard vocabulary. Jazz, for example, started out as slang but is now a standard term for a style of music.

VÊ>}Õ>}iÊ UÊ iÃÌ>LÃi`ÊÌiÀÃÊ UÊ >Û`}ÊÃ>}Ê

appr

17d

Although slang has a certain vitality, it is a code that not everyone understands, and it is very informal. Therefore, it is inappropriate in most written work.

0h

XFMPTU

When the server crashed unexpectedly, three hours of unsaved data went down the tubes.

?

?

0h

EJTHVTUZPV

The government’s “filth” guidelines for food will gross you

?

out.

Regional expressions are common to a group in a geographic area. Let’s talk with the bark off (for Let’s speak frankly) is an expression in the southern United States, for example. Regional expressions have the same limitations as slang and are therefore inappropriate in most writing. 0h

John was four blocks from the house before he remembered

UVSOPO

to cut the headlights on.

?

0

?

Seamus wasn’t for sure, but he thought the whales might be migrating during his visit to Oregon.

Standard English is the language used in all academic, business, and professional fields. Nonstandard English is spoken by people with a common regional or social heritage. Although nonstandard English may be appropriate when spoken within a close group, it is out of place in most formal and informal writing.

0h

EPFTOU

The governor said he don’t know if he will approve the

?

budget without the clean air provision.

If you speak a nonstandard dialect, try to identify the ways in which your dialect differs from standard English. Look especially for the following features of nonstandard English, which commonly cause problems in writing.

209

17e

210

appr


Misusing verb forms such as began and begun (See 27a.) Leaving -s endings off verbs (See 27c.) Leaving -ed endings off verbs (See 27d.) Leaving out necessary verbs (See 27e.) Using double negatives (See 26d.)

17e Choose an appropriate level of formality. In deciding on a level of formality, consider both your subject and your audience. Does the subject demand a dignified treatment, or is a relaxed tone more suitable? Will readers be put off if you assume too close a relationship with them, or might you alienate them by seeming too distant? For most college and professional writing, some degree of formality is appropriate. In a job application letter, for example, it is a mistake to sound too breezy and informal. TOO INFORMAL

I’d like to get that sales job you’ve got in the paper.

MORE FORMAL

I would like to apply for the position of sales associate advertised in the Peoria Journal Star.

Informal writing is appropriate for private letters, personal e-mail and text messages, and business correspondence between close associates. Like spoken conversation, informal writing allows contractions (don’t, I’ll) and colloquial words (kids, kinda). Vocabulary and sentence structure are rarely complex. In choosing a level of formality, above all be consistent. When a writer’s voice shifts from one level of formality to another, readers receive mixed messages. 0

Once a pitcher for the Blue Jays, Jorge shared with me

CFHBO

the secrets of his trade. His lesson commenced with his

UISPXO

?

famous curveball, implemented by tucking the little finger

?

SFWFBMFE

behind the ball. Next he elucidated the mysteries of the

?

sucker pitch, a slow ball coming behind a fast windup.

vÀ>ÊÛÃ°ÊvÀ>Ê UÊ >Û`}ÊÃiÝÃÌÊ>}Õ>}i

appr

17f

Words such as commenced and elucidated are inappropriate for the subject matter, and they clash with informal terms such as sucker pitch and fast windup.

Grammar checkers rarely flag slang and informal language. They do, however, flag contractions. If your ear tells you that a contraction such as isn’t or doesn’t strikes the right tone, stay with it.

EXERCISE 17–3 Revise the following passage so that the level of formality is appropriate for a letter to the editor of a major newspaper. In pop culture, college grads who return home to live with the folks are seen as good-for-nothing losers who mooch off their families. And many older adults seem to feel that the trend of moving back home after school, which was rare in their day, is becoming too commonplace today. But society must realize that times have changed. Most young adults want to live on their own ASAP, but they graduate with heaps of debt and need some time to get back on their feet. College tuition and the cost of housing have increased way more than salary increases in the past fifty years. Also, the job market is tighter and more jobs require advanced degrees than in the past. So before people go off on college graduates who move back into their parents’ house for a spell, they’d better consider all the facts.

17f Avoid sexist language. Sexist language is language that stereotypes or demeans women or men. Using nonsexist language is a matter of courtesy — of respect for and sensitivity to the feelings of others.

Recognizing sexist language Some sexist language is easy to recognize because it reflects genuine contempt for women: referring to a woman as a “chick,” for example, or calling a lawyer a “lady lawyer.”

211

212

17f

appr


Other forms of sexist language are less blatant. The following practices, while they may not result from conscious sexism, reflect stereotypical thinking: referring to members of one profession as exclusively male or exclusively female (teachers as women or computer engineers as men, for instance), using different conventions when naming or identifying women and men, or assuming that all of one’s readers are men. STEREOTYPICAL LANGUAGE

After a nursing student graduates, she must face a difficult state board examination. [Not all nursing students are women.] Running for city council are Boris Stotsky, an attorney, and Mrs. Cynthia Jones, a professor of English and mother of three. [The title Mrs. and the phrase mother of three are irrelevant.] All executives’ wives are invited to the welcome dinner. [Not all executives are men.]

Still other forms of sexist language result from outdated traditions. The pronouns he, him, and his, for instance, were traditionally used to refer generically to persons of either sex. Nowadays, to avoid that sexist usage, some writers use she, her, and hers generically or substitute the female pronouns alternately with the male pronouns. GENERIC PRONOUNS

A journalist is stimulated by his deadline. A good interior designer treats her clients’ ideas respectfully.

But both forms are sexist — for excluding one sex entirely and for making assumptions about the members of particular professions. Similarly, the nouns man and men were once used to refer generically to persons of either sex. Current usage demands gender-neutral terms for references to both men and women.

>Û`}ÊÃiÝÃÌÊ>}Õ>}iÊ UÊ using nonsexist language

appr

17f

INAPPROPRIATE

APPROPRIATE

chairman clergyman congressman

chairperson, moderator, chair, head member of the clergy, minister, pastor member of Congress, representative, legislator firefighter supervisor mail carrier, postal worker, letter carrier to operate, to staff people, humans personnel, staff police officer salesperson, sales associate, salesclerk forecaster, meteorologist worker, laborer

fireman foreman mailman to man mankind manpower policeman salesman weatherman workman

Grammar checkers are good at flagging obviously sexist terms, such as mankind and fireman, but they do not flag language that might be demeaning (woman doctor) or stereotypical. They also have no way of identifying the generic use of he or she. You must use your common sense to tell when a word or a construction is offensive.

Revising sexist language When revising sexist language, you may be tempted to substitute he or she and his or her. These terms are inclusive but wordy; fine in small doses, they can become awkward when repeated throughout an essay. A better revision strategy is to write in the plural; yet another strategy is to recast the sentence so that the problem does not arise (see p. 214). SEXIST

A journalist is stimulated by his deadline. A good interior designer treats her clients’ ideas respectfully. ACCEPTABLE BUT WORDY

A journalist is stimulated by his or her deadline. A good interior designer treats his or her clients’ ideas respectfully.

213

17f

214

appr


BETTER: USING THE PLURAL

Journalists are stimulated by their deadlines. Good interior designers treat their clients’ ideas respectfully. BETTER: RECASTING THE SENTENCE

A journalist is stimulated by a deadline. A good interior designer treats clients’ ideas respectfully.

For more examples of these revision strategies, see 22. EXERCISE 17–4

Edit the following sentences to eliminate sexist language or sexist assumptions. Revisions of lettered sentences appear in the back of the book. Example:

4DIPMBSTIJQBUIMFUFT

UIFJS

A scholarship athlete must be as concerned about his

UIFZBSF UIFJS ?academic performance as he ? is about his athletic ? ? performance. a. b. c. d. e.

1. 2.

3. 4. 5.

Mrs. Geralyn Farmer, who is the mayor’s wife, is the chief surgeon at University Hospital. Dr. Paul Green is her assistant. Every applicant wants to know how much he will earn. An elementary school teacher should understand the concept of nurturing if she intends to be effective. An obstetrician needs to be available to his patients at all hours. If man does not stop polluting his environment, mankind will perish. A fireman must always be on call even when he is off duty. The chairman for the new program in digital art is Ariana Tamlin, an accomplished portrait painter, computer programmer, and cookie baker. In the governor’s race, Lena Weiss, a defense lawyer and mother of two, easily defeated Harvey Tower, an architect. Recent military history has shown that lady combat helicopter pilots are as skilled, reliable, and resourceful as men. An emergency room head nurse must know how to use sophisticated digital equipment if she is to keep track of all her patients’ data and guide her medical team.

>Û`}ÊÃiÝÃÌÊ>}Õ>}iÊ UÊ >Û`}ÊÃÌiÀiÌÞ«iÃ

appr

17g

EXERCISE 17–5 Eliminate sexist language or sexist assumptions in the following job posting for an elementary school teacher. We are looking for qualified women for the position of elementary school teacher. The ideal candidate should have a bachelor’s degree, a state teaching certificate, and one year of student teaching. She should be knowledgeable in all elementary subject areas, including science and math. While we want our new teacher to have a commanding presence in the classroom, we are also looking for motherly characteristics such as patience and trustworthiness. She must be able to both motivate an entire classroom and work with each student one-on-one to assess his individual needs. She must also be comfortable communicating with the parents of her students. For salary and benefits information, including maternity leave policy, please contact the Martin County School Board. Any qualified applicant should submit her résumé by March 15. hackerhandbooks.com/bedhandbook > Grammar exercises > Word choice > E-ex 17–7 and 17–8

17g Revise language that may offend groups of people. Obviously it is impolite to use offensive terms such as Polack and redneck, but biased language can take more subtle forms. Because language evolves over time, names once thought acceptable may become offensive. When describing groups of people, choose names that the groups currently use to describe themselves.

-BLPUB

0

North Dakota takes its name from the Indian word meaning “friend” or “ally.”

?

"TJBO

0

Many Oriental immigrants have recently settled in our town.

?

Negative stereotypes (such as “drives like a teenager” or “sour as a spinster”) are of course offensive. But you should

215

18

216

exact

Exact words

avoid stereotyping a person or a group even if you believe your generalization to be positive.

BOFYDFMMFOUNBUIBOETDJFODFTUVEFOU

0

It was no surprise that Greer, a Chinese American, was

?

selected for the honors chemistry program.

18

Find the exact words.

Two reference works (or their online equivalents) will help you find words to express your meaning exactly: a good dictionary, such as The American Heritage Dictionary or MerriamWebster’s Collegiate Dictionary, and a collection of synonyms and antonyms, such as Roget’s International Thesaurus. TIP: Do not turn to a thesaurus in search of flowery or impressive

words. Look instead for words that exactly express your meaning.

Grammar checkers flag some nonstandard idioms but few clichés. They do not identify commonly confused words, such as principal and principle, or misused word forms, such as significance and significant. You must be alert for such words and use your dictionary if you are unsure of the correct form. Grammar checkers are of little help with the other problems discussed in 18.

18a Select words with appropriate connotations. In addition to their strict dictionary meanings (or denotations), words have connotations, emotional colorings that affect how readers respond to them. The word steel denotes “commercial iron that contains carbon,” but it also calls up a cluster of images associated with steel. These associations give the word its connotations — cold, hard, smooth, unbending. If the connotation of a word does not seem appropriate for your purpose, your audience, or your subject matter, you should

«i`ÊÛÃ°Ê`VÌ>ÀÞÊi>}Ê UÊ Ã«iVwVÊÕÃÊ UÊ VVÀiÌiÊÕÃ

exact

18b

change the word. When a more appropriate synonym does not come quickly to mind, consult a dictionary or a thesaurus. 0

When American soldiers returned home after World War II,

MFGU

many women abandoned their jobs in favor of marriage.

?

The word abandoned is too negative for the context.

TXFBU

0

As I covered the boats with marsh grass, the perspiration I

?

had worked up evaporated in the wind, and the cold morning air seemed even colder. The term perspiration is too dainty for the context, which suggests vigorous exercise.

EXERCISE 18–1 Use a dictionary and a thesaurus to find at least four synonyms for each of the following words. Be prepared to explain any slight differences in meaning. 1. decay (verb) 2. difficult (adjective)

3. hurry (verb) 5. secret (adjective) 4. pleasure (noun) 6. talent (noun)

18b Prefer specific, concrete nouns. Unlike general nouns, which refer to broad classes of things, specific nouns point to particular items. Film, for example, names a general class, fantasy film names a narrower class, and The Golden Compass is more specific still. Other examples: team, football team, Denver Broncos; music, symphony, Beethoven’s Ninth. Unlike abstract nouns, which refer to qualities and ideas ( justice, beauty, realism, dignity), concrete nouns point to immediate, often sensory experience and to physical objects (steeple, asphalt, lilac, stone, garlic). Specific, concrete nouns express meaning more vividly than general or abstract ones. Although general and abstract language is sometimes necessary to convey your meaning, use specific, concrete words whenever possible.

217

18b

218

0

exact

Exact words

The senator spoke about the challenges of the future:

QPMMVUJPO EXJOEMJOHSFTPVSDFT BOEUFSSPSJTN the environment and world peace.

?Nouns such as thing, area, aspect, factor, and individual are especially dull and imprecise.

NPUIFSIPPE BOENFNPSZ

0

Toni Morrison’s Beloved is about slavery, among other things.

0

Try pairing a trainee with an individual with technical

?

FYQFSJFODFEUFDIOJDJBO

?

experience.

18c Do not misuse words. If a word is not in your active vocabulary, you may find yourself misusing it, sometimes with embarrassing consequences. When in doubt, check the dictionary.

DMJNCJOH

0

The fans were migrating up the bleachers in search of seats.

?

0

QFSNFBUFE

The Internet has so diffused our culture that it touches all

?

segments of society.


BSHVFT

0

Marie Winn quarrels that television viewing is bad for

?

families because it “serves to anesthetize parents into accepting their family’s diminished state” (357). When you are introducing a quotation with a signal phrase, be sure to choose a verb that clearly reflects the source’s intention. Quarrel suggests a heated or angry dispute; argue is a more neutral word. (Also see 52b on using signal phrases.)

Be especially alert for misused word forms—using a noun such as absence, significance, or persistence, for example, when your meaning requires the adjective absent, significant, or persistent.

ÃÕÃi`ÊÜÀ`ÃÊ UÊ VvÕÃi`ÊÜÀ`ÃÊ UÊ VÊiÝ«ÀiÃÃÃÊ UÊ `Ã

exact

18d

QFSTJTUFOU

0

Most dieters are not persistence enough to make a permanent

?

change in their eating habits.

EXERCISE 18–2 Edit the following sentences to correct misused words. Revisions of lettered sentences appear in the back of the book. Example: These days the training required for a ballet dancer

a. b. c. d. e. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

BMMBCTPSCJOH

is all-absorbent.

?

We regret this delay; thank you for your patients. Ada’s plan is to require education and experience to prepare herself for a position as property manager. Tiger Woods, the penultimate competitor, has earned millions of dollars just in endorsements. Many people take for granite that public libraries have up-todate computer systems. The affect of Gao Xinjian’s novels on Chinese exiles is hard to gauge. Because Anne Tyler often writes about family loyalties, her illusions to King Lear are not surprising. Designers of handheld devices understand that changes in ambience temperatures can damage the tiny circuit boards. The Keweenaw Peninsula is surrounded on three sides by Lake Superior. At the cooking school in Tuscany, I learned that rosemary is a perfect compliment to lamb. The person who complained to the human resources manager wishes to remain unanimous.

hackerhandbooks.com/bedhandbook > Grammar exercises > Word choice > E-ex 18–5

18d Use standard idioms. Idioms are speech forms that follow no easily specified rules. The English say “Bernice went to hospital,” an idiom strange to American ears, which are accustomed to hearing the in front of hospital. Native speakers of a language seldom have problems

219

18d

220

exact

Exact words

with idioms, but prepositions (such as with, to, at, and of ) sometimes cause trouble, especially when they follow certain verbs and adjectives. When in doubt, consult a dictionary. UNIDIOMATIC

IDIOMATIC

abide with (a decision) according with agree to (an idea) angry at (a person) capable to comply to desirous to different than (a person or thing) intend on doing off of plan on doing preferable than prior than superior than sure and try and type of a

abide by (a decision) according to agree with (an idea) angry with (a person) capable of comply with desirous of different from (a person or thing) intend to do off plan to do preferable to prior to superior to sure to try to type of

Because idioms follow no particular rules, you must learn them individually. You may find it helpful to keep a list of idioms that you frequently encounter in conversation and in reading.

EXERCISE 18–3 Edit the following sentences to eliminate errors in the use of idiomatic expressions. If a sentence is correct, write “correct” after it. Answers to lettered sentences appear in the back of the book. Example:

a.

CZ

We agreed to abide with the decision of the judge.

?

Queen Anne was so angry at Sarah Churchill that she refused to see her again.

VÊiÝ«ÀiÃÃÃÊ UÊ `ÃÊ UÊ VVjÃÊ

b. c. d. e. 1. 2. 3. 4.

5.

exact

18e

Jean-Pierre’s ambitious travel plans made it impossible for him to comply with the residency requirement for in-state tuition. The parade moved off of the street and onto the beach. The frightened refugees intend on making the dangerous trek across the mountains. What type of a wedding are you planning? Be sure and report on the danger of releasing genetically engineered bacteria into the atmosphere. Why do you assume that embezzling bank assets is so different than robbing the bank? The wilderness guide seemed capable to show us where the trail of petroglyphs was located. In Evan’s cautious mind, packing his own parachute seemed preferable to letting an indifferent teenager fold all that silk and cord into a small pack. Andrea plans on joining the Peace Corps after graduation.


18e Do not rely heavily on clichés. The pioneer who first announced that he had “slept like a log” no doubt amused his companions with a fresh and unlikely comparison. Today, however, that comparison is a cliché, a saying that has lost its dazzle from overuse. No longer can it surprise. To see just how dully predictable clichés are, put your hand over the right-hand column in the following list and then finish the phrases on the left. cool as a beat around blind as a busy as a crystal dead as a out of the frying pan and light as a like a bull

cucumber the bush bat bee, beaver clear doornail into the fire feather in a china shop

221

18f

222

exact

Exact words

playing with nutty as a selling like starting out at the bottom water under the white as a avoid clichés like the

fire fruitcake hotcakes of the ladder bridge sheet, ghost plague

The solution for clichés is simple: Just delete them or rewrite them. 0

When I received a full scholarship from my second-choice

GFMUTRVFF[FEUPTFUUMFGPSTFDPOECFTU

school, I found myself between a rock and a hard place.

?

Sometimes you can write around a cliché by adding an element of surprise. One student, for example, who had written that she had butterflies in her stomach, revised her cliché like this: If all of the action in my stomach is caused by butterflies, there must be a horde of them, with horseshoes on.

The image of butterflies wearing horseshoes is fresh and unlikely, not predictable like the original cliché.

18f Use figures of speech with care. A figure of speech is an expression that uses words imaginatively (rather than literally) to make abstract ideas concrete. Most often, figures of speech compare two seemingly unlike things to reveal surprising similarities. In a simile, the writer makes the comparison explicitly, usually by introducing it with like or as: By the time cotton had to be picked, Grandfather’s neck was as red as the clay he plowed. In a metaphor, the like or as is omitted, and the comparison is implied. For example, in the Old Testament Song of Solomon, a young woman compares the man she loves to a fruit tree: With great delight I sat in his shadow, and his fruit was sweet to my taste.

VVjÃÊ UÊ ÜÀÕÌÊiÝ«ÀiÃÃÃ

exact

18f

Although figures of speech are useful devices, writers sometimes use them without thinking through the images they evoke. The result is sometimes a mixed metaphor, the combination of two or more images that don’t make sense together. 0

Crossing Utah’s salt flats in his new convertible, my father flew

BUKFUTQFFE

under a full head of steam.

?Flew suggests an airplane, whereas under a full head of steam suggests a steamboat or a train. To clarify the image, the writer should stick with one comparison or the other. 0

Our business manager decided to put all controversial issues in a holding pattern on a back burner until after the annual meeting. Here the writer is mixing airplanes and stoves. Simply deleting one of the images corrects the problem.

EXERCISE 18–4 Edit the following sentences to replace worn-out expressions and clarify mixed figures of speech. Revisions of lettered sentences appear in the back of the book. Example:

UIFDPM PSESBJOFEGSPNIJTGBDF

When he heard about the accident, he turned white as a sheet.

a. b. c. d. e. 1.

?

John stormed into the room like a bull in a china shop. Some people insist that they’ll always be there for you, even when they haven’t been before. The Cubs easily beat the Mets, who were in the soup early in the game today at Wrigley Field. We ironed out the sticky spots in our relationship. My mother accused me of beating around the bush when in fact I was just talking off the top of my head. Priscilla was used to burning the candle at both ends to get her assignments done.

223

18f

224 2. 3.

4. 5.

active

Exact words

No matter how many books he reads, André can never seem to quench his thirst for knowledge. In an era of cutbacks and outsourcing, the best tech-savvy workers discover that being a jack of all trades is a solid gold key to continued success. Too many cooks are spoiling the broth at corporate headquarters. Juanita told Kyle that keeping skeletons in the closet would be playing with fire.


Part V

Grammatical Sentences 19 Repair sentence fragments. 226 20 Revise run-on sentences. 235 21 Make subjects and verbs agree. 243 22 Make pronouns and antecedents agree. 256 23 Make pronoun references clear. 262 24 Distinguish between pronouns such as I and me. 268

25 Distinguish between who and whom. 275

26 Choose adjectives and adverbs with care. 280

27 Choose appropriate verb forms, tenses, and moods in standard English. 288

225

226

19

frag

19

Repair sentence fragments.

Sentence fragments

A sentence fragment is a word group that pretends to be a sentence. Sentence fragments are easy to recognize when they appear out of context, like these: When the cat leaped onto the table. Running for the bus. And immediately popped their flares and life vests.

When fragments appear next to related sentences, however, they are harder to spot. We had just sat down to dinner. When the cat leaped onto the table. I tripped and twisted my ankle. Running for the bus. The pilots ejected from the burning plane, landing in the water not far from the ship. And immediately popped their flares and life vests.

Recognizing sentence fragments To be a sentence, a word group must consist of at least one full independent clause. An independent clause includes a subject and a verb, and it either stands alone or could stand alone. To test whether a word group is a complete sentence or a fragment, use the flowchart on page 227. By using the flowchart, you can see exactly why When the cat leaped onto the table is a fragment: It has a subject (cat) and a verb (leaped ), but it begins with a subordinating word (When). Running for the bus is a fragment because it lacks a subject and a verb (Running is a verbal, not a verb). And immediately popped their flares and life vests is a fragment because it lacks a subject. (See also 63b and 63e.)

V«iÌiÊÃiÌiViÃÊ UÊ w`}ÊvÀ>}iÌÃÊ UÊ ÌiÃÌ}ÊvÀÊvÀ>}iÌÃ

frag

19

Test for fragments

Is there a verb?*

NO

It is a fragment.

NO

It is a fragment.

YES

It is a fragment.

YES

Is there a subject?**

YES Is the word group merely a subordinate clause (because it begins with a word such as because or when)?*** NO

It is a sentence.

* Do not mistake verbals for verbs. A verbal is a verb form (such as walking, to act ) that does not function as a verb of a clause. (See 63b.) ** The subject of a sentence may be you, understood but not present in the sentence. (See 62a.) *** A sentence may open with a subordinate clause, but the sentence must also include an independent clause. (See 19a and 64a.) If you find any fragments, try one of these methods of revision (see 19a–19c): 1. Attach the fragment to a nearby sentence. 2. Rewrite the fragment as a complete sentence.

227

19

228

frag

Sentence fragments

Unlike some other languages, English requires a subject and a verb in every sentence (except in commands, where the subject you is understood but not present: Sit down). See 30a and 30b.

*UJT

0

Is often hot and humid during the summer.

?

0

BSF

Students usually very busy at the end of the semester.

? Grammar checkers can flag as many as half of the sentence fragments in a sample; but that means, of course, that they miss half or more of them. If you have trouble with fragments, you will still need to proofread for them. Sometimes the grammar checker will identify “false positives,” sentences that it flags but that are not fragments. When a program spots a possible fragment, you should check to see if the word group is really a fragment by using the flowchart on page 227.

Repairing sentence fragments You can repair most fragments in one of two ways: Either pull the fragment into a nearby sentence or rewrite the fragment as a complete sentence.

0

XIFO

We had just sat down to dinner. When the cat leaped onto

?

the table.

0h

3VOOJOHGPSUIFCVT

I tripped and twisted my ankle. Running for the bus.

? 0h

The pilots ejected from the burning plane, landing in the

5IFZ

water not far from the ship. And immediately popped their flares and life vests.

?

V«iÌiÊÃiÌiViÃÊ UÊ wÝ}ÊvÀ>}iÌÃÊ UÊ V>ÕÃiÃÊ>ÃÊvÀ>}iÌÃÊ

19a

frag

19a Attach fragmented subordinate clauses or turn them into sentences. A subordinate clause is patterned like a sentence, with both a subject and a verb, but it begins with a word that marks it as subordinate. The following words commonly introduce subordinate clauses. after although as as if because

before even though how if since

so that than that though unless

until when where whether which

while who whom whose why

Subordinate clauses function within sentences as adjectives, as adverbs, or as nouns. They cannot stand alone. (See 63e.) Most fragmented clauses beg to be pulled into a sentence nearby.

CFDBVTF

0

Americans have come to fear the West Nile virus. Because it is transmitted by the common mosquito.

?

Because introduces a subordinate clause, so it cannot stand alone. (For punctuation of subordinate clauses appearing at the end of a sentence, see 33f.) 0

Although psychiatrist Peter Kramer expresses concerns

NBOZ

about Prozac. Many other doctors believe that the

?

benefits of antidepressants outweigh the risks. Although introduces a subordinate clause, so it cannot stand alone. (For punctuation of subordinate clauses at the beginning of a sentence, see 32b.)

If a fragmented clause cannot be attached to a nearby sentence or if you feel that attaching it would be awkward, try turning the clause into a sentence. The simplest way to do this is to delete the opening word or words that mark it as subordinate.

229

19b

230

0

frag

Sentence fragments

Population increases and uncontrolled development are

"DSPTT

taking a deadly toll on the environment. So that across the globe, fragile ecosystems are collapsing.

?

19b Attach fragmented phrases or turn them into sentences. Like subordinate clauses, phrases function within sentences as adjectives, as adverbs, or as nouns. They cannot stand alone. Fragmented phrases are often prepositional or verbal phrases; sometimes they are appositives, words or word groups that rename nouns or pronouns. (See 63a, 63b, and 63c.) Often a fragmented phrase may simply be pulled into a nearby sentence.

FYBNJOJOH

0

The archaeologists worked slowly.. Examining and

?

labeling every pottery shard they uncovered. The word group beginning with Examining is a verbal phrase.

B

0

The patient displayed symptoms of ALS. A neurodegenerative disease.

?

A neurodegenerative disease is an appositive renaming the noun ALS. (For punctuation of appositives, see 32e.)

If a fragmented phrase cannot be pulled into a nearby sentence effectively, turn the phrase into a sentence. You may need to add a subject, a verb, or both. 0

In the training session, Jamie explained how to access our

4IFBMTPUBVHIUVT

new database. Also how to submit expense reports and

?

request vendor payments. The revision turns the fragmented phrase into a sentence by adding a subject and a verb.

V«iÌiÊÃiÌiViÃÊ UÊ «À>ÃiÃÊ>ÃÊvÀ>}iÌÃÊ UÊ V«Õ`ÊÛiÀLÃÊ UÊ ÃÌÃÊ>ÃÊvÀ>}iÌÃ

frag

19c

19c Attach other fragmented word groups or turn them into sentences. Other word groups that are commonly fragmented include parts of compound predicates, lists, and examples introduced by for example, in addition, or similar expressions.

Parts of compound predicates A predicate consists of a verb and its objects, complements, and modifiers (see 62b). A compound predicate includes two or more predicates joined with a coordinating conjunction such as and, but, or or. Because the parts of a compound predicate have the same subject, they should appear in the same sentence. 0

The woodpecker finch of the Galápagos Islands carefully

BOE

selects a twig of a certain size and shape.. And then uses this tool to pry out grubs from trees.

?

The subject is finch, and the compound predicate is selects . . . and . . . uses. (For punctuation of compound predicates, see 33a.)

Lists To correct a fragmented list, often you can attach it to a nearby sentence with a colon or a dash. (See 35a and 39a.) 0

It has been said that there are only three indigenous

NVTJDBM

American art forms.. Musical comedy, jazz, and soap opera.

?

Sometimes terms like especially, namely, like, and such as introduce fragmented lists. Such fragments can usually be attached to the preceding sentence. 0

In the twentieth century, the South produced some great

TVDI

American writers.. Such as Flannery O’Connor, William

?

Faulkner, Alice Walker, Tennessee Williams, and Thomas Wolfe.

231

19d

232

frag

Sentence fragments

Examples introduced by for example, in addition, or similar expressions Other expressions that introduce examples or explanations can lead to unintentional fragments. Although you may begin a sentence with some of the following words or phrases, make sure that what follows has a subject and a verb. also and but

for example for instance in addition

mainly or that is

Often the easiest solution is to turn the fragment into a sentence. 0

In his memoir, Primo Levi describes the horrors of living

IFXPSLFE

in a concentration camp. For example, working without

TVGGFSFE

food and suffering emotional abuse.

?

?

The writer corrected this fragment by adding a subject — he — and substituting verbs for the verbals working and suffering. 0


Deborah Tannen’s research reveals that men and women have different ideas about communication. For example,

5BOOFOFYQMBJOT

that a woman “expects her husband to be a new and

?improved version of her best friend” (441). A quotation must be part of a complete sentence. That a woman “expects her husband to be a new and improved version of her best friend” is a fragment — a subordinate clause. In this case, adding a signal phrase that includes a subject and a verb (Tannen explains) corrects the fragment and clarifies that the quotation is from Tannen.

19d Exception: Occasionally a fragment may be used deliberately, for effect. Skilled writers occasionally use sentence fragments for the following special purposes.

V«iÌiÊÃiÌiViÃÊ UÊ vÀ>}iÌÃÊÜÌÊfor example, such as]ÊiÌV°Ê UÊ vÀ>}iÌÃÊvÀÊi«>ÃÃÊÀÊivviVÌ

frag

19d

TO ANSWER A QUESTION

Following the dramatic Americanization of their children, even my parents grew more publicly confident. Especially my mother. —Richard Rodriguez Are these new drug tests 100 percent reliable? Not in the opinion of most experts.

TRANSITIONS

And now the opposing arguments.

FOR EMPHASIS

EXCLAMATIONS

Not again!

IN ADVERTISING

Fewer carbs. Improved taste.

Although fragments are sometimes appropriate, writers and readers do not always agree on when they are appropriate. That’s why you will find it safer to write in complete sentences. EXERCISE 19–1 Repair any fragment by attaching it to a nearby sentence or by rewriting it as a complete sentence. If a word group is correct, write “correct” after it. Revisions of lettered sentences appear in the back of the book. Example:

B

One Greek island that should not be missed is Mykonos. A

?

vacation spot for Europeans and a playground for the rich and famous. a. b.

c. d.

e.

Listening to the CD her sister had sent, Mia was overcome with a mix of emotions. Happiness, homesickness, nostalgia. Cortés and his soldiers were astonished when they looked down from the mountains and saw Tenochtitlán. The magnificent capital of the Aztecs. Although my spoken Spanish is not very good. I can read the language with ease. There are several reasons for not eating meat. One reason being that dangerous chemicals are used throughout the various stages of meat production. To learn how to sculpt beauty from everyday life. This is my intention in studying art and archaeology.

233

234

19d 1. 2. 3.

4. 5.

frag

Sentence fragments

The panther lay motionless behind the rock. Waiting silently for its prey. Aunt Mina loved to play all my favorite games. Cat’s cradle, Uno, mancala, and even four square. With machetes, the explorers cut their way through the tall grasses to the edge of the canyon. Then they began to lay out the tapes for the survey. The owners of the online grocery store rented a warehouse in the Market district. An area catering to small businesses. If a woman from the desert tribe showed anger toward her husband, she was whipped in front of the whole village. And shunned by the rest of the women.

EXERCISE 19–2 Repair each fragment in the following passage by attaching it to a sentence nearby or by rewriting it as a complete sentence. Digital technology has revolutionized information delivery. Forever blurring the lines between information and entertainment. Yesterday’s readers of books and newspapers are today’s readers of e-books and news blogs. Countless readers have moved on from print information entirely. Choosing instead to point, click, and scroll their way through a text on their Amazon Kindle or in an online forum. Once a nation of people spoon-fed television commercials and the six o’clock evening news. We are now seemingly addicted to YouTube. Remember the family trip when Dad or Mom wrestled with a road map? On the way to St. Louis or Seattle? No wrestling is required with a slick GPS navigator by the driver’s side. Unless it’s Mom and Dad wrestling over who gets to program the address. Accessing information now seems to be America’s favorite pastime. John Horrigan, associate director for research at the Pew Internet and American Life Project, reports that 31 percent of American adults are “elite” users of technology. Who are “highly engaged” with digital content. As a country, we embrace information and communication technologies. Which include iPods, cell phones, laptops, and handheld devices. Among children and adolescents, Internet and other personal technology use is on the rise. For activities like socializing, gaming, and information gathering. hackerhandbooks.com/bedhandbook > Grammar exercises > Grammatical sentences > E-ex 19–3 to 19–6

vÕÃi`ÊÃiÌiViÃÊ UÊ V>ÊÃ«ViÃÊ UÊ complete ideas joined incorrectly

20

run-on

20

Revise run-on sentences.

Run-on sentences are independent clauses that have not been joined correctly. An independent clause is a word group that can stand alone as a sentence. (See 64a.) When two independent clauses appear in one sentence, they must be joined in one of these ways: UÊ ÜÌÊ>ÊV>Ê>`Ê>ÊVÀ`>Ì}ÊVÕVÌÊand, but, or, nor, for, so, yet) UÊ ÜÌÊ>ÊÃiVÊÀÊVV>Ã>ÞÊÜÌÊ>ÊVÊÀÊ>Ê`>Ã®

Recognizing run-on sentences There are two types of run-on sentences. When a writer puts no mark of punctuation and no coordinating conjunction between independent clauses, the result is called a fused sentence. INDEPENDENT CLAUSE

FUSED

Air pollution poses risks to all humans it can be INDEPENDENT CLAUSE

deadly for asthma sufferers.

A far more common type of run-on sentence is the comma splice— two or more independent clauses joined with a comma but without a coordinating conjunction. In some comma splices, the comma appears alone. COMMA SPLICE

Air pollution poses risks to all humans, it can be deadly for asthma sufferers.

In other comma splices, the comma is accompanied by a joining word that is not a coordinating conjunction. There are only seven coordinating conjunctions in English: and, but, or, nor, for, so, and yet. COMMA SPLICE

Air pollution poses risks to all humans, however, it can be deadly for asthma sufferers.

235

236

20

run-on

Run-on sentences

Recognizing run-on sentences Does the sentence contain two independent clauses (word groups that can stand alone as sentences)?

NO

No problem

YES

No problem

YES

No problem

YES Are the clauses joined with a comma and a coordinating conjunction (and, but, or, nor, for, so, or yet)? NO

Are the clauses joined with a semicolon?

NO

Revise. It is a run-on sentence.

If you find an error, choose an effective method of revision. See 20a–20d for revision strategies.

Grammar checkers flag fewer than half the run-on sentences in a sample and may suggest inappropriate revision strategies. The flowchart above can help you identify run-on sentences in your own writing.

finding and fixing fused sentences and comma splices

run-on

20

However is a transitional expression, not a coordinating conjunction, and cannot be used with only a comma to join two independent clauses (see 20b).

Revising run-on sentences To revise a run-on sentence, you have four choices. 1. Use a comma and a coordinating conjunction (and, but, or, nor, for, so, yet).

CVU

0

Air pollution poses risks to all humans it can be deadly for asthma sufferers.

?

2. Use a semicolon (or, if appropriate, a colon or a dash). A semicolon may be used alone; it can also be accompanied by a transitional expression.

0


?

IPXFWFS

0


?

3. Make the clauses into separate sentences.

*U

0


?

4. Restructure the sentence, perhaps by subordinating one of the clauses.

"MUIPVHIBJS 0

Air pollution poses risks to all humans, it can be deadly for

?asthma sufferers.

237

20a

238

run-on

Run-on sentences

One of these revision techniques usually works better than the others for a particular sentence. The fourth technique, the one requiring the most extensive revision, is often the most effective.

20a Consider separating the clauses with a comma and a coordinating conjunction. There are seven coordinating conjunctions in English: and, but, or, nor, for, so, and yet. When a coordinating conjunction joins independent clauses, it is usually preceded by a comma. (See 32a.)

CVU

0

Some lesson plans include exercises, completing them

?

should not be the focus of all class periods. 0

Many government officials privately admit that the poly-

ZFU

graph is unreliable, however, they continue to use it as a security measure.

?

However is a transitional expression, not a coordinating conjunction, so it cannot be used with only a comma to join independent clauses. (See also 20b.)

20b Consider separating the clauses with a semicolon (or, if appropriate, with a colon or a dash). When the independent clauses are closely related and their relation is clear without a coordinating conjunction, a semicolon is an acceptable method of revision. (See 34a.) 0

Tragedy depicts the individual confronted with the fact of death, comedy depicts the adaptability of human society.

?

fixing with and, but, or, nor, for, so, yetÊ UÊ fixing with semicolon, colon, dash

run-on

20b

A semicolon is required between independent clauses that have been linked with a transitional expression (such as however, therefore, moreover, in fact, or for example). For a longer list, see 34b. 0

The timber wolf looks like a large German shepherd,

?

however, the wolf has longer legs, larger feet, and a wider head. 0

In his film adaptation of the short story “Killings,” director Todd Field changed key details of the plot, as a matter

?

of fact, he added whole scenes that do not appear in the story.

A colon or a dash may be more appropriate if the first independent clause introduces the second or if the second clause summarizes or explains the first. (See 35b and 39a.) In formal writing, the colon is usually preferred to the dash.

5IJT

0

Nuclear waste is hazardous this is an indisputable fact.

0

The female black widow spider is often a widow of her own

?

¥

making,she has been known to eat her partner after mating.

?

A colon is an appropriate method of revision if the first independent clause introduces a quoted sentence. 0

Nobel Peace Prize winner Al Gore had this to say about climate change, “The truth is that our circumstances are

?

not only new; they are completely different than they have ever been in all of human history.”

239

20c

240

run-on

Run-on sentences

20c Consider making the clauses into separate sentences. 0

Why should we spend money on expensive space

8F

exploration, we have enough underfunded programs here

?

on Earth.

Since one independent clause is a question and the other is a statement, they should be separate sentences. 0


Some studies have suggested that the sexual relationships of bonobos set them apart from common chimpanzees, " ? a ccording to Stanford (1998), these differences have been

exaggerated. Using a comma to join two independent clauses creates a comma splice. In this example, an effective revision is to separate the first independent clause (Some studies . . .) from the second independent clause (these differences . . .) and to keep the signal phrase with the second clause. (See also 56c.)

NOTE: When two quoted independent clauses are divided by

explanatory words, make each clause its own sentence. 0

“It’s always smart to learn from your mistakes,” quipped my

¦*U©T

supervisor, “it’s even smarter to learn from the mistakes of others.”

?

20d Consider restructuring the sentence, perhaps by subordinating one of the clauses. If one of the independent clauses is less important than the other, turn it into a subordinate clause or phrase. (For more about subordination, see 14, especially the chart on p. 180.)

vÕÃi`ÊÃiÌiViÃÊ UÊ V>ÊÃ«ViÃÊ UÊ >}ÊÃi«>À>ÌiÊÃiÌiViÃÊ UÊ ÀiÜÀÌ}

0

run-on

20d

One of the most famous advertising slogans is Wheaties

XIJDI

cereal’s “Breakfast of Champions,” it was penned in 1933.

?

"MUIPVHINBOZ

0

Many scholars dismiss the abominable snowman of the

? Himalayas as a myth, others claim it may be a kind of ape. 0

Mary McLeod Bethune was the seventeenth child of former

?

slaves, she founded the National Council of Negro Women in 1935. Minor ideas in these sentences are now expressed in subordinate clauses or phrases.

EXERCISE 20–1 Revise the following run-on sentences using the method of revision suggested in brackets. Revisions of lettered sentences appear in the back of the book. Example:

#FDBVTF

Orville had been obsessed with his weight as a teenager, he

?rarely ate anything sweet. [Restructure the sentence.] a. b.

c.

d. e. 1. 2.

The city had one public swimming pool, it stayed packed with children all summer long. [Restructure the sentence.] The building is being renovated, therefore at times we have no heat, water, or electricity. [Use a comma and a coordinating conjunction.] The view was not what the travel agent had described, where were the rolling hills and the shimmering rivers? [Make two sentences.] All those gnarled equations looked like toxic insects, maybe I was going to have to rethink my major. [Use a semicolon.] City officials had good reason to fear a major earthquake, most of the business district was built on landfill. [Use a colon.] The car was hardly worth trading, the frame was twisted and the block was warped. [Restructure the sentence.] The next time an event is canceled because of bad weather, don’t blame the meteorologist, blame nature. [Make two sentences.]

241

20d

242

3. 4. 5.

run-on

Run-on sentences

Ray was fluent in American Sign Language he could sign as easily as he could speak. [Restructure the sentence.] Susanna arrived with a stack of her latest hats she hoped the gift shop would place a big winter order. [Restructure the sentence.] There was one major reason for John’s wealth, his grandfather had been a multimillionaire. [Use a colon.]

EXERCISE 20–2 Revise any run-on sentences using a technique that you find effective. If a sentence is correct, write “correct” after it. Revisions of lettered sentences appear in the back of the book. Example: Crossing so many time zones on an eight-hour flight, I knew

CVU

I would be tired when I arrived, however, I was too excited to sleep on the plane.

a. b.

c. d. e.

1.

2. 3.

4.

5.

?

Wind power for the home is a supplementary source of energy, it can be combined with electricity, gas, or solar energy. Aidan viewed Sofia Coppola’s Lost in Translation three times and then wrote a paper describing the film as the work of a mysterious modern painter. In the Middle Ages, the streets of London were dangerous places, it was safer to travel by boat along the Thames. “He’s not drunk,” I said, “he’s in a state of diabetic shock.” Are you able to endure extreme angle turns, high speeds, frequent jumps, and occasional crashes, then supermoto racing may be a sport for you. Death Valley National Monument, located in southern California and Nevada, is one of the hottest places on Earth, temperatures there have soared as high as 134 degrees Fahrenheit. Anamaria opened the boxes crammed with toys, out sprang griffins, dragons, and phoenixes. Subatomic physics is filled with strange and marvelous particles, tiny bodies of matter that shiver, wobble, pulse, and flatten to no thickness at all. As his first major project, Frederick Law Olmsted designed New York City’s Central Park, one of the most beautiful urban spaces in the United States. The neurosurgeon explained that the medication could have one side effect, it might cause me to experience temporary memory loss.

vÕÃi`ÊÃiÌiViÃÊ UÊ V>ÊÃ«ViÃÊ UÊ agreement of verb with subject

EXERCISE 20–3

sv agr

21

In the following rough draft, revise any run-on

sentences. Some parents and educators argue that requiring uniforms in public schools would improve student behavior and performance. They think that uniforms give students a more professional attitude toward school, moreover, they believe that uniforms help create a sense of community among students from diverse backgrounds. But parents and educators should consider the drawbacks to requiring uniforms in public schools. Uniforms do create a sense of community, they do this, however, by stamping out individuality. Youth is a time to express originality, it is a time to develop a sense of self. One important way young people express their identities is through the clothes they wear. The self-patrolled dress code of high school students may be stricter than any schoolimposed code, nevertheless, trying to control dress habits from above will only lead to resentment or to mindless conformity. If children are going to act like adults, they need to be treated like adults, they need to be allowed to make their own choices. Telling young people what to wear to school merely prolongs their childhood. Requiring uniforms undermines the educational purpose of public schools, which is not just to teach facts and figures but to help young people grow into adults who are responsible for making their own choices. hackerhandbooks.com/bedhandbook > Grammar exercises > Grammatical sentences > E-ex 20–4 to 20–7

21

Make subjects and verbs agree.

In the present tense, verbs agree with their subjects in number (singular or plural) and in person (first, second, third): I sing, you sing, he sings, she sings, we sing, they sing. Even if your ear recognizes the standard subject-verb combinations presented in 21a, you will no doubt encounter tricky situations such as those described in 21b–21k.

243

244

21a

sv agr

Subject-verb agreement

21a Consult this section for standard subject-verb combinations. This section describes the basic guidelines for making presenttense verbs agree with their subjects. The present-tense ending -s (or -es) is used on a verb if its subject is third-person singular (he, she, it, and singular nouns); otherwise the verb takes no ending. Consider, for example, the present-tense forms of the verbs love and try, given at the beginning of the chart on the following page. The verb be varies from this pattern; unlike any other verb, it has special forms in both the present and the past tense. These forms appear at the end of the chart. If you aren’t confident that you know the standard forms, use the charts on pages 245 and 246 as you proofread for subject-verb agreement. You may also want to look at 27c on -s endings of regular and irregular verbs. Grammar checkers are fairly good at flagging subject-verb agreement problems. But they occasionally flag a correct sentence, usually because they misidentify the subject, the verb, or both. Sometimes they miss an agreement problem because they don’t recognize a pronoun’s antecedent (see 21i).

21b Make the verb agree with its subject, not with a word that comes between. Word groups often come between the subject and the verb. Such word groups, usually modifying the subject, may contain a noun that at first appears to be the subject. By mentally stripping away such modifiers, you can isolate the noun that is in fact the subject.

The samples on the tray in the lab need testing.

VÃ}ÊÌiÊÀ}ÌÊÛiÀLÊ UÊ words between subject and verb

sv agr

21b

245

Subject-verb agreement at a glance Present-tense forms of love and try (typical verbs) SINGULAR FIRST PERSON SECOND PERSON THIRD PERSON

I you he/she/it*

PLURAL

love love loves

SINGULAR FIRST PERSON SECOND PERSON THIRD PERSON

I you he/she/it*

we you they**

love love love

PLURAL

try try tries

we you they**

try try try

Present-tense forms of have SINGULAR FIRST PERSON SECOND PERSON THIRD PERSON

I you he/she/it*

PLURAL

have have has

we you they**

have have have

Present-tense forms of do (including negative forms) SINGULAR FIRST PERSON SECOND PERSON THIRD PERSON

I you he/she/it*

PLURAL

do/don’t do/don’t does/doesn’t

we you they**

do/don’t do/don’t do/don’t

Present-tense and past-tense forms of be SINGULAR FIRST PERSON SECOND PERSON THIRD PERSON

I you he/she/it*

PLURAL

am/was are/were is/was

*And singular nouns (child, Roger ) **And plural nouns (children, the Mannings)

we you they**

are/were are/were are/were

246

21b

sv agr


When to use the -s (or -es ) form of a present-tense verb

Is the verb’s subject he, she, it, or one?

YES

Use the -s form (loves, tries, has, does).

NO

Is the subject a singular noun (such as parent)?

YES

Use the -s form.

YES

Use the -s form.

NO Is the subject a singular indefinite pronoun — anybody, anyone, each, either, everybody, everyone, everything, neither, no one, someone, or something? NO

Use the base form of the verb (such as love, try, have, do).

EXCEPTION: Choosing the correct present-tense form of be (am, is, or are ) is not quite so simple. See the chart on the previous page for both present- and pasttense forms of be. ESL TIP: Do not use the -s form of a verb if it follows a modal verb such as can, must, or should or another helping verb. (See 28b.)

choosing the -s (-es®ÊÛiÀLÊvÀÊ UÊ ÜÀ`ÃÊLiÌÜiiÊ ÃÕLiVÌÊ>`ÊÛiÀLÊ UÊ ÃÕLiVÌÃÊÜÌÊand

0

sv agr

21c

High levels of air pollution cause s damage to the respiratory tract. The subject is levels, not pollution. Strip away the phrase of air pollution to hear the correct verb: levels cause.

0h

IBT

The slaughter of pandas for their pelts have caused the

?

panda population to decline drastically. The subject is slaughter, not pandas or pelts.

NOTE: Phrases beginning with the prepositions as well as, in addition to, accompanied by, together with, and along with do not make a singular subject plural.

0h

XBT

The governor as well as his press secretary were on

?

the plane.

To emphasize that two people were on the plane, the writer could use and instead: The governor and his press secretary were on the plane.

21c Treat most subjects joined with and as plural. A subject with two or more parts is said to be compound. If the parts are connected with and, the subject is nearly always plural. Leon and Jan often jog together. 0

The Supreme Court’s willingness to hear the case and its

IBWF

affirmation of the original decision has set a new precedent.

?

247

21d

248

sv agr


EXCEPTIONS: When the parts of the subject form a single unit or when they refer to the same person or thing, treat the subject as singular. Strawberries and cream was a last-minute addition to the menu. Sue’s friend and adviser was surprised by her decision.

When a compound subject is preceded by each or every, treat it as singular. Each tree, shrub, and vine needs to be sprayed. Every car, truck, and van is required to pass inspection.

This exception does not apply when a compound subject is followed by each: Alan and Marcia each have different ideas.

21d With subjects joined with or or nor (or with either . . . or or neither . . . nor), make the verb agree with the part of the subject nearer to the verb. A driver’s license or credit card is required. A driver’s license or two credit cards are required.

0h

JT

If an infant or a child are having difficulty breathing, seek

?

medical attention immediately. 0h

Neither the chief financial officer nor the marketing

XFSF

managers was able to convince the client to reconsider.

?

The verb must be matched with the part of the subject closer to it: child is in the first sentence, managers were in the second.

NOTE: If one part of the subject is singular and the other is plu-

ral, put the plural one last to avoid awkwardness.

subjects with or, nor, either . . . or,ÊiÌiÀÊ°Ê°Ê°ÊÀÊ UÊ pronouns like anyone, each, no one, someone

sv agr

21e

21e Treat most indefinite pronouns as singular. Indefinite pronouns are pronouns that do not refer to specific persons or things. The following commonly used indefinite pronouns are singular. anybody anyone anything

each either everybody

everyone everything neither

nobody no one nothing

somebody someone something

Many of these words appear to have plural meanings, and they are often treated as such in casual speech. In formal written English, however, they are nearly always treated as singular. Everyone on the team supports the coach.

0h

IBT

Each of the furrows have been seeded.

?

0

XBT

Nobody who participated in the clinical trials were given a placebo.

?

The subjects of these sentences are Each and Nobody. These indefinite pronouns are third-person singular, so the verbs must be has and was.

A few indefinite pronouns (all, any, none, some) may be singular or plural depending on the noun or pronoun they refer to. Some of our luggage was lost. None of his advice makes sense. Some of the rocks are slippery. None of the eggs were broken. NOTE: When the meaning of none is emphatically “not one,” none may be treated as singular: None [meaning “Not one”] of the eggs was broken. However, some experts advise using not one instead: Not one of the eggs was broken.

249

21f

250

sv agr


21f Treat collective nouns as singular unless the meaning is clearly plural. Collective nouns such as jury, committee, audience, crowd, troop, family, and couple name a class or a group. In American English, collective nouns are nearly always treated as singular: They emphasize the group as a unit. Occasionally, when there is some reason to draw attention to the individual members of the group, a collective noun may be treated as plural. (See also 22b.) SINGULAR

The class respects the teacher.

PLURAL

The class are debating among themselves.

To underscore the notion of individuality in the second sentence, many writers would add a clearly plural noun. PLURAL

0h

The class members are debating among themselves.

NFFUT

The board of trustees meet in Denver twice a year.

?

The board as a whole meets; there is no reason to draw attention to its individual members.

0h

XFSF

A young couple was arguing about politics while holding hands.

?

The meaning is clearly plural. Only separate individuals can argue and hold hands.

NOTE: The phrase the number is treated as singular, a number as

plural. SINGULAR

The number of school-age children is declining.

PLURAL

A number of children are attending the wedding.

nouns like family, audience, teamÊ UÊ subject following verb

sv agr

21g

NOTE: In general, when fractions or units of measurement are

used with a singular noun, treat them as singular; when they are used with a plural noun, treat them as plural. SINGULAR

Three-fourths of the salad has been eaten.

SINGULAR

Twenty inches of wallboard was covered with mud.

PLURAL

One-fourth of the drivers were texting.

PLURAL

Two pounds of blueberries were used to make the pie.

21g Make the verb agree with its subject even when the subject follows the verb. Verbs ordinarily follow subjects. When this normal order is reversed, it is easy to become confused. Sentences beginning with there is or there are (or there was or there were) are inverted; the subject follows the verb. There are surprisingly few children in our neighborhood.

0h

XFSF

There was a social worker and a neighbor at the scene of the

?

accident. The subject, worker and neighbor, is plural, so the verb must be were.

Occasionally you may decide to invert a sentence for variety or effect. When you do so, check to make sure that your subject and verb agree.

0h

BSF

Of particular concern is penicillin and tetracycline,

?

antibiotics used to make animals more resistant to disease. The subject, penicillin and tetracycline, is plural, so the verb must be are.

251

21h

252

sv agr


21h Make the verb agree with its subject, not with a subject complement. One basic sentence pattern in English consists of a subject, a linking verb, and a subject complement: Jack is a securities lawyer. Because the subject complement (lawyer) names or describes the subject (Jack), it is sometimes mistaken for the subject. (See 62b on subject complements.)

These exercises are a way to test your ability to perform under pressure.

0h

BSF

A tent and a sleeping bag is the required equipment for all

?

campers.

Tent and bag is the subject, not equipment.

0h

JT

A major force in today’s economy are children — as

?

consumers, decision makers, and trend spotters. Force is the subject, not children. If the corrected version seems too awkward, make children the subject: Children are a major force in today’s economy — as consumers, decision makers, and trend spotters.

21i Who, which, and that take verbs that agree with their antecedents. Like most pronouns, the relative pronouns who, which, and that have antecedents, nouns or pronouns to which they refer. Relative pronouns used as subjects of subordinate clauses take verbs that agree with their antecedents. ANT

PN

V

Take a course that prepares you for classroom management.

>}ÀiiiÌÊÜÌÊÃÕLiVÌ]ÊÌÊÌiÀÊÕÃÊ UÊ who, which, thatÊ UÊ ÜÀ`ÃÊiÊmathematics, politics

sv agr

21j

One of the Constructions such as one of the students who [or one of the things that] cause problems for writers. Do not assume that the antecedent must be one. Instead, consider the logic of the sentence. 0h

Our ability to use language is one of the things that sets us apart from animals. The antecedent of that is things, not one. Several things set us apart from animals.

Only one of the When the word only comes before one, you are safe in assuming that one is the antecedent of the relative pronoun. 0h

Veronica was the only one of the first-year Spanish

XBT

students who were fluent enough to apply for the exchange program.

?

The antecedent of who is one, not students. Only one student was fluent enough.

21j Words such as athletics, economics, mathematics, physics, politics, statistics, measles, and news are usually singular, despite their plural form.

0h

JT

Politics are among my mother’s favorite pastimes.

?

EXCEPTION: Occasionally some of these words, especially econom-

ics, mathematics, politics, and statistics, have plural meanings: Office politics often sway decisions about hiring and promotion. The economics of the building plan are prohibitive.

253

21k

254

sv agr


21k Titles of works, company names, words mentioned as words, and gerund phrases are singular.

0h

EFTDSJCFT

Lost Cities describe the discoveries of fifty ancient

?

civilizations.

0h

TQFDJBMJ[FT

Delmonico Brothers specialize in organic produce and additive-free meats.

0h

? JT

Controlled substances are a euphemism for illegal drugs.

?

A gerund phrase consists of an -ing verb form followed by any objects, complements, or modifiers (see 63b). Treat gerund phrases as singular.

NBLFT

0

Encountering long hold times make customers impatient with telephone tech support.

?

EXERCISE 21–1 For each sentence in the following passage, underline the subject (or compound subject) and then select the verb that agrees with it. (If you have trouble identifying the subject, consult 62a.) Loggerhead sea turtles (migrate / migrates) thousands of miles before returning to their nesting location every two to three years. The nesting season for loggerhead turtles (span / spans) the hottest months of the summer. Although the habitat of Atlantic loggerheads (range / ranges) from Newfoundland to Argentina, nesting for these turtles (take / takes) place primarily along the southeastern coast of the United States. Female turtles that have reached sexual maturity (crawl / crawls) ashore at night to lay their eggs. The cavity that serves as a nest for the eggs (is / are) dug out with the female’s strong flippers. Deposited into each nest (is / are) anywhere from fifty to two hundred spherical eggs, also known as a clutch. After a two-month incubation period, all eggs in the clutch

titles, company names, -ing phrases

sv agr

21k

(begin / begins) to hatch, and within a few days the young turtles attempt to make their way into the ocean. A major cause of the loggerhead’s decreasing numbers (is / are) natural predators such as raccoons, birds, and crabs. Beach erosion and coastal development also (threaten / threatens) the turtles’ survival. For example, a crowd of curious humans or lights from beachfront residences (is / are) enough to make the female abandon her nesting plans and return to the ocean. Since only one in one thousand loggerheads survives to adulthood, special care should be taken to protect this threatened species.

EXERCISE 21–2 Edit the following sentences to eliminate problems with subject-verb agreement. If a sentence is correct, write “correct” after it. Answers to lettered sentences appear in the back of the book. Example:

XFSF

Jack’s first days in the infantry was grueling.

a. b. c. d.

e. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

?

One of the main reasons for elephant poaching are the profits received from selling the ivory tusks. Not until my interview with Dr. Hwang were other possibilities opened to me. A number of students in the seminar was aware of the importance of joining the discussion. Batik cloth from Bali, blue and white ceramics from Delft, and a bocce ball from Turin has made Angelie’s room the talk of the dorm. The board of directors, ignoring the wishes of the neighborhood, has voted to allow further development. Measles is a contagious childhood disease. Adorning a shelf in the lab is a Vietnamese figurine, a set of Korean clay gods, and an American plastic village. The presence of certain bacteria in our bodies is one of the factors that determines our overall health. Sheila is the only one of the many applicants who has the ability to step into this job. Neither the explorer nor his companions was ever seen again.

hackerhandbooks.com/bedhandbook > Grammar exercises > Grammatical sentences > E-ex 21–3 to 21–5

255

256

22

pn agr

22

Make pronouns and antecedents agree.

Pronoun-antecedent agreement

A pronoun is a word that substitutes for a noun. (See 61b.) Many pronouns have antecedents, nouns or pronouns to which they refer. A pronoun and its antecedent agree when they are both singular or both plural. SINGULAR

Dr. Ava Berto finished her rounds.

PLURAL

The hospital interns finished their rounds.

The pronouns he, his, she, her, it, and its must agree in gender (masculine, feminine, or neuter) with their antecedents, not with the words they modify.

Steve visited his [not her] sister in Seattle.

Grammar checkers rarely flag problems with pronoun-antecedent agreement. It takes a human eye to see that a plural pronoun does not agree with a singular noun. When grammar checkers do flag agreement problems, they often suggest (correctly) substituting the singular phrase his or her for the plural pronoun their. For other revision strategies that avoid the wordy his or her construction, see the chart on page 259.

22a Do not use plural pronouns to refer to singular antecedents. Writers are frequently tempted to use plural pronouns to refer to two kinds of singular antecedents: indefinite pronouns and generic nouns.

«ÀÕÃÊ>`ÊÜÀ`ÃÊÌiÞÊÀiviÀÊÌÊ UÊ Ã}Õ>ÀÊÛÃ°Ê «ÕÀ>Ê UÊ «ÀÕÃÊi anyone, each, someone

pn agr

22a

Indefinite pronouns Indefinite pronouns refer to nonspecific persons or things. Even though some of the following indefinite pronouns may seem to have plural meanings, treat them as singular in formal English. anybody anyone anything

each either everybody

everyone everything neither

nobody no one nothing

somebody someone something

Everyone performs at his or her [not their] own fitness level.

When a plural pronoun refers mistakenly to a singular indefinite pronoun, you can usually choose one of three options for revision: 1. Replace the plural pronoun with he or she (or his or her). 2. Make the antecedent plural. 3. Rewrite the sentence so that no problem of agreement exists. 0

When someone travels outside the United States for the

IFPSTIFOFFET

first time, they need to apply for a passport several months

?

in advance.

QFPQMFUSBWFM

0


?

first time, they need to apply for a passport several months in advance.

"OZPOFXIP

0


OFFET ? first time, they need to apply for a passport several months ? in advance.

257

22b

258

pn agr


Because the he or she construction is wordy, often the second or third revision strategy is more effective. Using he (or his) to refer to persons of either sex, while less wordy, is considered sexist, as is using she (or her) for all persons. Some writers alternate male and female pronouns throughout a text, but the result is often awkward. See 17f and the chart on page 259 for strategies that avoid sexist usage. NOTE: If you change a pronoun from singular to plural (or vice

versa), check to be sure that the verb agrees with the new pronoun (see 21e).

Generic nouns A generic noun represents a typical member of a group, such as a typical student, or any member of a group, such as any lawyer. Although generic nouns may seem to have plural meanings, they are singular. Every runner must train rigorously if he or she wants [not they want] to excel.

When a plural pronoun refers mistakenly to a generic noun, you will usually have the same three revision options as mentioned on page 257 for indefinite pronouns.

IFPSTIFXBOUT

0

A medical student must study hard if they want to succeed.

.FEJDBMTUVEFOUT

0

?


? 0


22b Treat collective nouns as singular unless the meaning is clearly plural. Collective nouns such as jury, committee, audience, crowd, class, troop, family, team, and couple name a group. Ordinarily the group functions as a unit, so the noun should be treated as

}iiÀVÊÕÃÊ UÊ ÕÃÊiÊfamily, audienceÊ UÊ ÀiÛÃ}ÊÃiÝÃÌÊ>}Õ>}iÊ UÊ >Û`}Êhe

pn agr

22b

Choosing a revision strategy that avoids sexist language Because many readers object to sexist language, avoid using he, him, and his (or she, her, and hers) to refer to both men and women. Also try to avoid the wordy expressions he or she and his or her. More graceful alternatives are usually possible.

Use an occasional he or she (or his or her ).

IJTPSIFS

0

In our office, everyone works at their own pace.

? Make the antecedent plural.

&NQMPZFFT

0

An employee on extended disability leave may continue their

?life insurance. Recast the sentence. 0

The amount of vacation time a federal worker may accrue depends on their length of service.

0 If"a child is born to parents who are both bipolar, IBT they ?have a high chance of being bipolar. ? UPCFJOH

0

A year later someone finally admitted that they were involved in the kidnapping.

0

?

In his autobiography, Benjamin Franklin suggests that anyone

CZMJWJOH

can achieve success as long as they live a virtuous life and

XPSLJOH work hard. ?

?

259

22c

260

pn agr


singular; if the members of the group function as individuals, however, the noun should be treated as plural. (See also 21f.) AS A UNIT

The committee granted its permission to build.

AS INDIVIDUALS

The committee put their signatures on the document.

When treating a collective noun as plural, many writers prefer to add a clearly plural antecedent such as members to the sentence: The members of the committee put their signatures on the document. 0

Defense attorney Clarence Darrow surprisingly urged the jury to find his client, John Scopes, guilty so that he could appeal the case to a higher court. The jury complied,

JUT

returning their verdict in only nine minutes.

?

There is no reason to draw attention to the individual members of the jury, so jury should be treated as singular.

22c Treat most compound antecedents joined with and as plural. In 1987, Reagan and Gorbachev held a summit where they signed the Intermediate-Range Nuclear Forces Treaty.

22d With compound antecedents joined with or or nor (or with either . . . or or neither . . . nor), make the pronoun agree with the nearer antecedent. Either Bruce or Tom should receive first prize for his poem. Neither the mouse nor the rats could find their way through the maze.

words with andÊ UÊ V«Õ`ÃÊ UÊ words with or, nor, either . . . or, neither . . . nor

pn agr

22d

NOTE: If one of the antecedents is singular and the other plu-

ral, as in the second example, put the plural one last to avoid awkwardness. EXCEPTION: If one antecedent is male and the other female, do

not follow the traditional rule. The sentence Either Bruce or Elizabeth should receive first prize for her short story makes no sense. The best solution is to recast the sentence: The prize for best short story should go to either Bruce or Elizabeth. EXERCISE 22–1 Edit the following sentences to eliminate problems with pronoun-antecedent agreement. Most of the sentences can be revised in more than one way, so experiment before choosing a solution. If a sentence is correct, write “correct” after it. Revisions of lettered sentences appear in the back of the book. Example:

3FDSVJUFST

The recruiter may tell the truth, but there is much that they

?choose not to tell. a. b. c. d. e. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Every presidential candidate must appeal to a wide variety of ethnic and social groups if they want to win the election. David lent his motorcycle to someone who allowed their friend to use it. The aerobics teacher motioned for everyone to move their arms in wide, slow circles. The parade committee was unanimous in its decision to allow all groups and organizations to join the festivities. The applicant should be bilingual if they want to qualify for this position. If a driver refuses to take a blood or breath test, he or she will have their licenses suspended for six months. Why should anyone learn a second language? One reason is to sharpen their minds. The Department of Education issued guidelines for school security. They were trying to anticipate problems and avert disaster. The logger in the Northwest relies on the old forest growth for their living. If anyone notices any suspicious activity, they should report it to the police.

261

23

262

ref

Pronoun reference

EXERCISE 22–2 Edit the following paragraph to eliminate problems with pronoun-antecedent agreement or sexist language. A common practice in businesses is to put each employee in their own cubicle. A typical cubicle resembles an office, but their walls don’t reach the ceiling. Many office managers feel that a cubicle floor plan has its advantages. Cubicles make a large area feel spacious. In addition, they can be moved around so that each new employee can be accommodated in his own work area. Of course, the cubicle model also has problems. The typical employee is not as happy with a cubicle as they would be with a traditional office. Also, productivity can suffer. Neither a manager nor a frontline worker can ordinarily do their best work in a cubicle because of noise and lack of privacy. Each worker can hear his neighbors tapping on computer keyboards, making telephone calls, and muttering under their breath. hackerhandbooks.com/bedhandbook > Grammar exercises > Grammatical sentences > E-ex 22–3 to 22–5

23

Make pronoun references clear.

Pronouns substitute for nouns; they are a kind of shorthand. In a sentence like After Andrew intercepted the ball, he kicked it as hard as he could, the pronouns he and it substitute for the nouns Andrew and ball. The word a pronoun refers to is called its antecedent. Grammar checkers do not flag problems with faulty pronoun reference. Although a computer program can identify pronouns, it has no way of knowing which words, if any, they refer to. Only you can determine whether your readers will be confused.

23a Avoid ambiguous or remote pronoun reference. Ambiguous pronoun reference occurs when a pronoun could refer to two possible antecedents.

5IFQJUDIFSCSPLFXIFO(MPSJBTFUJU

0

When Gloria set the pitcher on the glass-topped table, it broke.

?

?

ìÌvÞ}ÊÜ>ÌÊÌiÊ«ÀÕÊÀiviÀÃÊÌÊ UÊ this, that, which, it

ref

23b

¦:PVIBWF

0

Tom told James that he had won the lottery.

?

?

What broke — the pitcher or the table? Who won the lottery — Tom or James? The revisions eliminate the ambiguity.

Remote pronoun reference occurs when a pronoun is too far away from its antecedent for easy reading. 0

After the court ordered my ex-husband to pay child support, he refused. Approximately eight months later, we were back in court. This time the judge ordered him to make payments directly to the Support and Collections Unit, which would in turn pay me. For the first six months, I received regular pay-

NZFYIVTCBOE

ments, but then they stopped. Again he was summoned to appear in court; he did not respond.

?

The pronoun he was too distant from its antecedent, ex-husband, which appeared several sentences earlier.

23b Generally, avoid broad reference of this, that, which, and it. For clarity, the pronouns this, that, which, and it should ordinarily refer to specific antecedents rather than to whole ideas or sentences. When a pronoun’s reference is needlessly broad, either replace the pronoun with a noun or supply an antecedent to which the pronoun clearly refers. 0

By advertising on television, pharmaceutical companies gain exposure for their prescription drugs. Patients

UIFBET

respond to this by requesting drugs they might not need.

?

For clarity, the writer substituted the noun ads for the pronoun this, which referred broadly to the idea expressed in the preceding sentence.

263

23c

264

0

ref

Pronoun reference

Romeo and Juliet were both too young to have acquired

BGBDU

much wisdom, and that accounts for their rash actions.

?

The writer added an antecedent ( fact) that the pronoun that clearly refers to.

EXCEPTION: Many writers view broad reference as acceptable when

the pronoun refers clearly to the sense of an entire clause. If you pick up a starving dog and make him prosperous, he will not bite you. This is the principal difference between a dog and a man. — Mark Twain

23c Do not use a pronoun to refer to an implied antecedent. A pronoun should refer to a specific antecedent, not to a word that is implied but not present in the sentence.

UIFCSBJET

0

After braiding Ann’s hair, Sue decorated them with ribbons.

?

The pronoun them referred to Ann’s braids (implied by the term braiding), but the word braids did not appear in the sentence.

Modifiers, such as possessives, cannot serve as antecedents. A modifier may strongly imply the noun that a pronoun might logically refer to, but it is not itself that noun.

+BNBJDB,JODBJE

0

In Jamaica Kincaid’s “Girl,” she describes the advice a

?


mother gives her daughter, including the mysterious

MLA-style citation

warning not to be “the kind of woman who the baker won’t let near the bread” (454). Using the possessive form of an author’s name to introduce a source leads to a problem later in this sentence: The pronoun she cannot refer logically to a possessive modifier (Jamaica Kincaid’s). The revision substitutes the noun Jamaica Kincaid for the pronoun she, thereby eliminating the problem.

ÕVi>À]ÊÕÃÌ>Ìi`Ê>ÌiViìÌÊ UÊ they, it, youÊ UÊ who vs. which or that

23e

ref

23d Avoid the indefinite use of they, it, and you. Do not use the pronoun they to refer indefinitely to persons who have not been specifically mentioned. They should always refer to a specific antecedent.

$POHSFTT

0

In 2001, they shut down all government agencies for more

?

than a month until the budget crisis was finally resolved.

The word it should not be used indefinitely in constructions such as It is said on television . . . or In the article, it says that. . . .

5IF 0

In the encyclopedia it states that male moths can smell

?female moths from several miles away. The pronoun you is appropriate only when the writer is addressing the reader directly: Once you have kneaded the dough, let it rise in a warm place. Except in informal contexts, however, you should not be used to mean “anyone in general.” Use a noun instead. (See pp. 48–49.)

BHVFTU

0

Ms. Pickersgill’s Guide to Etiquette stipulates that you

?

should not arrive at a party too early or leave too late.

23e To refer to persons, use who, whom, or whose, not which or that. In most contexts, use who, whom, or whose to refer to persons, which or that to refer to animals or things. Which is reserved only for animals or things, so it is impolite to use it to refer to persons.

XIPN

0

All thirty-two women in the study, half of which were

?

unemployed for more than six months, reported higher self-esteem after job training.

265

23e

266

ref

Pronoun reference

Although that is sometimes used to refer to persons, many readers will find such references dehumanizing. It is more polite to use a form of who — a word reserved only for people. 0

During the two-day festival El Día de los Muertos (Day of the

XIP

Dead), Mexican families celebrate loved ones that have died.

? NOTE: Occasionally whose may be used to refer to animals and

things to avoid the awkward of which construction.

XIPTF

0

A local school, the name of which will be in tomorrow’s

?

paper, has received the Governor’s Gold Medal for outstanding community service.

EXERCISE 23–1

Edit the following sentences to correct errors in pronoun reference. In some cases, you will need to decide on an antecedent that the pronoun might logically refer to. Revisions of lettered sentences appear in the back of the book. Example: Although Apple makes the most widely recognized MP3 player, other companies have gained a share of the market.

5IFDPNQFUJUJPO

This has kept prices from skyrocketing.

? a. b.

c. d. e.

They say that engineering students should have hands-on experience with dismantling and reassembling machines. She had decorated her living room with posters from chamber music festivals. This led her date to believe that she was interested in classical music. Actually she preferred rock. In my high school, you didn’t need to get all A’s to be considered a success; you just needed to work to your ability. Marianne told Jenny that she was worried about her mother’s illness. Though Lewis cried for several minutes after scraping his knee, eventually it subsided.

who vs. which or that

1. 2. 3.

4. 5.

ref

23e

Our German conversation group is made up of six people, three of which I had never met before. Many people believe that the polygraph test is highly reliable if you employ a licensed examiner. Parent involvement is high at Mission San Jose High School. They participate in many committees and activities that affect all aspects of school life. Because of Paul Robeson’s outspoken attitude toward fascism, he was labeled a Communist. In the report, it points out that the bald eagle, after several decades of protection, was removed from the endangered species list in 1997.

EXERCISE 23–2 Edit the following passage to correct errors in pronoun reference. In some cases, you will need to decide on an antecedent that the pronoun might logically refer to. Since the Internet’s inception in the 1980s, it has grown to be one of the largest communications forums in the world. The Internet was created by a team of academics who were building on a platform that government scientists had started developing in the 1950s. They initially viewed it as a noncommercial enterprise that would serve only the needs of the academic and technical communities. But with the introduction of user-friendly browser technology in the 1990s, it expanded tremendously. By the late 1990s, many businesses were connecting to the Internet with high-speed broadband and fiber-optic connections, which is also true of many home users today. Accessing information, shopping, and communicating are easier than ever before. This, however, can lead to some possible downfalls. You can be bombarded with spam and pop-up ads or attacked by harmful viruses and worms. They say that the best way to protect home computers from harm is to keep antivirus protection programs up-to-date and to shut them down when not in use. hackerhandbooks.com/bedhandbook > Grammar exercises > Grammatical sentences > E-ex 23–3 to 23–5

267

268

24

case

24

Distinguish between pronouns such as I and me.

Pronoun case (such as I vs. me)

The personal pronouns in the following chart change what is known as case form according to their grammatical function in a sentence. Pronouns functioning as subjects or subject complements appear in the subjective case; those functioning as objects appear in the objective case; and those showing ownership appear in the possessive case.

SINGULAR

PLURAL

SUBJECTIVE CASE

OBJECTIVE CASE

POSSESSIVE CASE

I you he/she/it we you they

me you him/her/it us you them

my your his/her/its our your their

Pronouns in the subjective and objective cases are frequently confused. Most of the rules in this section specify when to use one or the other of these cases (I or me, he or him, and so on). Section 24g explains a special use of pronouns and nouns in the possessive case. Grammar checkers sometimes flag incorrect pronouns and suggest using the correct form. But they miss more incorrect pronouns than they catch, and their suggestions for revision are sometimes off the mark, especially with pronouns following than or as (see 24d).

24a Use the subjective case (I, you, he, she, it, we, they) for subjects and subject complements. When personal pronouns are used as subjects, ordinarily your ear will tell you the correct pronoun. Problems sometimes arise, however, with compound word groups containing a pronoun, so it is not always safe to trust your ear.

I vs. me, he vs. him, they vs. themÊ UÊ «ÀÕÃÊ>ÃÊÃÕLiVÌÃÊ UÊ «ÀÕÃÊ>ÃÊLiVÌÃ

0h

24b

case

IF

Joel ran away from home because his stepfather and him had

?

quarreled.

His stepfather and he is the subject of the verb had quarreled. If we strip away the words his stepfather and, the correct pronoun becomes clear: he had quarreled (not him had quarreled).

When a pronoun is used as a subject complement (a word following a linking verb), your ear may mislead you, since the incorrect form is frequently heard in casual speech. (See “subject complement,” 62b.) 0h

During the Lindbergh trial, Bruno Hauptmann repeatedly

IF

denied that the kidnapper was him.

?

If kidnapper was he seems too stilted, rewrite the sentence: During the Lindbergh trial, Bruno Hauptmann repeatedly denied that he was the kidnapper.

24b Use the objective case (me, you, him, her, it, us, them) for all objects. When a personal pronoun is used as a direct object, an indirect object, or the object of a preposition, ordinarily your ear will lead you to the correct pronoun. When an object is compound, however, you may occasionally become confused. 0h

Janice was indignant when she realized that the salesclerk

IFS

was insulting her mother and she.

?

Her mother and her is the direct object of the verb was insulting. Strip away the words her mother and to hear the correct pronoun: was insulting her (not was insulting she).

0h

NF

The most traumatic experience for her father and I occurred long after her operation.

?

Her father and me is the object of the preposition for. Strip away the words her father and to test for the correct pronoun: for me (not for I).

269

24c

270

case


When in doubt about the correct pronoun, some writers try to avoid making the choice by using a reflexive pronoun such as myself. Using a reflexive pronoun in such situations is nonstandard.

0h

NF

The Indian cab driver gave my cousin and myself some good tips on traveling in New Delhi.

?

My cousin and me is the indirect object of the verb gave. For correct uses of myself, see the Glossary of Usage.

0h

NF

The independent film company hired my sister and myself

?

as marketing consultants.

My sister and me is the direct object of the verb hired. For correct uses of myself, see the Glossary of Usage.

24c Put an appositive and the word to which it refers in the same case. Appositives are noun phrases that rename nouns or pronouns. A pronoun used as an appositive has the same function (usually subject or object) as the word(s) it renames.

0h

*

The chief strategists, Dr. Bell and me, could not agree on a plan.

?

The appositive Dr. Bell and I renames the subject, strategists. Test: I could not agree (not me could not agree). 0h

The reporter interviewed only two witnesses, the bicyclist

NF

and I.

?

The appositive the bicyclist and me renames the direct object, witnesses. Test: interviewed me (not interviewed I).

ÜÀ`ÃÊÌ>ÌÊÀi>iÊÕÃÊÀÊ«ÀÕÃÊ UÊ comparisons with than or asÊ UÊ we vs. us

case

24e

24d Following than or as, choose the pronoun that expresses your meaning. When a comparison begins with than or as, your choice of a pronoun will depend on your intended meaning. Consider, for example, the difference in meaning between these sentences. My roommate likes football more than I. My roommate likes football more than me.

Finish each sentence mentally and its meaning becomes clear: My roommate likes football more than I [do]. My roommate likes football more than [he likes] me. 0h

In our position paper supporting nationalized health care in the United States, we argued that Canadians are much

XF

better off than us.

?

We is the subject of the verb are, which is understood: Canadians are much better off than we [are]. If the correct English seems too formal, you can always add the verb. 0h

We respected no other candidate for the city council

IFS

as much as she.

?

This sentence means that we respected no other candidate as much as we respected her. Her is the direct object of the understood verb respected.

24e For we or us before a noun, choose the pronoun that would be appropriate if the noun were omitted.

0h

8F

Us tenants would rather fight than move.

? 0h

VT

Management is shortchanging we tenants.

?

No one would say Us would rather fight than move or Management is shortchanging we.

271

24f

272

case


24f Use the objective case for subjects and objects of infinitives. An infinitive is the word to followed by the base form of a verb. (See 63b.) Subjects of infinitives are an exception to the rule that subjects must be in the subjective case. Whenever an infinitive has a subject, it must be in the objective case. Objects of infinitives also are in the objective case.

0h

NF

IFS

?

?

Ms. Wilson asked John and I to drive the senator and she to the airport.

John and me is the subject of the infinitive to drive; senator and her is the direct object of the infinitive.

24g Use the possessive case to modify a gerund. A pronoun that modifies a gerund or a gerund phrase should be in the possessive case (my, our, your, his, her, its, their). A gerund is a verb form ending in -ing that functions as a noun. Gerunds frequently appear in phrases; when they do, the whole gerund phrase functions as a noun. (See 63b.)

0h

ZPVS

The chances of you being hit by lightning are about two million to one.

?

Your modifies the gerund phrase being hit by lightning.

Nouns as well as pronouns may modify gerunds. To form the possessive case of a noun, use an apostrophe and an -s (victim’s) or just an apostrophe (victims’). (See 36a.)

0h

BSJTUPDSBDZ©T

The old order in France paid a high price for the aristocracy exploiting the lower classes.

?

The possessive noun aristocracy’s modifies the gerund phrase exploiting the lower classes.

object pronouns with infinitives (to see®Ê UÊ possesive pronouns with -ing noun form

case

24g

Gerund phrases should not be confused with participial phrases, which function as adjectives, not as nouns: We saw him driving a yellow convertible. Here driving a yellow convertible is a participial phrase modifying the pronoun him. (See 63b.) The choice between the objective and the possessive case depends on your meaning; sometimes the distinction is subtle. We watched them dancing. We watched their dancing.

In the first sentence, the emphasis is on the people; we watched them, and they happened to be dancing. In the second sentence, the emphasis is on the dancing; we watched the dancing—a noun form modified by the possessive their. NOTE: Do not use the possessive if it creates an awkward effect.

Try to reword the sentence instead. AWKWARD

The president agreed to the applications’ being reviewed by a faculty committee.

REVISED

The president agreed that the applications could be reviewed by a faculty committee.

REVISED

The president agreed that a faculty committee could review the applications.

EXERCISE 24–1 Edit the following sentences to eliminate errors in pronoun case. If a sentence is correct, write “correct” after it. Answers to lettered sentences appear in the back of the book. Example: Grandfather cuts down trees for neighbors much younger

IF

than him.

a. b. c. d.

?

Rick applied for the job even though he heard that other candidates were more experienced than he. The volleyball team could not believe that the coach was she. She appreciated him telling the truth in such a difficult situation. The director has asked you and I to draft a proposal for a new recycling plan.

273

274

24g

case


e.

Five close friends and myself rented a station wagon, packed it with food, and drove two hundred miles to Mardi Gras.

1.

The squawk of the brass horns nearly overwhelmed us oboe and bassoon players. Ushio, the last rock climber up the wall, tossed Teri and she the remaining pitons and carabiners. The programmer realized that her and the interface designers were creating an entirely new Web application. My desire to understand classical music was aided by me working as an usher at Symphony Hall. The shower of sinking bricks caused he and his diving partner to race away from the collapsing seawall.

2. 3. 4. 5.

EXERCISE 24–2 In the following paragraph, choose the correct pronoun in each set of parentheses. We may blame television for the number of products based on characters in children’s TV shows — from Big Bird to SpongeBob — but in fact merchandising that capitalizes on a character’s popularity started long before television. Raggedy Ann began as a child’s rag doll, and a few years later books about (she / her) and her brother, Raggedy Andy, were published. A cartoonist named Johnny Gruelle painted a cloth face on a family doll and applied for a patent in 1915. Later Gruelle began writing and illustrating stories about Raggedy Ann, and in 1918 (he / him) and a publisher teamed up to publish the books and sell the dolls. He was not the only one to try to sell products linked to children’s stories. Beatrix Potter published the first of many Peter Rabbit picture books in 1902, and no one was better than (she / her) at making a living from spin-offs. After Peter Rabbit and Benjamin Bunny became popular, Potter began putting pictures of (they / them) and their little animal friends on merchandise. Potter had fans all over the world, and she understood (them / their) wanting to see Peter Rabbit not only in books but also on teapots and plates and lamps and other furnishings for the nursery. Potter and Gruelle, like countless others before and since, knew that entertaining children could be a profitable business. hackerhandbooks.com/bedhandbook > Grammar exercises > Grammatical sentences > E-ex 24–3 and 24–4 > E-ex 25–3 and 25–4 (pronoun review)

who vs. whom

25

case

25a

Distinguish between who and whom.

The choice between who and whom (or whoever and whomever) occurs primarily in subordinate clauses and in questions. Who and whoever, subjective-case pronouns, are used for subjects and subject complements. Whom and whomever, objectivecase pronouns, are used for objects. (See 25a and 25b.) An exception to this general rule occurs when the pronoun functions as the subject of an infinitive (see 25c). See also 24f. Consult the chart on page 278 for a summary of the trouble spots with who and whom.

Grammar checkers catch misuses of who and whom (or whoever and whomever) only about half the time. Pay special attention to sentences that include who or whom as you edit your writing.

25a In subordinate clauses, use who and whoever for subjects and subject complements, whom and whomever for all objects. When who and whom (or whoever and whomever) introduce subordinate clauses, their case is determined by their function within the clause they introduce. To choose the correct pronoun, you must isolate the subordinate clause and then decide how the pronoun functions within it. (See “subordinate clauses,” 63e.) In the following two examples, the pronouns who and whoever function as the subjects of the clauses they introduce.

0h

XIP

First prize goes to the runner whom earns the most points.

?

The subordinate clause is who earns the most points. The verb of the clause is earns, and its subject is who.

275

25a

276

0

case

who vs. whom

Maya Angelou’s I Know Why the Caged Bird Sings should be

XIPFWFS

read by whomever is interested in the effects of racial

?

prejudice on children. The writer selected the pronoun whomever, thinking that it was the object of the preposition by. However, the object of the preposition is the entire subordinate clause whoever is interested in the effects of racial prejudice on children. The verb of the clause is is, and the subject of the verb is whoever.

Who occasionally functions as a subject complement in a subordinate clause. Subject complements occur with linking verbs (usually be, am, is, are, was, were, being, and been). When who is a subject complement, it appears in inverted order, before the subject and verb. (See 62b.) 0

From your social security number, anyone can find out

XIP

whom you are.

? The subordinate clause is who you are. Its subject is you, and its subject complement is who.

When functioning as an object in a subordinate clause, whom (or whomever) also appears out of order, before the subject and verb. To choose the correct pronoun, you can mentally restructure the clause.

XIPN

0

You will work with our senior traders, who you will meet later.

?

The subordinate clause is whom you will meet later. The subject of the clause is you and the verb is will meet. Whom is the direct object of the verb. The correct choice becomes clear if you mentally restructure the clause: you will meet whom.

When functioning as the object of a preposition in a subordinate clause, whom is often separated from its preposition.

who vs. whomÊÊV>ÕÃiÃÊ UÊ who vs. whom in questions

case

25b

XIPN

0

The tutor who I was assigned to was very supportive.

?

Whom is the object of the preposition to. In this sentence, the writer might choose to drop whom: The tutor I was assigned to was very supportive.

NOTE: Inserted expressions such as they know, I think, and she

says should be ignored in determining whether to use who or whom. 0

The speech pathologist reported a particularly difficult

XIP

session with a stroke patient whom she knew was suffering from aphasia.

?

Who is the subject of was suffering, not the object of knew.

25b In questions, use who and whoever for subjects, whom and whomever for all objects. When who and whom (or whoever and whomever) are used to open questions, their case is determined by their function within the question. In the following example, who functions as the subject of the question.

0h

8IP

Whom was responsible for creating that computer virus?

? Who is the subject of the verb was. When whom functions as the object of a verb or the object of a preposition in a question, it appears out of normal order. To choose the correct pronoun, you can mentally restructure the question.

0h

8IPN

Who did the Democratic Party nominate in 2004?

? Whom is the direct object of the verb did nominate. This becomes clear if you restructure the question: The Democratic Party did nominate whom in 2004?

277

25c

278

case

who vs. whom

Checking for problems with who and whom In subordinate clauses (25a) Isolate the subordinate clause. Then read its subject, verb, and any objects, restructuring the clause if necessary. Some writers find it helpful to substitute he for who and him for whom. Samuels hoped to become the business partner of (whoever/ whomever) found the treasure. TEST: . . . whoever found the treasure. [ . . . he found the

treasure.] Ada always seemed to be bestowing a favor on (whoever/ whomever) she worked for. TEST: . . . she worked for whomever. [ . . . she worked for him.]

In questions (25b) Read the subject, verb, and any objects, rearranging the sentence structure if necessary. (Who/Whom) conferred with Roosevelt and Stalin at Yalta in 1945? TEST: Who conferred . . . ?

(Who/Whom) did the committee nominate? TEST: The committee did nominate whom?

0h

8IPN

Who did you enter into the contract with?

? Whom is the object of the preposition with, as is clear if you recast the question: You did enter into the contract with whom?

25c Use whom for subjects or objects of infinitives. An infinitive is the word to followed by the base form of a verb. (See 63b.) Subjects of infinitives are an exception to the rule that subjects must be in the subjective case. The subject of an infinitive must be in the objective case. Objects of infinitives also are in the objective case.

using who and ÜÊ UÊ whom with infinitive (to see)

case

25c

XIPN

0h

When it comes to money, I know who to believe.

?

The infinitive phrase whom to believe is the direct object of the verb know, and whom is the subject of the infinitive to believe.

NOTE: In spoken English, who is frequently used when the

correct whom sounds too stuffy. Even educated speakers are likely to say Who [not Whom] did Joe replace? Although some readers will accept such constructions in informal written English, it is safer to use whom in formal English: Whom did Joe replace? EXERCISE 25–1 Edit the following sentences to eliminate errors in the use of who and whom (or whoever and whomever). If a sentence is correct, write “correct” after it. Answers to lettered sentences appear in the back of the book. Example:

XIPN

What is the address of the artist who Antonio hired?

a. b. c. d. e. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

?

The roundtable featured scholars who I had never heard of. Arriving late for rehearsal, we had no idea who was supposed to dance with whom. Whom did you support for student government president? Daniel always gives a holiday donation to whomever needs it. So many singers came to the audition that Natalia had trouble deciding who to select for the choir. My cousin Sylvie, who I am teaching to fly a kite, watches us every time we compete. Who decided to research the history of Hungarians in New Brunswick? According to Greek myth, the Sphinx devoured those who could not answer her riddles. The people who ordered their medications from Canada were retirees whom don’t have health insurance. Who did the committee select?

hackerhandbooks.com/bedhandbook > Grammar exercises > Grammatical sentences > E-ex 25–2 > E-ex 25–3 and 25–4 (pronoun review)

279

280

26 26

adj/adv

Adjectives and adverbs

Choose adjectives and adverbs with care.

Adjectives modify nouns or pronouns. They usually come before the word they modify; occasionally they function as complements following the word they modify. Adverbs modify verbs, adjectives, or other adverbs. (See 61d and 61e.) Many adverbs are formed by adding -ly to adjectives (normal, normally; smooth, smoothly). But don’t assume that all words ending in -ly are adverbs or that all adverbs end in -ly. Some adjectives end in -ly (lovely, friendly), and some adverbs don’t (always, here, there). When in doubt, consult a dictionary.

Placement of adjectives and adverbs can be a tricky matter for multilingual writers. See 30f and 30h.

26a Use adjectives to modify nouns. Adjectives ordinarily precede the nouns they modify. But they can also function as subject complements or object complements, following the nouns they modify.

In English, adjectives are not pluralized to agree with the words they modify: The red [not reds] roses were a surprise.

Subject complements A subject complement follows a linking verb and completes the meaning of the subject. (See 62b.) When an adjective functions as a subject complement, it describes the subject. Justice is blind.

>ìVÌÛiÃÊ>`Ê>`ÛiÀLÃÊ UÊ ìÃVÀL}Ê ÕÃÊ UÊ >ìVÌÛiÃÊ>vÌiÀÊÛiÀLÃÊÀÊLiVÌÃ

adj/adv

26a

Problems can arise with verbs such as smell, taste, look, and feel, which sometimes, but not always, function as linking verbs. If the word following one of these verbs describes the subject, use an adjective; if the word following the verb modifies the verb, use an adverb. ADJECTIVE

The detective looked cautious.

ADVERB

The detective looked cautiously for fingerprints.

The adjective cautious describes the detective; the adverb cautiously modifies the verb looked. Linking verbs suggest states of being, not actions. Notice, for example, the different meanings of looked in the preceding examples. To look cautious suggests the state of being cautious; to look cautiously is to perform an action in a cautious way.

0h

TXFFU

The lilacs in our backyard smell especially sweetly this year.

?

The verb smell suggests a state of being, not an action. Therefore, it should be followed by an adjective, not an adverb.

0h

HPPE

The drawings looked well after the architect made a few changes.

?

The verb looked is a linking verb suggesting a state of being, not an action. The adjective good is appropriate following the linking verb to describe drawings. (See also 26c.)

Object complements An object complement follows a direct object and completes its meaning. (See 62b.) When an adjective functions as an object complement, it describes the direct object. Sorrow makes us wise.

Object complements occur with verbs such as call, consider, create, find, keep, and make. When a modifier follows the

281

26b

282

adj/adv


direct object of one of these verbs, use an adjective to describe the direct object; use an adverb to modify the verb. ADJECTIVE

The referee called the plays perfect.

ADVERB

The referee called the plays perfectly.

The first sentence means that the referee considered the plays to be perfect; the second means that the referee did an excellent job of calling the plays. 0h

In terms of sharpness, Ray considers cheddar and Swiss

FRVBM

equally.

?The adjective equal is an object complement describing the direct object cheddar and Swiss.

Grammar checkers sometimes flag problems with adjectives and adverbs: some misuses of bad or badly and good or well; some double comparisons, such as more meaner; some absolute comparisons, such as most unique; and some double negatives, such as can’t hardly. However, the programs miss more problems than they find.

26b Use adverbs to modify verbs, adjectives, and other adverbs. When adverbs modify verbs (or verbals), they nearly always answer the question When? Where? How? Why? Under what conditions? How often? or To what degree? When adverbs modify adjectives or other adverbs, they usually qualify or intensify the meaning of the word they modify. (See 61e.) Adjectives are often used incorrectly in place of adverbs in casual or nonstandard speech.

0h

QFSGFDUMZ

The transportation arrangement worked out perfect for everyone.

?

>ìVÌÛiÃÊ>vÌiÀÊLiVÌÃÊ UÊ ÜiÊÌÊÕÃiÊ>`ÛiÀLÃÊUÊ good vs. wellÊ UÊ bad vs. badly

0h

adj/adv

26c

TNPPUIMZ

The manager must see that the office runs smooth and

?

FG±DJFOUMZ

efficient.

? The adverb perfectly modifies the verb worked out; the adverbs smoothly and efficiently modify the verb runs. 0

The chance of recovering any property lost in the fire looks

SFBMMZ

real slim.

? Only adverbs can modify adjectives or other adverbs. Really intensifies the meaning of the adjective slim.

26c Distinguish between good and well, bad and badly. Good is an adjective ( good performance). Well is an adverb when it modifies a verb (speak well). The use of the adjective good in place of the adverb well to modify a verb is nonstandard and especially common in casual speech.

0h

XFMM

We were glad that Sanya had done good on the CPA exam.

?

The adverb well modifies the verb had done.

Confusion can arise because well is an adjective when it modifies a noun or pronoun and means “healthy” or “satisfactory” (The babies were well and warm).

0h

XFMM

Adrienne did not feel good, but she made her presentation anyway.

?

As an adjective following the linking verb did feel, well describes Adrienne’s health.

Bad is always an adjective and should be used to describe a noun; badly is always an adverb and should be used to modify a verb. The adverb badly is often used inappropriately to describe a noun, especially following a linking verb.

283

26d

284

0h

adj/adv


CBE

The sisters felt badly when they realized they had left their

?

brother out of the planning. The adjective bad is used after the linking verb felt to describe the noun sisters.

26d Use comparatives and superlatives with care. Most adjectives and adverbs have three forms: the positive, the comparative, and the superlative. POSITIVE

COMPARATIVE

SUPERLATIVE

soft fast careful bad good

softer faster more careful worse better

softest fastest most careful worst best

Comparative versus superlative Use the comparative to compare two things, the superlative to compare three or more.

CFUUFS

0h

Which of these two low-carb drinks is best?

0h

Though Shaw and Jackson are impressive, Hobbs is the

?

NPTU

more qualified of the three candidates running for mayor.

? Forming comparatives and superlatives To form comparatives and superlatives of most one- and twosyllable adjectives, use the endings -er and -est: smooth, smoother, smoothest; easy, easier, easiest. With longer adjectives, use more and most (or less and least for downward comparisons): exciting, more exciting, most exciting; helpful, less helpful, least helpful.

more vs.ÊÃÌÊ UÊ iÀÊvs. -est formsÊ UÊ unique, perfect, round, etc.

adj/adv

26d

Some one-syllable adverbs take the endings -er and -est (fast, faster, fastest), but longer adverbs and all of those ending in -ly form the comparative and superlative with more and most (or less and least). The comparative and superlative forms of some adjectives and adverbs are irregular: good, better, best; well, better, best; bad, worse, worst; badly, worse, worst.

NPTUUBMFOUFE

0h

The Kirov is the talentedest ballet company we have seen.

0h

According to our projections, sales at local businesses will

?

XPSTF

be worser than those at the chain stores this winter.

? Double comparatives or superlatives Do not use double comparatives or superlatives. When you have added -er or -est to an adjective or adverb, do not also use more or most (or less or least).

0h

Of all her family, Julia is the most happiest about the move.

0h

All the polls indicated that Gore was more likelier to win

MJLFMZ

?

than Bush.

Absolute concepts Avoid expressions such as more straight, less perfect, very round, and most unique. Either something is unique or it isn’t. It is illogical to suggest that absolute concepts come in degrees.

VOVTVBM

0h

That is the most unique wedding gown I have ever seen.

0h

The painting would have been even more priceless had it

? been signed.

WBMVBCMF

?

285

26e

286

adj/adv


26e Avoid double negatives. Standard English allows two negatives only if a positive meaning is intended: The orchestra was not unhappy with its performance (meaning that the orchestra was happy). Using a double negative to emphasize a negative meaning is nonstandard. Negative modifiers such as never, no, and not should not be paired with other negative modifiers or with negative words such as neither, none, no one, nobody, and nothing.

0h

BOZUIJOH

Management is not doing nothing to see that the trash is picked up.

?

The double negative not . . . nothing is nonstandard.

The modifiers hardly, barely, and scarcely are considered negatives in standard English, so they should not be used with negatives such as not, no one, or never.

0h

DBO

Maxine is so weak that she can’t hardly climb stairs.

? EXERCISE 26–1 Edit the following sentences to eliminate errors in the use of adjectives and adverbs. If a sentence is correct, write “correct” after it. Answers to lettered sentences appear in the back of the book. Example:

a. b. c.

XFMM

We weren’t surprised by how good the sidecar racing team

?

flowed through the tricky course. Did you do good on last week’s chemistry exam? With the budget deadline approaching, our office hasn’t hardly had time to handle routine correspondence. Some flowers smell surprisingly bad.

avoiding never, no, not with other negative words

adj/adv

26e

d. e.

The customer complained that he hadn’t been treated nice. Of all my relatives, Uncle Roberto is the most cleverest.

1. 2.

When you answer the phone, speak clear and courteous. Who was more upset about the loss? Was it the coach or the quarterback or the owner of the team? To a novice skateboarder, even the basic ollie seems real challenging. After checking how bad I had been hurt, my sister dialed 911. If the college’s Web page had been updated more regular, students would have learned about the new course offerings.

3. 4. 5.

EXERCISE 26–2 Edit the following passage to eliminate errors in the use of adjectives and adverbs. Doctors recommend that to give skin the most fullest protection from ultraviolet rays, people should use plenty of sunscreen, limit sun exposure, and wear protective clothing. The commonest sunscreens today are known as “broad spectrum” because they block out both UVA and UVB rays. These lotions don’t feel any differently on the skin from the old UVA-only types, but they work best at preventing premature aging and skin cancer. Many sunscreens claim to be waterproof, but they won’t hardly provide adequate coverage after extended periods of swimming or perspiring. To protect good, even waterproof sunscreens should be reapplied liberal and often. All areas of exposed skin, including ears, backs of hands, and tops of feet, need to be coated good to avoid burning or damage. Some people’s skin reacts bad to PABA, or para-aminobenzoic acid, so PABA-free (hypoallergenic) sunscreens are widely available. In addition to recommending sunscreen, doctors almost unanimously agree that people should stay out of the sun when rays are the most strongest — between 10:00 a.m. and 3:00 p.m. — and should limit time in the sun. They also suggest that people wear long-sleeved shirts, broad-brimmed hats, and long pants whenever possible. hackerhandbooks.com/bedhandbook > Grammar exercises > Grammatical sentences > E-ex 26–3 and 26–4

287

288

27 27

vb

Verb forms, tenses, and moods

Choose appropriate verb forms, tenses, and moods in standard English.

In speech, some people use verb forms and tenses that match a home dialect or variety of English. In writing, use standard English verb forms unless you are quoting nonstandard speech or using alternative forms for literary effect. (See 17d.) Except for the verb be, all verbs in English have five forms. The following list shows the five forms and provides a sample sentence in which each might appear. BASE FORM

Usually I (walk, ride).

PAST TENSE

Yesterday I (walked, rode).

PAST PARTICIPLE

I have (walked, ridden) many times before.

PRESENT PARTICIPLE

I am (walking, riding) right now.

-S FORM

He/she/it (walks, rides) regularly.

Both the past-tense and past-participle forms of regular verbs end in -ed (walked, walked). Irregular verbs form the past tense and past participle in other ways (rode, ridden). The verb be has eight forms instead of the usual five: be, am, is, are, was, were, being, been. Grammar checkers sometimes flag misused irregular verbs in sentences. But you cannot rely on grammar checkers to identify problems with irregular verbs — they miss about twice as many errors as they find.

27a Choose standard English forms of irregular verbs. For all regular verbs, the past-tense and past-participle forms are the same (ending in -ed or -d), so there is no danger of confusion. This is not true, however, for irregular verbs, such as the following.

ÃÌ>`>À`ÊÛiÀLÊvÀÃÊ UÊ ÛiÀLÃÊÜÌÊÀÀi}Õ>ÀÊ endings ( go, went, gone; see, saw, seen, etc.)

vb

BASE FORM

PAST TENSE

PAST PARTICIPLE

go break fly

went broke flew

gone broken flown

27a

The past-tense form always occurs alone, without a helping verb. It expresses action that occurred entirely in the past: I rode to work yesterday. I walked to work last Tuesday. The past participle is used with a helping verb. It forms the perfect tenses with has, have, or had; it forms the passive voice with be, am, is, are, was, were, being, or been. (See 61c for a complete list of helping verbs and 27f for a survey of tenses.) PAST TENSE

Last July, we went to Paris.

HELPING VERB + PAST PARTICIPLE

We have gone to Paris twice.

The list of common irregular verbs beginning on the next page will help you distinguish between the past tense and the past participle. Choose the past-participle form if the verb in your sentence requires a helping verb; choose the past-tense form if the verb does not require a helping verb. (See verb tenses in 27f.)

0h

TBX

Yesterday we seen a documentary about Isabel Allende.

?

The past-tense saw is required because there is no helping verb.

0h

TUPMFO

The truck was apparently stole while the driver ate lunch.

? 0h

GBMMFO

By Friday, the stock market had fell two hundred points.

?

Because of the helping verbs was and had, the past-participle forms are required: was stolen, had fallen.

When in doubt about the standard English forms of irregular verbs, consult the list on pages 290–92 or look up the base form of the verb in the dictionary, which also lists any irregular forms. (If no additional forms are listed in the dictionary, the verb is regular, not irregular.)

289

290

27a

vb


Common irregular verbs BASE FORM

PAST TENSE

PAST PARTICIPLE

arise awake be beat become begin bend bite blow break bring build burst buy catch choose cling come cost deal dig dive do drag draw dream drink drive eat fall fight find fly forget freeze get give go

arose awoke, awaked was, were beat became began bent bit blew broke brought built burst bought caught chose clung came cost dealt dug dived, dove did dragged drew dreamed, dreamt drank drove ate fell fought found flew forgot froze got gave went

arisen awaked, awoke, awoken been beaten, beat become begun bent bitten, bit blown broken brought built burst bought caught chosen clung come cost dealt dug dived done dragged drawn dreamed, dreamt drunk driven eaten fallen fought found flown forgotten, forgot frozen gotten, got given gone

verbs with irregular endings

vb

BASE FORM

PAST TENSE

PAST PARTICIPLE

grow hang (execute) hang (suspend) have hear hide hurt keep know lay (put) lead lend let (allow) lie (recline) lose make prove read ride ring rise (get up) run say see send set (place) shake shoot shrink sing sink sit (be seated) slay sleep speak spin spring stand steal sting

grew hanged hung had heard hid hurt kept knew laid led lent let lay lost made proved read rode rang rose ran said saw sent set shook shot shrank sang sank sat slew slept spoke spun sprang stood stole stung

grown hanged hung had heard hidden hurt kept known laid led lent let lain lost made proved, proven read ridden rung risen run said seen sent set shaken shot shrunk sung sunk sat slain slept spoken spun sprung stood stolen stung

27a

291

27b

292

vb


BASE FORM

PAST TENSE

PAST PARTICIPLE

strike swear swim swing take teach throw wake wear wring write

struck swore swam swung took taught threw woke, waked wore wrung wrote

struck, stricken sworn swum swung taken taught thrown waked, woken worn wrung written

27b Distinguish among the forms of lie and lay. Writers and speakers frequently confuse the various forms of lie (meaning “to recline or rest on a surface”) and lay (meaning “to put or place something”). Lie is an intransitive verb; it does not take a direct object: The tax forms lie on the table. The verb lay is transitive; it takes a direct object: Please lay the tax forms on the table. (See 62b.) In addition to confusing the meaning of lie and lay, writers and speakers are often unfamiliar with the standard English forms of these verbs.

0h

BASE FORM

PAST TENSE

PAST PARTICIPLE

PRESENT PARTICIPLE

lie (“recline”) lay (“put”)

lay laid

lain laid

lying laying

MBZ

Sue was so exhausted that she laid down for a nap.

?

The past-tense form of lie (“to recline”) is lay.

0h

MBJO

The patient had laid in an uncomfortable position all night.

?

The past-participle form of lie (“to recline”) is lain. If the correct English seems too stilted, recast the sentence: The patient had been lying in an uncomfortable position all night.

ÛiÀLÃÊÜÌÊÀÀi}Õ>ÀÊi`}ÃÊ UÊ lie vs. lay

0h

vb

27b

MBJE

The prosecutor lay the pistol on a table close to the jurors.

?

The past-tense form of lay (“to place”) is laid.

0h

MZJOH

Letters dating from the Civil War were laying in the corner of the chest.

?

The present participle of lie (“to rest on a surface”) is lying.

EXERCISE 27–1 Edit the following sentences to eliminate problems with irregular verbs. If a sentence is correct, write “correct” after it. Answers to lettered sentences appear in the back of the book. Example:

a. b.

c. d.

e. 1. 2. 3.

4. 5.

TBX

The ranger seenthe forest fire ten miles away.

?

When I get the urge to exercise, I lay down until it passes. Grandmother had drove our new hybrid to the sunrise church service on Savage Mountain, so we were left with the station wagon. A pile of dirty rags was laying at the bottom of the stairs. How did the computer know that the gamer had went from the room with the blue ogre to the hall where the gold was heaped? Abraham Lincoln took good care of his legal clients; the contracts he drew for the Illinois Central Railroad could never be broke. The burglar must have gone immediately upstairs, grabbed what looked good, and took off. Have you ever dreamed that you were falling from a cliff or flying through the air? Tomás reached for the pen, signed the title page of his novel, and then laid the book on the table for the first customer in line. In her junior year, Cindy run the 440-yard dash in 51.1 seconds. Larry claimed that he had drank too much soda, but Esther suspected the truth.

hackerhandbooks.com/bedhandbook > Grammar exercises > Grammatical sentences > E-ex 27–4 and 27–5

293

27c

294

vb


27c Use -s (or -es) endings on present-tense verbs that have third-person singular subjects. All singular nouns (child, tree) and the pronouns he, she, and it are third-person singular; indefinite pronouns such as everyone and neither are also third-person singular. When the subject of a sentence is third-person singular, its verb takes an -s or -es ending in the present tense. (See also 21.) SINGULAR

I you he/she/it child everyone

FIRST PERSON SECOND PERSON THIRD PERSON

0h

0h

we you they parents

know know know know

ESJWFT

My neighbor drive to Marco Island every weekend in the summer.

PLURAL

know know knows knows knows

? UVSOT

EJTTPMWFT

FBUT

?

?

?

Sulfur dioxide turn leaves yellow, dissolve marble, and eat away iron and steel.

The subjects neighbor and sulfur dioxide are third-person singular, so the verbs must end in -s.

TIP: Do not add the -s ending to the verb if the subject is not third-person singular. The writers of the following sentences, knowing they sometimes dropped -s endings from verbs, overcorrected by adding the endings where they don’t belong. 0h

I prepare s program specifications and logic diagrams for every installation. The writer mistakenly concluded that the -s ending belongs on present-tense verbs used with all singular subjects, not just thirdperson singular subjects. The pronoun I is first-person singular, so its verb does not require the -s.

using the -s (-es®ÊÛiÀLÊvÀÊ UÊ Ã}Õ>ÀÊÛÃ°Ê«ÕÀ>Ê ÃÕLiVÌÃÊ UÊ has vs. haveÊ UÊ does vs. do 0h

27c

vb

The dirt floors require s continual sweeping. The writer mistakenly thought that the verb needed an -s ending because of the plural subject. But the -s ending is used only on present-tense verbs with third-person singular subjects.

Has versus have In the present tense, use has with third-person singular subjects; all other subjects require have. SINGULAR FIRST PERSON SECOND PERSON THIRD PERSON

0h

PLURAL

I you

have have

we you

have have

he/she/it

has

they

have

IBT

This respected musician almost always have a message to

?

convey in his work.

0h

IBT

The retirement program have finally been established.

?

The subjects musician and program are third-person singular, so the verb should be has in each case.

TIP: Do not use has if the subject is not third-person singular.

0h

0h

IBWF

My law classes has helped me understand contracts.

IBWF

?

I has much to be thankful for.

?

The subjects of these sentences— classes and I — are third-person plural and first-person singular, so standard English requires have. Has is used only with third-person singular subjects.

Does versus do and doesn’t versus don’t In the present tense, use does and doesn’t with third-person singular subjects; all other subjects require do and don’t.

295

27c

296

vb

Verb forms, tenses, and moods SINGULAR

FIRST PERSON SECOND PERSON THIRD PERSON

I you he/she/it

PLURAL

do/don’t do/don’t does/doesn’t

we you they

do/don’t do/don’t do/don’t

EPFTO©U

0h

Grandfather really don’t have a place to call home.

0h

Do she know the correct procedure for setting up the

%PFT

?

?experiment? Grandfather and she are third-person singular, so the verbs should be doesn’t and Does.

Am, is, and are; was and were The verb be has three forms in the present tense (am, is, are) and two in the past tense (was, were). SINGULAR FIRST PERSON SECOND PERSON THIRD PERSON

0h

I you he/she/it

PLURAL

am/was are/were is/was

we you they

are/were are/were are/were

XBT

Judy wanted to borrow Tim’s notes, but she were too shy to

?

ask for them.

The subject she is third-person singular, so the verb should be was.

0h

XFSF

Did you think you was going to drown?

?

The subject you is second-person singular, so the verb should be were.

Grammar checkers are fairly good at catching missing -s endings on verbs and some misused -s forms of the verb. Also see the grammar checker advice on page 244.

Ã}Õ>ÀÊÛÃ°Ê«ÕÀ>ÊÃÕLiVÌÃÊ UÊ am vs. is and areÊ UÊ was vs. wereÊ UÊ -edÊi`}Ê UÊ ÌiÃiÃ

vb

27d

27d Do not omit -ed endings on verbs. Speakers who do not fully pronounce -ed endings sometimes omit them unintentionally in writing. Failure to pronounce -ed endings is common in many dialects and in informal speech even in standard English. In the following frequently used words and phrases, for example, the -ed ending is not always fully pronounced. advised asked concerned

developed fixed frightened

prejudiced pronounced stereotyped

supposed to used to

When a verb is regular, both the past tense and the past participle are formed by adding -ed (or -d) to the base form of the verb.

Past tense Use an -ed or -d ending to express the past tense of regular verbs. The past tense is used when the action occurred entirely in the past.

0h

±YFE

Over the weekend, Ed fix his brother’s skateboard and tuned

?

up his mother’s 1991 Fiat.

0h

BEWJTFE

Last summer, my counselor advise me to ask my chemistry instructor for help.

?

Past participles Past participles are used in three ways: (1) following have, has, or had to form one of the perfect tenses; (2) following be, am, is, are, was, were, being, or been to form the passive voice; and (3) as adjectives modifying nouns or pronouns. The perfect tenses are listed on page 301, and the passive voice is discussed in 8a. For a discussion of participles as adjectives, see 63b.

297

27e

298

0h

vb


BTLFE

Robin has ask for more housing staff for next year.

?

Has asked is present perfect tense (have or has followed by a past participle). 0h

Though it is not a new phenomenon, domestic violence is

QVCMJDJ[FE

now publicize more than ever.

?

Is publicized is a verb in the passive voice (a form of be followed by a past participle). 0h

All aerobics classes end in a cool-down period to stretch

UJHIUFOFE

tighten muscles.

?The past participle tightened functions as an adjective modifying the noun muscles.

Grammar checkers flag missing -ed endings on verbs more often than not. Unfortunately, they often suggest an -ing ending (passing) rather than the missing -ed ending ( passed ), when they encounter a sentence like this: The law was pass last week.

27e Do not omit needed verbs. Although standard English allows some linking verbs and helping verbs to be contracted in informal contexts, it does not allow them to be omitted. Linking verbs, used to link subjects to subject complements, are frequently a form of be: be, am, is, are, was, were, being, been. (See 62b.) Some of these forms may be contracted (I’m, she’s, we’re, you’re, they’re), but they should not be omitted altogether.

0h

BSF

When we quiet in the evening, we can hear crickets in the woods.

?

ÃÃ}ÊÛiÀLÃÊ UÊ }ÊÛiÀLÃÊis, were)

vb

27e

JT

Sherman Alexie a Native American author whose stories

0

?

have been made into a film.

Helping verbs, used with main verbs, include forms of be, do, and have and the modal verbs can, will, shall, could, would, should, may, might, and must. (See 61c.) Some helping verbs may be contracted (he’s leaving, we’ll celebrate, they’ve been told), but they should not be omitted altogether.

IBWF

0

We been in Chicago since last Thursday.

0

Do you know someone who be good for the job?

?

XPVME

? Some languages do not require a linking verb between a subject and its complement. English, however, requires a verb in every sentence. See 30a.

BN

0

Every night, I read a short book to my daughter. When I too busy, my husband reads to her.

?

Grammar checkers flag omitted verbs about half the time — but they often miss needed helping verbs. Proofread your work carefully to avoid leaving out helping verbs.

EXERCISE 27–2 Edit the following sentences to eliminate problems with -s and -ed verb forms and with omitted verbs. If a sentence is correct, write “correct” after it. Answers to lettered sentences appear in the back of the book. Example:

DPWFST

The Pell Grant sometimes cover the student’s full tuition.

a.

? The glass sculptures of the Swan Boats was prominent in the brightly lit lobby.

299

27f

300 b. c. d. e. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

vb


Visitors to the glass museum were not suppose to touch the exhibits. Our church has all the latest technology, even a close-circuit television. Christos didn’t know about Marlo’s promotion because he never listens. He always talking. Most psychologists agree that no one performs well under stress. Have there ever been a time in your life when you were too depressed to get out of bed? My days in this department have taught me to do what I’m told without asking questions. We have change our plan and are waiting out the storm before leaving. Winter training for search-and-rescue divers consist of building up a tolerance to icy water temperatures. How would you feel if a love one had been a victim of a crime like this?

hackerhandbooks.com/bedhandbook > Grammar exercises > Grammatical sentences > E-ex 27–6 and 27–7

27f Choose the appropriate verb tense. Tenses indicate the time of an action in relation to the time of the speaking or writing about that action. The most common problem with tenses — shifting confusingly from one tense to another — is discussed in section 13. Other problems with tenses are detailed in this section, after the following survey of tenses.

Grammar checkers do not flag most problems with tense discussed in this section: special uses of the present tense, use of past versus past perfect tense, and sequence of tenses.

Survey of tenses Tenses are classified as present, past, and future, with simple, perfect, and progressive forms for each.

ÛiÀLÊÌiÃiÃÊ UÊ Ã«iÊÊwalk ®Ê UÊ «iÀviVÌÊ ( had walked ®Ê UÊ «À}ÀiÃÃÛiÊÊam walking )

vb

27f

Simple tenses The simple tenses indicate relatively simple time relations. The simple present tense is used primarily for actions occurring at the same time they are being discussed or for actions occurring regularly. The simple past tense is used for actions completed in the past. The simple future tense is used for actions that will occur in the future. In the following table, the simple tenses are given for the regular verb walk, the irregular verb ride, and the highly irregular verb be. SIMPLE PRESENT SINGULAR

I you he/she/it

PLURAL

walk, ride, am walk, ride, are walks, rides, is

we you they

SIMPLE PAST SINGULAR

I you he/she/it

walk, ride, are walk, ride, are walk, ride, are

PLURAL

walked, rode, was walked, rode, were walked, rode, was

we you they

walked, rode, were walked, rode, were walked, rode, were

SIMPLE FUTURE

I, you, he/she/it, we, they

will walk, ride, be

Perfect tenses More complex time relations are indicated by the perfect tenses. A verb in one of the perfect tenses (a form of have plus the past participle) expresses an action that was or will be completed at the time of another action. PRESENT PERFECT

I, you, we, they he/she/it

have walked, ridden, been has walked, ridden, been

PAST PERFECT


had walked, ridden, been

FUTURE PERFECT


will have walked, ridden, been

301

302

27f

vb


Progressive forms The simple and perfect tenses have progressive forms that describe actions in progress. A progressive verb consists of a form of be followed by a present participle. The progressive forms are not normally used with certain verbs, such as believe, know, hear, seem, and think. PRESENT PROGRESSIVE

I he/she/it you, we, they

am walking, riding, being is walking, riding, being are walking, riding, being

PAST PROGRESSIVE

I, he/she/it you, we, they

was walking, riding, being were walking, riding, being

FUTURE PROGRESSIVE


will be walking, riding, being

PRESENT PERFECT PROGRESSIVE

I, you, we, they he/she/it

have been walking, riding, being has been walking, riding, being

PAST PERFECT PROGRESSIVE


had been walking, riding, being

FUTURE PERFECT PROGRESSIVE


will have been walking, riding, being

See 28a for more specific examples of verb tenses that can be challenging for multilingual writers.

Special uses of the present tense Use the present tense when expressing general truths, when writing about literature, and when quoting, summarizing, or paraphrasing an author’s views. General truths or scientific principles should appear in the present tense unless such principles have been disproved.

ÛiÀLÊÌiÃiÃÊ UÊ writing about literature and scientific facts

0h

vb

27f

303

SFWPMWFT

Galileo taught that the earth revolved around the sun.

?

Because Galileo’s teaching has not been discredited, the verb should be in the present tense. The following sentence, however, is acceptable: Ptolemy taught that the sun revolved around the earth.

When writing about a work of literature, you may be tempted to use the past tense. The convention, however, is to describe fictional events in the present tense.

0h

SFBDIFT

In Masuji Ibuse’s Black Rain, a child reached for a

?

pomegranate in his mother’s garden, and a moment later

JT

he was dead, killed by the blast of the atomic bomb.

?

When you are quoting, summarizing, or paraphrasing the author of a nonliterary work, use present-tense verbs such as writes, reports, asserts, and so on to introduce the source. This convention is usually followed even when the author is dead (unless a date or the context specifies the time of writing).

0h

BSHVFT

Dr. Jerome Groopman argued that doctors are

? “susceptible to the subtle and not so subtle efforts of the pharmaceutical industry to sculpt our thinking” (9). In MLA style, signal phrases are written in the present tense, not the past tense. (See also 52b.)

APA NOTE: When you are documenting a paper with the APA (American Psychological Association) style of in-text citations, use past tense verbs such as reported or demonstrated or present perfect verbs such as has reported or has demonstrated to introduce the source. E. Wilson (1994) reported that positive reinforcement alone was a less effective teaching technique than a mixture of positive reinforcement and constructive criticism.


27f

304

vb


The past perfect tense The past perfect tense consists of a past participle preceded by had (had worked, had gone). This tense is used for an action already completed by the time of another past action or for an action already completed at some specific past time. Everyone had spoken by the time I arrived. I pleaded my case, but Paula had made up her mind.

Writers sometimes use the simple past tense when they should use the past perfect. 0h

We built our cabin high on a pine knoll, forty feet above an

IBECFFO

abandoned quarry that was flooded in 1920 to create a lake.

?

The building of the cabin and the flooding of the quarry both occurred in the past, but the flooding was completed before the time of building.

0h

IBE

By the time dinner was served, the guest of honor left.

?

The past perfect tense is needed because the action of leaving was already completed at a specific past time (when dinner was served).

Some writers tend to overuse the past perfect tense. Do not use the past perfect if two past actions occurred at the same time.

0h

XSPUF

When Ernest Hemingway lived in Cuba, he had written For Whom the Bell Tolls.

?

Sequence of tenses with infinitives and participles An infinitive is the base form of a verb preceded by to. (See 63b.) Use the present infinitive to show action at the same time as or later than the action of the verb in the sentence.

past perfect (had done®Ê UÊ ÌiÃiÃÊÜÌÊwÌÛiÃÊ (to see®Ê UÊ ÌiÃiÃÊÜÌÊ«>ÀÌV«iÃÊÊgiven)

0h

vb

27g

SBJTF

The club had hoped to have raised a thousand dollars by

?

April 1.

The action expressed in the infinitive (to raise) occurred later than the action of the sentence’s verb (had hoped).

Use the perfect form of an infinitive (to have followed by the past participle) for an action occurring earlier than that of the verb in the sentence.

0h

IBWFKPJOFE

Dan would like to join the navy, but he did not pass the physical.

?

The liking occurs in the present; the joining would have occurred in the past.

Like the tense of an infinitive, the tense of a participle is governed by the tense of the sentence’s verb. Use the present participle (ending in -ing) for an action occurring at the same time as that of the sentence’s verb. Hiking the Appalachian Trail in early spring, we spotted many wildflowers.

Use the past participle (such as given or helped) or the present perfect participle (having plus the past participle) for an action occurring before that of the verb. Discovered off the coast of Florida, the Spanish galleon yielded many treasures. Having worked her way through college, Lee graduated debt-free.

27g Use the subjunctive mood in the few contexts that require it. There are three moods in English: the indicative, used for facts, opinions, and questions; the imperative, used for orders or advice; and the subjunctive, used in certain contexts to express

305

27g

306

vb


wishes, requests, or conditions contrary to fact. For many writers, the subjunctive causes the most problems.

Forms of the subjunctive In the subjunctive mood, present-tense verbs do not change form to indicate the number and person of the subject (see 21). Instead, the subjunctive uses the base form of the verb (be, drive, employ) with all subjects. It is important that you be [not are] prepared for the interview. We asked that she drive [not drives] more slowly.

Also, in the subjunctive mood, there is only one pasttense form of be: were (never was). If I were [not was] you, I’d proceed more cautiously.

Uses of the subjunctive The subjunctive mood appears only in a few contexts: in contrary-to-fact clauses beginning with if or expressing a wish; in that clauses following verbs such as ask, insist, recommend, request, and suggest; and in certain set expressions. In contrary-to-fact clauses beginning with if When a subordinate clause beginning with if expresses a condition contrary to fact, use the subjunctive were in place of was.

XFSF

0h

If I was a member of Congress, I would vote for that bill.

0h

The astronomers would be able to see the moons of Jupiter

?

XFSF

tonight if the weather was clearer.

?

The verbs in these sentences express conditions that do not exist: The writer is not a member of Congress, and the weather is not clear.

Do not use the subjunctive mood in if clauses expressing conditions that exist or may exist. If Dana wins the contest, she will leave for Barcelona in June.

verbs with if, whenÊ UÊ VÌÀ>ÀÞÌv>VÌÊ UÊ ÜÃiÃÊ UÊ ÜÌÊÛiÀLÃÊÃÕVÊ>ÃÊask, insist

vb

27g

In contrary-to-fact clauses expressing a wish In formal English, use the subjunctive were in clauses expressing a wish or desire. While use of the indicative is common in informal speech, it is not appropriate in academic writing. INFORMAL

I wish that Dr. Vaughn was my professor.

FORMAL

I wish that Dr. Vaughn were my professor.

In that clauses following verbs such as ask, insist, request, and suggest Because requests have not yet become reality, they are expressed in the subjunctive mood.

CF

0h

Professor Moore insists that her students are on time.

±MF

0h

?

We recommend that Lambert files form 1050 soon.

? In certain set expressions The subjunctive mood, once more widely used, remains in certain set expressions: Be that as it may, as it were, far be it from me, and so on. Grammar checkers only sometimes flag problems with the subjunctive mood. What they catch is very spotty, so you must be alert to the correct uses of the subjunctive in your own writing.

EXERCISE 27–3 Edit the following sentences to eliminate errors in verb tense or mood. If a sentence is correct, write “correct” after it. Answers to lettered sentences appear in the back of the book. Example:

IBECFFO

After the path was plowed, we were able to walk through

a. b.

the park.

?

The palace of Knossos in Crete is believed to have been destroyed by fire around 1375 BCE. Watson and Crick discovered the mechanism that controlled inheritance in all life: the workings of the DNA molecule.

307

27g

308 c.

d. e.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

vb


When city planners proposed rezoning the waterfront, did they know that the mayor promised to curb development in that neighborhood? Tonight’s concert begins at 9:30. If it were earlier, I’d consider going. As soon as my aunt applied for the position of pastor, the post was filled by an inexperienced seminary graduate who had been so hastily snatched that his mortarboard was still in midair. Don Quixote, in Cervantes’s novel, was an idealist ill suited for life in the real world. Visiting the technology museum inspired the high school seniors and had reminded them that science could be fun. I would like to have been on the Mayflower but not to have experienced the first winter. When the director yelled “Action!” I forgot my lines, even though I practiced my part every waking hour for three days. If midday naps were a regular practice in American workplaces, employees would be far more productive.

hackerhandbooks.com/bedhandbook > Grammar exercises > Grammar > E-ex 27–8 and 27–9

Part VI

Challenges for ESL and Multilingual Writers 28 29 30 31

Verbs 310 Articles 327 Sentence structure 337 Prepositions and idiomatic expressions 348

309

310

28

ESL

Verbs

Part VI of The Bedford Handbook is primarily for multilingual writers. You may find this section helpful if you learned English as a second language (ESL) or if you speak a language other than English with your friends and family. hackerhandbooks.com/bedhandbook > ESL help > Charts and study help > Sample student paper (draft and final) > Exercises > Links to online resources

28

Verbs

Both native and nonnative speakers of English encounter challenges with verbs. Section 28 focuses on specific challenges that multilingual writers sometimes face. You can find more help with verbs in other sections in the book: making subjects and verbs agree (21) using irregular verb forms (27a, 27b) leaving off verb endings (27c, 27d) choosing the correct verb tense (27f) avoiding inappropriate uses of the passive voice (8a)

28a Use the appropriate verb form and tense. This section offers a brief review of English verb forms and tenses.

Basic verb forms Every main verb in English has five forms, which are used to create all of the verb tenses in standard English. The chart at the top of page 311 shows these forms for the regular verb help and the irregular verbs give and be. See 27a for the forms of other common irregular verbs.

L>ÃVÊvÀÃÊ UÊ ÌiÃiÃÊ UÊ Ài}Õ>ÀÊÛiÀLÃÊ UÊ ÀÀi}Õ>ÀÊÛiÀLÃÊ UÊ >VÌÛiÊÛViÊ

ESL

28a

311

Basic verb forms

BASE FORM PAST TENSE PAST PARTICIPLE PRESENT PARTICIPLE -S FORM

REGULAR VERB HELP

IRREGULAR VERB GIVE

IRREGULAR VERB BE *

help helped helped i«}Ê helps

}Ûi }>Ûi }Ûi }Û} }ÛiÃ

be was, were been Li} is

*Be also has the forms am and are, which are used in the present tense.

Verb tenses Section 27f describes all the verb tenses in English, showing the forms of a regular verb, an irregular verb, and the verb be in each tense. The following chart provides more details about the tenses commonly used in the active voice in writing; the chart beginning on page 318 gives details about tenses commonly used in the passive voice.

Verb tenses commonly used in the active voice ÀÊìÃVÀ«ÌÃÊ>`ÊiÝ>«iÃÊvÊ>ÊÛiÀLÊÌiÃiÃ]ÊÃiiÊÓÇv°ÊÀÊÛiÀLÊÌiÃiÃÊ VÞÊÕÃi`ÊÊÌiÊ«>ÃÃÛiÊÛVi]ÊÃiiÊÌiÊV>ÀÌÊÊ«>}iÃÊÎ£nq£°

Simple tenses For general facts, states of being, habitual actions Simple present

Base form or -s form

UÊ }iiÀ>Êv>VÌÃ

i}iÊÃÌÕìÌÃÊvÌiÊstudyÊ>ÌiÊ>ÌÊ}Ì°

UÊ ÃÌ>ÌiÃÊvÊLi}

Water becomesÊÃÌi>Ê>ÌÊ£ää¨ÊViÌ}À>ì°

UÊ >LÌÕ>]ÊÀi«iÌÌÛiÊ actions

We donate to a different charity each year.

UÊ ÃVi`Õi`ÊvÕÌÕÀiÊiÛiÌÃ

The train arrives tomorrow at 6:30 p.m.

NOTE:ÊÀÊÕÃiÃÊvÊÌiÊ«ÀiÃiÌÊÌiÃiÊÊÜÀÌ}Ê>LÕÌÊÌiÀ>ÌÕÀi]ÊÃiiÊ

«>}iÊÎäÎ°Ê

6

28a

312

ESL

Verbs

Verb tenses commonly used in the active voice, continued Simple past

Base form + -ed or -d or irregular form

U completed actions at a specific time in the past

The storm destroyed their property. She drove ÌÊÌ>>ÊÌÀiiÊÞi>ÀÃÊ>}°

U facts or states of Li}ÊÊÌiÊ«>ÃÌ

When I wasÊÞÕ}]ÊÊÕÃÕ>ÞÊwalked to school with my sister.

Simple future

will + base form

U future actions, promises, or predictions

I will exercise tomorrow. The snowfall will beginÊ>ÀÕ`Ê`}Ì°

Simple progressive forms For continuing actions Present progressive

am, is, are + present participle

UÊ >VÌÃÊÊ«À}ÀiÃÃÊ>ÌÊ the present time, not VÌÕ}ÊìwÌiÞ

The students are taking an exam in Room 105. /iÊÛ>iÌÊis parking the car.

U future actions (with leave, go, come, move, etc.)

I am leavingÊÌÀÀÜÊÀ}°

Past progressive

was, were + present participle

UÊ >VÌÃÊÊ«À}ÀiÃÃÊ>ÌÊ a specific time in the past

They were swimming when the storm struck.

U was going to, were going to for past plans that did not happen

We were going toÊ`ÀÛiÊÌÊÀ`>ÊvÀÊÃ«À}Ê break, but the car broke down.

NOTE:Ê-iÊÛiÀLÃÊ>ÀiÊÌÊÀ>ÞÊÕÃi`ÊÊÌiÊ«À}ÀiÃÃÛi\Êappear, believe, belong, contain, have, hear, know, like, need, see, seem, taste, understand, and want.

0h I

XBOU

am wanting to see August Wilson’s Radio Golf.

?

6

ÌiÃiÃÊ UÊ >VÌÛiÊÛVi

ESL

28a

313

Perfect tenses For actions that happened or will happen before another time Present perfect

has, have + past participle

UÊ Ài«iÌÌÛiÊÀÊVÃÌ>ÌÊ >VÌÃÊÌ>ÌÊLi}>Ê in the past and continue to the present

I have loved cats since I was a child. Alicia has worked in Kenya for ten years.

U actions that happened at an unknown or unspecific time in the past

Stephen has visited Wales three times.

Past perfect

had + past participle

UÊ >VÌÃÊÌ>ÌÊLi}>Ê or occurred before another time in the past

She had just crossed the street when the run>Ü>ÞÊV>ÀÊVÀ>Ãi`ÊÌÊÌiÊLÕ`}°

NOTE: For more discussion of uses of the past perfect, see 27f. For uses of the past perfect in conditional sentences, see 28e.

Perfect progressive forms For continuous past actions before another time Present perfect progressive

has, have + been + present participle

U continuous actions Ì>ÌÊLi}>ÊÊÌiÊ«>ÃÌÊ and continue to the present

Yolanda has been tryingÊÌÊ}iÌÊ>ÊLÊÊ ÃÌ vÀÊwÛiÊÞi>ÀÃ°

Past perfect progressive

had + been + present participle

UÊ >VÌÃÊÌ>ÌÊLi}>Ê and continued in the past until some other past action

ÞÊÌiÊÌiÊÊÛi`ÊÌÊiÀ}>]ÊÊhad been supportingÊÞÃivÊvÀÊwÛiÊÞi>ÀÃ°

28b

314

ESL

Verbs

EXERCISE 28–1 Revise the following sentences to correct errors in verb forms and verb tenses. You may need to look at 27a for the correct form of some irregular verbs and at 27f for help with tenses. Answers to lettered sentences appear in the back of the book. Example:

a. b. c. d. e. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

CFHJOT

The meeting begin tonight at 7:30.

?

In the past, tobacco companies deny any connection between smoking and health problems. There is nothing in the world that TV has not touch on. I am wanting to register for a summer tutoring session. By the end of the year, the state will have test 139 birds for avian flu. The benefits of eating fruits and vegetables have been promoting by health care providers. By the time he was twelve years old, Mozart had compose an entire opera. A serious accident was happened at the corner of Main Street and First Avenue last night. My family has been gone to Sam’s restaurant ever since we moved to this neighborhood. I have ate Thai food only once before. The bear is appearing to be sedated.

hackerhandbooks.com/bedhandbook > Grammar exercises > ESL challenges > E-ex 28–5

28b Use the base form of the verb after a modal. The modal verbs are can, could, may, might, must, shall, should, will, and would. (Ought to is also considered a modal verb.) The modals are used with the base form of a verb to show certainty, necessity, or possibility. Modals and the verbs that follow them do not change form to indicate tense. For a summary of modals and their meanings, see the chart on pages 316–17. (See also 27e.)

MBVODI

0

The art museum will launches its fundraising campaign next month.

?

`>ÃÊ UÊ can, could, may, might, must, should, will, would

ESL

28b

The modal will must be followed by the base form launch, not the present tense launches.

TQFBL

0

The translator could spoke many languages, so the ambas-

?

sador hired her for the European tour. The modal could must be followed by the base form speak, not the past tense spoke.

TIP: Do not use to in front of a main verb that follows a modal. 0

Gina can to drive us home if we miss the last train.

For the use of modals in conditional sentences, see 28e. EXERCISE 28–2 Edit the following sentences to correct errors in the use of verb forms with modals. You may find it helpful to consult the chart on pages 316–17. If a sentence is correct, write “correct” after it. Answers to lettered sentences appear in the back of the book. Example: We should to order pizza for dinner. a. b. c. d. e. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

A major league pitcher can to throw a baseball more than ninetyfive miles per hour. The writing center tutor will helps you revise your essay. A reptile must adjusted its body temperature to its environment. In some states, individuals may renew a driver’s license online or in person. My uncle, a cartoonist, could sketched a face in less than two minutes. Working more than twelve hours a day might to contribute to insomnia, according to researchers. A wasp will carry its immobilized prey back to the nest. Hikers should not wandered too far from the trail. Should we continued to submit hard copies of our essays? Physical therapy may to help people after heart surgery.


315

316

28b

ESL

Verbs

Modals and their meanings can UÊ }iiÀ>Ê>LÌÞÊ (present)

Ants can surviveÊ>ÞÜiÀi]ÊiÛiÊÊÃ«>Vi°ÊÀ}iÊ can run a marathon faster than his brother.

U informal requests or permission

Can you tellÊiÊÜiÀiÊÌiÊ}ÌÊÃ¶Ê->`ÞÊcan borrow my calculator.

could UÊ }iiÀ>Ê>LÌÞÊ«>ÃÌ®

Lea could read when she was only three years old.

U polite, informal requests or permission

Could you giveÊiÊÌ>ÌÊ«i¶

may U formal requests or permission

May I seeÊÌiÊÀi«ÀÌ¶Ê-ÌÕìÌÃÊmay park only in the yellow zone.

U possibility

I may tryÊÌÊwÃÊÞÊiÜÀÊÌ}Ì]ÊÀÊÊmay wake up early and finish it tomorrow.

might

possibility

The population of New Delhi might reach thirteen million by 2013.

NOTE: MightÊÕÃÕ>ÞÊiÝ«ÀiÃÃiÃÊ>ÊÃÌÀ}iÀÊ«ÃÃLÌÞÊÌ>Êmay.

must U necessity (present or future)

/ÊLiÊivviVÌÛi]ÊÜiv>ÀiÌÜÀÊ«À}À>ÃÊmust provideÊ>VViÃÃÊÌÊLÊÌÀ>}°

UÊ ÃÌÀ}Ê«ÀL>LÌÞ

Amy must be sick. [She is probably sick.]

U near certainty (present or past)

I must have left my wallet at home. [I almost certainly left my wallet at home.]

should UÊ ÃÕ}}iÃÌÃÊÀÊ>`ÛViÊ

Diabetics should drinkÊ«iÌÞÊvÊÜ>ÌiÀÊiÛiÀÞÊ`>Þ°

UÊ L}>ÌÃÊÀÊ`ÕÌiÃ

/iÊ}ÛiÀiÌÊshould protectÊVÌâiÃ½ÊÀ}ÌÃ°

U expectations

The books should arrive soon. [We expect the LÃÊÌÊ>ÀÀÛiÊÃ°R

6

`>ÃÊ UÊ can, could, may, might, must, should, will, wouldÊ UÊ «>ÃÃÛiÊÛViÊ

ESL

28c

317

will U certainty

vÊÞÕÊ`½ÌÊi>ÛiÊÜ]ÊÞÕÊwill be late.

U requests

Will you helpÊiÊÃÌÕ`ÞÊvÀÊÞÊÌiÃÌ¶

U promises and offers

>Êwill arrange the carpool.

would U polite requests

Would you helpÊiÊV>ÀÀÞÊÌiÃiÊLÃ¶Ê I would like some coffee. [Would like is more polite than want.]

U habitual or repeated actions (past)

7iiÛiÀÊ i>Êiiì`Êi«ÊÜÌÊÃiÜ}]Ê she would call her aunt.

28c To write a verb in the passive voice, use a form of be with the past participle. When a sentence is written in the passive voice, the subject receives the action instead of doing it. (See 62c.) The solution was measured by the lab assistant. Melissa was taken to the hospital.

To form the passive voice, use a form of be — am, is, are, was, were, being, be, or been — followed by the past participle of the main verb: was chosen, are remembered. (Sometimes a form of be follows another helping verb: will be stopped, could have been broken.)

XSJUUFO

0

Dreaming in Cuban was writing by Cristina García.

?

In the passive voice, the past participle written, not the present participle writing, must follow was (the past tense of be).

CF

0

Senator Dixon will defeated.

?

The passive voice requires a form of be before the past participle.

318

28c

ESL

Verbs

Verb tenses commonly used in the passive voice ÀÊìÌ>ÃÊ>LÕÌÊÛiÀLÊÌiÃiÃÊÊÌiÊ>VÌÛiÊÛVi]ÊÃiiÊ«>}iÃÊÎ££q£Î°

Simple tenses (passive voice) Simple present

am, is, are + past participle

UÊ }iiÀ>Êv>VÌÃ

Meals are served by students in the hotel >>}iiÌÊ«À}À>°

UÊ >LÌÕ>]ÊÀi«iÌÌÛiÊ actions

The receipts are countedÊiÛiÀÞÊ}Ì°

Simple past

was, were + past participle

U completed past actions

He was punishedÊvÀÊLi}Ê>Ìi°

Simple future

will be + past participle

U future actions, promises, or predictions

The decision will be made by the committee next week.

Simple progressive forms (passive voice) Present progressive

am, is, are + being + past participle

UÊ >VÌÃÊÊ«À}ÀiÃÃÊ>ÌÊ the present time

The new stadium is being builtÊÜÌÊ«ÀÛ>ÌiÊ money.

U future actions (with leave, go, come, move, etc.)

Êis being moved to a new class next month.

Past progressive

was, were + being + past participle

UÊ >VÌÃÊÊ«À}ÀiÃÃÊ>ÌÊ>Ê specific time in the past

7iÊÌÕ}ÌÊÜiÊwere being followed.

Perfect tenses (passive voice) Present perfect

has, have + been + past participle

UÊ >VÌÃÊÌ>ÌÊLi}>ÊÊ the past and continue to the present

/iÊy}ÌÊhas been delayedÊLiV>ÕÃiÊvÊÛiÌÊ storms in the Midwest.

U actions that happened at an unknown or unspecific time in the past

Wars have been foughtÊÌÀÕ}ÕÌÊÃÌÀÞ°

6

ÌiÃiÃÊÊ«>ÃÃÛiÊ UÊ ÕÃ}ÊnotÊÜÌÊÛiÀLÊ

ESL

28d

319

Past perfect

had + been + past participle

UÊ >VÌÃÊÌ>ÌÊLi}>Ê or occurred before another time in the past

He had been given all the hints he needed to complete the puzzle.

NOTE:ÊÕÌÕÀiÊ«À}ÀiÃÃÛi]ÊvÕÌÕÀiÊ«iÀviVÌ]Ê>`Ê«iÀviVÌÊ«À}ÀiÃÃÛiÊvÀÃÊ>ÀiÊÌÊ ÕÃi`ÊÊÌiÊ«>ÃÃÛiÊÛVi°

UFBTFE

0

The child was being tease.

?

The past participle teased, not the base form tease, must be used with was being to form the passive voice.

For details on forming the passive in various tenses, consult the chart beginning on page 318. (For appropriate uses of the passive voice, see 8a.) NOTE: Only transitive verbs, those that take direct objects, may be used in the passive voice. Intransitive verbs such as occur, happen, sleep, die, become, and fall are not used in the passive. (See 62b.) 0

The accident was happened suddenly.

0

Stock prices were fallen all week.

GFMM

? 28d To make negative verb forms, add not in the appropriate place. If the verb is the simple present or past tense of be (am, is, are, was, were), add not after the verb. Mario is not a member of the club.

For simple present-tense verbs other than be, use do or does plus not before the base form of the verb. (For the correct forms of do and does, see the chart in 21a.)

28e

320

ESL

Verbs

EPFTOPU

0

Mariko no want more dessert.

0

Mariko does not want s more dessert.

? For simple past-tense verbs other than be, use did plus not before the base form of the verb.

QMBOU

0

They did not planted corn this year.

?

In a verb phrase consisting of one or more helping verbs and a present or past participle (is watching, were living, has played, could have been driven), use the word not after the first helping verb.

OPU

0

Inna should have not gone dancing last night.

0

Bonnie is no singing this weekend.

?

OPU

?

NOTE: English allows only one negative in an independent clause

to express a negative idea; using more than one is an error known as a double negative (see 26e).

BOZ

0

We could not find no books about the history of our school.

?

28e In a conditional sentence, choose verb tenses according to the type of condition expressed in the sentence. Conditional sentences contain two clauses: a subordinate clause (usually starting with if, when, or unless) and an independent clause. The subordinate clause (sometimes called the if or unless clause) states the condition or cause; the independent clause states the result or effect. In each example in this section, the subordinate clause (if clause) is marked SUB, and the independent clause is marked IND. (See 63e on clauses.)

ifÊV>ÕÃiÃÊ UÊ whenÊV>ÕÃiÃÊ UÊ iÝ«ÀiÃÃ}Êv>VÌÃÊ UÊ «Ài`VÌ}

ESL

28e

Factual Factual conditional sentences express factual relationships. If the relationship is a scientific truth, use the present tense in both clauses. SUB

IND

If water cools to 32° Fahrenheit, it freezes.

If the sentence describes a condition that is (or was) habitually true, use the same tense in both clauses. SUB

IND

When Sue jogs along the canal, her dog runs ahead of her. SUB

IND

Whenever the coach asked for help, I volunteered.

Predictive Predictive conditional sentences are used to predict the future or to express future plans or possibilities. To form a predictive sentence, use a present-tense verb in the subordinate clause; in the independent clause, use the modal will, can, may, should, or might plus the base form of the verb. SUB

IND

If you practice regularly, your tennis game should improve. IND

SUB

We will lose our remaining wetlands unless we act now. TIP: In all types of conditional sentences (factual, predictive, and speculative), if or unless clauses do not use the modal verb will.

QBTTFT

0

If Jenna will pass her history test, she will graduate this year.

Speculative

?

Speculative conditional sentences express unlikely, contraryto-fact, or impossible conditions. English uses the past or past perfect tense in the if clause, even for conditions in the present or the future.

321

28e

322

ESL

Verbs

Unlikely possibilities If the condition is possible but unlikely in the present or the future, use the past tense in the subordinate clause; in the independent clause, use would, could, or might plus the base form of the verb. SUB

IND

If I won the lottery, I would travel to Egypt.

The writer does not expect to win the lottery. Because this is a possible but unlikely present or future situation, the subordinate clause uses the past tense. Conditions contrary to fact In conditions that are currently unreal or contrary to fact, use the past-tense verb were (not was) in the if clause for all subjects. (See also 27g, on the subjunctive mood.)

XFSF

0

If I was president, I would make children’s issues a priority.

?

The writer is not president, so were is correct in the if clause.

Events that did not happen In a conditional sentence that speculates about an event that did not happen or was impossible in the past, use the past perfect tense in the if clause; in the independent clause, use would have, could have, or might have with the past participle. (See also past perfect tense, p. 313.) SUB

IND

If I had saved more money, I would have visited Laos last year.

The writer did not save more money and did not travel to Laos. This sentence shows a possibility that did not happen. SUB

IND

If Aunt Grace had been alive for your graduation, she would have been very proud.

Aunt Grace was not alive at the time of the graduation. This sentence shows an impossible situation in the past.

ifÊV>ÕÃiÃÊ UÊ whenÊV>ÕÃiÃÊ UÊ V`Ì>Ê UÊ ÕiÞÊV`ÌÃÊ UÊ ÛiÀLÊ³Ê}iÀÕ`ÊÀÊwÌÛiÊÊÊ

ESL

28f

EXERCISE 28–3 Edit the following conditional sentences to correct problems with verbs. In some cases, more than one revision is possible. Suggested revisions of lettered sentences appear in the back of the book. Example:

IBE

If I have time, I would study both French and Russian next

a. b. c. d. e. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

?

semester. The electrician might have discovered the broken circuit if she went through the modules one at a time. If Verena wins a scholarship, she would go to graduate school. Whenever there is a fire in our neighborhood, everybody came out to watch. Sarah will take the paralegal job unless she would get a better offer. If I live in Budapest with my cousin Szusza, she would teach me Hungarian cooking. If the science fiction festival starts Monday, we wouldn’t need to plan entertainment for our visitors. If everyone has voted in the last election, the results would have been very different. The tenants will not pay the rent unless the landlord fixed the furnace. When dark gray clouds appeared on a hot summer afternoon, a thunderstorm often follows. Our daughter would have drowned if Officer Blake didn’t risk his life to save her.


28f Become familiar with verbs that may be followed by gerunds or infinitives. A gerund is a verb form that ends in -ing and is used as a noun: sleeping, dreaming. (See 63b.) An infinitive is the word to plus the base form of the verb: to sleep, to dream. (The word to is an infinitive marker, not a preposition, in this use.)

323

324

28f

ESL

Verbs

A few verbs may be followed by either a gerund or an infinitive; others may be followed by a gerund but not by an infinitive; still others may be followed by an infinitive but not by a gerund.

Verb + gerund or infinitive (no change in meaning) The following commonly used verbs may be followed by a gerund or an infinitive, with little or no difference in meaning: begin continue

hate like

love start

I love skiing. I love to ski.

Verb + gerund or infinitive (change in meaning) With a few verbs, the choice of a gerund or an infinitive changes the meaning dramatically: forget

remember

stop

try

She stopped speaking to Lucia. [She no longer spoke to Lucia.] She stopped to speak to Lucia. [She paused so that she could speak to Lucia.]

Verb + gerund These verbs may be followed by a gerund but not by an infinitive: admit appreciate avoid deny discuss

enjoy escape finish imagine miss

postpone practice put off quit recall

resist risk suggest tolerate

Bill enjoys playing [not to play] the piano. Jamie quit smoking.

Verb + infinitive These verbs may be followed by an infinitive but not by a gerund:

ÛiÀLÊ³Ê}iÀÕ`ÊÀÊwÌÛi

agree ask beg claim decide

expect help hope manage mean

need offer plan pretend promise

ESL

28f

refuse wait want wish would like

Jill has offered to water [not watering] the plants while we are away. Joe finally managed to find a parking space. The man refused to join the rebellion.

A few of these verbs may be followed either by an infinitive directly or by a noun or pronoun plus an infinitive: ask expect

help need

promise want

would like

We asked to speak to the congregation. We asked Rabbi Abrams to speak to our congregation. Alex expected to get the lead in the play. Ira expected Alex to get the lead in the play.

Verb + noun or pronoun + infinitive With certain verbs in the active voice, a noun or pronoun must come between the verb and the infinitive that follows it. The noun or pronoun usually names a person who is affected by the action of the verb. advise allow cause command

convince encourage have (“own”) instruct V

N

order persuade remind require

tell urge warn

INF

The class encouraged Luis to tell the story of his escape. The counselor advised Haley to take four courses instead of five. Professor Howlett instructed us to write our names on the left side of the paper.

325

28f

326

ESL

Verbs

Verb + noun or pronoun + unmarked infinitive An unmarked infinitive is an infinitive without to. A few verbs (often called causative verbs) may be followed by a noun or pronoun and an unmarked infinitive. have (“cause”)

let (“allow”)

help

make (“force”)

Jorge had the valet park his car. 0

Please let me to pay for the tickets.

0

Frank made me to carry his book for him.

NOTE: Help can be followed by a noun or pronoun and either

an unmarked or a marked infinitive. Emma helped Brian wash the dishes. Emma helped Brian to wash the dishes.

EXERCISE 28–4 Form sentences by adding gerund or infinitive constructions to the following sentence openings. In some cases, more than one kind of construction is possible. Possible answers to lettered items appear in the back of the book. Example:

Please remind ZPVSTJTUFSUPDBMMNF

?

a. b. c. d. e.

I enjoy The tutor told Samantha The team hopes Ricardo and his brothers miss The babysitter let

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Pollen makes The club president asked Next summer we plan My supervisor intends Please stop

hackerhandbooks.com/bedhandbook > Grammar exercises > ESL challenges > E-ex 28–8 and 28–9

ÛiÀLÊ³ÊwÌÛiÊ U articles (a, an, the®Ê UÊ ÌiÀÊÕÊ>ÀiÀÃ

29

ESL

29a

Articles

Articles (a, an, the) are part of a category of words known as noun markers or determiners.

29a Be familiar with articles and other noun markers. Standard English uses noun markers to help identify the nouns that follow. In addition to articles (a, an, and the), noun markers include UÊ «ÃÃiÃÃÛiÊÕÃ]ÊÃÕVÊ>ÃÊElena’s (See 36a.) UÊ «ÃÃiÃÃÛiÊ«ÀÕÉ>ìVÌÛiÃ\Êmy, your, his, her, its, our, their (See 61b.) UÊ ìÃÌÀ>ÌÛiÊ«ÀÕÉ>ìVÌÛiÃ\Êthis, that, these, those (See 61b.) UÊ µÕ>ÌwiÀÃ\Êall, any, each, either, every, few, many, more, most, much, neither, several, some, and so on (See 29d.) UÊ ÕLiÀÃ\Êone, twenty-three, and so on

Using articles and other noun markers Articles and other noun markers always appear before nouns; sometimes other modifiers, such as adjectives, come between a noun marker and a noun. ART

N

Felix is reading a book about mythology. ART

ADJ

N

We took an exciting trip to Alaska last summer. NOUN MARKER

ADV

ADJ

N

That very delicious meal was expensive.

In most cases, do not use an article with another noun marker. 0

The Natalie’s older brother lives in Wisconsin.

Expressions like a few, the most, and all the are exceptions: a few potatoes, all the rain. See also 29d.

327

29b

328

ESL

Articles (a, an, the)

Types of articles and types of nouns To choose an appropriate article for a noun, you must first determine whether the noun is common or proper, count or noncount, singular or plural, and specific or general. The chart on pages 329–30 describes the types of nouns. Articles are classified as indefinite and definite. The indefinite articles, a and an, are used with general nouns. The definite article, the, is used with specific nouns. (The last section of the chart on p. 330 explains general and specific nouns.) A and an both mean “one” or “one among many.” Use a before a consonant sound: a banana, a tree, a picture, a happy child, a united family. Use an before a vowel sound: an eggplant, an occasion, an uncle, an honorable person. (See also a, an in the Glossary of Usage.) The shows that a noun is specific; use the with one or more than one specific thing: the newspaper, the soldiers.

29b Use the with most specific common nouns. The definite article, the, is used with most nouns — both count and noncount — that the reader can identify specifically. Usually the identity will be clear to the reader for one of the following reasons. (See also the chart on p. 332.) 1. The noun has been previously mentioned.

UIF

0

A truck cut in front of our van. When truck skidded a few

?

seconds later, we almost crashed into it. The article A is used before truck when the noun is first mentioned. When the noun is mentioned again, it needs the article the because readers can now identify which truck skidded — the one that cut in front of the van.

2. A phrase or clause following the noun restricts its identity.

UIF

0

Bryce warned me that computer on his desk had just crashed.

?

The phrase on his desk identifies the specific computer.

indefinite article ( a, anÊ®Ê UÊ ìwÌiÊ article ( theÊ®Ê UÊ ÌÞ«iÃÊvÊÕÃÊ

ESL

29b

329

Types of nouns Common or proper Common nouns

Examples

UÊ >iÊ}iiÀ>Ê persons, places, Ì}Ã]ÊÀÊì>Ã

Ài}ÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊLi>ÕÌÞ Üi`}iÊÊÊÊÊÊÊ ÃÌÕìÌ rain country

UÊ Li}ÊÜÌÊÜiÀV>Ãi Proper nouns

Examples

U name specific persons, places, Ì}Ã]ÊÀÊì>Ã

Hinduism President Adams *«ÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊ7>Ã}ÌÊÕiÌ Vietnam Renaissance

UÊ Li}ÊÜÌÊV>«Ì>ÊiÌÌiÀ

Count or noncount (common nouns only) Count nouns

Examples

U name persons, places, Ì}Ã]ÊÀÊì>ÃÊÌ>ÌÊ can be counted UÊ >ÛiÊ«ÕÀ>ÊvÀÃ

}À]Ê}ÀÃ city, cities }Ãi]Ê}iiÃi philosophy, philosophies

Noncount nouns

Examples

UÊ >iÊÌ}ÃÊÀÊ abstract ideas that cannot be counted

water patience ÃÛiÀÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊ Üi`}i furniture air

U cannot be made plural NOTE:Ê-iiÊÌiÊV>ÀÌÊÊ«>}iÊÎÎÎÊvÀÊVÞÊÕÃi`ÊVÕÌÊÕÃ°

Singular or plural (both common and proper) Singular nouns (count and noncount)

U represent one person, «>Vi]ÊÌ}]ÊÀÊì>

Examples

backpack rain country beauty Ü>ÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊ iÊ,ÛiÀ >ViÛiiÌÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊ VÊÃ>`Ê

6

29b

330

ESL


Types of nouns, continued Plural nouns (count only)

Examples

U represent more than one person, place, Ì}]ÊÀÊì>

backpacks Ural Mountains countries Falkland Islands ÜiÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊ>ViÛiiÌÃ

U must be count nouns

Specific (definite) or general (indefinite) (count and noncount) Specific nouns

Examples

U name persons, places, Ì}Ã]ÊÀÊì>ÃÊÌ>ÌÊ can be identified ÜÌÊ>Ê}ÀÕ«ÊvÊÌiÊ same type

The students in Professor Martin’s class should study. The airplaneÊV>ÀÀÞ}Êthe senator was late. The furniture in the truckÊÜ>ÃÊ`>>}i`°

General nouns

Examples

UÊ >iÊV>Ìi}ÀiÃÊ of persons, places, Ì}Ã]ÊÀÊì>ÃÊvÌiÊ plural)

Students should study. BooksÊLÀ`}iÊgaps between cultures. The airplaneÊ>ÃÊ>ìÊVÕÌ}ÊLiÌÜiiÊ cities easy.

NOTE: Descriptive adjectives do not necessarily make a noun

specific. A specific noun is one that readers can identify within a group of nouns of the same type.

B

0

If I win the lottery, I will buy the brand-new bright red sports car.

?

The reader cannot identify which specific brand-new bright red sports car the writer will buy. Even though car has many adjectives in front of it, it is a general noun in this sentence.

3. A superlative adjective such as best or most intelligent makes the noun’s identity specific. (See also 26d on comparatives and superlatives.)

ÌÞ«iÃÊvÊÕÃÊ UÊ the with specific ÕÃÊ UÊ a, anÊ UÊ VÕÌÊÕÃ

29c

ESL

UIF

0

Our petite daughter dated tallest boy in her class.

?

The superlative tallest makes the noun boy specific. Although there might be several tall boys, only one boy can be the tallest.

4. The noun describes a unique person, place, or thing.

UIF

0

During an eclipse, one should not look directly at sun.

?

There is only one sun in our solar system, so its identity is clear.

5. The context or situation makes the noun’s identity clear.

UIF

0

Please don’t slam door when you leave.

?

Both the speaker and the listener know which door is meant.

6. The noun is singular and refers to a scientific class or category of items (most often animals, musical instruments, and inventions).

5IFNJDSPDIJQ

0

Microchip has transformed nearly everyone’s life.

?The writer is referring to the microchip as an invention.

29c Use a (or an) with common singular count nouns that refer to “one” or “any.” If a count noun refers to one unspecific item (not a whole category), use the indefinite article, a or an. A and an usually mean “one among many” but can also mean “any one.” (See the chart on p. 332.)

B

0

My English professor asked me to bring dictionary to class.

?

The noun dictionary refers to “one unspecific dictionary” or “any dictionary.”

331

332

29c

ESL


Choosing articles for common nouns Use the U if the reader has iÕ}ÊvÀ>ÌÊ to identify the noun specifically

COUNT: Please turn on the lights°Ê7i½ÀiÊ}}Ê to the lake tomorrow. NONCOUNT: The food in Italy is excellent.

Use a or an U if the noun refers to one item

COUNT:Ê À}Êa pencil to class. Charles wrote an essay about his first job.

and UÊ vÊÌiÊÌiÊÃÊÃ}Õ>ÀÊ but not specific NOTE: Do not use a or an with plural or noncount nouns.

Use a quantifier (enough, many, some, etc.) U if the noun represents an unspecified amount vÊÃiÌ}

COUNT ( plural): Amir showed us some photos of India. Many turtlesÊÀiÌÕÀÊÌÊÌiÊÃ>iÊiÃÌ}Ê site each year.

U if the amount is more than one but not all ÌiÃÊÊ>ÊV>Ìi}ÀÞ

NONCOUNT: We expect some rainÊÌÃÊiÛi}°

NOTE:Ê-iÌiÃÊÊ>ÀÌViÊVÛiÞÃÊ>ÊÕÃ«iVwi`Ê>ÕÌ\ÊAmir showed us photos of India.

Use no article U if the noun represents >ÊÌiÃÊÊ>ÊV>Ìi}ÀÞ

COUNT (plural): Students can attend the show for free.

U if the noun represents >ÊV>Ìi}ÀÞÊÊ}iiÀ>Ê

NONCOUNT: Coal is a natural resource.

NOTE: TheÊÃÊVV>Ã>ÞÊÕÃi`ÊÜiÊ>ÊÃ}Õ>ÀÊVÕÌÊÕÊÀiviÀÃÊÌÊ>ÊÌiÃÊÊ >ÊV>ÃÃÊÀÊ>ÊÃ«iVwVÊV>Ìi}ÀÞ\ÊThe bald eagle is no longer endangered in the United States.

VÃ} a, an, theÊ UÊ VÕÌÊÕÃÊÊcourage, moneyÊ®Ê UÊ µÕ>ÌwiÀÃÊsome, any, etc. )

ESL

29d

Commonly used noncount nouns Food and drink beef, bread, butter, candy, cereal, cheese, cream, meat, milk, «>ÃÌ>]ÊÀVi]ÊÃ>Ì]ÊÃÕ}>À]ÊÜ>ÌiÀ]ÊÜi

Nonfood substances >À]ÊViiÌ]ÊV>]Ê`ÀÌ]Ê}>Ãi]Ê}`]Ê«>«iÀ]Ê«iÌÀiÕ]Ê«>ÃÌV]Ê À>]ÊÃÛiÀ]ÊÃÜ]ÊÃ>«]ÊÃÌii]ÊÜ`]ÊÜ

Abstract nouns >`ÛVi]Ê>}iÀ]ÊLi>ÕÌÞ]ÊVwìVi]ÊVÕÀ>}i]Êi«ÞiÌ]ÊvÕ]Ê >««iÃÃ]Êi>Ì]ÊiÃÌÞ]ÊvÀ>Ì]ÊÌi}iVi]ÊÜi`}i]Ê Ûi]Ê«ÛiÀÌÞ]ÊÃ>ÌÃv>VÌ]ÊÜi>Ì

Other L}ÞÊ>`ÊÌiÀÊ>Ài>ÃÊvÊÃÌÕ`Þ®]ÊVÌ}]ÊiµÕ«iÌ]ÊvÕÀÌÕÀi]ÊiÜÀ]ÊiÜiÀÞ]ÊÕ}}>}i]Ê>ViÀÞ]Ê>]ÊiÞ]ÊiÜÃ]Ê «iÌÀÞ]Ê«ÕÌ]ÊÀiÃi>ÀV]ÊÃViiÀÞ]ÊÌÀ>vwV]ÊÌÀ>Ã«ÀÌ>Ì]ÊÛiVi]Ê weather, work NOTE: A few noncount nouns (such as love) can also be used as count nouns: He had two loves: music and archery.

BO

0

We want to rent apartment close to the lake.

?

The noun apartment refers to “any apartment close to the lake,” not a specific apartment.

29d Use a quantifier such as some or more, not a or an, with a noncount noun to express an approximate amount. Do not use a or an with noncount nouns. Also do not use numbers or words such as several or many because they must be used with plural nouns, and noncount nouns do not have

333

29e

334

ESL


plural forms. (See the chart on p. 333 for a list of commonly used noncount nouns.) 0

Dr. Snyder gave us an information about the Peace Corps.

0

Do you have many money with you?

You can use quantifiers such as enough, less, and some to suggest approximate amounts or nonspecific quantities of noncount nouns: a little salt, any homework, enough wood, less information, much pollution.

TPNF

0

Vincent’s mother told him that she had a news that would surprise him.

?

29e Do not use articles with nouns that refer to all of something or something in general. When a noncount noun refers to all of its type or to a concept in general, it is not marked with an article.

,JOEOFTT

0

The kindness is a virtue.

?The noun represents kindness in general; it does not represent a specific type of kindness. 0

In some parts of the world, the rice is preferred to all other grains. The noun rice represents rice in general, not a specific type or serving of rice.

In most cases, when you use a count noun to represent a general category, make the noun plural. Do not use unmarked singular count nouns to represent whole categories.

'PVOUBJOTBSF

0

Fountain is an expensive element of landscape design.

?Fountains is a count noun that represents fountains in general.

when not to use a, an, theÊ UÊ when to use a, an, the

ESL

29f

EXCEPTION: In some cases, the can be used with singular count

nouns to represent a class or specific category: The Chinese alligator is smaller than the American alligator. See also number 6 in 29b.

29f Do not use articles with most singular proper nouns. Use the with most plural proper nouns. Since singular proper nouns are already specific, they typically do not need an article: Prime Minister Brown, Jamaica, Lake Huron, Mount Etna. There are, however, many exceptions. In most cases, if the proper noun consists of a common noun with modifiers (adjectives or an of phrase), use the with the proper noun.

UIF

0

We visited Great Wall of China last year.

0

Rob wants to be a translator for Central Intelligence Agency.

?

UIF

?

The is used with most plural proper nouns: the McGregors, the Bahamas, the Finger Lakes, the United States. Geographic names create problems because there are so many exceptions to the rules. When in doubt, consult the chart on page 336, check a dictionary, or ask a native speaker. EXERCISE 29–1 Edit the following sentences for proper use of articles and nouns. If a sentence is correct, write “correct” after it. Answers to lettered sentences appear in the back of the book. Example: The Josefina’s dance routine was flawless. a. b. c. d. e. 1.

Doing volunteer work often brings a satisfaction. As I looked out the window of the plane, I could see the Cape Cod. Melina likes to drink her coffees with lots of cream. Recovering from abdominal surgery requires patience. I completed the my homework assignment quickly. The attorney argued that her client should receive a money for emotional suffering.

335

29f

336

ESL


Using the with geographic nouns When to omit the streets, squares, parks

ÛÞÊ-ÌÀiiÌ]Ê1Ê-µÕ>Ài]Ê Denali National Park

cities, states, counties

>]Ê iÜÊiÝV]Ê iiÊ ÕÌÞ

most countries, continents

Ì>Þ]Ê }iÀ>]Ê >]Ê South America, Africa

L>ÞÃ]ÊÃ}iÊ>iÃ

/>«>Ê >Þ]Ê>iÊiiÛ>

Ã}iÊÕÌ>Ã]ÊÃ>`Ã

ÕÌÊ ÛiÀiÃÌ]Ê ÀiÌi

When to use the country names with of phrase

the United States (of America), the People’s Republic of China

>À}iÊÀi}Ã]ÊìÃiÀÌÃ

ÌiÊ >ÃÌÊ >ÃÌ]ÊÌiÊ->>À>

peninsulas

ÌiÊ >>Ê*iÃÕ>]ÊÌiÊ->Ê*iÃÕ>

Vi>Ã]ÊÃi>Ã]Ê}ÕvÃÊ

the Pacific Ocean, the Dead Sea, ÌiÊ*iÀÃ>ÊÕv

V>>ÃÊ>`ÊÀÛiÀÃ

the Panama Canal, the Amazon

ÕÌ>ÊÀ>}iÃ

the Rocky Mountains, the Alps

}ÀÕ«ÃÊvÊÃ>`Ã

the Solomon Islands

2. 3. 4. 5.

Please check to see if there is a mail in the mailbox. The Times Square in New York City is known for its billboards and theaters. A cement is one of the components of concrete. I took all the boys on the roller coaster after lunch.

EXERCISE 29–2 Articles have been omitted from the following description of winter weather. Insert the articles a, an, and the where English requires them and be prepared to explain the reasons for your choices. Many people confuse terms hail, sleet, and freezing rain. Hail normally occurs in thunderstorm and is caused by strong updrafts that lift growing chunks of ice into clouds. When

theÊÜÌÊ}i}À>«VÊÕÃÊ UÊ ÃÃ}ÊÛiÀLÃÊ UÊ }ÊÛiÀLÃÊÊis, were )

ESL

30a

chunks of ice, called hailstones, become too heavy to be carried by updrafts, they fall to ground. Hailstones can cause damage to crops, windshields, and people. Sleet occurs during winter storms and is caused by snowflakes falling from layer of cold air into warm layer, where they become raindrops, and then into another cold layer. As they fall through last layer of cold air, raindrops freeze and become small ice pellets, forming sleet. When it hits car windshield or windows of house, sleet can make annoying racket. Driving and walking can be hazardous when sleet accumulates on roads and sidewalks. Freezing rain is basically rain that falls onto ground and then freezes after it hits ground. It causes icy glaze on trees and any surface that is below freezing. hackerhandbooks.com/bedhandbook > Grammar exercises > ESL challenges > E-ex 29–3 to 29–5

30

Sentence structure

Although their structure can vary widely, sentences in English generally flow from subject to verb to object or complement: Bears eat fish. This section focuses on the major challenges that multilingual students face when writing sentences in English. For more details on the parts of speech and the elements of sentences, consult sections 61–64.

30a Use a linking verb between a subject and its complement. Some languages, such as Russian and Turkish, do not use linking verbs (is, are, was, were) between subjects and complements (nouns or adjectives that rename or describe the subject). Every English sentence, however, must include a verb. For more on linking verbs, see 27e.

JT

0

Jim intelligent.

?

0

BSF

Many streets in San Francisco very steep.

?

337

30b

338

ESL

Sentence structure

30b Include a subject in every sentence. Some languages, such as Spanish and Japanese, do not require a subject in every sentence. Every English sentence, however, needs a subject. Commands are an exception: The subject you is understood but not present (Give me the book).

4IFTFFNT

0

Your aunt is very energetic. Seems young for her age.

?

The word it is used as the subject of a sentence describing the weather or temperature, stating the time, indicating distance, or suggesting an environmental fact.

*UJT 0

Is raining in the valley and snowing in the mountains.

?

0

JU

In July, is very hot in Arizona.

*UJT 0

?

Is 9:15 a.m.

?

In most English sentences, the subject appears before the verb. Some sentences, however, are inverted: The subject comes after the verb. In these sentences, a placeholder called an expletive (there or it) often comes before the verb. EXP

V

S

S

V

There are many people here today. (Many people are here today.)

5IFSFJT 0

Is an apple in the refrigerator.

?

0

UIFSFBSF

As you know, many religious sects in India.

?

Notice that the verb agrees with the subject that follows it: apple is, sects are. (See 21g.)

itÊ>ÃÊÃÕLiVÌÊ UÊ thereÊÜÌÊÛiÀLÊ UÊ avoiding repeated subjects

30c

ESL

Sometimes an inverted sentence has an infinitive (to work) or a noun clause (that she is intelligent) as the subject. In such sentences, the placeholder it is needed before the verb. (Also see 63b and 63e.) EXP V

S

S

V

It is important to study daily. (To study daily is important.)

JU

0

Because the road is flooded, is necessary to change our route.

?

TIP: The words here and there are not used as subjects. When

they mean “in this place” (here) or “in that place” (there), they are adverbs, not nouns.

*U

0

I just returned from a vacation in Japan. There is very

UIFSF

beautiful .

?

?

0

5IJTTDIPPM

UIBUTDIPPM

?only a bachelor’s program.

?

Here offers a master’s degree in physical therapy; there has

Grammar checkers can flag some sentences with a missing expletive, or placeholder (there or it), as in the sentence Are many stores on Main Street. But they often misdiagnose the problem because they cannot tell whether the sentence needs an expletive to make a statement (There are many stores on Main Street) or to ask a question (Are there many stores on Main Street?).

30c Do not use both a noun and a pronoun to perform the same grammatical function in a sentence. English does not allow a subject to be repeated in its own clause. 0

The doctor she advised me to cut down on salt. The pronoun she cannot repeat the subject, doctor.

339

30d

340

ESL

Sentence structure

Do not add a pronoun even when a word group comes between the subject and the verb. 0

The watch that I lost on vacation it was in my backpack. The pronoun it cannot repeat the subject, watch.

Some languages allow “topic fronting,” placing a word or phrase (a “topic”) at the beginning of a sentence and following it with an independent clause that explains something about the topic. This form is not allowed in English because the sentence seems to start with one subject but then introduces a new subject in an independent clause. TOPIC

INCORRECT

IND CLAUSE

The seeds I planted them last fall.

The sentence can be corrected by bringing the topic (seeds) into the independent clause.

UIFTFFET

0

The seeds I planted them last fall.

? 30d Do not repeat an object or an adverb in an adjective clause. Adjective clauses begin with relative pronouns (who, whom, whose, which, that) or relative adverbs (when, where). Relative pronouns usually serve as subjects or objects in the clauses they introduce; another word in the clause cannot serve the same function. Relative adverbs should not be repeated by other adverbs later in the clause. ADJ CLAUSE

The cat ran under the car that was parked on the street. 0

The cat ran under the car that it was parked on the street. The relative pronoun that is the subject of the adjective clause, so the pronoun it cannot be added as a subject.

ÌÊÀi«i>Ì}ÊLiVÌÃÊ UÊ ÌÊÀi«i>Ì}Ê>`ÛiÀLÃ

0

ESL

30d

Myrna enjoyed the investment seminars that she attended them last week. The relative pronoun that is the object of the verb attended. The pronoun them cannot also serve as an object.

Sometimes the relative pronoun is understood but not present in the sentence. In such cases, do not add another word with the same function as the omitted pronoun. 0

Myrna enjoyed the investment seminars she attended them last week. The relative pronoun that is understood after seminars even though it is not present in the sentence.

If the clause begins with a relative adverb, do not use another adverb with the same meaning later in the clause. 0

The office where I work there is one hour from the city. The adverb there cannot repeat the relative adverb where.

Grammar checkers are not much help with repeated subjects or objects. If they flag them at all, the programs often identify the problems incorrectly.

EXERCISE 30–1 In the following sentences, add needed subjects or expletives and delete any repeated subjects, objects, or adverbs. Answers to lettered sentences appear in the back of the book. Example: The new geology professor is the one whom we saw him on TV this morning. a. b. c.

Are some cartons of ice cream in the freezer. I don’t use the subway because am afraid. The prime minister she is the most popular leader in my country.

341

342

30e d. e. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

ESL

Sentence structure

We tried to get in touch with the same manager whom we spoke to him earlier. Recently have been a number of earthquakes in Turkey. We visited an island where several ancient ruins are being excavated there. In this city is difficult to find a high-paying job. Beginning knitters they are often surprised that their fingers are sore at first. Is a banyan tree in our backyard. The CD that teaches Italian for opera lovers it was stolen from my backpack.


30e Avoid mixed constructions beginning with although or because. A word group that begins with although cannot be linked to a word group that begins with but or however. The result is an error called a mixed construction (see also 11a). Similarly, a word group that begins with because cannot be linked to a word group that begins with so or therefore. If you want to keep although or because, drop the other linking word. 0

Although Nikki Giovanni is best known for her poetry for adults, but she has written several books for children.

0

Because finance laws are not always enforced, therefore investing in the former Soviet Union can be risky.

If you want to keep the other linking word, omit although or because. 0

Although Nikki Giovanni is best known for her poetry for adults, but she has written several books for children.

sentences with although and becauseÊ UÊ «>V}Ê>`ÛiÀLÃÊ

ESL

30f

'JOBODF

0

Because finance laws are not always enforced, therefore

?investing in the former Soviet Union can be risky. ?

?

For advice about using commas and semicolons with linking words, see 32a and 34b.

30f Do not place an adverb between a verb and its direct object. Adverbs modifying verbs can appear in various positions: at the beginning or end of a sentence, before or after a verb, or between a helping verb and its main verb. Slowly, we drove along the rain-slick road. Mia handled the teapot very carefully. Martin always wins our tennis matches. Christina is rarely late for our lunch dates. My daughter has often spoken of you. The election results were being closely followed by analysts.

However, an adverb cannot appear between a verb and its direct object.

DBSFGVMMZ

0

Mother wrapped carefully the gift.

?

The adverb carefully cannot appear between the verb, wrapped, and its direct object, the gift.

EXERCISE 30–2 Edit the following sentences for proper sentence structure. If a sentence is correct, write “correct” after it. Answers to lettered sentences appear in the back of the book. Example:

TMPXMZ

She peeled slowly the banana.

a.

?

Although freshwater freezes at 32 degrees Fahrenheit, however ocean water freezes at 28 degrees Fahrenheit.

343

344

30g b. c. d. e. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

ESL

Sentence structure

Because we switched cable packages, so our channel lineup has changed. The competitor mounted confidently his skateboard. My sister performs well the legong, a Balinese dance. Because product development is behind schedule, we will have to launch the product next spring. The teller counted methodically the stack of one-dollar bills. I gasped when I saw lightning strike repeatedly the barn. Although hockey is traditionally a winter sport, but many towns offer skills programs all year long. Because salmon can survive in both freshwater and salt water, so they are classified as anadromous fish. A surveyor determines precisely the boundaries of a piece of property.


30g Distinguish between present participles and past participles used as adjectives. Both present and past participles may be used as adjectives. The present participle always ends in -ing. Past participles usually end in -ed, -d, -en, -n, or -t. (See 27a.) PRESENT PARTICIPLES PAST PARTICIPLES

confusing, speaking, boring confused, spoken, bored

Like all other adjectives, participles can come before nouns; they also can follow linking verbs, in which case they describe the subject of the sentence. (See 62b.) Use a present participle to describe a person or thing causing or stimulating an experience. The boring lecture put us to sleep. [The lecture caused boredom.]

Use a past participle to describe a person or thing undergoing an experience. The audience was bored by the lecture. [The audience experienced boredom.]

VÃ}Êing or -edÊ>ìVÌÛiÃÊÊexciting, excited )

ESL

30g

Participles that describe emotions or mental states often cause the most confusion. >Þ}É>Þi`Ê LÀ}ÉLÀi`Ê VvÕÃ}ÉVvÕÃi`Ê ì«ÀiÃÃ}Éì«ÀiÃÃi`Ê iÝVÌ}ÉiÝVÌi`Ê

iÝ>ÕÃÌ}ÉiÝ>ÕÃÌi` v>ÃV>Ì}Év>ÃV>Ìi` vÀ}Ìi}ÉvÀ}Ìii` Ã>ÌÃvÞ}ÉÃ>ÌÃwi` ÃÕÀ«ÀÃ}ÉÃÕÀ«ÀÃi`

FYIBVTUJOH

Our hike was exhausted.

0

?

Exhausting suggests that the hike caused exhaustion.

FYIBVTUFE

The exhausting hikers reached the campground at

0

?

sunset. Exhausted describes how the hikers felt.

Grammar checkers do not flag problems with present and past participles used as adjectives. Not surprisingly, the programs have no way of knowing the meaning a writer intends.

EXERCISE 30–3 Edit the following sentences for proper use of present and past participles. If a sentence is correct, write “correct” after it. Answers to lettered sentences appear in the back of the book. Example:

FYDJUFE

Danielle and Monica were very exciting to be going to a

?

Broadway show for the first time. a. b. c. d. e.

Listening to everyone’s complaints all day was irritated. The long flight to Singapore was exhausted. His skill at chess is amazing. After a great deal of research, the scientist made a fascinated discovery. That blackout was one of the most frightened experiences I’ve ever had.

345

346

30h 1.

ESL

Sentence structure

I couldn’t concentrate on my homework because I was distracted. The directions to the new board game seem extremely complicating. How interested are you in visiting Civil War battlefields? The aerial view of the devastated villages was depressing. Even after the lecturer went over the main points again, the students were still confusing.

2. 3. 4. 5.


30h Place cumulative adjectives in an appropriate order. Adjectives usually come before the nouns they modify and may also come after linking verbs. (See 61d and 62b.) ADJ

N

V

ADJ

Janine wore a new necklace. Janine’s necklace was new.

Cumulative adjectives, which cannot be joined by the word and or separated by commas, must come in a particular order. If you use cumulative adjectives before a noun, see the chart on page 347. The chart is only a guide; don’t be surprised if you encounter exceptions. (See also 33d.)

0

TNFMMZSFEQMBTUJD

My dorm room has only a small desk and a plastic red smelly

?

chair.

0

DMFBSCMVF

Nice weather, blue clear water, and ancient monuments

?

attract many people to Italy.

EXERCISE 30–4 Using the chart on page 347, arrange the following modifiers and nouns in their proper order. Answers to lettered items appear in the back of the book. Example:

UXPOFX'SFODISBDJOHCJDZDMFT

new, French, two, bicycles, racing

ÀìÀÊvÊ>ìVÌÛiÃ

a. b. c. d. e.

woman, young, an, Vietnamese, attractive dedicated, a, priest, Catholic old, her, sweater, blue, wool delicious, Joe’s, Scandinavian, bread many, boxes, jewelry, antique, beautiful

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

oval, nine, brass, lamps, miniature several, yellow, tulips, tiny the, tree, gingko, yellow, ancient, Mongolian courtyard, a, square, small, brick charming, restaurants, Latvian, several

ESL

30h


Order of cumulative adjectives FIRST

ARTICLE OR OTHER NOUN MARKER

a, an, the, her,

i½Ã]ÊÌÜ]Ê>Þ]ÊÃi EVALUATIVE WORDÊ >ÌÌÀ>VÌÛi]Êì`V>Ìi`]Êì-

VÕÃ]ÊÕ}Þ]Ê`Ã}ÕÃÌ} SIZEÊ >À}i]ÊiÀÕÃ]ÊÃ>]ÊÌÌi LENGTH OR SHAPEÊ }]ÊÃÀÌ]ÊÀÕ`]ÊÃµÕ>Ài AGEÊ iÜ]Ê`]ÊÞÕ}]Ê>ÌµÕi COLOR

yellow, blue, crimson

NATIONALITYÊ ÀiV]Ê*iÀÕÛ>]Ê6iÌ>iÃi RELIGIONÊ >ÌV]Ê*ÀÌiÃÌ>Ì]ÊiÜÃ]ÊÕÃ MATERIALÊ ÃÛiÀ]ÊÜ>ÕÌ]ÊÜ]Ê>ÀLi LAST

NOUN/ADJECTIVE

tree (as in tree house), kitchen

(as in kitchen table) THE NOUN MODIFIED

house, sweater, bicycle, bread, woman, priest

My long green wool coat is in the attic. Ana’s collection includes four small antique silver coins.

347

348

31

ESL

31

Prepositions and idiomatic expressions


31a Become familiar with prepositions that show time and place. The most frequently used prepositions in English are at, by, for, from, in, of, on, to, and with. Prepositions can be difficult to master because the differences among them are subtle and idiomatic. The chart on page 349 is limited to three troublesome prepositions that show time and place: at, on, and in. Not every possible use is listed in the chart, so don’t be surprised when you encounter exceptions and idiomatic uses that you must learn one at a time. For example, in English a person rides in a car but on a bus, plane, train, or subway.

0

0

0

BU

My first class starts on 8:00 a.m.

?

PO

The farmers go to market in Wednesday.

?

JO

I want to work at one of the biggest companies on the world.

? EXERCISE 31–1 In the following sentences, replace prepositions that are not used correctly. If a sentence is correct, write “correct” after it. Answers to lettered sentences appear in the back of the book. Example:

a. b. c. d. e.

BU

The play begins on 7:20 p.m.

?

Whenever we eat at the Centerville Café, we sit at a small table on the corner of the room. At the beginning of the dot-com wave, students created new businesses in record numbers. In Thursday, Nancy will attend her first home repair class at the community center. Alex began looking for her lost mitten in another location. We decided to go to a restaurant because there was no fresh food on the refrigerator.

«Ài«ÃÌÃÊÊVÊiÝ«ÀiÃÃÃÊ UÊ at, on, in

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

ESL

31a

I like walking at my neighborhood in night. If the train is on time, it will arrive on six o’clock at the morning. In the corner of the room is a large bookcase with a pair of small Russian dolls standing at the top shelf. She licked the stamp, stuck it in the envelope, put the envelope on her pocket, and walked to the nearest mailbox. The mailbox was in the intersection of Laidlaw Avenue and Williams Street.


At, on, and in to show time and place Showing time AT

at a specific time: at 7:20, at dawn, at dinner

ON

on a specific day or date: on Tuesday, onÊÕiÊ{

IN

in a part of a 24-hour period: in the afternoon, in the daytime [but atÊ}ÌR in a year or month: inÊ£]ÊinÊÕÞ in a period of time: finished in three hours

Showing place AT

atÊ>ÊiiÌ}Ê«>ViÊÀÊV>Ì\Êat home, at the club atÊÌiÊi`}iÊvÊÃiÌ}\ÊÃÌÌ}Êat the desk atÊÌiÊVÀiÀÊvÊÃiÌ}\ÊÌÕÀ}Êat the intersection atÊ>ÊÌ>À}iÌ\ÊÌÀÜ}ÊÌiÊÃÜL>Êat Lucy

ON

on a surface: placed onÊÌiÊÌ>Li]Ê>}}Êon the wall on a street: the house onÊ-«À}Ê-ÌÀiiÌ on an electronic medium: onÊÌiiÛÃ]Êon the Internet

IN

in an enclosed space: inÊÌiÊ}>À>}i]ÊinÊ>ÊiÛi«i inÊ>Ê}i}À>«VÊV>Ì\ÊinÊ->Ê i}]Êin Texas in a print medium: in a book, inÊ>Ê>}>âi

349

350

31b

ESL


31b Use nouns (including -ing forms) after prepositions. In a prepositional phrase, use a noun (not a verb) after the preposition. Sometimes the noun will be a gerund, the -ing verb form that functions as a noun (see 63b).

0

TBWJOH

Our student government is good at save money.

?

Distinguish between the preposition to and the infinitive marker to. If to is a preposition, it should be followed by a noun or a gerund.

0

IFMQJOH

We are dedicated to help the poor.

?

If to is an infinitive marker, it should be followed by the base form of the verb.

0

IFMQ

We want to helping the poor.

?

To test whether to is a preposition or an infinitive marker, insert a word that you know is a noun after the word to. If the noun makes sense in that position, to is a preposition. Zoe is addicted to

.

They are planning to

.

In the first case, a noun (such as magazines) makes sense after to, so to is a preposition and should be followed by a noun or a gerund. Zoe is addicted to magazines. Zoe is addicted to reading.

In the second case, a noun (such as village) does not make sense after to, so to is an infinitive marker and must be followed by the base form of the verb. They are planning to build a new school.

«Ài«ÃÌÊ³ÊingÊvÀÊ UÊ `ÃÊÜÌÊ«Ài«ÃÌÃ

ESL

31d

31c Become familiar with common adjective + preposition combinations. Some adjectives appear only with certain prepositions. These expressions are idiomatic and may be different from the combinations used in your native language.

0

UP

Paula is married with Jon.

?

Check an ESL dictionary for combinations that are not listed in the chart at the bottom of this page.

31d Become familiar with common verb + preposition combinations. Many verbs and prepositions appear together in idiomatic phrases. Pay special attention to the combinations that are different from the combinations used in your native language.

0

PO

Your success depends of your effort.

?

Check an ESL dictionary for combinations that are not listed in the chart on page 352.

Adjective + preposition combinations accustomed to addicted to afraid of >}ÀÞÊÜÌ ashamed of aware of committed to concerned about concerned with

connected to VÛiÀi`ÊÜÌ dedicated to ìÛÌi`ÊÌ different from i}>}i`ÊÌÊor Ê i}>}i`Ê® excited about familiar with full of

}ÕÌÞÊv interested in ÛÛi`Ê ÛÛi`ÊÜÌ known as known for made of (or made from) married to opposed to

preferable to proud of responsible for satisfied with scared of similar to tired of worried about

351

352

31d

ESL


Verb + preposition combinations >}ÀiiÊÜÌ apply to >««ÀÛiÊv >ÀÀÛiÊ>ÌÊ >ÀÀÛiÊ ask for LiiÛiÊ Li}ÊÌ care about care for compare to

compare with concentrate on consist of count on decide on depend on differ from `Ã>}ÀiiÊÜÌ dream about dream of feel like

vÀ}iÌÊ>LÕÌ happen to hope for insist on listen to participate in rely on reply to respond to result in search for

speak to (or speak with) stare at succeed at succeed in Ì>iÊ>`Û>Ì>}iÊv take care of think about think of wait for wait on

Part VII

Punctuation 32 33 34 35 36

The comma 354 Unnecessary commas 372 The semicolon 379 The colon 384 The apostrophe 387

37 Quotation marks 392 38 End punctuation 400 39 Other punctuation marks: the dash, parentheses, brackets, the ellipsis mark, the slash 403

353

354

32 32

^,

The comma

The comma

The comma was invented to help readers. Without it, sentence parts can collide into one another unexpectedly, causing misreadings. CONFUSING

If you cook Elmer will do the dishes.

CONFUSING

While we were eating a rattlesnake approached our campsite.

Add commas in the logical places (after cook and eating), and suddenly all is clear. No longer is Elmer being cooked, the rattlesnake being eaten. Various rules have evolved to prevent such misreadings and to speed readers along through complex grammatical structures. Those rules are detailed in this section. (Section 33 explains when not to use commas.) Grammar checkers rarely flag missing or misused commas. They sometimes recognize that a comma belongs before a which clause but not before a that clause (see 32e). For all other uses of the comma covered in section 32, they are unreliable.

32a Use a comma before a coordinating conjunction joining independent clauses. When a coordinating conjunction connects two or more independent clauses—word groups that could stand alone as separate sentences—a comma must precede it. There are seven coordinating conjunctions in English: and, but, or, nor, for, so, and yet. A comma tells readers that one independent clause has come to a close and that another is about to begin. 0

The department sponsored a seminar on college survival skills during fall orientation and it also hosted a barbecue

?

to make new students feel at home.

}Êì>ÃÊ UÊ with and, but]ÊiÌV°Ê UÊ ÜÌÊÌÀ`ÕVÌÀÞÊÜÀ`Ã

32b

^,

EXCEPTION: If the two independent clauses are short and there

is no danger of misreading, the comma may be omitted. The plane took off and we were on our way. TIP: As a rule, do not use a comma to separate coordinate word

groups that are not independent clauses. (See 33a.) 0

A good money manager controls expenses, and invests surplus dollars to meet future needs. The word group following and is not an independent clause; it is the second half of a compound predicate (controls . . . and invests).

32b Use a comma after an introductory clause or phrase. The most common introductory word groups are clauses and phrases functioning as adverbs. Such word groups usually tell when, where, how, why, or under what conditions the main action of the sentence occurred. (See 63a, 63b, and 63e.) A comma tells readers that the introductory clause or phrase has come to a close and that the main part of the sentence is about to begin. h 0

h

When Irwin was ready to iron his cat tripped on the cord.

?

Without the comma, readers may have Irwin ironing his cat. The comma signals that his cat is the subject of a new clause, not part of the introductory one.

0

Near a small stream at the bottom of the canyon the park rangers discovered an abandoned mine.

?

The comma tells readers that the introductory prepositional phrase has come to a close.

355

32b

356

^ ,

The comma

EXCEPTION: The comma may be omitted after a short adverb

clause or phrase if there is no danger of misreading. In no time we were at 2,800 feet.

Sentences also frequently begin with participial phrases describing the noun or pronoun immediately following them. The comma tells readers that they are about to learn the identity of the person or thing described; therefore, the comma is usually required even when the phrase is short. (See 63b.) Thinking his motorcade drive through Dallas was routine

0h

?

President Kennedy smiled and waved at the crowds.

Buried under layers of younger rocks the earth’s oldest

0h

rocks contain no fossils.

?

NOTE: Other introductory word groups include transitional expressions and absolute phrases (see 32f).

EXERCISE 32–1 Add or delete commas where necessary in the following sentences. If a sentence is correct, write “correct” after it. Answers to lettered sentences appear in the back of the book. Example:

a. b. c.

d.

Because we had been saving molding for a few weeks we had enough wood to frame all thirty paintings.

?

Alisa brought the injured bird home, and fashioned a splint out of Popsicle sticks for its wing. Considered a classic of early animation The Adventures of Prince Achmed used hand-cut silhouettes against colored backgrounds. If you complete the enclosed evaluation form and return it within two weeks you will receive a free breakfast during your next stay. After retiring from the New York City Ballet in 1965, legendary dancer Maria Tallchief went on to found the Chicago City Ballet.

^,

with introductory words

32b

e.

Roger had always wanted a handmade violin but he couldn’t afford one.

1. 2.

While I was driving a huge delivery truck ran through a red light. He pushed the car beyond the tollgate, and poured a bucket of water on the smoking hood. Lit by bright halogen lamps hundreds of origami birds sparkled like diamonds in sunlight. As the first chord sounded, Aileen knew that her spirits were about to rise. Many musicians of Bach’s time played several instruments but few mastered them as early or played with as much expression as Bach.

3. 4. 5.


a.

b.

c. d.

e. 1. 2.

The car had been sitting idle for a month so the battery was completely dead.

?

J. R. R. Tolkien finished writing his draft of The Lord of the Rings trilogy in 1949 but the first book in the series wasn’t published until 1954. In the first two minutes of its ascent the space shuttle had broken the sound barrier and reached a height of over twenty-five miles. German shepherds can be gentle guide dogs or they can be fierce attack dogs. Some former professional cyclists claim that the use of performance-enhancing drugs is widespread in cycling and they argue that no rider can be competitive without doping. As an intern, I learned most aspects of the broadcasting industry but I never learned about fundraising. To be considered for the position candidates must demonstrate initiative and strong communication skills. The cinematic lighting effect known as chiaroscuro was first used in German Expressionist filmmaking, and was later seen in American film noir.

357

32c

358

3. 4. 5.

^ ,

The comma

Reptiles are cold-blooded and they are covered with scales. Using a variety of techniques, advertisers grab the audience’s attention and imprint their messages onto consumers’ minds. By the end of the first quarter the operating budget will be available online.

32c Use a comma between all items in a series. When three or more items are presented in a series, those items should be separated from one another with commas. Items in a series may be single words, phrases, or clauses. 0h

Bubbles of air, leaves, ferns, bits of wood and insects are often found trapped in amber.

0h

?

Langston Hughes’s poetry is concerned with racial pride, social justice and the diversity of the African American experience.

?

Although some writers view the comma between the last two items as optional, most experts advise using the comma because its omission can result in ambiguity or misreading. 0h

Uncle David willed me all of his property, houses and

?

warehouses.

Did Uncle David will his property and houses and warehouses — or simply his property, consisting of houses and warehouses? If the former meaning is intended, a comma is necessary to prevent ambiguity. 0h

The activities include touring the White House, visiting the Air and Space Museum, attending a lecture about the

Founding Fathers and kayaking on the Potomac River.

?

Without the comma, the activities might seem to include a lecture about kayaking, not participating in kayaking. The comma

series (oranges, lemons, and limes®Ê UÊ LiÌÜiiÊ>ìVÌÛiÃ

^,

32d

makes it clear that kayaking on the Potomac River is a separate item in the series.

32d Use a comma between coordinate adjectives not joined with and. Do not use a comma between cumulative adjectives. When two or more adjectives each modify a noun separately, they are coordinate. Roberto is a warm, gentle, affectionate father. TEST: If the adjectives can be joined with and, the adjectives

are coordinate, so you should use commas: warm and gentle and affectionate (warm, gentle, affectionate). Adjectives that do not modify the noun separately are cumulative. Three large gray shapes moved slowly toward us.

Beginning with the adjective closest to the noun shapes, these modifiers lean on one another, piggyback style, with each modifying a larger word group. Gray modifies shapes, large modifies gray shapes, and three modifies large gray shapes. Cumulative adjectives cannot be joined with and (not three and large and gray shapes). COORDINATE ADJECTIVES

0h

Should patients with severe irreversible brain damage

?

be put on life support systems? Adjectives are coordinate if they can be connected with and: severe and irreversible. CUMULATIVE ADJECTIVES 0h

Ira ordered a rich,chocolate,layer cake. Ira didn’t order a cake that was rich and chocolate and layer: He ordered a layer cake that was chocolate, a chocolate layer cake that was rich.

359

360

32d

^ ,

The comma


a.

We gathered our essentials, took off for the great outdoors

?

and ignored the fact that it was Friday the 13th.

The cold impersonal atmosphere of the university was unbearable. An ambulance threaded its way through police cars, fire trucks and irate citizens. The 1812 Overture is a stirring, magnificent piece of music. After two broken arms, three cracked ribs and one concussion, Ken quit the varsity football team. My cat’s pupils had constricted to small black shining slits.

b. c. d. e. 1. 2.

We prefer our staff to be orderly, prompt and efficient. For breakfast the children ordered cornflakes, English muffins with peanut butter and cherry Cokes. It was a small, unimportant part, but I was happy to have it. Cyril was clad in a luminous orange rain suit and a brilliant white helmet. Animation master Hironobu Sakaguchi makes computergenerated scenes look realistic, vivid and seductive.

3. 4. 5.


a. b.

c.

Good social workers excel in patience, diplomacy and positive thinking.

?

NASA’s rovers on Mars are equipped with special cameras that can take close-up high-resolution pictures of the terrain. A baseball player achieves the triple crown by having the highest batting average, the most home runs, and the most runs batted in during the regular season. If it does not get enough sunlight, a healthy green lawn can turn into a shriveled brown mess within a matter of days.

ÜÌÊ`wiÀÃÊìÃVÀ«ÌÛiÊÜÀ`Ê }ÀÕ«Ã®Ê UÊ ÜÌÊwhich and that

d. e. 1.

2. 3. 4. 5.

^,

32e

Love, vengeance, greed and betrayal are common themes in Western literature. Many experts believe that shark attacks on surfers are a result of the sharks’ mistaking surfboards for small, injured seals. In Sherman’s march to the sea, the Union army set fire to all crops, killed all livestock and destroyed all roads and bridges in its path. Milk that comes from grass-fed steroid-free cows has been gaining market share. The film makes three main points about global warming: It is real, it is the result of human activity, and it should not be ignored. The three, handmade, turquoise bracelets brought in the most money at the charity auction. Matisse is well known for vibrant colorful prints that have been reproduced extensively on greeting cards and posters.

32e Use commas to set off nonrestrictive elements. Do not use commas to set off restrictive elements. Certain word groups that modify nouns or pronouns can be restrictive or nonrestrictive — that is, essential or not essential to the meaning of a sentence. These word groups are usually adjective clauses, adjective phrases, or appositives.

Restrictive elements A restrictive element defines or limits the meaning of the word it modifies; it is therefore essential to the meaning of the sentence and is not set off with commas. If you remove a restrictive modifier from a sentence, the meaning changes significantly, becoming more general than you intended. RESTRICTIVE (NO COMMAS)

The campers need clothes that are durable. Scientists who study the earth’s structure are called geologists.

The writer of the first sentence does not mean that the campers need clothes in general. The intended meaning is

361

362

32e

^ ,

The comma

more limited: The campers need durable clothes. The writer of the second sentence does not mean that scientists in general are called geologists; those scientists who specifically study the earth’s structure are called geologists. The italicized word groups are essential and are therefore not set off with commas.

Nonrestrictive elements A nonrestrictive modifier describes a noun or pronoun whose meaning has already been clearly defined or limited. Because the modifier contains nonessential or parenthetical information, it is set off with commas. If you remove a nonrestrictive element from a sentence, the meaning does not change dramatically. Some meaning is lost, to be sure, but the defining characteristics of the person or thing described remain the same. NONRESTRICTIVE (WITH COMMAS)

The campers need sturdy shoes, which are expensive. The scientists, who represented eight different universities, met to review applications for the prestigious O’Hara Award.

In the first sentence, the campers need sturdy shoes, and the shoes happen to be expensive. In the second sentence, the scientists met to review applications for the O’Hara Award; that they represented eight different universities is informative but not critical to the meaning of the sentence. The nonessential information in both sentences is enclosed in commas. NOTE: Often it is difficult to tell whether a word group is re-

strictive or nonrestrictive without seeing it in context and considering the writer’s meaning. Both of the following sentences are grammatically correct, but their meaning is slightly different. The dessert made with fresh raspberries was delicious. The dessert, made with fresh raspberries, was delicious.

ÜÌÊ`wiÀÃÊìÃVÀ«ÌÛiÊÜÀ`Ê }ÀÕ«Ã®Ê UÊ ÜÌÊwhich and that

^,

32e

In the first example, the phrase made with fresh raspberries tells readers which of two or more desserts the writer is referring to. In the example with commas, the phrase merely adds information about the dessert.

Adjective clauses Adjective clauses are patterned like sentences, containing subjects and verbs, but they function within sentences as modifiers of nouns or pronouns. They always follow the word they modify, usually immediately. Adjective clauses begin with a relative pronoun (who, whom, whose, which, that) or with a relative adverb (where, when). Nonrestrictive adjective clauses are set off with commas; restrictive adjective clauses are not. NONRESTRICTIVE CLAUSE (WITH COMMAS)

0h

Ed’s house which is located on thirteen acres was

?

?

completely furnished with bats in the rafters and mice in the kitchen. The adjective clause which is located on thirteen acres does not restrict the meaning of Ed’s house; the information is nonessential and is therefore enclosed in commas. RESTRICTIVE CLAUSE (NO COMMAS) 0h

The giant panda, that was born at the San Diego Zoo in 2003, was sent to China in 2007. Because the adjective clause that was born at the San Diego Zoo in 2003 identifies one particular panda out of many, the information is essential and is therefore not enclosed in commas.

NOTE: Use that only with restrictive (essential) clauses. Many

writers prefer to use which only with nonrestrictive (nonessential) clauses, but usage varies.

363

32e

364

^ ,

The comma

Adjective phrases Prepositional or verbal phrases functioning as adjectives may be restrictive or nonrestrictive. Nonrestrictive phrases are set off with commas; restrictive phrases are not. NONRESTRICTIVE PHRASE (WITH COMMAS)

0h

The helicopter with its million-candlepower spotlight

?

illuminating the area circled above.

?

The with phrase is nonessential because its purpose is not to specify which of two or more helicopters is being discussed. The phrase is not required for readers to understand the meaning of the sentence. RESTRICTIVE PHRASE (NO COMMAS)

0h

One corner of the attic was filled with newspapers, dating from the early 1900s. Dating from the early 1900s restricts the meaning of newspapers, so the comma should be omitted.

0h

The bill, proposed by the Illinois representative, would lower taxes and provide services for middle-income families. Proposed by the Illinois representative identifies exactly which bill is meant.

Appositives An appositive is a noun or noun phrase that renames a nearby noun. Nonrestrictive appositives are set off with commas; restrictive appositives are not. NONRESTRICTIVE APPOSITIVE (WITH COMMAS)

0h

Darwin’s most important book On the Origin of Species

?

was the result of many years of research.

?

ÜÌÊ`wiÀÃÊìÃVÀ«ÌÛiÊÜÀ`Ê }ÀÕ«Ã®Ê UÊ ÜÌÊÜÀ`Ê}ÀÕ«ÃÊÌ>ÌÊÀi>i

^,

32e

Most important restricts the meaning to one book, so the appositive On the Origin of Species is nonrestrictive and should be set off with commas. RESTRICTIVE APPOSITIVE (NO COMMAS)

0h

The song, “Viva la Vida,” was blasted out of huge amplifiers at the concert. Once they’ve read song, readers still don’t know precisely which song the writer means. The appositive following song restricts its meaning, so the appositive should not be enclosed in commas.


a. b.

c.

d. e. 1. 2. 3.

My youngest sister who plays left wing on the soccer

?

team now lives at The Sands a beach house near

?

Los Angeles.

?

Choreographer Alvin Ailey’s best-known work Revelations is more than just a crowd-pleaser. Twyla Tharp’s contemporary ballet Push Comes to Shove was made famous by the Russian dancer Baryshnikov. [Tharp has written more than one contemporary ballet.] The glass sculptor sifting through hot red sand explained her technique to the other glassmakers. [There is more than one glass sculptor.] A member of an organization, that provides job training for teens, was also appointed to the education commission. Brian Eno who began his career as a rock musician turned to meditative compositions in the late seventies. I had the pleasure of talking to a woman who had just returned from India where she had lived for ten years. Patrick’s oldest sister Fiona graduated from MIT with a degree in aerospace engineering. The artist painting a portrait of Aung San Suu Kyi, the Burmese civil rights leader, was once a political prisoner himself.

365

32f

366 4. 5.

^ ,

The comma

Jumanji, the 1982 Caldecott Medal winner, is my nephew’s favorite book. The flame crawled up a few blades of grass to reach a lowhanging palmetto branch which quickly ignited.

32f Use commas to set off transitional and parenthetical expressions, absolute phrases, and elements expressing contrast. Transitional expressions Transitional expressions serve as bridges between sentences or parts of sentences. They include conjunctive adverbs such as however, therefore, and moreover and transitional phrases such as for example, as a matter of fact, and in other words. (For complete lists of these expressions, see 34b.) When a transitional expression appears between independent clauses in a compound sentence, it is preceded by a semicolon and is usually followed by a comma. (See 34b.) 0h

Minh did not understand our language; moreover he was

?

unfamiliar with our customs.

When a transitional expression appears at the beginning of a sentence or in the middle of an independent clause, it is usually set off with commas. 0h

As a matter of fact American football was established

?

by fans who wanted to play a more organized game of rugby.

0h

Natural foods are not always salt free; celery for example

?

contains more sodium than most people would imagine.

?

EXCEPTION: If a transitional expression blends smoothly with the

rest of the sentence, calling for little or no pause in reading, it

with however, thereforeÊ UÊ ÜÌÊ ÌiÀÀÕ«ÌÃÊ UÊ ÜÌÊ«>ÀiÌiÌV>ÊiÝ«ÀiÃÃÃ

^,

32f

does not need to be set off with a comma. Expressions such as also, at least, certainly, consequently, indeed, of course, moreover, no doubt, perhaps, then, and therefore do not always call for a pause. Alice’s bicycle is broken; therefore you will need to borrow Sue’s. NOTE: The conjunctive adverb however always calls for a pause.

It should not be confused with the adverb however meaning “no matter how,” which does not require a pause or a comma: However hard Bill tried, he could not match his previous record.

Parenthetical expressions Expressions that are distinctly parenthetical, providing only supplemental information, should be set off with commas. They interrupt the flow of a sentence or appear at the end as afterthoughts.

0h

Evolution as far as we know doesn’t work this way.

0h

The bass weighed about twelve pounds give or take a few

?

?

?

ounces.

Absolute phrases An absolute phrase, which modifies the whole sentence, usually consists of a noun followed by a participle or participial phrase. (See 63d.) Absolute phrases may appear at the beginning or at the end of a sentence. Wherever they appear, they should be set off with commas. N

ABSOLUTE PHRASE PARTICIPLE

The sun appearing for the first time in a week, we were at last able to begin the archaeological dig.

0h

Elvis Presley made music industry history in the 1950s his records having sold more than ten million copies.

?

367

32g

368

^ ,

The comma

NOTE: Do not insert a comma between the noun and the parti-

ciple in an absolute construction. 0h

The next contestant, being five years old, the emcee adjusted the height of the microphone.

Contrasted elements Sharp contrasts beginning with words such as not, never, and unlike are set off with commas. The Epicurean philosophers sought mental not bodily

0h

?

pleasures.

?

Unlike Robert Celia loved dance contests.

0h

? 32g Use commas to set off nouns of direct address, the words yes and no, interrogative tags, and mild interjections. 0h

0h

0h

0h

Forgive me Angela for forgetting your birthday.

?

?

Yes the loan will probably be approved.

?

The film was faithful to the book wasn’t it?

?

Well cases like these are difficult to decide.

?

32h Use commas with expressions such as he said to set off direct quotations. (See also 37f.) 0h

In his “Letter from Birmingham Jail,” Martin Luther King Jr. wrote “We know through painful experience that

?

freedom is never voluntarily given by the oppressor; it must be demanded by the oppressed” (225).

with he saidÊ UÊ ÜÌÊyes and noÊ UÊ with dates, addresses, titles, numbers

0h

^,

32i

369

“Happiness in marriage is entirely a matter of chance ”

?

says Charlotte Lucas in Pride and Prejudice, a novel that ends with two happy marriages (ch. 6; 69).

See pages 528–29 on citing literary sources in MLA style.

32i Use commas with dates, addresses, titles, and numbers. Dates In dates, the year is set off from the rest of the sentence with a pair of commas. 0h

On December 12 1890 orders were sent out for the arrest of

Sitting Bull.

?

?

EXCEPTIONS: Commas are not needed if the date is inverted or if only the month and year are given. The security alert system went into effect on 15 April 2009. January 2008 was an extremely cold month.

Addresses The elements of an address or a place name are separated with commas. A zip code, however, is not preceded by a comma.

0h

John Lennon was born in Liverpool England in 1940.

0h

Please send the package to Greg Tarvin at 708 Spring Street

?

Washington IL 61571.

?

?

?

Titles If a title follows a name, separate the title from the rest of the sentence with a pair of commas.

32j

370

0h

^ ,

The comma

Sandra Belinsky MD has been appointed to the board of trustees.

?

?

Numbers In numbers more than four digits long, use commas to separate the numbers into groups of three, starting from the right. In numbers four digits long, a comma is optional. 3,500 [or 3500] 100,000 5,000,000 EXCEPTIONS: Do not use commas in street numbers, zip codes, telephone numbers, or years with four or fewer digits.

32j Use a comma to prevent confusion. In certain contexts, a comma is necessary to prevent confusion. If the writer has omitted a word or phrase, for example, a comma may be needed to signal the omission. 0h

To err is human; to forgive divine.

?

If two words in a row echo each other, a comma may be needed for ease of reading. 0h

All of the catastrophes that we had feared might happen

?

happened.

Sometimes a comma is needed to prevent readers from grouping words in ways that do not match the writer’s intention. 0h

Patients who can walk up and down the halls several times a day.

?

ÜÌÊÕLiÀÃÊ UÊ ÌÊ«ÀiÛiÌÊVvÕÃ

^,

32j

EXERCISE 32–6 This exercise covers the major uses of the comma described in 32a–32e. Add or delete commas where necessary. If a sentence is correct, write “correct” after it. Answers to lettered sentences appear in the back of the book. Example: Even though Pavel had studied Nigella Lawson’s recipes for a

a.

week he underestimated how long it would take to juice

?

two hundred lemons. Cricket which originated in England is also popular in Australia, South Africa and India. At the sound of the starting pistol the horses surged forward toward the first obstacle, a sharp incline three feet high. After seeing an exhibition of Western art Gerhard Richter escaped from East Berlin, and smuggled out many of his notebooks. Corrie’s new wet suit has an intricate, blue pattern. The cookies will keep for two weeks in sturdy airtight containers.

b. c. d. e. 1.

Research on Andean condors has shown that high levels of the pesticide chlorinated hydrocarbon can cause the thinning of eggshells. Founded in 1868 Hampton University was one of the first colleges for African Americans. Aunt Emilia was an impossible demanding guest. The French Mirage, a high-tech fighter, is an astonishing machine to fly. At the bottom of the ship’s rusty hold sat several, well-preserved trunks, reminders of a bygone era of sea travel.

2. 3. 4. 5.

EXERCISE 32–7 This exercise covers all uses of the comma. Add or delete commas where necessary in the following sentences. If a sentence is correct, write “correct” after it. Answers to lettered sentences appear in the back of the book. Example:

a. b.

“Yes dear, you can have dessert,” my mother said.

?

On January 15, 2008 our office moved to 29 Commonwealth Avenue, Mechanicsville VA 23111. The coach having bawled us out thoroughly, we left the locker room with his harsh words ringing in our ears.

371

33

372 c. d. e. 1. 2.

3. 4. 5.

no ,

Unnecessary commas

Ms. Carlson you are a valued customer whose satisfaction is very important to us. Mr. Mundy was born on July 22, 1939 in Arkansas, where his family had lived for four generations. Her board poised at the edge of the half-pipe, Nina waited her turn to drop in. President Lincoln’s original intention was to save the Union, not to destroy slavery. For centuries people believed that Greek culture had developed in isolation from the world. Today however scholars are acknowledging the contributions made by Egypt and the Middle East. Putting together a successful fundraiser, Patricia discovered, requires creativity and good timing. Fortunately science is creating many alternatives to research performed on animals. While the machine was printing the oversize paper jammed.

hackerhandbooks.com/bedhandbook > Grammar exercises > Punctuation > E-ex 32–8 to 32–10

33

Unnecessary commas

Many common misuses of the comma result from an incomplete understanding of the major comma rules presented in 32. In particular, writers frequently form misconceptions about rules 32a–32e, either extending the rules inappropriately or misinterpreting them. Such misconceptions can lead to the errors described in 33a–33e; rules 33f–33h list other common misuses of the comma.

33a Do not use a comma between compound elements that are not independent clauses. Though a comma should be used before a coordinating conjunction joining independent clauses (see 32a), this rule should not be extended to other compound word groups.

vÀÊV«Õ`ÊÜÀ`Ê}ÀÕ«ÃÊ UÊ vÀÊÛiÀÌi`Ê ÃiÌiViÃÊ UÊ LivÀiÊÀÊ>vÌiÀÊ>ÊÃiÀiÃ

0

no ,

33c

Marie Curie discovered radium,and later applied her work on radioactivity to medicine. And links two verbs in a compound predicate: discovered and applied.

0

Jake told us that his illness is serious,but that changes in his lifestyle can improve his chances for survival. The coordinating conjunction but links two subordinate clauses, each beginning with that: that his illness is serious and that changes in his lifestyle. . . .

33b Do not use a comma after a phrase that begins an inverted sentence. Though a comma belongs after most introductory phrases (see 32b), it does not belong after phrases that begin an inverted sentence. In an inverted sentence, the subject follows the verb, and a phrase that ordinarily would follow the verb is moved to the beginning (see 62c). 0

At the bottom of the hill,sat the stubborn mule.

33c Do not use a comma before the first or after the last item in a series. Though commas are required between items in a series (32c), do not place them either before or after the whole series. 0

Other causes of asthmatic attacks are,stress, change in temperature, and cold air.

0

Ironically, even novels that focus on horror, evil, and alienation,often have themes of spiritual renewal and redemption as well.

373

374

33d

no ,

Unnecessary commas

33d Do not use a comma between cumulative adjectives, between an adjective and a noun, or between an adverb and an adjective. Commas are required between coordinate adjectives (those that can be joined with and ), but they do not belong between cumulative adjectives (those that cannot be joined with and ). (For a full discussion, see 32d.) 0

In the corner of the closet we found an old, maroon hatbox from Sears.

A comma should never be used between an adjective and the noun that follows it. 0

It was a senseless, dangerous, mission.

Nor should a comma be used between an adverb and an adjective that follows it. 0

The Hillside is a good home for severely, disturbed youths.

33e Do not use commas to set off restrictive or mildly parenthetical elements. Restrictive elements are modifiers or appositives that restrict the meaning of the nouns they follow. Because they are essential to the meaning of the sentence, they are not set off with commas. (For a full discussion of restrictive and nonrestrictive elements, see 32e.) 0

Drivers, who think they own the road, make cycling a dangerous sport. The modifier who think they own the road restricts the meaning of Drivers and is therefore essential to the meaning of the sentence. Putting commas around the who clause falsely suggests that all drivers think they own the road.

LiÌÜiiÊ>ìVÌÛiÃÊ UÊ ÜÌÊiÃÃiÌ>ÊÜÀ`Ê}ÀÕ«ÃÊ

0

no ,

33f

Margaret Mead’s book, Coming of Age in Samoa, stirred up considerable controversy when it was published in 1928. Since Mead wrote more than one book, the appositive contains information essential to the meaning of the sentence.

Although commas should be used with distinctly parenthetical expressions (see 32f), do not use them to set off elements that are only mildly parenthetical. 0

Texting has, essentially, replaced e-mail for casual communication.

33f Do not use a comma to set off a concluding adverb clause that is essential to the meaning of the sentence. When adverb clauses introduce a sentence, they are nearly always followed by a comma (see 32b). When they conclude a sentence, however, they are not set off by commas if their content is essential to the meaning of the earlier part of the sentence. Adverb clauses beginning with after, as soon as, because, before, if, since, unless, until, and when are usually essential. 0

Don’t visit Paris at the height of the tourist season , unless you have booked hotel reservations. Without the unless clause, the meaning of the sentence might at first seem broader than the writer intended.

When a concluding adverb clause is nonessential, it should be preceded by a comma. Clauses beginning with although, even though, though, and whereas are usually nonessential. 0

The lecture seemed to last only a short time although the

?

clock said it had gone on for more than an hour.

375

376

33g

no ,

Unnecessary commas

33g Do not use a comma to separate a verb from its subject or object. A sentence should flow from subject to verb to object without unnecessary pauses. Commas may appear between these major sentence elements only when a specific rule calls for them. 0

Zoos large enough to give the animals freedom to roam, are becoming more popular. The comma should not separate the subject, Zoos, from the verb, are becoming.

0

The director explained to the board, that she was resigning because of a conflict of interest. The comma should not separate the verb, explained, from its object, the subordinate clause that she was resigning because of a conflict of interest.

0

Maxine Hong Kingston writes, that many Chinese


American families struggle “to figure out how the invisible

MLA-style citation

world the emigrants built around our childhoods fits in solid America” (107). The comma should not separate the verb, writes, from its object, the subordinate clause beginning with that. A signal phrase ending in a word like writes or says is followed by a comma only when a direct quotation immediately follows: Kingston writes, “Those of us in the first American generations have had to figure out how the invisible world . . .” (107). (See also 37f.)

33h Avoid other common misuses of the comma. Do not use a comma in the following situations. AFTER A COORDINATING CONJUNCTION (AND, BUT, OR, NOR, FOR, SO, YET ) 0

Occasionally TV talk shows are performed live, but, more often they are taped.

ÊV>ÊÌÊÃi«>À>ÌiÊÛiÀLÊvÀÊ ÃÕLiVÌÊÀÊLiVÌÊ UÊ ÌiÀÊÃÕÃiÃ

no ,

33h

AFTER SUCH AS OR LIKE 0

Shade-loving plants such as, begonias, impatiens, and coleus can add color to a shady garden. BEFORE THAN

0

Touring Crete was more thrilling for us, than visiting the Greek islands frequented by the rich. AFTER ALTHOUGH

0

Although, the air was balmy, the water was too cold for swimming. BEFORE A PARENTHESIS

0

At InterComm, Sylvia began at the bottom, (with only three and a half walls and a swivel chair), but within three years she had been promoted to supervisor. TO SET OFF AN INDIRECT (REPORTED) QUOTATION

0

Samuel Goldwyn once said, that a verbal contract isn’t worth the paper it’s written on. WITH A QUESTION MARK OR AN EXCLAMATION POINT

0

“Why don’t you try it?,” she coaxed. “You can’t do any worse than the rest of us.”

EXERCISE 33–1 Delete commas where necessary in the following sentences. If a sentence is correct, write “correct” after it. Answers to lettered sentences appear in the back of the book. Example: In his Silk Road Project, Yo-Yo Ma incorporates work by musicians such as, Kayhan Kahlor and Richard Danielpour.

377

378

33h a. b. c. d. e. 1. 2. 3. 4.

5.

no ,

Unnecessary commas

After the morning rains cease, the swimmers emerge from their cottages. Tricia’s first artwork was a bright, blue, clay dolphin. Some modern musicians, (trumpeter John Hassell is an example) blend several cultural traditions into a unique sound. Myra liked hot, spicy foods such as, chili, kung pao chicken, and buffalo wings. On the display screen, was a soothing pattern of light and shadow. Mesquite, the hardest of the softwoods, grows primarily in the Southwest. Jolie’s parents encouraged independent thinking, but required respect for others’ opinions. The border guards told their sergeant, that their heat-sensing equipment was malfunctioning. The streets that three hours later would be bumper to bumper with commuters, were quiet and empty except for a few prowling cats. Some first-year architecture students, expect to design intricate structures immediately.

EXERCISE 33–2 Delete commas where necessary in the following passage. Each spring since 1970, New Orleans has hosted the Jazz and Heritage Festival, an event that celebrates the music, food, and culture, of the region. Although, it is often referred to as “Jazz Fest,” the festival typically includes a wide variety of musical styles such as, gospel, Cajun, blues, zydeco, and, rock and roll. Famous musicians who have appeared regularly at Jazz Fest, include Dr. John, B. B. King, and Aretha Franklin. Large stages are set up throughout the fairgrounds in a way, that allows up to ten bands to play simultaneously without any sound overlap. Food tents are located throughout the festival, and offer popular, local dishes like crawfish Monica, jambalaya, and fried, green tomatoes. In 2009, Jazz Fest marked its fortieth anniversary. Fans, who could not attend the festival, still enjoyed the music by downloading MP3 files, and watching performances online. hackerhandbooks.com/bedhandbook > Grammar exercises > Punctuation > E-ex 33–3 and 33–4

ÃiVÃÊ UÊ }ÊVÃiÞÊÀi>Ìi`Êì>Ã

34

;

34a

The semicolon

The semicolon is used to connect major sentence elements of equal grammatical rank.

Grammar checkers flag some, but not all, misused semicolons (34d). In addition, they can alert you to some run-on sentences (34a). However, they miss more run-on sentences than they identify, and they sometimes flag correct sentences as possible run-ons.

34a Use a semicolon between closely related independent clauses not joined with a coordinating conjunction. When related independent clauses appear in one sentence, they are ordinarily linked with a comma and a coordinating conjunction (and, but, or, nor, for, so, yet). The coordinating conjunction signals the relation between the clauses. If the clauses are closely related and the relation is clear without a conjunction, they may be linked with a semicolon instead. In film, a low-angle shot makes the subject look powerful; a high-angle shot does just the opposite.

A semicolon must be used whenever a coordinating conjunction has been omitted between independent clauses. To use merely a comma creates a type of run-on sentence known as a comma splice. (See 20.) 0

In 1800, a traveler needed six weeks to get from New York City to Chicago, in 1860, the trip by railroad took only two days.

?

TIP: Do not overuse the semicolon as a means of revising run-on sentences. For other revision strategies, see 20a, 20c, and 20d.

379

380

34b

;

The semicolon

34b Use a semicolon between independent clauses linked with a transitional expression. Transitional expressions include conjunctive adverbs and transitional phrases. CONJUNCTIVE ADVERBS

accordingly also anyway besides certainly consequently conversely finally

furthermore hence however incidentally indeed instead likewise meanwhile

moreover nevertheless next nonetheless now otherwise similarly specifically

still subsequently then therefore thus

TRANSITIONAL PHRASES

after all as a matter of fact as a result at any rate at the same time

even so for example for instance in addition in conclusion

in fact in other words in the first place on the contrary on the other hand

When a transitional expression appears between independent clauses, it is preceded by a semicolon and usually followed by a comma. 0

Many corals grow very gradually, in fact, the creation of a coral reef can take centuries.

?

When a transitional expression appears in the middle or at the end of the second independent clause, the semicolon goes between the clauses. 0

Biologists have observed laughter in primates other than humans, chimpanzees, however, sound more like they are

?

panting than laughing.

with however, thereforeÊ UÊ ÜÌÊV>ÃÊ UÊ ÃÕÃiÃÊ

;

34d

Transitional expressions should not be confused with the coordinating conjunctions and, but, or, nor, for, so, and yet, which are preceded by a comma when they link independent clauses. (See 32a.)

34c Use a semicolon between items in a series containing internal punctuation. 0

Classic science fiction sagas are Star Trek, with Mr. Spock,

?

Battlestar Galactica, with its Cylons, and Star Wars,

?

with Han Solo, Luke Skywalker, and Darth Vader. Without the semicolons, the reader would have to sort out the major groupings, distinguishing between important and less important pauses according to the logic of the sentence. By inserting semicolons at the major breaks, the writer does this work for the reader.

34d Avoid common misuses of the semicolon. Do not use a semicolon in the following situations. BETWEEN A SUBORDINATE CLAUSE AND THE REST OF THE SENTENCE 0

Although children’s literature was added to the National Book Awards in 1969; it has had its own award, the Newbery Medal, since 1922.

?

BETWEEN AN APPOSITIVE AND THE WORD IT REFERS TO 0

The scientists were fascinated by the species Argyroneta aquatica; a spider that lives underwater.

?

TO INTRODUCE A LIST 0

Some of my favorite celebrities have their own blogs; Lindsay Lohan, Rosie O’Donnell, and Zach Braff.

?

381

382

34d

;

The semicolon

BETWEEN INDEPENDENT CLAUSES JOINED BY AND, BUT, OR, NOR, FOR, SO, OR YET 0

Five of the applicants had worked with spreadsheets;

?

but only one was familiar with database management. EXCEPTIONS: If at least one of the independent clauses contains internal punctuation, you may use a semicolon even though the clauses are joined with a coordinating conjunction. As a vehicle [the model T] was hard-working, commonplace, and heroic; and it often seemed to transmit those qualities to the person who rode in it. — E. B. White

Although a comma would also be correct in this sentence, the semicolon is more effective, for it indicates the relative weights of the pauses. Occasionally, a semicolon may be used to emphasize a sharp contrast or a firm distinction between clauses joined with a coordinating conjunction. We hate some persons because we do not know them; and we will not know them because we hate them. — Charles Caleb Colton

EXERCISE 34–1 Add commas or semicolons where needed in the following well-known quotations. If a sentence is correct, write “correct” after it. Answers to lettered sentences appear in the back of the book. Example: If an animal does something we call it instinct if we do

?

the same thing we call it intelligence. a. b.

c.

?

— Will Cuppy

? be kind just ask me to act as though I were. Do not ask me to — Jules Renard When men talk about defense they always claim to be protecting women and children but they never ask the women and children what they think. — Pat Schroeder When I get a little money I buy books if any is left I buy food and clothes. — Desiderius Erasmus

misuses

d.

e. 1.

2. 3.

4. 5.

;

34d

America is a country that doesn’t know where it is going but is determined to set a speed record getting there. — Lawrence J. Peter Wit has truth in it wisecracking is simply calisthenics with words. — Dorothy Parker Standing in the middle of the road is very dangerous you get knocked down by the traffic from both sides. — Margaret Thatcher I do not believe in an afterlife, although I am bringing a change of underwear. — Woody Allen Once the children were in the house the air became more vivid and more heated every object in the house grew more alive. — Mary Gordon We don’t know what we want but we are ready to bite someone to get it. — Will Rogers I’ve been rich and I’ve been poor rich is better. — Sophie Tucker

EXERCISE 34–2 Edit the following sentences to correct errors in the use of the comma and the semicolon. If a sentence is correct, write “correct” after it. Answers to lettered sentences appear in the back of the book. Example: Love is blind envy has its eyes wide open. a. b. c. d. e. 1. 2.

?

Strong black coffee will not sober you up, the truth is that time is the only way to get alcohol out of your system. Margaret was not surprised to see hail and vivid lightning, conditions had been right for violent weather all day. There is often a fine line between right and wrong; good and bad; truth and deception. My mother always says that you can’t learn common sense; either you’re born with it or you’re not. Severe, unremitting pain is a ravaging force; especially when the patient tries to hide it from others. Another delicious dish is the chef’s special; a roasted duck rubbed with spices and stuffed with wild rice. Martin Luther King Jr. had not always intended to be a preacher, initially, he had planned to become a lawyer.

383

35

384 3. 4.

5.

:

The colon

We all assumed that the thief had been Jean’s boyfriend; even though we had seen him only from the back. The Victorians avoided the subject of sex but were obsessed with death, a hundred years later, people were obsessed with sex but avoided thinking about death. Some educators believe that African American history should be taught in separate courses, others prefer to see it integrated into survey courses.

hackerhandbooks.com/bedhandbook > Grammar exercises > Punctuation > E-ex 34–3 and 34–4

35

The colon

The colon is used primarily to call attention to the words that follow it. In addition, the colon has some conventional uses.

Grammar checkers are fairly good at flagging colons that incorrectly follow a verb (The office work includes: typing, filing, and answering the phone). They also point out semicolons used where colons are needed, although they don’t suggest revisions.

35a Use a colon after an independent clause to direct attention to a list, an appositive, or a quotation. A LIST

The daily routine should include at least the following: twenty knee bends, fifty sit-ups, fifteen leg lifts, and five minutes of running in place. AN APPOSITIVE

My roommate is guilty of two of the seven deadly sins: gluttony and sloth. A QUOTATION

Consider the words of Benjamin Franklin: “There never was a good war or a bad peace.”

ÌÀ`ÕV}ÊÃÌÃÊ UÊ }ÊVÃiÞÊÀi>Ìi`Êì>ÃÊ UÊ iÛiÀÞ`>ÞÊÕÃiÊ UÊ ÌiÊ UÊ ÃÕLÌÌiÃÊ UÊ ÃÕÃiÃ

:

35d

For other ways of introducing quotations, see “Introducing quoted material” on pages 396–97.

35b Use a colon between independent clauses if the second summarizes or explains the first. Faith is like love: It cannot be forced. NOTE: When an independent clause follows a colon, it may

begin with a capital or a lowercase letter (see 45f).

35c Use a colon after the salutation in a formal letter, to indicate hours and minutes, to show proportions, between a title and subtitle, and between city and publisher in bibliographic entries. Dear Sir or Madam: 5:30 p.m. The ratio of women to men was 2:1. The Glory of Hera: Greek Mythology and the Greek Family Boston: Bedford, 2009 NOTE: In biblical references, a colon is ordinarily used between

chapter and verse (Luke 2:14). The Modern Language Association (MLA) recommends a period instead (Luke 2.14).

35d Avoid common misuses of the colon. A colon must be preceded by a full independent clause. Therefore, avoid using it in the following situations. BETWEEN A VERB AND ITS OBJECT OR COMPLEMENT 0h

Some important vitamins found in vegetables are:vitamin A, thiamine, niacin, and vitamin C.

385

386

35d

:

The colon

BETWEEN A PREPOSITION AND ITS OBJECT 0h

The heart’s two pumps each consist of: an upper chamber, or atrium, and a lower chamber, or ventricle. AFTER SUCH AS, INCLUDING, OR FOR EXAMPLE

0

The NCAA regulates college athletic teams, including : basketball, baseball, softball, and football.

EXERCISE 35–1 Edit the following sentences to correct errors in the use of the comma, the semicolon, or the colon. If a sentence is correct, write “correct” after it. Answers to lettered sentences appear in the back of the book. Example: Lifting the cover gently, Luca found the source of the odd sound; a marble in the gears. a. b. c. d. e.

1. 2.

3.

?

We always looked forward to Thanksgiving in Vermont: It was our only chance to see our Grady cousins. If we have come to fight, we are far too few, if we have come to die, we are far too many. The travel package includes: a round-trip ticket to Athens, a cruise through the Cyclades, and all hotel accommodations. The news article portrays the land use proposal as reckless; although 62 percent of the town’s residents support it. Psychologists Kindlon and Thompson (2000) offer parents a simple starting point for raising male children, “Teach boys that there are many ways to be a man” (p. 256). Harry Potter prevails against pain and evil for one reason, his heart is pure. While traveling through France, Rose visited: the Loire Valley, Chartres, the Louvre, and the McDonald’s stand at the foot of the Eiffel Tower. There are three types of leave; annual leave, used for vacations, sick leave, used for medical appointments and illness, and personal leave, used for a variety of personal reasons.

ÃÕÃiÃÊ UÊ >«ÃÌÀ«iÊ UÊ ÃÜ}ÊÜiÀÃ«Ê UÊ ÕÃ}Ê’s

4.

5.

’

36a

American poet Carl Sandburg once asked these three questions, “Who paid for my freedom? What was the price? And am I somehow beholden?” Amelie had four goals: to be encouraging, to be effective, to be efficient, and to be elegant.

hackerhandbooks.com/bedhandbook > Grammar exercises > Punctuation > E-ex 35–2

36

The apostrophe

Grammar checkers flag only some missing or misused apostrophes. They catch missing apostrophes in contractions, such as don’t. They also flag problems with possessives (sled dogs feet, a babys eyes), although they miss as many problems as they identify. Only you can decide when to add an apostrophe and whether to put it before or after the -s in possessives.

36a Use an apostrophe to indicate that a noun is possessive. Possessive nouns usually indicate ownership, as in Tim’s hat, the lawyer’s desk, or someone’s glove. Frequently, however, ownership is only loosely implied: the tree’s roots, a day’s work. If you are not sure whether a noun is possessive, try turning it into an of phrase: the roots of the tree, the work of a day.

When to add -’s 1. If the noun does not end in -s, add -’s. Luck often propels a rock musician’s career. The Children’s Defense Fund is a nonprofit organization that supports programs for poor and minority children.

387

388

36b

’

The apostrophe

2. If the noun is singular and ends in -s or an s sound, add -’s. Lois’s sister spent last year in India. Her article presents an overview of Marx’s teachings. NOTE: To avoid potentially awkward pronunciation, some writ-

ers use only the apostrophe with a singular noun ending in -s: Sophocles’.

When to add only an apostrophe If the noun is plural and ends in -s, add only an apostrophe. Both diplomats’ briefcases were searched by guards.

Joint possession To show joint possession, use -’s or (-s’ ) with the last noun only; to show individual possession, make all nouns possessive. Have you seen Joyce and Greg’s new camper? John’s and Marie’s expectations of marriage couldn’t have been more different.

Joyce and Greg jointly own one camper. John and Marie individually have different expectations.

Compound nouns If a noun is compound, use -’s (or -s’ ) with the last element. My father-in-law’s memoir about his childhood in Sri Lanka was published in October.

36b Use an apostrophe and -s to indicate that an indefinite pronoun is possessive. Indefinite pronouns refer to no specific person or thing: everyone, someone, no one, something. (See 61b.) Someone’s raincoat has been left behind.

«ÃÃiÃÃÛiÃÊ UÊ ÕÃ}Ês½Ê UÊ V«Õ`ÊÕÃÊ (father-in-law’s®Ê UÊ VÌÀ>VÌÃÊ UÊ «ÕÀ>Ã

’

36d

36c Use an apostrophe to mark omissions in contractions and numbers. In a contraction, the apostrophe takes the place of one or more missing letters. It’s a shame that Frank can’t go on the tour.

It’s stands for it is, can’t for cannot. The apostrophe is also used to mark the omission of the first two digits of a year (the class of ’08) or years (the ’60s generation).

36d Do not use an apostrophe to form the plural of numbers, letters, abbreviations, and words mentioned as words. An apostrophe typically is not used to pluralize numbers, letters, abbreviations, and words mentioned as words. Note the few exceptions and be consistent throughout your paper. Plural numbers Omit the apostrophe in the plural of all numbers, including decades. Oksana skated nearly perfect figure 8s. The 1920s are known as the Jazz Age.

Plural letters Italicize the letter and use roman (regular) font style for the -s ending. Do not italicize academic grades. Two large Js were painted on the door. He received two Ds for the first time in his life. EXCEPTIONS: To avoid misreading, use an apostrophe to form the plural of lowercase letters and the capital letters A and I: p’s, A’s. Beginning readers often confuse b’s and d’s. MLA NOTE: The Modern Language Association recommends

using an apostrophe for the plural of both capital and lowercase letters: J’s, p’s.

389

36e

390

’

The apostrophe

Plural abbreviations an abbreviation.

Do not use an apostrophe to pluralize

Harriet has thirty DVDs on her desk. Marco earned two PhDs before his thirtieth birthday.

Plural of words mentioned as words Generally, omit the apostrophe to form the plural of words mentioned as words. If the word is italicized, the -s ending appears in roman (regular) type. We’ve heard enough maybes.

Words mentioned as words may also appear in quotation marks. When you choose this option, use the apostrophe. We’ve heard enough “maybe’s.”

36e Avoid common misuses of the apostrophe. Do not use an apostrophe in the following situations. WITH NOUNS THAT ARE NOT POSSESSIVE

0h

PVUQBUJFOUT

Some outpatient’s have special parking permits.

?

IN THE POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS ITS, WHOSE, HIS, HERS, OURS, YOURS, AND THEIRS

0h

JUT

Each area has it’s own conference room.

?

It’s means “it is.” The possessive pronoun its contains no apostrophe despite the fact that it is possessive. 0h

The House on Mango Street was written by Sandra Cisneros,

XIPTF

who’s work focuses on the Latino community in the

? United States. Who’s means “who is.” The possessive pronoun is whose.

>LLÀiÛ>ÌÃÊ UÊ ÃÕÃiÃ

’

36e

EXERCISE 36–1 Edit the following sentences to correct errors in the use of the apostrophe. If a sentence is correct, write “correct” after it. Answers to lettered sentences appear in the back of the book. Example: We rented an art studio above a barbecue restaurant, Poor

a. b. c. d. e. 1. 2.

3. 4. 5.

3JDIBSE©T

Richards Ribs.

?This diet will improve almost anyone’s health. The innovative shoe fastener was inspired by the designers young son. Each days menu features a different European country’s dish. Sue worked overtime to increase her families earnings. Ms. Jacobs is unwilling to listen to students complaints about computer failures. Siddhartha sat by the river and listened to its many voices. Three teenage son’s can devour about as much food as four full-grown field hands. The only difference is that they dont do half as much work. We handle contracts with NASA and many other government agency’s. Patience and humor are key tools in a travelers survival kit. My sister-in-law’s quilts are being shown at the Fendrick Gallery.

EXERCISE 36–2 Edit the following passage to correct errors in the use of the apostrophe. Its never too soon to start holiday shopping. In fact, some people choose to start shopping as early as January, when last seasons leftover’s are priced at their lowest. Many stores try to lure customers in with promise’s of savings up to 90 percent. Their main objective, of course, is to make way for next years inventory. The big problem with postholiday shopping, though, is that there isn’t much left to choose from. Store’s shelves have been picked over by last-minute shoppers desperately searching for gifts. The other problem is that its hard to know what to buy so far in advance. Next year’s hot items are anyones guess. But proper timing, mixed with lot’s of luck and determination, can lead to good purchases at great price’s. hackerhandbooks.com/bedhandbook > Grammar exercises > Punctuation > E-ex 36–3 and 36–4

391

392

37

“”

37

Quotation marks

Quotation marks

Grammar checkers are no help with quotation marks. They do not recognize direct and indirect quotations, they fail to identify quotation marks used incorrectly inside periods and commas, and they do not point out a missing quotation mark in a pair.

37a Use quotation marks to enclose direct quotations. Direct quotations of a person’s words, whether spoken or written, must be in quotation marks. “The contract negotiations are stalled,” the airline executive told reporters, “but I am prepared to work night and day to bring both sides together.”

Do not use quotation marks around indirect quotations. An indirect quotation reports someone’s ideas without using that person’s exact words. The airline executive told reporters that although contract negotiations were at a standstill, she was prepared to work hard with both labor and management to bring about a settlement. NOTE: In academic writing, indirect quotation is called para-

phrase or summary. See 48c. In dialogue, begin a new paragraph to mark a change in speaker. “Mom, his name is Willie, not William. A thousand times I’ve told you, it’s Willie.” “Willie is a derivative of William, Lester. Surely his birth certificate doesn’t have Willie on it, and I like calling people by their proper names.” “Yes, it does, ma’am. My mother named me Willie K. Mason.” — Gloria Naylor

ÜÌÊ`ÀiVÌÊµÕÌ>ÌÃÊ UÊ ÜÌÊiÝ>VÌÊ >}Õ>}iÊ UÊ ÌÊÜÌÊ}]ÊìÌi`ÊµÕÌ>ÌÃ

“”

37b

If a single speaker utters more than one paragraph, introduce each paragraph with quotation marks, but do not use closing quotation marks until the end of the speech.

37b Set off long quotations of prose or poetry by indenting. The guidelines in this section are those of the Modern Language Association (MLA). The American Psychological Association (APA) and The Chicago Manual of Style have slightly different guidelines (see pp. 631–32 and 695–96). When a quotation of prose runs to more than four typed lines in your paper, set it off by indenting one inch from the left margin. Quotation marks are not required because the indented format tells readers that the quotation is taken word-for-word from a source. Long quotations are ordinarily introduced by a sentence ending with a colon. After making an exhaustive study of the historical record, James Horan evaluates Billy the Kid like this: The portrait that emerges of [the Kid] from the thousands of pages of affidavits, reports, trial transcripts, his letters, and his testimony is neither the mythical Robin Hood nor the stereotyped adenoidal moron and pathological killer. Rather Billy appears as a disturbed, lonely young man, honest, loyal to his friends, dedicated to his beliefs, and betrayed by our institutions and the corrupt, ambitious, and compromising politicians in his time. (158)

The number in parentheses is a citation handled according to MLA style. (See 53a.) NOTE: When you quote two or more paragraphs from the

source, indent the first line of each paragraph an additional one-quarter inch. When you quote more than three lines of a poem, indent the quoted lines one inch from the left margin. Use no

393

394

37c

“”

Quotation marks

quotation marks unless they appear in the poem itself. (To quote two or three lines of poetry, see 39e.) Although many anthologizers “modernize” her punctuation, Emily Dickinson relied heavily on dashes, using them, perhaps, as a musical device. Here, for example, is the original version of the opening of one poem: A narrow Fellow in the Grass Occasionally rides — You may have met Him — did you not His notice sudden is — (1-4)

37c Use single quotation marks to enclose a quotation within a quotation. Megan Marshall notes that what Elizabeth Peabody “hoped to accomplish in her school was not merely ‘teaching’ but ‘educating children morally and spiritually as well as intellectually from the first’” (107).

37d Use quotation marks around the titles of short works. Short works include newspaper and magazine articles, poems, short stories, songs, episodes of television and radio programs, and chapters or subdivisions of books. James Baldwin’s story “Sonny’s Blues” tells the story of two brothers who come to understand each other’s suffering. NOTE: Titles of books, plays, Web sites, television and radio

programs, films, magazines, and newspapers are put in italics.

37e Quotation marks may be used to set off words used as words. Although words used as words are ordinarily italicized (see 42d), quotation marks are also acceptable. Be consistent throughout your paper.

µÕÌ>ÌÊÜÌÊ>ÊµÕÌ>ÌÊ UÊ >ÀÌViÃÊ UÊ «iÃÊ UÊ ÃÀÌÊÃÌÀiÃÊ UÊ Ã}ÃÊ UÊ ÜÌÊÌiÀÊ«ÕVÌÕ>ÌÊ>ÀÃ

“”

37f

The words “accept” and “except” are frequently confused. The words accept and except are frequently confused.

37f Use punctuation with quotation marks according to convention. This section describes the conventions used by American publishers in placing various marks of punctuation inside or outside quotation marks. It also explains how to punctuate when introducing quoted material.

Periods and commas Place periods and commas inside quotation marks. “I’m here as part of my service-learning project,” I told the classroom teacher. “I’m hoping to become a reading specialist.”

This rule applies to single quotation marks as well as double quotation marks. (See 37c.) It also applies to all uses of quotation marks: for quoted material, for titles of works, and for words used as words. EXCEPTION: In the Modern Language Association’s style of par-

enthetical in-text citations (see 53a), the period follows the citation in parentheses. James M. McPherson comments, approvingly, that the Whigs “were not averse to extending the blessings of American liberty, even to Mexicans and Indians” (48).

Colons and semicolons Put colons and semicolons outside quotation marks. Harold wrote, “I regret that I am unable to attend the fundraiser for AIDS research”; his letter, however, came with a substantial contribution.

395

396

37f

“”

Quotation marks

Question marks and exclamation points Put question marks and exclamation points inside quotation marks unless they apply to the whole sentence. Contrary to tradition, bedtime at my house is marked by “Mommy, can I tell you a story now?” Have you heard the old proverb “Do not climb the hill until you reach it”?

In the first sentence, the question mark applies only to the quoted question. In the second sentence, the question mark applies to the whole sentence. NOTE: In MLA style for a quotation that ends with a question

mark or an exclamation point, the parenthetical citation and a period should follow the entire quotation. Rosie Thomas asks, “Is nothing in life ever straight and clear, the way children see it?”(77).

Introducing quoted material After a word group introducing a quotation, choose a colon, a comma, or no punctuation at all, whichever is appropriate in context. Formal introduction If a quotation is formally introduced, a colon is appropriate. A formal introduction is a full independent clause, not just an expression such as he said or she remarked. Thomas Friedman provides a challenging yet optimistic view of the future: “We need to get back to work on our country and on our planet. The hour is late, the stakes couldn’t be higher, the project couldn’t be harder, the payoff couldn’t be greater” (25).

Expression such as he said If a quotation is introduced with an expression such as he said or she remarked — or if it is followed by such an expression — a comma is needed. About New England’s weather, Mark Twain once declared, “In the spring I have counted one hundred and thirty-six different kinds of weather within four and twenty hours” (55).

ÜÌÊÌiÀÊ«ÕVÌÕ>ÌÊ>ÀÃÊ UÊ introducing quoted material

“”

37f

“Unless another war is prevented it is likely to bring destruction on a scale never before held possible and even now hardly conceived,” Albert Einstein wrote in the aftermath of the atomic bomb (29).

Blended quotation When a quotation is blended into the writer’s own sentence, either a comma or no punctuation is appropriate, depending on the way in which the quotation fits into the sentence structure. The future champion could, as he put it, “float like a butterfly and sting like a bee.” Virginia Woolf wrote in 1928 that “a woman must have money and a room of her own if she is to write fiction; and that, as you will see, leaves the great problem of the true nature of woman and the true nature of fiction unsolved” (4).

Beginning of sentence If a quotation appears at the beginning of a sentence, set it off with a comma unless the quotation ends with a question mark or an exclamation point. “I’ve always thought of myself as a reporter,” claimed American poet Gwendolyn Brooks (162). “What is it?” she asked, bracing herself.

Interrupted quotation If a quoted sentence is interrupted by explanatory words, use commas to set off the explanatory words. “With regard to air travel,” Stephen Ambrose notes, “Jefferson was a full century ahead of the curve” (53).

If two successive quoted sentences from the same source are interrupted by explanatory words, use a comma before the explanatory words and a period after them. “Everyone agrees journalists must tell the truth,” Bill Kovach and Tom Rosenstiel write. “Yet people are befuddled about what ‘the truth’ means” (37).

397

37g

398

“”

Quotation marks

37g Avoid common misuses of quotation marks. Do not use quotation marks to draw attention to familiar slang, to disown trite expressions, or to justify an attempt at humor. 0h

The economist estimated that single-family home prices would decline another 5 percent by the end of the year,

emphasizing that this was only a “ ballpark figure.”

Do not use quotation marks around indirect quotations. (See also 37a.) 0h

After leaving the scene of the domestic quarrel, the officer

said that “ he was due for a coffee break.”

Do not use quotation marks around the title of your own essay. EXERCISE 37–1 Add or delete quotation marks as needed and make any other necessary changes in punctuation in the following sentences. If a sentence is correct, write “correct” after it. Answers to lettered sentences appear in the back of the book. Example:

a.

b.

c. d.

Gandhi once said, ¦An eye for an eye only ends up making

?

the whole world blind.

?

As for the advertisement “Sailors have more fun”, if you consider chipping paint and swabbing decks fun, then you will have plenty of it. Even after forty minutes of discussion, our class could not agree on an interpretation of Robert Frost’s poem “The Road Not Taken.” After winning the lottery, Juanita said that “she would give half the money to charity.” After the movie, Vicki said, “The reviewer called this flick “trash of the first order.” I guess you can’t believe everything you read.”

misuses

“”

37g

e.

“Cleaning your house while your kids are still growing,” said Phyllis Diller, “is like shoveling the walk before it stops snowing.”

1.

“That’s the most beautiful seashell I’ve ever seen!”, shouted Alexa. “Get your head in the game, and the rest will come” advised the coach just before the whistle. Gloria Steinem once twisted an old proverb like this, “A woman without a man is like a fish without a bicycle.” “Even when freshly washed and relieved of all obvious confections,” says Fran Lebowitz, “children tend to be sticky.” Have you heard the Cowboy Junkies’ cover of Hank Williams’s “I’m So Lonesome I Could Cry?”

2. 3. 4. 5.

EXERCISE 37–2 Add or delete quotation marks as needed and make any other necessary changes in punctuation in the following passage. Citations should conform to MLA style (see 53a). In his article The Moment of Truth, former vice president Al Gore argues that global warming is a genuine threat to life on Earth and that we must act now to avoid catastrophe. Gore calls our situation a “true planetary emergency” and cites scientific evidence of the greenhouse effect and its consequences (170-71). “What is at stake, Gore insists, is the survival of our civilization and the habitability of the Earth (197).” With such a grim predicament at hand, Gore questions why so many political and economic leaders are reluctant to act. “Is it simply more convenient to ignore the warnings,” he asks (171)? The crisis, of course, will not go away if we just pretend it isn’t there. Gore points out that in Chinese two symbols form the character for the word crisis. The first of those symbols means “danger”, and the second means “opportunity.” The danger we face, he claims, is accompanied by “unprecedented opportunity.” (172) Gore contends that throughout history we have won battles against seemingly unbeatable evils such as slavery and fascism and that we did so by facing the truth and choosing the moral high ground. Gore’s final appeal is to our humanity: “Ultimately, [the fight to end global warming] is not about any scientific discussion or political dialogue; it

399

400

38

.?!

End punctuation

is about who we are as human beings. It is about our capacity to transcend our limitations, to rise to this new occasion. To see with our hearts, as well as our heads, the response that is now called for.” (244) Gore feels that the fate of our world rests in our own hands, and his hope is that we will make the choice to save the planet. Quotations are from Al Gore, “The Moment of Truth,” Vanity Fair May 2006: 170+; print. hackerhandbooks.com/bedhandbook > Grammar exercises > Punctuation > E-ex 37–3 and 37–4

38

End punctuation

Grammar checkers occasionally flag sentences beginning with words like Why or Are and suggest that a question mark may be needed. On the whole, however, grammar checkers are of little help with end punctuation. Most notably, they neglect to tell you when your sentence is missing end punctuation.

38a The period Use a period to end all sentences except direct questions or genuine exclamations. Also use periods in abbreviations according to convention.

To end sentences Most sentences should end with a period. Problems sometimes arise when a writer must choose between a period and a question mark or between a period and an exclamation point. If a sentence reports a question instead of asking it directly, it should end with a period, not a question mark. 0h

The professor asked whether talk therapy was more beneficial than antidepressants?

?

ÌÊi`Ê>ÊÃiÌiViÊ UÊ «iÀ`ÃÊÊ>LLÀiÛ>ÌÃÊ UÊ µÕiÃÌÊ>À

.?!

38b

If a sentence is not a genuine exclamation, it should end with a period, not an exclamation point. (See also 38c.) 0h

After years of working her way through school, Geeta finally graduated with high honors!

?

In abbreviations A period is conventionally used in abbreviations of titles and Latin words or phrases, including the time designations for morning and afternoon. Mr. Ms. Dr.

i.e. e.g. etc.

a.m. (or AM) p.m. (or PM)

NOTE: If a sentence ends with a period marking an abbrevia-

tion, do not add a second period. Do not use a period with US Postal Service abbreviations for states: MD, TX, CA. Current usage is to omit the period in abbreviations of organization names, academic degrees, and designations for eras. NATO IRS USA

UNESCO AFL-CIO NAACP

UCLA NIH SEC

BS PhD RN

BC AD BCE

38b The question mark A direct question should be followed by a question mark. What is the horsepower of a 777 engine?

If a polite request is written in the form of a question, it may be followed by a period. Would you please send me your catalog of lilies. TIP: Do not use a question mark after an indirect question, one that is reported rather than asked directly. Use a period instead.

401

402

38c 0h

.?!

End punctuation

He asked me who was teaching the mythology course this year?

?

NOTE: Questions in a series may be followed by question marks

even when they are not complete sentences. We wondered where Calamity had hidden this time. Under the sink? Behind the furnace? On top of the bookcase?

38c The exclamation point Use an exclamation point after a word group or sentence to express exceptional feeling or to provide special emphasis. The exclamation point is rarely appropriate in academic writing. When Gloria entered the room, I switched on the lights, and we all yelled, “Surprise!” TIP: Do not overuse the exclamation point. 0h

In the fisherman’s memory the fish lives on, increasing in length and weight with each passing year, until at last it is

big enough to shade a fishing boat!

?

This sentence doesn’t need to be pumped up with an exclamation point. It is emphatic enough without it. 0h

Whenever I see my favorite hitter, Derek Lee, up at bat,

I dream of making it to the big leagues! My team would

win every time!

?

The first exclamation point should be deleted so that the second one will have more force.

EXERCISE 38–1 Add appropriate end punctuation in the following paragraph. Although I am generally rational, I am superstitious I never walk under ladders or put shoes on the table If I spill

iÝV>>ÌÊ«ÌÊ UÊ `>ÃÊ

—

39a

the salt, I go into frenzied calisthenics picking up the grains and tossing them over my left shoulder As a result of these curious activities, I’ve always wondered whether knowing the roots of superstitions would quell my irrational responses Superstition has it, for example, that one should never place a hat on the bed This superstition arises from a time when head lice were common and placing a guest’s hat on the bed stood a good chance of spreading lice through the host’s bed Doesn’t this make good sense And doesn’t it stand to reason that if I know that my guests don’t have lice I shouldn’t care where their hats go Of course it does It is fair to ask, then, whether I have changed my ways and place hats on beds Are you kidding I wouldn’t put a hat on a bed if my life depended on it

39

Other punctuation marks: the dash, parentheses, brackets, the ellipsis mark, the slash

Grammar checkers rarely flag problems with the punctuation marks in this section: the dash, parentheses, brackets, the ellipsis mark, and the slash.

39a The dash When typing, use two hyphens to form a dash (--). Do not put spaces before or after the dash. If your word processing program has what is known as an “em-dash” (—), you may use it instead, with no space before or after it. Dashes are used for the following purposes.

To set off parenthetical material that deserves emphasis Everything that went wrong — from the peeping Tom at her window last night to my head-on collision today — we blamed on our move.

403

39b

404

—()

Other punctuation marks

To set off appositives that contain commas An appositive is a noun or noun phrase that renames a nearby noun. Ordinarily most appositives are set off with commas (32e), but when the appositive itself contains commas, a pair of dashes helps readers see the relative importance of all the pauses. In my hometown, the basic needs of people — food, clothing, and shelter — are less costly than in a big city like Los Angeles.

To prepare for a list, a restatement, an amplification, or a dramatic shift in tone or thought Along the wall are the bulk liquids — sesame seed oil, honey, safflower oil, and that half-liquid “peanuts only” peanut butter. In his last semester, Peter tried to pay more attention to his priorities—applying to graduate school and getting financial aid. Everywhere we looked there were little kids — a box of Cracker Jacks in one hand and mommy or daddy’s sleeve in the other. Kiere took a few steps back, came running full speed, kicked a mighty kick — and missed the ball.

In the first two examples, the writer could also use a colon. (See 35a.) The colon is more formal than the dash and not quite as dramatic. TIP: Unless there is a specific reason for using the dash, avoid it. Unnecessary dashes create a choppy effect. 0h

Insisting that students use computers as instructional

tools—for information retrieval—makes good sense. Herding

them — sheeplike — into computer technology does not.

39b Parentheses Use parentheses to enclose supplemental material, minor digressions, and afterthoughts.

`>ÃÊ UÊ «>ÀiÌiÃiÃÊ UÊ LÀ>ViÌÃÊ UÊ ÃiÀÌi`Ê>ÌiÀ>Ê UÊ QÃVR

()[]

39c

Nurses record patients’ vital signs (temperature, pulse, and blood pressure) several times a day.

Use parentheses to enclose letters or numbers labeling items in a series. Regulations stipulated that only the following equipment could be used on the survival mission: (1) a knife, (2) thirty feet of parachute line, (3) a book of matches, (4) two ponchos, (5) an E tool, and (6) a signal flare. TIP: Do not overuse parentheses. Rough drafts are likely to contain more afterthoughts than necessary. As writers head into a sentence, they often think of additional details, occasionally working them in as best they can with parentheses. Usually such sentences should be revised so that the additional details no longer seem to be afterthoughts.

0h

GSPN

Researchers have said that seventeen million (estimates run

UP

?

as high as twenty-three million ) Americans have diabetes.

?

39c Brackets Use brackets to enclose any words or phrases that you have inserted into an otherwise word-for-word quotation. Audubon reports that “if there are not enough young to balance deaths, the end of the species [California condor] is inevitable.”

The sentence quoted from the Audubon article did not contain the words California condor (since the context of the full article made clear what species was meant), so the writer needed to add the name in brackets. The Latin word “sic” in brackets indicates that an error in a quoted sentence appears in the original source. According to the review, Nelly Furtado’s performance was brilliant, “exceding [sic] the expectations of even her most loyal fans.”

405

406

39d

...


Do not overuse “sic,” however, since calling attention to others’ mistakes can appear snobbish. The preceding quotation, for example, might have been paraphrased instead: According to the review, even Nelly Furtado’s most loyal fans were surprised by the brilliance of her performance.

39d The ellipsis mark The ellipsis mark consists of three spaced periods. Use an ellipsis mark to indicate that you have deleted words from an otherwise word-for-word quotation. Reuben reports that “when the amount of cholesterol circulating in the blood rises over . . . 300 milligrams per 100, the chances of a heart attack increase dramatically.”

If you delete a full sentence or more in the middle of a quoted passage, use a period before the three ellipsis dots. “Most of our efforts,” writes Dave Erikson, “are directed toward saving the bald eagle’s wintering habitat along the Mississippi River. . . . It’s important that the wintering birds have a place to roost, where they can get out of the cold wind.” TIP: Ordinarily, do not use the ellipsis mark at the beginning or at the end of a quotation. Readers will understand that the quoted material is taken from a longer passage. If you have cut some words from the end of the final quoted sentence, however, MLA requires an ellipsis mark, as in the third example on page 505.

In quoted poetry, use a full line of ellipsis dots to indicate that you have dropped a line or more from the poem, as in this example from “To His Coy Mistress” by Andrew Marvell: Had we but world enough, and time, This coyness, lady, were no crime. ........................................ But at my back I always hear Time’s wingèd chariot hurrying near; (1-2, 21-22)

i«ÃÃÊ>ÀÊ UÊ `ÌÃÊ UÊ VÕÌÃÊÊµÕÌ>ÌÃÊ UÊ Ã>ÃÊ UÊ iÃÊvÊ«iÌÀÞ

/

39e

The ellipsis mark may also be used to indicate a hesitation or an interruption in speech or to suggest unfinished thoughts. “The apartment building next door . . . it’s going up in flames!” yelled Marcia. Before falling into a coma, the victim whispered, “It was a man with a tattoo on his . . . ”

39e The slash Use the slash to separate two or three lines of poetry that have been run into your text. Add a space both before and after the slash. In the opening lines of “Jordan,” George Herbert pokes gentle fun at popular poems of his time: “Who says that fictions only and false hair / Become a verse? Is there in truth no beauty?” (1-2).

More than three lines of poetry should be handled as an indented quotation. (See 37b.) The slash may occasionally be used to separate paired terms such as pass/fail and producer/director. Do not use a space before or after the slash. Be sparing in this use of the slash. In particular, avoid the use of and/or, he/she, and his/her. Instead of using he/she and his/her to solve sexist language problems, you can usually find more graceful alternatives. (See 17f and 22a.) EXERCISE 39–1 Edit the following sentences to correct errors in punctuation, focusing especially on appropriate use of the dash, parentheses, brackets, ellipsis mark, and slash. If a sentence is correct, write “correct” after it. Answers to lettered sentences appear in the back of the book. Example:

a. b.

Social insects,¥ bees, for example,¥ are able to

?

?

communicate complicated messages to one another. A client has left his/her cell phone in our conference room. The films we made of Kilauea — on our trip to Hawaii Volcanoes National Park — illustrate a typical spatter cone eruption.

407

408

39e c. d.

e.

1. 2.

3.

4. 5.

/


Greg selected the pass/fail option for Chemistry 101. Masahiro poked through his backpack — laptop, digital camera, guidebook — to make sure he was ready for a day’s study at the Ryoanji Temple garden. Of three engineering fields, chemical, mechanical, and materials, Keegan chose materials engineering for its application to toy manufacturing. The old Valentine verse we used to chant says it all: “Sugar is sweet, / And so are you.” In studies in which mothers gazed down at their infants in their cribs but remained facially unresponsive, for example, not smiling, laughing, or showing any change of expression, the infants responded with intense weariness and eventual withdrawal. There are three points of etiquette in poker: 1. always allow someone else to cut the cards, 2. don’t forget to ante up, and 3. never stack your chips. In Lifeboat, Alfred Hitchcock appears [some say without his knowledge] in a newspaper advertisement for weight loss. The writer Chitra Divakaruni explained her work with other Indian American immigrants: “Many women who came to Maitri [a women’s support group in San Francisco] needed to know simple things like opening a bank account or getting citizenship. . . . Many women in Maitri spoke English, but their English was functional rather than emotional. They needed someone who understands their problems and speaks their language.”

hackerhandbooks.com/bedhandbook > Grammar exercises > Punctuation > E-ex 39–2

Part VIII

Mechanics 40 Abbreviations 410 41 Numbers 413 42 Italics 416

43 Spelling 418 44 The hyphen 428 45 Capitalization 432

409

410

40

abbr

40

Abbreviations

Abbreviations

Grammar checkers can flag a few inappropriate abbreviations, such as Xmas and e.g., but do not assume that a program will catch all problems with abbreviations.

40a Use standard abbreviations for titles immediately before and after proper names. TITLES BEFORE PROPER NAMES

TITLES AFTER PROPER NAMES

Mr. Rafael Zabala Ms. Nancy Linehan Mrs. Edward Horn Dr. Margaret Simmons Rev. John Stone Prof. James Russo

William Albert Sr. Thomas Hines Jr. Anita Lor, PhD Robert Simkowski, MD Margaret Chin, LLD Polly Stein, DDS

Do not abbreviate a title if it is not used with a proper name.

QSPGFTTPS

0

My history prof. is an expert on race relations in South Africa.

?

Avoid redundant titles such as Dr. Amy Day, MD. Choose one title or the other: Dr. Amy Day or Amy Day, MD.

40b Use abbreviations only when you are sure your readers will understand them. Familiar abbreviations, written without periods, are acceptable. CIA NBA YMCA

FBI NEA CBS

MD PhD USA

NAACP CD-ROM ESL

Talk show host Conan O’Brien is a Harvard graduate with a BA in history. The YMCA has opened a new gym close to my office.

vÀÊÌÌiÃÊÜÌÊ>iÃÊ UÊ vÀÊv>>ÀÊÌiÀÃÊ UÊ `>ÌiÃÊ UÊ ÌiÊ UÊ iÞÊ UÊ >ÌÊe.g., et al.)

abbr

40d

NOTE: When using an unfamiliar abbreviation (such as NASW

for National Association of Social Workers) throughout a paper, write the full name followed by the abbreviation in parentheses at the first mention of the name. Then use just the abbreviation throughout the rest of the paper.

40c Use BC, AD, a.m., p.m., No., and $ only with specific dates, times, numbers, and amounts. The abbreviation BC (“before Christ”) follows a date, and AD (“anno Domini”) precedes a date. Acceptable alternatives are BCE (“before the common era”) and CE (“common era”), both of which follow a date. 40 BC (or 40 BCE) AD 44 (or 44 CE)

4:00 a.m. (or AM) 6:00 p.m. (or PM)

No. 12 (or no. 12) $150

Avoid using a.m., p.m., No., or $ when not accompanied by a specific figure. 0

The governor argued that the new sales tax would raise

NPOFZ

much-needed $ for the state.

? 40d Be sparing in your use of Latin abbreviations. Latin abbreviations are acceptable in footnotes and bibliographies and in informal writing for comments in parentheses. cf. (Latin confer, “compare”) e.g. (Latin exempli gratia, “for example”) et al. (Latin et alia, “and others”) etc. (Latin et cetera, “and so forth”) i.e. (Latin id est, “that is”) N.B. (Latin nota bene, “note well”) Harold Simms et al., The Race for Space Alfred Hitchcock directed many classic thrillers (e.g., Psycho, Rear Window, and Vertigo).

411

40e

412

abbr

Abbreviations

In formal writing, use the appropriate English phrases. 0

Many obsolete laws remain on the books. A law in

GPSFYBNQMF

Vermont, e.g., forbids an unmarried man and woman to

?

sit closer than six inches apart on a park bench.

40e Avoid inappropriate abbreviations. In formal writing, abbreviations for the following are not commonly accepted: personal names, units of measurement, days of the week, holidays, months, courses of study, divisions of written works, states, and countries (except in complete addresses and except Washington, DC). Do not abbreviate Company and Incorporated unless their abbreviated forms are part of an official name. PERSONAL NAMES Charles (not Chas.) UNITS OF MEASUREMENT feet (not ft.) DAYS OF THE WEEK Monday (not Mon.) HOLIDAYS Christmas (not Xmas) MONTHS January, February, March (not Jan., Feb., Mar.) COURSES OF STUDY political science (not poli. sci.) DIVISIONS OF WRITTEN WORKS chapter, page (not ch., p.) STATES AND COUNTRIES Massachusetts (not MA or Mass.) PARTS OF A BUSINESS NAME Adams Lighting Company (not Adams Lighting Co.); Kim and Brothers (not Kim and Bros.) 0

The American Red Cross requires that blood donors be at QPVOET ZFBST least seventeen yrs. old, weigh at least 110 lb., and not

?

XFFLT

have given blood in the past eight wks.

?

? EXERCISE 40–1 Edit the following sentences to correct errors in abbreviations. If a sentence is correct, write “correct” after it. Answers to lettered sentences appear in the back of the book. Example:

ÜiÊÌÊÌÊ>LLÀiÛ>ÌiÊ UÊ ÕLiÀÃÊ UÊ ÜiÊÌÊÃ«iÊÕÌ

a. b. c. d. e. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

$ISJTUNBT

5VFTEBZ

?

?

num

41a

This year Xmas will fall on a Tues.

Since its inception, the BBC has maintained a consistently high standard of radio and television broadcasting. Some combat soldiers are trained by govt. diplomats to be sensitive to issues of culture, history, and religion. Mahatma Gandhi has inspired many modern leaders, including Martin Luther King Jr. How many lb. have you lost since you began running four miles a day? Denzil spent all night studying for his psych. exam. My favorite prof., Dr. Barker, is on sabbatical this semester. When we visited NYU in early September, we were charmed by the lull of summer crickets in Washington Square Park. Some historians think that the New Testament was completed by AD 100. My mother’s birthday was on Fri. the 13th this year. Some first-time Flash users panic before the complex menus — i.e., they develop a blank stare and the tingling of a migraine.

hackerhandbooks.com/bedhandbook > Grammar exercises > Mechanics > E-ex 40–2

41

Numbers

Grammar checkers can tell you to spell out certain numbers, such as thirty-three and numbers that begin a sentence, but they won’t help you understand when it is acceptable to use numerals.

41a Follow the conventions in your discipline for spelling out or using numerals to express numbers. In the humanities, which generally follow either Modern Language Association (MLA) style or The Chicago Manual of Style, use numerals only for specific numbers above one hundred: 353, 1,020. Spell out numbers one hundred and below and large round numbers: eleven, thirty-five, sixty, fifteen million.

413

41b

414

num

Numbers

The social sciences and sciences, which follow American Psychological Association (APA) style or Council of Science Editors (CSE) style, use numerals for all but the numbers one through nine. In all fields, treat related numbers in a passage consistently: The survey found that 89 of 157 respondents had not taken any courses related to alcohol use. When one number immediately follows another, spelling out one number and using numerals for the other is usually effective: three 100-meter events, 25 four-poster beds.

FJHIU

0

It’s been 8 years since I visited Peru.

0

Enrollment in the charter school in its first year will be

?

limited to three hundred forty students.

?

If a sentence begins with a number, spell out the number or rewrite the sentence.

0OFIVOESFE±GUZ 0

150 children in our program need expensive dental treatment.

?Rewriting the sentence will also correct the error and may be less awkward if the number is long: In our program, 150 children need expensive dental treatment.

41b Use numerals according to convention in dates, addresses, and so on. DATES July 4, 1776; 56 BC; AD 30 ADDRESSES 77 Latches Lane, 519 West 42nd Street PERCENTAGES 55 percent (or 55%) FRACTIONS, DECIMALS 1/2, 0.047 SCORES 7 to 3, 21–18 STATISTICS average age 37, average weight 180 SURVEYS 4 out of 5 EXACT AMOUNTS OF MONEY $105.37, $106,000

ÜiÊÌÊÕÃiÊÕLiÀÃÊ UÊ `>ÌiÃÊ UÊ >``ÀiÃÃiÃÊ UÊ vÀ>VÌÃÊ UÊ ÌiÀÊiÛiÀÞ`>ÞÊÕÃiÃ

num

41b

DIVISIONS OF BOOKS volume 3, chapter 4, page 189 DIVISIONS OF PLAYS act 3, scene 3 (or act III, scene iii) IDENTIFICATION NUMBERS serial number 10988675 TIME OF DAY 4:00 p.m., 1:30 a.m.

0

The foundation raised four hundred thirty thousand

?

dollars for cancer research. NOTE: When not using a.m. or p.m., write out the time in words

(two o’clock in the afternoon, twelve noon, seven in the morning). EXERCISE 41–1 Edit the following sentences to correct errors in the use of numbers. If a sentence is correct, write “correct” after it. Answers to lettered sentences appear in the back of the book. Example:

By the end of the evening, Ashanti had only three dollars and six cents left.

a. b. c. d. e.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

?

The carpenters located 3 maple timbers, 21 sheets of cherry, and 10 oblongs of polished ebony for the theater set. The program’s cost is well over one billion dollars. The score was tied at 5–5 when the momentum shifted and carried the Standards to a decisive 12–5 win. 8 students in the class had been labeled “learning disabled.” The Vietnam Veterans Memorial in Washington, DC, had fiftyeight thousand one hundred thirty-two names inscribed on it when it was dedicated in 1982. One of my favorite scenes in Shakespeare is the property division scene in act 1 of King Lear. The botany lecture will begin at precisely 3:30 p.m. 40 percent of all gamers in the United States are women. In two thousand twelve, the world population may reach 7 billion. On a normal day, I spend at least 4 to 5 hours surfing the Internet.


415

416

42 42

ital

Italics

Italics

This section describes conventional uses for italics. While italics is accepted by all three style guides covered in this handbook (MLA, APA, and Chicago), some instructors may prefer underlining in student papers. If that is the case in your course, simply substitute underlining for italics in the examples in this section. Some computer and online applications do not allow for italics. To indicate words that should be italicized, you can use underscore marks or asterisks before and after the italic words. I am planning to write my senior thesis on _Memoirs of a Geisha_. NOTE: Excessive use of italics to emphasize words or ideas, espe-

cially in academic writing, is distracting and should be avoided.

42a Italicize the titles of works according to convention. Titles of the following types of works, including electronic works, should be italicized. TITLES OF BOOKS The Color Purple, Middlesex, Encarta MAGAZINES Time, Scientific American, Salon.com NEWSPAPERS the Baltimore Sun, the Orlando Sentinel Online PAMPHLETS Common Sense, Facts about Marijuana LONG POEMS The Waste Land, Paradise Lost PLAYS ’Night Mother, Wicked FILMS Casablanca, Do the Right Thing TELEVISION PROGRAMS American Idol, Frontline RADIO PROGRAMS All Things Considered MUSICAL COMPOSITIONS Porgy and Bess CHOREOGRAPHIC WORKS Brief Fling WORKS OF VISUAL ART American Gothic ELECTRONIC DATABASES InfoTrac

ÌÌiÃÊ UÊ >iÃÊvÊÃ«ÃÊiÌV°Ê UÊ vÀi}ÊÜÀ`ÃÊ UÊ Ã«iV>ÊÕÃiÃ

ital

42d

WEB SITES ZDNet, Google ELECTRONIC GAMES Everquest, Guitar Hero

The titles of other works, such as short stories, essays, episodes of radio and television programs, songs, and short poems, are enclosed in quotation marks. (See 37d.) NOTE: Do not use italics when referring to the Bible, titles of

books in the Bible (Genesis, not Genesis), or titles of legal documents (the Constitution, not the Constitution). Do not italicize the titles of computer software (Keynote, Photoshop). Do not italicize the title of your own paper.

42b Italicize the names of specific ships, spacecraft, and aircraft. Queen Mary 2, Challenger, Spirit of St. Louis The success of the Soviets’ Sputnik energized the US space program.

42c Italicize foreign words used in an English sentence. Shakespeare’s Falstaff is a comic character known for both his excessive drinking and his general joie de vivre. EXCEPTION: Do not italicize foreign words that have become a

standard part of the English language — “laissez-faire,” “fait accompli,” “modus operandi,” and “per diem,” for example.

42d Italicize words mentioned as words, letters mentioned as letters, and numbers mentioned as numbers. Tomás assured us that the chemicals could probably be safely mixed, but his probably stuck in our minds. Some toddlers have trouble pronouncing the letter s. A big 3 was painted on the stage door. NOTE: Quotation marks may be used instead of italics to set off

words mentioned as words. (See 37e.)

417

43

418

sp

Spelling

EXERCISE 42–1 Edit the following sentences to correct errors in the use of italics. If a sentence is correct, write “correct” after it. Answers to lettered sentences appear in the back of the book. Example: We had a lively discussion about Gini Alhadeff’s memoir The Sun at Midday. $PSSFDU a. b. c.

d. e.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Howard Hughes commissioned the Spruce Goose, a beautifully built but thoroughly impractical wooden aircraft. The old man screamed his anger, shouting to all of us, “I will not leave my money to you worthless layabouts!” I learned the Latin term ad infinitum from an old nursery rhyme about fleas: “Great fleas have little fleas upon their back to bite ’em, / Little fleas have lesser fleas and so on ad infinitum.” Cinema audiences once gasped at hearing the word damn in Gone with the Wind. Neve Campbell’s lifelong interest in ballet inspired her involvement in the film “The Company,” which portrays a season with the Joffrey Ballet. Yasmina spent a year painting white flowers in imitation of Georgia O’Keeffe’s Calla Lilies. On the monastery walls are murals depicting scenes from the book of Kings and the book of Proverbs. My per diem allowance was two hundred dollars. Cecily watched in amazement as the tattoo artist made angles and swooping loops into the Gothic letter G. The blend of poetic lyrics and progressive instruments on Seal’s “Human Being” makes it one of my favorite CDs.


43

Spelling

You learned to spell from repeated experience with words in both reading and writing, but especially writing. Words have a look, a sound, and even a feel to them as the hand moves across the page. As you proofread, you can probably tell if a

ÕÃ}Ê>Ê`VÌ>ÀÞÊ UÊ ÃÞ>LiÃÊ UÊ «ÀÕV>ÌÊ

sp

43a

word doesn’t look quite right. In such cases, the solution is simple: Look up the word in the dictionary.

Spell checkers are useful alternatives to a dictionary, but only to

a point. A spell checker will not tell you how to spell words not listed in its dictionary; nor will it help you catch words commonly confused, such as accept and except, or some typographical errors, such as own for won. You will still need to proofread, and for some words you may need to turn to the dictionary.

43a Become familiar with your dictionary. A good dictionary, whether print or online — such as The American Heritage Dictionary of the English Language, The Random House College Dictionary, or Merriam-Webster’s Collegiate Dictionary — is an indispensable writer’s aid. A sample print dictionary entry, taken from The American Heritage Dictionary, appears on page 420. Labels show where various kinds of information about a word can be found in that dictionary. A sample online dictionary entry, taken from MerriamWebster Online, appears on page 421.

Spelling, word division, pronunciation The main entry (reUgard in the sample entries) shows the correct spelling of the word. When there are two correct spellings of a word (as in collectible, collectable, for example), both are given, with the preferred spelling usually appearing first. The main entry also shows how the word is divided into syllables. The dot between re and gard separates the two syllables and indicates where the word should be divided if it can’t fit at the end of a line of type (see 44f). When a word is compound, the main entry shows how to write it: as one word (crossroad ), as a hyphenated word (cross-stitch), or as two words (cross section).

419

420

43a

sp

Spelling

The word’s pronunciation is given just after the main entry. The accents indicate which syllables are stressed; the other marks are explained in the dictionary’s pronunciation key. In print dictionaries, this key usually appears at the

PRINT DICTIONARY ENTRY Grammatical label

Pronunciation Word division

Part of speech label

Word endings (inflections)

Usage label

Spelling

Meanings

Idioms

Synonyms

Usage note

Word origin (etymology)

ÕÃ}Ê>Ê`VÌ>ÀÞÊ UÊ ÃÞ>LiÃÊ UÊ «ÀÕV>ÌÊ

sp

43a

bottom of every page or every other page. Many online entries include an audio link to a person’s voice pronouncing the word. And most online dictionaries have an audio pronunciation guide.

ONLINE DICTIONARY ENTRY

Alternative entries Audio pronunciation link Spelling and word division Pronunciation Part of speech label Usage label

Meanings (synonyms shown as hyperlinks)

Idioms

Word origin (etymology)

421

422

43a

sp

Spelling

Word endings and grammatical labels When a word takes endings to indicate grammatical functions (called inflections), the endings are listed in boldface, as with -garded, -garding, and -gards in the sample print entry (p. 420). Labels for the parts of speech and for other grammatical terms are sometimes abbreviated, as they are in the print entry. The most commonly used abbreviations are these: n. pl. sing. v. tr. intr.

noun plural singular verb transitive verb intransitive verb

adj. adv. pron. prep. conj. interj.

adjective adverb pronoun preposition conjunction interjection

Meanings, word origin, synonyms, and antonyms Each meaning for the word is given a number. Occasionally a word’s use is illustrated in a quoted sentence. Sometimes a word can be used as more than one part of speech (regard, for instance, can be used as either a verb or a noun). In such a case, all the meanings for one part of speech are given before all the meanings for another, as in the sample entries. The entries also give idiomatic uses of the word. The origin of the word, called its etymology, appears in brackets after all the meanings in the print version; in the online version, it appears before the meanings. Synonyms, words similar in meaning to the main entry, are frequently listed. In the sample print entry, the dictionary draws distinctions in meaning among the various synonyms. In the online entry, synonyms appear as hyperlinks. Antonyms, which do not appear in the sample entries, are words having a meaning opposite from that of the main entry.

Usage Usage labels indicate when, where, or under what conditions a particular meaning for a word is appropriately used. Common

ÕÃ}Ê>Ê`VÌ>ÀÞÊ UÊ i>}ÃÊ UÊ ÃÞÞÃÊ UÊ ««ÃÌiÃÊ UÊ ÕÃ>}iÊ UÊ ÜÀ`ÃÊÌ>ÌÊÃÕ`Ê>i

sp

43b

labels are informal (or colloquial ), slang, archaic, poetic, nonstandard, dialect, obsolete, and British. In the sample print entry (p. 420), two meanings of regard are labeled obsolete because they are no longer in use. The sample online entry (p. 421) has meanings labeled both archaic and obsolete. Dictionaries sometimes include usage notes as well. In the sample print entry, the dictionary offers advice on several uses of regard not specifically covered by the meanings. Such advice is based on the opinions of many experts and on actual usage in current magazines, newspapers, and books.

43b Discriminate between words that sound alike but have different meanings. Words that sound alike or nearly alike but have different meanings and spellings are called homophones. The following sets of words are so commonly confused that a careful writer will double-check their every use. affect (verb: to exert an influence) effect (verb: to accomplish; noun: result) its (possessive pronoun: of or belonging to it) it’s (contraction of it is or it has) loose (adjective: free, not securely attached) lose (verb: to fail to keep, to be deprived of ) principal (adjective: most important; noun: head of a school) principle (noun: a fundamental guideline or truth) their (possessive pronoun: belonging to them) they’re (contraction of they are) there (adverb: that place or position) who’s (contraction of who is or who has) whose (possessive form of who) your (possessive pronoun: belonging to you) you’re (contraction of you are)

To check for correct use of these and other commonly confused words, see the Glossary of Usage (p. 789).

423

424

43c

sp

Spelling

43c Become familiar with the major spelling rules. i before e except after c Use i before e except after c or when sounded like ay, as in neighbor and weigh. I BEFORE E

relieve, believe, sieve, niece, fierce, frieze

E BEFORE I

receive, deceive, sleigh, freight, eight

EXCEPTIONS

seize, either, weird, height, foreign, leisure

Suffixes Final silent -e Generally, drop a final silent -e when adding a suffix that begins with a vowel. Keep the final -e if the suffix begins with a consonant. combine, combination desire, desiring prude, prudish remove, removable

achieve, achievement care, careful entire, entirety gentle, gentleness

Words such as changeable, judgment, argument, and truly are exceptions. Final -y When adding -s or -d to words ending in -y, ordinarily change -y to -ie when the -y is preceded by a consonant but not when it is preceded by a vowel. comedy, comedies dry, dried

monkey, monkeys play, played

With proper names ending in -y, however, do not change the -y to -ie even if it is preceded by a consonant: the Dougherty family, the Doughertys. Final consonants If a final consonant is preceded by a single vowel and the consonant ends a one-syllable word or a

Ã«i}ÊÀÕiÃÊ UÊ i before e except after cÊ UÊ >``}ÊÜÀ`Êi`}ÃÊable]Ês]Êed®Ê UÊ «ÕÀ>ÃÊ

sp

43c

stressed syllable, double the consonant when adding a suffix beginning with a vowel. bet, betting commit, committed

occur, occurrence

Plurals -s or -es Add -s to form the plural of most nouns; add -es to singular nouns ending in -s, -sh, -ch, and -x. table, tables paper, papers

church, churches dish, dishes

Ordinarily add -s to nouns ending in -o when the -o is preceded by a vowel. Add -es when it is preceded by a consonant. radio, radios video, videos

hero, heroes tomato, tomatoes

Spelling varies slightly among English-speaking countries. This can prove particularly confusing for multilingual students in the United States, who may have learned British English. Following is a list of some common words spelled differently in American and British English. Consult a dictionary for others. AMERICAN

BRITISH

canceled, traveled color, humor judgment check realize, apologize defense anemia, anesthetic theater, center fetus mold, smolder civilization connection, inflection licorice

cancelled, travelled colour, humour judgement cheque realise, apologise defence anaemia, anaesthetic theatre, centre foetus mould, smoulder civilisation connexion, inflexion liquorice

425

426

43d

sp

Spelling

Other plurals To form the plural of a hyphenated compound word, add -s to the chief word even if it does not appear at the end. mother-in-law, mothers-in-law

English words derived from other languages such as Latin or French sometimes form the plural as they would in their original language. medium, media criterion, criteria

chateau, chateaux

43d Be alert to commonly misspelled words. absence academic accidentally accommodate achievement acknowledge acquaintance acquire address all right amateur analyze answer apparently appearance arctic argument arithmetic arrangement ascend athlete athletics attendance basically beautiful beginning believe

benefited bureau business calendar candidate cemetery changeable column commitment committed committee competitive completely conceivable conscience conscientious conscious criticism criticize decision definitely descendant desperate dictionary different disastrous eighth

eligible embarrass emphasize entirely environment especially exaggerated exercise exhaust existence extraordinary extremely familiar fascinate February foreign forty fourth friend government grammar guard harass height humorous incidentally incredible

independence indispensable inevitable intelligence irrelevant irresistible knowledge library license lightning loneliness maintenance maneuver marriage mathematics mischievous necessary noticeable occasion occurred occurrence pamphlet parallel particularly pastime permanent permissible

perseverance phenomenon physically playwright practically precede preference preferred prejudice presence prevalent privilege proceed

43d

commonly misspelled words

sp

professor pronunciation publicly quiet quite quizzes receive recognize referred restaurant rhythm roommate sandwich

tomorrow tragedy transferred tries truly unnecessarily usually vacuum vengeance villain weird whether writing

schedule seize separate sergeant siege similar sincerely sophomore strictly subtly succeed surprise thorough

EXERCISE 43–1 The following memo has been run through a spell checker. Proofread it carefully, editing the spelling and typographical errors that remain. November 3, 2009 To: Patricia Wise From: Constance Mayhew Subject: Express Tours annual report Thank you for agreeing to draft the annual report for Express Tours. Before you begin you’re work, let me outline the initial steps. First, its essential for you to include brief profiles of top management. Early next week, I’ll provide profiles for all manages accept Samuel Heath, who’s biographical information is being revised. You should edit these profiles carefully and than format them according to the enclosed instructions. We may ask you to include other employee’s profiles at some point. Second, you should arrange to get complete financial information for fiscal year 2009 from our comptroller, Richard Chang. (Helen Boyes, to, can provide the necessary figures.) When you get this information, precede according tot he plans we discuss in yesterday’s meeting. By the way, you will notice from the figures that the sale of our Charterhouse division did not significantly effect net profits. Third, you should submit first draft of the report by December 15. I assume that you won a laser printer, but if

427

44

428

hyph

The hyphen

you don’t, you can e-mail a file and we’ll print out a draft here. Of coarse, you should proofread you writing. I am quiet pleased that you can take on this project. If I can answers questions, don’t hesitate to call.

44

The hyphen

Spell checkers can flag some, but not all, missing or misused

hyphens. For example, the programs can often tell you that a hyphen is needed in compound numbers, such as sixty-four. They can also tell you how to spell certain compound words, such as breakup (not break-up).

44a Consult the dictionary to determine how to treat a compound word. The dictionary will tell you whether to treat a compound word as a hyphenated compound (water-repellent), one word (waterproof ), or two words (water table). If the compound word is not in the dictionary, treat it as two words. 0h

The prosecutor chose not to crossexamine any witnesses.

0h

All students are expected to record their data in a small

?

note book. 0h

Alice walked through the looking-glass into a backward world.

44b Use a hyphen to connect two or more words functioning together as an adjective before a noun. 0h

Mrs. Douglas gave Toshiko a seashell and some newspaper wrapped fish to take home to her mother.

?

ÊV«Õ`ÊÜÀ`ÃÊ UÊ Ê>ìVÌÛiÃÊ UÊ ÊvÀ>VÌÃ]ÊÕLiÀÃÊ UÊ ÜÌÊ«ÀiwÝiÃ]ÊÃÕvwÝiÃ 0h

hyph

44d

Richa Gupta is not yet a wellknown candidate.

?

Newspaper-wrapped and well-known are adjectives used before the nouns fish and candidate.

Generally, do not use a hyphen when such compounds follow the noun. 0h

After our television campaign, Richa Gupta will be well- known.

Do not use a hyphen to connect -ly adverbs to the words they modify. 0h

A slowly-moving truck tied up traffic.

NOTE: When two or more hyphenated adjectives in a row mod-

ify the same noun, you can suspend the hyphens. Do you prefer first-, second-, or third-class tickets?

44c Hyphenate the written form of fractions and of compound numbers from twenty-one to ninety-nine. Onefourth of my income goes to pay my child care ? 0

expenses.

44d Use a hyphen with the prefixes all-, ex- (meaning “former”), and self- and with the suffix -elect. 0h

The private foundation is funneling more money into

selfhelp projects. ? 0h The Student Senate bylaws require the presidentelect to ? attend all senate meetings between the election and the official transfer of office.

429

44e

430

hyph

The hyphen

44e Use a hyphen in certain words to avoid ambiguity or to separate awkward double or triple letters. Without the hyphen, there would be no way to distinguish between words such as re-creation and recreation. Bicycling in the city is my favorite form of recreation. The film was praised for its astonishing re-creation of nineteenth-century London.

Hyphens are sometimes used to separate awkward double or triple letters in compound words (anti-intellectual, cross-stitch). Always check a dictionary for the standard form of the word.

44f Check for correct word breaks when words must be divided at the end of a line. Some word processing programs and other computer applications automatically generate word breaks at the ends of lines. When you’re writing an academic paper, it’s best to set your computer application not to hyphenate automatically. Some hyphenation is inevitable, however, so you should be familiar with the following hyphenation conventions. 1. Words must be divided between syllables, and one-syllable words should not be divided. SFD 0

When I returned from my semester overseas, I didn’t reco-

PHOJ[F

gnize one face on the magazine covers. 0

?

He didn’t have the courage or the stren-

TUSFOHUI

gth to open the door.

?

2. A single letter should not stand alone at the end of a line, and no fewer than three letters should begin a line. 0

She’ll bring her brother with her when she comes a-

BHBJO gain.

?

ÌÊ>Û`ÊVvÕÃÊ UÊ ÌÊ`ÛìÊÜÀ`Ã

hyph

44f

As audience to the play The Mousetrap, Hamlet is a watch-

0

XBUDIFS

er watching watchers.

? 3. Compound words should either be divided between the words that form the compound or not be divided at all. My niece Marielena is determined to become a long-dis-

0

EJTUBODF

tance runner when she grows up.

?

NOTE: E-mail addresses and URLs need special attention when

they occur at the end of a line of text. You can’t rely on your computer application to divide these terms correctly, so you must make a decision in each case. Do not insert a hyphen to divide e-mail addresses and URLs. Instead, break an e-mail address after the @ symbol or before a period. Break a URL after a slash or a double slash or before any other punctuation mark. I repeatedly e-mailed Janine at janine.r.rose@dunbaracademy .org before I gave up and called her cell phone. To find a zip code quickly, I always use the United States Postal Service Web site at http://zip4.usps.com/zip4 / welcome.jsp.

For breaks in URLs in MLA, APA, and Chicago documentation styles, see 54a, 56e, and 57e, respectively. EXERCISE 44–1 Edit the following sentences to correct errors in hyphenation. If a sentence is correct, write “correct” after it. Answers to lettered sentences appear in the back of the book. Example:

a. b. c. d. e.

Zola’s first readers were scandalized by his sliceoflife novels.

??

Gold is the seventy-ninth element in the periodic table. The swiftly-moving tugboat pulled alongside the barge and directed it away from the oil spill in the harbor. The Moche were a pre-Columbian people who established a sophisticated culture in ancient Peru. Your dog is well-known in our neighborhood. Road-blocks were set up along all the major highways leading out of the city.

431

45

432 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

cap

Capital letters

We knew we were driving too fast when our tires skidded on the rain slick surface. The Black Death reduced the population of some medieval villages by two thirds. Sewing forty-eight sequined tutus for the ballet recital nearly made Karyn cross-eyed. Olivia had hoped to find a pay as you go plan to finance the construction of her observatory. Gail Sheehy writes that at age twenty five many people assume that the choices they make are irrevocable.


45

Capitalization

In addition to the rules in this section, a good dictionary can tell you when to use capital letters.

Grammar checkers remind you that sentences should begin with capital letters and that some words, such as Cherokee, are proper nouns. Many words, however, should be capitalized only in certain contexts, and you must determine when to do so.

45a Capitalize proper nouns and words derived from them; do not capitalize common nouns. Proper nouns are the names of specific persons, places, and things. All other nouns are common nouns. The following types of words are usually capitalized: names of deities, religions, religious followers, sacred books; words of family relationship used as names; particular places; nationalities and their languages, races, tribes; educational institutions, departments, degrees, particular courses; government departments, organizations, political parties; historical movements, periods, events, documents; specific electronic sources; and trade names.

«À«iÀÊÕÃÊUtah®Ê UÊ VÊÕÃÊstate)

cap

45a

PROPER NOUNS

COMMON NOUNS

God (used as a name) Book of Common Prayer Uncle Pedro Father (used as a name) Lake Superior the Capital Center the South Wrigley Field University of Wisconsin Geology 101 Environmental Protection Agency Phi Kappa Psi a Democrat the Enlightenment the Treaty of Versailles the World Wide Web, the Web the Internet, the Net Advil

a god a sacred book my uncle my father a picturesque lake a center for advanced studies a southern state a baseball stadium a state university geology a federal agency a fraternity an independent the eighteenth century a treaty a home page a computer network a painkiller

Months, holidays, and days of the week are treated as proper nouns; the seasons and numbers of the days of the month are not. Our academic year begins on a Tuesday in early September, right after Labor Day. Graduation is in early summer, on the second of June. EXCEPTION: Capitalize Fourth of July (or July Fourth) when re-

ferring to the holiday. Names of school subjects are capitalized only if they are names of languages. Names of particular courses are capitalized. This semester Austin is taking math, geography, geology, French, and English. Professor Obembe offers Modern American Fiction 501 to graduate students. CAUTION: Do not capitalize common nouns to make them seem

important: Our company is currently hiring computer programmers (not Company, Computer Programmers).

433

434

45b

cap

Capital letters

45b Capitalize titles of persons when used as part of a proper name but usually not when used alone. Professor Margaret Barnes; Dr. Sinyee Sein; John Scott Williams Jr. District Attorney Marshall was reprimanded for badgering the witness. The district attorney was elected for a two-year term.

Usage varies when the title of an important public figure is used alone: The president [or President] vetoed the bill.

45c Capitalize the first, last, and all major words in titles and subtitles of works such as books, articles, songs, and online documents. In both titles and subtitles, major words such as nouns, pronouns, verbs, adjectives, and adverbs should be capitalized. Minor words such as articles, prepositions, and coordinating conjunctions are not capitalized unless they are the first or last word of a title or subtitle. Capitalize the second part of a hyphenated term in a title if it is a major word but not if it is a minor word. Capitalize chapter titles and the titles of other major divisions of a work following the same guidelines used for titles of complete works. Seizing the Enigma: The Race to Break the German U-Boat Codes A River Runs through It “I Want to Hold Your Hand” The Canadian Green Page

To see why some of the titles in the list are italicized and some are put in quotation marks, see 42a and 37d.

45d Capitalize the first word of a sentence. The first word of a sentence should be capitalized. When a sentence appears within parentheses, capitalize its first word unless the parentheses appear within another sentence. Early detection of breast cancer significantly increases survival rates. (See table 2.)

ÌÌiÃÊÜÌÊ>iÃÊ UÊ ÌÌiÃÊvÊÜÀÃÊ UÊ wÀÃÌÊÜÀ`ÊvÊµÕÌ>ÌÊ UÊ >vÌiÀÊ>ÊVÊ

cap

45f

Early detection of breast cancer significantly increases survival rates (see table 2).

45e Capitalize the first word of a quoted sentence but not a quoted phrase. Robert Hughes writes, “There are only about sixty Watteau paintings on whose authenticity all experts agree” (102). Russell Baker has written that in our country, sports are “the opiate of the masses” (46).

If a quoted sentence is interrupted by explanatory words, do not capitalize the first word after the interruption. (See 37f.) “If you want to go out,” he said, “tell me now.”

When quoting poetry, copy the poet’s capitalization exactly. Many poets capitalize the first word of every line of poetry; a few contemporary poets dismiss capitalization altogether. it was the week that i felt the city’s narrow breezes rush about me — Don L. Lee

45f Capitalize the first word after a colon if it begins an independent clause. If a group of words following a colon could stand on its own as a complete sentence, capitalize the first word. Clinical trials called into question the safety profile of the drug: A high percentage of participants reported hypertension and kidney problems.

Preferences vary among academic disciplines. See 54c, 56f, and 57f for MLA, APA, and Chicago style, respectively. Always use lowercase for a list or an appositive that follows a colon. Students were divided into two groups: residents and commuters.

435

45g

436

cap

Capital letters

45g Capitalize abbreviations according to convention. Abbreviations for government agencies and other organizations as well as call numbers for radio and television stations are capitalized. EPA, FBI, OPEC, IBM, WCRB, KNBC-TV

EXERCISE 45–1 Edit the following sentences to correct errors in capitalization. If a sentence is correct, write “correct” after it. Answers to lettered sentences appear in the back of the book. Example:

a. b. c. d. e. 1.

2. 3. 4. 5.

(

$

?

?

On our trip to the West, we visited the grand canyon and the

(

4

%

great s alt d esert.

?Assistant ? dean ?

Shirin Ahmadi recommended offering more world language courses. We went to the Mark Taper Forum to see a production of Angels in America. Kalindi has an ambitious semester, studying differential calculus, classical hebrew, brochure design, and greek literature. Lydia’s Aunt and Uncle make modular houses as beautiful as modernist works of art. We amused ourselves on the long flight by discussing how Spring in Kyoto stacks up against Summer in London. When the Ducati will not start, I try a few tricks with the ignition key: Jiggling it to the left, pulling it out a quarter of an inch, and gently pulling down on it. When you slowly bake a clove of garlic, the most amazing thing happens: It loses its bitter tang and becomes sweet and buttery. After World War II, aunt Helena left Poland to study in Italy. When we drove through the south last year, we enjoyed stopping at the peanut stands along the road. Following in his sister’s footsteps, Leonid is pursuing a degree in Marketing Research.


Part IX

Researched Writing 46 Conducting research 438 47 Evaluating sources 462 48 Managing information; avoiding

53 MLA documentation style 517

54 MLA manuscript format;

plagiarism 478 49 Choosing a documentation style 488

student research process and sample paper 569 55 Writing about literature 589

WRITING MLA PAPERS 50 Supporting a thesis 492 51 Citing sources; avoiding

WRITING APA PAPERS 56 APA papers 621

plagiarism 498 52 Integrating sources 504

WRITING CHICAGO PAPERS 57 Chicago papers 685 437

438

46 46

res

Researched writing

Conducting research

College research assignments ask you to pose a question worth exploring, to read widely in search of possible answers, to interpret what you read, to draw reasoned conclusions, and to support those conclusions with valid and well-documented evidence. The process takes time: time for researching and time for drafting, revising, and documenting the paper in the style recommended by your instructor (see 49). Before beginning a research project, set a realistic schedule of deadlines. Think about how much time you might need for each step on the way to your final draft. SAMPLE STEPS IN A RESEARCH ASSIGNMENT

Receive and analyze the assignment. Pose questions you might explore. Talk with a reference librarian and plan a search strategy. Settle on a topic. Locate sources. Read and take notes. Draft a working thesis and an outline. Draft the paper. Visit the writing center to discuss a revision plan. Do additional research if needed. Revise the paper; if necessary, revise the thesis. Prepare a list of works cited. Proofread the final draft. Submit the final draft. One student created a calendar to map out her tasks for a research paper assigned on October 3 and due October 31, keeping in mind that some tasks might overlap or need to be repeated. Notice that she has budgeted more than a week for

res

«>}Ê>ÊÀiÃi>ÀVÊ«ÀiVÌÊ UÊ ÃVi`Õ}

46

439

SAMPLE CALENDAR FOR A RESEARCH ASSIGNMENT

2

3 Receive and analyze assignment.

4 5 Pose questions Talk with you might a librarian; explore. plan a search strategy.

9

10

11

12

23

24

25

26

6

7 Settle on a topic.

8

Locate sources.

13 14 15 Draft a Read and take notes. working Draft the paper. thesis and an outline. 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 Visit the writing Do additional research if needed. center to Draft the paper. discuss a revision plan.

Revise the paper; if necessary, revise the thesis.

27

28 Prepare a list of works cited.

29

30 31 Proofread Submit the final the final draft. draft.

drafting and revising the paper. It’s easy to spend too much time gathering sources; make sure you allow a significant portion of your schedule for drafting and revising your work. Sections 46 and 47 include examples related to three sample student research papers:

440

46a

res

Conducting research

UÊ Ê«>«iÀÊÊÌiÀiÌÊÃÕÀÛi>ViÊÊÌiÊÜÀ«>Vi]Ê written by a student in an English composition class (see ««°ÊxnÎqnn®°Ê/iÊÃÌÕìÌ]Ê>Ê"ÀÛ]ÊÕÃiÃÊÌiÊÊ ìÀÊ>}Õ>}iÊÃÃV>Ì®ÊÃÌÞiÊvÊ`VÕiÌ>Ì°Ê (See highlights of Orlov’s research process on pp. 573–82.) UÊ Ê«>«iÀÊÊÌiÊÌ>ÌÃÊvÊi`V>ÌÃÊÌÊÌÀi>ÌÊV`hood obesity, written by a student in a psychology class ÃiiÊ««°ÊÈÇ{qnÎ®°Ê/iÊÃÌÕìÌ]ÊÕÃ>ÊÀ>]ÊÕÃiÃÊÌiÊ *ÊiÀV>Ê*ÃÞV}V>ÊÃÃV>Ì®ÊÃÌÞiÊvÊ`VÕmentation. UÊ Ê«>«iÀÊÊÌiÊiÝÌiÌÊÌÊÜVÊ ÛÊ7>ÀÊ}iiÀ>Ê >Ì>Ê Bedford Forrest can be held responsible for the Fort Pillow massacre, written by a student in a history class (see pp. 718–26). The student, Ned Bishop, uses the Chicago Manual of Style documentation system.

46a Pose questions you might explore. 7À}ÊÜÌÊÌiÊ}ÕìiÃÊvÊÞÕÀÊ>ÃÃ}iÌ]Ê«ÃiÊ>ÊviÜÊ questions that seem worth researching. Here, for example, are some preliminary questions jotted down by students enrolled in a variety of courses in different disciplines. UÊ -Õ`ÊÌiÊ

ÊLÀ>ìÊÌÃÊìwÌÊvÊìViÌÊ programming to include violence? UÊ 7VÊ}i}V>ÊvÀ>ÌÃÊ>ÀiÊÌiÊÃ>viÃÌÊÀi«ÃÌÀiÃÊvÀÊ nuclear waste? UÊ 7>ÌÊÜ>ÃÊ>ÀVÕÃÊ>ÀÛiÞ½ÃÊVÌÀLÕÌÊÌÊÌiÊw}ÌÊvÀÊ racial equality? UÊ ÜÊV>Ê}ÛiÀiÌÃÊ>`ÊâÃÊi«Ê«ÀiÃiÀÛiÊÃ>½ÃÊ endangered snow leopard? UÊ 7ÞÊÜ>ÃÊ>>ÌiÕÀÊ>ÀV>i}ÃÌÊiÀVÊ-Vi>ÊÃÕVÊ a controversial figure in his own time?

ÃÊ ÞÕÊ ÌÊ >LÕÌÊ «ÃÃLiÊ µÕiÃÌÃ]Ê >iÊ ÃÕÀiÊ Ì>ÌÊ they are appropriate lines of inquiry for a research paper. Choose questions that are narrow (not too broad), challenging (not too bland), and grounded (not too speculative).

ÃÌ>ÀÌ}Ê«ÌÊ UÊ ÀiÃi>ÀVÊ µÕiÃÌÊ UÊ >ÀÀÜÊ UÊ V>i}}

res

46a

Choosing a narrow question If your initial question is too broad, given the length of the paper you plan to write, look for ways to restrict your focus (see the chart on p. 5). Here, for example, is how three students narrowed their initial questions. TOO BROAD

NARROWER

Ê

Ê >ÌÊ>ÀiÊÌiÊ>â>À`ÃÊÊ 7 of fad diets?

7ÞÊ>ÀiÊÜV>ÀLÞ`À>Ìi diets hazardous?

Ê

Ê >ÌÊ>ÀiÊÌiÊLiiwÌÃÊÊ 7 of stricter auto emissions standards?

ÜÊÜÊÃÌÀVÌiÀÊ>ÕÌÊiÃÃÃ standards create new, more competitive auto industry jobs?

Ê

7>ÌÊV>ÕÃiÃÊì«ÀiÃÃ¶Ê

Ê ÜÊ>ÃÊÌiÊÜìÃ«Ài>`ÊÕÃi of antidepressant drugs affected teenage suicide rates?

Choosing a challenging question Your research paper will be more interesting to both you and your audience if you base it on an intellectually challenging iÊ vÊ µÕÀÞ°Ê Û`Ê L>`Ê µÕiÃÌÃÊ Ì>ÌÊ v>Ê ÌÊ «ÀÛiÊ thought or engage readers in a debate. TOO BLAND

CHALLENGING

Ê

Ê7>ÌÊÃÊLÃiÃÃÛiV«ÕÃÛiÊ disorder?

7ÞÊÃÊLÃiÃÃÛiV«ÕÃÛi disorder so difficult to treat?

Ê

Ê7iÀiÊÃÊÜ`ÊiiÀ}ÞÊLi}Ê used?

7>ÌÊ>iÃÊÜ`Êv>ÀÃ economically viable?

Ê

ÜÊìÃÊ ÊÌiÃÌ}ÊÜÀ¶ÊÊ

ÜÊÀi>LiÊÃÊ ÊÌiÃÌ}¶Ê

You may need to address a bland question in the course of answering a more challenging one. For example, if you were writing about promising treatments for obsessive-compulsive `ÃÀìÀ]ÊÞÕÊÜÕ`ÊÊ`ÕLÌÊ>ÃÜiÀÊÌiÊµÕiÃÌÊº7>ÌÊÃÊ obsessive-compulsive disorder?” at some point in your paper. It would be a mistake, however, to use the bland question as the focus for the whole paper.

441

46b

442

res

Conducting research

Choosing a grounded question Finally, you will want to make sure that your research quesÌÊ ÃÊ }ÀÕì`]Ê ÌÊ ÌÊ Ã«iVÕ>ÌÛi°Ê ÌÕ}Ê Ã«iVÕ>ÌÛiÊ questions — such as those that address philosophical, ethical, or religious issues — are worth asking and may receive some attention in a research paper, they are inappropriate central questions. The central argument of a research paper should be grounded in facts; it should not be based entirely on beliefs.

Ê

TOO SPECULATIVE

GROUNDED

Is it wrong to share music files on the Internet?

How has Internet file sharing affected the earning potential of musicians?

Do medical scientists have the right to experiment on animals?

How have technical breakthroughs made medical experiments on animals increasingly unnecessary?

Ê ÀiÊÞÕÌÊÃ«ÀÌÃÊÌÊÊ dangerous?

7ÞÊÃÕ`ÊÃVÊ`ÃÌÀVÌÃ fund cardiac screening for all student athletes?

hackerhandbooks.com/bedhandbook > Research exercises > Researching > E-ex 46–1

46b Map out a search strategy. ÊÃi>ÀVÊÃÌÀ>Ìi}ÞÊÃÊ>ÊÃÞÃÌi>ÌVÊ«>ÊvÀÊÌÀ>V}Ê`ÜÊÃÕÀViÃ°Ê To create a search strategy appropriate for your research question, consult a reference librarian and take a look at your LÀ>ÀÞ½ÃÊ7iLÊÃÌi]ÊÜVÊÜÊ}ÛiÊÞÕÊ>ÊÛiÀÛiÜÊvÊ>Û>>LiÊ resources.

Getting started Reference librarians are information specialists who can save you time by steering you toward relevant and reliable sources. 7ÌÊÌiÊi«ÊvÊ>ÊiÝ«iÀÌ]ÊÞÕÊV>Ê>iÊÌiÊLiÃÌÊÕÃiÊvÊiiVÌÀVÊ `>Ì>L>ÃiÃ]Ê 7iLÊ Ãi>ÀVÊ i}iÃ]Ê ÞÕÀÊ LÀ>ÀÞ½ÃÊ V>Ì>}]Ê and other reference tools.

ÀiÃi>ÀVÊµÕiÃÌÊ UÊ w`}ÊÃÕÀViÃÊ UÊ ÀiviÀiViÊLÀ>À>ÃÊ UÊ ÕÃ}ÊÌiÊLÀ>ÀÞ

res

46b

Before you ask a reference librarian for help, be sure you have thought through the following questions: UÊ 7>ÌÊÃÊÞÕÀÊ>ÃÃ}iÌ¶ UÊ ÊÜVÊ>V>ìVÊ`ÃV«iÊ>ÀiÊÞÕÊÜÀÌ}¶ UÊ 7>ÌÊÃÊÞÕÀÊÌiÌ>ÌÛiÊÀiÃi>ÀVÊµÕiÃÌ¶ UÊ ÜÊ}ÊÜÊÌiÊ«>«iÀÊLi¶ UÊ ÜÊÕVÊÌiÊV>ÊÞÕÊÃ«i`ÊÊÌiÊ«ÀiVÌ¶Ê It’s a good idea to bring a copy of the assignment with you. In addition to speaking with a reference librarian, take ÃiÊ ÌiÊ ÌÊ iÝ«ÀiÊ ÞÕÀÊ LÀ>ÀÞ½ÃÊ 7iLÊ ÃÌi°Ê 9ÕÊ ÜÊ ÌÞ«cally find links to the library’s catalog and to a variety of databases and electronic sources that you can access from any networked computer. You may also find resources listed by subject, research guides, information about interlibrary loans, >`ÊÃÊÌÊ7iLÊÃÌiÃÊÃiiVÌi`ÊLÞÊLÀ>À>ÃÊvÀÊÌiÀÊµÕ>ÌÞ°Ê >ÞÊ LÀ>ÀiÃÊ vviÀÊ iÊ ÀiviÀiViÊ >ÃÃÃÌ>ViÊ ÌÊ i«Ê ÞÕÊ locate information and refine your search strategy. NOTE FOR DISTANCE LEARNERS: Even if you are unable to visit the

library, as an enrolled student you can still use its resources. ÃÌÊLÀ>ÀiÃÊvviÀÊV>ÌÊÀiviÀiViÊÃiÀÛViÃÊ>`Ê>VViÃÃÊÌÊiÊ databases, though you may have to follow special procedures ÌÊÕÃiÊÌi°Ê iVÊÞÕÀÊLÀ>ÀÞ½ÃÊ7iLÊÃÌiÊvÀÊvÀ>ÌÊvÀÊ distance learners.

Including the library in your plan You may be tempted to ignore your library’s resources, but using them can save you time and money in the end. Libraries weed out questionable sources and make a wide range of quality materials readily available. 7iÊ >Ê }iiÀ>Ê ÌiÀiÌÊ Ãi>ÀVÊ }ÌÊ ÃiiÊ µÕVÊ >`Ê convenient, it is often more time-consuming and can be less reliable than a search in a library’s databases. Initial searches may generate thousands of results. Figuring out which of these

443

444

46b

res

Conducting research

LIBRARY HOME PAGE

are credible, relevant, and worth further investigation can require many additional steps: UÊ ,iw}ÊÃi>ÀVÊÌiÀÃÊÌÊ}iiÀ>ÌiÊviÜiÀÊÀiÃÕÌÃÊ-iiÊÌiÊ chart on refining keyword searches on p. 449.) UÊ

>ÀÀÜ}ÊÌiÊ`>ÊÌÊVÕìÊÞÊ°À}]Ê°}Û]ÊÀÊ°i`ÕÊ sites

UÊ 7ii`}ÊÕÌÊ>ÞÊ>`ÛiÀÌÃiiÌÃÊ>ÃÃV>Ìi`ÊÜÌÊÀiÃÕÌÃ UÊ iÌiÀ}ÊÜVÊÃÌiÃÊ}ÌÊ«ÀiÃiÌÊÕÃivÕÊ>À}ÕiÌÃÊ by scanning their titles and, in some cases, viewing their content UÊ 6ÃÌ}ÊÃÌiÃÊÌ>ÌÊÃiiÊ«ÀÃ}ÊÌÊìÌiÀiÊÌiÀÊ currency and relevance UÊ L}ÊÌÀÕ}ÊÃÌiÃÊÌÊìÌiÀiÊÌiÊVÀi`LÌÞÊvÊ their authors

ÕÃ}ÊÌiÊLÀ>ÀÞÊ UÊ Ãi>ÀVÊÃÌÀ>Ìi}ÞÊ UÊ w`}ÊÃÕÀViÃÊÌÊwÌÊÞÕÀÊ«ÕÀ«Ãi

res

46b

Starting with your library’s collection of databases to run the same search can save you time and effort. Library database searches will turn up a manageable number of results, most of which are relevant, even if your initial search is broader than it should be. Because these searches are limited to only academic databases, you can count on finding reliable sources. Not all of the results will be worth examining in detail, but most library searches automatically sort them into subject categories that allow you to view narrowed results with just one click. 1Ã}Ê LÀ>ÀÞÊ `>Ì>L>ÃiÃÊ V>Ê >ÃÊ Ã>ÛiÊ iÞ°Ê ÃÌÊ Vlege assignments will require using at least some books and scholarly journal articles. Internet search engines can help you locate such sources, but the published texts are often not free online. Google Scholar, for example, provides scholarly results, but often you have to pay a fee or purchase a ÃÕLÃVÀ«ÌÊÌÊ>VViÃÃÊÌiÊvÕÊÌiÝÌÃ°ÊÃÌÊLÀ>ÀiÃÊÃÕLÃVÀLiÊ to databases that will give you unlimited access to many of these materials as well as scholarly resources that might not turn up outside of a database. You will be able to do some of your work from any computer that can connect to the campus network.

Choosing an appropriate search strategy No single search strategy works for every topic. For some topics, it may be appropriate to search for information in news«>«iÀÃ]Ê>}>âiÃ]Ê>`Ê7iLÊÃÌiÃ°ÊÀÊÌiÀÃ]ÊÌiÊLiÃÌÊÃÕÀViÃÊ might be found in scholarly journals and books and specialized reference works. Still other topics might be enhanced by field research — interviews, surveys, or direct observation. 7ÌÊ ÌiÊ i«Ê vÊ >Ê ÀiviÀiViÊ LÀ>À>]Ê i>VÊ vÊ ÌiÊ ÃÌÕdents mentioned on page 440 constructed a search strategy appropriate for his or her research question. Anna Orlov >Ê "ÀÛ½ÃÊ Ì«V]Ê ÌiÀiÌÊ ÃÕÀÛi>ViÊ Ê ÌiÊ workplace, was current and influenced by technological changes,

445

446

46c

res

Conducting research

so she relied heavily on recent sources, especially those online. To find information on her topic, Orlov decided to UÊ Ãi>ÀVÊiÀÊLÀ>ÀÞ½ÃÊ}iiÀ>Ê`>Ì>L>ÃiÊvÀÊ>ÀÌViÃÊÊ>}>zines, newspapers, and journals UÊ ViVÊÌiÊLÀ>ÀÞ½ÃÊV>Ì>}ÊvÀÊÀiViÌÞÊ«ÕLÃi`ÊLÃ UÊ ÕÃiÊ7iLÊÃi>ÀVÊi}iÃ]ÊÃÕVÊ>ÃÊGoogle, to locate articles and government publications that might not show up in a database search Luisa Mirano ÕÃ>ÊÀ>½ÃÊÌ«V]ÊÌiÊÌ>ÌÃÊvÊi`V>tions for childhood obesity, is the subject of psychological studies as well as articles in the popular press (newspapers and magazines aimed at the general public). Thinking that both scholarly >`Ê««Õ>ÀÊÜÀÃÊÜÕ`ÊLiÊ>««À«À>Ìi]ÊÀ>ÊìVì`ÊÌ

UÊ V>ÌiÊLÃÊÌÀÕ}ÊiÀÊLÀ>ÀÞ½ÃÊV>Ì>} UÊ ViVÊ>ÊÃ«iV>âi`ÊiVÞV«i`>]ÊEncyclopedia of Psychology UÊ Ãi>ÀVÊ>ÊÃ«iV>âi`Ê`>Ì>L>Ãi]ÊPsycINFO, for scholarly articles UÊ Ãi>ÀVÊiÀÊLÀ>ÀÞ½ÃÊ}iiÀ>Ê`>Ì>L>ÃiÊvÀÊ««Õ>ÀÊ>ÀÌViÃ Ned Bishop Ned Bishop’s topic, Nathan Bedford Forrest’s role in the Fort Pillow massacre, has been investigated and debated LÞÊ«ÀviÃÃ>ÊÃÌÀ>Ã°ÊÛiÊÌiÊ>ÌÕÀiÊvÊÃÊÃÌÀV>Ê topic, Bishop decided to

UÊ V>ÌiÊLÃÊÌÀÕ}ÊÃÊLÀ>ÀÞ½ÃÊV>Ì>} UÊ V>ÌiÊÃV>ÀÞÊ>ÀÌViÃÊLÞÊÃi>ÀV}Ê>ÊÃ«iV>âi`Ê database, America: History and Life UÊ V>ÌiÊiÜÃ«>«iÀÊ>ÀÌViÃÊvÀÊ£nÈ{ÊLÞÊÃi>ÀV}ÊÌiÊÃtorical archive at the New York TimesÊ7iLÊÃÌi UÊ Ãi>ÀVÊÌiÊ7iLÊvÀÊÌiÀÊÃÌÀV>Ê«À>ÀÞÊÃÕÀViÃÊ

46c To locate articles, search a database or consult a print index. Libraries subscribe to a variety of electronic databases (sometimes called periodical databases) that give students access to

w`}Ê>ÀÌViÃÊ UÊ `>Ì>L>ÃiÃ

res

46c

articles and other materials without charge. Because many databases are limited to recent works, you may need to consult a print index as well.

What databases offer Your library has access to databases that can lead you to articles in periodicals such as newspapers, magazines, and scholarly or technical journals. Some databases cover several subject areas; others cover one subject area in depth. Your library might subscribe to some of the following databases. General databases College libraries typically subscribe to one or more general databases. The information in those databases is not restricted to a specific discipline or subject area. You may find searching a general database helpful in the early stages of your research process.

Academic Search Premier.Ê ÊÌiÀ`ÃV«>ÀÞÊ`>Ì>L>ÃiÊ that indexes thousands of popular and scholarly journals on all subjects, offering many articles in full text. Expanded Academic ASAP°Ê ÊÌiÀ`ÃV«>ÀÞÊ`>Ì>L>ÃiÊ that indexes the contents of magazines, newspapers, and scholarly journals in all subject areas. It also includes many full-text articles. JSTOR°Ê ÊvÕÌiÝÌÊ>ÀVÛiÊvÊÃV>ÀÞÊÕÀ>ÃÊvÀÊ many disciplines; unlike most databases, it includes articles published decades ago but does not include articles from the most recent issues of publications. LexisNexis.Ê Ê`>Ì>L>ÃiÊÌ>ÌÊÃÊ«>ÀÌVÕ>ÀÞÊÃÌÀ}ÊÊVÛerage of news, business, legal, and political topics. Nearly all of the material is available in full text. ProQuest.Ê Ê`>Ì>L>ÃiÊvÊ«iÀ`V>Ê>ÀÌViÃ]Ê>ÞÊÊvÕÊ text. Through ProQuest, your library may subscribe to databases in subjects such as nursing, biology, and psychology. Subject-specific databases Libraries have dozens of specialized databases covering many different subjects. Your library’s

447

448

46c

res

Conducting research

7iLÊÃÌiÊÜÊ}ÕìÊÞÕÊÌÊÜ>Ì½ÃÊ>Û>>Li°Ê/iÊvÜ}Ê>ÀiÊ examples of subject-specific databases. ERIC.Ê Ê`>Ì>L>ÃiÊvviÀ}Êi`ÕV>ÌÀi>Ìi`Ê`VÕ ments and abstracts of articles published in education journals. MLA Bibliography°Ê Ê`>Ì>L>ÃiÊvÊÌiÀ>ÀÞÊVÀÌVÃ]ÊÜÌÊ citations to help researchers find articles, books, and dissertations. PsycINFO.Ê ÊV«ÀiiÃÛiÊ`>Ì>L>ÃiÊvÊ«ÃÞV}ÞÊ research, including abstracts of articles in journals and books. PubMed.Ê Ê`>Ì>L>ÃiÊvviÀ}ÊÃÊvÊ>LÃÌÀ>VÌÃÊvÊ medical research studies. >ÞÊ`>Ì>L>ÃiÃÊVÕìÊÌiÊvÕÊÌiÝÌÊvÊ>ÌÊi>ÃÌÊÃiÊ>Àticles; others list only citations or citations with short summaries called abstracts. In the case of full-text articles, you may have the option to print an article, save it, or e-mail it to yourself. 7iÊvÕÊÌiÝÌÊÃÊÌÊ>Û>>Li]ÊÌiÊVÌ>ÌÊÜÊ}ÛiÊÞÕÊ enough information to track down an Making the most of your handbook >ÀÌVi°Ê 9ÕÀÊ LÀ>ÀÞ½ÃÊ 7iLÊ ÃÌiÊ ÜÊ i«Ê Freewriting, listing, and clustering you determine which articles are availcan help you come up with able in your library, either in print or additional search terms. in electronic form. If the library does 0 Exploring your subject: 1b not own the item you want, you can usually request a copy through interlibrary loan; check with a librarian to find out how long it may take for the source to arrive.

How to search a database To find articles on your topic in a database, start with a keyword search. If the first keyword you try results in too few or no matches, experiment with synonyms or ask a librarian for suggestions. For example, if you’re searching for sources on a

w`}Ê>ÀÌViÃÊ UÊ `>Ì>L>ÃiÃÊ UÊ iÞÜÀ`ÃÊ UÊ `>Ì>L>ÃiÊÃi>ÀViÃÊ UÊ Ãi>ÀVÊi}iÃ

res

46c

Refining keyword searches in databases and search engines Although command terms and characters vary among electronic databases and Web search engines, some of the most commonly used functions are listed here. U Use quotation marks around words that are part of a phrase: “gateway drug”. U Use AND to connect words that must appear in a document: hyperactivity AND children. In some search engines — Google, for example — and is assumed, so typing it is unnecessary. Other search engines require a plus sign instead: hyperactivity +children. U Use NOT in front of words that must not appear in a document: shepherd NOT dog. Some search engines require a minus sign (hyphen) instead: shepherd -dog. U Use OR if only one of the terms must appear in a document: “mountain lion” OR cougar. U Use an asterisk as a substitute for letters that might vary: “marine biolog*” (to find marine biology or marine biologist, for example). U Use parentheses to group a search expression and combine it with another: (standard OR student OR test*) AND reform. NOTE: Many search engines and databases offer an advanced search option that makes it easy to refine your search.

topic related to education, you might also try the terms teaching, learning, pedagogy, and curriculum. If your keyword search results in too many matches, narrow it by using one of the strategies in the chart on this page. For her paper on Internet surveillance in the workplace, Anna Orlov conducted a keyword search in a general periodical database. She typed “internet use” and employee and surveillance (see the database screen on p. 450). This search brought up twenty possible articles, some of which looked promising.

449

450

46c

res

Conducting research

DATABASE SCREEN: KEYWORD SEARCH

(See pp. 575–76 to view Orlov’s annotated list of search results.) Orlov e-mailed several full-text articles to herself and printed citations to others so that she could locate them in the library.

When to use a print index Ê«ÀÌÊìÝÊÌÊ«iÀ`V>Ê>ÀÌViÃÊÃÊ>ÊÕÃivÕÊÌÊÜiÊÞÕÊ are researching a historical topic, especially from the early to mid-twentieth century. The Readers’ Guide to Periodical Literature or Poole’s Index to Periodical Literature indexes magazine articles beginning around 1900, many of which are too old to appear in electronic databases. You can usually access the print articles themselves in your library’s shelves, on microfilm or microfiche, or by interlibrary loan.

w`}Ê>ÀÌViÃÊ UÊ `>Ì>L>ÃiÃÊ UÊ «ÀÌÊ ìÝÊ UÊ w`}ÊLÃÊ UÊ LÀ>ÀÞÊV>Ì>}

res

46d

46d To locate books, consult the library’s catalog. The books your library owns are listed in its catalog, along with other resources such as videos. You can search the catalog by author, title, or subject keywords. If your first search calls up too few results, try different keywords or search for books on broader topics. If your search gives you too many results, use the strategies in the chart on page 449 or try an advanced search tool to combine concepts and limit your results. If those strategies don’t work, ask a librarian for suggestions. 7iÊ ÕÃ>Ê À>]Ê ÜÃiÊ Ì«VÊ Ü>ÃÊ V``Ê LiÃÌÞ]Ê entered the term obesity into the library’s catalog, she was faced with an unmanageable number of hits. She narrowed her search by adding two specific terms to obesity: child* (to include the terms child, children, and childhood ) and treatment°Ê 7iÊ she still got too many results, she limited the first two terms to subject searches to find books with obesity in children as ÌiÀÊ«À>ÀÞÊÃÕLiVÌ°ÊÀ>½ÃÊ>`Û>Vi`ÊÃi>ÀVÊ>`ÊÌiÊÃiÛiÊ records she retrieved are illustrated in screens 1 and 2.

LIBRARY CATALOG SCREEN 1: ADVANCED SEARCH

451

452

46d

res

Conducting research

LIBRARY CATALOG SCREEN 2: SEARCH RESULTS

LIBRARY CATALOG SCREEN 3: COMPLETE RECORD FOR A BOOK

w`}ÊLÃÊ UÊ LÀ>ÀÞÊV>Ì>}Ê UÊ ÌiÀiÌÊÃi>ÀViÃ

res

46e

Once you have narrowed your search to a list of relevant sources, you can display or save the complete record for each source, which includes its bibliographic information (author, title, publication information) and a call number. Screen 3 shows the complete record for the second title on the list geniÀ>Ìi`ÊLÞÊÀ>½ÃÊÃi>ÀV°Ê/iÊV>ÊÕLiÀ]ÊÃÌi`ÊLiÃìÊAvailability]ÊÃÊÌiÊL½ÃÊ>``ÀiÃÃÊÊÌiÊLÀ>ÀÞÊÃiv°Ê7iÊÞÕ½ÀiÊ retrieving a book from the shelf, take the time to scan other books in the area since they are likely to be on the same topic. The catalog record for a book lists related subject headings. These headings are a good way to locate other books on your subject. For example, the record in screen 3 lists the terms obesity in children and obesity in adolescence as related ÃÕLiVÌÊ i>`}Ã°Ê ÞÊ VV}Ê Ê ÌiÃiÊ iÜÊ ÌiÀÃ]Ê À>Ê found a few more books on her subject. Subject headings can be useful terms for a database search as well. LIBRARIAN’S TIP:

46e To locate other sources, use a variety of online tools. You can find a variety of reliable sources using online tools beyond those offered by your library. For example, most }ÛiÀiÌÊ >}iViÃÊ «ÃÌÊ vÀ>ÌÊ Ê ÌiÀÊ 7iLÊ ÃÌiÃ]Ê >`Ê viìÀ>Ê >`Ê ÃÌ>ÌiÊ }ÛiÀiÌÃÊ ÕÃiÊ 7iLÊ ÃÌiÃÊ ÌÊ Vmunicate with citizens. The sites of many private organizations, such as Doctors without Borders and the Sierra Club, VÌ>Ê ÕÃivÕÊ vÀ>ÌÊ >LÕÌÊ VÕÀÀiÌÊ ÃÃÕiÃ°Ê ÕÃiÕÃÊ and libraries often post digital versions of primary sources, such as photographs, political speeches, and classic literary texts. ÌÕ}ÊÌiÊÌiÀiÌÊ>ÌÊ>À}iÊV>ÊLiÊ>ÊÀVÊÃÕÀViÊvÊformation, some of which can’t be found anywhere else, it lacks quality control. The material on many sites has not necessarily been reviewed by experts. So when you’re not working with your library’s tools to locate online sources, carefully evaluate what you find (see 47e).

453

454

46e

res

Conducting research

/ÃÊ ÃiVÌÊ ìÃVÀLiÃÊ ÌiÊ vÜ}Ê }iiÀ>Ê 7iLÊ Àisources: search engines, directories, digital archives, government and news sites, blogs, and wikis. hackerhandbooks.com/bedhandbook > Additional resources > Links Library > Conducting research

Search engines 7iÊÕÃ}Ê>ÊÃi>ÀVÊi}i]ÊÃÕVÊ>ÃÊGoogle or Ask.com, focus your search as narrowly as possible. You can refine your search by using many of the tips in the chart on page 449 or by using the search engine’s advanced search form. For iÀÊ «>«iÀÊ Ê ÌiÀiÌÊ ÃÕÀÛi>ViÊ Ê ÌiÊ ÜÀ«>Vi]Ê >Ê "ÀÛÊ>`Ê`vwVÕÌÞÊÀiÃÌÀVÌ}ÊÌiÊÕLiÀÊvÊÌÃ°Ê7iÊÃiÊ typed the words internet, surveillance, workplace, and privacy into a search engine, she got more than 80,000 matches. vÌiÀÊ iÝ>}Ê ÌiÊ wÀÃÌÊ «>}iÊ vÊ ÀiÃÕÌÃÊ >`Ê ÛiÜ}Ê ÃiÊ that looked promising, Orlov grouped her search terms into the phrases “internet surveillance” and “workplace privacy” and added the term employee to narrow the focus. The result was 422 matches. To refine her search further, Orlov clicked on `Û>Vi`Ê-i>ÀVÊ>`ÊÀiÃÌÀVÌi`ÊiÀÊÃi>ÀVÊÌÊÃÌiÃÊÜÌÊ1,ÃÊ ending in .org and to those updated in the last three months. (See the results screen on p. 455.)

Directories If you want to find good resources on topics too broad for a search engine, try a directory. Unlike search engines, directories are put together by information specialists who choose reputable sites and arrange them by topic: education, health, politics, and so on. Some directories are particularly useful for research. For example, links included in the Internet Scout Project are selected by an expert research team and include annotations that both describe and evaluate each site.

ÌiÀiÌÊÃi>ÀViÃÊ UÊ Ãi>ÀVÊi}iÃÊ UÊ iÊ `ÀiVÌÀiÃÊ UÊ ÃÕÀViÃÊLÞÊÌ«VÊ UÊ `}Ì>Ê>ÀVÛiÃ

res

46e

SEARCH ENGINE SCREEN: RESULTS OF AN ADVANCED SEARCH

The following directories are especially useful for scholarly research: Internet Scout ProjectÊÌÌ«\ÉÉÃVÕÌ°ÜÃV°i`ÕÉÀVÛiÃÊ Librarian’s Internet IndexÊÌÌ«\ÉÉ°À}Ê Open Directory ProjectÊÌÌ«\ÉÉ`â°À}Ê WWW Virtual LibraryÊÌÌ«\ÉÉÛL°À}Ê

Digital archives ÀVÛiÃÊ >ÀiÊ >Ê }`Ê «>ViÊ ÌÊ w`Ê «À>ÀÞÊ ÃÕÀViÃ°Ê /iÞÊ may contain the texts of poems, books, speeches, and historically significant documents; photographs; and political cartoons.

455

456

46e

res

Conducting research

The materials in these sites are usually limited to official documents and older works because of copyright laws. The following online archives are impressive collections: American MemoryÊÌÌ«\ÉÉiÀÞ°V°}Û Avalon Project Û>°Ì EurodocsÊÌÌ«\ÉÉiÕ`VÃ°L°LÞÕ°i`Õ Google Books ÌÌ«\ÉÉÊLÃ°}}i°V Google Scholar ÌÌ«\ÉÉÃV>À°}}i°V The Making of America }À« Online Books PageÊÌÌ«\ÉÉiLÃ°LÀ>ÀÞ°Õ«i°i`Õ

Government and news sites For current topics, both government and news sites can prove ÕÃivÕ°Ê>ÞÊ}ÛiÀiÌÊ>}iViÃÊ>ÌÊiÛiÀÞÊiÛiÊ«ÀÛìÊiÊ vÀ>Ì°Ê ÛiÀiÌ>Ì>i`Ê ÃÌiÃÊ VÕìÊ Àisources such as legal texts, facts and statistics, government reports, and searchable reference databases. Here are just a few government sites: FedstatsÊÌÌ«\ÉÉÜÜÜ°vi`ÃÌ>ÌÃ°}Û GPO AccessÊÌÌ«\ÉÉÜÜÜ°}«>VViÃÃ°}Û United NationsÊÌÌ«\ÉÉÜÜÜ°Õ°À} University of Michigan Documents Center Ê>VViÃÃÊ>ÊÃÌ>Ìi½ÃÊ7iLÊÃÌiÊLÞÊ«ÕÌÌ}ÊÌiÊÌÜiÌÌiÀÊ state abbreviation into a standard URL: °ÕÃ°Ê -ÕLÃÌÌÕÌiÊ >ÞÊ ÃÌ>Ìi½ÃÊ ÌÜiÌÌiÀÊ >LLÀiÛ>ÌÊ vÀÊ ÌiÊ letters ga]ÊÜVÊÊÌÃÊV>ÃiÊÃÌ>`ÊvÀÊiÀ}>°

ÌiÀiÌÊÃi>ÀViÃÊ UÊ }ÛiÀiÌÊ ÃÌiÃÊ UÊ iÜÃÊÃÌiÃÊ UÊ L}ÃÊ UÊ ÜÃ

res

46e

>ÞÊiÜÃÊÀ}>â>ÌÃÊvviÀÊÕ«Ì`>ÌiÊvÀ>ÌÊÊ ÌiÊ 7iL°Ê -iÊ ÀiµÕÀiÊ Ài}ÃÌÀ>ÌÊ >`Ê >ÞÊ V>À}iÊ viiÃÊ vÀÊ some articles. Check with your library to see if it subscribes to online newspapers that you can access at no charge. The following are some free news sites: BBC ÌÌ«\ÉÉÜÜÜ°LLV°V°Õ Google NewsÊÌÌ«\ÉÉiÜÃ°}}i°VÊ Kidon Media-LinkÊÌÌ«\ÉÉÜÜÜ°`°VÉi`>Ê New York TimesÊÌÌ«\ÉÉÞÌiÃ°V

Blogs ÊL}ÊÃÀÌÊvÀÊWeblog) is a site that contains dated text or multimedia entries usually written and maintained by one person, with comments contributed by readers. Though some blogs are personal diaries and others are devoted to partisan politics, many journalists and academics maintain blogs that cover topics of interest to researchers. Some blogs feature short essays that provide useful insights or analysis; others point to new developments in an area of interest. Because blogs are frequently updated, you may want to subscribe to especially ÕÃivÕÊ iÃ°Ê /iÊ vÜ}Ê 7iLÊ ÃÌiÃÊ V>Ê i>`Ê ÞÕÊ ÌÊ >Ê ÜìÊ range of blogs: Academic Blog Portal ÌÌ«\ÉÉ>V>ìVL}Ã°À} Google Blog Search ÌÌ«\ÉÉÜÜÜ°}}i°VÉL}Ãi>ÀV Science BlogsÊÌÌ«\ÉÉÃViViL}Ã°V Technorati ÌÌ«\ÉÉÌiVÀ>Ì°V

Wikis ÊÜÊÃÊ>ÊV>LÀ>ÌÛiÊ7iLÊÃÌiÊÜÌÊ>ÞÊVÌÀLÕÌÀÃÊ>`Ê with content that may change frequently. Wikipedia, the collaborative online encyclopedia, is one of the most frequently consulted wikis.

457

458

46f

res

Conducting research

In general, Wikipedia may be helpful if you’re checking for something that is common knowledge (facts available in multiple sources, such as dates and well-known historical events) or looking for very current information about a topic in contemporary culture that isn’t covered elsewhere. However, many scholars do not consider Wikipedia and wikis Ê}iiÀ>ÊÌÊLiÊ>««À«À>ÌiÊÃÕÀViÃÊvÀÊVi}iÊÀiÃi>ÀV°ÊÕthorship is open to anyone, not limited to experts; articles may be written by enthusiastic amateurs who are not well invÀi`°Ê`ÊLiV>ÕÃiÊÌiÊ>ÀÌViÃÊV>ÊLiÊV>}i`ÊLÞÊ>Þi]Ê controversial texts are often altered to reflect a particular perÃ«iVÌÛiÊ>`Ê>ÀiÊiÃ«iV>ÞÊÃÕÃVi«ÌLiÊÌÊL>Ã°Ê7iÊ«ÃÃLi]Ê locate and cite another, more reliable source for any useful information you find in a wiki. (Sometimes a wiki’s own citations can lead you to such credible sources.) If you cannot find a second source, check with your instructor before integrating ideas from a wiki into your researched writing.

46f Use other search tools. In addition to articles, books, and online sources, you may want to consult references such as encyclopedias and almanacs. Citations in scholarly works can also lead you to additional sources.

Reference works The reference section of the library holds both general and specialized encyclopedias, dictionaries, almanacs, atlases, and biographical references, some available in electronic form through ÌiÊLÀ>ÀÞ½ÃÊ7iLÊÃÌi°Ê-ÕVÊÜÀÃÊvÌiÊ«ÀÛìÊ>Ê}`ÊÛiÀview of your subject and include references to the most significant works on a topic. Check with a reference librarian to see which works are most appropriate for your project. General reference works iiÀ>Ê ÀiviÀiViÊ ÜÀÃÊ >ÀiÊ }`Ê places to check facts and get basic information. Here are a few frequently used general references:

iVÞV«i`>Ã]Ê>Ì>ÃiÃÊ UÊ LL}À>«iÃÊ UÊ shortcuts to related sources

res

46f

American National Biography National Geographic Atlas of the World The New Encyclopaedia Britannica The Oxford English Dictionary Statistical Abstract of the United States ÌÕ}Ê }iiÀ>Ê iVÞV«i`>ÃÊ >ÀiÊ vÌiÊ >Ê }`Ê «>ViÊ to find background about your topic, you should rarely use ÌiÊÊÞÕÀÊw>Ê«>«iÀ°ÊÃÌÊÃÌÀÕVÌÀÃÊiÝ«iVÌÊÞÕÊÌÊÀiÞÊ on more specialized sources. Specialized reference works Specialized reference works often explore a topic in depth, usually in the form of articles written by leading authorities. They offer a quick way to gain an ex«iÀÌ½ÃÊÛiÀÛiÜÊvÊ>ÊV«iÝÊÌ«V°Ê>ÞÊÃ«iV>âi`ÊÜÀÃÊ>ÀiÊ available, including these:

Contemporary Authors Encyclopedia of Bioethics Encyclopedia of Crime and Justice Encyclopedia of Psychology Encyclopedia of World Environmental History International Encyclopedia of Communication New Encyclopedia of Africa Check with a reference librarian to see what specialized references are available for your topic. hackerhandbooks.com/bedhandbook > Research and Documentation Online > Finding sources

Bibliographies and scholarly citations as shortcuts Scholarly books and articles list the works the author has cited, usually at the end. These lists are useful shortcuts to additional reliable sources on your topic. For example, most vÊ ÌiÊ ÃV>ÀÞÊ >ÀÌViÃÊ ÕÃ>Ê À>Ê VÃÕÌi`Ê VÌ>i`Ê

459

460

46g

res

Conducting research

citations to related research studies, selected by experts in the field; through these citations, she quickly located other sources related to her topic, treatments for childhood obesity. If you need help using an author’s citations to find additional sources, ask a reference librarian.

46g Conduct field research, if appropriate. Your own field research can enhance or be the focus of a writing project. For a composition class, for example, you might want to interview a local politician about a current issue, such as the use of alternative energy sources. For a sociology class, you might decide to conduct a survey regarding V>«ÕÃÊ ÌÀi`ÃÊ Ê VÕÌÞÊ ÃiÀÛVi°Ê ÌÊ ÜÀ]Ê ÞÕÊ }ÌÊ need to learn how food industry executives have responded to reports that their products are contributing to health problems. NOTE: Colleges and universities often require researchers to sub-

mit projects to an institutional review board (IRB) if the research involves human subjects outside of a classroom setting. Before administering a survey or conducting other fieldwork, check with your instructor to see if IRB approval is required.

Interviewing Interviews can often shed new light on a topic. Look for an expert who has firsthand knowledge of the subject or seek out someone whose personal experience provides a valuable perspective on your topic. 7iÊ >Ã}Ê vÀÊ >Ê ÌiÀÛiÜ]Ê LiÊ Vi>ÀÊ >LÕÌÊ ÜÊ ÞÕÊ are, what the purpose of the interview is, and how you would prefer to conduct it: via e-mail, over the phone, or in person. Plan for the interview by writing down a series of questions. Try to avoid questions with yes or no answers or those that encourage vague rambling. Instead, ask questions that lead to facts, anecdotes, and opinions that will add a meaningful dimension to your paper.

wi`ÊÀiÃi>ÀVÊ UÊ ÌiÀÛiÜÃÊ UÊ ÃÕÀÛiÞÃ

res

46g

INEFFECTIVE INTERVIEW QUESTIONS

How many years have you spent studying childhood obesity? Is your work interesting? EFFECTIVE INTERVIEW QUESTIONS

7>ÌÊ>ÀiÊÃiÊVÕÀÀiÌÊÌiÀ«ÀiÌ>ÌÃÊvÊÌiÊV>ÕÃiÃÊvÊV`hood obesity? 7>ÌÊÌÀi>ÌiÌÃÊ>ÛiÊÞÕÊvÕ`ÊÌÊLiÊÃÌÊivviVÌÛi¶Ê7ÞÊ do you think they work?

7iÊµÕÌ}ÊÞÕÀÊÃÕÀViÊÊÞÕÀÊ«>«iÀ]ÊLiÊ>ÃÊ>VVÕÀ>ÌiÊ and fair as possible. To ensure accuracy, you might want to ask permission to record the interview; if you cannot record it, take careful notes or conduct it by e-mail.

Surveying opinion For some topics, you may find it useful to survey opinions through written questionnaires, telephone or e-mail «Ã]Ê ÀÊ µÕiÃÌÃÊ «ÃÌi`Ê Ê >Ê 7iLÊ vÀÕ°Ê >ÞÊ «i«iÊ are reluctant to fill out long questionnaires or answer longwinded telephone pollsters, so if you want a good response rate, you will need to limit your questions and frame them carefully. 7iÊ «ÃÃLi]Ê >ÃÊ ÞiÃÉÊ µÕiÃÌÃÊ ÀÊ }ÛiÊ ÕÌ«i choice options. Surveys with such queries can be completed quickly, and they are easy to tabulate. SAMPLE YES/NO QUESTION

Do you favor the use of Internet surveillance in the workplace?

You may also want to ask a few open-ended questions to elicit more individual responses, some of which may be worth quoting in your paper. SAMPLE OPEN-ENDED QUESTION

7>Ì]ÊvÊ>Þ]ÊiÝ«iÀiViÃÊ>ÛiÊÞÕÊ>`ÊÜÌÊÌiÀiÌÊÃÕÀÛilance in the workplace?

461

462

47

res

Evaluating sources

-iÊ iÊ ÃÕÀÛiÞÊ V«>iÃÊ ÃÕVÊ >ÃÊ -ÕÀÛiÞiÞÊ ÌÌ«\ÉÉÜÜÜ°ÃÕÀÛiÞiÞ°VÊ >`Ê }Ê ÌÌ«\ÉÉ âiÀ>}°VÊ ÃÌÊ 7iLL>Ãi`Ê ÃÕÀÛiÞÃÊ >`Ê «ÀÛìÊ vÀÊ a limited number of questions and responses for free. They allow you to create easy-to-take online surveys and collate the results. See the note on page 460 if you intend to survey students on your campus.

Visiting and observing Your firsthand observations of significant places, people, or events can enhance a paper in a variety of disciplines. For ex>«i]Ê ÜiÊ ÀiÃi>ÀV}Ê ÌÀi`ÃÊ Ê VÌi«À>ÀÞÊ iÀV>Ê folk art, a student in New York City went to an exhibit on folk >ÀÌÊ >ÌÊ ÌiÊ ÕÃiÕÊ vÊ ìÀÊ ÀÌ°Ê /Ê }>ÌiÀÊ vÀ>ÌÊ vÀÊ a paper on nineteenth-century utopian experiments, a student in Peoria, Illinois, drove to nearby Bishop Hill, a commune founded in 1846 by Swedish refugees seeking religious freedom. For his political science paper on civic participation, a student in Salt Lake City attended a local school board meeting.

Contacting organizations >ÞÊ À}>â>ÌÃ]Ê LÌÊ «ÕLVÊ >`Ê «ÀÛ>Ìi]Ê >ÛiÊ vÀ>ÌÊÊÌiÀÊ7iLÊÃÌiÃÊ>`Ê>ÞÊ«ÀÛìÊÌiÀ>ÌÕÀiÊÊÀiÃ«ÃiÊ ÌÊ>Ê«iÊV>]Ê>Êi>]ÊÀÊ>ÊiÌÌiÀ°ÊÌÕ}ÊÌÃÊÌiÀ>ÌÕÀiÊ sometimes contains up-to-date information, use it judiciously. ÀÕ«ÃÊÌi`ÊÌÊ«ÀÌiÊÌiÀÊÜÊÌiÀiÃÌÃÆÊÞÕÊV>½ÌÊ>Ü>ÞÃÊ count on them to present a balanced view. The Encyclopedia of Associations (available electronically and in print) lists groups by their concerns, such as the environment or health care, and provides addresses and phone numbers.

47

Evaluating sources

7ÌÊ iiVÌÀVÊ Ãi>ÀVÊ ÌÃ]Ê ÞÕÊ V>Ê vÌiÊ V>ÌiÊ `âiÃÊ ÀÊ even hundreds of potential sources for your topic — far more than you will have time to read. Your challenge will be to

wi`ÊÀiÃi>ÀVÊ UÊ iÛ>Õ>Ì}ÊÃÕÀViÃÊ UÊ how sources work in a paper

res

47a

determine what kinds of sources you need and to zero in on a reasonable number of quality sources, those truly worth your time and attention. Later, once you have decided on some sources worth consulting, your challenge will be to read them with an open mind and a critical eye.

47a Think about how sources might contribute to your writing. How you plan to use sources will affect how you evaluate them. Not every source must directly support your thesis; sources can have other functions in a paper: UÊ «ÀÛìÊL>V}ÀÕ`ÊvÀ>ÌÊÀÊVÌiÝÌÊvÀÊÞÕÀÊÌ«V UÊ iÝ«>ÊÌiÀÃÊÀÊVVi«ÌÃÊÌ>ÌÊÞÕÀÊÀi>ìÀÃÊ}ÌÊÌÊ understand UÊ «ÀÛìÊiÛìViÊvÀÊÞÕÀÊ>À}ÕiÌ UÊ i`Ê>ÕÌÀÌÞÊÌÊÞÕÀÊ>À}ÕiÌ UÊ vviÀÊVÕÌiÀiÛìViÊ>`Ê>ÌiÀ>ÌÛiÊÌiÀ«ÀiÌ>ÌÃÊÌÊ your argument One student, for example, wrote an essay arguing that public funding for the arts should be granted on artistic merit alone and not on so-called decency standards. She used a 1998 Supreme Court decision (National Endowment for the Arts v. Finley®Ê>`ÊÌiÊÌiÝÌÊvÊÌiÊÀÃÌÊiìÌÊÌÊ provide background on the decency debate in the arts and to set her argument in context. She used published interviews }ÛiÊLÞÊVÌÀÛiÀÃ>Ê>ÀÌÃÌÃÊ>ÀiÊiÞÊ>`Ê/ÊiÀÊÌÊ lend authority to her argument. She also used passages from a profile of conservative North Carolina senator Jesse Helms ÌÊÀi«ÀiÃiÌÊ>Ê>ÌiÀ>ÌÛiÊ«ÌÊvÊÛiÜÊÊÌiÊìL>Ìi°Ê7ÌÊ her overall purpose in mind, the student judged each source according to the specific role it would play in her argument. For more examples of how student writers use sources for a variety of purposes, see 50c, 56a, 57a, and page 574.

463

464

47b

res

Evaluating sources

47b Select sources worth your time and attention. Section 46 shows how to refine your searches in databases, in the library’s book catalog, and in search engines. This section explains how to scan through the results for the most promising sources and how to preview them — without actually reading them — to see whether they are likely to live up to your expectations and meet your needs.

Scanning search results ÃÊÞÕÊÃV>ÊÌÀÕ}Ê>ÊÃÌÊvÊÃi>ÀVÊÀiÃÕÌÃ]ÊÜ>ÌVÊvÀÊVÕiÃÊdicating whether a source might be useful for your purposes or not worth pursuing. (For an annotated list of one student’s search results, see pp. 575–76.) You will need to use somewhat different strategies when scanning search results from a dataL>Ãi]Ê>ÊLÊV>Ì>}]Ê>`Ê>Ê7iLÊÃi>ÀVÊi}i°Ê Databases ÃÌÊ`>Ì>L>ÃiÃ]ÊÃÕVÊ>ÃÊExpanded Academic ASAP, list at least the following information, which can help you decide if a source is relevant, current, scholarly enough (see the chart on p. 468), and a suitable length for your purposes.

Title and brief description (How relevant?) Date (How current?) Name of periodical (How scholarly?) Length (How extensive in coverage?) On the following page are just a few of the hits Ned Bishop came up with when he consulted a general database for articles on the Fort Pillow massacre, using the search term Fort Pillow. >ÞÊ `>Ì>L>ÃiÃÊ >ÜÊ ÞÕÊ ÌÊ ÃÀÌÊ ÞÕÀÊ ÃÌÊ vÊ ÀiÃÕÌÃÊ LÞÊ relevance or date; sorting may help you scan the information more efficiently. By scanning the titles in his search results, Bishop saw that only one contained the words Fort Pillow. The name of the periodical in which it appeared, Journal of American History, suggested that the source was scholarly. The

ÃiiVÌ}ÊÃÕÀViÃÊ UÊ ÃV>}ÊÃi>ÀVÊÀiÃÕÌÃ

res

47b

465

EVALUATING SEARCH RESULTS: LIBRARY DATABASE Popular magazine. Not relevant. Movie review. Not relevant. Subject too broad. Brief scholarly article. Matches the student’s topic. Promising.

1989 publication date was not a problem, since currency is not necessarily a key issue for historical topics. The article’s length (eight pages) is given in parentheses at the end of the VÌ>Ì°Ê7iÊÌiÊ>ÀÌViÊ>ÞÊÃiiÊÃÀÌ]ÊÌiÊÌ«VÊpÊ>ÊÃÌ>tistical note — is narrow enough to ensure adequate depth of coverage. Bishop decided that the article was worth consulting. Because the other sources were irrelevant or too broad, he decided not to consult them. Book catalogs The library’s book catalog usually lists basic information about books, enough for a first impression (see >ÃÊ «°Ê {xÓ®°Ê Ê L½ÃÊ ÌÌiÊ >`Ê `>ÌiÊ vÊ «ÕLV>ÌÊ ÜÊ vÌiÊ be your first clues about whether the book is worth consulting. Be cautious about books that were published ten or more years ago; depending on the topic, they may be outdated. If a title looks interesting, you can click on it for information about the book’s subject matter and its length. The table of contents may also be available, offering a glimpse of what’s inside. Web search engines iV>ÕÃiÊ>ÞiÊV>Ê«ÕLÃÊ>Ê7iLÊÃÌi]Ê legitimate sources and unreliable sources live side-by-side i°ÊÃÊÞÕÊÃV>ÊÌÀÕ}ÊÃi>ÀVÊÀiÃÕÌÃ]ÊÊvÀÊÌiÊvlowing clues about the probable relevance, currency, and reliability of a site — but be aware that the clues are by no means foolproof.

47b

466

res

Evaluating sources

The title, keywords, and lead-in text (How relevant?) Ê`>ÌiÊÜÊVÕÀÀiÌ¶® Ê`V>ÌÊvÊÌiÊÃÌi½ÃÊÃ«ÃÀÊÀÊ«ÕÀ«ÃiÊÜÊÀi>Li¶® The URL, especially the domain name extension: for example, .com, .edu, .gov, or .org (How relevant? How reliable?) ÌÊ ÌiÊ LÌÌÊ vÊ ÌÃÊ «>}iÊ >ÀiÊ >Ê viÜÊ vÊ ÌiÊ ÀiÃÕÌÃÊ Ì>ÌÊ ÕÃ>Ê À>Ê ÀiÌÀiÛi`Ê >vÌiÀÊ ÌÞ«}Ê ÌiÊ iÞÜÀ`ÃÊ childhood obesity into a search engine; she limited her search to works with those words in the title. À>ÊvÕ`ÊÌiÊwÀÃÌÊÃÌi]ÊÃ«ÃÀi`ÊLÞÊ>ÊÀiÃi>ÀVL>Ãi`Ê organization, promising enough to explore for her paper. The second and fourth sites held less promise because they seemed to offer popular rather than scholarly information. In addition, the KidSource site was populated by distracting comiÀV>Ê>`ÛiÀÌÃiiÌÃ°ÊÀ>ÊÀiiVÌi`ÊÌiÊÌÀ`ÊÃÕÀViÊÌÊ because she doubted its reliability — in fact, research from the National Institutes of Health was what she hoped to find — but because a quick skim of its contents revealed that the information was too general for her purposes.

EVALUATING SEARCH RESULTS: INTERNET SEARCH ENGINE Content from a research-based organization. Promising. Popular rather than scholarly source. Not relevant. Content too general. Not relevant.

Popular and too general. Not relevant.

ÃiiVÌ}ÊÃÕÀViÃÊ UÊ ÊÃV>}ÊÃi>ÀVÊ ÀiÃÕÌÃÊ UÊ «ÀiÛiÜ}ÊÃÕÀViÃ

res

47b

Previewing sources Once you have decided that a source looks promising, preview it quickly to see whether it lives up to its promise. If you can reject irrelevant or unreliable sources before actually reading them, you will save yourself time. Techniques for previewing an article from your library’s subscription database or a book are relatively simple; strategies for investigating the likely ÜÀÌÊvÊ>Ê7iLÊÃÌiÊ>ÀiÊÀiÊV«V>Ìi`° Previewing an article The techniques for previewing an article are fairly straightforward. In researching her paper on V``Ê LiÃÌÞ]Ê ÕÃ>Ê À>Ê Ã«iÌÊ Ê ÀiÊ Ì>Ê >Ê viÜÊ minutes scanning an article before deciding whether it was worth her time. Here are a few strategies for previewing an article:

UÊ ÃìÀÊÌiÊ«ÕLV>ÌÊÊÜVÊÌiÊ>ÀÌViÊÃÊ«ÀÌi`°ÊÃÊ ÌÊ>ÊÃV>ÀÞÊÕÀ>ÊÃiiÊÌiÊV>ÀÌÊÊ«°Ê{Èn®¶ÊÊ««Õ>ÀÊ >}>âi¶ÊÊiÜÃ«>«iÀÊÜÌÊ>Ê>Ì>ÊÀi«ÕÌ>Ì¶ UÊ ÀÊ>Ê>}>âiÊÀÊÕÀ>Ê>ÀÌVi]ÊÊvÀÊ>Ê>LÃÌÀ>VÌÊÀÊ a statement of purpose at the beginning; also look for a summary at the end. UÊ ÀÊ>ÊiÜÃ«>«iÀÊ>ÀÌVi]ÊvVÕÃÊÊÌiÊi>ìÊ>`ÊÌiÊ opening paragraphs, known as the lead. UÊ -Ê>ÞÊi>`}ÃÊ>`ÊÊ>ÌÊ>ÞÊÛÃÕ>ÃÊpÊV>ÀÌÃ]Ê graphs, diagrams, or illustrations — that might indicate the article’s focus and scope. Previewing a book ÃÊÞÕÊ«ÀiÛiÜÊ>ÊL]Êii«ÊÊ`ÊÌ>ÌÊ even if the entire book is not worth your time, parts of it may prove useful. For example, by using the indexes of several LÃÊÊ ÛÊ7>ÀÊÃÌÀÞ]Ê i`Ê Ã«ÊµÕVÞÊV>Ìi`ÊÕÃiful passages describing the Fort Pillow massacre. Try any or all of the following techniques to preview a book:

UÊ >ViÊÌÀÕ}ÊÌiÊÌ>LiÊvÊVÌiÌÃ]Êii«}ÊÞÕÀÊ research question in mind.

467

468

47b

res

Evaluating sources

UÊ -ÊÌiÊ«Àiv>ViÊÊÃi>ÀVÊvÊ>ÊÃÌ>ÌiiÌÊvÊÌiÊ>ÕÌÀ½ÃÊ purposes. UÊ 1ÃiÊÌiÊìÝÊÌÊÊÕ«Ê>ÊviÜÊÜÀ`ÃÊÀi>Ìi`ÊÌÊÞÕÀÊÌ«V° UÊ vÊ>ÊV>«ÌiÀÊÃÊÕÃivÕ]ÊÀi>`ÊÌÃÊ«i}Ê>`ÊVÃ}Ê paragraphs and skim any headings. UÊ ÃìÀÊÌiÊ>ÕÌÀ½ÃÊÃÌÞiÊ>`Ê>««À>V°Ê iÃÊÌiÊÃÌÞiÊ suggest enough intellectual depth, or is the book too specialized for your purposes? Does the author present ideas in an unbiased way? Previewing a Web site It is a fairly quick and easy job to track `ÜÊ ÕiÀÕÃÊ «ÌiÌ>ÞÊ ÕÃivÕÊ ÃÕÀViÃÊ Ê ÌiÊ 7iL]Ê LÕÌÊ evaluating those sources can require some detective work.

Determining if a source is scholarly For many college assignments, you will be asked to use scholarly sources. These are written by experts for a knowledgeable audience and usually go into more depth than books and articles written for a general audience. (Scholarly sources are sometimes called refereed or peer-reviewed because the work is evaluated by iÝ«iÀÌÃÊÊÌiÊwi`ÊLivÀiÊ«ÕLV>Ì°®Ê/ÊìÌiÀiÊvÊ>ÊÃÕÀViÊÃÊ scholarly, you should look for the following: U Formal language and presentation U Authors who are academics or scientists U Footnotes or a bibliography documenting the works cited by the author in the source U Original research and interpretation (rather than a summary of other people’s work) U Quotations from and analysis of primary sources (in humanities disciplines such as literature, history, and philosophy) U A description of research methods or a review of related research (in the sciences and social sciences) NOTE: In some databases, searches can be limited to refereed or peer-reviewed journals.

«ÀiÛiÜ}ÊÃÕÀViÃÊ UÊ ÃV>ÀÞÊÃÕÀViÃÊ UÊ primary and secondary sources

res

47b

7iLÊ ÃÌiÃÊ V>Ê LiÊ VÀi>Ìi`Ê LÞÊ >Þi]Ê >`Ê ÌiÀÊ >ÕÌÀÃÊ >`Ê purposes are not always apparent. In addition, there are no ÀiµÕÀi`Ê ÃÌ>`>À`ÃÊ vÀÊ ÌiÊ ìÃ}Ê vÊ 7iLÊ ÃÌiÃ]Ê ÃÊ ÞÕÊ >ÞÊ need to do a fair amount of clicking and scrolling before you locate clues about a site’s reliability. In researching her paper ÊÌiÀiÌÊÃÕÀÛi>ViÊÊÌiÊÜÀ«>Vi]Ê>Ê"ÀÛÊÃ«iÌÊ VÃìÀ>LiÊÌiÊ «ÀiÛiÜ}Ê7iLÊ ÃÌiÃ]Ê>ÞÊvÊÜVÊÃiÊ rejected (see pp. 476–77). ÃÊÞÕÊ«ÀiÛiÜÊ>Ê7iLÊÃÌi]ÊViVÊvÀÊÀiiÛ>Vi]ÊÀi>LÌÞ]Ê and currency: UÊ ÀÜÃiÊÌiÊiÊ«>}i°Ê ÊÌÃÊVÌiÌÃÊ>`ÊÃÊÃiiÊ relevant to your research question? UÊ ÃÊÞÕÀÃivÊÜ>ÌÊÌiÊÃÌiÊÃÊÌÀÞ}ÊÌÊ`\Ê-iÊ>Ê«À`ÕVÌ¶Ê Promote an idea? Inform the public? Is the site’s purpose consistent with your research? UÊ ÊvÀÊÌiÊ>iÊvÊ>Ê>ÕÌÀÊÀÊ>Ê7iL>ÃÌiÀÊ>`]Ê if possible, review his or her credentials. Often a site’s author is named at the bottom of the home page. If you have landed on an internal page of a site and no author is evident, try navigating to the home page, either through a link or by truncating the URL (see the tip on p. 474). UÊ iVÊvÀÊ>ÊÃ«ÃÀÊ>i]Ê>`ÊVÃìÀÊ«ÃÃLiÊÌÛiÃÊ the organization might have for sponsoring the site. Is the group likely to look at only one side of an issue? UÊ `ÊÕÌÊÜiÊÌiÊÃÌiÊÜ>ÃÊVÀi>Ìi`ÊÀÊ>ÃÌÊÕ«`>Ìi`°ÊÃÊÌÊ current enough for your purposes? TIP:Ê 7iÊV`ÕVÌ}Ê>V>ìVÊÀiÃi>ÀV]Ê`ÊÌÊÀiÞÊÊÃÌiÃÊ that give very little information about authors or sponsors.

Distinguishing between primary and secondary sources ÃÊÞÕÊLi}Ê>ÃÃiÃÃ}ÊiÛìViÊÊ>ÊÃÕÀVi]ÊìÌiÀiÊÜiÌiÀÊ you are reading a primary or a secondary source. Primary sources are original documents such as letters, diaries, legislative bills, laboratory studies, field research reports, and eyewitness accounts.

469

470

47c

res

Evaluating sources

Secondary sources are commentaries on primary sources— another writer’s opinions about or interpretation of a primary ÃÕÀVi°Ê Ê «À>ÀÞÊ ÃÕÀViÊ vÀÊ i`Ê Ã«Ê Ü>ÃÊ >Ì>Ê i`vÀ`Ê Forrest’s official report on the battle at Fort Pillow. Bishop also consulted a number of secondary sources, some of which relied heavily on primary sources such as letters. ÌÕ}Ê>Ê«À>ÀÞÊÃÕÀViÊÃÊÌÊiViÃÃ>ÀÞÊÀiÊÀi>LiÊ than a secondary source, it has the advantage of being a firsthand account. Naturally, you can better evaluate what a secondary source says if you have first read any primary sources it discusses.

47c Select appropriate versions of online sources. ÊiÊÃÕÀViÊ>ÞÊ>««i>ÀÊ>ÃÊ>Ê>LÃÌÀ>VÌ]Ê>ÊiÝViÀ«Ì]ÊÀÊ>Ê full-text article or book. It is important to distinguish among these versions of sources and to use a complete version of a source, preferably one with page numbers, for your research. LÃÌÀ>VÌÃÊ >`Ê iÝViÀ«ÌÃÊ >ÀiÊ ÃÀÌii`Ê ÛiÀÃÃÊ vÊ V«iÌiÊ ÜÀÃ°Ê Ê >LÃÌÀ>VÌÊpÊ>Ê ÃÕ>ÀÞÊ vÊ >Ê ÜÀ½ÃÊ Vtents — might appear in a database record for a periodical article (see p. 471) and can give you clues about the usefuliÃÃÊ vÊ >Ê >ÀÌViÊ vÀÊ ÞÕÀÊ «>«iÀ°Ê LÃÌÀ>VÌÃÊ >ÀiÊ LÀivÊ ÕÃÕ>ÞÊ fewer than five hundred words) and usually do not contain enough information to function alone as sources in a research paper. Reading the complete article is the best way to understand the author’s argument before referring to it in ÞÕÀÊ ÜÊ ÜÀÌ}°Ê 7iÊ ÞÕÊ ìÌiÀiÊ Ì>ÌÊ ÌiÊ vÕÊ >ÀÌViÊ is worth reading, scroll through the record to find a link to the complete text in your library’s databases. If you cannot access the complete article from a database, see if the library >ÃÊ>Ê«ÀÌÊV«ÞÊÊÌiÊÃiÛiÃ°ÊÃÊ>ÊLÀ>À>ÊvÀÊ>ÃÃÃÌ>ViÊvÊ you are unsure whether your library keeps the periodical. Ê iÝViÀ«ÌÊ ÃÊ ÌiÊ wÀÃÌÊ viÜÊ ÃiÌiViÃÊ ÀÊ «>À>}À>«ÃÊ vÊ >Ê newspaper or magazine article and sometimes appears in a list of hits in an online search (see p. 472). From an excerpt, you can often determine whether the complete article would be

iÊÃÕÀViÃÊ UÊ >LÃÌÀ>VÌÃÊ UÊ ÊiÝViÀ«ÌÃÊ UÊ * ÊwiÃÊ UÊ /ÊwiÃ

res

47c

useful for your paper. Sometimes, however, the thesis or topic sentence of the article is buried deeper in the article than the excerpt reveals. In these cases, the headline might be a clue to the relevance of the complete article. Be sure to retrieve and read the full text of any article you might want to cite. If you are working with an Internet search engine such as Google, you may find that your results lead to articles available only for a fee. Before paying a fee, see if you can get the article through your library system. ÊvÕÌiÝÌÊÜÀÊ>ÞÊ>««i>ÀÊiÊ>ÃÊ>Ê* Ê«ÀÌ>LiÊ`VÕiÌÊvÀ>Ì®ÊwiÊÀÊ>ÃÊ>Ê/ÊwiÊÃiÌiÃÊV>i`Ê>Êtext file). Ê* ÊwiÊÃÊÕÃÕ>ÞÊ>ÊiÝ>VÌÊV«ÞÊvÊÌiÊ«>}iÃÊvÊ>Ê«iÀ`V>Ê article as they appeared in print, including the page numbers. Some corporate and government reports are presented online as * ÊwiÃ]Ê>`ÊÌiÞÊ>ÀiÊÕÃÕ>ÞÊ«>}>Ìi`°ÊÊvÕÌiÝÌÊ`VÕiÌÊ Ì>ÌÊ>««i>ÀÃÊ>ÃÊ>Ê/ÊÀÊ>ÊÌiÝÌÊwiÊÃÊÌÊ«>}>Ìi`°ÊvÊÞÕÀÊ source is available in both formats, choose the PDF file for your research because you will be able to cite specific page numbers. DATABASE RECORD WITH AN ABSTRACT

471

472

47d

res

Evaluating sources

SEARCH RESULT WITH AN EXCERPT

47d Read with an open mind and a critical eye. ÃÊ ÞÕÊ Li}Ê Ài>`}Ê ÌiÊ ÃÕÀViÃÊ ÞÕÊ >ÛiÊ VÃi]Ê ii«Ê >Ê open mind. Do not let your personal beliefs prevent you from listening to new ideas and opposing viewpoints. Your research question — not a snap judgment about the question — should guide your reading. 7iÊÞÕÊÀi>`ÊVÀÌV>Þ]ÊÞÕÊ>ÀiÊÌÊiViÃÃ>ÀÞÊÕ`}}Ê an author’s work harshly; you are simply examining its assumptions, assessing its evidence, and weighing its conclusions. (To see one student’s careful reading of a source text, see p. 577.) Ê 7iÊÞÕÊÀiÃi>ÀVÊÊÌiÊ7iL]ÊÌÊÃÊi>ÃÞÊÌÊ}ÀiÊ ÛiÜÃÊ`vviÀiÌÊvÀÊÞÕÀÊÜ°Ê7iLÊ«>}iÃÊÌ>ÌÊ>««i>ÊÌÊÞÕÊÜÊvÌiÊ link to other pages that support the same viewpoint. If your sources all seem to agree with you—and with one another—try to find sources with opposing views and evaluate them with an open mind.

Being alert for signs of bias Both in print and online, some sources are more objective than others. If you were exploring the conspiracy theories surrounding John F. Kennedy’s assassination, for example, you

Ài>`}ÊVÀÌV>ÞÊ UÊ Li}Ê«iì`Ê U ÀiV}â}ÊL>ÃÊ UÊ iÛ>Õ>Ì}ÊÃÕÀViÃ

res

47d

wouldn’t look to a supermarket tabloid for answers. Even publications that are considered reputable can be editorially biased. For example, USA Today, National Review, and Ms. are all credible sources that are likely to interpret events quite differently from one another. If you are uncertain about a periodical’s special interests, consult Magazines for Libraries. To check for bias in a book, see what book reviewers have written about Ì°ÊÊÀiviÀiViÊLÀ>À>ÊV>Êi«ÊÞÕÊV>ÌiÊÀiÛiÜÃÊ>`Ê>ÃÃiÃÃÊ the credibility of both the book and the reviewers. Like publishers, some authors are more objective than others. If you have reason to believe that a writer is particularly

Evaluating all sources Checking for signs of bias U Does the author or publisher endorse political or religious views that could affect objectivity? U Is the author or publisher associated with a special-interest group, such as Greenpeace or the National Rifle Association, that might present only one side of an issue? UÊ ÀiÊ>ÌiÀ>ÌÛiÊÛiÜÃÊ«ÀiÃiÌi`Ê>`Ê>``ÀiÃÃi`¶ÊÜÊv>ÀÞÊìÃÊ the author treat opposing views? (See 6c.) U Does the author’s language show signs of bias? (See 6b.)

Assessing an argument U What is the author’s central claim or thesis? UÊ ÜÊìÃÊÌiÊ>ÕÌÀÊÃÕ««ÀÌÊÌÃÊV>ÊpÊÜÌÊÀiiÛ>ÌÊ>`ÊÃÕvwViÌÊ evidence or with just a few anecdotes or emotional examples? U Are statistics consistent with those you encounter in other ÃÕÀViÃ¶Ê>ÛiÊÌiÞÊLiiÊÕÃi`Êv>ÀÞ¶Ê iÃÊÌiÊ>ÕÌÀÊiÝ«>Ê where the statistics come from? (It is possible to “lie” with statistics by using them selectively or by omitting mathematical details.) U Are any of the author’s assumptions questionable? U Does the author consider opposing arguments and refute them persuasively? (See 6c.) U Does the author fall prey to any logical fallacies? (See 6a.)

473

474

47e

res

Evaluating sources

biased, you will want to assess his or her arguments with special care. For a list of questions worth asking, see the chart on page 473.

Assessing the author’s argument In nearly all subjects worth writing about, there is some element of argument, so don’t be surprised to encounter experts who `Ã>}Àii°Ê7iÊÞÕÊw`Ê>Ài>ÃÊvÊ`Ã>}ÀiiMaking the most of your handbook ment, you will want to read each source’s Good college writers read critically. arguments with special care, testing them 0 Judging whether a source is with your own critical intelligence. The reasonable: 6a questions in the chart on page 473 can 0 Judging whether a source is help you weigh the strengths and weakfair: 6c nesses of each author’s arguments.

47e Assess Web sources with special care. 7iLÊ ÃÕÀViÃÊ V>Ê «ÀÛìÊ Û>Õ>LiÊ vÀ>Ì]Ê LÕÌÊ ÛiÀvÞ}Ê ÌiÀÊVÀi`LÌÞÊ>ÞÊÌ>iÊÌi°Ê ivÀiÊÕÃ}Ê>Ê7iLÊÃÕÀViÊÊ your paper, make sure you know who created the material and for what purpose. TIP: If both the sponsorship and the authorship of a site are unclear, think twice about using the site for your research. To discover a site’s sponsor, you may have to shorten the full URL to its domain name. FULL URL: http://www.bankofamerica.com/environment/dex

.cfm?template=env_reports_speeches&context=smartgrowth DOMAIN NAME: http://www.bankofamerica.com SPONSOR: >ÊvÊiÀV>

>ÞÊÃ«ÃÌV>Ìi`}ÊÃÌiÃÊVÌ>ÊµÕiÃÌ>LiÊformation. Even a well-designed hate site may at first appear unbiased and informative. Sites with reliable information, however, can stand up to careful scrutiny. For a checklist on iÛ>Õ>Ì}Ê7iLÊÃÕÀViÃ]ÊÃiiÊÌiÊV>ÀÌÊÊ«>}iÊ{Çx°

iÛ>Õ>Ì}Ê>À}ÕiÌÃÊ UÊ iÛ>Õ>Ì}Ê7iLÊ ÃÕÀViÃÊ UÊ >Ã}ÊVÀÌV>ÊµÕiÃÌÃ

res

47e

Evaluating Web sources Authorship U Does the Web site or document have an author? You may ii`ÊÌÊ`ÊÃiÊVV}Ê>`ÊÃVÀ}ÊÌÊw`ÊÌiÊ>ÕÌÀ½ÃÊ name. If you have landed directly on an internal page of a site, for example, you may need to navigate to the home «>}iÊÀÊw`Ê>Êº>LÕÌÊÌÃÊÃÌi»ÊÊÌÊi>ÀÊÌiÊ>iÊvÊÌiÊ author. U If there is an author, can you tell whether he or she is Üi`}i>LiÊ>`ÊVÀi`Li¶Ê7iÊÌiÊ>ÕÌÀ½ÃÊµÕ>wV>ÌÃÊ aren’t listed on the site itself, look for links to the author’s home page, which may provide evidence of his or her interests and expertise.

Sponsorship U Who, if anyone, sponsors the site? The sponsor of a site is often named and described on the home page. U What does the URL tell you? The domain name extension often indicates the type of group hosting the site: commercial °V®]Êi`ÕV>Ì>Ê°i`Õ®]Ê«ÀwÌÊ°À}®]Ê}ÛiÀiÌ>Ê (.gov), military (.mil), or network (.net). URLs may also indicate a country of origin: .uk (United Kingdom) or .jp (Japan), for instance.

Purpose and audience U Why was the site created: To argue a position? To sell a product? To inform readers? U Who is the site’s intended audience?

Currency UÊ ÜÊVÕÀÀiÌÊÃÊÌiÊÃÌi¶Ê iVÊvÀÊÌiÊ`>ÌiÊvÊ«ÕLV>ÌÊÀÊÌiÊ latest update, often located at the bottom of the home page or at the beginning or end of an internal page. UÊ ÜÊVÕÀÀiÌÊ>ÀiÊÌiÊÃÌi½ÃÊÃ¶ÊvÊ>ÞÊvÊÌiÊÃÊÊ}iÀÊ work, the site may be too dated for your purposes.

475

47e

476

res

Evaluating sources

i`Ê Ã«Ê V>iÊ >VÀÃÃÊ ÕÀi>LiÊ 7iLÊ ÃÕÀViÃÊ ÜiÊ researching his topic, the Fort Pillow massacre. This topic is of }Ài>ÌÊÌiÀiÃÌÊÌÊ ÛÊ7>ÀÊLÕvvÃ]ÊÜÊ}ÌÊÌÊ>ÛiÊÃV>ÀÞÊ backgrounds. One impressive-looking site turned out to have been created by a high school junior — an intelligent young man, no doubt, but by no means an authority on the subject. In researching Internet surveillance and workplace priÛ>VÞ]Ê>Ê"ÀÛÊiVÕÌiÀi`ÊÃÌiÃÊÌ>ÌÊÀ>Ãi`ÊiÀÊÃÕÃ«VÃ°Ê EVALUATING A WEB SITE: CHECKING RELIABILITY

1

2 3

1

This article on Internet monitoring is on a site sponsored LÞÊÌiÊ>ÃÃ>VÕÃiÌÌÃÊ ÕÀÃiÃÊÃÃV>Ì]Ê>Ê«ÀviÃÃ>Ê health care association and union whose staff and members advocate for nurses in the workplace. The URL ending .org marks this sponsor as a nonprofit organization.

2 3

Clear dates of publication show currency. The author is a credible expert whose credentials can be verified.

evaluating Web sources

47e

res

In particular, some sites were authored by surveillance software companies, which have an obvious interest in focusing on the benefits of such software to company management. Knowing that the creator of a site is an amateur or could be biased is not sufficient reason, however, to reject the site’s information out of hand. For example, the surveillance software V«>iÃ½Ê7iLÊÃÌiÃÊ«ÀÛì`ÊÃiÊÃ}ÌÊÌÊÜÞÊV«>ÞÊ management would want to monitor employees, and the high EVALUATING A WEB SITE: CHECKING PURPOSE

2 1 2 1 3

1

The site is sponsored by a company that specializes in employee monitoring software.

2

Repeated links for trial downloads and purchase suggest the site’s intended audience: consumers seeking to purchase software (probably not researchers seeking detailed information about employees’ use of the Internet in the workplace).

3

The site appears to provide information and even shows statistics from studies, but ultimately the purpose of the site is to sell a product.

477

478

48

res

Managing information; avoiding plagiarism

school junior had intelligent things to say about the Fort Pillow massacre. Nevertheless, when you know something about the creator of a site and have a sense of a site’s purpose, you will be in a good position to evaluate the likely worth of its information. Consider, for example, the two sites pictured on pages 476 >`Ê{ÇÇ°Ê>Ê"ÀÛÊìVì`ÊÌ>ÌÊÌiÊwÀÃÌÊ7iLÊÃÌiÊÜÕ`ÊLiÊ more useful for her project than sites like the second.

48


ÊivviVÌÛiÊÀiÃi>ÀViÀÊÃÊ>Ê}`ÊÀiVÀ`Êii«iÀ°Ê7iÌiÀÊÞÕÊ decide to keep records on paper or on your computer — or both — your challenge as a researcher will be to find system>ÌVÊ Ü>ÞÃÊ vÊ >>}}Ê vÀ>Ì°Ê ÀiÊ Ã«iVwV>Þ]Ê ÞÕÊ will need methods for maintaining a working bibliography (see 48a), keeping track of source materials (see 48b), and taking notes without plagiarizing your sources (see 48c). (For ÀiÊ Ê >Û`}Ê «>}>ÀÃ]Ê ÃiiÊ x£Ê vÀÊ Ê ÃÌÞi]Ê xÈLÊ vÀÊ *ÊÃÌÞi]Ê>`ÊxÇLÊvÀÊChicago style.)

48a Maintain a working bibliography. Keep a record of any sources you decide to consult. You will need this record, called a working bibliography, when you compile the list of sources that will appear at the end of your paper. The format of this list depends on the documentation style ÞÕÊ>ÀiÊÕÃ}ÊvÀÊÊÃÌÞi]ÊÃiiÊxÎLÆÊvÀÊ*ÊÃÌÞi]ÊÃiiÊxÈ`ÆÊ for Chicago style, see 57d). Using the proper style in your working bibliography will ensure that you have all the information you need to correctly cite any sources you use. Your working bibliography will probably contain more sources than you will actually include in the list of works cited in your final paper. ÃÌÊÀiÃi>ÀViÀÃÊÃ>ÛiÊLL}À>«VÊvÀ>ÌÊvÀÊÌiÊ library’s computer catalog, its periodical databases, and the 7iL°Ê/iÊvÀ>ÌÊÞÕÊii`ÊÌÊViVÌÊÃÊ}ÛiÊÊÌiÊV>ÀÌÊ on pages 480–81. If you download a visual, you must gather the same information as for a print source.

ii«}ÊÀiVÀ`ÃÊ UÊ LÕ`}Ê>Ê LL}À>«ÞÊ UÊ >Ì>Ìi`ÊLL}À>«Þ

res

48a

479

ÀÊ 7iLÊ ÃÕÀViÃ]Ê ÃiÊ LL}À>«VÊ vÀ>ÌÊ >ÞÊ not be available, but spend time looking for it before assum}ÊÌ>ÌÊÌÊìÃ½ÌÊiÝÃÌ°Ê7iÊvÀ>ÌÊÃ½ÌÊ>Û>>LiÊÊ the home page, you may have to drill into the site, following links to interior pages. Look especially for the author’s name, the date of publication (or latest update), and the name of any sponsoring organization. Do not omit such information unless it is genuinely unavailable. Once you have created a working bibliography, you can >Ì>ÌiÊÌ°Ê7ÀÌ}ÊÃiÛiÀ>ÊLÀivÊÃiÌiViÃÊÃÕ>Àâ}ÊiÞÊ points of a source will help you identify how it relates to your argument and to your other sources. Clarifying the source’s ideas at this stage will help you separate them from your own and avoid plagiarizing them later. Though annotated bibliographies can be informal writing in preparation for an essay, some instructors may require that you submit an annotated bibliography as a formal writing assignment. SAMPLE ANNOTATED BIBLIOGRAPHY ENTRY (MLA STYLE)

Gonsalves, Chris. “Wasting Away on the Web.” eWeek.com. Ziff Davis Enterprise Holdings, 8 Aug. 2005. Web. 16 Feb. 2009. Summarize In this editorial, Gonsalves considers the implications the source. of several surveys, including one in which 61% of respondents said that their companies have the right to spy on them. The author agrees with this majority, claiming that it’s fine if his company chooses to monitor him as long as the company discloses its monitoring practices. He adds that he would prefer not to know the extent of the monitoring. Interpret the This article, though not entirely objective, offers an relationship employee’s perspective on Internet surveillance in the between this source and workplace. It also contradicts some of my other sources, others in the which claim that employees want to know and should know bibliography. all the details of their company’s monitoring procedures. hackerhandbooks.com/bedhandbook > Model papers > MLA annotated bibliography: Orlov > APA annotated bibliography: Haddad

Annotations should be three to seven sentences long.

Evaluate the source for bias and relevance.

480

48b

res


48b Keep track of source materials. The best way to keep track of source materials is to save a copy vÊi>VÊi°Ê>ÞÊ`>Ì>L>ÃiÊÃÕLÃVÀ«ÌÊÃiÀÛViÃÊÜÊ>ÜÊÞÕÊ to e-mail, save, or print citations or full texts of articles, and you can easily download, copy, or take screen shots of informaÌÊvÀÊÌiÊ7iL° 7À}ÊÜÌÊ«ÌV«iÃ]Ê«ÀÌÕÌÃ]Ê>`ÊiiVÌÀVÊwiÃÊpÊ as opposed to relying on memory or hastily written notes — has several benefits. You save time spent in the library. You can highlight key passages, perhaps even color-coding them to reflect topics in your outline. You can annotate the source in the margins by hand or with your word processing program’s comment fields and get a head start on note taking (for an example, see the annotated article on p. 577). Finally, you reduce the chances of unintentional plagiarism, since you will be able to compare your use of a source in your paper with the actual source, not just with your notes (see 48c). NOTE: It’s especially important to keep print or electronic

V«iÃÊ vÊ 7iLÊ ÃÕÀViÃ]Ê ÜVÊ >ÞÊ V>}iÊ ÀÊ iÛiÊ LiViÊ

Information for a working bibliography For an entire book U All authors; any editors or translators U Title and subtitle UÊ `ÌÊvÊÌÊÌiÊwÀÃÌ® U Publication information: city, publisher, and date

For a periodical article U All authors of the article U Title and subtitle of the article U Title of the magazine, journal, or newspaper U Date; volume, issue, and page numbers

6

ii«}ÊV«iÃÊvÊÃÕÀViÃÊ UÊ ÜÀ}Ê LL}À>«ÞÊ UÊ }>ÌiÀ}ÊvÀ>Ì

res

48b

For a periodical article retrieved from a database (in addition to preceding information) U Name of the database U Name of the subscription service U URL of the subscription service (for an online database) U Accession number or other number assigned by the database UÊ }Ì>ÊLiVÌÊìÌwiÀÊ "®]ÊvÊÌiÀiÊÃÊi U Date you retrieved the source NOTE: Use particular care when printing or saving articles in PDF

wiÃ°Ê/iÊwiÃÊÌiÃiÛiÃÊ>ÞÊÌÊVÕìÊÃiÊvÊÌiÊiiiÌÃÊ you need to cite the electronic source properly. You may need to record additional information from the database or Web site ÜiÀiÊÞÕÊÀiÌÀiÛi`ÊÌiÊ* Êwi°

For a Web source (including visuals) U All authors, editors, or creators of the source U Editor or compiler of the Web site, if there is one U Title and subtitle of the source U Title of the longer work, if applicable U Title of the site U Publication information for the source, if available U Page or paragraph numbers, if any U Date of online publication (or latest update) U Sponsor of the site U Date you accessed the source U The site’s URL NOTE: For the exact bibliographic format to use in your working LL}À>«ÞÊ>`ÊÊÌiÊw>Ê«>«iÀ]ÊÃiiÊxÎLÊ®]ÊxÈ`Ê*®]Ê or 57d (Chicago).

481

482

48c

res


>VViÃÃLiÊÛiÀÊÌi°Ê>iÊÃÕÀiÊÌ>ÌÊÞÕÀÊV«ÞÊVÕìÃÊÌiÊ site’s URL and your date of access. TIP: Your school may provide citation software, which allows researchers to download references directly from databases, import saved searches, or type in citations. Similarly, many `>Ì>L>ÃiÃÊvÀ>ÌÊVÌ>ÌÃÊÜÌÊ>ÊÕÃiÊVV]Ê>`Ê7iLÊÃÌiÃÊ offer fill-in-the-blank forms for generating formatted citations. You must proofread these results carefully, however, because the programs sometimes provide incorrect results.

48c As you take notes, avoid unintentional plagiarism. 7iÊÞÕÊÌ>iÊÌiÃÊ>`ÊÌÊ`ÜÊì>Ã]ÊLiÊÛiÀÞÊV>ÀivÕÊÌÊ to borrow language from your sources. Even if you half-copy the author’s sentences — either by mixing the author’s phrases with your own without using quotation marks or by plugging your synonyms into the author’s sentence structure — you are committing plagiarism, a serious academic offense. (For examples of this kind of plagiarism, see 51b, 56b, and 57b.) To prevent unintentional borrowing, resist the temptation to look at the source as you take notes — except when you are quoting. Keep the source close by so you can check for accuracy, but don’t try to put ideas in your own words with the ÃÕÀVi½ÃÊ ÃiÌiViÃÊ Ê vÀÌÊ vÊ ÞÕ°Ê 7iÊ ÞÕÊ ii`Ê ÌÊ µÕÌiÊ the exact words of a source, make sure you copy the words precisely and put quotation marks around them. For strategies for avoiding Internet plagiarism, see pages 485–87. TIP: Be especially careful when using copy and paste functions in electronic files. Some researchers have unwittingly plagiarized their sources because they lost track of which words came from sources and which were their own. To prevent unintentional plagiarism, put quotation marks around any text that you plan to insert into your own work.

Ì>}ÊÌiÃÊ UÊ >Û`}Ê«>}>ÀÃÊ UÊ ÃÕ>Àâ}

res

48c

Even in the early stages of note taking, it is important to keep in mind that in the United States written texts are considered an author’s property. (This “property” isn’t a physical object, so it is often referred to as intellectual property.) The author (or publisher) owns the language as well as any original ideas contained in the writing, whether the source is published in print or iiVÌÀVÊvÀ°Ê7iÊÞÕÊÕÃiÊ>ÌiÀÊ>ÕÌÀ½ÃÊ«À«iÀÌÞÊÊÞÕÀÊ own writing, you are required to follow certain conventions for citing the material, or you risk committing plagiarism.

There are three kinds of note taking: summarizing, paraphrasing, and quoting. Be sure to include exact page references for all three types of notes; you will need the page numbers later if you use the information in your paper.

Summarizing without plagiarizing ÊÃÕ>ÀÞÊVìÃiÃÊvÀ>Ì]Ê«iÀ>«ÃÊÀi`ÕV}Ê>ÊV>«ter to a short paragraph or a paragraph to a single sentence. ÊÃÕ>ÀÞÊÃÕ`ÊLiÊÜÀÌÌiÊÊÞÕÀÊÜÊÜÀ`ÃÆÊvÊÞÕÊÕÃiÊ phrases from the source, put them in quotation marks. Here is a passage from a source about mountain lions. Following the passage is the student’s summary. (The biblio}À>«VÊvÀ>ÌÊÃÊÀiVÀì`ÊÊÊÃÌÞi°® ORIGINAL SOURCE

In some respects, the increasing frequency of mountain lion encounters in California has as much to do with a growing human population as it does with rising mountain lion numbers. The scenic solitude of the western ranges is prime cougar habitat, and it is falling swiftly to the developer’s Ã«>ì°Êi>Üi]ÊÜÌÊÌiÀÊì>Ê>LÌ>ÌÊ>Ài>`ÞÊ>ÌÊÌÃÊV>ÀÀÞing capacity, mountain lions are forcing younger cats into less ÃÕÌ>LiÊÌiÀÀ>]ÊVÕ`}ÊÀiÃìÌ>Ê>Ài>Ã°Ê``ÊÌ>ÌÊVÕ}>ÀÃÊ have generally grown bolder under a lengthy ban on their being hunted, and an unsettling scenario begins to emerge. — Rychnovsky, Ray. “Clawing into Controversy.” Outdoor Life Jan. 1995: 38-42. Print. [p. 40]

483

484

48c

res


SUMMARY

Source: Rychnovsky, Ray. “Clawing into Controversy.” Outdoor Life Jan. 1995: 38-42. Print. [p. 40] Encounters between mountain lions and humans are on the rise in California because increasing numbers of lions are competing for a shrinking habitat. As the lions’ wild habitat shrinks, older lions force younger lions into residential areas. These lions have lost some of their fear of humans because of a ban on hunting.

-iiÊ«>}iÊxÇÊvÀÊ>``Ì>ÊÃ>«iÊÃÕ>ÀiÃÊÊÊÃÌÞi°

Paraphrasing without plagiarizing Like a summary, a paraphrase is written in your own words; but whereas a summary reports significant information in fewer words than the source, a paraphrase retells the information in roughly the same number of words. If you retain occasional choice phrases from the source, use quotation marks so that later you will know which phrases are not your own. ÃÊ ÞÕÊ Ài>`Ê ÌiÊ vÜ}Ê «>À>«À>ÃiÊ vÊ ÌiÊ À}>Ê source (see p. 483), notice that the language is significantly different from that in the original. PARAPHRASE

Source: Rychnovsky, Ray. “Clawing into Controversy.” Outdoor Life Jan. 1995: 38-42. Print. [p. 40] Californians are encountering mountain lions more frequently because increasing numbers of humans and a rising population of lions are competing for the same territory. Humans have moved into mountainous regions once dominated by the lions, and the wild habitat that is left cannot sustain the current lion population. Therefore, the older lions are forcing younger lions into residential areas. And because of a ban on hunting, these younger lions have become bolder—less fearful of encounters with humans.

-iiÊ«>}iÊxnäÊvÀÊ>Ê>``Ì>ÊÃ>«iÊ«>À>«À>ÃiÊÊÊÃÌÞi°

Ì>}ÊÌiÃÊ UÊ >Û`}Ê«>}>ÀÃÊ UÊ «>À>«À>Ã}Ê UÊ ÕÃ}ÊµÕÌ>ÌÊ>ÀÃ

res

48c

Using quotation marks to avoid plagiarizing ÊµÕÌ>ÌÊVÃÃÌÃÊvÊÌiÊiÝ>VÌÊÜÀ`ÃÊvÀÊ>ÊÃÕÀVi°ÊÊÞÕÀÊ notes, put all quoted material in quotation marks; do not assume that you will remember later which words, phrases, and «>ÃÃ>}iÃÊÞÕÊ>ÛiÊµÕÌi`Ê>`ÊÜVÊ>ÀiÊÞÕÀÊÜ°Ê7iÊÞÕÊ quote, be sure to copy the words of your source exactly, including punctuation and capitalization. QUOTATION

Source: Rychnovsky, Ray. “Clawing into Controversy.” Outdoor Life Jan. 1995: 38-42. Print. [p. 40] Rychnovsky explains that as humans expand residential areas into mountain ranges, the cougar’s natural habitat “is falling swiftly to the developer’s spade” (40).

-iiÊ«>}iÊxn£ÊvÀÊ>Ê>``Ì>ÊÃ>«iÊµÕÌ>ÌÊÊÊÃÌÞi°

Avoiding Internet plagiarism Understand what plagiarism is. 7iÊ ÞÕÊ ÕÃiÊ >ÌiÀÊ >Õthor’s intellectual property — language, visuals, or ideas — in your own writing without giving proper credit, you commit a kind of academic theft called plagiarism. Treat Web sources the same way you treat print sources. ÞÊ language that you find on the Internet must be carefully cited, even if the material is in the public domain or is pubVÞÊ>VViÃÃLiÊÊvÀiiÊÃÌiÃ°Ê7iÊÞÕÊÕÃiÊ>ÌiÀ>ÊvÀÊ7iLÊ sites sponsored by federal, state, or municipal governments (.gov sites) or by nonprofit organizations (.org sites), you must acknowledge that material, too, as intellectual property owned by those agencies. Keep track of which words come from sources and which are your own. To prevent unintentional plagiarism when you V«ÞÊ >`Ê «>ÃÌiÊ «>ÃÃ>}iÃÊ vÀÊ 7iLÊ ÃÕÀViÃÊ ÌÊ >Ê iiVÌÀVÊ

485

486

48c

res


Integrating and citing sources to avoid plagiarism Source text Our language is constantly changing. Like the Mississippi, it keeps forging new channels and abandoning old ones, picking up debris, depositing unwanted silt, and frequently bursting its banks. In every generation, there are people who deplore changes in the language and many who wish to stop the flow. But if our language stopped changing it would mean that American society had ceased to be dynamic, innovative, pulsing with life — that the river had frozen up. — Robert MacNeil and William Cran, Do You Speak American? p. 1

Avoiding plagiarism If you are using an exact sentence from a source, with no changes at all . . .

6

. . . put quotation marks around the sentence. Use a signal phrase and include a page number in parentheses. MacNeil and Cran write, “Our language is constantly changing” (1). “Our language,” according to MacNeil and Cran, “is constantly changing” (1).

If you are using a few exact words from the source but not an entire sentence . . .

6

If you are using near-exact words from the source but changing some word forms (I to she, walk to walked) or adding words to

6

. . . put quotation marks around the exact words that you have used from the source. Use a signal phrase and include a page number in parentheses. The English language, according to MacNeil and Cran, is “like the Mississippi” (1). . . . put quotation marks around the quoted words and put brackets around the changes you have introduced. Use a signal phrase and include a page number in parentheses. MacNeil and Cran compare the English language to the Mississippi River, which “forg[es] new channels and abandon[s] old ones” (1).

6

Ì>}ÊÌiÃÊ UÊ Ìi}À>Ì}Ê>`ÊVÌ}Ê ÃÕÀViÃÊ UÊ >Û`}Ê«>}>ÀÃ

res

48c

487

“In every generation, there are people who deplore changes in the [English] language and many who wish to stop the flow,” write MacNeil and Cran (1).

clarify and make the quotation flow with your own text . . . If you are paraphrasing or summarizing the source, using the author’s ideas but not any of the author’s exact words . . .

6

If you have used the source’s sentence structure but substituted a few synonyms for the author’s words . . .

6

. . . introduce the ideas with a signal phrase and put the page number at the end of your sentence. Do not use quotation marks. (See 51, 56b, and 57b.) MacNeil and Cran argue that changes in the English language are natural and that they represent cultural progress (1).

STOP! This is a form of plagiarism even if you use a signal phrase and a page number. Change your sentence by using one of the techniques given in this chart or in 52, 56c, or 57c.

PLAGIARIZED

MacNeil and Cran claim that, like a river, English creates new waterways and discards old ones. INTEGRATED AND CITED CORRECTLY

MacNeil and Cran claim, “Like the Mississippi, [English] keeps forging new channels and abandoning old ones” (1). NOTE: The examples in this chart follow MLA style (see 53). For information on APA and Chicago styles, see 56d and 57d, respectively.

488

49

res

Documentation styles

file, put quotation marks around any text that you have inserted into your own work. In addition, during note taking and drafting, you might use a different color font or your word processing program’s highlighting feature to draw attention to text taken from sources — so that material from artiViÃ]Ê7iLÊÃÌiÃ]Ê>`ÊÌiÀÊÃÕÀViÃÊÃÌ>`ÃÊÕÌÊÕÃÌ>>LÞÊ>ÃÊ someone else’s words. Avoid Web sites that bill themselves as “research services” and sell essays. 7iÊÞÕÊ ÕÃiÊ7iLÊÃi>ÀVÊi}iÃÊ ÌÊÀiÃi>ÀVÊ a topic, you will often see links to sites that appear to offer legitimate writing support but that actually sell college essays. Of course, submitting a paper that you have purchased is cheating, but even using material from such a paper is considered plagiarism. For details on avoiding plagiarism while working with ÃÕÀViÃ]ÊÃiiÊx£ÊÊÃÌÞi®]ÊxÈLÊ*ÊÃÌÞi®]Ê>`ÊxÇLÊChicago style).

49

Choosing a documentation style

The various academic disciplines use their own style for citing sources and for listing the works that are cited in a paper. The Bedford Handbook describes three commonly used styles: ìÀÊ>}Õ>}iÊÃÃV>ÌÊ®ÊÊÃiVÌÊxÎÊ iÀV>Ê*ÃÞV}V>ÊÃÃV>ÌÊ*®ÊÊÃiVÌÊxÈ`Ê Chicago Manual of StyleÊ -®ÊÊÃiVÌÊxÇ` In researched writing, sources are cited for several reasons. First, it is important to acknowledge the contributions of others. If you fail to credit sources properly, you commit plagiarism, a serious academic offense. Second, choosing appropriate sources will add credibility to your work; in a sense, you are calling on authorities to serve as expert witnesses. The more care you have taken in choosing reliable sources, the stronger your argument will be. Finally — and most importantly — you are engaging in

VÌ>ÌÊÃÌÞiÃÊ UÊ Ê UÊ *

res

49

a scholarly conversation and showing readers where they can pursue your topic in greater depth. ÊvÊÌiÊ>V>ìVÊ`ÃV«iÃÊVÌiÊÃÕÀViÃÊvÀÊÌiÃiÊÃ>iÊ reasons. However, the different styles for citing sources are based on the values and intellectual goals of scholars in different disciplines.

MLA and APA in-text citations ÊÃÌÞiÊ>`Ê*ÊÃÌÞiÊLÌÊÕÃiÊVÌ>ÌÃÊÊÌiÊÌiÝÌÊvÊ>Ê«>«iÀÊ that refer to a list of works at the end of the paper. The systems ÜÀÊ ÃiÜ>ÌÊ `vviÀiÌÞ]Ê ÜiÛiÀ]Ê LiV>ÕÃiÊ Ê ÃÌÞiÊ Ü>ÃÊ created for scholars in English composition and literature and *ÊÃÌÞiÊÜ>ÃÊVÀi>Ìi`ÊvÀÊÀiÃi>ÀViÀÃÊÊÌiÊÃV>ÊÃViViÃ° MLA IN-TEXT CITATION

Brandon Conran argues that the story is written from “a bifocal point of view” (111). APA IN-TEXT CITATION

As researchers Yanovski and Yanovski (2002) have explained, obesity was once considered “either a moral failing or evidence of underlying psychopathology” (p. 592).

7iÊ Ê >`Ê *Ê ÃÌÞiÃÊ ÜÀÊ Ê >Ê Ã>ÀÊ Ü>Þ]Ê ÃiÊ basic disciplinary differences show up in these key elements: author’s name date of publication page numbers verb tense in signal phrases ÊÃÌÞiÊ}ÛiÃÊÌiÊ>ÕÌÀ½ÃÊvÕÊ>iÊÊwÀÃÌÊiÌ]Ê i«>Ãâ}Ê>ÕÌÀÃ«Ê>`ÊÌiÀ«ÀiÌ>Ì°Ê*ÊÃÌÞi]ÊÜVÊ uses last names only, gives a date after the author’s name, reflecting the social scientist’s concern with the currency of ÃÌÕ`ÞÊ w`}Ã°Ê Ê ÃÌÞiÊ «>ViÃÊ ÌiÊ `>ÌiÊ Ê ÌiÊ ÜÀÃÊ VÌi`Ê

489

490

49

res

Documentation styles

ÃÌÊLÕÌÊÌÃÊÌÊÊÌiÊÌiÝÌ°Ê7iÊVÕÀÀiVÞÊÃÊ«ÀÌ>Ì]ÊÜ>ÌÊ someone had to say a century ago may be as significant as the latest contribution to the field. ÌÊ ÃÌÞiÃÊ VÕìÊ «>}iÊ ÕLiÀÃÊ vÀÊ µÕÌ>ÌÃ°Ê Ê style requires page numbers for summaries and paraphrases as well; with a page number, readers can easily find the origi>Ê«>ÃÃ>}iÊÌ>ÌÊ>ÃÊLiiÊÃÕ>Àâi`ÊÀÊ«>À>«À>Ãi`°Ê7iÊ *Ê ìÃÊ ÌÊ ÀiµÕÀiÊ «>}iÊ ÕLiÀÃÊ vÀÊ ÃÕ>ÀiÃÊ >`Ê paraphrases, it recommends that writers use a page number if doing so would help readers find the passage in a longer work. >Þ]ÊÊÃÌÞiÊÕÃiÃÊÌiÊ«ÀiÃiÌÊÌiÃiÊÃÕVÊ>ÃÊargues) ÌÊÌÀ`ÕViÊVÌi`Ê>ÌiÀ>ÊÃiiÊxÓL®]ÊÜiÀi>ÃÊ*ÊÃÌÞiÊÕÃiÃÊ the past or present perfect tense (such as argued or has argued) in signal phrases (see 56c). The present tense evokes the timelessness of a literary text; the past or present perfect tense emphasizes that research or experimentation occurred in the past.

Chicago-style footnotes or endnotes ÃÌÊÃÌÀ>ÃÊ>`Ê>ÞÊÃV>ÀÃÊÊÌiÊÕ>ÌiÃÊÕÃiÊÌiÊ style of footnotes or endnotes recommended by The Chicago Manual of Style -®°Ê ÃÌÀ>ÃÊ L>ÃiÊ ÌiÀÊ ÜÀÊ Ê >Ê ÜìÊ variety of primary and secondary sources, all of which must be cited. The Chicago note system has the virtue of being relatively unobtrusive; even when a paper or an article is thick with citations, readers will not be overwhelmed. In the text of the paper, only a raised number appears. Readers who are interested can consult the accompanying numbered note, which is given either at the foot of the page or at the end of the paper. TEXT

Historian Albert Castel quotes several eyewitnesses on both the Union and the Confederate sides as saying that Forrest ordered his men to stop firing.7

vÌÌiÃÊ UÊ ChicagoÊ UÊ Ê«>«iÀÃ

MLA

50

NOTE

7. Albert Castel, “The Fort Pillow Massacre: A Fresh Examination of the Evidence,” Civil War History 4, no. 1 (1958): 44-45.

The ChicagoÊÃÞÃÌiÊ}ÛiÃÊ>ÃÊÕVÊvÀ>ÌÊ>ÃÊÌiÊÊÀÊ *ÊÃÞÃÌi]ÊLÕÌÊiÃÃÊvÊÌ>ÌÊvÀ>ÌÊ>««i>ÀÃÊÊÌiÊÌiÝÌÊvÊ the paper. hackerhandbooks.com/bedhandbook > Additional resources > List of style manuals

Writing MLA papers Brief directory

50 51 52 53

Supporting a thesis, 492 Citing sources; avoiding plagiarism, 498 Integrating sources, 504 MLA documentation style, 517 Directory to MLA in-text citation models, 519 Directory to MLA works cited models, 530

54 MLA manuscript format; student research process and sample paper, 569

55 Writing about literature, 589

ÃÌÊ }ÃÊÃÌÀÕVÌÀÃÊ>`ÊÃiÊÕ>ÌiÃÊÃÌÀÕVÌÀÃÊÜÊ >ÃÊÞÕÊÌÊ`VÕiÌÊÞÕÀÊÃÕÀViÃÊÜÌÊÌiÊìÀÊ>}Õ>}iÊ ÃÃV>ÌÊ®ÊÃÞÃÌiÊvÊVÌ>ÌÃÊìÃVÀLi`ÊÊÃiVÌÊxÎ°Ê 7iÊÜÀÌ}Ê>ÊÊ«>«iÀÊÌ>ÌÊÃÊL>Ãi`ÊÊÃÕÀViÃ]ÊÞÕÊ face three main challenges: (1) supporting a thesis, (2) citing your sources and avoiding plagiarism, and (3) integrating quotations and other source material. Examples in sections 50–52 are drawn from a student’s research related to online monitoring of employees’ computer ÕÃi°Ê>Ê"ÀÛ½ÃÊÀiÃi>ÀVÊ«>«iÀ]ÊÜVÊ>À}ÕiÃÊÌ>ÌÊiiVÌÀVÊ

491

492

50

MLA

MLA papers: Supporting a thesis

surveillance in the workplace threatens employees’ privacy, >««i>ÀÃÊÊ«>}iÃÊxnÎqnn°Ê-iiÊ}}ÌÃÊvÊ>Ê"ÀÛ½ÃÊÀisearch process on pp. 573–82.) vÊÞÕÊ>ÀiÊÜÀÌ}Ê>ÊÊ«>«iÀÊ>LÕÌÊÌiÀ>ÌÕÀiÊ>ÊÃÀÌÊ story, novel, play, film, or poem), see section 55. NOTE: For advice on finding and evaluating sources and on

managing information in all your college courses, see sections 46–49.

50

Supporting a thesis

ÃÌÊÀiÃi>ÀVÊ>ÃÃ}iÌÃÊ>ÃÊÞÕÊÌÊvÀÊ>ÊÌiÃÃ]ÊÀÊ>Ê idea, and to support that thesis with well-organized evidence. (See also 1c.) Remain flexible as you draft because you may ii`ÊÌÊÀiÛÃiÊÞÕÀÊ>««À>VÊ>ÌiÀ°Ê7ÀÌ}Ê>LÕÌÊ>ÊÃÕLiVÌÊÃÊ>Ê way of learning about it; as you write, your understanding of your subject will almost certainly deepen.

50a Form a working thesis. Once you have read a variety of sources and considered your issue from different perspectives, you are ready to form a working thesis: a one-sentence (or occasionally a two-sentence) statement of your central idea. (See also 1e and 50d.) Because it is a working, or tentative, thesis, it is flexible enough to change as your ideas develop. Ultimately, the thesis expresses not just your opinion but your informed, reasoned judgment. In a research paper, your thesis will answer the central research question that you posed earlier (see 46a). Here, for iÝ>«i]Ê >ÀiÊ >Ê "ÀÛ½ÃÊ ÀiÃi>ÀVÊ µÕiÃÌÊ >`Ê ÜÀ}Ê thesis. RESEARCH QUESTION

Should employers monitor their employees’ online activities in the workplace?

MLA

ÜÀ}ÊÌiÃÃÊ UÊ ÕÌiÃÊ UÊ À}>â}Êì>Ã

00m 50b

493

WORKING THESIS

Employers should not monitor their employees’ online activities because electronic surveillance can compromise workers’ privacy.

vÌiÀÊ ÞÕÊ >ÛiÊ ÜÀÌÌiÊ >Ê ÀÕ}Ê `À>vÌÊ >`Ê «iÀ>«ÃÊ ìÊ more reading, you may decide to revise your thesis, as Orlov did. REVISED THESIS

Although companies often have legitimate concerns that lead them to monitor employees’ Internet usage—from expensive security breaches to reduced productivity—the benefits of electronic surveillance are outweighed by its costs to employees’ privacy and autonomy.

The thesis usually appears at the end of the introductory «>À>}À>«°Ê/ÊÀi>`Ê>Ê"ÀÛ½ÃÊÌiÃÃÊÊÌiÊVÌiÝÌÊvÊiÀÊ introduction, see page 583.

50b Organize ideas with a rough outline. The body of your paper will consist of evidence in support of your thesis. Instead of getting tangled up in a complex, formal outline, sketch an informal plan that organizes your ideas in L`ÊÃÌÀiÃ°Ê>Ê"ÀÛ]ÊvÀÊiÝ>«i]ÊÕÃi`ÊÌÃÊÃ«iÊ«>Ê to outline the structure of her argument: U Compared with older types of

Making the most of your handbook

surveillance, electronic surveillance It’s helpful to start off with a allows employers to monitor workers working thesis and a rough outline — especially when writing more efficiently. from sources. U Some experts argue that companies 0 Draft a working thesis: 1c have important financial and legal 0 Sketch a plan: 1d reasons to monitor employees’ Internet usage. U But monitoring employees’ Internet usage may lower worker productivity when the threat to privacy creates distrust.

494

50c

MLA


U Current laws do little to protect employees’ privacy rights, so employees and employers have to negotiate the potential risks and benefits of electronic surveillance.

vÌiÀÊÞÕÊ>ÛiÊÜÀÌÌiÊ>ÊÀÕ}Ê`À>vÌ]Ê>ÊÀiÊvÀ>ÊÕÌiÊV>Ê be a useful way to shape the complexities of your argument. hackerhandbooks.com/bedhandbook > Research exercises > MLA > E-ex 50–1 and 50–2

50c Use sources to inform and support your argument. Used thoughtfully, the source materials you have gathered will make your argument more complex and convincing for readers. Sources can play several different roles as you develop your points.

Providing background information or context You can use facts and statistics to support generalizations or to iÃÌ>LÃÊÌiÊ«ÀÌ>ViÊvÊÞÕÀÊÌ«V]Ê>ÃÊÃÌÕìÌÊÜÀÌiÀÊ>Ê Orlov does in her introduction. As the Internet has become an integral tool of businesses, company policies on Internet usage have become as common as policies regarding vacation days or sexual harassment. A 2005 study by the American Management Association and ePolicy Institute found that 76% of companies monitor employees’ use of the Web, and the number of companies that block employees’ access to certain Web sites has increased 27% since 2001 (1).

Explaining terms or concepts If readers are unlikely to be familiar with a word or an idea important to your topic, you must explain it for them. Quoting or paraphrasing a source can help you define terms and concepts in accessible language.

ÜÊÃÕÀViÃÊÜÀÊÊ>Ê«>«iÀÊ UÊ supporting arguments

MLA

50c

One popular monitoring method is keystroke logging, which is done by means of an undetectable program on employees’ computers. . . . As Lane explains, these programs record every key entered into the computer in hidden directories that can later be accessed or uploaded by supervisors; the programs can even scan for keywords tailored to individual companies (128-29).

Supporting your claims ÃÊ ÞÕÊ `À>vÌÊ ÞÕÀÊ >À}ÕiÌ]Ê >iÊ ÃÕÀiÊ ÌÊ L>VÊ Õ«Ê ÞÕÀÊ >Ãsertions with facts, examples, and other evidence from your research. (See also 5e.) Orlov, for example, uses an anecdote from one of her sources to support her claim that limiting computer access causes resentment among a company’s staff. Monitoring online activities can have the unintended effect of making employees resentful. . . . Kesan warns that “prohibiting personal use can seem extremely arbitrary and can seriously harm morale. . . . Imagine a concerned parent who is prohibited from checking on a sick child by a draconian company policy” (315-16). As this analysis indicates, employees can become disgruntled when Internet usage policies are enforced to their full extent.

Lending authority to your argument Expert opinion can give weight to your argument. (See also 5e.) But don’t rely on experts to make your arguments for you. Construct your argument in your own words and, when appropriate, cite the judgment of an authority in the field to support your position. Additionally, many experts disagree with employers’ assumption that online monitoring can increase productivity. Employment law attorney Joseph Schmitt argues that, particularly for employees who are paid a salary rather than an hourly wage, “a company shouldn’t care whether employees spend one or 10 hours on the Internet as long as they are getting their jobs done—and provided that they are not accessing inappropriate sites” (qtd. in Verespej).

495

496

50d

MLA


Anticipating and countering objections Do not ignore sources that seem contrary to your position or that offer arguments different from your own. Instead, use them to give voice to opposing points of view and to state potential objections to your argument Making the most of your handbook before you counter them (see 5f ). ReadSeeing how other writers use ers often have opposing points of view in sources can help you think about mind already, whether or not they agree your own writing. ÜÌÊÞÕ°Ê>Ê"ÀÛ]ÊvÀÊiÝ>«i]ÊVÌiÃÊ 0Ê}}ÌÃÊvÊiÊÃÌÕìÌ½ÃÊ research process: 54b conflicting evidence to acknowledge that some readers may feel that unlimited Internet access in the workplace hinders productivity. In doing so, she creates an opportunity to counter that objection and persuade those readers. On the one hand, computers and Internet access give employees powerful tools to carry out their jobs; on the other hand, the same technology offers constant temptations to avoid work. As a 2005 study by Salary.com and America Online indicates, the Internet ranked as the top choice among employees for ways of wasting time on the job; it beat talking with co-workers—the second most popular method—by a margin of nearly two to one (Frauenheim).

50d Draft an introduction for your thesis. In a research paper, readers are accustomed to seeing the thesis statement — the paper’s main point — at the end of the first or second paragraph. The advantage of putting it in the first paragraph is that readers can immediately grasp your point. The advantage of delaying the thesis until the second paragraph is that you can provide a fuller context for your point. ÃÊÞÕÊ`À>vÌÊÞÕÀÊÌÀ`ÕVÌ]ÊÞÕÊ>ÞÊV>}iÊÞÕÀÊ«Àiliminary thesis, either because you have refined your thinking or because new wording fits more smoothly into the context you have provided for it.

VÕÌiÀ>À}ÕiÌÊ UÊ ÌÀ`ÕVÌÊ UÊ ÌiÃÃÊ UÊ Ì«VÊÃiÌiViÃÊ UÊ ÌÀ>ÃÌÃÊ UÊ Ìi

MLA

50f

In addition to stating your thesis and establishing a context for it, an introduction should hook readers (see 1e). For example, in your first sentence or two you might connect your topic to a recent news item or point to emerging trends in an academic discipline. Other strategies are to pose a puzzling «ÀLiÊÀÊÌÊVÌiÊ>ÊÃÌ>ÀÌ}ÊÃÌ>ÌÃÌV°Ê>Ê"ÀÛÊLi}ÃÊiÀÊ paper by using results from a recent study to show a significant trend in companies’ electronic surveillance of employees (see p. 583).

50e Provide organizational cues. Even if you are working with a good outline, your paper will appear disorganized unless you provide organizational cues: topic sentences, transitions between major sections of the paper, >`Ê «iÀ>«ÃÊ i>`}Ã°Ê >Ê "ÀÛ½ÃÊ «>«iÀÊ ÃÊ i>ÃÞÊ ÌÊ vÜÊ because she begins paragraphs with clear topic sentences and uses transitions to help readers move from one idea to the next (see pp. 583–88). For more about topic sentences, transitions, and headings, see 3a, 3d, and 58b.

50f Draft the paper in an appropriate voice. ÊV>ÌÌÞ]ÊLÀiiâÞÊÛViÊÃÊÕÃÕ>ÞÊÌÊ>««À«À>ÌiÊÊ>ÊÀiÃi>ÀVÊ paper, but neither is a stuffy, pretentious style or a timid, unsure one. TOO CHATTY

7>Ì½ÃÊÕ«ÊÜÌÊV«>iÃÊÃ«}Ê>ÀÕ`ÊÜiÊÌiÀÊiployees are surfing the Net? Employers who constantly spy on their workers’ Internet habits are messing with people’s rights. MORE FORMAL

ÌÕ}ÊV«>iÃÊvÌiÊ>ÛiÊi}Ì>ÌiÊVViÀÃÊÌ>ÌÊi>`Ê them to monitor employees’ Internet usage, the benefits of electronic surveillance are outweighed by its costs to employees’ privacy and autonomy.

497

498

51

MLA

MLA papers: Citing sources; avoiding plagiarism

TOO STUFFY

It has been concluded that an evident majority of companies undertake the monitoring of employees’ utilization of the Internet. MORE DIRECT

ÊÀiViÌÊÃÌÕ`ÞÊvÕ`ÊÌ>ÌÊÇÈ¯ÊvÊV«>iÃÊÌÀÊi ployees’ Internet use. TOO TIMID

I may not be an expert, but it seems to me that monitoring online activities maybe has the unintended effect of making employees resentful. MORE AUTHORITATIVE

ÌÀ}ÊiÊ>VÌÛÌiÃÊV>Ê>ÛiÊÌiÊÕÌiì`ÊivviVÌÊvÊ making employees resentful.

51

Citing sources; avoiding plagiarism

In a research paper, you will draw on the work of other writers, and you must document their contributions by citing your sources. Sources are cited for two reasons: 1. to tell readers where your information comes from — so that they can assess its reliability and, if interested, find and read the original source 2. to give credit to the writers from whom you have borrowed words and ideas Borrowing another writer’s language, sentence structures, or ideas without proper acknowledgment is a form of dishonesty known as plagiarism. You must include a citation when you quote from a source, when you summarize or paraphrase, and when you borrow facts that are not common knowledge (see also 51b).

>Û`}Ê«>}>ÀÃÊ UÊ ÊVÌ>Ì

MLA

51b

51a For most English papers, use the MLA system for citing sources. ÃÌÊ }ÃÊ «ÀviÃÃÀÃÊ >`Ê ÃiÊ Õ>ÌiÃÊ «ÀviÃÃÀÃÊ ÀiµÕÀiÊÌiÊÊìÀÊ>}Õ>}iÊÃÃV>Ì®ÊÃÞÃÌiÊvÊ ÌiÝÌÊ VÌ>ÌÃ°Ê iÀi]Ê LÀiyÞ]Ê ÃÊ ÜÊ ÌiÊ Ê VÌ>ÌÊ ÃÞÃÌiÊ usually works. (See 53 for more details and model citations.) 1. The source is introduced by a signal phrase that names its author. 2. The material being cited is followed by a page number in parentheses. Ê Î°Ê ÌÊÌiÊi`ÊvÊÌiÊ«>«iÀ]Ê>ÊÃÌÊvÊÜÀÃÊVÌi`Ê>ÀÀ>}i`Ê alphabetically by authors’ last names) gives complete publication information for the source. IN-TEXT CITATION

Legal scholar Jay Kesan points out that the law holds employers liable for employees’ actions such as violations of copyright laws, the distribution of offensive or graphic sexual material, and illegal disclosure of confidential information (312). ENTRY IN THE LIST OF WORKS CITED

Kesan, Jay P. “Cyber-Working or Cyber-Shirking? A First Principles Examination of Electronic Privacy in the Workplace.” Florida Law Review 54.2 (2002): 289-332. Print.

/ÃÊL>ÃVÊÊvÀ>ÌÊÛ>ÀiÃÊvÀÊ`vviÀiÌÊÌÞ«iÃÊvÊÃÕÀViÃ°Ê For a detailed discussion and other models, see 53.

51b Avoid plagiarism when quoting, summarizing, and paraphrasing sources. Your research paper is a collaboration between you and your sources. To be fair and ethical, you must acknowledge your debt to the writers of those sources. If you don’t, you commit plagiarism, a serious academic offense. (See also 48c and 54b.)

499

500

51b

MLA

MLA papers: Citing sources; avoiding plagiarism

In general, these three acts are considered plagiarism: (1) failing to cite quotations and borrowed ideas, (2) failing to enclose borrowed language in quotation marks, and (3) failing to put summaries and paraphrases in your own words. Definitions of plagiarism may vary; it’s a good idea to find out how your school defines academic dishonesty.

Citing quotations and borrowed ideas You must cite all direct quotations. You must also cite any ideas borrowed from a source: summaries and paraphrases; statistics and other specific facts; and visuals such as cartoons, graphs, and diagrams. The only exception is common knowledge — information your readers could easily find in any number of general sources. For example, most encyclopedias will tell readers that vÀi`Ê ÌVVVÊ `ÀiVÌi`Ê Notorious in 1946 and that Emily Dickinson published only a handful of her many poems during her lifetime. ÃÊ>ÊÀÕi]ÊÜiÊÞÕÊ>ÛiÊÃiiÊvÀ>ÌÊÀi«i>Ìi`ÞÊÊ your reading, you don’t need to cite it. However, when information has appeared in only one or two sources, when it is highly specific (as with statistics), or when it is controversial, you should cite the source. If a topic is new to you and you are not sure what is considered common knowledge or what is controversial, ask your instructor or someone else with experÌÃi°Ê7iÊÊ`ÕLÌ]ÊVÌiÊÌiÊÃÕÀVi°Ê-iiÊxÎÊvÀÊìÌ>Ã°®

Enclosing borrowed language in quotation marks Making the most of your handbook When you use exact language from a source, you need to show that it is a quotation. 0

Quotation marks for direct quotations: 37a

0

Setting off long quotations: 37b

To indicate that you are using a source’s exact phrases or sentences, you must enclose them in quotation marks unless they have been set off from the text by indenting (see p. 506). To omit the quotation marks is to claim—falsely—that the language is your own. Such an omission is plagiarism even if you have cited the source.

VÊÜi`}iÊ UÊ µÕÌ>ÌÊUÊ ÃÕ>ÀÞÊ UÊ «>À>«À>ÃiÊ UÊ ÕÃ}ÊÞÕÀÊÜÊÜÀ`Ã

MLA

51b

ORIGINAL SOURCE

7ÌÕÌÊ>ìµÕ>ÌiÊ`ÃV«i]ÊÌiÊ7À`Ê7ìÊ7iLÊV>ÊLiÊ a tremendous time sink; no other medium comes close to matching the Internet’s depth of materials, interactivity, and sheer distractive potential. — Frederick Lane, The Naked Employee, p. 142 PLAGIARISM

Frederick Lane points out that if people do not have adequate discipline, the World Wide Web can be a tremendous time sink; no other medium comes close to matching the Internet’s depth of materials, interactivity, and sheer distractive potential (142). BORROWED LANGUAGE IN QUOTATION MARKS

Frederick Lane points out that for those not exercising self-control, “the World Wide Web can be a tremendous time sink; no other medium comes close to matching the Internet’s depth of materials, interactivity, and sheer distractive potential” (142).

Putting summaries and paraphrases in your own words Summaries and paraphrases are written in your own words. Ê ÃÕ>ÀÞÊ VìÃiÃÊ vÀ>ÌÊ vÀÊ >Ê ÃÕÀViÆÊ >Ê «>À>phrase uses roughly the same number of words as the original ÃÕÀViÊ ÌÊ VÛiÞÊ ÌiÊ vÀ>Ì°Ê 7iÊ ÞÕÊ ÃÕ>ÀâiÊ ÀÊ paraphrase, it is not enough to name the source; you must restate the source’s meaning using your own language. (See also 48c.) You commit plagiarism if you half-copy the author’s sentences — either by mixing the author’s phrases with your own without using quotation marks or by plugging your synonyms into the author’s sentence structure. The first paraphrase of the following source is plagiarized — even though the source is cited — because too much of its language is borrowed from the original. The underlined strings of words have been copied exactly (without quotation marks). In addition, the writer has closely echoed the sentence structure of the source, merely substituting some synonyms (restricted for limited, modern era for computer age, monitoring for surveillance, and inexpensive for cheap).

501


|

Your words?

Understanding the comment When a teacher or tutor asks “Your words?” the comment often signals that it’s unclear whether certain words you’ve used are your own or those of your sources. Internet technology has made it possible for extremist groups to recruit and train members and carry out terrorist activity. The membership of these groups reaches beyond local geographic areas because of the Web. The world has become a cacophony of Your parochialisms where individuals seek association with words? coreligionists in a mystique of participation. Combating the influences of these groups is now harder than ever.

One student wrote this body paragraph in a research paper on the Internet’s role in facilitating terrorism.

Part of this paragraph doesn’t sound like the student’s voice. To revise, the student must determine which words are his own and which come from sources he consulted. If he chooses to include words or ideas from a source, he’ll need to decide if he wants to quote, summarize, or paraphrase the ÃÕÀVi°Êi½Ê>ÃÊii`ÊÌÊ«À«iÀÞÊVÌiÊÌiÊÃÕÀViÊÊÃÊ«>«iÀ°

Similar comments: source? s quotation? s who’s talking here?

Revising when your readers wonder whose words they’re reading 1. Reread your sentences to see if you have clearly marked the boundaries between your source material and your own words. Is every word your own? Or have you borrowed words from sources without properly acknowledging them? 2. Use signal phrases to introduce each source and provide context. Doing so prepares readers for a source’s words. 3. Use quotation marks to enclose language that you borrow word-for-word from a source, and follow each quotation with a parenthetical citation. 4. Put summaries and paraphrases in your own words and always cite your sources. More advice on citing quotations, paraphrases, and summaries: 51 (MLA); 56b (APA); and 57b (Chicago)

502

ÕÃ}ÊµÕÌ>ÌÃÊ UÊ ÃÕ>ÀÞÊ UÊ «>À>«À>Ãi

MLA

51b

ORIGINAL SOURCE

In earlier times, surveillance was limited to the information that a supervisor could observe and record firsthand and to primitive counting devices. In the computer age surveillance can be instantaneous, unblinking, cheap, and, maybe most importantly, easy. Ê pÊ >ÀÊ Ì>Ê>`Ê>i>Ê6ÀÛÀi>Õ] Ê º7>ÌÊ Ê «ÞiiÃÊ/Ê>LÕÌÊ Ê

iVÌÀVÊ-ÕÀÛi>ViÊ>ÌÊ7À¶»Ê«°Ê£ÓÈ PLAGIARISM: UNACCEPTABLE BORROWING

Scholars Carl Botan and Mihaela Vorvoreanu argue that in earlier times monitoring of employees was restricted to the information that a supervisor could observe and record firsthand. In the modern era, monitoring can be instantaneous, inexpensive, and, most importantly, easy.

To avoid plagiarizing an author’s language, resist the temptation to look at the source while you are summarizing or «>À>«À>Ã}°ÊvÌiÀÊÞÕÊ>ÛiÊÀi>`ÊÌiÊ«>ÃÃ>}iÊÞÕÊÜ>ÌÊÌÊ«>À>«À>Ãi]ÊÃiÌÊÌiÊÃÕÀViÊ>Ãì°ÊÃÊÞÕÀÃiv]Êº7>ÌÊÃÊÌiÊ>ÕÌÀ½ÃÊ meaning?” In your own words, state your understanding of the author’s basic point. Return to the source and check that you haven’t used the author’s language or sentence structure or misrepresented the author’s ideas. Following these steps will i«Ê ÞÕÊ >Û`Ê «>}>Àâ}Ê ÌiÊ ÃÕÀVi°Ê 7iÊ ÞÕÊ vÕÞÊ Õderstand another writer’s meaning, you can more easily and accurately represent those ideas in your own words. ACCEPTABLE PARAPHRASE

Scholars Carl Botan and Mihaela Vorvoreanu claim that the nature of workplace surveillance has changed over time. Before the arrival of computers, managers could collect only small amounts of information about their employees based on what they saw or heard. Now, because computers are standard workplace technology, employers can monitor employees efficiently (126).

For more discussion of summary and paraphrase, see 48c and 54b. hackerhandbooks.com/bedhandbook > Research exercises > MLA > E-ex 51–1 to 51–6

503

504

52

MLA

52

Integrating sources

MLA papers: Integrating sources

Quotations, summaries, paraphrases, and facts will help you develop your argument, but they cannot speak for you. You can use several strategies to integrate information from research sources into your paper while maintaining your own voice. NOTE: If you are integrating quotations from a literary source,

such as a poem or a short story, see 55f.

52a Use quotations appropriately. In your academic writing, keep the emphasis on your ideas and your language; use your own words to summarize and to paraphrase your sources and to explain your points. Sometimes, however, quotations can be the most effective way to integrate a source’s ideas. WHEN TO USE QUOTATIONS

UÊ 7iÊ>}Õ>}iÊÃÊiÃ«iV>ÞÊÛÛ`ÊÀÊiÝ«ÀiÃÃÛi UÊ 7iÊiÝ>VÌÊÜÀ`}ÊÃÊiiì`ÊvÀÊÌiVV>Ê>VVÕÀ>VÞ UÊ 7iÊÌÊÃÊ«ÀÌ>ÌÊÌÊiÌÊÌiÊìL>ÌiÀÃÊvÊ>ÊÃÃÕiÊiÝ«>Ê their positions in their own words UÊ 7iÊÌiÊÜÀ`ÃÊvÊ>Ê>ÕÌÀÌÞÊi`ÊÜi}ÌÊÌÊ>Ê argument UÊ 7iÊÌiÊ>}Õ>}iÊvÊ>ÊÃÕÀViÊÃÊÌiÊÌ«VÊvÊÞÕÀÊ`ÃVÕÃsion (as in an analysis or interpretation)

Limiting your use of quotations ÌÕ}Ê ÌÊ ÃÊ Ìi«Ì}Ê ÌÊ ÃiÀÌÊ >ÞÊ µÕÌ>ÌÃÊ Ê ÞÕÀÊ paper and to use your own words only for connecting passages, do not quote excessively. It is almost impossible to integrate numerous quotations smoothly into your own text. It is not always necessary to quote full sentences from a source. To reduce your reliance on the words of others, you

ÕÃ}ÊµÕÌ>ÌÃÊ UÊ >VVÕÀ>VÞÊ UÊ i«ÃÃÊ>ÀÊ`ÌÃ®

MLA

52a

can often integrate language from a source into your own sentence structure. Kizza and Ssanyu observe that technology in the workplace has been accompanied by “an array of problems that needed quick answers,” such as electronic monitoring to prevent security breaches (4).

Using the ellipsis mark and brackets Two useful marks of punctuation, the ellipsis mark and brackets, allow you to keep quoted material to a minimum and to integrate it smoothly into your text. The ellipsis mark To condense a quoted passage, you can use the ellipsis mark (three periods, with spaces between) to in`V>ÌiÊ Ì>ÌÊ ÞÕÊ >ÛiÊ ivÌÊ ÜÀ`ÃÊ ÕÌ°Ê 7>ÌÊ Ài>ÃÊ ÕÃÌÊ LiÊ grammatically complete. Lane acknowledges the legitimate reasons that many companies have for monitoring their employees’ online activities, particularly management’s concern about preventing “the theft of information that can be downloaded to a . . . disk, e-mailed to oneself . . . , or even posted to a Web page for the entire world to see” (12).

The writer has omitted from the source the words floppy or Zip before disk and or a confederate after oneself. On the rare occasions when you want to leave out one or more full sentences, use a period before the three ellipsis dots. Charles Lewis, director of the Center for Public Integrity, points out that “by 1987, employers were administering nearly 2,000,000 polygraph tests a year to job applicants and employees. . . . Millions of workers were required to produce urine samples under observation for drug testing . . .” (22).

Ordinarily, do not use an ellipsis mark at the beginning or at the end of a quotation. Your readers will understand that the quoted material is taken from a longer passage, so such marks are not necessary. The only exception occurs when you

505

506

52a

MLA


have dropped words at the end of the final quoted sentence. In such cases, put three ellipsis dots before the closing quotation mark and parenthetical reference, as in the previous example. >iÊÃÕÀiÊÃÃÃÊ>`Êi«ÃÃÊ>ÀÃÊ`ÊÌÊ`ÃÌÀÌÊÌiÊ meaning of your source. Brackets Brackets allow you to insert your own words into quoted material. You can insert words in brackets to clarify a confusing reference or to keep a sentence grammatical in your context. You also use brackets to indicate that you are changing a letter from capital to lowercase (or vice versa) to fit into your sentence. Legal scholar Jay Kesan notes that “[a] decade ago, losses [from employees’ computer crimes] were already mounting to five billion dollars annually” (311).

This quotation began A decade ago . . . in the source, so the writer indicated the change to lowercase with brackets and inserted words in brackets to clarify the meaning of losses. To indicate an error such as a misspelling in a quotation, insert the word “sic” in brackets right after the error. Johnson argues that “while online monitoring is often imagined as harmles [sic], the practice may well threaten employees’ rights to privacy” (14).

Do not overuse “sic” to call attention to errors in a source. Sometimes paraphrasing is a better option. (See 39c.)

Setting off long quotations 7iÊÞÕÊµÕÌiÊÀiÊÌ>ÊvÕÀÊÌÞ«i`ÊiÃÊvÊ«ÀÃiÊÀÊÀiÊ than three lines of poetry, set off the quotation by indenting it one inch from the left margin. Long quotations should be introduced by an informative sentence, usually followed by a colon. Quotation marks are


|

Cite your sources

Understanding the comment When a teacher or tutor responds “Cite your sources,” the comment often signals that you need to acknowledge and give proper credit to the contributions of others. At the story’s end, Edna Pontellier is described ur as a “naked . . . new-born creature” who, in the act Cite yo sources of ending her own life, is experiencing a kind of re-birth.

One student wrote this sentence in an essay interpreting Kate Chopin’s novel The Awakening.

The student has borrowed language from both a primary source and a secondary source without proper citation. To revise, she needs to consult her notes or return to the novel to locate the exact page number for the quotation she uses. In addition, she needs to include quotation marks around the words “a kind of re-birth,” which come from a secondary source, and to provide a parenthetical citation.

Similar comments: cite this s documentation s source?

Revising when you need to cite your sources 1. Reread your sentence and ask questions.Ê>ÛiÊÞÕÊ«À«iÀÞÊ>VÜedged all the contributions — words, ideas, or facts — that you use as iÛìVi¶Ê>ÛiÊÞÕÊ}ÛiÊVÀi`ÌÊÌÊÌiÊÃÕÀViÃÊÞÕÊµÕÌi]ÊÃÕ>Àâi]Ê ÀÊ«>À>«À>Ãi¶Ê>ÛiÊÞÕÊ>ìÊÌÊVi>ÀÊÌÊÀi>ìÀÃÊÜÊÌÊV>ÌiÊÌiÊ source if they want to consult it? 2. Ask your instructor which documentation style you are required to use — MLA, APA, or Chicago. 3. Read your notesÊÀÊViVÊÌiÊÃÕÀViÊÌÃivÊÌÊw`ÊÌiÊiÝ>VÌÊÜÀ`Ã°Ê>iÊ sure you have the author’s name, the title, the date of publication, and the page number for each source you cite. 4. Revise by including an in-text citation for any words, ideas, or facts that you used as evidence — and by including quotation marks around any language borrowed word-for-word from a source. More on citing sources: 53a (MLA), 56d (APA), and 57d (Chicago)

507

508

52b

MLA


unnecessary because the indented format tells readers that the passage is taken word-for-word from the source. Botan and Vorvoreanu examine the role of gender in company practices of electronic surveillance: There has never been accurate documentation of the extent of gender differences in surveillance, but by the middle 1990s, estimates of the proportion of surveilled employees that were women ranged from 75% to 85%. . . . Ironically, this gender imbalance in workplace surveillance may be evening out today because advances in surveillance technology are making surveillance of traditionally male dominated fields, such as long-distance truck driving, cheap, easy, and frequently unobtrusive. (127)

Notice that at the end of an indented quotation the parenthetical citation goes outside the final mark of punctuation. 7iÊ>ÊµÕÌ>ÌÊÃÊÀÕÊÌÊÞÕÀÊÌiÝÌ]ÊÌiÊ««ÃÌiÊÃÊÌÀÕi°Ê See the sample citations on p. 505.)

52b Use signal phrases to integrate sources. 7iiÛiÀÊÞÕÊVÕìÊ>Ê«>À>«À>Ãi]ÊÃÕ>ÀÞ]ÊÀÊ`ÀiVÌÊµÕtation of another writer in your paper, prepare your readers for it with introductory words called a signal phrase°Ê Ê Ã}nal phrase usually names the author of the source and often provides some context for the source material. (See also 52c and 54b.) 7iÊÞÕÊÜÀÌiÊ>ÊÃ}>Ê«À>Ãi]ÊVÃiÊ>ÊÛiÀLÊÌ>ÌÊÃÊ>««À«À>ÌiÊvÀÊÌiÊÜ>ÞÊÞÕÊ>ÀiÊÕÃ}ÊÌiÊÃÕÀViÊÃiiÊxäV®°ÊÀiÊ you providing background, explaining a concept, supporting a claim, lending authority, or refuting a belief? See the chart on page 509 for a list of verbs commonly used in signal phrases. ÌiÊÌ>ÌÊÊÃÌÞiÊV>ÃÊvÀÊÛiÀLÃÊÊÌiÊ«ÀiÃiÌÊÀÊ«ÀiÃent perfect tense (argues, has argued ) to introduce source material unless you include a date that specifies the time of the original author’s writing.

}ÊµÕÌ>ÌÃÊ UÊ Ã}>Ê«À>ÃiÃÊ UÊ ÌÀ`ÕV}Ê ÃÕÀViÃÊ UÊ >Û`}Ê`À««i`ÊµÕÌ>ÌÃÊ

MLA

52b

Using signal phrases in MLA papers To avoid monotony, try to vary both the language and the placement of your signal phrases.

Model signal phrases ÊÌiÊÜÀ`ÃÊvÊÀiÃi>ÀViÀÃÊÀiiwi`Ê>`Ê >ÛÃ]Êº°Ê°Ê°» As legal scholar Jay Kesan has noted, “. . .” The ePolicy Institute, an organization that advises companies about reducing risks from technology, reports that “. . .” “. . . ,” writes Daniel Tynan, “. . .” “. . . ,” attorney Schmitt claims. Kizza and Ssanyu offer a persuasive counterargument: “. . .”

Verbs in signal phrases acknowledges adds admits agrees argues asserts believes claims

comments compares VwÀÃ contends declares denies disputes emphasizes

endorses grants illustrates implies insists notes observes points out

reasons refutes rejects reports responds suggests thinks writes

Marking boundaries Readers need to move from your words to the words of a source ÜÌÕÌÊvii}Ê>ÊÌ°ÊÛ`Ê`À««}ÊµÕÌ>ÌÃÊÌÊÌiÊÌiÝÌÊ without warning. Instead, provide clear signal phrases, including at least the author’s name, to indicate the boundary between your words and the source’s words. (The signal phrase is underlined in the second example.) DROPPED QUOTATION

Some experts have argued that a range of legitimate concerns justifies employer monitoring of employee Internet usage. “Employees could

509

510

52b

MLA


accidentally (or deliberately) spill confidential corporate information . . . or allow worms to spread throughout a corporate network” (Tynan). QUOTATION WITH SIGNAL PHRASE

Some experts have argued that a range of legitimate concerns justifies employer monitoring of employee Internet usage. As PC World columnist Daniel Tynan points out, “Employees could accidentally (or deliberately) spill confidential corporate information . . . or allow worms to spread throughout a corporate network.” NOTE:Ê iV>ÕÃiÊÌÃÊµÕÌ>ÌÊÃÊvÀÊ>ÊÕ«>}>Ìi`Ê7iLÊÃÕÀVi]Ê no page number appears in parentheses after the quotation. See item 4 on page 520.

Establishing authority `ÊÀiÃi>ÀVÊÜÀÌ}ÊÕÃiÃÊiÛìViÊvÀÊÀi>LiÊÃÕÀViÃ°Ê/iÊ first time you mention a source, include in the signal phrase the author’s title, credentials, or experience — anything that would help your readers recognize the source’s authority. (Signal phrases are underlined in the next two examples.) SOURCE WITH NO CREDENTIALS

Jay Kesan points out that the law holds employers liable for employees’ actions such as violations of copyright laws, the distribution of offensive or graphic sexual material, and illegal disclosure of confidential information (312). SOURCE WITH CREDENTIALS

Legal scholar Jay Kesan points out that the law holds employers liable for employees’ actions such as violations of copyright laws, the distribution of offensive or graphic sexual material, and illegal disclosure of confidential information (312).

7iÊÞÕÊiÃÌ>LÃÊÞÕÀÊÃÕÀVi½ÃÊ>ÕÌÀÌÞ]Ê>ÃÊÜÌÊÌiÊ«À>ÃiÊ Legal scholar in the previous example, you also signal to readers your own credibility as a responsible researcher who has located reliable sources.

ÌÀ`ÕV}ÊÃÕÀViÃÊ UÊ ÃÌ>Ì}Ê>Ê>ÕÌÀ½ÃÊ iÝ«iÀÌÃiÊ UÊ ÕÃ}ÊÞÕÀÊÜÊÜÀ`Ã

MLA

52b

Introducing summaries and paraphrases Introduce most summaries and paraphrases with a signal phrase that names the author and places the material in the context of your argument. (See also 52c and 54b.) Readers will then understand that everything between the signal phrase and the parenthetical citation summarizes or paraphrases the cited source. 7ÌÕÌÊ ÌiÊ Ã}>Ê «À>ÃiÊ ÕìÀi`®Ê Ê ÌiÊ vÜ}Ê example, readers might think that only the quotation at the end is being cited, when in fact the whole paragraph is based on the source. Frederick Lane believes that the personal computer has posed new challenges for employers worried about workplace productivity. Whereas early desktop computers were primitive enough to prevent employees from using them to waste time, the machines have become so sophisticated that they now make non-work-related computer activities easy and inviting. Many employees spend considerable company time customizing features and playing games on their computers. But perhaps most problematic from the employer ’s point of view, Lane asserts, is giving employees access to the Internet, “roughly the equivalent of installing a gazillion-channel television set for each employee” (15-16).

There are times when a summary or a paraphrase does not ÀiµÕÀiÊ>ÊÃ}>Ê«À>Ãi°Ê7iÊÌiÊVÌiÝÌÊ>iÃÊVi>ÀÊÜiÀiÊ the cited material begins, you may omit the signal phrase and include the author’s last name in parentheses.

Using signal phrases with statistics and other facts 7iÊÞÕÊ>ÀiÊVÌ}Ê>ÊÃÌ>ÌÃÌVÊÀÊ>ÌiÀÊÃ«iVwVÊv>VÌ]Ê>ÊÃ}nal phrase is often not necessary. In most cases, readers will understand that the citation refers to the statistic or fact (not the whole paragraph). Roughly 60% of responding companies reported disciplining employees who had used the Internet in ways the companies deemed inappropriate; 30% had fired their employees for those transgressions (Greenfield and Davis 347).

511

512

52c

MLA


There is nothing wrong, however, with using a signal phrase to introduce a statistic or fact.

Putting source material in context Readers should not have to guess why source material appears Ê ÞÕÀÊ «>«iÀ°Ê Ê Ã}>Ê «À>ÃiÊ V>Ê i«Ê ÞÕÊ >iÊ ÌiÊ Vnection between your own ideas and those of another writer by clarifying how the source will contribute to your paper (see 47a). If you use another writer’s words, you must explain how they relate to your point. It’s a good idea to embed a quotation between sentences of your own. In addition to introducing it with a signal phrase, follow it with interpretive comments that link the quotation to your paper’s argument (see also 52c). QUOTATION WITH EFFECTIVE CONTEXT

The difference, Lane argues, between old methods of data gathering and electronic surveillance involves quantity: Technology makes it possible for employers to gather enormous amounts of data about employees, often far beyond what is necessary to satisfy safety or productivity concerns. And the trends that drive technology—faster, smaller, cheaper—make it possible for larger and larger numbers of employers to gather ever-greater amounts of personal data. (3-4) In an age when employers can collect data whenever employees use their computers—when they send e-mail, surf the Web, or even arrive at or depart from their workstations—the challenge for both employers and employees is to determine how much is too much.

52c Synthesize sources. 7iÊ ÞÕÊ ÃÞÌiÃâiÊ ÕÌ«iÊ ÃÕÀViÃÊ Ê >Ê ÀiÃi>ÀVÊ «>«iÀ]Ê you create a conversation about your research topic. You show readers that your argument is based on your active analysis

ÌÀ`ÕV}ÊÃÕÀViÃÊ UÊ ÃÞÌiÃÃÊ UÊ ÜÀ}ÊÜÌÊÌÜÊÀÊÀiÊÃÕÀViÃÊ UÊ >>ÞÃÃ

MLA

52c

513

and integration of ideas, not just a list of quotations and paraphrases. Your synthesis will show how your sources relate to one another; one source may support, extend, or counter the ideas of another. Not every source has to “speak” to another in a research paper, but readers should be able to see how each one functions in your argument (see 47a).

Considering how sources relate to your argument Before you integrate sources and show readers how they relate to one another, consider how each one might contribute ÌÊÞÕÀÊÜÊ>À}ÕiÌ°ÊÃÊÃÌÕìÌÊÜÀÌiÀÊ>Ê"ÀÛÊLiV>iÊ more informed through her research about Internet surveillance in the workplace, she asked herself these questions: What do I think about monitoring employees online? Which sources might support my ideas? Which sources might help extend or illustrate the points I want to make? What common or compelling counterarguments do I need to address to strengthen my position? She annotated a passage from an eWeek article that challenged the case she was building against Internet surveillance in the workplace. STUDENT NOTES ON THE ORIGINAL SOURCE $BUDIZ 7iÊLÃÃiÃÊV>Êi>ÃÞÊìÌiVÌÊ>`ÊÌiÀÀÕ«ÌÊÜ>ÌiÀ MBOHVBHF¥B cooler chatter, the employee who is shopping at HPPERVPUBUJPO $PNNPO FYBNQMFT¥ SFBEFSTDBO SFMBUF

Ê

>`Ã½Ê `ÊÀÊ}ÊÜÌÊviÜÊv>Ì>ÃÞÊL>ÃiL>Ê managers may actually appear to be working. Thwarting the activity is a technology challenge, and it’s one that more and more enterprises are taking seriously, despite resistance from privacy advocates and some employees themselves. pÊ ÀÃÊÃ>ÛiÃ]Êº7>ÃÌ}ÊÜ>ÞÊÊÌiÊ7iL»

4USPOHDBTFGPS TVSWFJMMBODF CVU *©NOPUDPOWJODFE $PVOUFSXJUIVTF GVMXPSLQMBDF8FC TVS±OH

iV>ÕÃiÊ"ÀÛÊviÌÊÌ>ÌÊÌiÊÃ>ÛiÃÊ>ÀÌViÊÜÕ`ÊVvince many readers that Internet surveillance was good for workplace productivity, she knew she needed to present and counter his argument. The author’s memorable language and

514

52c

MLA


clear illustration seemed worth quoting, but she wanted to keep the emphasis on her own argument. So she quoted the «>ÃÃ>}iÊvÀÊÃ>ÛiÃÊ>`ÊÌiÊ>>Þâi`ÊÌ]Ê`ÃVÕÃÃ}Ê>`Ê countering his view in her own writing. She also found other sources to support and extend her counterargument.

Placing sources in conversation You can show readers how the ideas of one source relate to those of another by connecting and analyzing the ideas Ê ÞÕÀÊ ÜÊ ÛVi°Ê vÌiÀÊ >]Ê ÞÕ½ÛiÊ ìÊ ÌiÊ ÀiÃi>ÀVÊ >`Ê thought through the issues, so you should control the converÃ>Ì°Ê 7iÊ ÞÕÊ ivviVÌÛiÞÊ ÃÞÌiÃâiÊ ÃÕÀViÃ]Ê ÌiÊ i«>sis is still on your own writing; the thread of your argument should be easy to identify and to understand, with or without your sources. SAMPLE SYNTHESIS (DRAFT) Student writer Anna Orlov begins with a claim that needs support.

Signal phrases indicate how sources contribute to Orlov’s paper and show that the ideas that follow are not her own.

Productivity is not easily measured in the wired workplace. As a result, employers find it difficult to determine how much freedom to allow their employees. On the one hand, computers and Internet access give employees powerful tools to carry out their jobs; on the other hand, the same technology offers constant temptations to avoid work. As a 2005 study by Salary.com and America Online indicates, the Internet ranked as the top choice among employees for ways of wasting time on the job (Frauenheim). Chris Gonsalves, an editor for eWeek.com, argues that technology has changed the terms between employers and employees: “While bosses can easily detect and interrupt water-cooler chatter,” he writes, “the employee who is shopping at Lands’ End or IMing with fellow fantasy baseball managers may actually appear to be working.” The gap between observable behaviors and actual online activities has motivated some employers to invest in surveillance programs.

Student writer

Source 1 Source 2

Student writer

ÃÞÌiÃÃÊ UÊ ÜÀ}ÊÜÌÊÌÜÊÀÊÀiÊÃÕÀViÃÊ UÊ >>ÞÃÃÊ UÊ Ì>}ÊÌiÃÊ UÊ ÕìÀÃÌ>`}ÊÃÕÀViÃ

MLA

52c

Orlov presents a Many experts, however, disagree with employers’ counterposition assumption that online monitoring can increase productivity. to extend her argument. Employment law attorney Joseph Schmitt argues that, par-

ticularly for salaried employees, “a company shouldn’t care whether employees spend one or 10 hours on the Internet as long as they are getting their jobs done—and provided that they are not accessing inappropriate sites” (qtd. in Orlov builds her Verespej). Other experts even argue that time spent on case — each personal Internet browsing can actually be productive quoted passage offers a more for companies. According to Bill Coleman, an executive at detailed claim Salary.com, “Personal Internet use and casual office converor example in support of her sations often turn into new business ideas or suggestions larger claim. for gaining operating efficiencies” (qtd. in Frauenheim). Employers, in other words, may benefit from showing more faith in their employees’ ability to exercise their autonomy.

515

Student writer

Source 3

Student writer

Source 4

Student writer

In this draft, Orlov uses her own analyses to shape the conversation among her sources. She does not simply string quotations together or allow them to overwhelm her writing. The final sentence, written in her own voice, gives her an opportunity to explain to readers how the various sources support her argument. 7iÊÃÞÌiÃâ}ÊÃÕÀViÃÊÊÞÕÀÊÜÊÜÀÌ}]Ê>ÃÊÞÕÀself the following questions: UÊ 7VÊÃÕÀViÃÊvÀ]ÊÃÕ««ÀÌ]ÊÀÊiÝÌi`ÊÞÕÀÊ>À}ÕiÌ¶Ê UÊ ÊÞÕÊÛ>ÀÞÊÌiÊvÕVÌÃÊvÊÃÕÀViÃÊpÊÌÊ«ÀÛìÊL>Vground information, explain terms or concepts, lend authority to your argument, and anticipate counterarguments? UÊ ÊÞÕÊiÝ«>ÊÌÊÀi>ìÀÃÊÜÊÞÕÀÊÃÕÀViÃÊÃÕ««ÀÌÊÞÕÀÊ argument? UÊ ÊÞÕÊViVÌÊ>`Ê>>ÞâiÊÃÕÀViÃÊÊÞÕÀÊÜÊÛVi¶ UÊ ÃÊÞÕÀÊÜÊ>À}ÕiÌÊi>ÃÞÊÌÊìÌvÞÊ>`ÊÌÊÕìÀstand, with or without your sources? hackerhandbooks.com/bedhandbook > Research exercises > MLA > E-ex 52–1 to 52–4

516

52c

MLA


Reviewing an MLA paper: Use of sources Use of quotations U Is quoted material enclosed in quotation marks (unless it has been set off from the text)? (See 51b and p. 508.) U Is quoted language word-for-word accurate? If not, do brackets or ellipsis marks indicate the changes or omissions? (See pp. 505–06.) U Does a clear signal phrase (usually naming the author) prepare readers for each quotation and for the purpose the quotation serves? (See 52b.) U Does a parenthetical citation follow each quotation? (See 53a.) U Is each quotation put in context? (See 52c.)

Use of summaries and paraphrases U Are summaries and paraphrases free of plagiarized wording — not copied or half-copied from the source? (See 51b.) U Are summaries and paraphrases documented with parenthetical citations? (See 51b and 53a.) U Do readers know where the cited material begins? In other words, does a signal phrase mark the boundary between your words and the summary or paraphrase? Or does the context alone make clear exactly what you are citing? (See 52b.) U Does a signal phrase prepare readers for the purpose the summary or paraphrase has in your argument?

Use of statistics and other facts U Are statistics and facts (other than common knowledge) documented with parenthetical citations? (See 51b and 53a.) U If there is no signal phrase, will readers understand exactly which facts are being cited? (See 52b.)

Ê`VÕiÌ>ÌÊ UÊ ÌiÝÌÊVÌ>ÌÃÊ

53

MLA

53a

MLA documentation style

In English and other humanities classes, you may be asked to use the MLA (Modern Language Association) system for documenting sources, which is set forth in the MLA Handbook for Writers of Research Papers, 7th ed. (New York: MLA, 2009). MLA recommends in-text citations that refer readers to a list of works cited. An in-text citation names the author of the source, often in a signal phrase, and gives a page number in parentheses. At the end of the paper, a list of works cited provides publication information about the source; the list is alphabetized by authors’ last names (or by titles for works without authors). There is a direct connection between the in-text citation and the alphabetical listing. In the following example, that connection is highlighted in orange. IN-TEXT CITATION

Jay Kesan notes that even though many companies now routinely monitor employees through electronic means, “there may exist less intrusive safeguards for employers” (293). ENTRY IN THE LIST OF WORKS CITED

Kesan, Jay P. “Cyber-Working or Cyber-Shirking? A First Principles Examination of Electronic Privacy in the Workplace.” Florida Law Review 54.2 (2002): 289-332. Print.

For a list of works cited that includes this entry, see page 588.

53a MLA in-text citations MLA in-text citations are made with a combination of signal phrases and parenthetical references. A signal phrase introduces information taken from a source (a quotation, summary, paraphrase, or fact); usually the signal phrase includes

517

518

53a

MLA

Ê`VÕiÌ>Ì\ÊÌiÝÌÊVÌ>ÌÃÊ

the author’s name. The parenthetical reference comes after the cited material, often at the end of the sentence. It includes at least a page number (except for unpaginated sources, such as those found online). In the models in 53a, the elements of the in-text citation are highlighted in color. IN-TEXT CITATION

Kwon points out that the Fourth Amendment does not give employees any protections from employers’ “unreasonable searches and seizures” (6).

Readers can look up the author’s last name in the alphabetized list of works cited, where they will learn the work’s title and other publication information. If readers decide to consult the source, the page number will take them straight to the passage that has been cited.

Basic rules for print and online sources The MLA system of in-text citations, which depends heavily on authors’ names and page numbers, was created with print sources in mind. Although many online sources have unclear authorship and lack page numbers, the basic rules are the same for both print and online sources. The models in this section (items 1–5) show how the MLA system usually works and explain what to do if your source has no author or page numbers. 1. Author named in a signal phrase Ordinarily, introduce the material being cited with a signal phrase that includes the author’s name. In addition to preparing readers for the source, the signal phrase allows you to keep the parenthetical citation brief. Frederick Lane reports that employers do not necessarily have to use software to monitor how their employees use the Web: employers can “use a hidden video camera pointed at an employee’s monitor” and even position a camera ”so that a number of monitors [can] be viewed at the same time” (147).

`ÀiVÌÀÞÊ UÊ >ÕÌÀÊÊÃ}>Ê«À>ÃiÊ UÊ >ÕÌÀÊÊ«>ÀiÌiÃiÃ

MLA

53a

Directory to MLA in-text citation models Basic rules for print and online sources Ê £°Ê ÕÌÀÊ>i`ÊÊ>ÊÃ}>Ê «À>Ãi]Êx£n Ê Ó°Ê ÕÌÀÊ>i`ÊÊ«>ÀiÌiÃiÃ]Ê x£ Ê Î°Ê ÕÌÀÊÕÜ]ÊxÓä Ê {°Ê *>}iÊÕLiÀÊÕÜ]ÊxÓä Ê x°Ê "i«>}iÊÃÕÀVi]ÊxÓ£

Variations on the basic rules Ê È°Ê Ê Ç°Ê Ê n°Ê Ê °Ê £ä°Ê ££°Ê £Ó°Ê £Î°Ê

/ÜÊÀÊÌÀiiÊ>ÕÌÀÃ]ÊxÓ£ ÕÀÊÀÊÀiÊ>ÕÌÀÃ]ÊxÓÓ "À}>â>ÌÊ>ÃÊ>ÕÌÀ]ÊxÓÓ ÕÌÀÃÊÜÌÊÌiÊÃ>iÊ>ÃÌÊ >i]ÊxÓÓ /ÜÊÀÊÀiÊÜÀÃÊLÞÊÌiÊ Ã>iÊ>ÕÌÀ]ÊxÓÎ /ÜÊÀÊÀiÊÜÀÃÊÊiÊ VÌ>Ì]ÊxÓÎ ,i«i>Ìi`ÊVÌ>ÌÃÊvÀÊÌiÊ Ã>iÊÃÕÀVi]ÊxÓÎ

VÞV«i`>ÊÀÊ`VÌ>ÀÞÊ iÌÀÞ]ÊxÓ{

£{°Ê ÕÌÛÕiÊÜÀ]ÊxÓ{ £x°Ê ÌÀiÊÜÀ]ÊxÓx £È°Ê -iiVÌÊÊ>Ê>Ì}Þ]Ê xÓx £Ç°Ê ÛiÀiÌÊ`VÕiÌ]ÊxÓx £n°Ê ÃÌÀV>Ê`VÕiÌ]ÊxÓÈ £°Ê i}>ÊÃÕÀVi]ÊxÓÈ Óä°Ê 6ÃÕ>ÊÃÕVÊ>ÃÊ>Ê«Ì}À>«]Ê >«]ÊÀÊV>ÀÌ]ÊxÓÈ Ó£°Ê >]ÊiÌÌiÀ]ÊÀÊ«iÀÃ>Ê ÌiÀÛiÜ]ÊxÓÇ ÓÓ°Ê 7iLÊÃÌiÊÀÊÌiÀÊiiVÌÀVÊ ÃÕÀVi]ÊxÓÇ ÓÎ°Ê `ÀiVÌÊÃÕÀViÊÃÕÀViÊµÕÌi`Ê Ê>ÌiÀÊÃÕÀVi®]ÊxÓÇ

Literary works and sacred texts Ó{°Ê ÌiÀ>ÀÞÊÜÀÊÜÌÕÌÊ«>ÀÌÃÊÀÊ iÊÕLiÀÃ]ÊxÓn Óx°Ê 6iÀÃiÊ«>ÞÊÀÊ«i]ÊxÓn ÓÈ°Ê ÛiÊÜÌÊÕLiÀi`Ê `ÛÃÃ]ÊxÓn ÓÇ°Ê ->VÀi`ÊÌiÝÌ]ÊxÓ

The signal phrase — Frederick Lane reports — names the author; the parenthetical citation gives the page number of the book in which the quoted words may be found. Notice that the period follows the parenthetical citation. When a quotation ends with a question mark or an exclamation point, leave the end punctuation inside the quotation mark and add a period at the end of your sentence: “. . . ?” (8). (See also the note on p. 396.) 2. Author named in parentheses If a signal phrase does not name the author, put the author’s last name in parentheses along with the page number. Use no punctuation between the name and the page number.

519

520

53a

MLA

Ê`VÕiÌ>Ì\ÊÌiÝÌÊVÌ>ÌÃ

Companies can monitor employees’ every keystroke without legal penalty, but they may have to combat low morale as a result (Lane 129).

3. Author unknown Either use the complete title in a signal phrase or use a short form of the title in parentheses. Titles of books are italicized; titles of articles are put in quotation marks. A popular keystroke logging program operates invisibly on workers’ computers yet provides supervisors with details of the workers’ online activities (“Automatically”). TIP: Before assuming that a Web source has no author, do some detective work. Often the author’s name is available but is not easy to find. For example, it may appear at the end of the page, in tiny print. Or it may appear on another page of the site, such as the home page. NOTE: If a source has no author and is sponsored by a cor-

poration or government agency, name the corporation or agency as the author (see items 8 and 17 on pp. 522 and 525, respectively). 4. Page number unknown Do not include the page number if a work lacks page numbers, as is the case with many Web sources. Even if a printout from a Web site shows page numbers, treat the source as unpaginated in the in-text citation because not all printouts give the same page numbers. (When the pages of a Web source are stable, as in PDF files, supply a page number in your in-text citation.) As a 2005 study by Salary.com and America Online indicates, the Internet ranked as the top choice among employees for ways of wasting time on the job; it beat talking with co-workers—the second most popular method—by a margin of nearly two to one (Frauenheim).

If a source has numbered paragraphs or sections, use “par.” (or “pars.”) or “sec.” (or “secs.”) in the parentheses: (Smith, par. 4). Notice that a comma follows the author’s name in this case.

Ê>ÕÌÀÊ UÊ Ê«>}iÊÕLiÀÊ UÊ i«>}iÊÃÕÀViÊ UÊ ÌÜÊÀÊÌÀiiÊ>ÕÌÀÃ

MLA

53a

5. One-page source If the source is one page long, MLA allows (but does not require) you to omit the page number. Many instructors will want you to supply the page number because without it readers may not know where your citation ends or, worse, may not realize that you have provided a citation at all. NO PAGE NUMBER IN CITATION

Anush Yegyazarian reports that in 2000 the National Labor Relations Board’s Office of the General Counsel helped win restitution for two workers who had been dismissed because their employers were displeased by the employees’ e-mails about work-related issues. The case points to the ongoing struggle to define what constitutes protected speech in the workplace. PAGE NUMBER IN CITATION

Anush Yegyazarian reports that in 2000 the National Labor Relations Board’s Office of the General Counsel helped win restitution for two workers who had been dismissed because their employers were displeased by the employees’ e-mails about work-related issues (62). The case points to the ongoing struggle to define what constitutes protected speech in the workplace.

Variations on the basic rules This section describes the MLA guidelines for handling a variety of situations not covered by the basic rules in items 1–5. These rules for in-text citations are the same for both print and online sources. 6. Two or three authors Name the authors in a signal phrase, as in the following example, or include their last names in the parenthetical reference: (Kizza and Ssanyu 2). Kizza and Ssanyu note that “employee monitoring is a dependable, capable, and very affordable process of electronically or otherwise recording all employee activities at work” and elsewhere (2).

521

522

53a

MLA


When three authors are named in the parentheses, separate the names with commas: (Alton, Davies, and Rice 56). 7. Four or more authors Name all of the authors or include only the first author’s name followed by “et al.” (Latin for “and others”). The format you use should match the format in your works cited entry (see item 3 on p. 533). The study was extended for two years, and only after results were reviewed by an independent panel did the researchers publish their findings (Blaine et al. 35).

8. Organization as author When the author is a corporation or an organization, name that author either in the signal phrase or in the parentheses. (For a government agency as author, see item 17 on p. 525.) According to a 2001 survey of human resources managers by the American Management Association, more than three-quarters of the responding companies reported disciplining employees for “misuse or personal use of office telecommunications equipment” (2).

In the list of works cited, the American Management Association is treated as the author and alphabetized under A. When you give the organization name in parentheses, abbreviate common words in the name: “Assn.,” “Dept.,” “Natl.,” “Soc.,” and so on. In a 2001 survey of human resources managers, more than threequarters of the responding companies reported disciplining employees for “misuse of personal use of office telecommunications equipment” (Amer. Management Assn. 2).

9. Authors with the same last name If your list of works cited includes works by two or more authors with the same last name, include the author’s first name in the signal phrase or first initial in the parentheses. Estimates of the frequency with which employers monitor employees’ use of the Internet each day vary widely (A. Jones 15).

vÕÀÊÀÊÀiÊ>ÕÌÀÃÊ UÊ À}>â>ÌÊ UÊ Ã>iÊ>ÃÌÊ >iÊ UÊ ÌÜÊÀÊÀiÊÜÀÃÊ UÊ Ài«i>Ìi`ÊVÌ>ÌÃÊ

MLA

53a

10. Two or more works by the same author Mention the title of the work in the signal phrase or include a short version of the title in the parentheses. The American Management Association and ePolicy Institute have tracked employers’ practices in monitoring employees’ e-mail use. The groups’ 2003 survey found that one-third of companies had a policy of keeping and reviewing employees’ e-mail messages (“2003 E-mail” 2); in 2005, more than 55% of companies engaged in e-mail monitoring (“2005 Electronic” 1).

Titles of articles and other short works are placed in quotation marks; titles of books are italicized. In the rare case when both the author’s name and a short title must be given in parentheses, separate them with a comma. A 2004 survey found that 20% of employers responding had employees’ e-mail “subpoenaed in the course of a lawsuit or regulatory investigation,” up 7% from the previous year (Amer. Management Assn. and ePolicy Inst., “2004 Workplace” 1).

11. Two or more works in one citation To cite more than one source in the parentheses, give the citations in alphabetical order and separate them with a semicolon. The effects of sleep deprivation among college students have been well documented (Cahill 42; Leduc 114; Vasquez 73).

Multiple citations can be distracting, so you should not overuse the technique. If you want to alert readers to several sources that discuss a particular topic, consider using an information note instead (see 53c). 12. Repeated citations from the same source When you are writing about a single work of fiction, you do not need to include the author’s name each time you quote from or paraphrase the work. After you mention the author’s name at the

523

524

53a

MLA


beginning of your paper, you may include just the page number in your parenthetical citations. (For specific guidelines for citing novels, plays, and poems, see 55f.) In Susan Glaspell’s short story “A Jury of Her Peers,” two women accompany their husbands and a county attorney to an isolated house where a farmer named John Wright has been choked to death in his bed with a rope. The chief suspect is Wright’s wife, Minnie, who is in jail awaiting trial. The sheriff’s wife, Mrs. Peters, has come along to gather some personal items for Minnie, and Mrs. Hale has joined her. Early in the story, Mrs. Hale sympathizes with Minnie and objects to the way the male investigators are “snoopin’ round and criticizin’” her kitchen (200). In contrast, Mrs. Peters shows respect for the law, saying that the men are doing “no more than their duty” (201).

In a second citation from the same nonfiction source in one paragraph, you may omit the author’s name in the signal phrase as long as it is clear that you are still referring to the same source. 13. Encyclopedia or dictionary entry Unless an encyclopedia or a dictionary has an author, it will be alphabetized in the list of works cited under the word or entry that you consulted (see item 18 on p. 539). Either in your text or in your parenthetical citation, mention the word or entry. No page number is required, since readers can easily look up the word or entry. The word crocodile has a surprisingly complex etymology (“Crocodile”).

14. Multivolume work If your paper cites more than one volume of a multivolume work, indicate in the parentheses the volume you are referring to, followed by a colon and the page number. In his studies of gifted children, Terman describes a pattern of accelerated language acquisition (2: 279).

iVÞV«i`>Ê UÊ ÛÕiÃÊ UÊ >Ì}ÞÊViVÌ®Ê UÊ }ÛiÀiÌÊ`VÕiÌ

MLA

53a

If you cite only one volume of a multivolume work, you will include the volume number in the list of works cited and will not need to include it in the parentheses. (See the second example in item 17 on p. 539.) 15. Entire work Use the author’s name in a signal phrase or a parenthetical citation. There is no need to use a page number. Lane explores the evolution of surveillance in the workplace.

16. Selection in an anthology Put the name of the author of the selection (not the editor of the anthology) in the signal phrase or the parentheses. In “Love Is a Fallacy,” the narrator’s logical teachings disintegrate when Polly declares that she should date Petey because “[h]e’s got a raccoon coat” (Shulman 379).

In the list of works cited, the work is alphabetized under Shulman, not under the name of the editor of the anthology. Shulman, Max. “Love Is a Fallacy.” Current Issues and Enduring Questions. Ed. Sylvan Barnet and Hugo Bedau. 8th ed. Boston: Bedford, 2008. 371-79. Print.

17. Government document When a government agency is the author, you will alphabetize it in the list of works cited under the name of the government, such as United States or Great Britain (see item 73 on p. 563). For this reason, you must name the government as well as the agency in your in-text citation. Online monitoring by the United States Department of the Interior over a one-week period found that employees’ use of “sexually explicit and gambling websites . . . accounted for over 24 hours of Internet use” and that “computer users spent over 2,004 hours accessing game and auction sites” during the same period (3).

525

526

53a

MLA


18. Historical document For a historical document, such as the United States Constitution or the Canadian Charter of Rights and Freedoms, provide the document title, neither italicized nor in quotation marks, along with relevant article and section numbers. In parenthetical citations, use common abbreviations such as “art.” and “sec.” and abbreviations of well-known titles (US Const., art. 1, sec. 2). While the United States Constitution provides for the formation of new states (art. 4, sec. 3), it does not explicitly allow or prohibit the secession of states.

For other historical documents, cite as you would any other work, by the first element in the works cited entry (see item 74 on p. 564). 19. Legal source For legislative acts (laws) and court cases, name the act or case either in a signal phrase or in parentheses. Italicize the names of cases but not the names of acts. The Jones Act of 1917 granted US citizenship to Puerto Ricans. In 1857, Chief Justice Roger B. Taney declared in Dred Scott v. Sandford that blacks, whether enslaved or free, could not be citizens of the United States.

20. Visual such as a photograph, map, or chart To cite a visual that has a figure number in the source, use the abbreviation “fig.” and the number in place of a page number in your parenthetical citation: (Manning, fig. 4). Spell out the word “figure” if you refer to it in your text. To cite a visual that does not have a figure number in a print source, use the visual’s title or a general description in your text and cite the author and page number as for any other source. For a visual that is not contained in a source such as a book or periodical, identify the visual in your text and then cite it using the first element in the works cited entry: the photographer’s or artist’s name or the title of the work. (See item 69 on p. 562.)

ÃÌÀV>Ê`VÕiÌÊ UÊ i}>ÊUÊ ÛÃÕ>ÃÊ UÊ i>Ê UÊ 7iLÊÃÌiÊ UÊ ÃÕÀViÊµÕÌi`ÊÊ>ÌiÀÊÃÕÀViÊ

MLA

53a

Photographs such as Woman Aircraft Worker (Bransby) and Women Welders (Parks) demonstrate the US government’s attempt to document the contributions of women on the home front during World War II.

21. E-mail, letter, or personal interview Cite e-mail messages, personal letters, and personal interviews by the name listed in the works cited entry, as you would for any other source. Identify the type of source in your text if you feel it is necessary. (See item 53 on p. 557 and items 83 and 84 on p. 567.) 22. Web site or other electronic source Your in-text citation for an electronic source should follow the same guidelines as for other sources. If the source lacks page numbers but has numbered paragraphs, sections, or divisions, use those numbers with the appropriate abbreviation in your in-text citation: “par.,” “sec.,” “ch.,” “pt.,” and so on. Do not add such numbers if the source itself does not use them. In that case, simply give the author or title in your in-text citation. Julian Hawthorne points out profound differences between his father and Ralph Waldo Emerson but concludes that, in their lives and their writing, “together they met the needs of nearly all that is worthy in human nature” (ch. 4).

23. Indirect source (source quoted in another source) When a writer’s or a speaker’s quoted words appear in a source written by someone else, begin the parenthetical citation with the abbreviation “qtd. in.” Researchers Botan and McCreadie point out that “workers are objects of information collection without participating in the process of exchanging the information . . .” (qtd. in Kizza and Ssanyu 14).

Literary works and sacred texts Literary works and sacred texts are usually available in a variety of editions. Your list of works cited will specify which edition you are using, and your in-text citation will usually

527

528

53a

MLA


consist of a page number from the edition you consulted (see item 24). When possible, give enough information — such as book parts, play divisions, or line numbers — so that readers can locate the cited passage in any edition of the work (see items 25–27). 24. Literary work without parts or line numbers Many literary works, such as most short stories and many novels and plays, do not have parts or line numbers. In such cases, simply cite the page number. At the end of Kate Chopin’s “The Story of an Hour,” Mrs. Mallard drops dead upon learning that her husband is alive. In the final irony of the story, doctors report that she has died of a “joy that kills” (25).

25. Verse play or poem For verse plays, give act, scene, and line numbers that can be located in any edition of the work. Use arabic numerals and separate the numbers with periods. In Shakespeare’s King Lear, Gloucester, blinded for suspected treason, learns a profound lesson from his tragic experience: “A man may see how this world goes / with no eyes” (4.2.148-49).

For a poem, cite the part, stanza, and line numbers, if it has them, separated by periods. The Green Knight claims to approach King Arthur’s court “because the praise of you, prince, is puffed so high, / And your manor and your men are considered so magnificent” (1.12.258-59).

For poems that are not divided into numbered parts or stanzas, use line numbers. For a first reference, use the word “lines”: (lines 5-8). Thereafter use just the numbers: (12-13). 26. Novel with numbered divisions When a novel has numbered divisions, put the page number first, followed by a semicolon, and then the book, part, or chapter in which the passage may be found. Use abbreviations such as “pt.” and “ch.”

ÌiÀ>ÀÞÊÜÀÊ UÊ «>ÞÊ UÊ «iÊ UÊ ÛiÊ UÊÊ LiÊ UÊ +ÕÀ½>Ê UÊ ÜÀÃÊVÌi`

MLA

53b

One of Kingsolver’s narrators, teenager Rachel, pushes her vocabulary beyond its limits. For example, Rachel complains that being forced to live in the Congo with her missionary family is “a sheer tapestry of justice” because her chances of finding a boyfriend are “dull and void” (117; bk. 2, ch. 10).

27. Sacred text When citing a sacred text such as the Bible or the Qur’an, name the edition you are using in your works cited entry (see item 19 on p. 542). In your parenthetical citation, give the book, chapter, and verse (or their equivalent), separated by periods. Common abbreviations for books of the Bible are acceptable. Consider the words of Solomon: “If your enemy is hungry, give him bread to eat; and if he is thirsty, give him water to drink” (Oxford Annotated Bible, Prov. 25.21).

The title of a sacred work is italicized when it refers to a specific edition of the work, as in the preceding example. If you refer to the book in a general sense in your text, neither italicize it nor put it in quotation marks: “The Bible and the Qur’an provide allegories that help readers understand how to lead a moral life.” hackerhandbooks.com/bedhandbook > Research exercises > MLA > E-ex 53–1 to 53–3

53b MLA list of works cited An alphabetized list of works cited, which appears at the end of your research paper, gives publication information for each of the sources you have cited in the paper. Include only sources that you have quoted, summarized, or paraphrased. (For information about preparing the list, see pp. 571–72; for a sample list of works cited, see p. 588.)

General guidelines for works cited in MLA style In an MLA works cited entry, the first author’s name is inverted (the last name comes first, followed by a comma and

529

530

53b

MLA

Ê`VÕiÌ>Ì\Ê7ÀÃÊVÌi`

Directory to MLA works cited models Listing authors (print and online) Ê £°Ê Ê Ó°Ê Ê Î°Ê Ê {°Ê Ê x°Ê Ê È°Ê

-}iÊ>ÕÌÀ]ÊxÎÓÊ /ÜÊÀÊÌÀiiÊ>ÕÌÀÃ]ÊxÎÓ ÕÀÊÀÊÀiÊ>ÕÌÀÃ]ÊxÎÎ "À}>â>ÌÊ>ÃÊ>ÕÌÀ]ÊxÎÎ 1ÜÊ>ÕÌÀ]ÊxÎÎ /ÜÊÀÊÀiÊÜÀÃÊLÞÊÌiÊ Ã>iÊ>ÕÌÀ]ÊxÎ{

Books (print) Ê Ç°Ê >ÃVÊvÀ>ÌÊvÀÊ>ÊL]ÊxÎx Ê n°Ê ÊÜÌÊ>Ê>ÕÌÀÊ>`Ê>Ê i`ÌÀ]ÊxÎx Ê °Ê ÊÜÌÊ>Ê>ÕÌÀÊ>`Ê>Ê ÌÀ>Ã>ÌÀ]ÊxÎx £ä°Ê ÊÜÌÊ>Êi`ÌÀ]ÊxÎx ££°Ê À>«VÊ>ÀÀ>ÌÛiÊÀÊ ÕÃÌÀ>Ìi`ÊL]ÊxÎÇ £Ó°Ê ÊÜÌÊ>Ê>ÕÌÀÊÕÃ}Ê>Ê «ÃiÕ`Þ]ÊxÎÇ £Î°Ê ÊÊ>Ê>}Õ>}iÊÌiÀÊ Ì>Ê }Ã]ÊxÎÇ £{°Ê ÌÀiÊ>Ì}Þ]ÊxÎÇ £x°Ê "iÊÀÊÀiÊÃiiVÌÃÊvÀÊ >Ê>Ì}Þ]ÊxÎn £È°Ê `ÌÊÌiÀÊÌ>ÊÌiÊwÀÃÌ]ÊxÎ £Ç°Ê ÕÌÛÕiÊÜÀ]ÊxÎ £n°Ê VÞV«i`>ÊÀÊ`VÌ>ÀÞÊ iÌÀÞ]ÊxÎ £°Ê ->VÀi`ÊÌiÝÌ]Êx{Ó Óä°Ê ÀiÜÀ`]ÊÌÀ`ÕVÌ]Ê «Àiv>Vi]ÊÀÊ>vÌiÀÜÀ`]Êx{Ó Ó£°Ê ÊÜÌÊ>ÊÌÌiÊÊÌÃÊÌÌi]Êx{Î ÓÓ°Ê ÊÊ>ÊÃiÀiÃ]Êx{Î ÓÎ°Ê ,i«ÕLÃi`ÊL]Êx{Î Ó{°Ê *ÕLÃiÀ½ÃÊ«ÀÌ]Êx{Î

Articles in periodicals (print) Óx°Ê ÀÌViÊÊ>ÊÕÀ>Ê «>}>Ìi`ÊLÞÊÛÕiÊÀÊ LÞÊÃÃÕi®]Êx{{

ÓÈ°Ê ÀÌViÊÊ>ÊÌÞÊ >}>âi]Êx{{ 27. ÀÌViÊÊ>ÊÜiiÞÊ>}>âi]Ê x{{ Ón°Ê ÀÌViÊÊ>Ê`>ÞÊiÜÃ«>«iÀ]Ê x{{ Ó°Ê LÃÌÀ>VÌÊvÊ>ÊÕÀ>Ê >ÀÌVi]Êx{x Îä°Ê ÀÌViÊÜÌÊ>ÊÌÌiÊÊÌÃÊ ÌÌi]Êx{x Î£°Ê `ÌÀ>ÊÀÊÌiÀÊÕÃ}i`Ê >ÀÌVi]Êx{x ÎÓ°Ê iÌÌiÀÊÌÊÌiÊi`ÌÀ]Êx{x ÎÎ°Ê ÊÀÊwÊÀiÛiÜ]Êx{n

Online sources Î{°Ê ÌÀiÊ7iLÊÃÌi]Êx{n Îx°Ê -ÀÌÊÜÀÊvÀÊ>Ê7iLÊÃÌi]Ê x{ ÎÈ°Ê 7iLÊÃÌiÊÜÌÊ>Ê>ÕÌÀÊÕÃ}Ê >Ê«ÃiÕ`Þ]Êxx£ ÎÇ°Ê ÀÌViÊÊ>ÊiÊÃV>ÀÞÊ ÕÀ>]ÊxxÎ În°Ê ÀÌViÊÊ>ÊiÊ>}>âi]Ê xxÎ Î°Ê ÀÌViÊÊ>ÊiÊ iÜÃ«>«iÀ]ÊxxÎ {ä°Ê 7ÀÊvÀÊ>Ê`>Ì>L>Ãi]ÊxxÎ {£°Ê "iÊLi}ÌÊÜÀ]Êxx{ {Ó°Ê *>ÀÌÊvÊ>ÊiÊL]Êxx{ {Î°Ê }Ì>Ê>ÀVÛiÃ]Êxx{ {{°Ê ÌÀÞÊÊ>ÊiÊÀiviÀiViÊ ÜÀ]Êxxx {x°Ê "iÊ«i]Êxxx {È°Ê ÌÀiÊ7iL}ÊL}®]Êxxx 47. Entry or comment in a 7iL}ÊL}®]Êxxx {n°Ê V>ìVÊVÕÀÃiÊÀÊ ì«>ÀÌiÌÊiÊ«>}i]ÊxxÈ {°Ê "iÊÛìÊV«]ÊxxÈ xä°Ê "iÊ>LÃÌÀ>VÌ]ÊxxÈ

6

`ÀiVÌÀÞÊ UÊ }iiÀ>Ê}ÕìiÃÊvÀÊÜÀÃÊVÌi`

x£°Ê "iÊi`ÌÀ>ÊÀÊiÌÌiÀÊÌÊÌiÊ i`ÌÀ]ÊxxÇ xÓ°Ê "iÊÀiÛiÜ]ÊxxÇ xÎ°Ê >ÊiÃÃ>}i]ÊxxÇ x{°Ê *ÃÌ}ÊÌÊ>ÊiÊ `ÃVÕÃÃÊÃÌ]ÊxxÇ xx°Ê ÌÀÞÊÊ>ÊÜ]Êxxn

Audio and visual sources (including online versions) xÈ°Ê xÇ°Ê xn°Ê x°Ê Èä°Ê È£°Ê ÈÓ°Ê ÈÎ°Ê È{°Ê

}Ì>Êwi]Êxxn *`V>ÃÌ]Êxx ÕÃV>ÊÃVÀi]Êxx -Õ`ÊÀiVÀ`}]Êxx ]ÊxÈä 6 ]ÊxÈä -«iV>Êvi>ÌÕÀiÊÊ>Ê 6 ]ÊxÈä

,"]ÊxÈ£

«ÕÌiÀÊÃvÌÜ>ÀiÊÀÊÛìÊ }>i]ÊxÈ£ Èx°Ê ,>`ÊÀÊÌiiÛÃÊ«À}À>]Ê xÈ£ ÈÈ°Ê ,>`ÊÀÊÌiiÛÃÊÌiÀÛiÜ]Ê xÈ£ ÈÇ°Ê ÛiÊ«iÀvÀ>Vi]ÊxÈÓ

Èn°Ê È°Ê Çä°Ê Ç£°Ê ÇÓ°Ê

MLA

53b

iVÌÕÀiÊÀÊ«ÕLVÊ>``ÀiÃÃ]ÊxÈÓ 7ÀÊvÊ>ÀÌ]ÊxÈÓ

>ÀÌ]ÊxÈÓ `ÛiÀÌÃiiÌ]ÊxÈÎ >«ÊÀÊV>ÀÌ]ÊxÈÎ

Other sources (including online versions) ÇÎ°Ê Ç{°Ê Çx°Ê ÇÈ°Ê ÇÇ°Ê Çn°Ê Ç°Ê nä°Ê n£°Ê nÓ°Ê nÎ°Ê n{°Ê nx°Ê nÈ°Ê

ÛiÀiÌÊ`VÕiÌ]ÊxÈÎ ÃÌÀV>Ê`VÕiÌ]ÊxÈ{ i}>ÊÃÕÀVi]ÊxÈ{ *>«iÌÊÀÊLÀVÕÀi]ÊxÈx 1«ÕLÃi`Ê`ÃÃiÀÌ>Ì]ÊxÈx *ÕLÃi`Ê`ÃÃiÀÌ>Ì]ÊxÈx LÃÌÀ>VÌÊvÊ>Ê`ÃÃiÀÌ>Ì]ÊxÈÈ *ÕLÃi`Ê«ÀVii`}ÃÊvÊ>Ê VviÀiVi]ÊxÈÈ *>«iÀÊÊVviÀiViÊ «ÀVii`}Ã]ÊxÈÈ *ÕLÃi`ÊÌiÀÛiÜ]ÊxÈÈ *iÀÃ>ÊÌiÀÛiÜ]ÊxÈÇ *iÀÃ>ÊiÌÌiÀ]ÊxÈÇ *ÕLÃi`ÊiÌÌiÀ]ÊxÈÇ >ÕÃVÀ«Ì]ÊxÈÇ

the first name), and all other names are in normal order. In titles of works, all words are capitalized except articles (a, an, the), prepositions (to, from, between, and so on), coordinating conjunctions (and, but, or, nor, for, so, yet), and the to in infinitives — unless they are the first or last word of the title or subtitle. Titles of periodical articles and other short works, such as brief documents from Web sites, are put in quotation marks; titles of books and other long works, such as entire Web sites, are italicized. The city of publication is given without a state name. Publishers’ names are shortened, usually to the first principal word (“Wiley” for “John Wiley and Sons,” for instance), and “University” and “Press” are abbreviated “U” and “P” in the names of

531

532

53b

MLA

Ê`VÕiÌ>Ì\Ê7ÀÃÊVÌi`

university publishers: UP of Florida. The date of publication is the date on the title page or the most recent date on the copyright page. All works cited entries must include the medium in which a work was published, produced, or delivered. The medium usually appears at the end of the entry, capitalized but neither italicized nor in quotation marks. Typical designations for the medium are “Print,” “Web,” “Radio,” “Television,” “CD,” “Audiocassette,” “Film,” “Videocassette,” “DVD,” “Photograph,” “Performance,” “Lecture,” “MP3 file,” and “PDF file.” (See specific items throughout this section.)

Listing authors (print and online) Alphabetize entries in the list of works cited by authors’ last names (or by title if a work has no author). The author’s name is important because citations in the text of the paper refer to it and readers will be looking for it at the beginning of an entry in the alphabetized list. NAME CITED IN TEXT

According to Nancy Flynn, . . . BEGINNING OF WORKS CITED ENTRY

Flynn, Nancy.

1. Single author author: last name first

title (book)

city of publication publisher date

medium

Wood, James. How Fiction Works. New York: Farrar, 2008. Print.

2. Two or three authors first author: last name first

second author: in normal order

title (book)

city of publication

Gourevitch, Philip, and Errol Morris. Standard Operating Procedure. New York: publisher

date medium

Penguin, 2008. Print.

iÊ>ÕÌÀÊ UÊ ÌÜÊÀÊÌÀiiÊ>ÕÌÀÃÊ UÊ vÕÀÊÀÊ ÀiÊ>ÕÌÀÃÊ UÊ À}>â>ÌÊ UÊ Ê>ÕÌÀ first author: last name first

other authors: in normal order

MLA

53b

title (newspaper article)

Farmer, John, John Azzarello, and Miles Kara. “Real Heroes, Fake Stories.” newspaper title

date of publication

page

medium

New York Times 14 Sept. 2008: WK10. Print.

3. Four or more authors Name all the authors or name the first author followed by “et al.” (Latin for “and others”). In an in-text citation, use the same form for the authors’ names as you use in the works cited entry. See item 7 on page 522. first author: last name first

other authors: in normal order

title (book)

Harris, Shon, Allen Harper, Chris Eagle, and Jonathan Ness. Gray Hat Hacking. edition number

city of publication

publisher

date

medium

2nd ed. New York: McGraw, 2007. Print.

4. Organization as author author: organization name, not abbreviated

title (book)

National Wildlife Federation. Rain Check: Conservation Groups Monitor Mercury city of publication

publisher, with common abbreviations

date

Levels in Milwaukee’s Rain. Ann Arbor: Natl. Wildlife Federation, 2001. medium

Print.

For a publication by a government agency, see item 73. Your in-text citation should also treat the organization as the author (see item 8 on p. 522). 5. Unknown author Article or other short work title (newspaper article)

label

newspaper title date of publication page

“Poverty, by Outdated Numbers.” Editorial. Boston Globe 20 Sept. 2008: A16. medium

Print.

533

534

53b title (TV episode)

MLA title (TV program)

Ê`VÕiÌ>Ì\Ê7ÀÃÊVÌi`Ê

producer

city of network station broadcast

date of broadcast

“Heat.” Frontline. Prod. Martin Smith. PBS. KTWU,Topeka. 21 Oct. 2008. medium

Television.

For other examples of an article with no author and a television program, see items 31 and 65, respectively. Book, entire Web site, or other long work title (book)

city of publication

publisher

date

medium

New Concise World Atlas. New York: Oxford UP, 2007. Print. title (Web site)

Women of Protest: Photographs from the Records of the National Woman’s Party. sponsor of site

no date medium

date of access

Lib. of Cong., n.d. Web. 29 Sept. 2008.

Before concluding that the author of an online source is unknown, check carefully (see the tip on p. 520). Also remember that an organization or a government may be the author (see items 4 and 73). 6. Two or more works by the same author If your list of works cited includes two or more works by the same author, first alphabetize the works by title (ignoring the article A, An, or The at the beginning of a title). Use the author’s name for the first entry only; for subsequent entries, use three hyphens followed by a period. The three hyphens must stand for exactly the same name or names as in the first entry. Knopp, Lisa. Field of Vision. Iowa City: U of Iowa P, 1996. Print. ---. The Nature of Home: A Lexicon and Essays. Lincoln: U of Nebraska P, 2002. Print.

Ê>ÕÌÀÊ UÊ ÌÜÊÀÊÀiÊÜÀÃÊLÞÊiÊ >ÕÌÀÊ UÊ LÊ UÊ i`ÌÀÊ UÊ ÌÀ>Ã>ÌÀÊ

MLA

53b

Books (print) Items 7–24 apply to print books. For online books, see items 41 and 42. For an illustrated citation of a print book, see page 536. 7. Basic format for a book author: last name first

book title

city of publication publisher

Sacks, Oliver. Musicophilia: Tales of Music and the Brain. New York: Knopf, date

medium

2007. Print.

Take the information about the book from its title page and copyright page. Use a short form of the publisher’s name; omit terms such as “Press,” “Inc.,” and “Co.” except when naming university presses (“Harvard UP,” for example). If the copyright page lists more than one date, use the most recent one. 8. Book with an author and an editor author: last name first

book title

editor’s name: in normal order

city of publication

Plath, Sylvia. The Unabridged Journals of Sylvia Plath. Ed. Karen V. Kukil. New York: imprint-publisher

date

medium

Anchor-Doubleday, 2000. Print.

The abbreviation “Ed.” means “Edited by,” so it is the same for one or multiple editors. 9. Book with an author and a translator “Trans.” means “Translated by,” so it is the same for one or multiple translators. Scirocco, Alfonso. Garibaldi: Citizen of the World. Trans. Allan Cameron. Princeton: Princeton UP, 2007. Print.

10. Book with an editor Begin with the editor’s name. For one editor, use “ed.” (for “editor”) after the name; for multiple editors, use “eds.” (for “editors”). See the example on page 537.

535

536

53b

MLA


Citation at a glance | Book (MLA) /ÊVÌiÊ>Ê«ÀÌÊLÊÊÊÃÌÞi]ÊVÕìÊÌiÊÊvÜ}Ê iiiÌÃ\

1Ê ÕÌÀ 2Ê Ê/ÌiÊ>`ÊÃÕLÌÌi 3Ê ÌÞÊvÊ«ÕLV>Ì

4 *ÕLÃiÀ 5Ê >ÌiÊvÊÊ«ÕLV>Ì 6 Medium

2

FROM COPYRIGHT PAGE

1 5

3

5

4

WORKS CITED ENTRY FOR A PRINT BOOK 1

2

Wineapple, Brenda. White Heat: The Friendship of Emily Dickinson and 3

4

5

6

Thomas Wentworth Higginson. New York: Knopf, 2008. Print.

ÀÊÀiÊÊVÌ}Ê«ÀÌÊLÃÊÊÊÃÌÞi]ÊÃiiÊ«>}iÃÊ xÎxq{Î°Ê

LÊ UÊ }À>«VÊ>ÀÀ>ÌÛiÊ UÊ «ÃiÕ`ÞÊ UÊ }ÃÊLÊ UÊ >Ì}ÞÊViVÌ®

MLA

53b

Lago, Mary, Linda K. Hughes, and Elizabeth MacLeod Walls, eds. The BBC Talks of E. M. Forster, 1929-1960. Columbia: U of Missouri P, 2008. Print.

11. Graphic narrative or illustrated book For a book that combines text and illustrations, begin your citation with the person you wish to emphasize (writer, illustrator, artist) and list any other contributors after the title of the book. Use the abbreviation “illus.” and other common labels to identify contributors. If the writer and illustrator are the same person, cite the work as you would a book, with no labels. Weaver, Dustin, illus. The Tenth Circle. By Jodi Picoult. New York: Washington Square, 2006. Print. Moore, Alan. V for Vendetta. Illus. David Lloyd. New York: Vertigo-DC Comics, 2008. Print. Thompson, Craig. Blankets. Marietta: Top Shelf, 2005.

12. Book with an author using a pseudonym Give the author’s name as it appears on the title page (the pseudonym), and follow it with the author’s real name in brackets. Dinesen, Isak [Karen Blixen]. Winter’s Tales. 1942. New York: Vintage, 1993. Print.

13. Book in a language other than English If your readers are not familiar with the language of the book, include a translation of the title in brackets. Capitalize the title according to the conventions of the book’s language, and give the original publication information. Nemtsov, Boris, and Vladimir Milov. Putin. Itogi. Nezavisimyi Ekspertnyi Doklad [Putin. The Results: An Independent Expert Report]. Moscow: Novaya Gazeta, 2008. Print.

14. Entire anthology An anthology is a collection of works on a common theme, often with different authors for the selections and usually with an editor for the entire volume. The abbreviation “eds.” is for multiple editors. If the book

537

538

53b

MLA


has only one editor, use the singular “ed.” after the editor’s name. Dumanis, Michael, and Cate Marvin, eds. Legitimate Dangers: American Poets of the New Century. Louisville: Sarabande, 2006. Print.

15. One or more selections from an anthology One selection from anthology author of selection: last name first title of selection

title of anthology

Brouwer, Joel. “The Spots.” Legitimate Dangers: American Poets of the editor(s) of anthology: name(s) in normal order

city of publication

publisher

New Century. Ed. Michael Dumanis and Cate Marvin. Louisville: Sarabande, date

pages of selection medium

2006. 51-52. Print.

The abbreviation “Ed.” means “Edited by,” so it is the same for one or multiple editors. For an illustrated citation of a selection from an anthology, see pages 540–41. If you use two or more works from the same anthology in your paper, provide an entry for the entire anthology (see item 14) and give a shortened entry for each selection. Cross-reference the editor(s) of the anthology and give the page number(s) on which the selection appears. Use the medium only in the entry for the complete anthology. Alphabetize the entries in the list of works cited by authors’ or editors’ last names, as shown here. Two or more selections, with separate anthology entry author of selection

title of selection

editor(s) of anthology: last name(s) only

pages of selection

Brouwer, Joel. “Aesthetics.” Dumanis and Marvin 51-52. editor(s) of anthology

title of anthology

Dumanis, Michael, and Cate Marvin, eds. Legitimate Dangers: American Poets of the city of publication

publisher

date

medium

New Century. Louisville: Sarabande, 2006. Print.

>Ì}ÞÊViVÌ®Ê UÊ i`ÌÊ£ÃÌ]ÊÓ`®Ê UÊ ÛÕiÃÊ UÊiVÞV«i`>Ê UÊ `VÌ>ÀÞ author of selection

title of selection

editor(s) of anthology: last name(s) only

MLA

53b

pages of selection

Keith, Sally. “Orphean Song.” Dumanis and Marvin 195-96.

16. Edition other than the first Include the number of the edition (1st, 2nd, 3rd, and so on). If the book has a translator or an editor in addition to the author, give the name of the translator or editor after the edition number, using the abbreviation “Trans.” for “Translated by” (see item 9) or “Ed.” for “Edited by” (see item 10). Auletta, Ken. The Underclass. 2nd ed. Woodstock: Overlook, 2000. Print.

17. Multivolume work Include the total number of volumes before the city and publisher, using the abbreviation “vols.” If the volumes were published over several years, give the inclusive dates of publication. The abbreviation “Ed.” means “Edited by,” so it is the same for one or multiple editors. author: last name first

title

editor’s name: in normal order

total city of volumes publication

publisher

Stark, Freya. Letters. Ed. Lucy Moorehead. 8 vols. Salisbury: Compton, inclusive dates

medium

1974-82. Print.

If you cite only one of the volumes in your paper, include the volume number before the city and publisher and give the date of publication for that volume. After the date, give the medium of publication followed by the total number of volumes. author: last name first

title

editor: in normal order

volume cited

city of publication

publisher

date of volume

Stark, Freya. Letters. Ed. Lucy Moorehead. Vol. 5. Salisbury: Compton, 1978. total medium volumes

Print. 8 vols.

18. Encyclopedia or dictionary entry List the author of the entry (if there is one), the title of the entry, the title of the reference work, the edition number (if any), the date of the

539

540

53b

MLA


Citation at a glance | Selection from an anthology (MLA) /ÊVÌiÊ>ÊÃiiVÌÊvÀÊ>Ê>Ì}ÞÊÊÊÃÌÞi]ÊVÕìÊÌiÊ ÊvÜ}ÊiiiÌÃ\

1Ê ÕÌÀÊvÊÃiiVÌ 2Ê Ê/ÌiÊvÊÃiiVÌ 3Ê /ÌiÊ>`ÊÃÕLÌÌiÊvÊ

6Ê *ÕLÃiÀ 7Ê >ÌiÊvÊÊ«ÕLV>Ì 8Ê *>}iÊÕLiÀÃÊvÊ

4Ê `ÌÀÃ®ÊvÊ>Ì}Þ 5Ê ÌÞÊvÊ«ÕLV>Ì

9 Medium

>Ì}Þ

ÃiiVÌ

3

FROM COPYRIGHT PAGE

7 4 6

5

MLA

ÃiiVÌÊvÀÊ>Ê>Ì}Þ

53b

FIRST PAGE OF SELECTION

8

2 1

WORKS CITED ENTRY FOR A SELECTION FROM AN ANTHOLOGY 1

2

3

Yamada, Mitsuye. “Guilty on Both Counts.” Asian-American Literature: An 4

5

6

7

8

Anthology. Ed. Shirley Geok-lin Lim. Lincolnwood: NTC, 2000. 151-54. 9

Print.

ÀÊÀiÊÊVÌ}ÊÃiiVÌÃÊvÀÊ>Ì}iÃÊÊÊÃÌÞi]Ê ÃiiÊ«>}iÃÊxÎÇqÎ°

541

542

53b

MLA


edition, and the medium. Volume and page numbers are not necessary because the entries in the source are arranged alphabetically and are therefore easy to locate. Posner, Rebecca. “Romance Languages.” The Encyclopaedia Britannica: Macropaedia. 15th ed. 1987. Print. “Sonata.” The American Heritage Dictionary of the English Language. 4th ed. 2000. Print.

19. Sacred text Give the title of the edition of the sacred text (taken from the title page), italicized; the editor’s or translator’s name (if any); publication information; and the medium. Add the name of the version, if there is one. The Oxford Annotated Bible with the Apocrypha. Ed. Herbert G. May and Bruce M. Metzger. New York: Oxford UP, 1965. Print. Rev. Standard Vers. The Qur’an: Translation. Trans. Abdullah Yusuf Ali. Elmhurst: Tahrike, 2000. Print.

20. Foreword, introduction, preface, or afterword author of foreword: last name first

book part

book title

Bennett, Hal Zina. Foreword. Shimmering Images: A Handy Little Guide to Writing author of book: in normal order

city of publication

imprint-publisher

date

Memoir. By Lisa Dale Norton. New York: Griffin-St. Martin’s, 2008. pages of foreword medium

xiii-xvi. Print.

If the book part has a title, include it in quotation marks immediately after the author’s name and before the label for the book part. Ozick, Cynthia. “Portrait of the Essay as a Warm Body.” Introduction. The Best American Essays 1998. Ed. Ozick. Boston: Houghton, 1998. xv-xxi. Print.

iVÞV«i`>Ê UÊ LiÊ UÊ +ÕÀ½>Ê UÊ «Àiv>ViÊ UÊ ÌÌiÊ ÊÌÌiÊ UÊ ÃiÀiÃÊ UÊ Ài«ÕLÃi`ÊL

MLA

53b

21. Book with a title in its title If the book title contains a title normally italicized, neither italicize the internal title nor place it in quotation marks. Woodson, Jon. A Study of Joseph Heller’s Catch-22: Going Around Twice. New York: Lang, 2001. Print.

If the title within the title is normally put in quotation marks, retain the quotation marks and italicize the entire book title. Millás, Juan José. “Personality Disorders” and Other Stories. Trans. Gregory B. Kaplan. New York: MLA, 2007. Print. MLA Texts and Trans.

22. Book in a series After the publication information, give the medium of publication and then the series name as it appears on the title page, followed by the series number, if any. Douglas, Dan. Assessing Languages for Specific Purposes. Cambridge: Cambridge UP, 2000. Print. Cambridge Applied Linguistics Ser.

23. Republished book After the title of the book, give the original publication date, followed by the current publication information. If the republished book contains new material, such as an introduction or afterword, include information about the new material after the original date. Trilling, Lionel. The Liberal Imagination. 1950. Introd. Louis Menand. New York: New York Review of Books, 2008. Print.

24. Publisher’s imprint If a book was published by an imprint (a division) of a publishing company, give the name of the imprint, a hyphen, and the name of the publisher. Ackroyd, Peter. The Fall of Troy. New York: Talese-Doubleday, 2007. Print.

Articles in periodicals (print) This section shows how to prepare works cited entries for articles in print magazines, journals, and newspapers. See “General guidelines” and “Listing authors” on pages 529 and 532 for how to handle basic parts of the entries. See also “Online

543

544

53b

MLA


sources” on page 548 for articles from Web sites and articles accessed through a library’s database. For articles appearing on consecutive pages, provide the range of pages (see items 25 and 26). When an article does not appear on consecutive pages, give the number of the first page followed by a plus sign: 32+. For dates requiring a month, abbreviate all but May, June, and July. For an illustrated citation of an article in a periodical, see pages 546–47. 25. Article in a journal (paginated by volume or by issue) author: last name first

article title

Blackburn, Robin. “Economic Democracy: Meaningful, Desirable, Feasible?” journal title

volume, issue

year

page range medium

Daedalus 136.3 (2007): 36-45. Print.

26. Article in a monthly magazine author: last name first

article title

magazine title date: month(s) + year

Lanting, Frans. “Life: A Journey through Time.” Audubon Nov.-Dec. 2006: page range medium

48-52. Print.

27. Article in a weekly magazine author: last name first

article title

magazine date: day + title month + year

page range

medium

von Drehle, David. “The Ghosts of Memphis.” Time 7 Apr. 2008: 34-37. Print.

28. Article in a daily newspaper Give the page range of the article. If the article does not appear on consecutive pages, use a plus sign (+) after the first page number. If the city of publication is not obvious from the title of the newspaper, include the city in brackets after the name of the newspaper. If sections are identified by letter, include the section letter as part of the page number. If sections are numbered, include the section number between the date and the page number, using the abbreviation “sec.”: 14 Sept. 2008, sec. 2: 21.

ÕÀ>Ê UÊ >}>âiÊ UÊ iÜÃ«>«iÀÊ UÊ >LÃÌÀ>VÌÊ UÊ ÌÌiÊÊÌÌiÊ UÊ i`ÌÀ>Ê UÊ iÌÌiÀ

53b

MLA

Page number with section letter

Include the section letter as part of the page number. author: last name first

article title

newspaper title

date: day + month + year

McKenna, Phil. “It Takes Just One Village.” New York Times 23 Sept. 2008, name of edition

page medium

New England ed.: D1. Print. Page number with section number

Include the section number immediately after the date, using the abbreviation “sec.” author: last name first

article title

newspaper title

city of publication

Knox, David Blake. “Lord Archer, Storyteller.” Sunday Independent [Dublin] date: inverted

section page medium

14 Sept. 2008, sec. 2: 9. Print.

29. Abstract of a journal article Include the word “Abstract” after the title of the article. Walker, Joyce. “Narratives in the Database: Memorializing September 11th Online.” Abstract. Computers and Composition 24.2 (2007): 121. Print.

30. Article with a title in its title Use single quotation marks around a title or another quoted term that appears in an article title. Italicize a title or term normally italicized. Shen, Min. “ ‘Quite a Moon!’ The Archetypal Feminine in Our Town.” American Drama 16.2 (2007): 1-14. Print.

31. Editorial or other unsigned article Begin with the article title and alphabetize the entry by title in the list of works cited. “Getting the Message: Communicating Electronically with Doctors Can Spur Honesty from Young Patients.” Editorial. Columbus [OH] Dispatch 19 June 2008: 10A. Print.

32. Letter to the editor Morris, David. “Fiercely Proud.” Letter. Progressive Feb. 2008: 6. Print.

545

546

53b

MLA


Citation at a glance | Article in a periodical (MLA) /ÊVÌiÊ>Ê>ÀÌViÊÊ>Ê«ÀÌÊ«iÀ`V>ÊÊÊÃÌÞi]ÊVÕìÊÌiÊ ÊvÜ}ÊiiiÌÃ\

1Ê 2Ê 3Ê 4Ê

ÕÌÀÊvÊ>ÀÌVi Ê ÌiÊ>`ÊÃÕLÌÌiÊvÊ>ÀÌVi / /ÌiÊvÊ«iÀ`V> 6ÕiÊ>`ÊÃÃÕiÊÕLiÀÊ vÀÊÃV>ÀÞÊÕÀ>®

4 3

5Ê >ÌiÊÀÊÞi>ÀÊvÊ Ê«ÕLV>Ì

6Ê *>}iÊÕLiÀÃÊvÊ>ÀÌVi 7 Medium

5

53b

MLA

>ÀÌViÊÊ>Ê«iÀ`V> FIRST PAGE OF ARTICLE

2 1

4

5

3

6

WORKS CITED ENTRY FOR AN ARTICLE IN A PRINT PERIODICAL 1

2

Ruzich, Constance M. “For the Love of Joe: The Language of Starbucks.” 3

4

5

6

7

Journal of Popular Culture 41.3 (2008): 428-42. Print.

ÀÊÀiÊÊVÌ}Ê«ÀÌÊ«iÀ`V>Ê>ÀÌViÃÊÊÊÃÌÞi]ÊÃiiÊ «>}iÃÊx{Îq{n°Ê

547

548

53b

MLA


33. Book or film review Name the reviewer and the title of the review, if any, followed by “Rev. of” and the title and author or director of the work reviewed. Add the publication information for the periodical in which the review appears. If the review has no author and no title, begin with “Rev. of” and alphabetize the entry by the first principal word in the title of the work reviewed. Dodge, Chris. Rev. of The Radical Jack London: Writings on War and Revolution, ed. Jonah Raskni. Utne Reader Sept.-Oct. 2008: 35. Print. Lane, Anthony. “Dream On.” Rev. of The Science of Sleep and Renaissance, dir. Michel Gondry. New Yorker 25 Sept. 2006: 155-57. Print.

Online sources MLA guidelines assume that readers can locate most online sources by entering the author, title, or other identifying information in a search engine or a database. Consequently, the MLA Handbook does not require a Web address (URL) in citations for online sources. Some instructors may require a URL; for an example, see the note at the end of item 34. MLA style calls for a sponsor or a publisher for most online sources. If a source has no sponsor or publisher, use the abbreviation “N.p.” (for “No publisher”) in the sponsor position. If there is no date of publication or update, use “n.d.” (for “no date”) after the sponsor. For an article in an online journal or an article from a database, give page numbers if they are available; if they are not, use the abbreviation “n. pag.” (See item 37.) 34. Entire Web site Web site with author author: last name first

title of Web site

sponsor of site (personal page)

update medium

Peterson, Susan Lynn. The Life of Martin Luther. Susan Lynn Peterson, 2005. Web. date of access: inverted

24 Jan. 2009.

ÀiÛiÜÊ UÊ 7iLÊÃÌiÊ UÊ ÃÀÌÊÜÀÊvÀÊ7iLÊÃÌi

MLA

53b

Web site with organization (group) as author organization name: not abbreviated

title of Web site

sponsor: abbreviated

American Library Association. American Library Association. ALA, update medium

date of access: inverted

2008. Web. 14 Jan. 2009. Web site with no author title of Web site

sponsor of site

update

medium

Margaret Sanger Papers Project. History Dept., New York U, 18 Oct. 2000. Web. date of access: inverted

6 Jan. 2009. Web site with editor

See item 10 (p. 535) for listing the name(s) of editor(s). Halsall, Paul, ed. Internet Modern History Sourcebook. Fordham U, 22 Sept. 2001. Web. 19 Jan. 2009. Web site with no title

Use the label “Home page” or another appropriate description in place of a title. Yoon, Mina. Home page. Oak Ridge Natl. Laboratory, 28 Dec. 2006. Web. 12 Jan. 2009. NOTE: If your instructor requires a URL for Web sources, include

the URL, enclosed in angle brackets, at the end of the entry. When a URL in a works cited entry must be divided at the end of a line, break it after a slash. Do not insert a hyphen. Peterson, Susan Lynn. The Life of Martin Luther. Susan Lynn Peterson, 2005. Web. 24 Jan. 2009. .

35. Short work from a Web site Short works include articles, poems, and other documents that are not book length or that appear as internal pages on a Web site. For an illustrated citation of a short work from a Web site, see page 550.

549

53b

550

MLA


Citation at a glance | Short work from a Web site (MLA) /ÊVÌiÊ>ÊÃÀÌÊÜÀÊvÀÊ>Ê7iLÊÃÌiÊÊÊÃÌÞi]ÊVÕìÊÌiÊ ÊvÜ}ÊiiiÌÃ\

1Ê ÕÌÀÊvÊÃÀÌÊÜÀÊ vÊ>Þ® 2Ê Ê/ÌiÊvÊÃÀÌÊÜÀ 3Ê /ÌiÊvÊ7iLÊÃÌi 4Ê -«ÃÀÊvÊ7iLÊÃÌiÊ º °«°»ÊvÊi®

5Ê 1«`>ÌiÊ`>ÌiÊº°`°»ÊvÊ i®

6 Medium 7Ê >ÌiÊvÊ>VViÃÃÊ

INTERNAL PAGE OF WEB SITE

3

2

FOOTER ON HOME PAGE

5

4

ÃÀÌÊÜÀÊvÀÊ7iLÊÃÌiÊ UÊ «ÃiÕ`ÞÊ

53b

MLA

WORKS CITED ENTRY FOR A SHORT WORK FROM A WEB SITE 2

3

“Overview of American Whaling.” New Bedford Whaling Museum. Old 4

5

6

Dartmouth Hist. Soc./New Bedford Whaling Museum, 2006. Web. 7

27 Oct. 2008.

ÀÊÀiÊÊVÌ}ÊÃÕÀViÃÊvÀÊ7iLÊÃÌiÃÊÊÊÃÌÞi]ÊÃiiÊ «>}iÃÊx{nq{Ê>`Êxx£qxn°

Short work with author author: last name first

title of short work

title of Web site

sponsor

no update date

Shiva, Vandana. “Bioethics: A Third World Issue.” NativeWeb. NativeWeb, n.d. medium


Web. 22 Jan. 2007. Short work with no author title of short work

title of Web site

sponsor of site

update

medium


“Sister Aimee.” American Experience. PBS Online, 2 Apr. 2007. Web. 30 Oct. 2008.

36. Web site with an author using a pseudonym Begin the entry with the pseudonym and add the author’s or creator’s real name, if known, in brackets. Follow with the information required for a Web site or a short work from a Web site (see item 34 or 35). Grammar Girl [Mignon Fogarty]. “What Is the Plural of ‘Mouse’?” Grammar Girl: Quick and Dirty Tips for Better Writing. Holtzbrinck, 16 Sept. 2008. Web. 10 Nov. 2008.

551

552

53b

MLA


Citation at a glance | Article from a database (MLA) /ÊVÌiÊ>Ê>ÀÌViÊvÀÊ>Ê`>Ì>L>ÃiÊÊÊÃÌÞi]ÊVÕìÊÌiÊ ÊvÜ}ÊiiiÌÃ\

1Ê 2Ê 3Ê 4Ê

ÕÌÀÊvÊ>ÀÌVi Ê ÌiÊvÊ>ÀÌVi / /ÌiÊvÊ«iÀ`V> 6ÕiÊ>`ÊÃÃÕiÊÕLiÀÃÊ vÀÊÃV>ÀÞÊÕÀ>® 5Ê >ÌiÊÀÊÞi>ÀÊvÊÊ«ÕLV>Ì

6Ê *>}iÊÕLiÀÃÊvÊ>ÀÌViÊ º°Ê«>}°»ÊvÊÌiÀiÊ>ÀiÊ i® 7Ê >iÊvÊ`>Ì>L>Ãi 8 Medium 9Ê >ÌiÊvÊ>VViÃÃ

7

2

1

3

5

4

6

WORKS CITED ENTRY FOR AN ARTICLE FROM A DATABASE 1

2

Kranz, David L. “Tracking the Sounds of Franco Zeffirelli’s The Taming of 3

4

5

6

7

the Shrew.” Literature-Film Quarterly 36.2 (2008): 94-112. Academic 8

9

OneFile. Web. 28 Oct. 2008.

ÀÊÀiÊÊVÌ}Ê>ÀÌViÃÊvÀÊ>Ê`>Ì>L>ÃiÊÊÊÃÌÞi]ÊÃiiÊ «>}iÃÊxxÎqx{°

iÊÃÕÀViÃÊ UÊ ÕÀ>Ê>ÀÌViÊ UÊ >}>âiÊ >ÀÌViÊ UÊ iÜÃ«>«iÀÊ>ÀÌViÊ UÊ >ÀÌViÊÊ`>Ì>L>Ãi

MLA

53b

37. Article in an online scholarly journal author: last name first

article title

Mason, John Edwin. “‘Mannenberg’: Notes on the Making of an Icon and Anthem.” journal title

volume, issue year

not date of access: paginated medium inverted

African Studies Quarterly 9.4 (2007): n. pag. Web. 23 Sept. 2008.

38. Article in an online magazine Give the author; the title of the article, in quotation marks; the title of the magazine, italicized; the sponsor or publisher of the site (use “N.p.” if there is none); the date of publication; the medium; and your date of access. Burton, Robert. “The Certainty Epidemic.” Salon.com. Salon Media Group, 29 Feb. 2008. Web. 18 Jan. 2009.

39. Article in an online newspaper Give the author, the title of the article, in quotation marks; the title of the newspaper, italicized; the sponsor or publisher of the site (use “N.p.” if there is none); the date of publication; the medium; and your date of access. Smith, Andrew D. “Poll: More than 70% of US Workers Use Internet on the Job.” Dallasnews.com. Dallas Morning News, 25 Sept. 2008. Web. 29 Sept. 2008.

40. Work from a database For a source retrieved from a library’s subscription database, first list the publication information for the source (see items 25–33) and then provide information about the database. For an illustrated citation of an article from a database, see page 552. author of source: last name first

title of article

journal title

volume, issue year

page numbers

Heyen, William. “Sunlight.” American Poetry Review 36.2 (2007): 55-56. Expanded database name

medium


Academic ASAP. Web. 24 Sept. 2008. Barrera, Rebeca María. “A Case for Bilingual Education.” Scholastic Parent and Child Nov.-Dec. 2004: 72-73. Academic Search Premier. Web. 1 Feb. 2009.

553

554

53b

MLA


Williams, Jeffrey J. “Why Today’s Publishing World Is Reprising the Past.” Chronicle of Higher Education 13 June 2008: 8+. LexisNexis Academic. Web. 29 Sept. 2008.

41. Online book-length work Cite a book or a book-length work, such as a play or a long poem, as you would a short work from a Web site (see item 35), but italicize the title of the work. author: last name first

title of long poem

title of Web site

sponsor of site

update

Milton, John. Paradise Lost: Book I. Poetryfoundation.org. Poetry Foundation, 2008. medium


Web. 14 Dec. 2008.

Give the print publication information for the work, if available (see items 7–24), followed by the title of the Web site, the medium, and your date of access. author: last name first

book title

Jacobs, Harriet A. Incidents in the Life of a Slave Girl: Written by Herself. Ed. editor of city of original book publication year

title of Web site

medium

L. Maria Child. Boston, 1861. Documenting the American South. Web. date of access: inverted

3 Feb. 2009.

42. Part of an online book Begin as for a part of a print book (see item 20 on p. 542). If the online book part has no page numbers, use “N. pag.” following the publication information. End with the Web site on which the work is found, the medium, and your date of access. Adams, Henry. “Diplomacy.” The Education of Henry Adams. Boston: Houghton, 1918. N. pag. Bartleby.com: Great Books Online. Web. 8 Jan. 2009.

43. Digital archives Digital archives are online collections of documents or records — books, letters, photographs, data — that

iÊÃÕÀViÃÊ UÊ LÊ UÊ «>ÀÌÊvÊLÊ UÊ `}Ì>Ê>ÀVÛiÃÊ UÊ iVÞV«i`>Ê UÊ «iÊ UÊ L}Ê

MLA

53b

have been converted to digital form. Cite publication information for the original document, if it is available, using the models throughout section 53b. Then give the location of the document, if any, neither italicized nor in quotation marks; the name of the archive, italicized; the medium (“Web”); and your date of access. Fiore, Mark. Shockwaves. 18 Oct. 2001. September 11 Digital Archive. Web. 3 Apr. 2009. Oblinger, Maggie. Letter to Charlie Thomas. 31 Mar. 1895. Nebraska State Hist. Soc. Prairie Settlement: Nebraska Photographs and Family Letters, 1862-1912. Web. 3 Apr. 2009. WPA Household Census for 1047 W. 50th Street, Los Angeles County. 1939. USC Lib. Spec. Collections. USC Libraries Digital Archive. Web. 12 Mar. 2009.

44. Entry in an online reference work Give the title of the entry, in quotation marks; the title of the site; the sponsor and update date (use “n.d.” if there is none); the medium; and your date of access. “Native American Church.” Britannica. Encyclopaedia Britannica, 2008. Web. 29 Jan. 2009.

45. Online poem Cite as you would a short work from a Web site and an online book-length work (you may need to combine elements from items 35 and 42). Bell, Acton [Anne Brontë]. “Mementos.” Poems by Currer, Ellis, and Acton Bell. London, 1846. N. pag. A Celebration of Women Writers. Web. 18 Sept. 2008.

46. Entire Weblog (blog) Cite a blog as you would an entire Web site (see item 34). Gristmill. Grist Magazine, 2008. Web. 19 Jan. 2009.

47. Entry or comment in a Weblog (blog) Cite an entry or a comment (a response to an entry) in a blog as you would a short work from a Web site (see item 35). If the comment or

555

556

53b

MLA


entry has no title, use the label “Weblog entry” or “Weblog comment.” Follow with the remaining information as for an entire blog in item 46. “Social Media: Facebook and MySpace as University Curricula.” Open Education. Open Education.net, n.d. Web. 19 Sept. 2008. Cindy. Weblog comment. Open Education. Open Education.net, 5 Sept. 2008. Web. 14 Aug. 2009.

48. Academic course or department home page Cite as a short work from a Web site (see item 35). For a course home page, begin with the name of the instructor and the title of the course or title of the page (use “Course home page” if there is no other title). For a department home page, begin with the name of the department and the label “Dept. home page.” Marrone, Carole. “355:301: College Writing and Research.” Rutgers. Rutgers U, 2008. Web. 19 Sept. 2008. Comparative Media Studies. Dept. home page. Massachusetts Institute of Technology. MIT, 2006. Web. 6 Oct. 2009.

49. Online video clip Cite as you would a short work from a Web site (see item 34). author: last name first

video title

title of Web site

sponsor

update

Murphy, Beth. “Tips for a Good Profile Piece.” YouTube. YouTube, 7 Sept. 2008. medium


Web. 19 Apr. 2009.

50. Online abstract Cite as you would an abstract of a journal article (see item 29), giving whatever print information is available, followed by the medium and your date of access. If you found the abstract in an online periodical database, include the name of the database after the print publication information (see item 40).

iÊÃÕÀViÃÊ UÊ VÕÀÃiÊ«>}iÊ UÊ ÛìÊV«Ê UÊ >LÃÌÀ>VÌÊ UÊ i`ÌÀ>Ê UÊ ÀiÛiÜÊ UÊ i>Ê UÊ «ÃÌ}Ê

MLA

53b

Turner, Fred. “Romantic Automatism: Art, Technology, and Collaborative Labor in Cold War America.” Abstract. Journal of Visual Culture 7.1 (2008): 5. Web. 25 Oct. 2008.

51. Online editorial or letter to the editor Cite as you would an editorial or a letter to the editor in a print publication (see item 31 or 32), adding information for a short work from a Web site (see item 35). “Compromise Is Key with Religion at Work.” Editorial. StarTribune.com. Star Tribune, 18 June 2008. Web. 25 June 2008.

52. Online review Begin the entry as you would for a review in a magazine or newspaper (see item 33). If the review is published in print as well as online, add publication information as for an article in a periodical (see items 25–28), the Web site on which the review appears, the medium, and your date of access. If the review is published only on the Web, add information as for a short work from a Web site (see item 35). If you found the review in a database, cite as in item 40. Greer, W. R. “Who’s the Fairest One of All?” Rev. of Mirror, Mirror, by Gregory Maguire. Reviewsofbooks.com. Reviewsofbooks.com, 2003. Web. 26 Oct. 2008.

53. E-mail message Begin with the writer’s name and the subject line. Then write “Message to” followed by the name of the recipient. End with the date of the message and the medium (“E-mail”). Lowe, Walter. “Review Questions.” Message to the author. 15 Mar. 2009. E-mail.

54. Posting to an online discussion list When possible, cite archived versions of postings. If you cannot locate an archived version, keep a copy of the posting for your records. Begin with the author’s name, followed by the title or subject line, in quotation marks (use the label “Online posting” if the

557

558

53b

MLA


posting has no title). Then proceed as for a short work from a Web site (see item 35). Fainton, Peter. “Re: Backlash against New Labour.” Media Lens Message Board. Media Lens, 7 May 2008. Web. 2 June 2008.

55. Entry in a wiki A wiki is an online reference that is openly edited by its users. Treat an entry in a wiki as you would a short work from a Web site (see item 35). Because wiki content is, by definition, collectively edited and can be updated frequently, do not include an author. Give the title of the entry; the name of the wiki, italicized; the sponsor or publisher of the wiki (use “N.p.” if there is none); the date of the last update; the medium; and your date of access. “Hip Hop Music.” Wikipedia. Wikimedia Foundation, 26 Sept. 2008. Web. 18 Mar. 2009. “Negation in Languages.” UniLang.org. UniLang, 25 Oct. 2004. Web. 9 June 2009.

Audio and visual sources (including online versions) 56. Digital file A digital file is any document or image that exists in digital form, independent of a Web site. To cite a digital file, begin with information required for the source (such as a photograph, a report, a sound recording, or a radio program), following the guidelines throughout 53b. Then for the medium, indicate the type of file: “JPEG file,” “PDF file,” “MP3 file,” and so on. photographer

photograph title

date of composition

location of photograph

Hine, Lewis W. Girl in Cherryville Mill. 1908. Prints and Photographs Div., Lib. of medium: file type

Cong. JPEG file. “Scenes from a Recession.” This American Life. Narr. Ira Glass. NPR, 30 Mar. 2009. MP3 file.

«ÃÌ}Ê UÊ ÜÊ UÊ `}Ì>ÊwiÊ UÊ «`V>ÃÌÊ UÊ ÕÃV>ÊÃVÀiÊ UÊ ÃÕ`ÊÀiVÀ`}

MLA

53b

National Institute of Mental Health. What Rescue Workers Can Do. Washington: US Dept. of Health and Human Services, 2006. PDF file.

57. Podcast If you view or listen to a podcast online, cite it as you would a short work from a Web site (see item 35). If you download the podcast and view or listen to it on a computer or portable player, cite it as a digital file (see item 56). Podcast online

“Calculating the Demand for Charter Schools.” Narr. David Guenthner. Texas PolicyCast. Texas Public Policy Foundation, 28 Aug. 2008. Web. 10 Jan. 2009. Podcast downloaded as digital file

“Calculating the Demand for Charter Schools.” Narr. David Guenthner. Texas PolicyCast. Texas Public Policy Foundation, 28 Aug. 2008. MP3 file.

58. Musical score For both print and online versions, begin with the composer’s name; the title of the work, italicized (unless it is named by form, number, and key); and the date of composition. For a print source, give the place of publication; the name of the publisher and date of publication; and the medium. For an online source, give the title of the Web site; the publisher or sponsor of the site; the date of Web publication; the medium; and your date of access. Handel, G. F. Messiah: An Oratorio. N.d. CCARH Publications: Scores and Parts. Center for Computer Assisted Research in the Humanities, 2003. Web. 5 Jan. 2009.

59. Sound recording Begin with the name of the person you want to emphasize: the composer, conductor (“Cond.”), or performer (“Perf.”). For a long work, give the title, italicized (unless it is named by form, number, and key); the names of pertinent artists (such as performers, readers, or musicians); and the orchestra and conductor, if relevant. End with the manufacturer, the date, and the medium (“CD,” “Audiocassette”). Bizet, Georges. Carmen. Perf. Jennifer Laramore, Thomas Moser, Angela Gheorghiu, and Samuel Ramey. Bavarian State Orch. and Chorus. Cond. Giuseppe Sinopoli. Warner, 1996. CD.

559

560

53b

MLA


For a song, put the title in quotation marks. If you include the name of the album or CD, italicize it. Blige, Mary J. “Be without You.” The Breakthrough. Geffen, 2005. CD.

60. Film Begin with the title, italicized. Then give the director and the lead actors (“Perf.”) or narrator (“Narr.”); the distributor; the year of the film’s release; and the medium (“Film,” “Videocassette”). If your paper emphasizes a person or category of people involved with the film, you may begin with those names and titles (see item 61). movie title

director

major performers

Frozen River. Dir. Courtney Hunt. Perf. Melissa Leo, Charlie McDermott, and Misty release distributor date medium

Upham. Sony, 2008. Film.

61. DVD For a film on DVD, cite as you would a film (see item 60), giving “DVD” as the medium. Forster, Marc, dir. Finding Neverland. Perf. Johnny Depp, Kate Winslet, Julie Christie, Radha Mitchell, and Dustin Hoffman. Miramax, 2004. DVD.

For any other work on DVD, such as an educational work or a game, cite as you would a film, giving whatever information is available about the author, director, distributor, and so on. Across the Drafts: Students and Teachers Talk about Feedback. Harvard Expository Writing Program, 2005. DVD.

62. Special feature on a DVD Begin with the title of the feature, in quotation marks, and the names of any important contributors, as for films or DVDs (item 60 or 61). End with information about the DVD, as in item 61. “Sweeney’s London.” Prod. Eric Young. Sweeney Todd: The Demon Barber of Fleet Street. Dir. Tim Burton. DreamWorks, 2007. DVD. Disc 2.

wÊ UÊ 6 Ê UÊ Ê UÊ ÃvÌÜ>ÀiÊ UÊ ÛìÊ}>iÊ UÊ À>`ÊÀÊ/6Ê«À}À>Ê UÊ ÌiÀÛiÜ

MLA

53b

63. CD-ROM Treat a CD-ROM as you would any other source, but add the medium (“CD-ROM”). “Pimpernel.” The American Heritage Dictionary of the English Language. 4th ed. Boston: Houghton, 2000. CD-ROM.

64. Computer software or video game List the developer or author of the software (if any); the title, italicized; the distributor and date of publication; and the platform or medium. Firaxis Games. Sid Meier’s Civilization Revolution. Take-Two Interactive, 2008. Xbox 360.

65. Radio or television program Begin with the title of the radio segment or television episode (if there is one), in quotation marks. Then give the title of the program or series, italicized; relevant information about the program, such as the writer (“By”), director (“Dir.”), performers (“Perf.”), or narrator (“Narr.”); the network; the local station (if any) and location; the date of broadcast; and the medium (“Television,” “Radio”). For a program you accessed online, after the information about the program give the network, the original broadcast date, the title of the Web site, the medium (“Web”), and your date of access. “Machines of the Gods.” Ancient Discoveries. History Channel. 14 Oct. 2008. Television. “Elif Shafak: Writing under a Watchful Eye.” Fresh Air. Narr. Terry Gross. Natl. Public Radio, 6 Feb. 2007. NPR.org. Web. 22 Feb. 2009.

66. Radio or television interview Begin with the name of the person who was interviewed, followed by the word “Interview” and the interviewer’s name, if relevant. End with information about the program as in item 65. De Niro, Robert, Barry Levinson, and Art Linson. Interview by Charlie Rose. Charlie Rose. PBS. WGBH, Boston, 13 Oct. 2008. Television.

561

562

53b

MLA


67. Live performance For a live performance of a concert, a play, a ballet, or an opera, begin with the title of the work performed, italicized. Then give the author or composer of the work (“By”); relevant information such as the director (“Dir.”), the choreographer (“Chor.”), the conductor (“Cond.”), or the major performers (“Perf.”); the theater, ballet, or opera company, if any; the theater and location; the date of the performance; and the label “Performance.” The Brothers Size. By Tarell Alvin McCraney. Dir. Bijan Sheibani. Young Vic Theatre, London. 15 Oct. 2008. Performance. Symphony no. 4 in G. By Gustav Mahler. Cond. Mark Wigglesworth. Perf. Juliane Banse and Boston Symphony Orch. Symphony Hall, Boston. 17 Apr. 2009. Performance.

68. Lecture or public address Begin with the speaker’s name, followed by the title of the lecture (if any), in quotation marks; the organization sponsoring the lecture; the location; the date; and a label such as “Lecture” or “Address.” Wellbery, David E. “On a Sentence of Franz Kafka.” Franke Inst. for the Humanities. Gleacher Center, Chicago. 1 Feb. 2006. Lecture.

69. Work of art Cite the artist’s name; the title of the artwork, italicized; the date of composition; the medium of composition (for instance, “Lithograph on paper,” “Photograph,” “Charcoal on paper”); and the institution and city in which the artwork is located. For artworks found online, omit the medium of composition and include the title of the Web site, the medium (“Web”), and your date of access. Constable, John. Dedham Vale. 1802. Oil on canvas. Victoria and Albert Museum, London. Hessing, Valjean. Caddo Myth. 1976. Joslyn Art Museum, Omaha. Joslyn Art Museum. Web. 19 Apr. 2009.

70. Cartoon Give the cartoonist’s name; the title of the cartoon, if it has one, in quotation marks; the label “Cartoon”

«iÀvÀ>ViÊ UÊ iVÌÕÀiÊ UÊ >ÀÌÜÀÊ UÊ V>ÀÌÊ UÊ >`Ê UÊ >«Ê UÊ V>ÀÌÊ UÊ }ÛiÀiÌÊ`VÕiÌ

MLA

53b

or “Comic strip”; publication information; and the medium. To cite an online cartoon, instead of publication information give the title of the Web site, the sponsor or publisher, the medium, and your date of access. Keefe, Mike. “Content of Character.” Cartoon. Denverpost.com. Denver Post, 28 Aug. 2008. Web. 12 Dec. 2008.

71. Advertisement Name the product or company being advertised, followed by the word “Advertisement.” Give publication information for the source in which the advertisement appears. Truth by Calvin Klein. Advertisement. Vogue Dec. 2000: 95-98. Print. Arbella Insurance. Advertisement. Boston.com. NY Times, n.d. Web. 3 June 2008.

72. Map or chart Cite a map or a chart as you would a book or a short work within a longer work. Use the word “Map” or “Chart” following the title. Add the medium and, for an online source, the sponsor or publisher and the date of access. Joseph, Lori, and Bob Laird. “Driving While Phoning Is Dangerous.” Chart. USA Today 16 Feb. 2001: 1A. Print. “Serbia.” Map. Syrena Maps. Syrena, 2 Feb. 2001. Web. 17 Mar. 2009.

Other sources (including online versions) This section includes a variety of sources not covered elsewhere. For online sources, consult the appropriate model in this section and also see items 34–55. 73. Government document Treat the government agency as the author, giving the name of the government followed by the name of the department and the agency, if any. For print sources, add the medium at the end of the entry. For online sources, follow the model for an entire Web site (item 34) or a short work from a Web site (item 35).

563

564

53b

MLA

government

Ê`VÕiÌ>Ì\Ê7ÀÃÊVÌi`Ê department

agency

United States. Dept. of the Interior. Office of Inspector General. ”Excessive document title

Indulgences: Personal Use of the Internet at the Department of the Interior.” Web site title

publisher/sponsor

publication date medium

Office of Inspector General. Dept. of the Interior, Sept. 1999. Web. date of access: inverted

20 May 2009. Canada. Minister of Indian Affairs and Northern Dev. Gathering Strength: Canada’s Aboriginal Action Plan. Ottawa: Minister of Public Works and Govt. Services Can., 2000. Print.

74. Historical document To cite a historical document, such as the US Constitution or the Canadian Charter of Rights and Freedoms, begin with the document author, if it has one, and then give the document title, neither italicized nor in quotation marks, and the document date. For a print version, continue as for a selection in an anthology (see item 15) or for a book (with the title not italicized). For an online version, cite as a short work from a Web site (see item 35). Jefferson, Thomas. First Inaugural Address. 1801. The American Reader. Ed. Diane Ravitch. New York: Harper, 1990. 42-44. Print. The Virginia Declaration of Rights. 1776. A Chronology of US Historical Documents. U of Oklahoma Coll. of Law, 2008. Web. 23 Feb. 2009.

75. Legal source Legislative act (law)

Begin with the name of the act, neither italicized nor in quotation marks. Then provide the act’s Public Law number; its Statutes at Large volume and page numbers; its date of enactment; and the medium of publication.

}ÛiÀiÌÊ`VÕiÌÊ UÊ ÃÌÀV>Ê`VÕiÌÊ UÊ i}>Ê UÊ LÀVÕÀiÊ UÊ `ÃÃiÀÌ>Ì

MLA

53b

Electronic Freedom of Information Act Amendments of 1996. Pub. L. 104-231. 110 Stat. 3048. 2 Oct. 1996. Print. Court case

Name the first plaintiff and the first defendant. Then give the volume, name, and page number of the law report; the court name; the year of the decision; and publication information. Do not italicize the name of the case. (In the text of the paper, the name of the case is italicized; see item 19 on p. 526.) Utah v. Evans. 536 US 452. Supreme Court of the US. 2002. Supreme Court Collection. Legal Information Inst., Cornell U Law School, n.d. Web. 30 Apr. 2008.

76. Pamphlet or brochure 7–24).

Cite as you would a book (see items

Commonwealth of Massachusetts. Dept. of Jury Commissioner. A Few Facts about Jury Duty. Boston: Commonwealth of Massachusetts, 2004. Print.

77. Unpublished dissertation Begin with the author’s name, followed by the dissertation title in quotation marks; the abbreviation “Diss.”; the name of the institution; the year the dissertation was accepted; and the medium of the dissertation. Jackson, Shelley. “Writing Whiteness: Contemporary Southern Literature in Black and White.” Diss. U of Maryland, 2000. Print.

78. Published dissertation For dissertations that have been published in book form, italicize the title. After the title and before the book’s publication information, give the abbreviation “Diss.,” the name of the institution, and the year the dissertation was accepted. Add the medium of publication at the end. Damberg, Cheryl L. Healthcare Reform: Distributional Consequences of an Employer Mandate for Workers in Small Firms. Diss. Rand Graduate School, 1995. Santa Monica: Rand, 1996. Print.

565

566

53b

MLA


79. Abstract of a dissertation Cite an abstract as you would an unpublished dissertation. After the dissertation date, give the abbreviation DA or DAI (for Dissertation Abstracts or Dissertation Abstracts International), followed by the volume and issue numbers; the year of publication; inclusive page numbers or, if the abstract is not numbered, the item number; and the medium of publication. For an abstract accessed in an online database, give the item number in place of the page number, followed by the name of the database, the medium, and your date of access. Chen, Shu-Ling. “Mothers and Daughters in Morrison, Tan, Marshall, and Kincaid.” Diss. U of Washington, 2000. DAI 61.6 (2000): ATT9975963. ProQuest Dissertations and Theses. Web. 22 Feb. 2009.

80. Published proceedings of a conference Cite as you would a book, adding the name, date, and location of the conference after the title. Urgo, Joseph R., and Ann J. Abadie, eds. Faulkner and Material Culture. Proc. of Faulkner and Yoknapatawpha Conf., 25-29 July 2004, U of Mississippi. Jackson: UP of Mississippi, 2007. Print.

81. Paper in conference proceedings Cite as you would a selection in an anthology (see item 15), giving information about the conference after the title and editors of the conference proceedings (see item 80). Henninger, Katherine R. “Faulkner, Photography, and a Regional Ethics of Form.” Faulkner and Material Culture. Ed. Joseph R. Urgo and Ann J. Abadie. Proc. of Faulkner and Yoknapatawpha Conf., 25-29 July 2004, U of Mississippi. Jackson: UP of Mississippi, 2007. 121-38. Print.

82. Published interview Name the person interviewed, followed by the title of the interview (if there is one). If the interview does not have a title, include the word “Interview” after

`ÃÃiÀÌ>ÌÊ>LÃÌÀ>VÌÊ UÊ VviÀiViÊ «ÀVii`}ÃÊ UÊ ÌiÀÛiÜÊ UÊ iÌÌiÀÊ UÊ >ÕÃVÀ«Ì

MLA

53b

the interviewee’s name. Give publication information for the work in which the interview was published. Armstrong, Lance. “Lance in France.” Sports Illustrated 28 June 2004: 46+. Print.

If the name of the interviewer is relevant, include it after the name of the interviewee. Prince. Interview by Bilge Ebiri. Yahoo! Internet Life 7.6 (2001): 82-85. Print.

83. Personal interview To cite an interview that you conducted, begin with the name of the person interviewed. Then write “Personal interview” or “Telephone interview,” followed by the date of the interview. Akufo, Dautey. Personal interview. 11 Apr. 2009.

84. Personal letter To cite a letter that you received, begin with the writer’s name and add the phrase “Letter to the author,” followed by the date. Add the medium (“MS” for “manuscript,” or a handwritten letter; “TS” for “typescript,” or a typed letter). Primak, Shoshana. Letter to the author. 6 May 2009. TS.

85. Published letter Begin with the writer of the letter, the words “Letter to” and the recipient, and the date of the letter (use “N.d.” if the letter is undated). Then add the title of the collection and proceed as for a selection in an anthology (see item 15). Wharton, Edith. Letter to Henry James. 28 Feb. 1915. Henry James and Edith Wharton: Letters, 1900-1915. Ed. Lyall H. Powers. New York: Scribner’s, 1990. 323-26. Print.

86. Manuscript Give the author, a title or a description of the manuscript, and the date of composition, followed by

567

568

53c

MLA

MLA documentation

the abbreviation “MS” for “manuscript” (handwritten) or “TS” for “typescript.” Add the name and location of the institution housing the material. For a manuscript found online, give the preceding information but omit “MS” or “TS.” Then list the title of the Web site, the medium (“Web”), and your date of access. Arendt, Hannah. Between Past and Present. N.d. 1st draft. Hannah Arendt Papers. MS Div., Lib. of Cong. Manuscript Division, Library of Congress. Web. 24 Apr. 2009. hackerhandbooks.com/bedhandbook > Research exercises > MLA > E-ex 53–4 to 53–8

53c MLA information notes (optional) Researchers who use the MLA system of parenthetical documentation may also use information notes for one of two purposes: 1. to provide additional material that is important but might interrupt the flow of the paper 2. to refer to several sources or to provide comments on sources Information notes may be either footnotes or endnotes. Footnotes appear at the foot of the page; endnotes appear on a separate page at the end of the paper, just before the list of works cited. For either style, the notes are numbered consecutively throughout the paper. The text of the paper contains a raised arabic numeral that corresponds to the number of the note. TEXT

In the past several years, employees have filed a number of lawsuits against employers because of online monitoring practices.1

vÀ>ÌÊÌiÃÊ UÊ vÀ>ÌÌ}Ê>Ê«>«iÀ

MLA

54a

NOTE

1. For a discussion of federal law applicable to electronic surveillance in the workplace, see Kesan 293.

54

MLA manuscript format; student research process and sample paper

The following guidelines are consistent with advice given in the MLA Handbook for Writers of Research Papers, 7th ed. (New York: MLA, 2009), and with typical requirements for student papers. For a sample MLA paper, see pages 583–88.

54a MLA manuscript format Formatting the paper Papers written in MLA style should be formatted as follows. Materials and font Use good-quality 8½” × 11” white paper. Avoid a font that is unusual or hard to read. Title and identification MLA does not require a title page. On the first page of your paper, place your name, your instructor’s name, the course title, and the date on separate lines against the left margin. Then center your title. (See p. 583 for a sample first page.) If your instructor requires a title page, ask for formatting guidelines. A format similar to the one on page 674 may be acceptable. Pagination Put the page number preceded by your last name in the upper right corner of each page, one-half inch below the top edge. Use arabic numerals (1, 2, 3, and so on).

569

570

54a

MLA

Ê>ÕÃVÀ«ÌÊvÀ>Ì

Margins, line spacing, and paragraph indents Leave margins of one inch on all sides of the page. Left-align the text. Double-space throughout the paper. Do not add extra space above or below the title of the paper or between paragraphs. Indent the first line of each paragraph one-half inch from the left margin. Capitalization and italics In titles of works, capitalize all words except articles (a, an, the), prepositions (to, from, between, and so on), coordinating conjunctions (and, but, or, nor, for, so, yet), and the to in infinitives — unless they are the first or last word of the title or subtitle. Follow these guidelines in your paper even if the title appears in all capital or all lowercase letters in the source. In the text of an MLA paper, when a complete sentence follows a colon, lowercase the first word following the colon unless the sentence is a well-known expression or principle. Italicize the titles of books and other long works, such as Web sites. Use quotation marks around the titles of periodical articles, short stories, poems, and other short works. (Some instructors may prefer underlining for the titles of long works. Be consistent throughout your paper.) Long quotations When a quotation is longer than four typed lines of prose or three lines of verse, set it off from the text by indenting the entire quotation one inch from the left margin. Double-space the indented quotation, and do not add extra space above or below it. Quotation marks are not needed when a quotation has been set off from the text by indenting. See page 584 for an example. Web addresses When a Web address (URL) mentioned in the text of your paper must be divided at the end of a line, break it only after a slash and do not insert a hyphen. For MLA

vÀ>ÌÌ}Ê>Ê«>«iÀÊÊ

MLA

54a

rules on dividing Web addresses in your list of works cited, see page 572. Headings MLA neither encourages nor discourages the use of headings and provides no guidelines for their use. If you would like to insert headings in a long essay or research paper, check first with your instructor. Visuals MLA classifies visuals as tables and figures (figures include graphs, charts, maps, photographs, and drawings). Label each table with an arabic numeral (“Table 1,” “Table 2,” and so on) and provide a clear caption that identifies the subject. Capitalize the caption as you would a title (see 45c); do not italicize the label and caption or place them in quotation marks. The label and caption should appear on separate lines above the table, flush with the left margin. For a table that you have borrowed or adapted, give the source below the table in a note like the following: Source: David N. Greenfield and Richard A. Davis; “Lost in Cyberspace: The Web @ Work”; CyberPsychology and Behavior 5.4 (2002): 349; print.

For each figure, place the figure number (using the abbreviation “Fig.”) and a caption below the figure, flush left. Capitalize the caption as you would a sentence; include source information following the caption. (When referring to the figure in your paper, use the abbreviation “fig.” in parenthetical citations; otherwise spell out the word.) See page 586 for an example of a figure in a paper. Place visuals in the text, as close as possible to the sentences that relate to them, unless your instructor prefers them in an appendix.

Preparing the list of works cited Begin the list of works cited on a new page at the end of the paper. Center the title Works Cited about one inch from the

571

572

54b

MLA

}}ÌÃÊvÊiÊÃÌÕìÌ½ÃÊÀiÃi>ÀVÊ«ÀViÃÃ

top of the page. Double-space throughout. See page 588 for a sample list of works cited. Alphabetizing the list Alphabetize the list by the last names of the authors (or editors); if a work has no author or editor, alphabetize by the first word of the title other than A, An, or The. If your list includes two or more works by the same author, use the author’s name for the first entry only. For subsequent entries, use three hyphens followed by a period. List the titles in alphabetical order. (See item 6 on page 534.) Indenting Do not indent the first line of each works cited entry, but indent any additional lines one-half inch. This technique highlights the names of the authors, making it easy for readers to scan the alphabetized list. See page 588. Web addresses If you need to include a Web address (URL) in a works cited entry, do not insert a hyphen when dividing it at the end of a line. Break the URL only after a slash. Insert angle brackets around the URL. (See the note following item 34 on p. 549.) If your word processing program automatically turns Web addresses into links (by underlining them and changing the color), turn off this feature.

54b Highlights of one student’s research process The following pages describe key steps in student writer Anna Orlov’s research process, from selecting a research question to documenting sources. At each step, cross-references in the margins point to more discussion and examples elsewhere in the handbook. Samples from Orlov’s process illustrate strategies and skills she used to create an accurate and effective essay. See pages 583–88 for Orlov’s final paper.

getting started U forming a research plan U posing questions

573

Making the most of your handbook Highlights of one student’s research process (MLA style) Anna Orlov, a student in a composition class, was assigned a research essay related to technology and the American workplace. The assignment called for her to use a variety of print and electronic sources and to follow MLA style. Orlov immediately thought of her summer internship at an insurance company and her surprise at the strict employee Internet use policy in place there. As she thought about how to turn her experience into a research project, she developed some questions and strategies to guide her research and writing.

¦)PXEP*CFHJOBSFTFBSDIQBQFS § Before getting started, Orlov worked with a writing tutor to break her research plan into several stages. (Section numbers in blue refer to relevant discussions throughout the book.)

"TLXPSUIXIJMFRVFTUJPOTBCPVUNZUPQJD

1b, 46a

5BMLXJUIBSFGFSFODFMJCSBSJBOBCPVUVTFGVMUZQFTPG TPVSDFTBOEXIFSFUP±OEUIFN

46b

$POTJEFSIPXFBDITPVSDFDBODPOUSJCVUF UPNZQBQFS

47a

%FDJEFXIJDITFBSDISFTVMUTBSFXPSUIB DMPTFSMPPL

47b

&WBMVBUFUIFTPVSDFT 5BLFOPUFTBOELFFQUSBDLPGUIFTPVSDFT 8SJUFBXPSLJOHUIFTJT 8SJUFBESBGUBOEJOUFHSBUFTPVSDFT %PDVNFOUTPVSDFT

47d, 47e 48 1c, 50a 1e–1g, 52, 53a 49, 53b

Orlov began by jotting down the research question she wanted to investigate: Is Internet surveillance in the workplace fair or unfair to employees? She thought the practice might be unfair but knew that she needed to consider all sides of the issue. Her instructor had explained that sources uncovered in the research process would both support and challenge her ideas and ultimately help shape the paper. Orlov knew she would have to be

1b and 46a: *Ã}ÊµÕiÃ ÌÃÊvÀÊ>Ê ÀiÃi>ÀVÊ «>«iÀ

574

Highlights of one student’s research process

open-minded and flexible and revisit her main ideas as she examined the information and arguments in her sources.

¦ 8IBUTPVSDFTEP*OFFE BOEXIFSF TIPVME*MPPLGPSUIFN § 47a\Ê ,iÃÊ ÃÕÀViÃÊV>Ê «>ÞÊÊ>Ê «>«iÀ

46b\Ê7À }ÊÜÌÊ ÀiviÀiViÊ LÀ>À>Ã

46c–46e: -i>ÀV}Ê `>Ì>L>ÃiÃ]Ê LÀ>ÀÞÊV>Ì> }Ã]Ê>`ÊÌiÊ 7iL

Orlov planned to consider a variety of sources to help her focus her argument. Some sources might provide background information and context; others might provide evidence to help shape and support her developing ideas; still others might offer counterevidence and alternative interpretations that she would address when she built her argument. Orlov worked with a reference librarian to develop a search strategy. Finding articles in journals, magazines, and newspapers with the library’s online databases. Because her topic was current, Orlov wanted to search for up-to-date information. She turned to her library’s subscription databases for trustworthy, scholarly writing. There she hoped to find recent articles with concrete examples of workplace Internet surveillance. Searching the library’s book catalog. For reliable sources covering legal, business, and labor issues, Orlov looked for recently published books in the library catalog. Books could offer indepth context, including the history of online monitoring and the laws governing workplace surveillance. Orlov noticed that one book on the topic had the subject heading “electronic monitoring in the workplace.” Using that heading as a search term, she found a more focused list of books. One book that provided a solid overview helped her identify issues and terms for further searches in databases and on the Web. She also found references to other sources that looked promising. Locating relevant sites, online articles, and government publications on the Web. Orlov decided to search for online articles and relevant Web sites as well, particularly those that might specialize in digital issues. She hoped to find explanations of the software used by employers and opinions held by those who use the Internet and e-mail in the workplace, including supervisors, employers, and employees who might disagree with her.

what sources to look for U where to find sources U search terms U search results

575

¦8IBUTFBSDIUFSNTTIPVME*VTF § Orlov thought that searches on her controversial topic might generate too many results if she started with an Internet search engine like Google. To save time, she asked a librarian to help her conduct a narrower search with her library’s general periodical database. She could count on the database for fewer, more reliable results than an Internet search could provide. Orlov’s search terms

Date restrictions

employee

Past four years

internet use

Number of results

surveillance

46c and p. 449: Refining keyword searches, selecting search terms

20

¦)PXEP*TFMFDUTPVSDFTGSPNNZTFBSDISFTVMUT § Orlov used several criteria to decide which results of her general database search were worth a closer look. Would a source UÊ LiÊÀiiÛ>ÌÊÌÊiÀÊÌ«V¶ UÊ «ÀÛìÊ>ÕÌÀÌ>ÌÛiÊÃÕ««ÀÌ¶ UÊ «ÀÛìÊL>V}ÀÕ`ÊvÀ>Ì¶ UÊ vviÀÊ>ÊÀ>}iÊvÊÛiÜÃÊÀÊiÛìViÊÌ>ÌÊ"ÀÛÊVÕ`Ê>``ÀiÃÃÊ ÜiÊvÀ}ÊiÀÊ>À}ÕiÌ¶Ê

47: Evaluating sources

DATABASE SCREEN: SEARCH RESULTS This article’s focus on surveillance cameras was not relevant.

This article’s focus on government, not corporate, surveillance was not relevant.

576


"ÀÛÊÜÕ`ÊÜ>ÌÊÌÊ ÀiÃ«`ÊÌÊÌÃÊÃÕÀÛiÞÊ vÊÃiÊ>À}Õi`ÊÌ>ÌÊ ÌiÀiÌÊÃÕÀÛi>ViÊ ÃÊÕv>À° /iÊWall Street JournalÊÃÊÜìÞÊ ÀiÃ«iVÌi`Ê>`Ê}ÌÊ vviÀÊL>V}ÀÕ`ÊvÀÊ "ÀÛ½ÃÊÌ«V° "ÀÛÊÜìÀi`ÊvÊÌi ProgressiveÊ>`Ê>Ê «ÌV>ÊÃ>Ì°Ê-iÊ>ìÊ >ÊÌiÊÌÊViVÊvÀÊL>Ã° ,iÛiÜi`ÊLÞÊi}>Ê iÝ«iÀÌÃ]Ê>Ê>ÜÊÀiÛiÜÊ >ÀÌViÊVÕ`Ê«ÀÛìÊ i}>ÊVÌiÝÌÊ>`Êi`Ê VÀi`LÌÞ°Ê

¦4IPVME*DPOTJEFSVTJOHBCMPH § 46e\Ê1Ã}Ê L}Ã

Orlov was intrigued by a blog called Today’s Workplace, which was critical of workplace surveillance. She remembered her instructor’s caution about using blogs, since their credibility is difficult to establish. But her librarian had suggested that blogs can provide useful links to studies and to articles in reputable magazines and newspapers as well as compelling arguments of their own. Orlov knew that if the blog looked like a helpful source, she could check with her instructor before using it.

¦)PXEP*FWBMVBUFNZTPVSDFT § 47\ÊÃÃiÃÃ }Ê«ÀÌÊ >`ÊiÊ ÃÕÀViÃ

p. 467: *ÀiÛiÜ}Ê >ÀÌViÃ

After Orlov had conducted several searches and narrowed down her list of promising search results, she downloaded her sources and began evaluating them. As she read, she tried to keep an open mind, knowing that some sources might make her reexamine her own views. Orlov wanted to see what evidence and claims she would need to address to strengthen her argument in progress. She looked carefully at an article she found in eWeek, an online weekly business computing magazine. It was the kind of

search results U blogs U evaluating sources U notes on a source U reading critically

577

ORLOV’S NOTES ON PASSAGES FROM AN ARTICLE

8SJUFSJTTZNQBUIFUJDUPFNQMPZFST

$POTJEFS TUBUJTUJDT*T VTJOHXPSLUJNF GPSQFSTPOBM *OUFSOFUVTFTP CBE

%PFTUIF"." TJEFXJUI FNQMPZFST 4VSWFZSFTVMUT¥ HPPEGPS CBDLHSPVOE BOEDPVOUFS BSHVNFOU

&NQMPZFFT XBOUFNQMPZFST UPCFVQ GSPOUBCPVU NPOJUPSJOH 8IFOJT XPSLQMBDF TVSWFJMMBODF VOGBJSBOE XIFOOPU

"OFYUSFNF DBTF%PFTJU KVTUJGZ#JH #SPUIFSJOUIF XPSLQMBDF

578

48a–48c: Ê>>}}Ê your vÀ>Ì


up-to-date, specialized publication that Orlov wanted to check for in-depth background information. So that she would remember her thoughts about the author’s text while drafting her argument, she made notes in the margins as she read. Taking good notes would help her to begin forming her own lines of argument and avoid plagiarism.

¦)PXEP*JOUFHSBUFNZTPVSDFTJOUPNZQBQFS § 1c and 50a: 7ÀÌ}Ê>Ê ÜÀ}Ê ÌiÃÃ 1d–1g: *>}Ê>`Ê `À>vÌ}

pp. 467–68: *ÀiÛiÜ}Ê LÃ

After reading and evaluating a number of sources, Orlov wrote down her working thesis: Though companies may have legitimate reasons to monitor employees’ Internet usage, electronic surveillance is more unfair than beneficial to employees since it threatens their privacy. She then sketched an informal plan to organize her ideas and began writing a rough draft. As she wrote and revised, she tried to integrate sources from her research that she had found useful. For example, Orlov had selected a book on electronic surveillance in the workplace, written by Frederick Lane III. Because the American Management Association was the publisher, Orlov thought the book might be biased in favor of management’s use of electronic surveillance. But by skimming the introduction, she saw that the author took the side of employees. Orlov looked through the table of contents and selected a few chapters that seemed relevant to her working thesis. She read the chapters for ideas and information that she could paraphrase, summarize, or quote to provide background, support her argument, and help her counter the kind of pro-surveillance position that Chris Gonsalves takes in his eWeek article.

Summarizing a source 48c and 52b: -Õ>Àâ }Ê>`Ê «>À>«À>Ã}

Orlov turned to Lane’s text for an authoritative explanation of how surveillance software typically works. Some passages contained more details than she could use, so she decided to summarize what she needed from the source.

integrating sources U taking notes U summarizing

579

ORIGINAL SOURCE PASSAGE (LANE, THE NAKED EMPLOYEE, 128-29)

relay chat, or instant messenger session that takes place on the computer. Investigator could be monitoring activity on your office computer right now, but chances are, you’d never know if it’s running or not. Eaton designed the program to be hidden in plain sight: An icon may appear in the system tray, but the various modules that make the program operate periodically change their name to make them more difficult to find. Similarly, the files that are used to hold the data that Investigator collects are given arbitrary names and dates so that they can’t be easily located. Even if you know that Investigator is running on your office computer system, you may not realize the extent to which it is actively reporting on your activities. Investigator can be configured to surreptitiously send its collected data by e-mail to your boss on a regular basis or wait until it discovers certain preset keywords (“boss,” “pornography,” “kill,” or the name of an unreleased product).

$PODSFUF FYBNQMFPG NPOJUPSJOH TPGUXBSF5PP NVDIEFUBJM 4VNNBSJ[F

6TFLFZQPJOUT BCPVUXIBU TPGUXBSFUFMMT TVQFSWJTPST

FIRST ATTEMPT AT SUMMARY

These programs record on-screen activity in the computer in hidden directories that can later be accessed or uploaded by supervisors; the programs can even scan for keywords tailored to individual companies and have employees receive warning e-mails from their bosses (128-29).

"ÀÛÊV ìÃiÃÊÌiÊ À}>ÊÃÕÀViÊ «>ÃÃ>}iÊÊiÀÊ ÜÊÜÀ`Ã°

/ÃÊÃÕ>ÀÞÊÃÀi«ÀiÃiÌÃÊÌiÊÃÕÀVi° ÊÃ}>Ê«À>ÃiÊVÀi`ÌÃÊÌiÊ>ÕÌÀÊÜÌÊÌiÊiÝ«>>Ì° REVISED SUMMARY

As Lane explains, these programs record on-screen activity in the computer in hidden directories that can later be accessed or uploaded by supervisors; the programs can even scan for keywords tailored to individual companies (128-29). /iÊ«>}iÊÕLiÀÊ>`ÊÃ}>Ê«À>ÃiÊÃÜÊÌiÊ LÕ`>ÀiÃÊvÊÌiÊÃÕÀViÊ>ÌiÀ>°

/Ê>Û`Ê ÃÀi«ÀiÃiÌ}Ê ÌiÊÃÕÀVi]Ê "ÀÛÊÀiÛiÃÊ ÌiÊViÌÊ >LÕÌÊi>Ê Ü>À}Ã°

580


Paraphrasing a source 48c and 51b: Û`}Ê «>}>ÀÃÊ ÜiÊÌ>}Ê ÌiÃÊ>`Ê «>À>«À>Ã}

Orlov had photocopied the following passage from Lane’s book because it contained broader claims about electronic surveillance in the workplace. To keep most of her paper in her own voice, she tried to paraphrase important ideas. She used quotations only when integrating especially effective language from Lane’s writing. ORIGINAL SOURCE PASSAGE (LANE, THE NAKED EMPLOYEE, 3-4)

particularly as an employee, our cloak is at its thinnest and most revealing. As we’ll see in this chapter, there are a number of reasons — some of them quite compelling — for surveillance of employees. A major problem, however, is that technology makes it possible for employers to gather enormous (PPE amounts of data about employees, often far beyond what RVPUBUJPO is necessary to satisfy safety or productivity concerns. And CVUUPPNVDI the trends that drive technology—faster, smaller, cheaper— 1BSBQISBTF UIJTQPJOUBOE make it possible for larger and larger numbers of employers to gather ever-greater amounts of personal data. RVPUFMBTU To date, the nation’s legislatures and courts have made TFOUFODF occasional efforts to reweave some threads of the privacy

"EWBODFE UFDIOPMPHZ JODSFBTFE TVSWFJMMBODF

-}>Ê«À>ÃiÊÃÜÃÊÜiÀiÊ >i½ÃÊì>ÊLi}Ã° ORLOV’S PARAPHRASE "ÀÛÊÕÃiÃÊiÀÊ ÜÊÜÀ`Ã]Ê >Û`}Ê>i½ÃÊ ÌiÀÃ]Ê«À>Ã}]Ê >`ÊÃÌÀÕVÌÕÀi°

Lane notes that employers can use Internet surveillance technology to collect significantly more information from workers than they need (3-4). /iÊVÌ>ÌÊÃÜÃÊÜiÀiÊÌÊw`ÊÌÃÊ vÀ>ÌÊÊ>i½ÃÊL°

Selecting and integrating a quotation 52\ÊÌi}À>Ì }ÊÃÕÀViÃ

In the same photocopied passage, Orlov noted phrases that were striking and worth quoting.

integrating sources U taking notes U paraphrasing U choosing and integrating quotations

581

ORIGINAL SOURCE PASSAGE (LANE, THE NAKED EMPLOYEE, 3-4)

particularly as an employee, our cloak is at its thinnest and most revealing. As we’ll see in this chapter, there are a number of reasons — some of them quite compelling — for surveillance of employees. A major problem, however, is that technology makes it possible for employers to gather enormous amounts of data about employees, often far beyond what is necessary to satisfy safety or productivity concerns. And the trends that drive technology — faster, smaller, cheaper — make it possible for larger and larger numbers of employers to gather ever-greater amounts of personal data.

4VSWFJMMBODF DBOHPUPPGBS ¦'BTUFS TNBMMFS DIFBQFS§¥ TUSPOH TVSQSJT JOHMBOHVBHF GPSJOWBTJPO PGFNQMPZFF QSJWBDZ

ORLOV’S INTEGRATED QUOTATION

While surveillance of employees is not a new phenomenon, electronic surveillance allows employers to monitor workers with unprecedented efficiency. In his book The Naked Employee, Frederick Lane describes offline ways in which employers have been permitted to intrude on employees’ privacy for decades, such as drug testing, background checks, psychological exams, lie detector tests, and instore video surveillance. The difference, Lane argues, between these old methods of data gathering and electronic surveillance involves quantity. He notes that employers can use this technology to collect significantly more information from workers than they need. Lane also contends that “the trends that drive technology — faster, smaller, cheaper — make it possible for larger and larger numbers of employers to gather ever-greater amounts of personal data” (3-4). /iÊVÌ>ÌÊÃÜÃÊÜiÀiÊÌÃÊ«>ÃÃ>}iÊV>Ê LiÊvÕ`ÊÊÌiÊÃÕÀVi°

Orlov was careful not to let her sources overwhelm her writing. To keep the emphasis on her ideas, she used her own analyses to shape the conversation among the sources she summarized, paraphrased, and quoted, creating an effective synthesis.

/iÊÃ}>Ê«À>ÃiÊ ÃÜÃÊÌ>ÌÊÌiÊ ì>ÊÌ>ÌÊvÜÃÊ ÃÊÌÊ"ÀÛ½Ã° "ÀÛÊÕÃiÃÊÌiÊ ÃÕÀViÊÌÊ«ÀÛìÊ L>V}ÀÕ`Ê vÀ>Ì° "ÀÛ½ÃÊÃÕ>ÀÞÊ «ÌÃÊÕÌÊ>ÊiÞÊ VÌÀ>ÃÌÊÊ>i½ÃÊ >À}ÕiÌ° >i½ÃÊÃÌÀ}Ê >`ÊÃÕVVVÌÊ >}Õ>}iÊÃÊÜÀÌÊ µÕÌ}°

52c: Syn ÌiÃâ}Ê >`Ê«>V}Ê ÃÕÀViÃÊÊ VÛiÀÃ>Ì

582


¦)PXEP*EPDVNFOUNZTPVSDFT §

48b\Êii« }ÊÌÀ>VÊ vÊÃÕÀViÊ >ÌiÀ>Ã

Throughout her research process, Orlov took careful notes about publication information and page numbers for source material she planned to use in her paper. Because she kept good records, she didn’t need to hunt down information as she cited her sources. Managing her information also helped her avoid unintentional plagiarism. When it came time for her to document her sources in the paper, she followed the MLA (Modern Language Association) system. In addition to using in-text parenthetical citations, Orlov prepared an alphabetized list of works cited at the end of her paper. Entries in the works cited list gave publication information for the sources Orlov used in her paper and cited with page numbers in parentheses. ENTRY IN WORKS CITED LIST

49 and 53a–53b: Document }ÊÃÕÀViÃÊ ÊÊÃÌÞi

1

2

Lane, Frederick S., III. The Naked Employee: How Technology Is 3

4

Compromising Workplace Privacy. New York: Amer. Management Assn., 5

6

2003. Print.

1 Author 2 Title and subtitle 3 City of publication

4 Publisher 5 Date of publication 6 Medium

54c Sample MLA research paper On the following pages is a research paper on the topic of electronic surveillance in the workplace, written by Anna Orlov, a student in a composition class. Orlov’s paper is documented with in-text citations and a list of works cited in MLA style. Annotations in the margins of the paper draw your attention to Orlov’s use of MLA style and her effective writing. For highlights of Anna Orlov’s research process, see pages 573–82. hackerhandbooks.com/bedhandbook > Model papers > MLA papers: Orlov; Daly; Levi > MLA annotated bibliography: Orlov

ii«}ÊÀiVÀ`ÃÊ UÊ `VÕiÌ}Ê ÃÕÀViÃÊ UÊ Ã>«iÊÊ«>«iÀ

MLA

54c

583

Orlov 1 Anna Orlov Professor Willis English 101 17 March 2009 Online Monitoring:

/ÌiÊÃÊViÌiÀi`°

A Threat to Employee Privacy in the Wired Workplace As the Internet has become an integral tool of businesses, company policies on Internet usage have become as common as

"«i}ÊÃiÌiViÃÊ «ÀÛìÊL>V}ÀÕ`Ê vÀÊÌiÃÃ°

policies regarding vacation days or sexual harassment. A 2005 study by the American Management Association and ePolicy Institute found that 76% of companies monitor employees’ use of the Web, and the number of companies that block employees’ access to certain Web sites has increased 27% since 2001 (1). Unlike other company rules, however, Internet usage policies often include language authorizing companies to secretly monitor their employees, a practice that raises questions about rights in the workplace. Although companies often have legitimate concerns that lead them to monitor employees’ Internet

/iÃÃÊ>ÃÃiÀÌÃÊ"ÀÛ½ÃÊ >Ê«Ì°

usage—from expensive security breaches to reduced productivity—the benefits of electronic surveillance are outweighed by its costs to employees’ privacy and autonomy. While surveillance of employees is not a new phenomenon, electronic surveillance allows employers to monitor workers with unprecedented efficiency. In his book The Naked Employee, Frederick Lane describes offline ways in which employers have been permitted to intrude on employees’ privacy for decades, such as drug testing, background checks, psychological exams, lie detector tests, and in-store video surveillance. The difference, Lane argues, between these old methods of data gathering and electronic surveillance involves quantity:

>À}>Ê>Ì>ÌÃÊ`V>ÌiÊÃÌÞiÊvÀ>ÌÌ} and ivviVÌÛiÊÜÀÌ}.

Summary and }ÊµÕÌ>ÌÊ>ÀiÊ ÌÀ`ÕVi`ÊÜÌÊ>Ê Ã}>Ê«À>ÃiÊ>}Ê ÌiÊ>ÕÌÀ°

584

54c

MLA

->«iÊÊ«>«iÀ

Orlov 2 }ÊµÕÌ>ÌÊÃÊ ÃiÌÊvvÊvÀÊÌiÊÌiÝÌÆÊ µÕÌ>ÌÊ>ÀÃÊ>ÀiÊ omitted.

Technology makes it possible for employers to gather enormous amounts of data about employees, often far beyond what is necessary to satisfy safety or productivity concerns. And the trends that drive technology—faster, smaller, cheaper—make it possible for larger and larger numbers of employers to gather ever-greater amounts of

personal data. (3-4) *>}iÊÕLiÀÊÃÊ}ÛiÊ Ê«>ÀiÌiÃiÃÊ>vÌiÀÊ In an age when employers can collect data whenever employees use ÌiÊw>Ê«iÀ`° their computers—when they send e-mail, surf the Web, or even arrive at or depart from their workstations—the challenge for both employers and employees is to determine how much is too much. Another key difference between traditional surveillance and

i>ÀÊÌ«VÊÃiÌiViÃ]Ê iÊÌÃÊi]Ê>ÀiÊÕÃi`Ê electronic surveillance is that employers can monitor workers’ computer ÌÀÕ}ÕÌÊÌiÊ«>«iÀ° use secretly. One popular monitoring method is keystroke logging, which is done by means of an undetectable program on employees’ computers. The Web site of a vendor for Spector Pro, a popular keystroke logging program, explains that the software can be installed to operate in “Stealth” mode so that it “does not show up as an icon, does not appear in the Windows system tray, . . . [and] cannot be uninstalled without the Spector Pro password which YOU specify” (“Automatically”). As Lane explains, these -ÕÀViÊÜÌÊ>Ê ÕÜÊ>ÕÌÀÊÃÊVÌi`Ê programs record every key entered into the computer in hidden directories LÞÊ>ÊÃÀÌii`ÊÌÌi° that can later be accessed or uploaded by supervisors; the programs can even scan for keywords tailored to individual companies (128-29). "ÀÛÊ>ÌV«>ÌiÃÊ LiVÌÃÊ>`Ê «ÀÛìÃÊÃÕÀViÃÊvÀÊ ««Ã}ÊÛiÜÃ°

Some experts have argued that a range of legitimate concerns justifies employer monitoring of employee Internet usage. As PC World columnist Daniel Tynan points out, companies that don’t monitor network traffic can be penalized for their ignorance: “Employees could accidentally (or deliberately) spill confidential information . . . or allow worms to spread throughout a corporate network.” The ePolicy Institute, an organization that advises companies about reducing risks

Ã>«iÊÊ«>«iÀ

MLA

54c

585

Orlov 3 from technology, reported that breaches in computer security cost institutions $100 million in 1999 alone (Flynn). Companies also are held legally accountable for many of the transactions conducted on their networks and with their technology. Legal scholar Jay Kesan points out that the law holds employers liable for employees’ actions such as violations of copyright laws, the distribution of offensive or graphic sexual material, and illegal disclosure of confidential information (312). These kinds of concerns should give employers, in certain instances, the right to monitor employee behavior. But employers rushing to adopt surveillance programs might not be adequately

/À>ÃÌÊi«ÃÊ Ài>ìÀÃÊÛiÊvÀÊ iÊ«>À>}À>«ÊÌÊÌiÊ iÝÌ°

weighing the effect such programs can have on employee morale. Employers must consider the possibility that employees will perceive surveillance as a breach of trust that can make them feel like disobedient children, not responsible adults who wish to perform their jobs professionally and autonomously. Yet determining how much autonomy workers should be given is complicated by the ambiguous nature of productivity in the wired workplace. On the one hand, computers and Internet access give

"ÀÛÊÌÀi>ÌÃÊLÌÊ ÃìÃÊv>ÀÞÆÊÃiÊ «ÀÛìÃÊ>ÊÌÀ>ÃÌÊ ÌÊiÀÊÜÊ>À}ÕiÌ°

employees powerful tools to carry out their jobs; on the other hand, the same technology offers constant temptations to avoid work. As a 2005 study by Salary.com and America Online indicates, the Internet ranked as the top choice among employees for ways of wasting time on the job; it beat talking with co-workers—the second most popular method—by a margin of nearly two to one (Frauenheim). Chris Gonsalves, an editor for eWeek.com, argues that the technology has changed the terms between employers and employees: “While bosses can easily detect and interrupt water-cooler chatter,” he writes, “the employee who is shopping at Lands’ End or IMing with fellow fantasy baseball managers may actually appear to be working.” The gap

Ê«>}iÊÕLiÀÊÃÊ >Û>>LiÊvÀÊÌÃÊ7iLÊ ÃÕÀVi°Ê

586

54c

MLA

->«iÊÊ«>«iÀ

Orlov 4

ÕÃÌÀ>ÌÊ>ÃÊw}ÕÀiÊ ÕLiÀ]ÊV>«Ì]Ê>`Ê ÃÕÀViÊvÀ>Ì°

Fig. 1. This “Dilbert” comic strip suggests that personal Internet usage is widespread in the workplace (Adams 106). between behaviors that are observable to managers and the employee’s actual activities when sitting behind a computer has created additional motivations for employers to invest in surveillance programs. “Dilbert,” a popular cartoon that spoofs office culture, aptly captures how rampant recreational Internet use has become in the workplace (see fig. 1).

"ÀÛÊVÕÌiÀÃÊÊ ««Ã}ÊÛiÜÃÊ>`Ê «ÀÛìÃÊÃÕ««ÀÌÊvÀÊ iÀÊ>À}ÕiÌ°

But monitoring online activities can have the unintended effect of making employees resentful. As many workers would be quick to point out, Web surfing and other personal uses of the Internet can provide needed outlets in the stressful work environment; many scholars have argued that limiting and policing these outlets can exacerbate tensions between employees

"ÀÛÊÕÃiÃÊ>ÊLÀivÊ and managers. Kesan warns that “prohibiting personal use can Ã}>Ê«À>ÃiÊÌÊÛiÊ seem extremely arbitrary and can seriously harm morale. . . . vÀÊiÀÊ>À}ÕiÌÊÌÊ ÌiÊÜÀ`ÃÊvÊ>ÊÃÕÀVi° Imagine a concerned parent who is prohibited from checking on a sick child by a draconian company policy” (315-16). As this analysis indicates, employees can become disgruntled when Internet usage policies are enforced to their full extent. Additionally, many experts disagree with employers’ assumption that online monitoring can increase productivity. Employment law attorney Joseph Schmitt argues that, particularly for employees who

Ã>«iÊÊ«>«iÀ

MLA

54c

587

Orlov 5 are paid a salary rather than an hourly wage, “a company shouldn’t care whether employees spend one or 10 hours on the Internet as long as they are getting their jobs done—and provided that they are not accessing inappropriate sites” (qtd. in Verespej). Other experts even argue that time spent on personal Internet

"ÀÛÊVÌiÃÊ>Ê`ÀiVÌÊ ÃÕÀVi\ÊÜÀ`ÃÊµÕÌi`Ê Ê>ÌiÀÊÃÕÀVi°

browsing can actually be productive for companies. According to Bill Coleman, an executive at Salary.com, “Personal Internet use and casual office conversations often turn into new business ideas or suggestions for gaining operating efficiencies” (qtd. in Frauenheim). Employers, in other words, may benefit from showing more faith in their employees’ ability to exercise their autonomy. Employees’ right to privacy and autonomy in the workplace, however, remains a murky area of the law. Although evaluating where to draw the line between employee rights and employer powers is often a duty that falls to the judicial system, the courts have shown little willingness to intrude on employers’ exercise of control over their computer networks. Federal law provides few guidelines related to online monitoring of employees, and only Connecticut and Delaware require companies to disclose this type of surveillance to employees (Tam et al.). “It is unlikely that we will see a legally guaranteed zone of privacy in the American workplace,” predicts Kesan (293). This reality leaves employees and employers to sort the potential risks and benefits of technology in contract agreements and terms of employment. With "ÀÛÊÃÕÃÊÕ«Ê iÀÊ>À}ÕiÌÊ>`Ê continuing advances in technology, protecting both employers and ÃÕ}}iÃÌÃÊ>ÊVÕÀÃiÊvÊ employees will require greater awareness of these programs, better action. disclosure to employees, and a more public discussion about what types of protections are necessary to guard individual freedoms in the wired workplace.

588

54c

MLA

->«iÊÊ«>«iÀ

Orlov 6 Works Cited

i>`}ÊÃÊViÌiÀi`°

Adams, Scott. Dilbert and the Way of the Weasel. New York: Harper, 2002. Print. ÃÌÊÃÊ>«>LiÌâi`Ê LÞÊ>ÕÌÀÃ½Ê>ÃÌÊ >iÃÊÀÊLÞÊÌÌiÊ ÜiÊ>ÊÜÀÊ>ÃÊÊ >ÕÌÀ®°

American Management Association and ePolicy Institute. “2005 Electronic Monitoring and Surveillance Survey.” American Management Association. Amer. Management Assn., 2005. Web. 15 Feb. 2009. “Automatically Record Everything They Do Online! Spector Pro 5.0 FAQ’s.” Netbus.org. Netbus.Org, n.d. Web. 17 Feb. 2009.

LLÀiÛ>ÌÊº°`°»Ê `V>ÌiÃÊÌ>ÌÊÌiÊ iÊÃÕÀViÊ>ÃÊÊ Õ«`>ÌiÊ`>Ìi°

Flynn, Nancy. “Internet Policies.” ePolicy Institute. ePolicy Inst., n.d. Web. 15 Feb. 2009. Frauenheim, Ed. “Stop Reading This Headline and Get Back to Work.” CNET News.com. CNET Networks, 11 July 2005. Web. 17 Feb. 2009.

ÀÃÌÊiÊvÊi>VÊ iÌÀÞÊÃÊ>ÌÊÌiÊivÌÊ >À}ÆÊiÝÌÀ>ÊiÃÊ are indented ½».

Gonsalves, Chris. “Wasting Away on the Web.” eWeek.com. Ziff Davis Enterprise Holdings, 8 Aug. 2005. Web. 16 Feb. 2009. Kesan, Jay P. “Cyber-Working or Cyber-Shirking? A First Principles Examination of Electronic Privacy in the Workplace.” Florida Law Review 54.2 (2002): 289-332. Print.

ÕLiÃ«>V}ÊÃÊ ÕÃi`ÊÌÀÕ}ÕÌ°

Lane, Frederick S., III. The Naked Employee: How Technology Is

ÊÜÀÊÜÌÊvÕÀÊ >ÕÌÀÃÊÃÊÃÌi`ÊLÞÊ ÌiÊwÀÃÌÊ>ÕÌÀ½ÃÊ >iÊ>`ÊÌiÊ >LLÀiÛ>ÌÊºiÌÊ>°»Ê vÀÊº>`ÊÌiÀÃ»®°

Tam, Pui-Wing, et al. “Snooping E-mail by Software Is Now a

Compromising Workplace Privacy. New York: Amer. Management Assn., 2003. Print. Workplace Norm.” Wall Street Journal 9 Mar. 2005: B1+. Print. Tynan, Daniel. “Your Boss Is Watching.” PC World. PC World Communications, 6 Oct. 2004. Web. 17 Feb. 2009. Verespej, Michael A. “Inappropriate Internet Surfing.” Industry Week. Penton Media, 7 Feb. 2000. Web. 16 Feb. 2009.

Ã>«iÊÊÜÀÃÊVÌi`Ê«>}iÊ UÊ >VÌÛiÊÀi>`}Ê UÊ ÀiÀi>`}

55

MLA

55a

Writing about literature

All good writing about literature attempts to answer a question, spoken or unspoken, about the text: “Why doesn’t Hamlet kill his uncle sooner?” “How does street language function in Gwendolyn Brooks’s ‘We Real Cool’?” “What does Orwell’s ‘Shooting an Elephant’ imply about the role the British played in imperial India?” “How do rhyme and meter support the meaning of Blake’s ‘The Tyger’?” “In what ways does Louise Erdrich’s Love Medicine draw on oral narrative traditions?” The goal of a literature paper should be to answer such questions with a meaningful interpretation, presented forcefully and persuasively.

55a Get involved in the work; be an active reader. Read the work closely and carefully. Think of the work as speaking to you: What is it telling you? Asking you? Trying to make you feel? If the work provides an introduction and footnotes, read them attentively. They may be a source of important information. Use the dictionary to look up words unfamiliar to you or words with subtle nuances that may affect the work’s meaning. Rereading is a central part of the process. You should read short works several times, first to get an overall impression and then again to focus on meaningful details. With longer works, such as novels or plays, read the most important chapters or scenes more than once while keeping in mind the work as a whole. As you read and reread, interact with the work by posing questions and looking for answers. The chart on pages 594–95 suggests some questions about literature that may help you consider the composition and context of your reading. The chart on page 87 suggests strategies for active reading. The conclusions you draw in response to such questions shape and support your overall interpretation of the work (see 55b).

589

590

55a

MLA

7ÀÌ}Ê>LÕÌÊÌiÀ>ÌÕÀi

Annotating the work Annotating the work is a way to focus your reading. The first time through, you may want to pencil a check mark next to passages you find especially significant. On a more careful rereading, pay particular attention to those passages and jot down your ideas and reactions in a notebook or (if you own the book) in the margins of the page. Here is one student’s annotation of a poem by Shakespeare: Shall I compare thee to a summer’s day? Thou art more lovely and more temperate:

3IZNJOH QBUUFSOPG TPOOFU

Rough winds do shake the darling buds of May, And summer’s lease hath all too short a date. Sometime too hot the eye of heaven shines,

'BJSCFBVUZ PSNPSFUIBO CFBVUZ

And often is his gold complexion dimmed;

8IBUBSF ¦FUFSOBMMJOFT UPUJNF§ "TL JODMBTT

Nor lose possession of that fair thou ow’st

'JOBMDPVQMFU TFFNTUPTJHOBM BTIJGUJO UIPVHIU

8IP .VTU CFBMPWFE POF

1MFBTBOU OBUVSFE MJLF QMFBTBOU XFBUIFS

4VNNFSJT ²FFUJOHBOE OPUBMXBZT By chance, or nature’s changing course, untrimmed. QFSGFDU #VU MPWFSJTQFS GFDU But thy eternal summer shall not fade,

And every fair from fair sometimes declines,

Nor shall death brag thou wand’rest in his shade, When in eternal lines to time thou grow’st. So long as men can breathe or eyes can see,

%FBUIXPVME CFQSPVEUP DMBJNUIF MPWFSCVU DBO©U

So long lives this, and this gives life to thee. 5IJTUIFQPFN "SU MJLFUIFXSJUFS©TMPWF JTFUFSOBM

Taking notes Note taking is also an important part of rereading a work of literature. In your notes, you can try out ideas and develop your perspective on the work. Here are some notes one student took on a short story, “Chrysanthemums,” by John Steinbeck. Notice that some of these notes pose questions for further thought. Such notes are the raw material out of which you will build an interpretation.

>VÌÛiÊÀi>`}Ê UÊ ÀiÀi>`}Ê UÊ >Ì>Ì}Ê UÊ Ì>}ÊÌiÃÊ UÊ `ÃVÕÃÃ

MLA

55a

TAKING NOTES ON A LITERARY WORK

Discussing the work As you have no doubt discovered, class discussions can lead to interesting insights about a literary work, perhaps by calling attention to details in the work that you failed to notice on a first reading. Discussions don’t always need to occur face-toface. Many literature instructors encourage online discussion groups, where the class can post topics and explore ideas. Here, for example, is a series of postings about a character in Joyce Carol Oates’s short story “Where Are You Going, Where Have You Been?”

591

592

55a

MLA


CONVERSATION ABOUT A SUBJECT

1 2

1 2

Who is Arnold Friend? ÌÊiÊ«ÌÊ`ÕÀ}ÊÌiÊÃÌÀÞ]ÊÀ`ÊÀi`Êì>`Ã]Êº ½ÌÊ ÞÕÊÜÊÜÊÊ>¶»Ê7Ê`ÊÞÕÊÌÊiÊÃ¶Ê iÃÊÌiÊÀi>ìÀÊ ÀÊ iÊiÛiÀÊÀi>ÞÊÜ¶ Zoë, Oct 7 18:09

ÛiÀÞÌ}Ê>LÕÌÊÀ`ÊÃÊÜiÀ`]ÊiÊÃÊÃÕ}>ÃÃiÃÊ>`ÊÌiÊ Ü>ÞÊiÊÌ>Ã°Ê iÊ>ÃÊiÛiÀÊÃiiÊÊLivÀi]ÊLÕÌÊiÊÜÃÊ >Ê>LÕÌÊiÀ°ÊiÊìÃ½ÌÊÃiiÊÕ>° Connor, Oct 7 19:23 ÊÌÊÜi½ÀiÊÌÊÃÕ««Ãi`ÊÌÊÜÊÜÊÀ`ÊÀi`ÊÃ°Ê7iÊ iÊwÀÃÌÊ>ÀÀÛiÃÊ>ÌÊ i½ÃÊÕÃi]ÊÃiÊ>ÃÃÊ]Êº7ÊÌiÊiÊ` ÞÕÊÌÊÞÕÊ>Ài¶»ÊLÕÌÊÀ`Ê}ÀiÃÊiÀÊµÕiÃÌÊLÞÊV>} }ÊÌiÊÃÕLiVÌ°ÊiÊiÛiÀÊÌiÃÊiÀÊÜÊiÊÀi>ÞÊÃ]ÊÞÊÌ>ÌÊi½ÃÊ iÀÊvÀi`Ê>`ÊiÀÊÛiÀ° Mirabel, Oct 7 19:47

iÊÃÊ>Ü>ÞÃÊ«ÀiÌi`}ÊÌÊLiÊÃiÌ}ÊiÃiÊÌÊiÀÊvÀi`Ã]Ê iÀÊLÞvÀi`Ã]Ê>`ÊiÀÊv>Þ°Ê">ÌiÃÊìÃVÀLiÃÊiÀÊ>ÃÊ>Û}Ê ÌÜÊÃìÃ\ÊiÊvÀÊiÊ>`ÊiÊvÀÊÜiÊÃi½ÃÊ>Ü>ÞÊvÀÊ i°Ê*ÀiÌi`}ÊÃÊÃiÌ}Ê iÊ>`ÊÀ`Ê>ÛiÊÊ common. Damon, Oct 7 20:04 ÊvÕ`Ê>ÊÌÊvÊ«>À>iÃÊLiÌÜiiÊÀ`Ê>`ÊÌiÊÜvÊÊºÌÌiÊ ,i`Ê,`}Ê`°»ÊÀÊiÝ>«i]Ê iÊÌViÃÊÀ`½ÃÊ>À]Ê ÃÊÌiiÌ]Ê>`ÊÃÊ}À°ÊÌÊÀiì`ÊiÊvÊÌ>ÌÊ«>ÀÌÊÜiÊÌÌiÊ ,i`ÊÃ>ÞÃ]Êº"ÊÀ>`ÌiÀ]ÊÜ>ÌÊL}ÊÌiiÌÊÞÕÊ>Ûit» Yuko, Oct 7 23:11 ÊÜ>ÃÊÌ}ÊÌiÊÃ>iÊÌ}°Ê*ÕÃ]ÊÀ`ÊÃiiÃÊiÊi½ÃÊ `ÀiÃÃ}ÊÕ«ÊÌÊìÊÜÊiÊÃ°Ê iÊÌÃÊÌ>ÌÊÃÊ>ÀÊÃÊiÊ >ÊÜ}]Ê>`Ê>ÌiÀÊÌ>ÌÊÃÊv>ViÊÃÊ>Ê>Ã°ÊÌÊÀiì`ÊiÊvÊÜiÊ ÌiÊÜvÊ«ÕÌÃÊÊÌiÊ}À>`ÌiÀ½ÃÊVÌ}ÊÌÊÌÀVÊÌÌiÊ,i`Ê ,`}Ê`]ÊÕÃÌÊiÊÀ`ÊÃÊÌÀÞ}ÊÌÊÌÀVÊ i°

Instructor’s prompt A series of students’ responses to the prompt

`ÃVÕÃÃÊ UÊ ÌiÀ«ÀiÌ>ÌÊ UÊ ViÌÀ>Ê ÃÃÕiÊ UÊ >Ã}Ê>ÊVÀÌV>ÊµÕiÃÌ

MLA

55b

55b Form an interpretation. After rereading, jotting notes, and perhaps discussing the work, you are ready to start forming an interpretation. At this stage, try to focus on a single aspect of the work. Look through your notes and annotations for recurring questions and insights related to the aspect you have chosen.

Focusing on a central issue In forming an interpretation, avoid trying to do everything at once. You may think, for example, that Huckleberry Finn is a great book because it contains brilliant descriptions of scenery, has many humorous moments, but also tells a serious story of one boy’s development. These are legitimate responses to the work, but your job in writing an essay will be to close in on one issue that you can develop into a sustained, in-depth interpretation. For example, you might focus on how the runaway slave Jim uses humor to preserve his dignity. Or you might focus on ironic discrepancies between what Huck says and what his heart tells him.

Asking questions that lead to an interpretation Think of your interpretation as answering a question about the work. Some interpretations answer questions about literary techniques, such as the writer’s handling of plot, setting, or character. Others focus on questions about social context: what a work reveals about the time and culture in which it was written. You can find examples of both types of questions in the chart on pages 594–95. Frequently you will find yourself writing about both technique and social context. For example, Margaret Peel, a student who wrote an essay on Langston Hughes’s poem “Ballad of the Landlord” (see pp. 611–13), addressed the following question, which touches on both language and race: How does the poem’s language—through its four voices—dramatize the experience of a black man in a society dominated by whites?

593

594

55b

MLA


Questions to ask about literature Questions about technique Plot:Ê 7>ÌÊViÌÀ>ÊVyVÌÃÊ`ÀÛiÊÌiÊ«Ì¶ÊÀiÊÌiÞÊÌiÀ>ÊÜÌÊ >ÊV>À>VÌiÀ®ÊÀÊiÝÌiÀ>ÊLiÌÜiiÊV>À>VÌiÀÃÊÀÊLiÌÜiiÊ>ÊV>À >VÌiÀÊ>`Ê>ÊvÀVi®¶ÊÜÊ>ÀiÊVyVÌÃÊÀiÃÛi`¶Ê7ÞÊ>ÀiÊiÛiÌÃÊ ÀiÛi>i`ÊÊ>Ê«>ÀÌVÕ>ÀÊÀìÀ¶ Setting:Ê iÃÊÌiÊÃiÌÌ}ÊÌiÊ>`Ê«>Vi®ÊVÀi>ÌiÊ>Ê>ÌÃ«iÀi]Ê vviÀÊÃ}ÌÊÌÊ>ÊV>À>VÌiÀ]ÊÃÕ}}iÃÌÊÃÞLVÊi>}Ã]ÊÀÊÌÊ>ÌÊ ÌiÊÌiiÊvÊÌiÊÜÀ¶ Character:Ê 7>ÌÊÃiiÃÊÌÊÌÛ>ÌiÊÌiÊViÌÀ>ÊV>À>VÌiÀÃ¶Ê Ê>ÞÊ

V>À>VÌiÀÃÊV>}iÊÃ}wV>ÌÞ¶ÊvÊÃ]ÊÜ>ÌÊpÊvÊ>ÞÌ}ÊpÊ>ÛiÊ ÌiÞÊi>Ài`ÊvÀÊÌiÀÊiÝ«iÀiViÃ¶Ê ÊÃ>À«ÊVÌÀ>ÃÌÃÊLiÌÜiiÊ V>À>VÌiÀÃÊ}}ÌÊ«ÀÌ>ÌÊÌiiÃ¶ Point of view:Ê iÃÊÌiÊ«ÌÊvÊÛiÜÊpÊÌiÊ«iÀÃ«iVÌÛiÊvÀÊÜVÊÌi ÃÌÀÞÊÃÊ>ÀÀ>Ìi`ÊÀÊÌiÊ«iÊÃÊÃ«iÊpÊ>vviVÌÊÌiÊÀi>ìÀ½ÃÊÕìÀ ÃÌ>`}ÊvÊiÛiÌÃ¶Ê iÃÊÌiÊ>ÀÀ>ÌÊÀiÛi>ÊV>À>VÌiÀÊÌÀ>ÌÃÊvÊÌiÊ Ã«i>iÀ]ÊÀÊìÃÊÌiÊÃ«i>iÀÊiÀiÞÊLÃiÀÛiÊÌiÀÃ¶ÊÃÊÌiÊ>ÀÀ>ÌÀÊ ViÌ]Ê>Ûi]ÊÀÊìViÌvÕ¶ÊÃÊÌiÊÃÌÀÞÊÌ`ÊLÞÊÕÌ«iÊ>ÀÀ>ÌÀÃ¶ Theme:Ê iÃÊÌiÊÜÀÊ>ÛiÊ>ÊÛiÀ>ÊÌiiÊ>ÊViÌÀ>ÊÃ}ÌÊ

>LÕÌÊ«i«iÊÀÊ>ÊÌÀÕÌÊ>LÕÌÊvi®¶ÊvÊÃ]ÊÜÊ`ÊìÌ>ÃÊÊÌiÊÜÀÊ Õ>ÌiÊÌÃÊÌii¶ Language:Ê iÃÊ>}Õ>}iÊpÊÃÕVÊ>ÃÊvÀ>ÊÀÊvÀ>]ÊÃÌ>`>À`Ê

ÀÊ`>iVÌ]Ê«ÀÃ>VÊÀÊ«iÌV]ÊVÊÀÊ«>ÃÃ>ÌiÊpÊÀiÛi>ÊÌiÊ V>À>VÌiÀÊvÊÃ«i>iÀÃ¶ÊÜÊ`ÊiÌ>«ÀÃ]ÊÃiÃ]Ê>`ÊÃiÃÀÞÊ >}iÃÊVÌÀLÕÌiÊÌÊÌiÊÜÀ¶ÊÜÊ`ÊÀiVÕÀÀ}Ê>}iÃÊiÀVÊ ÌiÊÜÀÊ>`ÊÌÊ>ÌÊÌÃÊi>}¶Ê/ÊÜ>ÌÊiÝÌiÌÊ`ÊÃiÌiViÊ ÀÞÌÃÊ>`ÊÃÕ`ÃÊÕìÀÃVÀiÊÌiÊÜÀÌiÀ½ÃÊi>}¶

Questions about social context Historical context:Ê 7>ÌÊìÃÊÌiÊÜÀÊÀiÛi>Ê>LÕÌÊÌiÊÌiÊ>`Ê

«>ViÊÊÜVÊÌÊÜ>ÃÊÜÀÌÌi¶Ê iÃÊÌiÊÜÀÊ>««i>ÀÊÌÊ«ÀÌiÊÀÊ ÕìÀiÊ>Ê«Ã«ÞÊÌ>ÌÊÜ>ÃÊ««Õ>ÀÊÊÌÃÊÌi]ÊÃÕVÊ>ÃÊÃV>Ê >ÀÜÃÊÊÌiÊ>ÌiÊiÌiiÌÊViÌÕÀÞÊÀÊ}L>â>ÌÊÊÌiÊ>ÌiÊ ÌÜiÌiÌÊViÌÕÀÞ¶ Class:Ê ÜÊìÃÊiLiÀÃ«ÊÊ>ÊÃV>ÊV>ÃÃÊ>vviVÌÊÌiÊ

V>À>VÌiÀÃ½ÊVViÃÊ>`ÊÌiÀÊÃÕVViÃÃiÃÊÀÊv>ÕÀiÃ¶ÊÜÊìÃÊ

6

ÌiÀ«ÀiÌ>ÌÊ UÊ µÕiÃÌÃÊ>LÕÌÊ ÌiÝÌÃÊ UÊ ÌiÃÃÊ UÊ ÕÌi

MLA

55c

V>ÃÃÊ>vviVÌÊÌiÊÜ>ÞÊV>À>VÌiÀÃÊÛiÜÊpÊÀÊ>ÀiÊÛiÜi`ÊLÞÊpÊÌiÀÃ¶Ê 7>ÌÊ`ÊiVVÊÃÌÀÕ}}iÃÊÀiÛi>Ê>LÕÌÊ«ÜiÀÊÀi>ÌÃ«ÃÊÊ ÌiÊÃViÌÞÊLi}Êì«VÌi`¶ Race and culture:Ê ÀiÊ>ÞÊV>À>VÌiÀÃÊ«ÀÌÀ>Þi`Ê>ÃÊLi}ÊV>Õ}ÌÊ LiÌÜiiÊVÕÌÕÀiÃ\ÊLiÌÜiiÊÌiÊVÕÌÕÀiÃÊvÊiÊ>`ÊÜÀ]ÊvÀÊ iÝ>«i]ÊÀÊLiÌÜiiÊ>ÊÌÀ>`Ì>Ê>`Ê>ÊiiÀ}}ÊVÕÌÕÀi¶ÊÀiÊ >ÞÊV>À>VÌiÀÃÊÃÌÀÕ}}}Ê>}>ÃÌÊÃViÌÞÊLiV>ÕÃiÊvÊÌiÀÊÀ>ViÊ ÀÊiÌVÊL>V}ÀÕ`¶Ê/ÊÜ>ÌÊiÝÌiÌÊìÃÊÌiÊÜÀÊViiLÀ>ÌiÊ>Ê Ã«iVwVÊVÕÌÕÀiÊ>`ÊÌÃÊÌÀ>`ÌÃ¶ Gender:Ê ÀiÊ>ÞÊV>À>VÌiÀÃ½ÊVViÃÊÀiÃÌÀVÌi`ÊLiV>ÕÃiÊvÊ }iìÀ¶Ê7>ÌÊ>ÀiÊÌiÊ«ÜiÀÊÀi>ÌÃ«ÃÊLiÌÜiiÊÌiÊÃiÝiÃ]Ê>`Ê `ÊÌiÃiÊV>}iÊ`ÕÀ}ÊÌiÊVÕÀÃiÊvÊÌiÊÜÀ¶Ê Ê>ÞÊV>À>VÌiÀÃÊ ÀiÃÃÌÊÌiÊ}iìÀÊÀiÃÊÌ>ÌÊÃViÌÞÊ>ÃÊ>ÃÃ}i`ÊÌÊÌi¶Ê ÊÌiÀÊ V>À>VÌiÀÃÊVÃiÊÌÊVvÀÊÌÊÌÃiÊÀiÃ¶ Archetypes:Ê iÃÊ>ÊV>À>VÌiÀ]Ê>Ê>}i]ÊÀÊ>Ê«ÌÊwÌÊ>Ê«>ÌÌiÀÊpÊ>Ê

>ÀViÌÞ«iÊpÊÌ>ÌÊ>ÃÊLiiÊÀi«i>Ìi`ÊÊÃÌÀiÃÊÌÀÕ}ÕÌÊÃÌÀÞÊ>`Ê >VÀÃÃÊVÕÌÕÀiÃ¶ÊÀÊiÝ>«i]Êi>ÀÞÊiÛiÀÞÊVÕÌÕÀiÊ>ÃÊÃÌÀiÃÊ>LÕÌÊ iÀiÃ]ÊµÕiÃÌÃ]ÊÀiì«Ì]Ê>`ÊÀiÛi}i°®ÊÜÊìÃÊ>Ê>ÀViÌÞ«>Ê V>À>VÌiÀ]Ê>}i]ÊÀÊ«ÌÊiÊVÀÀiÃ«`ÊÌÊÀÊ`vviÀÊvÀÊÌiÀÃÊiÊÌ¶

In the introduction of your paper, you will usually announce your interpretation in a one- or two-sentence thesis. The thesis answers the central question that you posed. Here, for example, is Margaret Peel’s two-sentence thesis: Langston Hughes’s “Ballad of the Landlord” is narrated through four voices, each with its own perspective on the poem’s action. These opposing voices—of a tenant, a landlord, the police, and the press— dramatize a black man’s experience in a society dominated by whites.

55c Draft a thesis and organize your ideas. A thesis, which nearly always appears in the introduction, announces an essay’s main point (see also 1c and 50a). In a literature paper, your thesis will answer the central question that you have asked about the work. Putting your draft thesis and notes into an informal outline can help you organize your ideas.

595

596

55c

MLA


Drafting a thesis In drafting your thesis, aim for a strong, assertive summary of your interpretation. Here, for example, are two successful thesis statements taken from student essays, together with the central question each student had posed. QUESTION

What does Stephen Crane’s short story “The Open Boat” reveal about the relation between humans and nature? THESIS

In Stephen Crane’s gripping tale “The Open Boat,” four men lost at sea discover not only that nature is indifferent to their fate but also that their own particular talents make little difference as they struggle for survival. QUESTION

In the Greek tragedy Electra, by Euripides, how do Electra and her mother, Clytemnestra, respond to the limitations society has placed on women? THESIS

The experience of powerlessness has taught Electra and her mother two very different lessons: Electra has learned the value of traditional, conservative sex roles for women, but Clytemnestra has learned just the opposite.

As in other college papers, the thesis of a literature paper should not be too factual, too broad, or too vague (see 1e). For an essay on Mark Twain’s Huckleberry Finn, the first three examples would all make poor thesis statements. TOO FACTUAL

As a runaway slave, Jim is in danger from the law. TOO BROAD

In Huckleberry Finn, Mark Twain criticizes mid-nineteenth-century American society.

ÌiÃÃÊ UÊ ÕÌiÊ UÊ ÀiÃ«`}ÊÌÊ>Ê µÕiÃÌÊ UÊ ÃiÌV}Ê>Ê«>

MLA

55c

TOO VAGUE

Huckleberry Finn is Twain’s most exciting work.

The following thesis statement is sharply focused and presents a central idea that requires discussion and support. ACCEPTABLE THESIS

Because Huckleberry Finn is a naive narrator, his comments on conventional religion are ironic at every turn, allowing Twain to poke fun at empty piety. hackerhandbooks.com/bedhandbook > Research exercises > E-ex 55–1

Sketching an outline Your thesis may strongly suggest a method of organization, in which case you will have little difficulty jotting down your essay’s key points. Consider, for example, the following informal outline, based on a thesis that leads naturally to a threepart organization. Thesis: George Bernard Shaw’s Major Barbara depicts the ways in which three “religions” address the problem of poverty. The Established Church ignores poverty, the Salvation Army tries rather ineffectually to alleviate it, and a form of utopianism based on guns and money promises to eliminate it—but at a terrible cost.

U The Established Church (Lady Britomart) s 4HE3ALVATION!RMY-AJOR"ARBARA s 5TOPIANISMBASEDONGUNSANDMONEY5NDERSHAFT If your thesis does not by itself suggest a method of organization, turn to your notes and begin putting them into categories that relate to the thesis. For example, one student who was writing about Euripides’s play Medea constructed the following formal outline from her notes. Thesis: Although Medea professes great love for her children, Euripides gives us reason to suspect her sincerity: Medea does not hesitate to use the children as weapons in her bloody battle with Jason, and from the outset she displays little real concern for their fate.

597

598

55c

MLA


I.

From the very beginning of the play, Medea is a less than ideal mother. A. Her first words about the children are hostile. B. Her first actions suggest indifference. II. In three scenes, Medea appears to be a loving mother, but in each of these scenes we have reason to doubt her sincerity. III. Throughout the play, as Medea plots her revenge, her overriding concern is not her children but her reputation. A. Fearing ridicule, she is proud of her reputation as one who can “help her friends and hurt her enemies.” B. Her obsession with reputation may stem from the Greek view of reputation as a means of immortality. IV. After she kills her children, Medea reveals her real concern. A. She shows no remorse. B. She revels in Jason’s agony over their death.

Whether to use a formal or an informal outline is to some extent a matter of personal preference. For most purposes, you will probably find that an informal outline is sufficient, perhaps even preferable. (See 1d.)

Drafting an introduction that announces your interpretation The introduction to a literature paper is usually one paragraph long—and often begins with a few sentences that provide context for your thesis. The opening paragraph typically ends with your thesis, a single sentence that sums up your interpretation. Here, for example, is an introductory paragraph announcing one student’s interpretation of one aspect of the play Electra. The first four sentences provide context for the thesis (underlined). In Electra, Euripides depicts two women who have had too little control over their lives. Electra, ignored by her mother, Clytemnestra, has been married off to a farmer and treated more or less like a slave. Clytemnestra has fared even worse. Her husband, Agamemnon, has slashed the throat of their daughter Iphigenia as a sacrifice to the gods. The experience of powerlessness has taught Electra and her

ÌiÃÃÊ UÊ ÕÌiÊ UÊ ÌÀ`ÕVÌÊ UÊ VÕ`}ÊìÌ>ÃÊvÀÊÌiÊÜÀ

MLA

55d

mother two very different lessons: Electra has learned the value of traditional, conservative sex roles for women, but Clytemnestra has learned just the opposite.

55d Support your interpretation with evidence from the work; avoid plot summary. Your thesis and preliminary outline will point you toward details in the work relevant to your interpretation. As you begin drafting the body of your paper, make good use of those details.

Supporting your interpretation As a rule, the topic sentence of each paragraph in the body of your paper should focus on some aspect of your overall interpretation. The rest of the paragraph should present details and perhaps quotations from the work that back up your interpretation. In the following paragraph, which develops part of the organization sketched on page 597, the topic sentence comes first. It sums up the religious views represented by Lady Britomart, a character in George Bernard Shaw’s play Major Barbara. Lady Britomart, a member of the Established Church of England, reveals her superficial attitude toward religion in a scene that takes place in her fashionable London townhouse. Religion, according to Lady Britomart, is a morbid topic of conversation. She admonishes her daughter Barbara: “Really, Barbara, you go on as if religion were a pleasant subject. Do have some sense of propriety” (1.686-87). Religion is an unpleasant subject to Lady Britomart because, unlike Barbara, she finds no joy or humor within her religion. It is not simply that she is a humorless person, for she frequently displays a sharp wit. But in Lady Britomart’s upper-class world, religion has its proper place—a serious place bound by convention and cut off from the real world. When Undershaft suggests, for example, that religion can be a pleasant and profoundly important subject, Lady Britomart replies, “Well if you are determined to have it [religion], then I insist on having it in a proper and respectable way. Charles: ring for prayers” (1.690-93).

599

600

55d

MLA


Notice that the writer has quoted dialogue from the play to lend both flavor and substance to her interpretation (quotations are cited with the act and line numbers and are enclosed in quotation marks). Notice too that the writer is interpreting the work: She is not merely summarizing the plot.

Avoiding plot summary In a literature paper, it is tempting to rely heavily on plot summary and avoid interpretation. You can resist this temptation by paying special attention to your topic sentences. The following rough-draft topic sentence, for instance, led to a plot summary rather than an interpretation. As they drift down the river on a raft, Huck and the runaway slave Jim have many philosophical discussions.

The student’s revised topic sentence announces an interpretation. The theme of dawning moral awareness is reinforced by the many philosophical discussions between Huck and Jim, the runaway slave, as they drift down the river on a raft.

Usually a little effort can make the difference between a plot summary that cannot be developed and a focused, forceful interpretation. As with all forms of writing, revision is key. To avoid simple plot summary, keep the following strategies in mind as you write. UÊ 7iÊÞÕÊÜÀÌiÊvÀÊ>Ê>V>ìVÊ>ÕìVi]ÊÞÕÊV>Ê>Ãsume that readers have read the work. They don’t need a summary but are interested instead in your ideas about the work. UÊ *ÃiÊµÕiÃÌÃÊÌ>ÌÊi>`ÊÌÊ>ÊÌiÀ«ÀiÌ>ÌÊÀÊÕ`}ment of the work rather than to a summary. The questions in the chart on pages 594–95 can help steer you away from summary and toward interpretation. UÊ ,i>`ÊÞÕÀÊiÃÃ>ÞÊÕÌÊÕ`°ÊvÊÞÕÊi>ÀÊÞÕÀÃivÊÃÌ}Ê events from the work, stop and revise.

>Û`}Ê«ÌÊÃÕ>ÀÞÊ UÊ ÀiviÀÀ}ÊÌÊ>ÕÌÀÃ]Ê ÌÌiÃ]ÊV>À>VÌiÀÃÊ UÊ ÕÃ}Ê«ÀiÃiÌÊÌiÃi

MLA

55e

UÊ vÊÀ}>â}ÊÞÕÀÊ«>«iÀÊ>VVÀ`}ÊÌÊÌiÊÜÀ¿ÃÊÃiquence of events is getting in the way of your own ideas, look again at your outline and consider other ways of arranging your material.

55e Observe the conventions of literature papers. The academic discipline of English literature has certain conventions, or standard practices, that scholars in the field use when writing about literature. In your literature paper, it is important that you observe the conventions so that your readers’ attention will be focused on your interpretation, not on the details of your presentation.

Referring to authors, titles, and characters according to convention When referring to the author of a literary work or secondary source, such as a critical essay, you should give the author’s full name the first time you mention it; in subsequent references, you may use the last name only. As a rule, do not use personal titles such as Mr. or Ms. or Dr. when referring to authors. When you mention the title of a short story, an essay, or a short or medium-length poem, put the title in quotation marks (see 37d). Italicize the titles of novels, nonfiction books, plays, and long poems (see 42a). Refer to each character by the name most often used for him or her in the work. If, for instance, a character’s name is Lambert Strether and he is always referred to as “Strether,” do not call him “Lambert” or “Mr. Strether.” Similarly, write “Lady Macbeth,” not “Mrs. Macbeth.”

Using the present tense to describe fictional events Perhaps because fictional events have not actually occurred in the past, the literary convention is to describe them in the present tense. Until you become used to this convention, you may find yourself shifting between present and past tense. As

601

602

55f

MLA


you revise your draft, make sure that you have used the present tense consistently. INCONSISTENT USE OF TENSES

Octavia demands blind obedience from James and from all of her children. When James and Ty caught two redbirds in their trap, they wanted to play with them; Octavia, however, had other plans for the birds (89-90). CONSISTENT USE OF THE PRESENT TENSE

Octavia demands blind obedience from James and from all of her children. When James and Ty catch two redbirds in their trap, they want to play with them; Octavia, however, has other plans for the birds (89-90). NOTE: Also see pages 604–05 on avoiding shifts in tenses when

you integrate quotations from a work into your own text.

55f Integrate quotations from the work. Integrating quotations from a literary work can lend vivid support to your argument, but keep most quotations fairly short. Excessive use of long quotations interrupts the flow of your interpretation and can bore readers. Integrating quotations smoothly into your own text can present a challenge. Because of the complexities of literature, do not be surprised to find yourself puzzling over the most graceful way to tuck in a short phrase or the clearest way to introduce a more extended passage from the work.

Using MLA style to cite and format passages quoted from the work Unless your instructor suggests otherwise, use MLA (Modern Language Association) style for citing and formatting passages quoted from literary works. MLA style typically requires that you name the author of the work quoted and give a page number for the exact location of the passage in the work. When writing about nonfiction

ÌiÃiÃÊ UÊ µÕÌ}ÊvÀÊÌiÊÜÀÊ UÊ ÀiviÀÀ}ÊÌÊÌiÊ>ÀÀ>ÌÀ]ÊÃ«i>iÀ]ÊÀÊÜÀ

MLA

55f

articles and books, introduce a quotation with a signal phrase naming the author (John Smith points out . . .) or place the author’s name and page number in parentheses at the end of the quoted passage: . . . for all time” (Smith 22). When writing about a single work of fiction, you do not need to include the author’s name each time you quote from the work. You will name the author in the introduction to your paper. Then, when you are quoting from the work, include just the page number in parentheses following the quotation (see the second example on p. 604). You may, of course, use the author’s name in a signal phrase to highlight the author’s role or technique, but you are not required to do so. MLA guidelines for handling citations in the text of your paper differ somewhat for short stories or novels, poems, and plays, each of which is discussed in this section (see pp. 605–08). (If your instructor requires a works cited page, see p. 620.)

Introducing literary quotations When introducing quotations from a literary work, make sure that you don’t confuse the author with the narrator of a story, the speaker of a poem, or a character in a story or play. Instead of naming the author, you can refer to the narrator or speaker — or to the work itself. INAPPROPRIATE

Poet Andrew Marvell describes his fear of death like this: “But at my back I always hear / Time’s wingèd chariot hurrying near” (21-22). APPROPRIATE

Addressing his beloved in an attempt to win her sexual favors, the speaker of the poem argues that death gives them no time to waste: “But at my back I always hear / Time’s wingèd chariot hurrying near” (21-22). APPROPRIATE

The poem “To His Coy Mistress” says as much about fleeting time and death as it does about sexual passion. Its most powerful lines are “But at my back I always hear / Time’s wingèd chariot hurrying near” (21-22).

603

604

55f

MLA


In the last example, you could mention the author as well: Marvell’s poem “To His Coy Mistress” says as much. . . . Although the author is mentioned, readers will not confuse him with the speaker of the poem.

Providing context for quotations When you quote the words of a narrator, speaker, or character in a literary work, you should name who is speaking and provide a context for the quoted words. In the following examples, the quoted dialogue is from Tennessee Williams’s play The Glass Menagerie and Shirley Jackson’s short story “The Lottery.” Laura is so completely under Amanda’s spell that when urged to make a wish on the moon, she asks, “What shall I wish for, Mother?” (1.5.140). When a neighbor suggests that the lottery should be abandoned, Old Man Warner responds, “There’s always been a lottery” (284).

Avoiding shifts in tense when quoting Because it is conventional to write about literature in the present tense (see pp. 601–02) and because literary works often use other tenses, you will need to exercise some care when weaving quotations into your own writing. A first-draft attempt may result in an awkward shift between your words and the quoted text, as it did for one student who was writing about Nadine Gordimer’s short story “Friday’s Footprint.” TENSE SHIFT

When Rita sees Johnny’s relaxed attitude, “she blushed, like a wave of illness” (159).

To avoid the distracting shift from present to past tense, the writer had two choices: to paraphrase the reference to Rita’s blushing and reduce the length of the quotation or to change the verb in the quotation to the present tense, using brackets to indicate the change.

µÕÌ}ÊvÀÊ>ÊÜÀÊ UÊ «ÀiÃiÌÊÌiÃiÊ UÊ µÕÌ>ÌÊ ÜÌÊ>ÊµÕÌ>ÌÊ UÊ vÀ>ÌÌ}ÊµÕÌ>ÌÃÊ

MLA

55f

REVISED

When Rita sees Johnny’s relaxed attitude, she is overcome with embarrassment, “like a wave of illness” (159). REVISED

When Rita sees Johnny’s relaxed attitude, “she blushe[s], like a wave of illness” (159).

Using brackets around just one letter of a word can seem fussy, so the writer chose the first revision. (For advice on using brackets to indicate changes in a quotation, see 39c.)

Using quotations within quotations In writing about literature, you may sometimes want to use a quotation that has another quotation embedded in it — when you are integrating dialogue from a novel, for example. In such cases, set off the main quotation with double quotation marks, as you usually would, and set off the embedded quotation with single quotation marks. (See also 37c.) The following example from a student paper integrates lines from Amy Tan’s novel The Hundred Secret Senses. Early in the novel the narrator’s half-sister Kwan sees—or thinks she sees—ghosts: “‘Libby-ah,’ she’ll say to me. ‘Guess who I see yesterday, you guess.’ And I don’t have to guess that she’s talking about someone dead” (3).

Formatting quotations MLA guidelines for formatting quotations differ somewhat for short stories or novels, poems, and plays. Short stories or novels To cite a passage from a short story or a novel, use a page number in parentheses after the quoted words. The narrator of Eudora Welty’s “Why I Live at the P.O.,” known to us only as “Sister,” makes many catty remarks about her enemies. For example, she calls Mr. Whitaker “this photographer with the pop-eyes” (46).

605

606

55f

MLA


If a novel has numbered divisions, give the page number and a semicolon; then indicate the book, part, or chapter in which the passage is found. Use abbreviations such as “bk.” and “ch.” White relies on past authors to help retell the legend of King Arthur. The narrator does not provide specifics about Lancelot’s tournament at Corbin, instead telling readers, “If you want to read about the Corbin tournament, Malory has it” (489; bk. 3, ch. 39).

When a quotation from a work of fiction takes up four or fewer typed lines, put it in quotation marks and run it into the text of your essay, as in the two previous examples. When a quotation is five lines or longer, set it off from the text by indenting one inch from the left margin; when you set a quotation off from the text, do not use quotation marks. Put the parenthetical citation after the final mark of punctuation. Sister’s tale begins with “I,” and she makes every event revolve around herself, even her sister’s marriage: I was getting along fine with Mama, Papa-Daddy, and Uncle Rondo until my sister Stella-Rondo just separated from her husband and came back home again. Mr. Whitaker! Of course I went with Mr. Whitaker first, when he first appeared here in China Grove, taking “Pose Yourself” photos, and StellaRondo broke us up. (46)

Poems To cite lines from a poem, use line numbers in parentheses at the end of the quotation. For the first reference, use the word “lines”: (lines 1-2). Thereafter use just the numbers: (12-13). The opening lines of Frost’s “Fire and Ice” strike a conversational tone: “Some say the world will end in fire, / Some say in ice” (1-2).

Enclose quotations of three or fewer lines of poetry in quotation marks within your text, and indicate line breaks with a slash, as in the example just given. (See also 39e and item 25 on p. 528.)

µÕÌ}ÊvÀÊÌiÊÜÀÊ UÊ vÀ>ÌÌ}ÊµÕÌ>ÌÃÊ

MLA

55f

When you quote four or more lines of poetry, set the quotation off from the text by indenting one inch and omit the quotation marks. Put the line numbers in parentheses after the final mark of punctuation. In the second stanza of “A Noiseless Patient Spider,” Whitman turns the spider’s weaving into a metaphor for the activity of the human soul: And you O my soul where you stand, Surrounded, detached, in measureless oceans of space, Ceaselessly musing, venturing, throwing, seeking the spheres to connect them, Till the bridge you will need be form’d, till the ductile anchor hold, Till the gossamer thread you fling catch somewhere, O my soul. (6-10) NOTE: If any line of the poem takes up more than one line of your paper, carry the extra words to the next line of the paper and indent them an additional one-quarter inch, as in the previous example. Alternatively, you may indent the entire poem a little less than one inch to fit the long line.

Plays To cite lines from a play, include the act number, scene number, and line numbers (as many of these as are available) in parentheses at the end of the quotation. Separate the numbers with periods, and use arabic numerals unless your instructor prefers roman numerals. Two attendants silently watch as the sleepwalking Lady Macbeth subconsciously struggles with her guilt: “Here’s the smell of the blood still. All the perfumes of Arabia will not sweeten this little hand” (5.1.50-51).

If no act, scene, or line numbers are available, use a page number. When a quotation from a play takes up four or fewer typed lines in your paper and is spoken by only one character, put quotation marks around it and run it into the text of your

607

608

55f

MLA


essay, as in the previous example. If the quotation consists of two or three lines from a verse play, use a slash for line breaks, as for poetry (see p. 606). When a dramatic quotation by a single character is five typed lines or longer (or more than three lines in a verse play), indent it one inch from the left margin and omit quotation marks. Include the citation in parentheses after the final mark of punctuation. Speaking to Electra, Clytemnestra complains about the sexual double standard that has allowed her husband to justify sacrificing her other daughter, Iphigenia, to the gods. She asks what would have happened if Menelaus, and not his wife Helen, had been seized by the Trojans: If Menelaus had been raped from home on the sly, should I have had to kill Orestes so my sister’s husband could be rescued? You think your father would have borne it? He would have killed me. Then why was it fair for him to kill what belonged to me and not be killed? (1041-45)

When quoting dialogue between two or more characters in a play, no matter how many lines you use, set the quotation off from the text. Type each character’s name in all capital letters at a one-inch indent from the left margin. Indent subsequent lines under the character’s name an additional onequarter inch. Throughout The Importance of Being Earnest, Algernon criticizes romance and the institution of marriage, as in the scene when he learns of Jack’s intention to marry Gwendolen: ALGERNON. My dear fellow, the way you flirt with Gwendolen is perfectly disgraceful. It is almost as bad as the way Gwendolen flirts with you. JACK. I am in love with Gwendolen. I have come up to town expressly to propose to her. ALGERNON. I thought you had come up for pleasure? — I call that business. (act 1)

µÕÌ}ÊvÀÊ>ÊÜÀÊ UÊ vÀ>ÌÌ}Ê µÕÌ>ÌÃÊ UÊ `VÕiÌ}ÊÃÕÀViÃÊ

MLA

55g

55g If you use secondary sources, document them appropriately and avoid plagiarism. Many literature papers rely wholly on primary sources — the literary text under discussion. (For an example of an essay with only a primary source, see pp. 611–13.) Other literature papers use some ideas from secondary sources, such as articles or books of literary criticism, biographies of the author, the author’s own essays and autobiography, or histories of the era in which the work was written. (For an example of a paper that uses secondary sources, see pp. 615–20.) Even if you use secondary sources, your main goal should always be to develop your own understanding and interpretation of the literary work. Whenever you use secondary sources, you must document them, and you must avoid plagiarism. Plagiarism is unacknowledged borrowing — whether intentional or unintentional — of a source’s words or ideas. (See 51b.)

Documenting secondary sources Most literature papers use the documentation system recommended by the Modern Language Association (MLA). This system of documentation is discussed in detail in 53. MLA recommends in-text citations that refer readers to a list of works cited. An in-text citation names the author of the source, often in a signal phrase, and gives the page number in parentheses. At the end of the paper, a list of works cited provides publication information about the sources used in the paper. SAMPLE MLA IN-TEXT CITATION

Arguing that fate has little to do with the tragedy that befalls Oedipus, Bernard Knox writes that “the catastrophe of Oedipus is that he discovers his own identity; and for his discovery he is first and last responsible” (6).

609

610

55h

MLA


The signal phrase names the author of the secondary source; the number in parentheses is the page on which the quoted words appear. Anyone interested in knowing additional information about the secondary source can consult the list of works cited at the end of the paper. Here, for example, is the works cited entry for the work referred to in the sample in-text citation. SAMPLE ENTRY IN THE LIST OF WORKS CITED

Knox, Bernard. Oedipus at Thebes: Sophocles’ Tragic Hero and His Time. New York: Norton, 1971. Print.

As you document secondary sources with in-text citations, consult 53a; as you construct your list of works cited, consult 53b.

Avoiding plagiarism The rules about plagiarism are the same for literary papers as for other research writing (see 48c and 51 for important details). To be fair and ethical, you must acknowledge your debt to the writers of any sources you use. If an interpretation was suggested to you by another critic’s work or if an obscure point was clarified by someone else’s research, it is your responsibility to cite the source. If you have borrowed any phrases or sentences from your source, you must put them in quotation marks and credit the author.

55h Sample literature papers Following are two sample essays. The first, by Margaret Peel, has no secondary sources. (Its primary source, Langston Hughes’s “Ballad of the Landlord,” appears on p. 614.) The second sample paper, by Dan Larson, uses secondary sources. hackerhandbooks.com/bedhandbook > Model papers > MLA papers: Peel > MLA papers: Larson

`VÕiÌ}ÊÃÕÀViÃÊ UÊ >Û`}Ê «>}>ÀÃÊ UÊ Ã>«iÊÌiÀ>ÌÕÀiÊ«>«iÀÊ

55h

MLA

611

Peel 1 Margaret Peel Professor Lin English 102 20 April 2005 Opposing Voices in “Ballad of the Landlord” Langston Hughes’s “Ballad of the Landlord” is narrated through four voices, each with its own perspective on the poem’s action. These opposing voices—of a tenant, a landlord, the police, and the press—

/iÃÃÊÃÌ>ÌiÃÊ*ii½ÃÊ main idea.

dramatize a black man’s experience in a society dominated by whites. The main voice in the poem is that of the tenant, who, as the last line tells us, is black. The tenant is characterized by his informal, nonstandard speech. He uses slang (“Ten Bucks”), contracted words (‘member, more’n), and nonstandard grammar (“These steps is broken down”). This colloquial English suggests the tenant’s separation from

iÌ>ÃÊvÀÊÌiÊ«iÊ ÕÃÌÀ>ÌiÊ*ii½ÃÊ«Ì°

the world of convention, represented by the formal voices of the police and the press, which appear later in the poem. Although the tenant uses nonstandard English, his argument is organized and logical. He begins with a reasonable complaint and a gentle reminder that the complaint is already a week old: “My roof has sprung a leak. / Don’t you ’member I told you about it / Way last week?” (lines 2-4). In the second stanza, he appeals diplomatically to the landlord’s self-interest: “These steps is broken down. / When you come up yourself / It’s a wonder you don’t fall down” (6-8). In the third stanza, when the landlord has responded to his complaints with a demand for rent money, the tenant becomes more forceful, but his voice is still reasonable: “Ten Bucks you say is due? / Well, that’s Ten

/iÊwÀÃÌÊVÌ>ÌÊ vÊiÃÊvÊÌiÊ «iÊVÕìÃÊ ÌiÊÜÀ`ÊºiÃ°» -ÕLÃiµÕiÌÊVÌ>ÌÃÊ vÀÊÌiÊ«iÊ >ÀiÊVÌi`ÊÜÌÊiÊ ÕLiÀÃÊ>i°

Bucks more’n I’ll pay you / Till you fix this house up new” (10-12). The fourth stanza marks a shift in the tone of the argument. At this point the tenant responds more emotionally, in reaction to


/«VÊÃiÌiViÊ vVÕÃiÃÊÊ>Ê ÌiÀ«ÀiÌ>Ì°

612

55h

MLA


Peel 2 the landlord’s threats to evict him. By the fifth stanza, the tenant has unleashed his anger: “Um-huh! You talking high and mighty” (17). Hughes uses an exclamation point for the first time; the tenant is raising his voice at last. As the argument gets more heated, the tenant finally resorts to the language of violence: “You ain’t gonna be able to say a word / If I land my fist on you” (19-20). /À>ÃÌÊ«Ài«>ÀiÃÊ Ài>ìÀÃÊvÀÊÌiÊiÝÌÊ Ì«V°

These are the last words the tenant speaks in the poem. Perhaps Hughes wants to show how black people who threaten violence are silenced. When a new voice is introduced—the landlord‘s—the poem shifts to a frantic tone: Police! Police! Come and get this man! He’s trying to ruin the government And overturn the land! (21-24) This response is clearly an overreaction to a small threat. Instead of dealing with the tenant directly, the landlord shouts for the police. His hysterical voice—marked by repetitions and punctuated with

*iiÊÌiÀ«ÀiÌÃÊÌiÊ >`À`¿ÃÊÀiÃ«Ãi°

exclamation points—reveals his disproportionate fear and outrage. And his conclusions are equally excessive: this black man, he claims, is out to “ruin the government” and “overturn the land.” Although the landlord’s overreaction is humorous, it is sinister as well, because the landlord knows that, no matter how excessive his claims are, he has the police and the law on his side.

*iiÊÃÜÃÊÜÊ iÌiÀÊ>`ÊÀÞiÊ ÃÕ««ÀÌÊÌiÊ«i½ÃÊ i>}°

In line 25, the regular meter and rhyme of the poem break down, perhaps showing how an arrest disrupts everyday life. The “voice” in lines 25-29 has two parts: the clanging sound of the police (“Copper’s whistle! / Patrol bell!”) and, in sharp contrast, the unemotional, factual tone of a police report (“Arrest. / Precinct Station. / Iron cell.”).

Ã>«iÊÌiÀ>ÌÕÀiÊ«>«iÀ

55h

MLA

613

Peel 3 The last voice in the poem is the voice of the press, represented in newspaper headlines: “MAN THREATENS LANDLORD/

*iiÊÃÕÃÊÕ«ÊiÀÊ ÌiÀ«ÀiÌ>Ì°

TENANT HELD NO BAIL / JUDGE GIVES NEGRO 90 DAYS IN COUNTY JAIL” (31-33). Meter and rhyme return here, as if to show that once the tenant is arrested, life can go on as usual. The language of the press, like that of the police, is cold and distant, and it gives the tenant less and less status. In line 31, he is a “man”; in line 32, he has been demoted to a “tenant”; and in line 33, he has become a “Negro,” or just another statistic. By using four opposing voices in “Ballad of the Landlord,” Hughes effectively dramatizes different views of minority assertiveness. To the tenant, assertiveness is informal and natural, as his language shows; to the landlord, it is a dangerous threat, as his hysterical response suggests. The police response is, like the language that describes it, short and sharp. Finally, the press’s view of events, represented by the headlines, is distant and unsympathetic. By the end of the poem, we understand the predicament of the black man. Exploited by the landlord, politically oppressed by those who think he’s out “to ruin the government,” physically restrained by the police and the judicial system, and denied his individuality by the press, he is saved only by his own sense of humor. The very title of the poem suggests his—and Hughes’s—sense of humor. The tenant is singing a ballad to his oppressors, but this ballad is no love song. It portrays the oppressors, through their own voices, in an unflattering light: the landlord as cowardly and ridiculous, the police and press as dull and soulless. The tenant may lack political power, but he speaks with vitality, and no one can say he lacks dignity or the spirit to survive.

*iiÊVVÕìÃÊÜÌÊ>Ê >>ÞÃÃÊvÊÌiÊ«i½ÃÊ «ÌV>ÊÃ}wV>Vi°

614

55h

MLA


Ballad of the Landlord LANGSTON HUGHES

Landlord, landlord, My roof has sprung a leak. Don’t you ’member I told you about it Way last week? Landlord, landlord, These steps is broken down. When you come up yourself It’s a wonder you don’t fall down. Ten Bucks you say I owe you? Ten Bucks you say is due? Well, that’s Ten Bucks more’n I’ll pay you Till you fix this house up new. What? You gonna get eviction orders? You gonna cut off my heat? You gonna take my furniture and Throw it in the street? Um-huh! You talking high and mighty. Talk on — till you get through. You ain’t gonna be able to say a word If I land my fist on you. Police! Police! Come and get this man! He’s trying to ruin the government And overturn the land! Copper’s whistle! Patrol bell! Arrest. Precinct Station. Iron cell. Headlines in press: MAN THREATENS LANDLORD TENANT HELD NO BAIL JUDGE GIVES NEGRO

90 DAYS IN COUNTY JAIL


MLA

55h

615

Larson 1 Dan Larson Professor Duncan English 102 18 April 2005 The Transformation of Mrs. Peters: An Analysis of “A Jury of Her Peers” In Susan Glaspell’s 1917 short story “A Jury of Her Peers,” two women accompany their husbands and a county attorney to an isolated

/iÊ«i}ÊiÃÊ >iÊÌiÊÃÌÀÞÊ>`Ê iÃÌ>LÃÊVÌiÝÌ°

house where a farmer named John Wright has been choked to death in his bed with a rope. The chief suspect is Wright’s wife, Minnie, who is in jail awaiting trial. The sheriff’s wife, Mrs. Peters, has come along to gather some personal items for Minnie, and Mrs. Hale has joined

*ÀiÃiÌÊÌiÃiÊÃÊÕÃi`Ê ÌÊìÃVÀLiÊìÌ>ÃÊ vÀÊÌiÊÃÌÀÞ°

her. Early in the story, Mrs. Hale sympathizes with Minnie and objects to the way the male investigators are “snoopin’ round and criticizin’ ” her kitchen (200). In contrast, Mrs. Peters shows respect for the law, saying that the men are doing “no more than their duty” (201). By the end of the story, however, Mrs. Peters has joined Mrs. Hale in a

+ÕÌ>ÌÃÊvÀÊÌiÊ ÃÌÀÞÊ>ÀiÊVÌi`ÊÜÌÊ «>}iÊÕLiÀÃÊÊ «>ÀiÌiÃiÃ°

conspiracy of silence, lied to the men, and committed a crime—hiding key evidence. What causes this dramatic change? One critic, Leonard Mustazza, argues that Mrs. Hale recruits

/iÊ«i}Ê«>À>}À>«Ê i`ÃÊÜÌÊ>ÀÃ¿ÃÊ ÀiÃi>ÀVÊµÕiÃÌ°

Mrs. Peters “as a fellow ‘juror’ in the case, moving the sheriff’s wife away from her sympathy for her husband’s position and towards identification with the accused woman” (494). While this is true, Mrs. Peters also reaches insights on her own. Her observations in the kitchen lead her to understand Minnie’s grim and lonely plight as the wife of an abusive farmer, and her identification with both Minnie and Mrs. Hale is strengthened as the men conducting the investigation trivialize the lives of women.


/iÊÌiÃÃÊ>ÃÃiÀÌÃÊ >ÀÃ½ÃÊ>Ê«Ì°

616

55h

MLA


Larson 2 The first evidence that Mrs. Peters reaches understanding on her own surfaces in the following passage: Ê}ÊµÕÌ>ÌÊÃÊÃiÌÊ vvÊLÞÊìÌ}ÊÜÌÊ ÊµÕÌ>ÌÊ>ÀÃ°Ê

«ÃÃÊ`ÌÃÊ`V>ÌiÊ>Ê ÃiÌiViÊÌÌi`ÊvÀÊ ÌiÊÃÕÀVi°

The sheriff’s wife had looked from the stove to the sink—to the pail of water which had been carried in from outside. . . . That look of seeing into things, of seeing through a thing to something else, was in the eyes of the sheriff’s wife now. (203) Something about the stove, the sink, and the pail of water connects with her own experience, giving Mrs. Peters a glimpse into the life of Minnie Wright. The details resonate with meaning.

>ÀÃÊÃÕ> ÀâiÃÊì>ÃÊvÀÊ>Ê ÃiV`>ÀÞÊÃÕÀViÊ >`ÊÌiÊµÕÌiÃÊ vÀÊÌ>ÌÊÃÕÀViÆÊ iÊ>iÃÊÌiÊ >ÕÌÀÊÊ>ÊÃ}>Ê «À>ÃiÊ>`Ê}ÛiÃÊ >Ê«>}iÊÕLiÀÊÊ «>ÀiÌiÃiÃ°

Social historian Elaine Hedges argues that such details, which evoke the drudgery of a farm woman’s work, would not have been lost upon Glaspell’s readers in 1917. Hedges tells us what the pail and the stove, along with another detail from the story—a dirty towel on a roller—would have meant to women of the time. Laundry was a dreaded all-day affair. Water had to be pumped, hauled, and boiled; then the wash was rubbed, rinsed, wrung through a wringer, carried outside, and hung on a line to dry. “What the women see, beyond the pail and the stove,” writes Hedges, “are the hours of work it took Minnie to produce that one clean towel” (56).

/«VÊÃiÌiViÃÊ vVÕÃÊÊ>ÀÃ½ÃÊ ÌiÀ«ÀiÌ>Ì°

On her own, Mrs. Peters discovers clues about the motive for the murder. Her curiosity leads her to pick up a sewing basket filled with quilt pieces and then to notice something strange: a sudden row of badly sewn stitches. “What do you suppose she was so—nervous about?” asks Mrs. Peters (204). A short time later, Mrs. Peters spots another clue, an empty birdcage. Again she observes details on her own, in this case a broken door and hinge, suggesting that the cage has been roughly handled. In addition to noticing details, both women draw conclusions from them and speculate on their significance. When Mrs. Hale finds the


MLA

55h

617

Larson 3 dead canary beneath a quilt patch, for example, the women conclude that its neck has been wrung and understand who must have wrung it. As the women speculate on the significance of the dead canary, each connects the bird with her own experience. Mrs. Hale knows that Minnie once sang in the church choir, an activity that Mr. Wright put a

iÌ>ÃÊvÀÊÌiÊÃÌÀÞÊ «ÀÛìÊiÛìViÊvÀÊ ÌiÊÌiÀ«ÀiÌ>Ì°

stop to, just as he put a stop to the bird’s singing. Also, as a farmer’s wife, Mrs. Hale understands the desolation and loneliness of life on the prairie. She sees that the bird was both a thing of beauty and a companion. “If there had been years and years of—nothing, then a bird to sing to you,” says Mrs. Hale, “it would be awful—still—after the bird was still” (208). To Mrs. Peters, the stillness of the canary evokes memories of the time when she and her husband homesteaded in the northern plains. “I know what stillness is,” she says, as she recalls the death of her first child, with no one around to console her (208). Elaine Hedges has written movingly of the isolation that women experienced on late-nineteenth- and early-twentieth-century farms of the West and Midwest: Women themselves reported that it was not unusual to spend five months in a log cabin without seeing another woman . . . or to spend one and a half years after arriving «ÃÃÊ`ÌÃÊ`V>ÌiÊ ÌÌi`ÊÜÀ`ÃÊÜÌÊ before being able to take a trip to town. . . . (54) ÌiÊÃiÌiViÊ>`Ê To combat loneliness and monotony, says Hedges, many women >ÌÊÌiÊi`ÊvÊÌiÊ ÃiÌiVi° bought canaries and hung the cages outside their sod huts. The canaries provided music and color, a spot of beauty that “might spell the difference between sanity and madness” (60). Mrs. Peters and Mrs. Hale understand—and Glaspell’s readers in 1917 would have understood—what the killing of the bird means to Minnie. For Mrs. Peters, in fact, the act has a special significance. When she was a child, a boy axed her kitten to death and, as she says, “If they hadn’t held me back I would have . . . hurt him” (207).

618

55h

MLA


Larson 4 She has little difficulty comprehending Minnie’s murderous rage, for she has felt it herself. /À>ÃÌÊÃiÀÛiÃÊ>ÃÊ >ÊLÀ`}iÊvÀÊiÊ ÃiVÌÊvÊÌiÊ«>«iÀÊ ÌÊÌiÊiÝÌ°

Although Mrs. Peters’s growing empathy for Minnie stems largely from her observations, it is also prompted by her negative reaction to the patronizing comments of the male investigators. At several points in the story, her body language reveals her feelings. For example, when Mr. Hale remarks that “women are used to worrying over trifles,” both women move closer together and remain silent. When the county attorney asks, “for all their worries, what would we do without the ladies?” the women do not speak, nor do they “unbend” (199). The fact that the women respond in exactly the same way reveals the extent to which they are bonding. Both women are annoyed at the way in which the men criticize and trivialize the world of women. The men question the difficulty of women’s work. For example, when the county attorney points to the dirty towel on the rack as evidence that Minnie wasn’t much of a housekeeper, Mrs. Hale replies, “There’s a great deal of work to be done on a farm” (199). Even the importance of women’s work is questioned. The men kid the women for trying to decide if Minnie was going to quilt or knot patches together for a quilt and laugh about such trivial concerns. Those very quilts, of course, kept the men warm at night and cost them nothing beyond the price of thread. The men also question the women’s wisdom and intelligence. For example, when the county attorney tells the women to keep their eyes out for clues, Mr. Hale replies, “But would the women know a clue if they did come upon it?” (200). The women’s response is to stand motionless and silent. The irony is that the men don’t see the household clues that are right in front of them.

>ÀÃÊ}ÛiÃÊ iÛìViÊÌ>ÌÊÀÃ° *iÌiÀÃÊ>ÃÊLiiÊ ÌÀ>ÃvÀi`°

By the end of the story, Mrs. Peters has been so transformed that she risks lying to the men. When the district attorney walks into the kitchen and notices the birdcage the women have found, he asks


MLA

55h

619

Larson 5 about the whereabouts of the bird. Mrs. Hale replies, “We think the cat got it,” even though she knows from Mrs. Peters that Minnie was afraid of cats and would not have owned one. Instead of correcting the lie, Mrs. Peters elaborates on it, saying of cats, “They’re superstitious, you know; they leave” (207). Clearly Mrs. Hale is willing to risk lying because she is confident that Mrs. Peters won’t contradict her. The Mrs. Peters character may have been based on a real sheriff’s wife. Seventeen years before writing “A Jury of Her Peers,” Susan Glaspell covered a murder case for the Des Moines Daily News.

>ÀÃÊ`À>ÜÃÊÊ>Ê ÃiV`>ÀÞÊÃÕÀViÊ Ì>ÌÊ}ÛiÃÊL>V}ÀÕ`Ê Ê>Ã«i½ÃÊvi°

A farmer’s wife, Margaret Hossack, was accused of murdering her sleeping husband with two axe blows to the head. In one of her newspaper reports, Glaspell wrote that the sheriff’s wife sat next to Mrs. Hossack and “frequently applied her handkerchief to her eyes” (qtd. in Ben-Zvi 30). We do not know from the short story the ultimate fate of Minnie Wright, but Margaret Hossack, whose case inspired the story, was found guilty, though the case was later thrown out by the Iowa Supreme Court. However, as Linda Ben-Zvi points out, the women’s guilt or innocence is not the issue: Whether Margaret Hossack or Minnie Wright committed murder is moot; what is incontrovertible is the brutality of their lives, the lack of options they had to redress grievances or to escape abusive husbands, and the complete disregard of their plight by the courts and by society. (38) These are the issues that Susan Glaspell wished to stress in “A Jury of Her Peers.” These are also the issues that Mrs. Peters comes to understand as the story unfolds, with her understanding deepening as she identifies with Minnie and Mrs. Hale and is repulsed by male attitudes. Her transformation becomes complete when the men joke that she is “married to the law” and she responds by violating the law: hiding key evidence, the dead canary.

>ÀÃ½ÃÊVVÕÃÊ iViÃÊÃÊ>Ê «ÌÊÜÌÕÌÊ`ÕÞÊ Ài«i>Ì}ÊÌ°

620

55h

MLA


Larson 6 Works Cited /iÊÜÀÃÊVÌi`Ê Ben-Zvi, Linda. “‘Murder, She Wrote’: The Genesis of Susan Glaspell’s «>}iÊÃÌÃÊÌiÊ«À>ÀÞÊ Trifles.” Theatre Journal 44.2 (1992): 141-62. Rpt. in Susan ÃÕÀViÊ>Ã«i½ÃÊ ÃÌÀÞ®Ê>`ÊÃiV`>ÀÞÊ Glaspell: Essays on Her Theater and Fiction. Ed. Ben-Zvi. Ann ÃÕÀViÃ° Arbor: U of Michigan P, 1995. 19-48. Print. Glaspell, Susan. “A Jury of Her Peers.” Literature and Its Writers: A Compact Introduction to Fiction, Poetry, and Drama. Ed. Ann Charters and Samuel Charters. 3rd ed. Boston: Bedford, 2004. 194-210. Print. Hedges, Elaine. “Small Things Reconsidered: ‘A Jury of Her Peers.’ ” Women’s Studies 12.1 (1986): 89-110. Rpt. in Susan Glaspell: Essays on Her Theater and Fiction. Ed. Linda Ben-Zvi. Ann Arbor: U of Michigan P, 1995. 49-69. Print. Mustazza, Leonard. “Generic Translation and Thematic Shift in Susan Glaspell’s Trifles and ‘A Jury of Her Peers.’ ” Studies in Short Fiction 26.4 (1989): 489-96. Print.

Ã>«iÊÊÌiÀ>ÌÕÀiÊ«>«iÀÊ UÊ *Ê«>«iÀÃ

APA

56a

Writing APA papers 56

APA papers

Brief Directory

56a 56b 56c 56d

Supporting a thesis, 621 Citing sources; avoiding plagiarism, 625 Integrating sources, 629 APA documentation style, 638 Directory to APA in-text citation models, 640 Directory to APA references, 645

56e APA manuscript format, 669 56f Sample APA research paper, 673 Many writing assignments in the social sciences are either reports of original research or reviews of the literature written about a research topic. Often an original research report contains a “review of the literature” section that places the writer’s project in the context of previous research. Most social science instructors will ask you to document your sources with the American Psychological Association (APA) system of in-text citations and references described in 56d. You face three main challenges when writing a social science paper that draws on sources: (1) supporting a thesis, (2) citing your sources and avoiding plagiarism, and (3) integrating quotations and other source material. Examples in this section are drawn from one student’s research for a review of the literature on treatments for childhood obesity. Luisa Mirano’s paper appears on pages 674–83.

56a Supporting a thesis Most assignments ask you to form a thesis, or main idea, and to support that thesis with well-organized evidence. (See

621

622

56a

APA

*Ê«>«iÀÃ\Ê-Õ««ÀÌ}Ê>ÊÌiÃÃ

also 1c.) In a paper reviewing the literature on a topic, the thesis analyzes the often competing conclusions drawn by a variety of researchers. Remain flexible as you draft because you may need to revise your approach later. Writing about a subject is a way of learning about it; as you write, your understanding of your subject will almost certainly deepen.

Forming a working thesis Once you have read a variety of sources and considered your issue from different perspectives, you are ready to form a working thesis: a one-sentence (or occasionally a two-sentence) statement of your central idea. (See also 1c.) You will be reading articles and other sources that address the central research question you posed earlier (see 46c). Ultimately, your thesis will express not just your opinion but your informed, reasoned answer to that question, given the current state of research in the field. Here, for example, is a research question posed by Luisa Mirano, a student in a psychology class, followed by a thesis that answers the question. RESEARCH QUESTION

Is medication the right treatment for the escalating problem of childhood obesity? WORKING THESIS

Treating cases of childhood obesity with medication alone is too narrow an approach for this growing problem.

Notice that the thesis expresses a view on a debatable issue — an issue about which intelligent, well-meaning people might disagree. The writer’s job is to convince such readers that this view is worth taking seriously.

Organizing your ideas The American Psychological Association encourages the use of headings to help readers follow the organization of a paper. For an original research report, the major headings often

ÌiÃÃÊ UÊ À}>â}Êì>ÃÊ UÊ ÜÊÃÕÀViÃÊ ÜÀÊÊ>Ê«>«iÀÊ UÊ ÃÕ««ÀÌ}Ê>À}ÕiÌÃ

APA

56a

623

follow a standard model: Method, ReMaking the most of your handbook sults, Discussion. The introduction is not 7iÊÜÀÌ}ÊvÀÊÃÕÀViÃ]ÊÌÊ given a heading; it consists of the matei«ÃÊÌÊÃÌ>ÀÌÊÜÌÊ>ÊÜÀ}Ê ÌiÃÃÊ>`Ê>ÊÀÕ}ÊÕÌi° rial between the title of the paper and 0Ê À>vÌÊ>ÊÜÀ}ÊÌiÃÃ\Ê£V the first heading. For a literature review, headings will 0Ê-iÌVÊ>Ê«>\Ê£` vary. The student who wrote about treatments for childhood obesity used four questions to focus her research; the questions then became headings in her paper (see pp. 674–83). hackerhandbooks.com/bedhandbook > Research exercises > APA > E-ex 56–1 and 56–2

Using sources to inform and support your argument Used thoughtfully, your source materials will make your argument more complex and convincing for readers. Sources can play several different roles as you develop your points. Providing background information or context You can use facts and statistics to support generalizations or to establish the importance of your topic, as student writer Luisa Mirano does in her introduction. In March 2004, U.S. Surgeon General Richard Carmona called attention to a health problem in the United States that, until recently, has been overlooked: childhood obesity. Carmona said that the “astounding” 15% child obesity rate constitutes an “epidemic.” Since the early 1980s, that rate has “doubled in children and tripled in adolescents.” Now more than nine million children are classified as obese.

Explaining terms or concepts If readers are unlikely to be familiar with a word or an idea important to your topic, you must explain it for them. Quoting or paraphrasing a source can help you define terms and concepts in accessible language. Luisa Mirano uses a footnote in her paper to define the familiar word obesity in the technical sense used by researchers.

624

56a

APA

*Ê«>«iÀÃ\Ê-Õ««ÀÌ}Ê>ÊÌiÃÃ

Obesity is measured in terms of body-mass index (BMI): weight in kilograms divided by square of height in meters. A child or an adolescent with a BMI in the 95th percentile for his or her age and gender is considered obese.

Supporting your claims As you draft your argument, make sure to back up your assertions with facts, examples, and other evidence from your research (see also 5e). Luisa Mirano, for example, uses one source’s findings to support her central idea that the medical treatment of childhood obesity has limitations. As journalist Greg Critser (2003) noted in his book Fat Land, use of weight-loss drugs is unlikely to have an effect without the proper “support system”—one that includes doctors, facilities, time, and money (p. 3).

Lending authority to your argument Including expert opinion can add credibility to your argument. (See also 5e.) But don’t rely on experts to make your argument for you. Construct your argument in your own words and, when appropriate, cite the judgment of an authority in the field for support. Both medical experts and policymakers recognize that solutions might come not only from a laboratory but also from policy, education, and advocacy. A handbook designed to educate doctors on obesity called for “major changes in some aspects of western culture” (Hoppin & Taveras, 2004, Conclusion section, para. 1).

Anticipating and countering alternative interpretations Do not ignore sources that seem contrary to your position or that offer interpretations different from your own. Instead, use them to give voice to opposing points of view before you counter them (see 5f). Readers often have objections in mind already, whether or not they agree with you. Mirano uses a source to acknowledge value in her opponents’ position that medication alone can successfully treat childhood obesity.

ÃÕ««ÀÌ}Ê>À}ÕiÌÃÊ UÊ VÌ}ÊÃÕÀViÃÊ UÊ >Û`}Ê«>}>ÀÃÊ UÊ *ÊVÌ>ÌÊÃÌÞi

APA

56b

As researchers Yanovski and Yanovski (2002) have explained, obesity was once considered “either a moral failing or evidence of underlying psychopathology” (p. 592). But this view has shifted: Many medical professionals now consider obesity a biomedical rather than a moral condition, influenced by both genetic and environmental factors. Yanovski and Yanovski have further noted that the development of weight-loss medications in the early 1990s showed that “obesity should be treated in the same manner as any other chronic disease . . . through the long-term use of medication” (p. 592).

56b Citing sources; avoiding plagiarism In a research paper, you will draw on the work of other writers, and you must document their contributions by citing your sources. Sources are cited for two reasons: UÊ ÌÊÌiÊÀi>ìÀÃÊÜiÀiÊÞÕÀÊvÀ>ÌÊViÃÊvÀÊpÊÃÊ that they can assess its reliability and, if interested, find and read the original source UÊ ÌÊ}ÛiÊVÀi`ÌÊÌÊÌiÊÜÀÌiÀÃÊvÀÊÜÊÞÕÊ>ÛiÊLÀrowed words and ideas Borrowing another writer’s language, sentence structures, or ideas without proper acknowledgment is a form of dishonesty known as plagiarism. You must include a citation when you quote from a source, when you summarize or paraphrase a source, and when you borrow facts that are not common knowledge. (See also “Avoiding plagiarism,” p. 626.)

Using the APA system for citing sources The American Psychological Association recommends an author-date style of citations. The following is a brief description of how the author-date system often works. (See 56d for more details and model citations.)

625

626

56b

APA

*Ê«>«iÀÃ\Ê Ì}ÊÃÕÀViÃÆÊ>Û`}Ê«>}>ÀÃ

1. The source is introduced by a signal phrase that includes the last name of the author followed by the date of publication in parentheses. 2. The material being cited is followed by a page number in parentheses. 3. At the end of the paper, an alphabetized list of references gives complete publication information for the source. IN-TEXT CITATION

As researchers Yanovski and Yanovski (2002) have explained, obesity was once considered “either a moral failing or evidence of underlying psychopathology” (p. 592). ENTRY IN THE LIST OF REFERENCES

Yanovski, S. Z., & Yanovski, J. A. (2002). Drug therapy: Obesity. The New England Journal of Medicine, 346, 591-602.

This basic APA format varies for different types of sources. For a detailed discussion and other models, see 56d.

Avoiding plagiarism Your research paper is a collaboration between you and your sources. To be fair and ethical, you must acknowledge your debt to the writers of those sources. If you don’t, you commit plagiarism, a serious academic offense. (See also 48c.) In general, these three acts are considered plagiarism: (1) failing to cite quotations and borrowed ideas, (2) failing to enclose borrowed language in quotation marks, and (3) failing to put summaries and paraphrases in your own words. Definitions of plagiarism may vary; it’s a good idea to find out how your school defines academic dishonesty. Citing quotations and borrowed ideas You must cite all direct quotations. You must also cite any ideas borrowed from a source: summaries and paraphrases; statistics and other specific facts; and visuals such as cartoons, graphs, and diagrams.

*ÊVÌ>ÌÊÃÌÞiÊ UÊ >Û`}Ê«>}>ÀÃÊ UÊ VÊÜi`}iÊ UÊ µÕÌ>ÌÃ

APA

56b

The only exception is common knowledge—information that your readers may know or could easily locate in any number of reference sources. For example, most general encyclopedias will tell readers that Sigmund Freud wrote The Interpretation of Dreams and that chimpanzees can learn American Sign Language. As a rule, when you have seen certain information repeatedly in your reading, you don’t need to cite it. However, when information has appeared in only a few sources, when it is highly specific (as with statistics), or when it is controversial, you should cite the source. If a topic is new to you and you are not sure what is considered common knowledge and what is considered controversial, ask your instructor or someone else with expertise. When in doubt, cite the source. Enclosing borrowed language in quotation marks To indicate that you are using a source’s exact phrases or sentences, you must enclose them in quotation marks unless they have been set off from the text by indenting (see p. 631). To omit the quotation marks is to claim — falsely — that the language is your own. Such an omission is plagiarism even if you have cited the source. ORIGINAL SOURCE

In an effort to seek the causes of this disturbing trend, experts have pointed to a range of important potential contributors to the rise in childhood obesity that are unrelated to media: a reduction in physical education classes and after-school athletic programs, an increase in the availability of sodas and snacks in public schools, the growth in the number of fast-food outlets across the country, the trend toward “super-sizing” food portions in restaurants, and the increasing number of highly processed high-calorie and high-fat grocery products. — Henry J. Kaiser Family Foundation, “The Role of Media in Childhood Obesity” (2004), p. 1 PLAGIARISM

According to the Henry J. Kaiser Family Foundation (2004), experts have pointed to a range of important potential contributors to the rise in childhood obesity that are unrelated to media (p. 1).

627

628

56b

APA

*Ê«>«iÀÃ\Ê Ì}ÊÃÕÀViÃÆÊ>Û`}Ê«>}>ÀÃ

BORROWED LANGUAGE IN QUOTATION MARKS

According to the Henry J. Kaiser Family Foundation (2004), “experts have pointed to a range of important potential contributors to the rise in childhood obesity that are unrelated to media” (p. 1).

Putting summaries and paraphrases in your own words Summaries and paraphrases are written in your own words. A summary condenses information; a paraphrase uses roughly the same number of words as the original source to convey the information. When you summarize or paraphrase, it is not enough to name the source; you must restate the source’s meaning using your own language. (See also 48c.) You commit plagiarism if you half-copy the author’s sentences—either by mixing the author’s phrases with your own without using quotation marks or by plugging your own synonyms into the author’s sentence structure. The following paraphrases are plagiarized—even though the source is cited — because their language and sentence structure are too close to those of the source. ORIGINAL SOURCE

In an effort to seek the causes of this disturbing trend, experts have pointed to a range of important potential contributors to the rise in childhood obesity that are unrelated to media. — Henry J. Kaiser Family Foundation, “The Role of Media in Childhood Obesity” (2004), p. 1 UNACCEPTABLE BORROWING OF PHRASES

According to the Henry J. Kaiser Family Foundation (2004), experts have indicated a range of significant potential contributors to the rise in childhood obesity that are not linked to media (p. 1). UNACCEPTABLE BORROWING OF STRUCTURE

According to the Henry J. Kaiser Family Foundation (2004), experts have identified a variety of significant factors causing a rise in childhood obesity, factors that are not linked to media (p. 1).

To avoid plagiarizing an author’s language, resist the temptation to look at the source while you are summarizing

ÃÕ>ÀÞÊ UÊ «>À>«À>ÃiÊ UÊ Ìi}À>Ì}ÊÃÕÀViÃÊ UÊ ÕÃ}ÊµÕÌ>ÌÃ

APA

56c

or paraphrasing. After you have read the passage you want to paraphrase, set the source aside. Ask yourself, “What is the author’s meaning?” In your own words, state your understanding of the author’s basic point. Return to the source and check that you haven’t used the author’s language or sentence structure or misrepresented the author’s ideas. When you fully understand another writer’s meaning, you can more easily and accurately represent those ideas in your own words. ACCEPTABLE PARAPHRASE

A report by the Henry J. Kaiser Family Foundation (2004) described causes other than media for the childhood obesity crisis. hackerhandbooks.com/bedhandbook > Research exercises > APA > E-ex 56–3 to 56–7

56c Integrating sources Quotations, summaries, paraphrases, and facts will help you develop your argument, but they cannot speak for you. You can use several strategies to integrate information from sources into your paper while maintaining your own voice.

Using quotations appropriately In your academic writing, keep the emphasis on your ideas and your language; use your own words to summarize and to paraphrase your sources and to explain your points. Sometimes, however, quotations can be the most effective way to integrate a source. WHEN TO USE QUOTATIONS

UÊ 7iÊ>}Õ>}iÊÃÊiÃ«iV>ÞÊÛÛ`ÊÀÊiÝ«ÀiÃÃÛi UÊ 7iÊiÝ>VÌÊÜÀ`}ÊÃÊiiì`ÊvÀÊÌiVV>Ê>VVÕÀ>VÞ UÊ 7 Ê iÊÌÊÃÊ«ÀÌ>ÌÊÌÊiÌÊÌiÊìL>ÌiÀÃÊvÊ>ÊÃÃÕiÊ explain their positions in their own words UÊ 7iÊÌiÊÜÀ`ÃÊvÊ>Ê>ÕÌÀÌÞÊi`ÊÜi}ÌÊÌÊ>Ê>À}ÕiÌ UÊ 7 Ê iÊÌiÊ>}Õ>}iÊvÊ>ÊÃÕÀViÊÃÊÌiÊÌ«VÊvÊÞÕÀÊ`ÃVÕÃsion (as in an analysis or interpretation)

629

630

56c

APA

*Ê«>«iÀÃ\ÊÌi}À>Ì}ÊÃÕÀViÃ

Limiting your use of quotations Although it is tempting to insert many quotations in your paper and to use your own words only for connecting passages, do not quote excessively. It is almost impossible to integrate numerous quotations smoothly into your own text. It is not always necessary to quote full sentences from a source. To reduce your reliance on the words of others, you can often integrate language from a source into your own sentence structure. Carmona (2004) advised the subcommittee that the situation constitutes an “epidemic” and that the skyrocketing statistics are “astounding.” As researchers continue to face a number of unknowns about obesity, it may be helpful to envision treating the disorder, as Yanovski and Yanovski (2002) suggested, “in the same manner as any other chronic disease” (p. 592).

Using the ellipsis mark To condense a quoted passage, you can use the ellipsis mark (three periods, with spaces between) to indicate that you have left words out. What remains must be grammatically complete. Roman (2003) reported that “social factors are nearly as significant as individual metabolism in the formation of . . . dietary habits of adolescents” (p. 345).

The writer has omitted the words both healthy and unhealthy from the source. When you want to leave out one or more full sentences, use a period before the three ellipsis dots. According to Sothern and Gordon (2003), “Environmental factors may contribute as much as 80% to the causes of childhood obesity. . . . Research suggests that obese children demonstrate decreased levels of physical activity and increased psychosocial problems” (p. 104).

Ordinarily, do not use an ellipsis mark at the beginning or at the end of a quotation. Readers will understand that you

ÕÃ}ÊµÕÌ>ÌÃÊ UÊ i«ÃÃÊ>ÀÊ`ÌÃ®Ê UÊ LÀ>ViÌÃÊ UÊ }ÊµÕÌ>ÌÃ

APA

56c

have taken the quoted material from a longer passage, so such marks are not necessary. The only exception occurs when you have dropped words at the end of the final quoted sentence. In such cases, put three ellipsis dots before the closing quotation mark. Make sure omissions and ellipsis marks do not distort the meaning of your source. Using brackets Brackets allow you to insert your own words into quoted material. You can insert words in brackets to clarify a confusing reference or to keep a sentence grammatical in your context. The cost of treating obesity currently totals $117 billion per year—a price, according to the surgeon general, “second only to the cost of [treating] tobacco use” (Carmona, 2004).

To indicate an error in a quotation, insert the word sic in brackets right after the error. Do not overuse sic to call attention to errors in a source. Sometimes paraphrasing is a better option. (See 39c.)

Setting off long quotations When you quote forty or more words from a source, set off the quotation by indenting it one-half inch from the left margin. Use the normal right margin and do not single-space the quotation. Long quotations should be introduced by an informative sentence, usually followed by a colon. Quotation marks are unnecessary because the indented format tells readers that the passage is taken word-for-word from the source. Yanovski and Yanovski (2002) have described earlier treatments for obesity that focused on behavior modification: With the advent of behavioral treatments for obesity in the 1960s, hope arose that modification of maladaptive eating and exercise habits would lead to sustained weight loss, and that

631

632

56c

APA


time-limited programs would produce permanent changes in weight. Medications for the treatment of obesity were proposed as short-term adjuncts for patients, who would presumably then acquire the skills necessary to continue to lose weight, reach “ideal body weight,” and maintain a reduced weight indefinitely. (p. 592)

Notice that at the end of an indented quotation the parenthetical citation goes outside the final mark of punctuation. (When a quotation is run into your text, the opposite is true. See the sample citations on p. 630.)

Using signal phrases to integrate sources Whenever you include a paraphrase, summary, or direct quotation of another writer in your paper, prepare your readers for it with introductory words called a signal phrase. A signal phrase usually names the author of the source and gives the publication year in parentheses and often provides context for the source material (see also p. 635). When you write a signal phrase, choose a verb that is appropriate for the way you are using the source (see p. 623). Are you providing background, explaining a concept, supporting a claim, lending authority, or refuting a belief? By choosing an appropriate verb, you can make your source’s role clear. See the chart on page 633 for a list of verbs commonly used in signal phrases. APA requires using verbs in the past tense or present perfect tense (noted or has noted) to introduce quotations and other source material. Use the present tense only for discussing the results of an experiment (the results show) or knowledge that has clearly been established (researchers agree). It is generally acceptable in the social sciences to call authors by their last name only, even on first mention. If your paper refers to two authors with same last name, use initials as well. Marking boundaries Readers need to move from your words to the words of a source without feeling a jolt. Avoid dropping direct quotations into your text without warning. Instead, provide clear signal phrases, including at least the author’s

Ã}>Ê«À>ÃiÃÊ UÊ ÌÀ`ÕV}Ê ÃÕÀViÃÊ UÊ ÃÕ>ÀÞÊ UÊ «>À>«À>Ãi

APA

56c

name and the date of publication. Signal phrases mark the boundaries between source material and your own words; they can also tell readers why a source is worth quoting. (The signal phrase is underlined in the second example.) DROPPED QUOTATION

Obesity was once considered in a very different light. “For many years, obesity was approached as if it were either a moral failing or evidence of underlying psychopathology” (Yanovski & Yanovski, 2002, p. 592). QUOTATION WITH SIGNAL PHRASE

Obesity was once considered in a very different light. As researchers Yanovski and Yanovski (2002) have explained, obesity was widely thought of as “either a moral failing or evidence of underlying psychopathology” (p. 592).

Using signal phrases with summaries and paraphrases As with quotations, you should introduce most summaries and paraphrases with a signal phrase that mentions the author and the year and places the material in the context of your argument. Readers will then understand where the summary or paraphrase begins. Without the signal phrase (underlined) in the following example, readers might think that only the last sentence is being cited, when in fact the whole paragraph is based on the source. Carmona (2004) advised a Senate subcommittee that the problem of childhood obesity is dire and that the skyrocketing statistics—which put the child obesity rate at 15%—are cause for alarm. More than 9 million children, double the number in the early 1980s, are classified as obese. Carmona warned that obesity can cause myriad physical problems that only worsen as children grow older.

There are times, however, when a summary or a paraphrase does not require a signal phrase naming the author. When the context makes clear where the cited material begins, you may omit the signal phrase and include the author’s

633

634

56c

APA


Using signal phrases in APA papers /Ê>Û`ÊÌÞ]ÊÌÀÞÊÌÊÛ>ÀÞÊLÌÊÌiÊ>}Õ>}iÊ>`ÊÌiÊ«>ViiÌÊvÊÞÕÀÊÃ}>Ê«À>ÃiÃ°

Model signal phrases ÊÌiÊÜÀ`ÃÊvÊ >À>ÊÓää{®]Êº°Ê°Ê°» ÃÊ9>ÛÃÊ>`Ê9>ÛÃÊÓääÓ®Ê>ÛiÊÌi`]Êº°Ê°Ê°» ««Ê>`Ê/>ÛiÀ>ÃÊÓää{®]Êi`V>ÊÀiÃi>ÀViÀÃ]Ê«Ìi`ÊÕÌÊ Ì>ÌÊº°Ê°Ê°» º°Ê°Ê°Ê]»ÊV>i`Ê ÀÌÃiÀÊÓääÎ®° º°Ê°Ê°Ê]»ÊÜÀÌiÊ ÕiÜ>`ÊÓää{®]Êº°Ê°Ê°» ,iÃi>ÀViÀÃÊV ÕvwiÊiÌÊ>°ÊÓääÎ®Ê>ÛiÊvviÀi`Ê>ÊV«i}Ê >À}ÕiÌÊvÀÊÌÃÊÛiÜ\Êº°Ê°Ê°» ÌÃÊÓääÓ®Ê>ÃÜiÀi`ÊLiVÌÃÊÜÌÊÌiÊvÜ}Ê >>ÞÃÃ\Êº°Ê°Ê°»

Verbs in signal phrases >`ÌÌi` >}Àii` >À}Õi` >ÃÃiÀÌi` LiiÛi` V>i`

V«>Ài` VwÀi` VÌiì` ìV>Ài` ìi` i«>Ãâi`

ÃÃÌi` Ìi` LÃiÀÛi` «Ìi`ÊÕÌ Ài>Ãi` ÀivÕÌi`

ÀiiVÌi` Ài«ÀÌi` ÀiÃ«ì` ÃÕ}}iÃÌi` ÌÕ}Ì ÜÀÌi

name and the date in the parentheses. Unless the work is short, also include the page number in the parentheses. Integrating statistics and other facts When you are citing a statistic or another specific fact, a signal phrase is often not necessary. In most cases, readers will understand that the citation refers to the statistic or fact (not the whole paragraph). In purely financial terms, the drugs cost more than $3 a day on average (Duenwald, 2004).

Ã}>Ê«À>ÃiÃÊ UÊ v>VÌÃÊ UÊ ÃÞÌiÃÃ

APA

56c

There is nothing wrong, however, with using a signal phrase to introduce a statistic or fact. Duenwald (2004) reported that the drugs cost more than $3 a day on average.

Putting source material in context Readers should not have to guess why source material appears in your paper. A signal phrase can help you make the connection between your own ideas and those of another writer by clarifying how the source will contribute to your paper (see 47a). If you use another writer’s words, you must explain how they relate to your point. It’s a good idea to embed a quotation between sentences of your own. In addition to introducing it with a signal phrase, follow it with interpretive comments that link the quotation to your paper’s argument. (See also “Synthesizing sources,” below.) QUOTATION WITH EFFECTIVE CONTEXT

A report by the Henry J. Kaiser Family Foundation (2004) outlined trends that may have contributed to the childhood obesity crisis, including food advertising for children as well as a reduction in physical education classes . . . , an increase in the availability of sodas and snacks in public schools, the growth in the number of fast-food outlets . . . , and the increasing number of highly processed high-calorie and high-fat grocery products. (p. 1) Addressing each of these areas requires more than a doctor armed with a prescription pad; it requires a broad mobilization not just of doctors and concerned parents but of educators, food industry executives, advertisers, and media representatives. hackerhandbooks.com/bedhandbook > Research exercises > APA > E-ex 56–8 to 56–11

Synthesizing sources When you synthesize multiple sources in a research paper, you create a conversation about your research topic. You show readers that your argument is based on your active analysis and integration of ideas, not just a list of quotations and paraphrases. Your synthesis will show how your sources relate to one

635

636

56c

APA


another. What one of your sources says may support, extend, or counter the ideas of another. Not every source has to “speak” to another in a research paper, but readers should be able to see how each one functions in your argument (see 47a). Considering how sources relate to your argument Before you integrate sources and show readers how they relate to one another, consider how each one might contribute to your own argument. As student writer Luisa Mirano became more informed through her research about treatments for childhood obesity, she asked herself these questions: What do I think about the various treatments for childhood obesity? Which sources might support my ideas? Which sources might help extend or illustrate the points I want to make? What common or compelling counterarguments do I need to address to strengthen my position? She annotated a passage by journalist Greg Critser supporting her view that medication alone could not win the fight against childhood obesity. STUDENT NOTES ON THE ORIGINAL SOURCE

$PODSFUF FYBNQMFT¥ VTFGVM DPOUFYU

/PFBTZGJY GPSPCFTJUZ $SJUTFSIBE FDPOPNJD FEVDBUJPOBM BOENFEJDBM TVQQPSU

Yet the more I contemplated my success [at losing weight], the more I came to see it not as a triumph of will, but as a triumph of my economic and social class. The weight loss medication Meridia, for example, had been effective not because it is such a good drug; even its purveyors freely admit it is far from effective for most people. What had made the drug work for me was the upper-middle-class support system that I had brought to it: a good physician who insisted on seeing me every two weeks, access to a safe park where I could walk and jog, friends who shared the value of becoming slender, healthy homecooked food consumed with my wife, books about health, and medical journals about the latest nutritional breakthroughs. And money. And time. — Greg Critser, Fat Land, pp. 2–3

$BUDIZ UFSN¥ HPPEUPRVPUF 8IBUBCPVU QFPQMFXJUI PVUNPOFZ BOEUJNF &WFOCSPBEFS TPMVUJPO OFFEFE

Critser’s term support system offered Mirano a concise, visual way of referring to the extensive resources needed to fight obesity. His experience provided context and was a good choice for summary. Mirano planned to keep the emphasis on her own

ÃÞÌiÃÃÊ UÊ ÜÀ}ÊÜÌÊÌÜÊÀÊÀiÊÃÕÀViÃ

APA

56c

637

argument by analyzing Critser’s text, discussing and expanding on his view in her own writing. She also looked for sources to support her view that larger-scale social and political change was needed to fight such a complex and widespread problem. Placing sources in conversation You can show readers how the ideas of one source relate to those of another by connecting and analyzing the ideas in your own voice. After all, you’ve done the research and thought through the issues, so you should control the conversation. When you synthesize sources, the emphasis is still on your own writing; the thread of your argument should be easy to identify and to understand, with or without your sources. SAMPLE SYNTHESIS (DRAFT)

-ÌÕìÌÊÜÀÌiÀÊ Medical treatments have clear costs for individual ÕÃ>ÊÀ>Ê patients, including unpleasant side effects, little Li}ÃÊÜÌÊ >ÊV>ÊÌ>ÌÊ information about long-term use, and uncertainty that they ii`ÃÊÃÕ««ÀÌ°

-}>Ê«À>ÃiÃÊ `V>ÌiÊÜÊ ÃÕÀViÃÊ VÌÀLÕÌiÊÌÊ À>½ÃÊ«>«iÀÊ >`ÊÃÜÊÌ>ÌÊ ÌiÊì>ÃÊÌ>ÌÊ vÜÊ>ÀiÊÌÊ iÀÊÜ° À>Ê ÌiÀ«ÀiÌÃÊ >`ÊViVÌÃÊ ÃÕÀViÃ°Ê >VÊ «>À>}À>«Ê i`ÃÊÜÌÊiÀÊ ÜÊÌÕ}ÌÃ°

will yield significant weight loss. The financial burden is heavy as well; the drugs cost more than $3 a day on average (Duenwald, 2004). In each of the clinical trials, use of medication was accompanied by expensive behavioral therapies, including counseling, nutrition education, fitness advising, and monitoring. As Critser (2003) noted in his book Fat Land, use of weight-loss drugs is unlikely to have an effect without the proper “support system”—one that includes doctors, facilities, time, and money (p. 3). For many families, this level of care is prohibitively expensive. Both medical experts and policymakers recognize that solutions might come not only from a laboratory but also from policy, education, and advocacy. A handbook designed to educate doctors on obesity called for “major changes in some aspects of western culture” (Hoppin & Taveras, 2004, Conclusion section, para. 1). Solving the childhood obesity problem will require broad mobilization of doctors and concerned parents and also of educators, food industry executives, advertisers, and media representatives.

-ÌÕìÌÊÜÀÌiÀ

-ÕÀViÊ£ -ÌÕìÌÊÜÀÌiÀ

-ÕÀViÊÓ -ÌÕìÌÊÜÀÌiÀ

-ÕÀViÊÎ -ÌÕìÌÊÜÀÌiÀ

638

56d

APA

*Ê`VÕiÌ>Ì\ÊÌiÝÌÊVÌ>ÌÃ

In this draft, Mirano uses her own analyses to shape the conversation among her quoted sources. She does not simply string quotations together or allow them to overwhelm her writing. The final sentence, written in her own voice, gives her an opportunity to explain to readers how the various sources support and extend her argument. When synthesizing sources in your own writing, ask yourself the following questions: UÊ 7VÊÃÕÀViÃÊvÀ]ÊÃÕ««ÀÌ]ÊÀÊiÝÌi`ÊÞÕÀÊ argument? UÊ ÊÞÕÊÛ>ÀÞÊÌiÊvÕVÌÃÊvÊÃÕÀViÃÊpÊÌÊ«ÀÛìÊL>Vground information, explain terms or concepts, lend authority to your argument, and anticipate counterarguments? UÊ ÊÞÕÊiÝ«>ÊÌÊÀi>ìÀÃÊÜÊÞÕÀÊÃÕÀViÃÊÃÕ««ÀÌÊÞÕÀÊ argument? UÊ ÊÞÕÊVÌÀÊÌiÊVÛiÀÃ>ÌÊLÞÊViVÌ}Ê>`Ê>>lyzing sources in your own voice? UÊ ÃÊÞÕÀÊÜÊ>À}ÕiÌÊi>ÃÞÊÌÊìÌvÞÊ>`ÊÌÊÕìÀstand, with or without your sources?

56d APA documentation style In most social science classes, you will be asked to use the APA system for documenting sources, which is set forth in the Publication Manual of the American Psychological Association, 6th ed. (Washington: APA, 2010). APA recommends in-text citations that refer readers to a list of references. An in-text citation gives the author of the source (often in a signal phrase), the year of publication, and at times a page number in parentheses. At the end of the paper, a list of references provides publication information about the source (see p. 683 for a sample list of references). The direct link between the in-text citation and the entry in the reference list is highlighted in the following example.

`ÀiVÌÀÞÊ UÊ µÕÌ>Ì

APA

56d

Directory to APA in-text citation models Ê £°Ê >ÃVÊvÀ>ÌÊvÀÊ>ÊµÕÌ>Ì]Ê ÈÎ Ê Ó°Ê >ÃVÊvÀ>ÌÊvÀÊ>ÊÃÕ>ÀÞÊ ÀÊ>Ê«>À>«À>Ãi]ÊÈ{ä Ê Î°Ê 7ÀÊÜÌÊÌÜÊ>ÕÌÀÃ]ÊÈ{ä Ê {°Ê 7ÀÊÜÌÊÌÀiiÊÌÊwÛiÊ >ÕÌÀÃ]ÊÈ{£ Ê x°Ê 7ÀÊÜÌÊÃÝÊÀÊÀiÊ >ÕÌÀÃ]ÊÈ{£ Ê È°Ê 7ÀÊÜÌÊÕÜÊ>ÕÌÀ]Ê È{£ Ê Ç°Ê "À}>â>ÌÊ>ÃÊ>ÕÌÀ]ÊÈ{£

Ê n°Ê ÕÌÀÃÊÜÌÊÌiÊÃ>iÊ>ÃÌÊ >i]ÊÈ{Ó Ê °Ê /ÜÊÀÊÀiÊÜÀÃÊLÞÊÌiÊ Ã>iÊ>ÕÌÀÊÊÌiÊÃ>iÊ Þi>À]ÊÈ{Ó £ä°Ê /ÜÊÀÊÀiÊÜÀÃÊÊÌiÊ Ã>iÊ«>ÀiÌiÃiÃ]ÊÈ{Ó ££°Ê *iÀÃ>ÊVÕV>Ì]Ê È{Ó £Ó°Ê iVÌÀVÊÃÕÀVi]ÊÈ{Î £Î°Ê `ÀiVÌÊÃÕÀVi]ÊÈ{{ £{°Ê ->VÀi`ÊÀÊV>ÃÃV>ÊÌiÝÌ]ÊÈ{{

IN-TEXT CITATION

Yanovski and Yanovski (2002) reported that “the current state of the treatment for obesity is similar to the state of the treatment of hypertension several decades ago” (p. 600). ENTRY IN THE LIST OF REFERENCES

Yanovski, S. Z., & Yanovski, J. A. (2002). Drug therapy: Obesity. The New England Journal of Medicine, 346, 591-602.

For a reference list that includes this entry, see page 683.

APA in-text citations APA’s in-text citations provide at least the author’s last name and the year of publication. For direct quotations and some paraphrases, a page number is given as well. NOTE: APA style requires the use of the past tense or the pres-

ent perfect tense in signal phrases introducing cited material: Smith (2005) reported, Smith (2005) has argued. 1. Basic format for a quotation Ordinarily, introduce the quotation with a signal phrase that includes the author’s last name followed by the year of publication in parentheses. Put the page number (preceded by “p.”) in parentheses after the quotation.

639

640

56d

APA


Critser (2003) noted that despite growing numbers of overweight Americans, many health care providers still “remain either in ignorance or outright denial about the health danger to the poor and the young” (p. 5).

If the author is not named in the signal phrase, place the author’s name, the year, and the page number in parentheses after the quotation: (Critser, 2003, p. 5). NOTE: APA style requires the year of publication in an in-text

citation. Do not include a month, even if the entry in the reference list includes the month. 2. Basic format for a summary or a paraphrase Include the author’s last name and the year either in a signal phrase introducing the material or in parentheses following it. A page number is not required for a summary or a paraphrase, but include one if it would help readers find the passage in a long work. (For the use of other locators, such as paragraph numbers or section names in online sources, see pp. 643–44.) Yanovski and Yanovski (2002) explained that sibutramine suppresses appetite by blocking the reuptake of the neurotransmitters serotonin and norepinephrine in the brain (p. 594). Sibutramine suppresses appetite by blocking the reuptake of the neurotransmitters serotonin and norepinephrine in the brain (Yanovski & Yanovski, 2002, p. 594).

3. Work with two authors Name both authors in the signal phrase or the parentheses each time you cite the work. In the parentheses, use “&” between the authors’ names; in the signal phrase, use “and.” According to Sothern and Gordon (2003), “Environmental factors may contribute as much as 80% to the causes of childhood obesity” (p. 104). Obese children often engage in limited physical activity (Sothern & Gordon, 2003, p. 104).

ÃÕ>ÀÞÊ UÊ «>À>«À>ÃiÊ UÊ ÌÜÊ>ÕÌÀÃÊ UÊ ÌÀiiÊ ÀÊÀiÊ>ÕÌÀÃÊ UÊ Ê>ÕÌÀÊ UÊ À}>â>Ì

APA

56d

4. Work with three to five authors Identify all authors in the signal phrase or the parentheses the first time you cite the source. In 2003, Berkowitz, Wadden, Tershakovec, and Cronquist concluded, “Sibutramine . . . must be carefully monitored in adolescents, as in adults, to control increases in [blood pressure] and pulse rate” (p. 1811).

In subsequent citations, use the first author’s name followed by “et al.” in either the signal phrase or the parentheses. As Berkowitz et al. (2003) advised, “Until more extensive safety and efficacy data are available, . . . weight-loss medications should be used only on an experimental basis for adolescents” (p. 1811).

5. Work with six or more authors Use the first author’s name followed by “et al.” in the signal phrase or the parentheses. McDuffie et al. (2002) tested 20 adolescents, aged 12-16, over a three-month period and found that orlistat, combined with behavioral therapy, produced an average weight loss of 4.4 kg, or 9.7 pounds (p. 646).

6. Work with unknown author If the author is unknown, mention the work’s title in the signal phrase or give the first word or two of the title in the parenthetical citation. Titles of articles and chapters are put in quotation marks; titles of books and reports are italicized. (For online sources with no author, see item 12 on p. 643.) Children struggling to control their weight must also struggle with the pressures of television advertising that, on the one hand, encourages the consumption of junk food and, on the other, celebrates thin celebrities (“Television,” 2002). NOTE: In the rare case when “Anonymous” is specified as the

author, treat it as if it were a real name: (Anonymous, 2001). In the list of references, also use the name Anonymous as author. 7. Organization as author If the author is a government agency or another organization, name the organization in

641

642

56d

APA


the signal phrase or in the parenthetical citation the first time you cite the source. Obesity puts children at risk for a number of medical complications, including type 2 diabetes, hypertension, sleep apnea, and orthopedic problems (Henry J. Kaiser Family Foundation, 2004, p. 1).

If the organization has a familiar abbreviation, you may include it in brackets the first time you cite the source and use the abbreviation alone in later citations. FIRST CITATION

(Centers for Disease Control and Prevention [CDC], 2009)

LATER CITATIONS

(CDC, 2009)

8. Authors with the same last name To avoid confusion, use initials with the last names if your reference list includes two or more authors with the same last name. Research by E. Smith (1989) revealed that . . .

9. Two or more works by the same author in the same year When your list of references includes more than one work by the same author in the same year, use lowercase letters (“a,” “b,” and so on) with the year to order the entries in the reference list. (See item 6 on p. 648.) Use those same letters with the year in the in-text citation. Research by Durgin (2003b) has yielded new findings about the role of counseling in treating childhood obesity.

10. Two or more works in the same parentheses When your parenthetical citation names two or more works, put them in the same order that they appear in the reference list, separated with semicolons. Researchers have indicated that studies of pharmacological treatments for childhood obesity are inconclusive (Berkowitz et al., 2003; McDuffie et al., 2002).

11. Personal communication Personal interviews, memos, letters, e-mail, and similar unpublished communications should

Ã>iÊ>ÃÌÊ>iÊ UÊ ÌÜÊÀÊÀiÊÜÀÃÊ UÊ «iÀÃ>ÊVÕV>ÌÊ UÊ iÊÃÕÀVi

APA

56d

be cited in the text only, not in the reference list. (Use the first initial with the last name in parentheses.) One of Atkinson’s colleagues, who has studied the effect of the media on children’s eating habits, has contended that advertisers for snack foods will need to design ads responsibly for their younger viewers (F. Johnson, personal communication, October 20, 2009).

12. Electronic source When possible, cite electronic sources, including online sources, as you would any other source, giving the author and the year. Atkinson (2001) found that children who spent at least four hours a day watching TV were less likely to engage in adequate physical activity during the week.

Electronic sources sometimes lack authors’ names, dates, or page numbers. Unknown author

If no author is named, mention the title of the source in the signal phrase or give the first word or two of the title in the parentheses (see also item 6). (If an organization serves as the author, see item 7.) The body’s basal metabolic rate, or BMR, is a measure of its at-rest energy requirement (“Exercise,” 2003). Unknown date

When the date is unknown, use the abbreviation “n.d.” (for “no date”). Attempts to establish a definitive link between television programming and children’s eating habits have been problematic (Magnus, n.d.). No page numbers

APA ordinarily requires page numbers for quotations, and it recommends them for summaries and paraphrases from long sources. When an electronic source lacks stable numbered pages, your citation should include information that will help readers locate the particular passage being cited.

643

644

56d

APA


If the source has numbered paragraphs, use the paragraph number preceded by the abbreviation “para.”: (Hall, 2008, para. 5). If the source contains headings, cite the appropriate heading in parentheses; you may also indicate the paragraph under the heading that you are referring to, even if the paragraphs are not numbered. Hoppin and Taveras (2004) pointed out that several other medications were classified by the Drug Enforcement Administration as having the “potential for abuse” (Weight-Loss Drugs section, para. 6). NOTE: Electronic files in portable document format (PDF) often

have stable page numbers. For such sources, give the page number in the parenthetical citation. 13. Indirect source If you use a source that was cited in another source (a secondary source), name the original source in your signal phrase. List the secondary source in your reference list and include it in your parenthetical citation, preceded by the words “as cited in.” In the following example, Satcher is the original source, and Critser is the secondary source, given in the reference list. Former surgeon general Dr. David Satcher described “a nation of young people seriously at risk of starting out obese and dooming themselves to the difficult task of overcoming a tough illness” (as cited in Critser, 2003, p. 4).

14. Sacred or classical text Identify the text, the version or edition you used, and the relevant part (chapter, verse, line). It is not necessary to include the source in the reference list. Peace activists have long cited the biblical prophet’s vision of a world without war: “And they shall beat their swords into plowshares, and their spears into pruning hooks; nation shall not lift up sword against nation, neither shall they learn war any more” (Isaiah 2:4, Revised Standard Version). hackerhandbooks.com/bedhandbook > Research exercises > APA > E-ex 56–12 to 56–14

Ê«>}iÊÕLiÀÃÊ UÊ ÃÕÀViÊÊ>ÌiÀÊÃÕÀViÊ UÊ Ã>VÀi`ÊÌiÝÌÊ UÊ `ÀiVÌÀÞÊ UÊ ÀiviÀiViÃ

APA

56d

Directory to APA references (bibliographic entries) General guidelines for listing authors (print and online) 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Single author, 647 Multiple authors, 647 Organization as author, 648 Unknown author, 648 Two or more works by the same author, 648 6. Two or more works by the same author in the same year, 648

Articles in periodicals (print) 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16.

Article in a journal, 649 Article in a magazine, 649 Article in a newspaper, 649 Article with three to seven authors, 651 Article with eight or more authors, 651 Abstract of a journal article, 651 Letter to the editor, 651 Editorial or other unsigned article, 651 Newsletter article, 651 Review, 652

Books (print) 17. Basic format for a book, 652 18. Book with an editor, 652 19. Book with an author and an editor, 653 20. Book with an author and a translator, 653 21. Edition other than the first, 653 22. Article or chapter in an edited book or an anthology, 653 23. Multivolume work, 655

24. Introduction, preface, foreword, or afterword, 655 25. Dictionary or other reference work, 655 26. Article in a reference work, 655 27. Republished book, 655 28. Book with a title in its title, 655 29. Sacred or classical text, 655

Online sources 30. Article in an online journal, 656 31. Article in an online magazine, 656 32. Article in an online newspaper, 657 33. Article published only online, 657 34. Article from a database, 657 35. Abstract for an online article, 659 36. Online book, 659 37. Chapter in an online book, 659 38. Online reference work, 659 39. Document from a Web site, 660 40. Section in a Web document, 660 41. Document from a university Web site or government agency, 661 42. Article in an online newsletter, 661 43. Podcast, 661 44. Weblog (blog) post, 664 45. Online audio or video file, 664 46. Entry in a wiki, 664 47. Data set or graphic representation, 664 48. Conference hearing, 665 49. E-mail, 665 50. Online posting, 665

6

645

646

56d

APA

*Ê`VÕiÌ>Ì\Ê,iviÀiViÃ

Directory to APA references (bibliographic entries) (continued ) Other sources (including online versions) x£°Ê ÃÃiÀÌ>ÌÊvÀÊ>Ê`>Ì>L>Ãi]Ê 665 xÓ°Ê 1«ÕLÃi`Ê`ÃÃiÀÌ>Ì]ÊÈÈx xÎ°Ê ÛiÀiÌÊ`VÕiÌ]ÊÈÈÈ x{°Ê ,i«ÀÌÊvÀÊ>Ê«ÀÛ>ÌiÊ À}>â>Ì]ÊÈÈÈ xx°Ê i}>ÊÃÕÀVi]ÊÈÈÈ xÈ°Ê viÀiViÊ«ÀVii`}Ã]ÊÈÈÈ xÇ°Ê *>«iÀÊ«ÀiÃiÌi`Ê>ÌÊ>ÊiiÌ}Ê ÀÊÃÞ«ÃÕÊÕ«ÕLÃi`®]Ê 666 xn°Ê *ÃÌiÀÊÃiÃÃÊ>ÌÊ>Ê VviÀiVi]ÊÈÈÈ

x°Ê Èä°Ê È£°Ê ÈÓ°Ê ÈÎ°Ê È{°Ê Èx°Ê ÈÈ°Ê ÈÇ°Ê Èn°Ê È°Ê

>«ÊÀÊV>ÀÌ]ÊÈÈÇ `ÛiÀÌÃiiÌ]ÊÈÈÇ *ÕLÃi`ÊÌiÀÛiÜ]ÊÈÈÇ iVÌÕÀi]ÊÃ«iiV]ÊÀÊ>``ÀiÃÃ]Ê 667 7ÀÊvÊ>ÀÌÊÀÊ«Ì}À>«]ÊÈÈÇ ÀVÕÀi]Ê«>«iÌ]ÊÀÊv>VÌÊ ÃiiÌ]ÊÈÈÇ *ÀiÃiÌ>ÌÊÃìÃ]ÊÈÈÇ ÊÀÊÛìÊÌÊ«VÌÕÀi®]Ê 668 /iiÛÃÊ«À}À>]ÊÈÈn -Õ`ÊÀiVÀ`}]ÊÈÈ

«ÕÌiÀÊÃvÌÜ>ÀiÊÀÊÛìÊ }>i]ÊÈÈ

APA list of references In APA style, the alphabetical list of works cited, which appears at the end of the paper, is titled “References.” For advice on preparing the reference list, see pages 672–73. For a sample reference list, see page 683. Alphabetize entries in the list of references by authors’ last names; if a work has no author, alphabetize it by its title. The first element of each entry is important because citations in the text of the paper refer to it and readers will be looking for it in the alphabetized list. The date of publication appears immediately after the first element of the citation. In APA style, titles of books are italicized; titles of articles are neither italicized nor put in quotation marks. (For rules on capitalization of titles, see p. 670.)

General guidelines for listing authors (print and online) In APA style, all authors’ names are inverted (the last name comes first), and initials only are used for all first and middle names.

`ÀiVÌÀÞÊ UÊ ÀiviÀiViÃÊ UÊ iÊ>ÕÌÀÊ UÊ ÌÜÊÀÊÀiÊ>ÕÌÀÃ

APA

56d

NAME AND DATE CITED IN TEXT

Duncan (2008) has reported that . . . BEGINNING OF ENTRY IN THE LIST OF REFERENCES

Duncan, B. (2008).

1. Single author author: last name + initial(s)

year

title (book)

Egeland, J. (2008). A billion lives: An eyewitness report from the frontlines of place of publication

publisher

humanity. New York, NY: Simon & Schuster.

2. Multiple authors List up to seven authors by last names followed by initials. Use an ampersand (&) before the name of the last author. If there are more than seven authors, list the first six followed by three ellipsis dots and the last author’s name. (See pp. 640–41 for citing works with multiple authors in your paper.) Two to seven authors all authors: last name + initial(s)

year

title (book)

place of publication

Musick, M. A., & Wilson, J. (2007). Volunteers: A social profile. Bloomington: publisher

Indiana University Press. all authors: last name + initial(s)

year

Diessner, R., Solom, R. C., Frost, N. K., Parsons, L., & Davidson, J. (2008). title (article)

Engagement with beauty: Appreciating natural, artistic, and moral beauty. journal title

volume page range

The Journal of Psychology, 142, 303-329. Eight or more authors

Mulvaney, S. A., Mudasiru, E., Schlundt, D. G., Baughman, C. L., Fleming, M., VanderWoude, A., . . . Rothman, R. (2008). Self-management in Type 2 diabetes: The adolescent perspective. The Diabetes Educator, 34, 118–127.

647

648

56d

APA

APA documentation: References

3. Organization as author author: organization name

year

title (book)

American Psychiatric Association. (1994). Diagnostic and statistical manual of edition number

place organization as author of publication and publisher

mental disorders (4th ed.). Washington, DC: Author.

If the publisher is not the same as the author, give the publisher’s name as you would for any other source. 4. Unknown author Begin the entry with the work’s title. title (book)

year


publisher

New concise world atlas. (2007). New York, NY: Oxford University Press. title (article)

year + date (for weekly publication)

journal title

volume, issue

page range

Order in the jungle. (2008, March 15). The Economist, 386(8571), 83-85.

5. Two or more works by the same author Use the author’s name for all entries. List the entries by year, the earliest first. Barry, P. (2007, December 8). Putting tumors on pause. Science News, 172, 365. Barry, P. (2008, August 2). Finding the golden genes. Science News, 174, 16-21.

6. Two or more works by the same author in the same year List the works alphabetically by title. In the parentheses, following the year add “a,” “b,” and so on. Use these same letters when giving the year in the in-text citation. (See also p. 672.) Elkind, D. (2008a, Spring). Can we play? Greater Good, 4(4), 14-17. Elkind, D. (2008b, June 27). The price of hurrying children [Web log post]. Retrieved from http://blogs.psychologytoday.com/blog /digital-children

À}>â>ÌÊ UÊ Ê>ÕÌÀÊ UÊ ÌÜÊÀÊÀiÊÜÀÃÊ UÊ >ÀÌViÊ UÊ ÕÀ>Ê UÊ >}>âiÊ UÊ iÜÃ«>«iÀ

APA

56d

Articles in periodicals (print) Periodicals include scholarly journals, magazines, and newspapers. For a journal or a magazine, give only the volume number if the publication is paginated continuously through each volume; give the volume and issue numbers if each issue of the volume begins on page 1. Italicize the volume number and put the issue number, not italicized, in parentheses. For all periodicals, when an article appears on consecutive pages, provide the range of pages. When an article does not appear on consecutive pages, give all page numbers: A1, A17. (See also “Online sources” beginning on p. 656 for online articles and articles accessed through a library’s database.) For an illustrated citation of an article in a periodical, see page 650. 7. Article in a journal author: last name + initial(s)

year

article title

Zhang, L.-F. (2008). Teachers’ styles of thinking: An exploratory study. The Journal journal title

volume

page range

of Psychology, 142, 37-55.

8. Article in a magazine Cite as a journal article, but give the year and the month for monthly magazines; add the day for weekly magazines. McKibben, B. (2007, October). Carbon’s new math. National Geographic, 212(4), 32-37.

9. Article in a newspaper author: last name year + month + day + initial(s) (for daily publication)

article title

Svoboda, E. (2008, October 21). Deep in the rain forest, stalking the next newspaper title

page number

pandemic. The New York Times, p. D5.

649

650

56d

APA


Citation at a glance | Article in a periodical (APA) /ÊVÌiÊ>Ê>ÀÌViÊÊ>Ê«ÀÌÊ«iÀ`V>ÊÊ*ÊÃÌÞi]ÊVÕìÊÌiÊ ÊvÜ}ÊiiiÌÃ\

1Ê ÕÌÀ 2 9i>ÀÊvÊ«ÕLV>Ì 3Ê Ê/ÌiÊvÊ>ÀÌVi 4Ê >iÊvÊ«iÀ`V>

5Ê 6ÕiÊÕLiÀÆÊÃÃÕiÊ

ÕLiÀ]ÊvÊÀiµÕÀi`ÊÃiiÊ «°ÊÈ{® 6Ê *>}iÊÕLiÀÃÊvÊ>ÀÌVi

4 3 5

1

2

4

6

REFERENCE LIST ENTRY FOR AN ARTICLE IN A PRINT PERIODICAL 1

2

3

Whitman, D. (2008). An appeal to authority: The new paternalism in urban 4

5

6

schools. Education Next, 8(4), 53-58.

ÀÊÛ>À>ÌÃÊÊVÌ}Ê>ÀÌViÃÊÊ«ÀÌÊ«iÀ`V>ÃÊÊ*ÊÃÌÞi]Ê ÃiiÊ«>}iÃÊÈ{qxÓ°Ê

>ÀÌViÊ UÊ ÌÀiiÊÀÊÀiÊ>ÕÌÀÃÊ UÊ >LÃÌÀ>VÌÊ UÊ iÌÌiÀÊ UÊ i`ÌÀ>Ê UÊ iÜÃiÌÌiÀ

APA

56d

Give the year, month, and day for daily and weekly newspapers. Use “p.” or “pp.” before page numbers. 10. Article with three to seven authors Ungar, M., Brown, M., Liebenberg, L., Othman, R., Kwong, W. M., Armstrong, M., & Gilgun, J. (2007). Unique pathways to resilience across cultures. Adolescence, 42, 287-310.

11. Article with eight or more authors List the first six authors followed by three ellipsis dots and the last author. Krippner, G., Granovetter, M., Block, F., Biggart, N., Beamish, T., Hsing, Y., . . . O’Riain, S. (2004). Polanyi Symposium: A conversation on embeddedness. Socio-Economic Review, 2, 109-135.

12. Abstract of a journal article Lahm, K. (2008). Inmate-on-inmate assault: A multilevel examination of prison violence [Abstract]. Criminal Justice and Behavior, 35(1), 120-137.

13. Letter to the editor Letters to the editor appear in journals, magazines, and newspapers. Follow the appropriate model (see items 7–9), and insert the words “Letter to the editor” in brackets after the title of the letter. If the letter has no title, use the bracketed words as the title. Park, T. (2008, August). Defining the line [Letter to the editor]. Scientific American, 299(2), 10.

14. Editorial or other unsigned article The global justice movement [Editorial]. (2005). Multinational Monitor, 26(7/8), 6.

15. Newsletter article Setting the stage for remembering. (2006, September). Mind, Mood, and Memory, 2(9), 4-5.

651

652

56d

APA


16. Review Give the author and title of the review (if any) and, in brackets, the type of work, the title, and the author for a book or the year for a motion picture. If the review has no author or title, use the material in brackets as the title. Applebaum, A. (2008, February 14). A movie that matters [Review of the motion picture Katyn, 2007]. The New York Review of Books, 55(2), 13-15. Agents of change. (2008, February 2). [Review of the book The power of unreasonable people: How social entrepreneurs create markets that change the world, by J. Elkington & P. Hartigan]. The Economist, 386(8565), 94.

Books (print) Items 17–29 apply to print books. For online books, see items 36 and 37. For an illustrated citation of a print book, see page 653. Take the information about a book from its title page and copyright page. If more than one place of publication is listed, use only the first. Give the city and state (abbreviated) for all US cities or the city and country (not abbreviated) for all non-US cities; also include the province for Canadian cities. Do not give a state if the publisher’s name includes it (as in many university presses, for example). 17. Basic format for a book author: last name + initial(s)

year of publication

book title

McKenzie, F. R. (2008). Theory and practice with adolescents: An applied approach. place of publication

publisher

Chicago, IL: Lyceum Books.

18. Book with an editor all editors: last name + initial(s)

year of publication

book title

Aronson, J., & Aronson, E. (Eds.). (2008). Readings about the social animal edition number


publisher

(10th ed.). New York, NY: Worth.

ÀiÛiÜÊ UÊ LÊ UÊ i`ÌÀÊ UÊ ÌÀ>Ã>ÌÀÊ UÊ i`ÌÊ UÊ V>«ÌiÀ

APA

56d

The abbreviation “Eds.” is for multiple editors. If the book has one editor, use “Ed.” 19. Book with an author and an editor author: last name year of + initial(s) publication

book title

name(s) of editor(s): in normal order

McLuhan, M. (2003). Understanding me: Lectures and interviews (S. McLuhan place of publication (city, province, country)

publisher

& D. Staine, Eds.). Toronto, Ontario, Canada: McClelland & Stewart.

The abbreviation “Eds.” is for multiple editors. If the book has one editor, use “Ed.” 20. Book with an author and a translator After the title, name the translator, followed by “Trans.,” in parentheses. Add the original date of publication at the end of the entry. Steinberg, M. D. (2003). Voices of revolution, 1917 (M. Schwartz, Trans.). New Haven, CT: Yale University Press. (Original work published 2001)

21. Edition other than the first O’Brien, J. A. (Ed.). (2006). The production of reality: Essays and readings on social interaction (4th ed.). Thousand Oaks, CA: Pine Forge Press.

22. Article or chapter in an edited book or an anthology author of chapter: last name + initial(s)

year of publication

title of chapter

Denton, N. A. (2006). Segregation and discrimination in housing. In R. G. book editor(s): in normal order

book title

Bratt, M. E. Stone, & C. Hartman (Eds.), A right to housing: Foundation of page range for chapter


publisher

a new social agenda (pp. 61-81). Philadelphia, PA: Temple University Press.

The abbreviation “Eds.” is for multiple editors. If the book has one editor, use “Ed.”

653

56d

654

APA


Citation at a glance | Book (APA) /ÊVÌiÊ>Ê«ÀÌÊLÊÊ*ÊÃÌÞi]ÊVÕìÊÌiÊÊvÜ}Ê iiiÌÃ\

1Ê ÕÌÀ 2Ê 9i>ÀÊvÊ«ÕLV>Ì 3Ê Ê/ÌiÊ>`ÊÃÕLÌÌi

4Ê *>ViÊvÊ«ÕLV>Ì 5 *ÕLÃiÀ

2 1

3

5 4

REFERENCE LIST ENTRY FOR A PRINT BOOK 1

2

3

Friedman, T. L. (2008). Hot, flat, and crowded: Why we need a green revolution— 4

5

And how it can renew America. New York, NY: Farrar, Straus & Giroux.

ÀÊÀiÊÊVÌ}Ê«ÀÌÊLÃÊÊ*ÊÃÌÞi]ÊÃiiÊ«>}iÃÊÈxÓqxx°Ê

LÊ UÊ ÛÕiÃÊ UÊ «Àiv>ViÊ UÊ `VÌ>ÀÞÊ UÊ ÌÌiÊÊÌÌiÊ UÊ LiÊ UÊ +ÕÀ½>

23. Multivolume work title.

APA

56d

Give the number of volumes after the

Luo, J. (Ed.). (2005). China today: An encyclopedia of life in the People’s Republic (Vols. 1-2). Westport, CT: Greenwood Press.

24. Introduction, preface, foreword, or afterword Gore, A. (2000). Foreword. In B. Katz (Ed.), Reflections on regionalism (pp. ix-x). Washington, DC: Brookings Institution Press.

25. Dictionary or other reference work Leong, F. T. L. (Ed.). (2008). Encyclopedia of counseling (Vols. 1-4). Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.

26. Article in a reference work Konijn, E. A. (2008). Affects and media exposure. In W. Donsbach (Ed.), The international encyclopedia of communication (Vol. 1, pp. 123-129). Malden, MA: Blackwell.

27. Republished book Mailer, N. (2008). Miami and the siege of Chicago: An informal history of the Republican and Democratic conventions of 1968. New York, NY: New York Review Books. (Original work published 1968)

28. Book with a title in its title If the book title contains another book title or an article title, neither italicize the internal title nor place it in quotation marks. Marcus, L. (Ed.). (1999). Sigmund Freud’s The interpretation of dreams: New interdisciplinary essays. Manchester, England: Manchester University Press.

29. Sacred or classical text It is not necessary to list sacred works such as the Bible or the Qur’an or classical Greek and Roman works in your reference list. See item 14 on page 644 for how to cite these sources in the text of your paper.

655

656

56d

APA


Online sources When citing an online article, include publication information as for a print periodical (see items 7–16) and add information about the online version (see items 30–35). Online articles and books sometimes include a DOI (digital object identifier). APA uses the DOI, when available, in place of a URL in reference list entries. Use a retrieval date for an online source only if the content is likely to change. Most of the examples in this section do not show a retrieval date because the content of the sources is stable; if you are unsure about whether to use a retrieval date, include the date or consult your instructor. If you must break a DOI or a URL at the end of a line, break it after a double slash or before any other mark of punctuation; do not add a hyphen. Do not put a period at the end of the entry. 30. Article in an online journal author: last name + initial(s)

year of publication

article title

journal title

Whitmeyer, J. M. (2000). Power through appointment. Social Science Research, volume page range

DOI

29, 535-555. doi:10.1006/ssre.2000.0680

If there is no DOI, include the URL for the journal’s home page. Ashe, D. D., & McCutcheon, L. E. (2001). Shyness, loneliness, and attitude toward celebrities. Current Research in Social Psychology, 6, 124-133. Retrieved from http://www.uiowa.edu/~grpproc/crisp/crisp.html

31. Article in an online magazine Treat as an article in a print magazine (see item 8), and add the URL for the magazine’s home page. Shelburne, E. C. (2008, September). The great disruption. The Atlantic, 302(2). Retrieved from http://www.theatlantic.com/

iÊÃÕÀViÃÊ UÊ >ÀÌViÊ UÊ ÕÀ>Ê UÊ >}>âiÊ UÊ iÜÃ«>«iÀÊ UÊ `>Ì>L>Ãi

56d

APA

32. Article in an online newspaper Treat as an article in a print newspaper (see item 9), adding the URL for the newspaper’s home page. Watson, P. (2008, October 19). Biofuel boom endangers orangutan habitat. Los Angeles Times. Retrieved from http://www.latimes.com/

33. Article published only online If an article in a journal, magazine, or newspaper appears only online, give whatever publication information is available in the source and add the description “Supplemental material” in brackets following the article title. Samuel, T. (2009, March 27). Mind the wage gap [Supplemental material]. The American Prospect. Retrieved from http://www.prospect.org/

34. Article from a database Start with the publication information for the source (see items 7–16). If the database entry includes a DOI for the article, use the DOI number at the end. For an illustrated citation of a work from a database, see page 658. all authors: last name + initial(s)

year

article title

Eskritt, M., & McLeod, K. (2008). Children’s note taking as a mnemonic tool. journal title

volume, page issue range

DOI

Journal of Experimental Child Psychology, 101, 52-74. doi:10.1016 /jecp.2008.05.007

If there is no DOI, include the URL for the home page of the journal. Howard, K. R. (2007). Childhood overweight: Parental perceptions and readiness for change. The Journal of School Nursing, 23, 73-79. Retrieved from http://jsn.sagepub.com/

657

658

56d

APA


Citation at a glance | Article from a database (APA) /ÊVÌiÊ>Ê>ÀÌViÊvÀÊ>Ê`>Ì>L>ÃiÊÊ*ÊÃÌÞi]ÊVÕìÊÌiÊ ÊvÜ}ÊiiiÌÃ\

1Ê 2Ê 3Ê 4Ê 5Ê

ÕÌÀÃ® >ÌiÊvÊÊ«ÕLV>Ì Ê/ÌiÊvÊ>ÀÌVi >iÊvÊ«iÀ`V> 6ÕiÊÕLiÀÆÊÃÃÕiÊ ÕLiÀ]ÊvÊÀiµÕÀi`ÊÃiiÊ «°ÊÈ{®

6Ê *>}iÊÀ>}i 7Ê "Ê`}Ì>ÊLiVÌÊ ìÌwiÀ®

8Ê 1,ÊvÀÊÕÀ>½ÃÊiÊ

«>}iÊvÊÌiÀiÊÃÊÊ "®

ON-SCREEN VIEW OF DATABASE RECORD

3 1 4

END OF DATABASE RECORD

2

5

6

7

iÊÃÕÀViÃÊ UÊ >ÀÌViÊÊ`>Ì>L>ÃiÊ U >LÃÌÀ>VÌÊ UÊ LÊ UÊ iVÞV«i`>

APA

56d

REFERENCE LIST ENTRY FOR AN ARTICLE FROM A DATABASE 1

2

3

Hill, R. P., Felice, W. F., & Ainscough, T. (2007). International human rights 4

and consumer quality of life: An ethical perspective. Journal of 5

6

7

Macromarketing, 27, 370-379. doi:10.1177/027614670307128

ÀÊÀiÊÊVÌ}Ê>ÀÌViÃÊvÀÊ>Ê`>Ì>L>ÃiÊÊ*ÊÃÌÞi]ÊÃiiÊ ÌiÊÎ{°

35. Abstract for an online article Brockerhoff, E. G., Jactel, H., Parrotta, J. A., Quine, C. P., & Sayer, J. (2008). Plantation forests and biodiversity: Oxymoron or opportunity? [Abstract]. Biodiversity and Conservation, 17, 925-951. doi:10.1007/s10531-008 -9380-x

36. Online book Adams, B. (2004). The theory of social revolutions. Retrieved from http://www.gutenberg.org/catalog/world/readfile?fk_files=44092 (Original work published 1913)

37. Chapter in an online book Clinton, S. J. (1999). What can be done to prevent childhood obesity? In Understanding childhood obesity (pp. 81-98). Retrieved from http:// www.questia.com/

38. Online reference work Swain, C. M. (2004). Sociology of affirmative action. In N. J. Smelser & P. B. Baltes (Eds.), International encyclopedia of the social and behavioral sciences. Retrieved from http://www.sciencedirect.com /science/referenceworks/9780080430768

Use a retrieval date only if the content of the work is likely to change.

659

660

56d

APA


39. Document from a Web site List as many of the following elements as are available: author’s name, publication date (or “n.d.” if there is no date), title (in italics), and URL. Give your retrieval date only if the content of the source is likely to change. Source with date all authors: last name + initial(s)

online publication date: year + month

document title

Cain, A., & Burris, M. (1999, April). Investigation of the use of mobile URL

phones while driving. Retrieved from http://www.cutr.eng.usf.edu/its /mobile_phone_text.htm Source with no date

Archer, D. (n.d.). Exploring nonverbal communication. Retrieved from http:// nonverbal.ucsc.edu Source with no author

If a source has no author, begin with the title and follow it with the date in parentheses. What causes Alzheimer’s disease. (2008). Retrieved from http:// www.memorystudy.org/alzheimers_causes.htm

40. Section in a Web document author (organization)

year

title of section

National Institute on Media and the Family. (2009). Mobile networking. title of Web document

In Guide to social networking: Risks. Retrieved from http://www URL

.mediafamily.org/network_pdf/MediaWise_Guide_to_Social _Networking_Risks_09.pdf

For an illustrated citation of a section in a Web document, see page 662.

7iLÊ`VÕiÌÊ UÊ ÕÛiÀÃÌÞÊÃÌiÊ UÊ iÜÃiÌÌiÀÊ UÊ L}Ê UÊ «`V>ÃÌ

APA

56d

41. Document from a university Web site or government agency Name the organization or agency in your retrieval statement. Cosmides, L., & Tooby, J. (1997). Evolutionary psychology: A primer. Retrieved from University of California, Santa Barbara, Center for Evolutionary Psychology website: http://www.psych.ucsb.edu /research/cep/primer.html

42. Article in an online newsletter Cite as an online article (see items 30–32), giving the title of the newsletter and whatever other information is available, including volume and issue numbers. In the face of extinction. (2008, May). NSF Current. Retrieved from http:// www.nsf.gov/news/newsletter/may_08/index.jsp

43. Podcast organization as producer

date of posting

National Academies (Producer). (2007, June 6). Progress in preventing podcast title

descriptive label

childhood obesity: How do we measure up? [Audio podcast]. series title

URL

The sounds of science podcast. Retrieved from http://media.nap.edu /podcasts/ writer/ presenter

date of posting

podcast title

Chesney, M. (2007, September 13). Gender differences in the use of podcast number

descriptive label

complementary and alternative medicine (No. 12827) [Audio podcast]. Web site hosting podcast

Retrieved from University of California Television website: URL

http://www.uctv.tv/ondemand

661

662

56d

APA


Citation at a glance | Section in a Web document (APA) /ÊVÌiÊ>ÊÃiVÌÊÊ>Ê7iLÊ`VÕiÌÊÊ*ÊÃÌÞi]ÊVÕìÊÌiÊ vÜ}ÊiiiÌÃ\

1Ê ÕÌÀ 2Ê >ÌiÊvÊ«ÕLV>ÌÊÀÊ ÃÌÊÀiViÌÊÕ«`>Ìi

4Ê /ÌiÊvÊ`VÕiÌ 5Ê 1,ÊvÊÃiVÌ

3Ê Ê/ÌiÊvÊÃiVÌ BROWSER PRINTOUT OF WEB SITE

1 4 2 «ÕLÃi`ÊiLÀÕ>ÀÞÊÓääx°

3

56d

APA

ÃiVÌÊÊ>Ê7iLÊ`VÕiÌ

663

ON-SCREEN VIEW OF DOCUMENT

5

REFERENCE LIST ENTRY FOR A SECTION IN A WEB DOCUMENT 1

2

3

4

Minnesota Department of Health. (2005, February). Fertility. In 2003 5

Minnesota health statistics annual summary. Retrieved from http:// www.health.state.mn.us/divs/chs/03annsum/fertility.pdf

ÀÊÀiÊÊVÌ}Ê`VÕiÌÃÊvÀÊ7iLÊÃÌiÃÊÊ*ÊÃÌÞi]Ê ÃiiÊ«>}iÃÊÈÈäqÈx°

664

56d

APA


44. Weblog (blog) post Give the writer’s name, the date of the post, the subject, the label “Web log post,” and the URL. For a response to a post, use the label “Web log comment.” Kellermann, M. (2007, May 23). Disclosing clinical trials [Web log post]. Retrieved from http://www.iq.harvard.edu/blog/sss /archives/2007/05

45. Online audio or video file Give the medium or a description of the source file in brackets following the title. Chomsky, N. (n.d.). The new imperialism [Audio file]. Retrieved from http:// www.rhapsody.com/noamchomsky Zakaria, F. (Host), & McCullough, C. (Writer). (2007, March 6). In focus: American teens, Rwandan truths [Video file]. Retrieved from http:// www.pulitzercenter.org/showproject.cfm?id=26

46. Entry in a wiki Begin with the title of the entry and the date of posting, if there is one (use “n.d.” for “no date” if there is not). Then add your retrieval date, the name of the wiki, and the URL for the wiki. Include the date of retrieval because the content of a wiki is often not stable. If an author or an editor is identified, include that name at the beginning of the entry. Ethnomethodology. (n.d.). Retrieved August 22, 2008, from http:// en.stswiki.org/index.php/Ethnomethodology

47. Data set or graphic representation Give information about the type of source in brackets following the title. If there is no title, give a brief description of the content of the source in brackets in place of the title. U.S. Department of Agriculture, Economic Research Service. (2009). Eating and health module (ATUS): 2007 data [Data set]. Retrieved from http:// www.ers.usda.gov/Data/ATUS/Data/2007/2007data.htm

iÊ UÊ ÛìÊ UÊ ÜÊ UÊ `>Ì>Ê UÊ }À>«VÊ UÊ i>À}Ê UÊ i>Ê UÊ «ÃÌ}Ê UÊ `ÃÃiÀÌ>ÌÊ

APA

56d

Gallup. (2008, October 23). No increase in proportion of first-time voters [Graphs]. Retrieved from http://www.gallup.com/poll/111331 /No-Increase-Proportion-First-Time-Voters.aspx

48. Conference hearing Carmona, R. H. (2004, March 2). The growing epidemic of childhood obesity. Testimony before the Subcommittee on Competition, Foreign Commerce, and Infrastructure of the U.S. Senate Committee on Commerce, Science, and Transportation. Retrieved from http://www.hhs.gov/asl/testify /t040302.html

49. E-mail E-mail messages, letters, and other personal communications are not included in the list of references. (See p. 642 for citing these sources in the text of your paper.) 50. Online posting If an online posting is not archived, cite it as a personal communication in the text of your paper and do not include it in the list of references. If the posting is archived, give the URL and the name of the discussion list if it is not part of the URL. McKinney, J. (2006, December 19). Adult education-healthcare partnerships [Electronic mailing list message]. Retrieved from http:// www.nifl.gov/pipermail/healthliteracy/2006/000524.html

Other sources (including online versions) 51. Dissertation from a database Hymel, K. M. (2009). Essays in urban economics (Doctoral dissertation). Available from ProQuest Dissertations and Theses database. (AAT 3355930)

52. Unpublished dissertation Mitchell, R. D. (2007). The Wesleyan Quadrilateral: Relocating the conversation (Unpublished doctoral dissertation). Claremont School of Theology, Claremont, CA.

665

666

56d

APA


53. Government document U.S. Census Bureau. (2006). Statistical abstract of the United States. Washington, DC: Government Printing Office. U.S. Census Bureau, Bureau of Economic Analysis. (2008, August). U.S. international trade in goods and services (Report No. CB08-121, BEA08-37, FT-900). Retrieved from http://www.census.gov /foreign-trade/Press-Release/2008pr/06/ftdpress.pdf

54. Report from a private organization If the publisher and the author are the same, begin with the publisher. For a print source, use “Author” as the publisher at the end of the entry (see item 3 on p. 648); for an online source, give the URL. If the report has a number, put it in parentheses following the title. Ford Foundation. (n.d.). Helping citizens to understand and influence state budgets. Retrieved from http://www.fordfound.org/pdfs/impact /evaluations/state_fiscal_initiative.pdf

55. Legal source Sweatt v. Painter, 339 U.S. 629 (1950). Retrieved from Cornell University Law School, Legal Information Institute website: http://www.law.cornell .edu/supct/html/historics/USSC_CR_0339_0629_ZS.html

56. Conference proceedings Stahl, G. (Ed.). (2002). Proceedings of CSCL ‘02: Computer support for collaborative learning. Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum.

57. Paper presented at a meeting or symposium (unpublished) Anderson, D. N. (2008, May). Cab-hailing and the micropolitics of gesture. Paper presented at the Arizona Linguistics and Anthropology Symposium, Tucson, AZ.

58. Poster session at a conference Wang, Z., & Keogh, T. (2008, June). A click away: Student response to clickers. Poster session presented at the annual conference of the American Library Association, Anaheim, CA.

Ài«ÀÌÊ UÊ i}>Ê UÊ VviÀiViÊ UÊ >«Ê UÊ >`Ê UÊ ÌiÀÛiÜÊ UÊ Ã«iiVÊ UÊ >ÀÌÊ UÊ LÀVÕÀiÊ UÊ ÃìÃ

APA

56d

59. Map or chart Ukraine [Map]. (2008). Retrieved from the University of Texas at Austin Perry-Castañeda Library Map Collection website: http://www.lib.utexas .edu/maps/cia08/ukraine_sm_2008.gif

60. Advertisement Xbox 360 [Advertisement]. (2007, February). Wired, 15(2), 71.

61. Published interview Murphy, C. (2007, June 22). As the Romans did [Interview by G. Hahn]. Retrieved from http://www.theatlantic.com/

62. Lecture, speech, or address Fox, V. (2008, March 5). Economic growth, poverty, and democracy in Latin America: A president’s perspective. Address at the Freeman Spogli Institute, Stanford University, Stanford, CA.

63. Work of art or photograph Weber, J. (1992). Toward freedom [Outdoor mural]. Sherman Oaks, CA. Newkirk, K. (2006). Gainer (part II). Museum of Contemporary Art, Chicago, IL.

64. Brochure, pamphlet, or fact sheet National Council of State Boards of Nursing. (n.d.). Professional boundaries [Brochure]. Retrieved from https://www.ncsbn.org/Professional _Boundaries_2007_Web.pdf World Health Organization. (2007, October). Health of indigenous peoples (No. 326) [Fact sheet]. Retrieved from http://www.who.int/mediacentre /factsheets/fs326/en/index.html

65. Presentation slides Boeninger, C. F. (2008, August). Web 2.0 tools for reference and instructional services [Presentation slides]. Retrieved from http:// libraryvoice.com/archives/2008/08/04/opal-20-conference -presentation-slides/

667

668

56d

APA


66. Film or video (motion picture) Give the director, producer, and other relevant contributors, followed by the year of the film’s release, the title, the description “Motion picture” in brackets, the country where the film was made, and the studio. If you viewed the film on videocassette or DVD, indicate that medium in brackets in place of “Motion picture.” If the original release date and the date of the DVD or videocassette are different, add “Original release” and that date in parentheses at the end of the entry. If the motion picture would be difficult for your readers to find, include instead the name and address of its distributor. Guggenheim, D. (Director), & Bender, L. (Producer). (2006). An inconvenient truth [DVD]. United States: Paramount Home Entertainment. Spurlock, M. (Director). (2004). Super size me [Motion picture]. Available from IDP Films, 1133 Broadway, Suite 926, New York, NY 10010

67. Television program List the producer and the date the program was aired. Give the title, followed by “Television broadcast” in brackets, the city, and the television network or service. Pratt, C. (Executive producer). (2008, October 5). Face the nation [Television broadcast]. Washington, DC: CBS News.

For a television series, use the year in which the series was produced, and follow the title with “Television series” in brackets. For an episode in a series, list the writer and director and the year. After the episode title, put “Television series episode” in brackets. Follow with information about the series. Fanning, D. (Executive producer). (2008). Frontline [Television series]. Boston, MA: WGBH. Smith, M. (Writer/producer). (2008). Heat [Television series episode]. In D. Fanning (Executive producer), Frontline. Boston, MA: WGBH.

wÊ UÊ /6Ê«À}À>Ê UÊ ÃÕ`ÊÀiVÀ`}Ê UÊ ÃvÌÜ>ÀiÊ UÊ ÛìÊ}>iÊ UÊ «>«iÀÊvÀ>Ì

APA

56e

68. Sound recording Thomas, G. (1996). Breath. On Didgeridoo: Ancient sound of the future [CD]. Oxnard, CA: Aquarius International Music.

69. Computer software or video game Add the words “Computer software” (neither italicized nor in quotation marks) in brackets after the title of the program. Sims 2 [Computer software]. (2005). New York, NY: Maxis. hackerhandbooks.com/bedhandbook > Research exercises > APA > E–ex 56–15 to 56–19

56e APA manuscript format The American Psychological Association makes a number of recommendations for formatting a paper and preparing a list of references. The following guidelines are consistent with advice given in the Publication Manual of the American Psychological Association, 6th ed. (Washington: APA, 2010), and typical requirements for undergraduate papers.

Formatting the paper Many instructors in the social sciences require students to follow APA guidelines for formatting a paper. NOTE ON APA GUIDELINES FOR STUDENT PAPERS: The APA manual provides guidelines for papers prepared for publication in a scholarly journal; it does not provide specific guidelines for papers prepared for undergraduate classes. The formatting guidelines in this section and the sample paper on pages 674–83 are consistent with typical requirements for undergraduate writing. The samples on page 684 show APA formatting for a paper prepared for publication. If you are in doubt about which format is preferred or required in your course, ask your instructor.

669

670

56e

APA

APA manuscript format

Materials and font Use good-quality 81 ⁄ 2” × 11” white paper. Avoid a font that is unusual or hard to read. Title page APA provides few guidelines for the title page of an undergraduate paper, but most instructors expect one. See page 674 and the note on page 669. Page numbers and running head For a student paper, number all pages with arabic numerals (1, 2, 3, and so on), including the title page. In the upper right-hand corner of each page, type a short version of your title, capitalizing all words of four letters or more, followed by one space and the page number. See pages 674–83. For a paper submitted for publication, in the upper left-hand corner of every page place a short form of the title in all capital letters (on the title page, include the words “Running head” followed by a colon before the paper title). On the same line in the right-hand corner, place the page number, beginning with 1 on the title page. See page 684. Margins, line spacing, and paragraph indents Use margins of one inch on all sides of the page. Left-align the text. Double-space throughout the paper, but single-space footnotes. Indent the first line of each paragraph one-half inch. Capitalization, italics, and quotation marks Capitalize all words of four letters or more in titles of works and in headings that appear in the text of the paper. Capitalize the first word after a colon if the word begins a complete sentence. Italicize the titles of books and other long works, such as Web sites. Use quotation marks around the titles of periodical articles, short stories, poems, and other short works. NOTE: APA has different requirements for titles in the refer-

ence list. See page 673. Long quotations and footnotes When a quotation is longer than forty words, set it off from the text by indenting it onehalf inch from the left margin. Double-space the quotation. Do not use quotation marks around a quotation that has been set off from the text. See page 682 for an example.

ÌÌiÊ«>}iÊ UÊ >LÃÌÀ>VÌÊ UÊ i>`}ÃÊ UÊ ÛÃÕ>Ã

APA

56e

Place each footnote, if any, at the bottom of the page on which the text reference occurs. Double-space between the last line of text on the page and the footnote. Double-space the footnote and indent the first line one-half inch. Begin the note with the superscript arabic numeral that corresponds to the number in the text. See page 676 for an example. Abstract If your instructor requires an abstract, include it immediately after the title page. Center the word Abstract one inch from the top of the page; double-space the abstract as you do the body of your paper. An abstract is a 100-to-150-word paragraph that provides readers with a quick overview of your essay. It should express your main idea and your key points; it might also briefly suggest any implications or applications of the research you discuss in the paper. See page 675 for an example. Headings Although headings are not always necessary, their use is encouraged in the social sciences. For most undergraduate papers, one level of heading will usually be sufficient. In APA style, major headings are centered and boldface. Capitalize the first word of the heading, along with all words except articles, short prepositions, and coordinating conjunctions. See the sample paper on pages 674–83. Visuals APA classifies visuals as tables and figures (figures include graphs, charts, drawings, and photographs). Keep visuals as simple as possible. Label each table with an arabic numeral (Table 1, Table 2, and so on) and provide a clear title. The label and title should appear on separate lines above the table, flush left and doublespaced. Below the table, give its source in a note. If any data in the table require an explanatory footnote, use a superscript lowercase letter in the body of the table and in a footnote following the source note. Double-space source notes and footnotes and do not indent the first line of each note. See page 679 for an example of a table in a student paper.

671

672

56e

APA

APA manuscript format

For each figure, place a label and a caption below the figure, flush left and double-spaced. The label and caption need not appear on separate lines. In the text of your paper, discuss the most significant features of each visual. Place the visual as close as possible to the sentences that relate to it unless your instructor prefers it in an appendix.

Preparing the list of references Begin your list of references on a new page at the end of the paper. Center the title References one inch from the top of the page. Double-space throughout. For a sample reference list, see page 683. Indenting entries Use a hanging indent in the reference list: Type the first line of each entry flush left and indent any additional lines one-half inch, as shown on page 683. Alphabetizing the list Alphabetize the reference list by the last names of the authors (or editors); when a work has no author or editor, alphabetize by the first word of the title other than A, An, or The. If your list includes two or more works by the same author, arrange the entries by year, the earliest first. If your list includes two or more works by the same author in the same year, arrange the works alphabetically by title. Add the letters “a,” “b,” and so on within the parentheses after the year. Use only the year and the letter for articles in journals: (2002a). Use the full date and the letter for articles in magazines and newspapers in the reference list: (2005a, July 7). Use only the year and the letter in the in-text citation. Authors’ names Invert all authors’ names and use initials instead of first names. With two or more authors, use an ampersand (&) before the last author’s name. Separate the names with commas. Include names for the first seven authors;

ÀiviÀiViÃÊ UÊ ÃÌÊvÊÃÕÀViÃÊ UÊ Ã>«iÊ*Ê«>«iÀ

APA

56f

if there are eight or more authors, give the first six authors, three ellipsis dots, and the last author (see p. 647). Titles of books and articles Italicize the titles and subtitles of books. Do not use quotation marks around the titles of articles. Capitalize only the first word of the title and subtitle (and all proper nouns) of books and articles. Capitalize names of periodicals as you would capitalize them normally (see 45c). Abbreviations for page numbers Abbreviations for “page” and “pages” (“p.” and “pp.”) are used before page numbers of newspaper articles and articles in edited books (see item 9 on p. 649 and item 22 on p. 653) but not before page numbers of articles in magazines and scholarly journals (see items 7 and 8 on p. 649). Breaking a URL When a URL or a DOI (digital object identifier) must be divided, break it after a double slash or before any other mark of punctuation. Do not insert a hyphen, and do not add a period at the end.

For information about the exact format of each entry in your list, consult the models on pages 647–69.

56f Sample APA research paper On the following pages is a research paper on the effectiveness of treatments for childhood obesity, written by Luisa Mirano, a student in a psychology class. Mirano’s assignment was to write a literature review paper documented with APA-style citations and references. See the note on page 669 for a discussion of formatting differences in APA-style student papers and papers prepared for scholarly publication. hackerhandbooks.com/bedhandbook > Model papers > APA papers: Mirano; Shaw > APA annotated bibliography: Haddad

673

674

56f

APA

APA papers

-ÀÌÊÌÌiÊ>`Ê«>}iÊ ÕLiÀÊÊ>Ê«>}iÃÊ vÀÊÃÌÕìÌÊ«>«iÀÃ°Ê -iiÊ«°ÊÈn{ÊvÀÊ>ÊÌÌiÊ page of a paper «Ài«>Ài`ÊvÀÊ «ÕLV>Ì°®

ÕÊÌÌi]ÊViÌiÀi`°

Obesity in Children 1

Can Medication Cure Obesity in Children? A Review of the Literature

Writer’s name, course, ÃÌÀÕVÌÀ½ÃÊ>i]Ê>`Ê `>Ìi]Ê>ÊViÌiÀi`°

Luisa Mirano Psychology 108, Section B Professor Kang October 31, 2004

>À}>Ê>Ì>ÌÃÊ`V>ÌiÊAPA-style formattingÊ>`ÊivviVÌÛiÊÜÀÌ}°

Ã>«iÊ*Ê«>«iÀÊ UÊ ÀiÛiÜÊvÊ ÌiÀ>ÌÕÀiÊ UÊ ÌÌiÊ«>}iÊ UÊ >LÃÌÀ>VÌ

APA

56f

675

Obesity in Children 2 Abstract In recent years, policymakers and medical experts have expressed alarm about the growing problem of childhood obesity in the United States. While most agree that the issue deserves attention, consensus dissolves around how to respond to the problem. This literature review examines one approach to treating childhood obesity: medication. The paper compares the effectiveness for adolescents of the only two drugs approved by the Food and Drug Administration (FDA) for long-term treatment of obesity, sibutramine and orlistat. This examination of pharmacological treatments for obesity points out the limitations of medication and suggests the need for a comprehensive solution that combines medical, social, behavioral, and political approaches to this complex problem.

LÃÌÀ>VÌÊ>««i>ÀÃÊÊ >ÊÃi«>À>ÌiÊ«>}i°

676

56f

APA

APA papers

Obesity in Children 3 ÕÊÌÌi]ÊViÌiÀi`°

Can Medication Cure Obesity in Children? A Review of the Literature In March 2004, U.S. Surgeon General Richard Carmona called attention to a health problem in the United States that, until recently, has been overlooked: childhood obesity. Carmona said that the “astounding” 15% child obesity rate constitutes an “epidemic.” Since the early 1980s, that rate has “doubled in children and tripled in adolescents.” Now more than nine million children are classified as obese.1 While the traditional response to a medical epidemic is to hunt for a vaccine or a cure-all pill, childhood obesity is more elusive. The lack of success of recent initiatives suggests that medication might not be the answer for the escalating problem. This literature review considers whether the use of medication is a promising approach for solving the childhood obesity problem by responding to the following questions:

À>ÊÃiÌÃÊÕ«ÊiÀÊ À}>â>ÌÊLÞÊ«Ã}Ê vÕÀÊµÕiÃÌÃ°

1. What are the implications of childhood obesity? 2. Is medication effective at treating childhood obesity? 3. Is medication safe for children? 4. Is medication the best solution?

À>ÊÃÌ>ÌiÃÊiÀÊ ÌiÃÃ°

Understanding the limitations of medical treatments for children highlights the complexity of the childhood obesity problem in the United States and underscores the need for physicians, advocacy groups, and policymakers to search for other solutions.

i>`}Ã]ÊViÌiÀi`]Ê i«ÊÀi>ìÀÃÊvÜÊ ÌiÊÀ}>â>Ì°

What Are the Implications of Childhood Obesity? Obesity can be a devastating problem from both an individual and a societal perspective. Obesity puts children at risk for a number of

1Obesity is measured in terms of body-mass index (BMI): weight in Mirano uses a footnote ÌÊìwiÊ>ÊiÃÃiÌ>Ê kilograms divided by square of height in meters. A child or an adolescent ÌiÀÊÌ>ÌÊÜÕ`ÊLiÊ VÕLiÀÃiÊÌÊìwiÊ with a BMI in the 95th percentile for his or her age and gender is ÜÌÊÌiÊÌiÝÌ° considered obese.

Ã>«iÊ*Ê«>«iÀÊ UÊ ÀiÛiÜÊvÊÌiÀ>ÌÕÀi

APA

56f

677

Obesity in Children 4 medical complications, including type 2 diabetes, hypertension, sleep apnea, and orthopedic problems (Henry J. Kaiser Family Foundation, 2004, p. 1). Researchers Hoppin and Taveras (2004) have noted that obesity is often associated with psychological issues such as depression, anxiety, and binge eating (Table 4). Obesity also poses serious problems for a society struggling

Ê>ÊÃ}>Ê«À>Ãi]ÊÌiÊ ÜÀ`Êº>`»ÊÃÊÌiÊ >iÃÊvÊÌÜÊ>ÕÌÀÃÆÊ ÌiÊ`>ÌiÊÃÊ}ÛiÊÊ «>ÀiÌiÃiÃ°

to cope with rising health care costs. The cost of treating obesity currently totals $117 billion per year—a price, according to the surgeon general, “second only to the cost of [treating] tobacco use” (Carmona, 2004). And as the number of children who suffer from obesity grows, long-term costs will only increase. Is Medication Effective at Treating Childhood Obesity? The widening scope of the obesity problem has prompted

iV>ÕÃiÊÌiÊ>ÕÌÀÊ >À>®ÊÃÊÌÊ >i`ÊÊÌiÊÃ}>Ê «À>Ãi]ÊÃÊ>iÊ>`Ê ÌiÊ`>ÌiÊ>««i>ÀÊÊ «>ÀiÌiÃiÃ°

medical professionals to rethink old conceptions of the disorder and its causes. As researchers Yanovski and Yanovski (2002) have explained, obesity was once considered “either a moral failing or evidence of underlying psychopathology” (p. 592). But this view has shifted: Many medical professionals now consider obesity a biomedical rather than a moral condition, influenced by both genetic and environmental factors. Yanovski and Yanovski have further noted that the development of weight-loss medications in the early 1990s showed that “obesity should be treated in the same manner as any other chronic disease . . . through the long-term use of medication” (p. 592). The search for the right long-term medication has been complicated. Many of the drugs authorized by the Food and Drug Administration (FDA) in the early 1990s proved to be a disappointment. Two of the medications—fenfluramine and dexfenfluramine—were withdrawn from the market because of severe side effects (Yanovski & Yanovski, 2002, p. 592), and several others

«ÃÃÊ>ÀÊ`V>ÌiÃÊ ÌÌi`ÊÜÀ`Ã°

678

56f

APA

*Ê«>«iÀÃ

Obesity in Children 5 were classified by the Drug Enforcement Administration as having the Ê>Ê«>ÀiÌiÌV>Ê “potential for abuse” (Hoppin & Taveras, 2004, Weight-Loss Drugs VÌ>Ì]Ê>Ê section, para. 6). Currently only two medications have been approved >«iÀÃ>`ÊÃÊÌiÊ >iÃÊvÊÌÜÊ>ÕÌÀÃ° by the FDA for long-term treatment of obesity: sibutramine (marketed as Meridia) and orlistat (marketed as Xenical). This section compares studies on the effectiveness of each. Sibutramine suppresses appetite by blocking the reuptake of the neurotransmitters serotonin and norepinephrine in the brain (Yanovski & Yanovski, 2002, p. 594). Though the drug won FDA approval in 1998, experiments to test its effectiveness for younger patients came considerably later. In 2003, University of Pennsylvania À>Ê`À>ÜÃÊ >ÌÌiÌÊÌÊ>Ê «ÀÌ>ÌÊ>ÀÌVi°

researchers Berkowitz, Wadden, Tershakovec, and Cronquist released the first double-blind placebo study testing the effect of sibutramine on adolescents, aged 13-17, over a 12-month period. Their findings are summarized in Table 1. After 6 months, the group receiving medication had lost 4.6 kg (about 10 pounds) more than the control group. But during the second half of the study, when both groups received sibutramine, the results were more ambiguous. In months 6-12, the group that continued to take sibutramine gained an average of 0.8 kg, or roughly 2 pounds; the control group, which switched from placebo to sibutramine, lost 1.3 kg, or roughly 3 pounds (p. 1808). Both groups received behavioral therapy covering diet, exercise, and mental health. These results paint a murky picture of the effectiveness of the medication: While initial data seemed promising, the results after one year raised questions about whether medication-induced weight loss could be sustained over time. As Berkowitz et al. (2003) advised, “Until more extensive safety and efficacy data are available, . . . weight-loss medications should be used only on an experimental basis for adolescents” (p. 1811).

APA

Ã>«iÊ*Ê«>«iÀÊ UÊ ÀiÛiÜÊvÊÌiÀ>ÌÕÀiÊ UÊ Ì>Li

56f

679

Obesity in Children 6 Table 1 Effectiveness of Sibutramine and Orlistat in Adolescents

Medication

Subjects

Treatmenta Side effects

Sibutramine

Control

0-6 mos.: placebo

Medicated

Orlistat

Mos. 6-12: increased blood 6-12 mos.: pressure; sibutramine increased pulse rate

0-12 mos.: Increased sibutramine blood pressure; increased pulse rate

Average weight loss/gain

À>ÊÕÃiÃÊ>ÊÌ>LiÊ ÌÊÃÕ>ÀâiÊÌiÊ w`}ÃÊ«ÀiÃiÌi`ÊÊ ÌÜÊÃÕÀViÃ°

After 6 mos.: loss of 3.2 kg (7 lb) After 12 mos.: loss of 4.5 kg (9.9 lb) After 6 mos.: loss of 7.8 kg (17.2 lb) After 12 mos.: loss of 7.0 kg (15.4 lb)

Control

0-12 mos.: placebo

None

Gain of 0.67 kg (1.5 lb)

Medicated

0-12 mos.: orlistat

Oily spotting; Loss of 1.3 kg flatulence; (2.9 lb) abdominal discomfort

Note. The data on sibutramine are adapted from “Behavior Therapy and Sibutramine for the Treatment of Adolescent Obesity,” by R. I. Berkowitz,

ÊÌiÊ}ÛiÃÊÌiÊ ÃÕÀViÊvÊÌiÊ`>Ì>°

T. A. Wadden, A. M. Tershakovec, & J. L. Cronquist, 2003, Journal of the American Medical Association, 289, pp. 1807-1809. The data on orlistat are adapted from Xenical (Orlistat) Capsules: Complete Product Information, by Roche Laboratories, December 2003, retrieved from http://www .rocheusa.com/products/xenical/pi.pdf aThe medication and/or placebo were combined with behavioral therapy in all groups over all time periods.

ÊVÌiÌÊÌiÊ iÝ«>ÃÊ`>Ì>ÊVÊ ÌÊ>ÊÃÕLiVÌÃ°

680

56f

APA

*Ê«>«iÀÃ

Obesity in Children 7 A study testing the effectiveness of orlistat in adolescents showed similarly ambiguous results. The FDA approved orlistat in 1999 but did not authorize it for adolescents until December 2003. Roche Laboratories (2003), maker of orlistat, released results of a one-year study testing the drug on 539 obese adolescents, aged 12-16. The drug, which promotes weight loss by blocking fat absorption in the large intestine, showed some effectiveness in adolescents: an average loss of 1.3 kg, or roughly 3 pounds, for subjects taking orlistat for one year, as opposed to an average gain of 0.67 kg, or 1.5 pounds, for the control group (pp. 8-9). See Table 1. Short-term studies of orlistat have shown slightly more dramatic results. Researchers at the National Institute of Child Health and Human Development tested 20 adolescents, aged 12-16, over a three-month period and found that orlistat, combined with behavioral therapy, produced an average weight loss of 4.4 kg, or 9.7 pounds ÀÊ>ÊÃÕÀViÊÜÌÊÃÝÊ (McDuffie et al., 2002, p. 646). The study was not controlled against a ÀÊÀiÊ>ÕÌÀÃ]ÊÌiÊ placebo group; therefore, the relative effectiveness of orlistat in this wÀÃÌÊ>ÕÌÀ½ÃÊÃÕÀ>iÊ case remains unclear. vÜi`ÊLÞÊºiÌÊ>°»Ê ÃÊÕÃi`ÊvÀÊÌiÊwÀÃÌÊ Is Medication Safe for Children? >`ÊÃÕLÃiµÕiÌÊ While modest weight loss has been documented for both ÀiviÀiViÃ° medications, each carries risks of certain side effects. Sibutramine has been observed to increase blood pressure and pulse rate. In 2002, a consumer group claimed that the medication was related to the deaths of 19 people and filed a petition with the Department of Health and Human Services to ban the medication (Hilts, 2002). The sibutramine 7iÊÌÃÊ>ÀÌViÊÜ>ÃÊ wÀÃÌÊVÌi`]Ê>ÊvÕÀÊ >ÕÌÀÃÊÜiÀiÊ>i`°ÊÊ ÃÕLÃiµÕiÌÊVÌ>ÌÃÊvÊ >ÊÜÀÊÜÌÊÌÀiiÊÌÊwÛiÊ >ÕÌÀÃ]ÊºiÌÊ>°»ÊÃÊÕÃi`Ê >vÌiÀÊÌiÊwÀÃÌÊ>ÕÌÀ½ÃÊ >i°

study by Berkowitz et al. (2003) noted elevated blood pressure as a side effect, and dosages had to be reduced or the medication discontinued in 19 of the 43 subjects in the first six months (p. 1809). The main side effects associated with orlistat were abdominal discomfort, oily spotting, fecal incontinence, and nausea (Roche

Ã>«iÊ*Ê«>«iÀÊ UÊ ÀiÛiÜÊvÊÌiÀ>ÌÕÀi

APA

56f

681

Obesity in Children 8 Laboratories, 2003, p. 13). More serious for long-term health is the concern that orlistat, being a fat-blocker, would affect absorption of fat-soluble vitamins, such as vitamin D. However, the study found that this side effect can be minimized or eliminated if patients take vitamin supplements two hours before or after administration of orlistat (p. 10). With close monitoring of patients taking the medication, many of the risks can be reduced. Is Medication the Best Solution? The data on the safety and efficacy of pharmacological treatments of childhood obesity raise the question of whether medication is the best solution for the problem. The treatments have clear costs for individual patients, including unpleasant side effects, little information about long-term use, and uncertainty that they will yield significant weight loss. In purely financial terms, the drugs cost more than $3 a day on average (Duenwald, 2004). In each of the clinical trials, use of medication was accompanied by an expensive regime of behavioral therapies, including counseling, nutritional education, fitness advising, and monitoring. As journalist Greg Critser (2003) noted in his book Fat Land, use of weight-loss drugs is unlikely to have an effect without the proper “support system”—one that includes doctors, facilities, time, and money (p. 3). For some, this level of care is prohibitively expensive. A third complication is that the studies focused on adolescents aged 12-16, but obesity can begin at a much younger age. Little data exist to establish the safety or efficacy of medication for treating very young children. While the scientific data on the concrete effects of these medications in children remain somewhat unclear, medication is not the only avenue for addressing the crisis. Both medical experts and

À>ÊìÛi«ÃÊÌiÊ «>«iÀ½ÃÊÌiÃÃ°

682

56f

APA

*Ê«>«iÀÃ

Obesity in Children 9 policymakers recognize that solutions might come not only from a laboratory but also from policy, education, and advocacy. A handbook designed to educate doctors on obesity called for “major changes in some aspects of western culture” (Hoppin & Taveras, 2004, Conclusion section, para. 1). Cultural change may not be the typical realm of medical professionals, but the handbook urged doctors to À>ViÌÃÊ`V>ÌiÊ >ÊÜÀ`ÊÌÊÊÌiÊÊ À}>ÊÃÕÀVi°

be proactive and “focus [their] energy on public policies and interventions” (Conclusion section, para. 1). The solutions proposed by a number of advocacy groups underscore this interest in political and cultural change. A report by the Henry J. Kaiser Family Foundation (2004) outlined trends that may have contributed to the childhood obesity crisis, including food advertising for children as well as

ÊµÕÌ>ÌÊ}iÀÊÌ>Ê vÀÌÞÊÜÀ`ÃÊÃÊìÌi`Ê ÜÌÕÌÊµÕÌ>ÌÊ >ÀÃ°

a reduction in physical education classes and after-school athletic programs, an increase in the availability of sodas and snacks in public schools, the growth in the number of fast-food outlets . . . , and the increasing number of highly processed high-calorie and high-fat grocery products. (p. 1)

À>ÊÌiÀ«ÀiÌÃÊÌiÊ Addressing each of these areas requires more than a doctor armed iÛìViÆÊÃiÊìÃ½ÌÊ with a prescription pad; it requires a broad mobilization not just of ÕÃÌÊÀi«ÀÌÊÌ° doctors and concerned parents but of educators, food industry executives, advertisers, and media representatives. /iÊÌiÊvÊÌiÊ VVÕÃÊÃÊLiVÌÛi°

The barrage of possible approaches to combating childhood obesity—from scientific research to political lobbying—indicates both the severity and the complexity of the problem. While none of the medications currently available is a miracle drug for curing the nation’s 9 million obese children, research has illuminated some of the underlying factors that affect obesity and has shown the need for a comprehensive approach to the problem that includes behavioral, medical, social, and political change.

Ã>«iÊ*Ê«>«iÀÊ UÊ ÀiÛiÜÊvÊ ÌiÀ>ÌÕÀiÊ UÊ ÀiviÀiViÃ

APA

56f

683

Obesity in Children 10 References Berkowitz, R. I., Wadden, T. A., Tershakovec, A. M., & Cronquist, J. L.

ÃÌÊvÊÀiviÀiViÃÊ Li}ÃÊÊ>ÊiÜÊ«>}i°Ê i>`}ÊÃÊViÌiÀi`°

(2003). Behavior therapy and sibutramine for the treatment of adolescent obesity. Journal of the American Medical Association, 289, 1805-1812. Carmona, R. H. (2004, March 2). The growing epidemic of childhood obesity. Testimony before the Subcommittee on Competition, Foreign Commerce, and Infrastructure of the U.S. Senate

ÃÌÊÃÊ>«>LiÌâi`ÊLÞÊ >ÕÌÀÃ½Ê>ÃÌÊ>iÃ°Ê Ê>ÕÌÀÃ½Ê>iÃÊ>ÀiÊ ÛiÀÌi`°

Committee on Commerce, Science, and Transportation. Retrieved from http://www.hhs.gov/asl/testify/t040302.html Critser, G. (2003). Fat land. Boston, MA: Houghton Mifflin. Duenwald, M. (2004, January 6). Slim pickings: Looking beyond ephedra. The New York Times, p. F1. Retrieved from http://nytimes.com/ Henry J. Kaiser Family Foundation. (2004, February). The role of media

/iÊwÀÃÌÊiÊvÊ>Ê iÌÀÞÊÃÊ>ÌÊÌiÊivÌÊ >À}ÆÊÃÕLÃiµÕiÌÊ iÃÊìÌÊ1⁄2°

in childhood obesity. Retrieved from http://www.kff.org /entmedia/7030.cfm Hilts, P. J. (2002, March 20). Petition asks for removal of diet drug from market. The New York Times, p. A26. Retrieved from http:// nytimes.com/ Hoppin, A. G., & Taveras, E. M. (2004, June 25). Assessment and management of childhood and adolescent obesity. Clinical Update. Retrieved from http://www.medscape.com/viewarticle/481633 McDuffie, J. R., Calis, K. A., Uwaifo, G. I., Sebring, N. G., Fallon, E. M., Hubbard, V. S., & Yanovski, J. A. (2002). Three-month tolerability of orlistat in adolescents with obesity-related comorbid conditions. Obesity Research, 10, 642-650. Roche Laboratories. (2003, December). Xenical (orlistat) capsules: Complete product information. Retrieved from http://www .rocheusa.com/products/xenical/pi.pdf Yanovski, S. Z., & Yanovski, J. A. (2002). Drug therapy: Obesity. The New England Journal of Medicine, 346, 591-602.

ÕLiÃ«>V}ÊÃÊ ÕÃi`ÊÌÀÕ}ÕÌ°

684

56f

APA

APA papers

APA TITLE PAGE: PAPER FOR PUBLICATION (see note on p. 669) ÊÀÕ}Êi>`]Ê Running head: CAN MEDICATION CURE OBESITY IN CHILDREN? ÜVÊÜÊLiÊÕÃi`Ê ÊÌiÊ«ÀÌi`ÊÕÀ>Ê >ÀÌVi]ÊVÃÃÌÃÊvÊ >ÊÃÀÌii`ÊÌÌiÊÊ >ÊV>«Ì>ÊiÌÌiÀÃ°Ê"Ê ÌiÊÌÌiÊ«>}i]ÊÌÊÃÊ «ÀiViì`ÊLÞÊÌiÊ>LiÊ º,Õ}Êi>`°»Ê*>}iÊ ÕLiÀÃÊ>««i>ÀÊÊÌiÊ Õ««iÀÊÀ}ÌÊVÀiÀ°

ÕÊÌÌi]ÊÜÀÌiÀ½ÃÊ >i]Ê>`ÊÃVÊ >iÊ>ÀiÊViÌiÀi`Ê >vÜ>ÞÊ`ÜÊÌiÊ «>}i°Ê

1

Can Medication Cure Obesity in Children? A Review of the Literature Luisa Mirano Northwest-Shoals Community College

Ê>ÕÌÀ½ÃÊÌiÊÃÌÃÊ Author Note Ã«iVwVÊvÀ>ÌÊ >LÕÌÊÌiÊVÕÀÃiÊ This paper was prepared for Psychology 108, Section B, taught ÀÊì«>ÀÌiÌÊ by Professor Kang. >`ÊV>Ê«ÀÛìÊ >VÜi`}iÌÃÊ>`Ê VÌ>VÌÊvÀ>Ì°

APA SAMPLE PAGE: PAPER FOR PUBLICATION

/iÊÀÕ}Êi>`]ÊÊ ÌiÊÕ««iÀÊivÌÊVÀiÀ]Ê >`ÊÌiÊ«>}iÊÕLiÀ]Ê ÊÌiÊÕ««iÀÊÀ}ÌÊ VÀiÀ]Ê>ÀiÊÀi«i>Ìi`Ê Êi>VÊ«>}iÊvÊÌiÊ «>«iÀ°

CAN MEDICATION CURE OBESITY IN CHILDREN? were classified by the Drug Enforcement Administration as having the “potential for abuse” (Hoppin & Taveras, 2004, Weight-Loss Drugs section, para. 6). Currently only two medications have been approved by the FDA for long-term treatment of obesity: sibutramine (marketed

>À}>Ê>Ì>ÌÃÊ`V>ÌiÊ*ÃÌÞiÊvÀ>ÌÌ}°

3

*ÊÌÌiÊ«>}iÊvÀÊ«ÕLV>ÌÊ UÊ ChicagoÊ«>«iÀÃÊ UÊ ÌiÃÃ

Chicago

57a

Writing Chicago papers 57

Chicago papers

Brief Directory

57a 57b 57c 57d

Supporting a thesis, 685 Citing sources; avoiding plagiarism, 689 Integrating sources, 693 Chicago documentation style, 699 Directory to V>}-style notes and bibliography entries, 703

57e Chicago manuscript format, 713 57f Sample Chicago research paper, 717

Most history instructors and some humanities instructors require you to document sources with footnotes or endnotes based on The Chicago Manual of Style, 15th ed. (Chicago: U of Chicago P, 2003). (See 57f.) When you write a paper using sources, you face three main challenges: (1) supporting a thesis, (2) citing your sources and avoiding plagiarism, and (3) integrating quotations and other source material.

57a Supporting a thesis Most research assignments ask you to form a thesis, or main idea, and to support that thesis with well-organized evidence. (See also 1c.) Remain flexible as you draft because you may need to revise your approach later. Writing about a subject is a way of learning about it; as you write, your understanding of your subject will almost certainly deepen.

685

686

57a

Chicago

ChicagoÊ«>«iÀÃ\Ê-Õ««ÀÌ}Ê>ÊÌiÃÃ

Forming a working thesis Once you have read a variety of sources and considered your issue from different perspectives, you are ready to form a working thesis: a one7iÊÜÀÌ}ÊvÀÊÃÕÀViÃ]ÊÌÊ sentence (or occasionally a two-sentence) i«ÃÊÌÊÃÌ>ÀÌÊÜÌÊ>ÊÜÀ}Ê statement of your central idea. (See also ÌiÃÃÊ>`Ê>ÊÀÕ}ÊÕÌi° 1e.) Because it is a working, or tentative, 0Ê À>vÌÊ>ÊÜÀ}ÊÌiÃÃ\Ê£V thesis, it is flexible enough to change as 0Ê-iÌVÊ>Ê«>\Ê£` your ideas develop. Ultimately, the thesis expresses not just your opinion but your informed, reasoned judgment. In a research paper, your thesis will answer the central research question that you posed earlier (see 46a). Here, for example, are student writer Ned Bishop’s research question and working thesis statement. Making the most of your handbook

RESEARCH QUESTION

To what extent was Confederate Major General Nathan Bedford Forrest responsible for the massacre of Union troops at Fort Pillow? WORKING THESIS

By encouraging racism among his troops, Nathan Bedford Forrest was directly responsible for the massacre of Union troops at Fort Pillow.

Notice that the thesis expresses a view on a debatable issue — an issue about which intelligent, well-meaning people might disagree. The writer’s job is to convince such readers that this view is worth taking seriously. The thesis usually appears at the end of the introductory paragraph. To read Ned Bishop’s thesis in the context of his introduction, see page 719.

Organizing your ideas The body of your paper will consist of evidence in support of your thesis. Instead of getting tangled up in a complex, formal outline, sketch an informal plan that organizes your evidence in bold strokes. Ned Bishop, for example, used a simple outline to

ÌiÃÃÊ UÊ ÀiÃi>ÀVÊµÕiÃÌÊ UÊ À}>â}Êì>ÃÊ UÊ ÜÊÃÕÀViÃÊÜÀÊÊ>Ê«>«iÀÊ UÊ ÃÕ««ÀÌ

Chicago

57a

structure his ideas. In the paper itself, these points became headings that helped readers follow his line of argument. What happened at Fort Pillow? Did Forrest order the massacre? Can Forrest be held responsible for the massacre? hackerhandbooks.com/bedhandbook > Research exercises > Chicago > E-ex 57–1 and 57–2

Using sources to inform and support your argument Used thoughtfully, the source materials you have gathered will make your argument more complex and convincing for readers. Sources can play several different roles as you develop your points. Providing background information or context You can use facts and statistics to support generalizations or to establish the importance of your topic, as student writer Ned Bishop does early in his paper. Fort Pillow, Tennessee, which sat on a bluff overlooking the Mississippi River, had been held by the Union for two years. It was garrisoned by 580 men, 292 of them from United States Colored Heavy and Light Artillery regiments, 285 from the white Thirteenth Tennessee Cavalry. Nathan Bedford Forrest commanded about 1,500 troops.1

Explaining terms or concepts If readers are unlikely to be familiar with a word or an idea important to your topic, you must explain it for them. Quoting or paraphrasing a source can help you define terms and concepts clearly and concisely. The Civil War practice of giving no quarter to an enemy— in other words, “denying [an enemy] the right of survival”— defied Lincoln’s mandate for humane and merciful treatment of prisoners.9

687

688

57a

Chicago

ChicagoÊ«>«iÀÃ\Ê-Õ««ÀÌ}Ê>ÊÌiÃÃ

Supporting your claims As you draft your argument, make sure to back up your assertions with facts, examples, and other evidence from your research. (See also 5e.) Ned Bishop, for example, uses an eyewitness report of the racially motivated violence perpetrated by Nathan Bedford Forrest’s troops. The slaughter at Fort Pillow was no doubt driven in large part by racial hatred. . . . A Southern reporter traveling with Forrest makes clear that the discrimination was deliberate: “Our troops maddened by the excitement, shot down the ret[r]eating Yankees, and not until they had attained t[h]e water’s edge and turned to beg for mercy, did any prisoners fall in [t]o our hands— Thus the whites received quarter, but the negroes were shown no mercy.”19

Lending authority to your argument Expert opinion can give weight to your argument. (See also 5e.) But don’t rely on experts to make your argument for you. Construct your argument in your own words and, when appropriate, cite the judgment of an authority in the field to support your position. Fort Pillow is not the only instance of a massacre or threatened massacre of black soldiers by troops under Forrest’s command. Biographer Brian Steel Wills points out that at Brice’s Cross Roads in June 1864, “black soldiers suffered inordinately” as Forrest looked the other way and Confederate soldiers deliberately sought out those they termed “the damned negroes.”21

Anticipating and countering objections Do not ignore sources that seem contrary to your position or that offer arguments different from your own. Instead, use them to give voice to opposing points of view and to state potential objections to your arguments before you counter them (see 5f). Readers often have opposing points of view in mind already, whether or not they agree with you. Ned Bishop, for example, presents conflicting evidence to acknowledge that some readers may

ÜÊÃÕÀViÃÊÜÀÊÊ«>«iÀÊ UÊ ÃÕ««ÀÌ}Ê>À}ÕiÌÃÊ UÊ VÌ}ÊÃÕÀViÃ

Chicago

57b

credit Nathan Bedford Forrest with stopping the massacre. In doing so, Bishop creates an opportunity to counter that objection and persuade those readers that Forrest can be held accountable. Hurst suggests that the temperamental Forrest “may have ragingly ordered a massacre and even intended to carry it out— until he rode inside the fort and viewed the horrifying result” and ordered it stopped.15 While this is an intriguing interpretation of events, even Hurst would probably admit that it is merely speculation.

57b Citing sources; avoiding plagiarism In a research paper, you will draw on the work of other writers, and you must document their contributions by citing your sources. Sources are cited for two reasons: UÊ ÌÊÌiÊÀi>ìÀÃÊÜiÀiÊÞÕÀÊvÀ>ÌÊViÃÊvÀÊpÊÃÊ that they can assess its reliability and, if interested, find and read the original source UÊ ÌÊ}ÛiÊVÀi`ÌÊÌÊÌiÊÜÀÌiÀÃÊvÀÊÜÊÞÕÊ>ÛiÊLÀrowed words and ideas Borrowing another writer’s language, sentence structures, or ideas without proper acknowledgment is a form of dishonesty known as plagiarism.

Using the Chicago system for citing sources You must include a citation when you quote from a source, when you summarize or paraphrase a source, and when you borrow facts that are not common knowledge. (See also “Avoiding plagiarism” on p. 690.) Chicago citations consist of superscript numbers in the text of the paper that refer readers to notes with corresponding numbers either at the foot of the page (footnotes) or at the end of the paper (endnotes).

689

690

57b

Chicago

ChicagoÊ«>«iÀÃ\ÊÛ`}Ê«>}>ÀÃ

TEXT

Governor John Andrew was not allowed to recruit black soldiers from out of state. “Ostensibly,” writes Peter Burchard, “no recruiting was done outside Massachusetts, but it was an open secret that Andrew’s agents were working far and wide.”1 NOTE

1. Peter Burchard, One Gallant Rush: Robert Gould Shaw and His Brave Black Regiment (New York: St. Martin’s, 1965), 85.

For detailed advice on using Chicago-style notes, see 57d. When you use footnotes or endnotes, you will usually need to provide a bibliography as well (see p. 716).

Avoiding plagiarism Your research paper is a collaboration between you and your sources. To be fair and ethical, you must acknowledge your debt to the writers of those sources. If you don’t, you commit plagiarism, a serious academic offense. (See also 48c.) In general, these three acts are considered plagiarism: (1) failing to cite quotations and borrowed ideas, (2) failing to enclose borrowed language in quotation marks, and (3) failing to put summaries and paraphrases in your own words. Definitions of plagiarism may vary; it’s a good idea to find out how your school defines academic dishonesty. Citing quotations and borrowed ideas You must cite all direct quotations. You must also cite any ideas you borrow from a source: summaries and paraphrases; statistics and other specific facts; and visuals such as cartoons, graphs, and diagrams. The only exception is common knowledge — information your readers could easily find in any number of general sources. For example, most encyclopedias will tell readers that the Korean War ended in 1953 and that President Theodore Roosevelt was the first American to receive the Nobel Prize.

VÊÜi`}iÊ UÊ µÕÌ>ÌÃÊ UÊ ÃÕ>ÀÞÊ UÊ «>À>«À>Ãi

Chicago

57b

As a rule, when you have seen certain general information repeatedly in your reading, you don’t need to cite it. However, when information has appeared in only a few sources, when it is highly specific (as with statistics), or when it is controversial, you should cite the source. If a topic is new to you and you are not sure what is considered common knowledge or what is controversial, ask your instructor or someone else with expertise. When in doubt, cite the source. (See 57d for details.) Enclosing borrowed language in quotation marks To indicate that you are using a source’s exact phrases or sentences, you must enclose them in quotation marks unless they have been set off from the text by indenting (see p. 695). To omit the quotation marks is to claim — falsely — that the language is your own. Such an omission is plagiarism even if you have cited the source. ORIGINAL SOURCE

For many Southerners it was psychologically impossible to see a black man bearing arms as anything but an incipient slave uprising complete with arson, murder, pillage, and rapine. — Dudley Taylor Cornish, The Sable Arm, p. 158 PLAGIARISM

According to Civil War historian Dudley Taylor Cornish, for many Southerners it was psychologically impossible to see a black man bearing arms as anything but an incipient slave uprising complete with arson, murder, pillage, and rapine.2 BORROWED LANGUAGE IN QUOTATION MARKS

According to Civil War historian Dudley Taylor Cornish, “For many Southerners it was psychologically impossible to see a black man bearing arms as anything but an incipient slave uprising complete with arson, murder, pillage, and rapine.”2

Putting summaries and paraphrases in your own words Summaries and paraphrases are written in your own words. A summary condenses information; a paraphrase uses roughly

691

692

57b

Chicago

ChicagoÊ«>«iÀÃ\ÊÛ`}Ê«>}>ÀÃ

the same number of words as the original source to convey the information. When you summarize or paraphrase, it is not enough to name the source; you must restate the source’s meaning using your own language. (See also 48c.) You commit plagiarism if you half-copy the author’s sentences — either by mixing the author’s phrases with your own without using quotation marks or by plugging your own synonyms into the author’s sentence structure. The first paraphrase of the following source is plagiarized — even though the source is cited — because too much of its language is borrowed from the original. The underlined strings of words have been copied exactly (without quotation marks). In addition, the writer has closely followed the sentence structure of the original source, merely making a few substitutions (such as Fifty percent for Half and angered and perhaps frightened for enraged and perhaps terrified). ORIGINAL SOURCE

Half of the force holding Fort Pillow were Negroes, former slaves now enrolled in the Union Army. Toward them Forrest’s troops had the fierce, bitter animosity of men who had been educated to regard the colored race as inferior and who for the first time had encountered that race armed and fighting against white men. The sight enraged and perhaps terrified many of the Confederates and aroused in them the ugly spirit of a lynching mob. — Albert Castel, “The Fort Pillow Massacre,” pp. 46–47 PLAGIARISM: UNACCEPTABLE BORROWING

Albert Castel suggests that much of the brutality at Fort Pillow can be traced to racial attitudes. Fifty percent of the troops holding Fort Pillow were Negroes, former slaves who had joined the Union Army. Toward them Forrest’s soldiers displayed the savage hatred of men who had been taught the inferiority of blacks and who for the first time had confronted them armed and fighting against white men. The vision angered and perhaps frightened the Confederates and aroused in them the ugly spirit of a lynching mob.3

Ìi}À>Ì}ÊÃÕÀViÃÊ UÊ ÕÃ}ÊµÕÌ>ÌÃ

Chicago

57c

To avoid plagiarizing an author’s language, resist the temptation to look at the source while you are summarizing or paraphrasing. After you have read the passage you want to paraphrase, set the source aside. Ask yourself, “What is the author’s meaning?” In your own words, state your understanding of the author’s basic point. Return to the source and check that you haven’t used the author’s language or sentence structure or misrepresented the author’s ideas. Following these steps will help you avoid plagiarizing the source. When you fully understand another writer’s meaning, you can more easily and accurately represent those ideas in your own words. ACCEPTABLE PARAPHRASE

Albert Castel suggests that much of the brutality at Fort Pillow can be traced to racial attitudes. Fifty percent of the Union troops were blacks, men whom the Confederates had been raised to consider their inferiors. The shock and perhaps fear of facing armed ex-slaves in battle may well have unleashed the fury that led to the massacre.3 hackerhandbooks.com/bedhandbook > Research exercises > Chicago > E-ex 57–3 to 57–7

57c Integrating sources Quotations, summaries, paraphrases, and facts will support your argument, but they cannot speak for you. You can use several strategies to integrate information from research sources into your paper while maintaining your own voice.

Using quotations appropriately In your academic writing, keep the emphasis on your ideas and your language; use your own words to summarize and to paraphrase your sources and to explain your points. Sometimes, however, quotations can be the most effective way to integrate a source. WHEN TO USE QUOTATIONS

U When language is especially vivid or expressive U When exact wording is needed for technical accuracy

693

694

57c

Chicago

ChicagoÊ«>«iÀÃ\ÊÌi}À>Ì}ÊÃÕÀViÃ

U When it is important to let the debaters of an issue

explain their positions in their own words U When the words of an authority lend weight to an argument U When the language of a source is the topic of your discus-

sion (as in an analysis or interpretation) Limiting your use of quotations Although it is tempting to insert many quotations in your paper and to use your own words only for connecting passages, do not quote excessively. It is almost impossible to integrate numerous quotations smoothly into your own text. It is not always necessary to quote full sentences from a source. To reduce your reliance on the words of others, you can often integrate language from a source into your own sentence structure. As Hurst has pointed out, until “an outcry erupted in the Northern press,” even the Confederates did not deny that there had been a massacre at Fort Pillow.4 Union surgeon Dr. Charles Fitch testified that after he was in custody he “saw” Confederate soldiers “kill every negro that made his appearance dressed in Federal uniform.”20

Using the ellipsis mark To condense a quoted passage, you can use the ellipsis mark (three periods, with spaces between) to indicate that you have left words out. What remains must be grammatically complete. Union surgeon Fitch’s testimony that all women and children had been evacuated from Fort Pillow before the attack conflicts with Forrest’s report: “We captured . . . about 40 negro women and children.”6

The writer has omitted several words not relevant to the issue at hand: 164 Federals, 75 negro troops, and. When you want to leave out one or more full sentences, use a period before the three ellipsis dots. For an example, see the long quotation at the bottom of page 695.

ÕÃ}ÊµÕÌ>ÌÃÊ UÊ i«ÃÃÊ>ÀÃÊ`ÌÃ®Ê UÊ LÀ>ViÌÃÊ UÊ }ÊµÕÌ>ÌÃÊ

Chicago

57c

Ordinarily, do not use the ellipsis mark at the beginning or at the end of a quotation. Readers will understand that the quoted material is taken from a longer passage, so such marks are not necessary. The only exception occurs when you have dropped words at the end of the final quoted sentence. In such cases, put three ellipsis dots before the closing quotation mark. Make sure omissions and ellipsis marks do not distort the meaning of your source. Using brackets Brackets allow you to insert words of your own into quoted material to clarify a confusing reference or to keep a sentence grammatical in your context. According to Albert Castel, “It can be reasonably argued that he [Forrest] was justified in believing that the approaching steamships intended to aid the garrison [at Fort Pillow].”7 NOTE: Use the word sic in brackets to indicate that an error in a

quoted sentence appears in the original source. (An example appears on p. 696.) Do not overuse sic to call attention to errors in a source. Sometimes paraphrasing is a better option. (See 39c.) Setting off long quotations Chicago style allows you some leeway in deciding whether to set off a long quotation or run it into your text. For emphasis, you may want to set off a quotation of more than four or five typed lines of text; almost certainly you should set off quotations of ten or more lines. To set off a quotation, indent it one-half inch from the left margin and use the normal right margin. Double-space the indented quotation. Long quotations should be introduced by an informative sentence, usually followed by a colon. Quotation marks are unnecessary because the indented format tells readers that the passage is taken word-for-word from the source. In a letter home, Confederate officer Achilles V. Clark recounted what happened at Fort Pillow: Words cannot describe the scene. The poor deluded negroes would run up to our men fall upon their knees and with uplifted hands

695

696

57c

Chicago


scream for mercy but they were ordered to their feet and then shot down. The whitte [sic] men fared but little better. . . . I with several others tried to stop the butchery and at one time had partially succeeded[,] but Gen. Forrest ordered them shot down like dogs[,] and the carnage continued.8

Using signal phrases to integrate sources Whenever you include a paraphrase, summary, or direct quotation of another writer in your paper, prepare your readers for it with introductory words called a signal phrase. A signal phrase names the author of the source and often provides some context for the source material. When you write a signal phrase, choose a verb that is appropriate for the way you are using the source (see p. 687). Are you providing background, explaining a concept, supporting a claim, lending authority, or refuting a belief? By choosing an appropriate verb, you can make your source’s role clear. See the chart on page 697 for a list of verbs commonly used in signal phrases. Note that Chicago style calls for verbs in the present or present perfect tense ( points out, has pointed out) to introduce source material unless you include a date that specifies the time of the original author’s writing. The first time you mention an author, use the full name: Shelby Foote argues. . . . When you refer to the author again, you may use the last name only: Foote raises an important question. Marking boundaries Readers should be able to move from your own words to the words you quote from a source without feeling a jolt. Avoid dropping quotations into the text without warning. Instead, provide clear signal phrases, usually including the author’s name, to indicate the boundary between your words and the source’s words. (The signal phrase is underlined in the second example.)

Ã}>Ê«À>ÃiÃ

Chicago

57c

Using signal phrases in Chicago papers /Ê>Û`ÊÌÞ]ÊÌÀÞÊÌÊÛ>ÀÞÊLÌÊÌiÊ>}Õ>}iÊ>`ÊÌiÊ«>ViiÌÊvÊÞÕÀÊÃ}>Ê«À>ÃiÃ°

Model signal phrases ÊÌiÊÜÀ`ÃÊvÊÃÌÀ>Ê>iÃÊ°ÊV*iÀÃ]Êº°Ê°Ê°»1 ÃÊ ÕìÞÊ/>ÞÀÊ ÀÃÊ>ÃÊ>À}Õi`]Êº°Ê°Ê°»2 Ê>ÊiÌÌiÀÊÌÊÃÊÜvi]Ê>Ê viìÀ>ÌiÊÃìÀÊÜÊ ÜÌiÃÃi`ÊÌiÊ>ÃÃ>VÀiÊÜÀÌiÊÌ>ÌÊº°Ê°Ê°»3 º°Ê°Ê°Ê]»ÊV>ÃÊ i>Ê+Õ>ÀiÃ°4 º°Ê°Ê°Ê]»ÊÜÀÌiÃÊLiÀÌÊ >ÃÌi]Êº°Ê°Ê°»5 -iLÞÊÌiÊvviÀÃÊ>ÊÌÀ}Õ}ÊÌiÀ«ÀiÌ>Ì\Êº°Ê°Ê°»6

Verbs in signal phrases >`ÌÃ >}ÀiiÃ >À}ÕiÃ asserts believes V>Ã

V«>ÀiÃ VwÀÃ VÌi`Ã ìV>ÀiÃ ìiÃ i«>ÃâiÃ

ÃÃÌÃ ÌiÃ LÃiÀÛiÃ «ÌÃÊÕÌ Ài>ÃÃ ÀivÕÌiÃ

ÀiiVÌÃ Ài«ÀÌÃ ÀiÃ«`Ã ÃÕ}}iÃÌÃ ÌÃ ÜÀÌiÃ

DROPPED QUOTATION

Not surprisingly, those testifying on the Union and Confederate sides recalled events at Fort Pillow quite differently. Unionists claimed that their troops had abandoned their arms and were in full retreat. “The Confederates, however, all agreed that the Union troops retreated to the river with arms in their hands.”9 QUOTATION WITH SIGNAL PHRASE

Not surprisingly, those testifying on the Union and Confederate sides recalled events at Fort Pillow quite differently. Unionists claimed that their troops had abandoned their arms and were in full retreat. “The Confederates, however,” writes historian Albert Castel,

697

698

57c

Chicago


“all agreed that the Union troops retreated to the river with arms in their hands.”9

Using signal phrases with summaries and paraphrases Introduce most summaries and paraphrases with a signal phrase that mentions the author and places the material in the context of your argument. Readers will then understand where the summary or paraphrase begins. Without the signal phrase (underlined) in the following example, readers might think that only the last sentence is being cited, when in fact the whole paragraph is based on the source. According to Jack Hurst, official Confederate policy was that black soldiers were to be treated as runaway slaves; in addition, the Confederate Congress decreed that white Union officers commanding black troops be killed. Confederate Lieutenant General Kirby Smith went one step further, declaring that he would kill all captured black troops. Smith’s policy never met with strong opposition from the Richmond government.10

Integrating statistics and other facts When you are citing a statistic or another specific fact, a signal phrase is often not necessary. In most cases, readers will understand that the citation refers to the statistic or fact (not the whole paragraph). Of the 295 white troops garrisoned at Fort Pillow, 168 were taken prisoner. Black troops fared worse, with only 58 of 262 captured and most of the rest presumably killed or wounded.12

There is nothing wrong, however, with using a signal phrase to introduce a statistic or another fact. Putting source material in context Readers should not have to guess why source material appears in your paper. A signal phrase can help you make the connection between your own ideas and those of another writer by setting up how a source will contribute to your paper (see 47a).

ÃÕ>ÀÞÊ UÊ «>À>«À>ÃiÊ UÊ v>VÌÃÊ UÊ ChicagoÊÌiÃ

Chicago

57d

If you use another writer’s words, you must explain how they relate to your point. It’s a good idea to embed a quotation between sentences of your own. In addition to introducing it with a signal phrase, follow it with interpretive comments that link the source material to your paper’s argument. QUOTATION WITH EFFECTIVE CONTEXT

In a respected biography of Nathan Bedford Forrest, Hurst suggests that the temperamental Forrest “may have ragingly ordered a massacre and even intended to carry it out—until he rode inside the fort and viewed the horrifying result” and ordered it stopped.15 While this is an intriguing interpretation of events, even Hurst would probably admit that it is merely speculation. NOTE: When you bring other sources into a conversation

about your research topic, you are synthesizing. For more on synthesis, see 52c. hackerhandbooks.com/bedhandbook > Research exercises > Chicago > E-ex 57–8 to 57–11

57d Chicago documentation style In history and some humanities courses, you may be asked to use the documentation system set forth in The Chicago Manual of Style, 15th ed. (Chicago: U of Chicago P, 2003). In Chicago style, superscript numbers in the text of the paper refer readers to notes with corresponding numbers either at the foot of the page (footnotes) or at the end of the paper (endnotes). A bibliography is often required as well; it appears at the end of the paper and gives publication information for all the works cited in the notes. TEXT

A Union soldier, Jacob Thompson, claimed to have seen Forrest order the killing, but when asked to describe the six-foot-two general, he called him “a little bit of a man.”12

699

700

57d

Chicago

ChicagoÊÌiÃÊ>`ÊLL}À>«Þ

FOOTNOTE OR ENDNOTE

12. Brian Steel Wills, A Battle from the Start: The Life of Nathan Bedford Forrest (New York: HarperCollins, 1992), 187. BIBLIOGRAPHY ENTRY

Wills, Brian Steel. A Battle from the Start: The Life of Nathan Bedford Forrest. New York: HarperCollins, 1992.

First and subsequent notes for a source The first time you cite a source, the note should include publication information for that work as well as the page number on which the passage being cited may be found. 1. Peter Burchard, One Gallant Rush: Robert Gould Shaw and His Brave Black Regiment (New York: St. Martin’s, 1965), 85.

For subsequent references to a source you have already cited, you may simply give the author’s last name, a short form of the title, and the page or pages cited. A short form of the title of a book is italicized; a short form of the title of an article is put in quotation marks. 4. Burchard, One Gallant Rush, 31.

When you have two consecutive notes from the same source, you may use “Ibid.” (meaning “in the same place”) and the page number for the second note. Use “Ibid.” alone if the page number is the same. 5. Jack Hurst, Nathan Bedford Forrest: A Biography (New York: Knopf, 1993), 8. 6. Ibid., 174.

Chicago-style bibliography A bibliography, which appears at the end of your paper, lists every work you have cited in your notes; in addition, it may include works that you consulted but did not cite. For advice on constructing the list, see page 716. A sample bibliography appears on page 726.

ÕÌ«iÊÀiviÀiViÃÊÌÊÃ>iÊÃÕÀViÊ UÊ L

Chicago

57d

NOTE: If you include a bibliography, The Chicago Manual of Style suggests that you shorten all notes, including the first reference to a source, as described on page 700. Check with your instructor, however, to see whether using an abbreviated note for a first reference to a source is acceptable.

Model notes and bibliography entries The following models are consistent with guidelines set forth in The Chicago Manual of Style, 15th ed. For each type of source, a model note appears first, followed by a model bibliography entry. The note shows the format you should use when citing a source for the first time. For subsequent citations of a source, use shortened notes (see p. 700). Some online sources, typically periodical articles, use a permanent locator called a digital object identifier (DOI). Use the DOI, when it is available, in place of page numbers in your citations of online sources. When a Web address (URL) must break across lines, do not insert a hyphen or break at a hyphen if the URL contains one. Instead, break the URL after a slash or a double slash or before any other mark of punctuation.

Books (print and online) 1. Basic format for a print book 1. William H. Rehnquist, The Supreme Court: A History (New York: Knopf, 2001), 204. Rehnquist, William H. The Supreme Court: A History. New York: Knopf, 2001.

2. Basic format for an online book 2. Heinz Kramer, A Changing Turkey: The Challenge to Europe and the United States (Washington, DC: Brookings Press, 2000), 85, http://brookings.nap.edu/books/0815750234/html/R1.html. Kramer, Heinz. A Changing Turkey: The Challenge to Europe and the United States. Washington, DC: Brookings Press, 2000. http://brookings.nap .edu/books/0815750234/html/R1.html.

701

702

57d

Chicago


3. Two or three authors 3. Michael D. Coe and Mark Van Stone, Reading the Maya Glyphs (London: Thames and Hudson, 2002), 129-30. Coe, Michael D., and Mark Van Stone. Reading the Maya Glyphs. London: Thames and Hudson, 2002.

4. Four or more authors 4. Lynn Hunt and others, The Making of the West: Peoples and Cultures, 3rd ed. (Boston: Bedford/St. Martin’s, 2009), 541. Hunt, Lynn, Thomas R. Martin, Barbara H. Rosenwein, R. Po-chia Hsia, and Bonnie G. Smith. The Making of the West: Peoples and Cultures. 3rd ed. Boston: Bedford/St. Martin’s, 2009.

5. Organization as author 5. Dormont Historical Society, Images of America: Dormont (Charleston, SC: Arcadia Publishing, 2008), 24. Dormont Historical Society. Images of America: Dormont. Charleston, SC: Arcadia Publishing, 2008.

6. Unknown author 6. The Men’s League Handbook on Women’s Suffrage (London, 1912), 23. The Men’s League Handbook on Women’s Suffrage. London, 1912.

7. Multiple works by the same author In the bibliography, use three hyphens in place of the author’s name in the second and subsequent entries. Arrange the entries alphabetically by title or by date; be consistent throughout the bibliography. Harper, Raymond L. A History of Chesapeake, Virginia. Charleston, SC: History Press, 2008. ---. South Norfolk, Virginia, 1661-2005. Charleston, SC: History Press, 2005.

8. Edited work without an author 8. Jack Beatty, ed., Colossus: How the Corporation Changed America (New York: Broadway Books, 2001), 127.

ÕÌ«iÊ>ÕÌÀÃÊ UÊ À}>â>ÌÊ UÊ Ê>ÕÌÀÊ UÊ ÌÜÊÀÊÀiÊÜÀÃÊ UÊ `ÀiVÌÀÞÊ

Chicago

57d

Directory to Chicago-style notes and bibliography entries Books (print and online) Ê £°Ê >ÃVÊvÀ>ÌÊvÀÊ>Ê«ÀÌÊL]Ê Çä£ Ê Ó°Ê >ÃVÊvÀ>ÌÊvÀÊ>ÊiÊ L]ÊÇä£ Ê Î°Ê /ÜÊÀÊÌÀiiÊ>ÕÌÀÃ]ÊÇäÓ Ê {°Ê ÕÀÊÀÊÀiÊ>ÕÌÀÃ]ÊÇäÓ Ê x°Ê "À}>â>ÌÊ>ÃÊ>ÕÌÀ]ÊÇäÓ Ê È°Ê 1ÜÊ>ÕÌÀ]ÊÇäÓ Ê Ç°Ê ÕÌ«iÊÜÀÃÊLÞÊÌiÊÃ>iÊ >ÕÌÀ]ÊÇäÓ Ê n°Ê `Ìi`ÊÜÀÊÜÌÕÌÊ>Ê >ÕÌÀ]ÊÇäÓ Ê °Ê `Ìi`ÊÜÀÊÜÌÊ>Ê>ÕÌÀ]ÊÇä{ £ä°Ê /À>Ã>Ìi`ÊÜÀ]ÊÇä{ ££°Ê `ÌÊÌiÀÊÌ>ÊÌiÊwÀÃÌ]ÊÇä{ £Ó°Ê 6ÕiÊÊ>ÊÕÌÛÕiÊ ÜÀ]ÊÇä{ £Î°Ê 7ÀÊÊ>Ê>Ì}Þ]ÊÇä{ £{°Ê ÌÀ`ÕVÌ]Ê«Àiv>Vi]Ê vÀiÜÀ`]ÊÀÊ>vÌiÀÜÀ`]ÊÇäx £x°Ê ,i«ÕLÃi`ÊL]ÊÇäx £È°Ê 7ÀÊÜÌÊ>ÊÌÌiÊÊÌÃÊÌÌi]ÊÇäx £Ç°Ê iÌÌiÀÊÊ>Ê«ÕLÃi`Ê ViVÌ]ÊÇäx £n°Ê 7ÀÊÊ>ÊÃiÀiÃ]ÊÇäx £°Ê VÞV«i`>ÊÀÊ`VÌ>ÀÞÊ iÌÀÞ]ÊÇäx Óä°Ê ->VÀi`ÊÌiÝÌ]ÊÇäÈ Ó£°Ê -ÕÀViÊµÕÌi`ÊÊ>ÌiÀÊ ÃÕÀVi]ÊÇäÈ

Articles in periodicals (print and online) ÓÓ°Ê ÀÌViÊÊ>Ê«ÀÌÊÕÀ>]ÊÇäÈ ÓÎ°Ê ÀÌViÊÊ>ÊiÊÕÀ>]ÊÇäÇ Ó{°Ê ÕÀ>Ê>ÀÌViÊvÀÊ>Ê `>Ì>L>Ãi]ÊÇäÇ Óx°Ê ÀÌViÊÊ>Ê«ÀÌÊ>}>âi]ÊÇäÇ

ÓÈ°Ê ÀÌViÊÊ>ÊiÊ>}>âi]Ê ÇäÇ ÓÇ°Ê >}>âiÊ>ÀÌViÊvÀÊ>Ê `>Ì>L>Ãi]ÊÇän Ón°Ê ÀÌViÊÊ>Ê«ÀÌÊiÜÃ«>«iÀ]Ê Çän Ó°Ê ÀÌViÊÊ>ÊiÊiÜÃ«>«iÀ]Ê Çän Îä°Ê iÜÃ«>«iÀÊ>ÀÌViÊvÀÊ>Ê `>Ì>L>Ãi]ÊÇän Î£°Ê 1Ã}i`Ê>ÀÌVi]ÊÇän ÎÓ°Ê ÊÀiÛiÜ]ÊÇä ÎÎ°Ê iÌÌiÀÊÌÊÌiÊi`ÌÀ]ÊÇä

Online sources Î{°Ê 7iLÊÃÌi]ÊÇä Îx°Ê -ÀÌÊÜÀÊvÀÊ>Ê7iLÊÃÌi]Ê Ç£ä ÎÈ°Ê "iÊ«ÃÌ}ÊÀÊi>]ÊÇ£ä ÎÇ°Ê 7iL}ÊL}®Ê«ÃÌ]ÊÇ£ä În°Ê *`V>ÃÌ]ÊÇ£ä Î°Ê "iÊ>Õ`ÊÀÊÛÃÕ>ÊÃÕÀVi]Ê Ç££

Other sources (including online versions) {ä°Ê ÛiÀiÌÊ`VÕiÌ]ÊÇ££ {£°Ê 1«ÕLÃi`Ê`ÃÃiÀÌ>Ì]ÊÇ££ {Ó°Ê *iÀÃ>ÊVÕV>Ì]Ê Ç£Ó {Î°Ê *ÕLÃi`ÊÀÊLÀ>`V>ÃÌÊ ÌiÀÛiÜ]ÊÇ£Ó {{°Ê *ÕLÃi`Ê«ÀVii`}ÃÊvÊ>Ê VviÀiVi]ÊÇ£Ó {x°Ê 6ìÊÀÊ 6 ]ÊÇ£Ó {È°Ê -Õ`ÊÀiVÀ`}]ÊÇ£Ó {Ç°Ê ÕÃV>ÊÃVÀiÊÀÊV«ÃÌ]Ê Ç£Ó {n°Ê 7ÀÊvÊ>ÀÌ]ÊÇ£Î {°Ê *iÀvÀ>Vi]ÊÇ£Î

703

704

57d

Chicago


Beatty, Jack, ed. Colossus: How the Corporation Changed America. New York: Broadway Books, 2001.

9. Edited work with an author 9. Ted Poston, A First Draft of History, ed. Kathleen A. Hauke (Athens: University of Georgia Press, 2000), 46. Poston, Ted. A First Draft of History. Edited by Kathleen A. Hauke. Athens: University of Georgia Press, 2000.

10. Translated work 10. Tonino Guerra, Abandoned Places, trans. Adria Bernardi (Barcelona: Guernica, 1999), 71. Guerra, Tonino. Abandoned Places. Translated by Adria Bernardi. Barcelona: Guernica, 1999.

11. Edition other than the first 11. Andrew F. Rolle, California: A History, 5th ed. (Wheeling, IL: Harlan Davidson, 1998), 243. Rolle, Andrew F. California: A History. 5th ed. Wheeling, IL: Harlan Davidson, 1998.

12. Volume in a multivolume work 12. The New Encyclopedia of Southern Culture, vol. 4, Myth, Manner, and Memory, ed. Charles Reagan Wilson (Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press, 2006), 198. The New Encyclopedia of Southern Culture. Vol. 4, Myth, Manner, and Memory, edited by Charles Reagan Wilson. Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press, 2006.

13. Work in an anthology 13. Zora Neale Hurston, “From Dust Tracks on a Road,” in The Norton Book of American Autobiography, ed. Jay Parini (New York: Norton, 1999), 336. Hurston, Zora Neale. “From Dust Tracks on a Road.” In The Norton Book of American Autobiography, edited by Jay Parini, 333-43. New York: Norton, 1999.

i`ÌÀÊ UÊ ÌÀ>Ã>ÌÀÊ UÊ i`ÌÊ UÊ ÛÕiÃÊ UÊ >Ì}ÞÊ UÊ «Àiv>ViÊ UÊ ÌÌiÊÊÌÌiÊ UÊ iÌÌiÀÊ UÊ ÃiÀiÃ

Chicago

57d

14. Introduction, preface, foreword, or afterword 14. Nelson DeMille, foreword to Flag: An American Biography, by Marc Leepson (New York: Thomas Dunne, 2005), xii. DeMille, Nelson. Foreword to Flag: An American Biography, by Marc Leepson, xi-xiv. New York: Thomas Dunne, 2005.

15. Republished book 15. Garry Wills, Inventing America: Jefferson’s Declaration of Independence (1978; repr., Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 2002), 86. Wills, Garry. Inventing America: Jefferson’s Declaration of Independence. 1978. Reprint, Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 2002.

16. Work with a title in its title 16. Gary Schmidgall, ed., Conserving Walt Whitman’s Fame: Selections from Horace Traubel’s “Conservator,“ 1890-1919 (Iowa City: University of Iowa Press, 2006), 165. Schmidgall, Gary, ed. Conserving Walt Whitman’s Fame: Selections from Horace Traubel’s “Conservator,“ 1890-1919. Iowa City: University of Iowa Press, 2006.

17. Letter in a published collection 17. Thomas Gainsborough to Elizabeth Rasse, 1753, in The Letters of Thomas Gainsborough, ed. John Hayes (New Haven: Yale University Press, 2001), 5. Gainsborough, Thomas. Letter to Elizabeth Rasse, 1753. In The Letters of Thomas Gainsborough, edited by John Hayes, 5. New Haven: Yale University Press, 2001.

18. Work in a series 18. R. Keith Schoppa, The Columbia Guide to Modern Chinese History, Columbia Guides to Asian History (New York: Columbia University Press, 2000), 256-58. Schoppa, R. Keith. The Columbia Guide to Modern Chinese History. Columbia Guides to Asian History. New York: Columbia University Press, 2000.

19. Encyclopedia or dictionary entry 19. Encyclopaedia Britannica, 15th ed., s.v. “Monroe Doctrine.”

705

706

57d

Chicago


19. Bryan A. Garner, Garner’s Modern American Usage (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2003), s.v. “brideprice.” Garner, Bryan A. Garner’s Modern American Usage. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2003.

The abbreviation “s.v.” is for the Latin sub verbo (“under the word”). Well-known reference works such as encyclopedias do not require publication information and are usually not included in the bibliography. 20. Sacred text 20. Matt. 20:4-9 (Revised Standard Version). 20. Qur’an 18:1-3.

Sacred texts are usually not included in the bibliography. 21. Source quoted in another source 21. Ron Grossman and Charles Leroux, “A Local Outpost of Democracy,” Chicago Tribune, March 5, 1996, quoted in William Julius Wilson and Richard P. Taub, There Goes the Neighborhood: Racial, Ethnic, and Class Tensions in Four Chicago Neighborhoods and Their Meaning for America (New York: Knopf, 2006), 18. Grossman, Ron, and Charles Leroux. “A Local Outpost of Democracy.” Chicago Tribune, March 5, 1996. Quoted in William Julius Wilson and Richard P. Taub, There Goes the Neighborhood: Racial, Ethnic, and Class Tensions in Four Chicago Neighborhoods and Their Meaning for America (New York: Knopf, 2006), 18.

Articles in periodicals (print and online) 22. Article in a print journal Include the volume and issue numbers and the date; end the bibliography entry with the page range of the article. 22. Jonathan Zimmerman, “Ethnicity and the History Wars in the 1920s,” Journal of American History 87, no. 1 (2000): 101.

Ã>VÀi`ÊÌiÝÌÊ UÊ ÃÕÀViÊÊ>ÌiÀÊÃÕÀViÊ UÊ >ÀÌViÊ UÊ ÕÀ>Ê UÊ `>Ì>L>ÃiÊ UÊ >}>âi

Chicago

57d

Zimmerman, Jonathan. “Ethnicity and the History Wars in the 1920s.” Journal of American History 87, no. 1 (2000): 92-111.

23. Article in an online journal For unpaginated online articles, you may include in your note a locator, such as a numbered paragraph or a heading from the article. 23. Linda Belau, “Trauma and the Material Signifier,” Postmodern Culture 11, no. 2 (2001): par. 6, http://www.iath.virginia.edu/pmc/text-only/ issue.101/11.2belau.txt. Belau, Linda. “Trauma and the Material Signifier.” Postmodern Culture 11, no. 2 (2001). http://www.iath.virginia.edu/pmc/text-only/ issue.101/11.2belau.txt.

24. Journal article from a database Include the URL for the database. If the article is paginated, give a page number in the note and a page range in the bibliography. 24. Eugene F. Provenzo Jr., “Time Exposure,” Educational Studies 34, no. 2 (2003): 266, http://search.epnet.com/. Provenzo, Eugene F., Jr. “Time Exposure.” Educational Studies 34, no. 2 (2003): 266-67. http://search.epnet.com/.

25. Article in a print magazine Provide a page number in the note and a page range in the bibliography. 25. Tom Bissell, “Improvised, Explosive, and Divisive,” Harper’s, January 2006, 42. Bissell, Tom. “Improvised, Explosive, and Divisive.” Harper’s, January 2006, 41-54.

26. Article in an online magazine Include the URL for the article. If the article is paginated, give a page number in the note and a page range in the bibliography. 26. Katharine Mieszkowski, “A Deluge Waiting to Happen,” Salon, July 3, 2008, http://www.salon.com/news/feature/2008/07/03/floods/ index.html.

707

708

57d

Chicago


Mieszkowski, Katharine. “A Deluge Waiting to Happen.” Salon, July 3, 2008. http://www.salon.com/news/feature/2008/07/03/floods/index.html.

27. Magazine article from a database Include the URL for the database. If the article is paginated, give a page number in the note and a page range in the bibliography. 27. David Pryce-Jones, “The Great Sorting Out: Postwar Iraq,” National Review, May 5, 2003, 17, http://newfirstsearch.oclc.org/. Pryce-Jones, David. “The Great Sorting Out: Postwar Iraq.” National Review, May 5, 2003, 17-18. http://newfirstsearch.oclc.org/.

28. Article in a print newspaper Page numbers are not necessary; a section letter or number, if available, is sufficient. 28. Randal C. Archibold, “These Neighbors Are Good Ones without a New Fence,” New York Times, October 22, 2008, sec. A. Archibold, Randal C. “These Neighbors Are Good Ones without a New Fence.” New York Times, October 22, 2008, sec. A.

29. Article in an online newspaper Include the URL for the article; omit page numbers, even if the source provides them. 29. Phil Willon, “Ready or Not,” Los Angeles Times, December 2, 2001, http://www.latimes.com/news/la-foster-special.special/. Willon, Phil. “Ready or Not.” Los Angeles Times, December 2, 2001. http:// www.latimes.com/news/la-foster-special.special/.

30. Newspaper article from a database Include the URL for the database; omit page numbers, even if the source provides them. 30. Gina Kolata, “Scientists Debating Future of Hormone Replacement,” New York Times, October 23, 2002, http://www.proquest.com/. Kolata, Gina. “Scientists Debating Future of Hormone Replacement.” New York Times, October 23, 2002. http://www.proquest.com/.

31. Unsigned article When the author of a periodical article is unknown, treat the periodical itself as the author.

`>Ì>L>ÃiÊ UÊ iÜÃ«>«iÀÊ UÊ ÕÃ}i`Ê>ÀÌViÊ UÊ ÀiÛiÜÊ UÊ iÌÌiÀÊÌÊi`ÌÀÊ UÊ 7iLÊÃÌi

Chicago

57d

31. Boston Globe, “Renewable Energy Rules,” August 11, 2003, sec. A. Boston Globe. “Renewable Energy Rules.” August 11, 2003, sec. A.

32. Book review 32. Nancy Gabin, review of The Other Feminists: Activists in the Liberal Establishment, by Susan M. Hartman, Journal of Women’s History 12, no. 3 (2000): 230. Gabin, Nancy. Review of The Other Feminists: Activists in the Liberal Establishment, by Susan M. Hartman. Journal of Women’s History 12, no. 3 (2000): 227-34.

33. Letter to the editor Do not use the letter’s title, even if the publication gives one. 33. David Harlan, letter to the editor, New York Review of Books, October 9, 2008. Harlan, David. Letter to the editor. New York Review of Books, October 9, 2008.

Online sources 34. Web site Include as much of the following information as is available: author, title of the site (not italicized), sponsor of the site, and the site’s URL. When no author is named, treat the sponsor as the author. 34. Kevin Rayburn, The 1920s, http://www.louisville.edu/~kprayb01/ 1920s.html. Rayburn, Kevin. The 1920s. http://www.louisville.edu/~kprayb01/ 1920s.html. NOTE: Chicago does not advise including the date you accessed

a Web source, but you may provide an access date after the URL if the cited material is time-sensitive or if your instructor requires one: for example, http://www.historychannel.com/ today (accessed October 24, 2008).

709

710

57d

Chicago


35. Short work from a Web site Include as many of the following elements as are available: author’s name, title of the short work, title of the site, sponsor of the site, and the URL. When no author is named, treat the site’s sponsor as the author. 35. Sheila Connor, “Historical Background,” Garden and Forest, Library of Congress, http://lcweb.loc.gov/preserv/prd/gardfor/historygf.html. Connor, Sheila. “Historical Background.” Garden and Forest. Library of Congress. http://lcweb.loc.gov/preserv/prd/gardfor/historygf.html. 35. PBS Online, “Heat,” Frontline, http://www.pbs.org/wgbh/pages/ frontline/heat/. PBS Online. “Heat.” Frontline. http://www.pbs.org/wgbh/pages/frontline/ heat/.

36. Online posting or e-mail If an online posting has been archived, include a URL. E-mails that are not part of an online discussion are treated as personal communications (see item 42). Online postings and e-mails are not included in the bibliography. 36. Janice Klein, posting to State Museum Association discussion list, June 19, 2003, http://listserv.nmmnh-abq.mus.nm.us/scripts/ wa.exe?A2=ind0306c&L=sma-l&F=lf&S=&P=81.

37. Weblog (blog) post Treat as a short document from a Web site, including the following, as available: the author’s name; the title of the post; the title of the blog; the sponsor, if any; and the URL. 37. Miland Brown, “The Flawed Montevideo Convention of 1933,” World History Blog, http://www.worldhistoryblog.com/2008/05/ flawed-montevideo-convention-of-1933.html. Brown, Miland. “The Flawed Montevideo Convention of 1933.” World History Blog. http://www.worldhistoryblog.com/2008/05/ flawed-montevideo-convention-of-1933.html.

38. Podcast Treat as a short work from a Web site (see item 35), including the following, if available: the author’s (or

7iLÊÃÌiÊ UÊ «ÃÌ}Ê UÊ i>Ê UÊ L}Ê UÊ «`V>ÃÌÊ UÊ >Õ`Ê UÊ ÛÃÕ>Ê UÊ }ÛiÀiÌÊ UÊ `ÃÃiÀÌ>Ì

Chicago

57d

speaker’s) name; the title of the podcast, in quotation marks; the title of the site on which it appears; the sponsor of the site; and the URL. If the podcast is a downloadable file, identify the file format or medium before the URL. 38. Clay S. Jenkinson, “Prejudice and Parties,” Show 734, Thomas Jefferson Hour, New Enlightenment Radio Network, Makoché Recording, and Prairie Public Radio, MP3 audio file, http://www .jeffersonhour.org/. Jenkinson, Clay S. “Prejudice and Parties.” Show 734. Thomas Jefferson Hour. New Enlightenment Radio Network, Makoché Recording, and Prairie Public Radio. MP3 audio file. http://www.jeffersonhour.org/.

39. Online audio or visual source Cite as a short work from a Web site (see item 35). If the source is a downloadable file, identify the file format or medium before the URL (see item 38). 39. Richard B. Freeman, “Conversations with History,” Institute of International Studies, University of California at Berkeley, http://www .youtube.com/watch?v=cgNCFsXGUa0. Freeman, Richard B. “Conversations with History.” Institute of International Studies, University of California at Berkeley. http://www.youtube.com/ watch?v=cgNCFsXGUa0.

Other sources (including online versions) 40. Government document 40. U.S. Department of State, Foreign Relations of the United States: Diplomatic Papers, 1943 (Washington, DC: GPO, 1965), 562. U.S. Department of State. Foreign Relations of the United States: Diplomatic Papers, 1943. Washington, DC: GPO, 1965.

41. Unpublished dissertation 41. Stephanie Lynn Budin, “The Origins of Aphrodite (Greece)” (PhD diss., University of Pennsylvania, 2000), 301-2. Budin, Stephanie Lynn. “The Origins of Aphrodite (Greece).” PhD diss., University of Pennsylvania, 2000.

711

712

57d

Chicago


42. Personal communication 42. Sara Lehman, e-mail message to author, August 13, 2003.

Personal communications are not included in the bibliography. 43. Published or broadcast interview 43. Ron Haviv, interview by Charlie Rose, The Charlie Rose Show, PBS, February 12, 2001. Haviv, Ron. Interview by Charlie Rose. The Charlie Rose Show, PBS, February 12, 2001.

44. Published proceedings of a conference 44. Julie Kimber, Peter Love, and Phillip Deery, eds., Labour Traditions: Proceedings of the Tenth National Labour History Conference, University of Melbourne, Carlton, Victoria, Australia, July 4-6, 2007 (Melbourne: Australian Society for the Study of Labour History, 2007), 5. Kimber, Julie, Peter Love, and Phillip Deery, eds. Labour Traditions: Proceedings of the Tenth National Labour History Conference. University of Melbourne, Carlton, Victoria, Australia, July 4-6, 2007. Melbourne: Australian Society for the Study of Labour History, 2007.

45. Video or DVD 45. The Secret of Roan Inish, DVD, directed by John Sayles (1993; Culver City, CA: Columbia TriStar Home Video, 2000). The Secret of Roan Inish. DVD. Directed by John Sayles. 1993; Culver City, CA: Columbia TriStar Home Video, 2000.

46. Sound recording 46. Gustav Holst, The Planets, Royal Philharmonic, André Previn, Telarc compact disc 80133. Holst, Gustav. The Planets. Royal Philharmonic. André Previn. Telarc compact disc 80133.

47. Musical score or composition 47. Antonio Vivaldi, L'Estro armonico, op. 3, ed. Eleanor Selfridge-Field (Mineola, NY: Dover, 1999).

iÌÌiÀÃÊ UÊ ÌiÀÛiÜÊ UÊ 6 Ê UÊ ÃÕ`ÊÀiVÀ`}Ê UÊ >ÀÌÊ UÊ «iÀvÀ>ViÊ UÊ «>«iÀÊvÀ>Ì

Chicago

57e

Vivaldi, Antonio. L'Estro armonico, op. 3. Edited by Eleanor Selfridge-Field. Mineola, NY: Dover, 1999.

48. Work of art For an original work, give the artist, the title (italicized), the medium, the date of composition, and the institution or collection housing the work. To cite a reproduction, omit the medium and location and give publication information for the source. 48. Aaron Siskind, Untitled (The Most Crowded Block), gelatin silver print, 1939, Kemper Museum of Contemporary Art, Kansas City, MO. Siskind, Aaron. Untitled (The Most Crowded Block). Gelatin silver print, 1939. Kemper Museum of Contemporary Art, Kansas City, MO. 48. Edward Hopper, August in the City, in Edward Hopper: The Art and the Artist, by Gail Levin (New York: Whitney Museum of American Art, 1980), 197. Hopper, Edward. August in the City. In Edward Hopper: The Art and the Artist, by Gail Levin, 197. New York: Whitney Museum of American Art, 1980.

49. Performance 49. Robert Schenkkan, The Kentucky Cycle, directed by Richard Elliott, Willows Theatre, Concord, CA, August 31, 2007. Schenkkan, Robert. The Kentucky Cycle. Directed by Richard Elliott. Willows Theatre, Concord, CA, August 31, 2007. hackerhandbooks.com/bedhandbook > Research exercises > Chicago > E-ex 57–12 to 57–19

57e Chicago manuscript format The following guidelines for formatting a Chicago-style paper and preparing its endnotes and bibliography are based on The Chicago Manual of Style, 15th ed. (Chicago: U of Chicago P, 2003). For a sample paper, see 57f.

Formatting the paper Chicago manuscript guidelines are fairly generic because they were not created with a specific type of writing in mind.

713

714

57e

Chicago

ChicagoÊ>ÕÃVÀ«ÌÊvÀ>Ì

Materials and font Use good-quality 81 ⁄ 2” × 11” white paper. Avoid a font that is unusual or hard to read. Title page Include the full title of your paper, your name, the course title, the instructor’s name, and the date. See page 718 for a sample title page. Pagination Using arabic numerals, number the pages in the upper right corner. Do not number the title page but count it in the manuscript numbering; that is, the first page of the text will be numbered 2. Depending on your instructor’s preference, you may also use a short title or your last name before the page numbers to help identify pages. Margins and line spacing Leave margins of at least one inch at the top, bottom, and sides of the page. Double-space the body of the paper, including long quotations that have been set off from the text. (For line spacing in notes and the bibliography, see p. 716.) Left-align the text. Capitalization and italics In titles of works, capitalize all words except articles (a, an, the), prepositions (at, from, between, and so on), coordinating conjunctions (and, but, or, nor, for, so, yet), and to and as — unless one of these words is first or last in the title or subtitle. Follow these guidelines in your paper even if the title is styled differently in the source. Lowercase the first word following a colon even if the word begins a complete sentence. When the colon introduces a series of sentences or questions, capitalize all sentences in the series, including the first. Italicize the titles of books and other long works, such as entire Web sites. Use quotation marks around the titles of periodical articles, short stories, poems, and other short works. Long quotations You can choose to set off a long quotation of five to ten typed lines by indenting the entire quotation

«>«iÀÊvÀ>ÌÊ UÊ ÌÌiÊ«>}iÊ UÊ >À}ÃÊ UÊ }ÊµÕÌ>ÌÃÊ UÊ ÛÃÕ>Ã

Chicago

57e

one-half inch from the left margin. (You should always set off quotations of ten or more lines.) Double-space the quotation; do not use quotation marks. (See pp. 720 and 722 for a long quotation in the text of a paper; also see p. 695.) Visuals Chicago classifies visuals as tables and illustrations (illustrations, or figures, include drawings, photographs, maps, and charts). Keep visuals as simple as possible. Label each table with an arabic numeral (Table 1, Table 2, and so on) and provide a clear title that identifies the table’s subject. The label and the title should appear on separate lines above the table, flush left. Below the table, give its source in a note like this one: Source: Edna Bonacich and Richard P. Appelbaum, Behind the Label (Berkeley: University of California Press, 2000), 145.

For each figure, place a label and a caption below the figure, flush left. The label and caption need not appear on separate lines. The word “Figure” may be abbreviated to “Fig.” In the text of your paper, discuss the most significant features of each visual. Place visuals as close as possible to the sentences that relate to them unless your instructor prefers visuals in an appendix. Web addresses (URLs) When a URL must break across lines, do not insert a hyphen or break at a hyphen if the URL contains one. Instead, break the URL after a slash or a double slash or before any other mark of punctuation. If your word processing program automatically turns Web addresses into links (by underlining them and changing the color), turn off this feature. Headings Chicago does not provide guidelines for the use of headings in student papers. If you would like to insert headings in a long essay or research paper, check first with your instructor. See the sample Chicago-style paper on pages 718–26 for typical placement and formatting of headings.

715

716

57e

Chicago

ChicagoÊ>ÕÃVÀ«ÌÊvÀ>Ì

Preparing the endnotes Begin the endnotes on a new page at the end of the paper. Center the title Notes about one inch from the top of the page, and number the pages consecutively with the rest of the manuscript. See page 724 for an example. Indenting and numbering Indent the first line of each note one-half inch from the left margin; do not indent additional lines in the note. Begin the note with the arabic numeral that corresponds to the number in the text. Put a period after the number. Line spacing Single-space each note and double-space between notes (unless your instructor prefers double-spacing throughout).

Preparing the bibliography Typically, the notes in Chicago-style papers are followed by a bibliography, an alphabetically arranged list of all the works cited or consulted. Center the title Bibliography about one inch from the top of the page. Number bibliography pages consecutively with the rest of the paper. See page 726 for a sample bibliography. Alphabetizing the list Alphabetize the bibliography by the last names of the authors (or editors); when a work has no author or editor, alphabetize it by the first word of the title other than A, An, or The. If your list includes two or more works by the same author, use three hyphens instead of the author’s name in all entries after the first. You may arrange the entries alphabetically by title or by date; be consistent throughout the bibliography. Indenting and line spacing Begin each entry at the left margin, and indent any additional lines one-half inch. Single-

«>«iÀÊvÀ>ÌÊ UÊ i`ÌiÃÊ UÊ LL}À>«ÞÊ UÊ Ã>«iÊChicago paper

Chicago

57f

space each entry and double-space between entries (unless your instructor prefers double-spacing throughout).

57f Sample Chicago research paper Following is a research paper by Ned Bishop, a student in a history class. Bishop was asked to document his paper using Chicago-style endnotes and bibliography. In preparing his manuscript, Bishop also followed Chicago guidelines. hackerhandbooks.com/bedhandbook > Model papers > Chicago paper: Bishop

717

57f

718

/ÌiÊvÊ«>«iÀ°

Chicago

Chicago papers

The Massacre at Fort Pillow: Holding Nathan Bedford Forrest Accountable

7ÀÌiÀ½ÃÊ>i°

/ÌiÊvÊVÕÀÃi]Ê ÃÌÀÕVÌÀ¿ÃÊ>i]Ê >`Ê`>Ìi°

Ned Bishop

History 214 Professor Citro March 22, 2001

>À}>Ê>Ì>ÌÃÊ`V>ÌiÊChicagoÃÌÞiÊvÀ>ÌÌ}Ê>`ÊivviVÌÛiÊÜÀÌ}°

sample Chicago paper

Chicago

57f

719

Bishop 2 Although Northern newspapers of the time no doubt exaggerated some of the Confederate atrocities at Fort Pillow, most modern sources agree that a massacre of Union troops took place there on April 12, 1864. It seems clear that Union soldiers, particularly black soldiers, were killed after they had stopped fighting or had surrendered or were being held prisoner. Less clear is the role played by Major General Nathan Bedford Forrest in leading his troops. Although we will never know whether Forrest directly ordered the massacre, evidence suggests that he was responsible for it. What happened at Fort Pillow? Fort Pillow, Tennessee, which sat on a bluff overlooking the

/iÃÃÊ>ÃÃiÀÌÃÊ Ã«½ÃÊ>Ê«Ì° i>`}Ã]ÊViÌiÀi`]Ê i«ÊÀi>ìÀÃÊvÜÊ ÌiÊÀ}>â>Ì°

Mississippi River, had been held by the Union for two years. It was garrisoned by 580 men, 292 of them from United States Colored Heavy and Light Artillery regiments, 285 from the white Thirteenth Tennessee Cavalry. Nathan Bedford Forrest commanded about 1,500 1 troops. The Confederates attacked Fort Pillow on April 12, 1864, and

-Ì>ÌÃÌVÃÊ>ÀiÊVÌi`Ê ÜÌÊ>Êi`Ìi°

had virtually surrounded the fort by the time Forrest arrived on the battlefield. At 3:30 p.m., Forrest demanded the surrender of the Union forces, sending in a message of the sort he had used before: “The conduct of the officers and men garrisoning Fort Pillow has been such as to entitle them to being treated as prisoners of war. . . . Should my demand be refused, I cannot be responsible for the fate of your 2 command.” Union Major William Bradford, who had replaced Major Booth, killed earlier by sharpshooters, asked for an hour to consider the demand. Forrest, worried that vessels in the river were bringing 3 in more troops, “shortened the time to twenty minutes.” Bradford refused to surrender, and Forrest quickly ordered the attack. The Confederates charged to the fort, scaled the parapet, and fired on the forces within. Victory came quickly, with the Union forces

+ÕÌ>ÌÊÃÊVÌi`ÊÜÌÊ >Êi`Ìi°

720

57f

Chicago

Chicago papers

Bishop 3 running toward the river or surrendering. Shelby Foote describes the scene like this: }ÊµÕÌ>ÌÊÃÊ ÃiÌÊvvÊvÀÊÌiÝÌÊLÞÊ ìÌ}°Ê+ÕÌ>ÌÊ >ÀÃÊ>ÀiÊÌÌi`°

Some kept going, right on into the river, where a number drowned and the swimmers became targets for marksmen on the bluff. Others, dropping their guns in terror, ran back toward the Confederates with their hands up, and of these some were spared as prisoners, while others were shot down in the act of 4 surrender.

Ã«ÊÕÃiÃÊ>Ê«À>ÀÞÊ In his own official report, Forrest makes no mention of the ÃÕÀViÊ>ÃÊÜiÊ>ÃÊ massacre. He does make much of the fact that the Union flag was ÃiV`>ÀÞÊÃÕÀViÃ° not lowered by the Union forces, saying that if his own men had not

+ÕÌ>ÌÊÃÊ ÌÀ`ÕVi`ÊÜÌÊ>Ê Ã}>Ê«À>Ãi°

taken down the flag, “few, if any, would have survived unhurt another 5 volley.” However, as Jack Hurst points out and Forrest must have known, in this twenty-minute battle, “Federals running for their lives 6 had little time to concern themselves with a flag.” The federal congressional report on Fort Pillow, which charged the Confederates with appalling atrocities, was strongly criticized by Southerners. Respected writer Shelby Foote, while agreeing that the report was “largely” fabrication, points out that the “casualty

figures . . . indicated strongly that unnecessary killing had 7 Ã«Ê`À>ÜÃÊ>ÌÌiÌÊ occurred.” In an important article, John Cimprich and Robert C. ÌÊ>Ê>ÀÌViÊÌ>ÌÊÀi«ÀÌÃÊ Mainfort Jr. argue that the most trustworthy evidence is that «À>ÀÞÊÃÕÀViÃ° written within about ten days of the battle, before word of the congressional hearings circulated and Southerners realized the extent of Northern outrage. The article reprints a group of letters and newspaper sources written before April 22 and thus “untainted 8 by the political overtones the controversy later assumed.” Cimprich and Mainfort conclude that these sources “support the case for the occurrence of a massacre” but that Forrest’s role remains “clouded” 9 because of inconsistencies in testimony.


Chicago

57f

721

Bishop 4 Did Forrest order the massacre? We will never really know whether Forrest directly ordered the massacre, but it seems unlikely. True, Confederate soldier Achilles Clark,

/«VÊÃiÌiViÊÃÌ>ÌiÃÊ ÌiÊ>Êì>ÊvÀÊÌÃÊ ÃiVÌ°

who had no reason to lie, wrote to his sisters that “I with several others tried to stop the butchery . . . but Gen. Forrest ordered them [Negro and white Union troops] shot down like dogs[,] and the carnage 10 continued.” But it is not clear whether Clark heard Forrest giving 7ÀÌiÀÊ«ÀiÃiÌÃÊ>Ê L>>Vi`ÊÛiÜÊvÊÌiÊ the orders or was just reporting hearsay. Many Confederates had been iÛìVi° shouting “No quarter! No quarter!” and, as Shelby Foote points out, 11 these shouts were “thought by some to be at Forrest’s command.” A Union soldier, Jacob Thompson, claimed to have seen Forrest order the killing, but when asked to describe the six-foot-two general, he called 12 him “a little bit of a man.” Perhaps the most convincing evidence that Forrest did not order the massacre is that he tried to stop it once it had begun. Historian Albert Castel quotes several eyewitnesses on both the Union and Confederate sides as saying that Forrest ordered his men to stop 13 firing. In a letter to his wife three days after the battle, Confederate soldier Samuel Caldwell wrote that “if General Forrest had not run between our men & the Yanks with his pistol and sabre drawn not a 14 man would have been spared.” In a respected biography of Nathan Bedford Forrest, Hurst suggests that the temperamental Forrest “may have ragingly ordered a massacre and even intended to carry it out—until he rode inside the 15 fort and viewed the horrifying result” and ordered it stopped. While this is an intriguing interpretation of events, even Hurst would probably admit that it is merely speculation. Can Forrest be held responsible for the massacre? Even assuming that Forrest did not order the massacre, he can still be held accountable for it. That is because he created an

/«VÊÃiÌiViÊvÀÊÌÃÊ ÃiVÌÊÀivÀViÃÊÌiÊ ÌiÃÃ°

722

57f

Chicago

Chicago papers

Bishop 5 atmosphere ripe for the possibility of atrocities and did nothing to ensure that it wouldn’t happen. Throughout his career Forrest repeatedly threatened “no quarter,” particularly with respect to black soldiers, so Confederate troops had good reason to think that in massacring the enemy they were carrying out his orders. As Hurst writes, “About all he had to do to produce a 16 massacre was issue no order against one.” Dudley Taylor Cornish agrees: It has been asserted again and again that Forrest did not order a massacre. He did not need to. He had sought to terrify the Fort Pillow garrison by a threat of no quarter, as he had done at Union City and at Paducah in the days just before he turned on Pillow. If his men did enter the fort shouting “Give them no quarter; kill them; kill them; it is General Forrest’s orders,” he 17 should not have been surprised. The slaughter at Fort Pillow was no doubt driven in large part by racial hatred. Numbers alone suggest this: Of 295 white troops, 168 were taken prisoner, but of 262 black troops, only 58 were taken into 18 custody, with the rest either dead or too badly wounded to walk. A Southern reporter traveling with Forrest makes clear that the discrimination was deliberate: “Our troops maddened by the excitement, shot down the ret[r]eating Yankees, and not until they had attained t[h]e water’s edge and turned to beg for mercy, did any prisoners fall in [t]o our hands—Thus the whites received quarter, 19 but the negroes were shown no mercy.” Union surgeon Dr. Charles Fitch, who was taken prisoner by Forrest, testified that after he was in custody he “saw” Confederate soldiers “kill every negro that made his 20 appearance dressed in Federal uniform.” /À>ÃÌÊÃiÌiViÊ ÃÊiÜÊ>ÌiÀ>Ê ÌÊ`°

Fort Pillow is not the only instance of a massacre or threatened massacre of black soldiers by troops under Forrest’s command.


Chicago

57f

723

Bishop 6 Biographer Brian Steel Wills points out that at Brice’s Cross Roads in June 1864, “black soldiers suffered inordinately” as Forrest looked the other way and Confederate soldiers deliberately sought 21 out those they termed “the damned negroes.” Just a day after Fort Pillow, on April 13, 1864, one of Forrest’s generals, Abraham Buford, after consulting with Forrest, demanded that the federal garrison in Columbus, Kentucky, surrender. The demand stated that if an attack became necessary, “no quarter will be shown to the negro troops whatever; the white troops will be treated as prisoners 22 of war.” Nathan Bedford Forrest, a crude man who had made his fortune as a slave trader, was noted for both his violence and his hatred of blacks. In the words of historian James M. McPherson, “Forrest possessed a killer instinct toward . . . blacks in any capacity other 23 than slave.” Forrest’s battle successes were largely due to his brazen

«ÃÃÊ>ÀÊ`V>ÌiÃÊ Ì>ÌÊÜÀ`ÃÊ>ÛiÊLiiÊ ÌÌi`°

tactics—tactics that Hurst says would not have occurred to the 24 “aristocratic, well-educated Confederate military hierarchy.” Some Southerners, in fact, found Forrest’s leadership style distasteful. As one Mississippi aristocrat put it, “Forrest may be, and no doubt is, the best cavalry officer in the West, but I object to a tyrrannical [sic], 25 hot-headed vulgarian’s commanding me.” Because he was so crudely racist, Forrest surely understood the rage that his troops felt toward the very idea of blacks as soldiers. Further, he must have known that his standard threats of “No quarter” would fuel the Confederate soldiers’ rage. Although Forrest may have tried to prevent the massacre once it was under way, he can still be held accountable for it. That is because he created the conditions that led to the massacre (especially of black troops) and with full knowledge of those conditions took no steps to prevent what was a nearly inevitable bloodbath.

VÕÃÊÃÕ««ÀÌÃÊ ÌiÊÜÀÌiÀ½ÃÊViÌÀ>Ê >À}ÕiÌ°

724

57f

Chicago

Chicago papers

Bishop 7

Notes begin on a new page. Notes First line of each note is indented ½.

1. John Cimprich and Robert C. Mainfort Jr., eds., “Fort Pillow Revisited: New Evidence about an Old Controversy,” Civil War History 28, no. 4 (1982): 293-94.

Note number is not raised and is followed by a period.

2. Quoted in Brian Steel Wills, A Battle from the Start: The Life of Nathan Bedford Forrest (New York: HarperCollins, 1992), 182. 3. Ibid., 183. 4. Shelby Foote, The Civil War, a Narrative: Red River to Appomattox (New York: Vintage, 1986), 110.

Authors’ names are not inverted.

5. Nathan Bedford Forrest, “Report of Maj. Gen. Nathan B. Forrest, C. S. Army, Commanding Cavalry, of the Capture of Fort Pillow,” Shotgun’s Home of the American Civil War, http://www.civilwarhome.com/forrest.htm. 6. Jack Hurst, Nathan Bedford Forrest: A Biography (New York: Knopf, 1993), 174.

Last name and title refer to an earlier note by the same author.

7. Foote, Civil War, 111. 8. Cimprich and Mainfort, “Fort Pillow,” 305. 9. Ibid., 305. 10. Ibid., 299. 11. Foote, Civil War, 110. 12. Quoted in Wills, Battle from the Start, 187.

13. Albert Castel, “The Fort Pillow Massacre: A Fresh Notes are singleExamination of the Evidence,” Civil War History 4, no. 1 (1958): spaced, with double-spacing 44-45. between notes. (Some instructors may prefer 14. Cimprich and Mainfort, “Fort Pillow,” 300. double-spacing throughout.) 15. Hurst, Nathan Bedford Forrest, 177. 16. Ibid.


Chicago

57f

Bishop 8 17. Dudley Taylor Cornish, The Sable Arm: Black Troops in the Union Army, 1861-1865 (Lawrence, KS: University Press of Kansas, 1987), 175. 18. Foote, Civil War, 111. 19. Cimprich and Mainfort, “Fort Pillow,” 304. 20. Quoted in Wills, Battle from the Start, 189. 21. Ibid., 215. 22. Quoted in Hurst, Nathan Bedford Forrest, 177. 23. Quoted in James M. McPherson, Battle Cry of Freedom: The Civil War Era (New York: Oxford University Press, 1988), 402. 24. Hurst, Nathan Bedford Forrest, 74. 25. Quoted in Foote, Civil War, 106.

725

726

57f

Chicago

Chicago papers

Bishop 9

Bibliography begins on a new page. Bibliography Entries are alphabetized by authors’ last names.

Castel, Albert. “The Fort Pillow Massacre: A Fresh Examination of the Evidence.” Civil War History 4, no. 1 (1958): 37-50. Cimprich, John, and Robert C. Mainfort Jr., eds. “Fort Pillow Revisited: New Evidence about an Old Controversy.” Civil War History 28, no. 4 (1982): 293-306.

First line of entry is at left margin; additional lines are indented ½.

Cornish, Dudley Taylor. The Sable Arm: Black Troops in the Union Army, 1861-1865. Lawrence: University Press of Kansas, 1987. Foote, Shelby. The Civil War, a Narrative: Red River to Appomattox. New York: Vintage, 1986. Forrest, Nathan Bedford. “Report of Maj. Gen. Nathan B. Forrest, C. S. Army, Commanding Cavalry, of the Capture of Fort Pillow.” Shotgun’s Home of the American Civil War. http://www .civilwarhome.com/forrest.htm.

Entries are singleHurst, Jack. Nathan Bedford Forrest: A Biography. New York: Knopf, spaced, with 1993. double-spacing between entries. McPherson, James M. Battle Cry of Freedom: The Civil War Era. New York: (Some instructors may Oxford University Press, 1988. prefer double-spacing throughout.) Wills, Brian Steel. A Battle from the Start: The Life of Nathan Bedford Forrest. New York: HarperCollins, 1992.

Part X

Document Design 58 Become familiar with the principles of document design. 728 59 Use standard academic formatting. 738 60 Use standard business formatting. 738

727

728

58

dd

Document design

The term document is broad enough to describe anything you might write in a college class, in the business world, and in everyday life. How you design a document (format it for the printed page or for a computer screen) will affect how readers respond to it.

58

Become familiar with the principles of document design.

Good document design promotes readability, but what readability means depends on your purpose and audience and perhaps on other elements of your writing situation, such as your subject, length restrictions, or any other specific requirements (see the checklist on p. 9). All of your design choices — formatting options, headings, and lists — should be made with your writing situation in mind. Likewise, different types of visuals — tables, charts, and images — can support your writing if they are used appropriately.

58a Select appropriate format options. Similar types of documents share similar design features. Taken together, these features — layout, margins and line spacing, alignment, fonts, and font styles — form an appearance that helps to guide readers.

Layout Most readers have set ideas about how different kinds of documents should look. Advertisements, for example, have a distinctive appearance, as do newsletters and brochures. Instructors have expectations about how a college paper should look (see 59). Employers too expect documents such as letters, résumés, memos, and e-mail messages to be presented in standard ways (see 60). Unless you have a compelling reason to stray from convention, it’s best to choose a document layout that conforms to your readers’ expectations. If you’re not sure what readers expect, look at examples of the kind of document you are producing.

vÀ>ÌÊ UÊ Ài>`>LÌÞÊ UÊ >ÞÕÌÊ UÊ «>}iÊÃiÌÕ«Ê UÊ >À}ÃÊ UÊ iÊÃ«>V}

dd

58a

Margins, line spacing, and alignment Margins help control the look of a page. For most academic and business documents, leave a margin of one to one and a half inches on all sides. These margins create a visual frame for the text and provide room for annotations, such as an instructor’s comments or an editor’s suggestions. Tight margins generally make a page crowded and difficult to read. Most manuscripts in progress are double-spaced to allow room for editing. Final copy is often double-spaced as well, since single-spaced text is less inviting to read. If you are unsure about margin and spacing requirements for your document, check with your instructor or consult documents similar to the one you are writing. At times, the advantages of wide margins and doublespaced lines are offset by other considerations. For example, most business and technical documents are single-spaced, with double-spacing between paragraphs, to save paper and promote quick scanning. Keep your purpose and audience in mind as you determine appropriate margins and line spacing for your document. SINGLE-SPACED, UNFORMATTED

DOUBLE-SPACED, FORMATTED

729

730

58a

dd

Document design

Word processing programs allow you to align text and visuals on a page in four ways: LEFTALIGNED

RIGHTALIGNED

CENTERED

JUSTIFIED

Most academic and business documents are left-aligned for easy reading.

Fonts If you have a choice, select a font that fits your writing situation in an easy-to-read size (usually 10 to 12 points). Although offbeat fonts may seem attractive, they slow readers down and can distract them from your ideas. For example, using Comic Sans, a font with a handwritten, childish feel, can make an essay seem too informal or unpolished, regardless of how well it’s written. Fonts that are easy to read and appropriate for college and workplace documents include the following: Arial, Courier, Georgia, Times New Roman, and Verdana. Check with your instructor; he or she may expect or prefer a particular font.

Font styles Font styles — such as boldface, italics, and underlining — can be useful for calling attention to parts of a document. On the whole, it is best to use restraint when selecting styles. Applying too many different styles within a document can result in busylooking pages and may confuse readers. TIP: Never write a document in all capital or all lowercase letters. Doing so can frustrate or annoy readers. Although some readers have become accustomed to instant messages and e-mails that omit capital letters entirely, their absence makes a piece of writing difficult to read.

vÀ>ÌÊ UÊ >}iÌÊ UÊ vÌÃÊ UÊ L`v>ViÊ UÊ Ì>VÃÊ UÊ i>`}ÃÊ UÊ VÃÃÌiÌÊ«À>Ã}

dd

58b

58b Use headings to guide readers. You will have little need for headings in short essays, especially if you use paragraphing and clear topic sentences to guide readers. In more complex documents, however, such as longer essays, research papers, business reports, and Web sites, headings can be a useful visual cue for readers. Headings help readers see at a glance the organization of a document. If more than one level of heading is used, the headings also indicate the hierarchy of ideas — as they do throughout this book. Headings serve a number of functions, depending on the needs of different readers. When readers are simply looking up information, headings will help them find it quickly. When readers are scanning, hoping to pick up a document’s meaning or message, headings will guide them. Even when readers are committed enough to read every word, headings can help them preview a document before they begin reading. TIP: While headings can be useful, they cannot substitute for transitions between paragraphs (see 3d). Keep this in mind as you write college essays.

Phrasing headings Headings should be as brief and as informative as possible. Certain styles of headings — the most common being -ing phrases, noun phrases, questions, and imperative sentences — work better for some purposes, audiences, and subjects than others. Whatever style you choose, use it consistently. Headings on the same level of organization should be written in parallel structure (see 9), as in the following examples from a report, a history textbook, a financial brochure, and a nursing manual, respectively. -ING PHRASES AS HEADINGS

Safeguarding the earth’s atmosphere Charting the path to sustainable energy Conserving global forests

731

732

58c

dd

Document design

NOUN PHRASES AS HEADINGS

The antiwar movement The civil rights movement The feminist movement QUESTIONS AS HEADINGS

How do I buy shares? How do I redeem shares? How has the fund performed in the past three years? IMPERATIVE SENTENCES AS HEADINGS

Ask the patient to describe current symptoms. Take a detailed medical history. Record the patient’s vital signs.

Placing and formatting headings Headings on the same level of organization should be placed and formatted in a consistent way. If you have more than one level of heading, you might center your first-level headings and make them boldface; then you might make the secondlevel headings left-aligned and italicized, like this: First-level heading Second-level heading A college paper with headings typically has only one level, and the headings are often centered, as in the sample paper on pages 674–83. Business memos often include headings. Important headings can be highlighted by using white space around them. Less important headings can be downplayed by using less white space or by running them into the text.

58c Use lists to guide readers. Lists are easy to read or scan when they are displayed, item by item, rather than run into your text. You might choose to display the following kinds of lists:

i>`}ÃÊ UÊ ÃÌÃÊ UÊ visuals (diagrams, charts, photos)

dd

58d

UÊ ÃÌi«ÃÊÊ>Ê«ÀViÃÃ UÊ >`ÛViÊÀÊÀiVi`>ÌÃ UÊ ÌiÃÊÌÊLiÊ`ÃVÕÃÃi` UÊ VÀÌiÀ>ÊvÀÊiÛ>Õ>ÌÊ>ÃÊÊViVÃÌÃ® UÊ «>ÀÌÃÊvÊ>ÊLiVÌ Lists are usually introduced with an independent clause followed by a colon (All mammals share the following five characteristics:). Periods are not used after items in a list unless the items are complete sentences. Lists are most readable when they are presented in parallel grammatical form (see 9). If you are describing a sequence or a set of steps, number your list with arabic numerals (1, 2, 3) followed by periods. If the order of items is not important, you can use bullets (circles or squares) or dashes to draw readers’ eyes to a list. Although lists can be useful visual cues, don’t overdo them. Too many will clutter a document.

58d Add visuals to support your purpose. Visuals can convey information concisely and powerfully. Charts, graphs, and tables, for example, can simplify complex numerical information. Images—including photographs and diagrams—often express an idea more vividly than words can. With access to the Internet, digital photography, and word processing or desktop publishing software, you can download or create your own visuals to enhance your document. Keep in mind that if you download a visual—or use published information to create your own visual—you must credit your source (see 48).

Choosing appropriate visuals Use visuals to supplement your writing, not to substitute for it. Always consider how a visual supports your purpose and how your audience might respond to it. A student writing about electronic surveillance in the workplace, for example, used a cartoon to illustrate her point about employees’ personal use of

733

734

58d

dd

Document design

the Internet at work (see 54c). Another student, writing about treatments for childhood obesity, created a table to display data she had found in two different sources and discussed in her paper (see 56f). As you draft and revise a document, choose carefully the visuals that support your main point, and avoid overloading your text with too many images. The chart on pages 736–37 describes eight types of visuals and their purposes.

Placing and labeling visuals A visual may be placed in the text of a document, near a discussion to which it relates, or it can be put in an appendix, labeled, and referred to in the text. Placing visuals in the text of a document can be tricky. Usually you will want the visual to appear close to the sentences that relate to it, but page breaks Making the most of your handbook won’t always allow this placement. At ÕìiÃÊvÀÊÕÃ}ÊÛÃÕ>ÃÊÛ>ÀÞÊ times you may need to insert the visual at LÞÊ>V>ìVÊ`ÃV«i° a later point and tell readers where it can 0 English and other humanities: 54a be found; sometimes you can make the 0 Social sciences: 56e text flow, or wrap, around the visual. No 0ÊÃÌÀÞ\ÊxÇi matter where you place a visual, refer to it in your text. Don’t expect visuals to speak for themselves. Most of the visuals you include in a document will require some sort of label. A label, which is typically placed above or below the visual, should be brief but descriptive. Most commonly, a visual is labeled with the word “Figure” or the abbreviation “Fig.,” followed by a number: Fig. 4. Sometimes a title might be included to explain how the visual relates to the text: Fig. 4. Voter turnout by age.

Using visuals responsibly Most word processing and spreadsheet software will allow you to produce your own visuals. If you create a chart, a table, or a graph using information from your research, you must cite the source of the information even though the visual is your own. The visual on page 735 credits the source of its data.

ÛÃÕ>ÃÊ`>}À>Ã]ÊV>ÀÌÃ]Ê«ÌÃ®Ê UÊ >Li}ÊÛÃÕ>ÃÊ UÊ VÌ}ÊÛÃÕ>Ã

dd

58d

VISUAL WITH A SOURCE CREDITED

Source: The New York Times Company, September 21, 2008, from data by the Harris Poll, July 2008.

If you download a photograph from the Web or scan an image from a magazine or book, you must credit the person or organization that created it, just as you would cite any other source you use in a college paper (see 48). Make sure any cropping or other changes you make to the visual do not distort the meaning of the original. If your document is written for publication outside the classroom, you will need to request permission to use any visual you borrow.

735

736

58d

dd

Document design

Choosing visuals to suit your purpose Pie chart Pie charts compare a part or «>ÀÌÃÊÌÊÌiÊÜi°Ê-i}iÌÃÊ of the pie represent percent>}iÃÊvÊÌiÊÜiÊ>`Ê>Ü>ÞÃÊ ÌÌ>Ê£ääÊ«iÀViÌ®°

Line graph Line graphs highlight trends over a period of time or com«>ÀiÊÕiÀV>Ê`>Ì>°

Bar graph Bar graphs can be used for the same purpose as line }À>«Ã°Ê/ÃÊL>ÀÊ}À>«Ê`Ã«>ÞÃÊÌiÊÃ>iÊ`>Ì>Ê>ÃÊÊÌiÊ iÊ}À>«Ê>LÛi°

Table />LiÃÊÀ}>âiÊV«V>Ìi`Ê numerical information into a `}iÃÌLiÊvÀ>Ì°

Sources [top to bottom]: Kaiser Foundation; US Census Bureau; 1-Ê iÃÕÃÊ ÕÀi>ÕÆÊ1 -°

6

ÛÃÕ>ÃÊ`>}À>Ã]ÊV>ÀÌÃ]Ê«ÌÃ®Ê UÊ different visuals for different purposes

dd

Photograph *Ì}À>«ÃÊÛÛ`ÞÊì«VÌÊ people, scenes, or objects `ÃVÕÃÃi`ÊÊ>ÊÌiÝÌ°

Diagram Diagrams, useful in scientific and technical writing, conVÃiÞÊÕÃÌÀ>ÌiÊ«ÀViÃÃiÃ]Ê ÃÌÀÕVÌÕÀiÃ]ÊÀÊÌiÀ>VÌÃ°

Flowchart Flowcharts show structures or ÃÌi«ÃÊÊ>Ê«ÀViÃÃ°Ê-iiÊ>ÃÊ «°ÊÓÓÇÊvÀÊ>ÌiÀÊiÝ>«iÊvÊ >ÊyÜV>ÀÌ°®

Map

0

100 200 miles

0 100 200 kilometers

TUG AL

NAVARRE 1512

POR

Maps indicate distances, historical information, or ì}À>«VÃ°

Sources [top to bottom]: Fred Ê >À`ÊvÊ ,i}iÌÃÆÊÞÊÕÌÊiÌÊ>°

CASTILE 1469

GRANADA 1492

FRANCE

ARAGON 1469

BALEARIC IS.

58d

737

738

59 59

dd

Academic and business formatting

Use standard academic formatting.

Instructors have certain expectations about how a college paper should look. If your instructor provides guidelines for formatting an essay, a report, a research paper, or another document, you should follow them. Otherwise, use the manuscript format that is recommended for your academic discipline. In most English and other humanities classes, you will be asked to use the MLA (Modern Language Association) format (see 54a). In most social science classes, such as psychology and sociology, and in most business and health-related classes, you will be asked to use APA (American Psychological Association) format (see 56e). In history and some other humanities classes, you will be asked to use Chicago format (see 57e). Most composition instructors require MLA format, which is illustrated in the sample on pages 739–40. For more detailed MLA manuscript guidelines and a sample MLA-style research paper, see 54.

60

Use standard business formatting.

This section provides guidelines for preparing business letters, résumés, and memos.

60a Use established conventions for business letters. In writing a business letter, be direct, clear, and courteous, but do not hesitate to be firm if necessary. State your purpose or request at the beginning of the letter and include only relevant information in the body. By being as direct and concise as possible, you show that you value your reader’s time. For the format of the letter, use established business conventions. The sample business letter on page 741 is typed in what is known as full block style. Paragraphs are not indented and are typed single-spaced, with double-spacing between them.

vÀ>ÌÊ UÊ Vi}iÊÜÀÌ}Ê UÊ Ê«>«iÀÊvÀ>ÌÊ UÊ LÕÃiÃÃÊiÌÌiÀÃ

60a

dd

739

MLA ESSAY FORMAT ½ 1

Orlov 1

Anna Orlov 1

Professor Willis English 101 17 March 2009 Online Monitoring:

/ÌiÊÃÊViÌiÀi`°

A Threat to Employee Privacy in the Wired Workplace ½

As the Internet has become an integral tool of businesses,

company policies on Internet usage have become as common as policies regarding vacation days or sexual harassment. A 2005 study by the American Management Association and ePolicy Institute found that 76% of companies monitor employees’ use of the Web, and the number

1

of companies that block employees’ access to certain Web sites has increased 27% since 2001 (1). Unlike other company rules, however, Internet usage policies often include language authorizing companies to secretly monitor their employees, a practice that raises questions about rights in the workplace. Although companies often have legitimate concerns that lead them to monitor employees’ Internet usage—from expensive security breaches to reduced productivity—the benefits of electronic surveillance are outweighed by its costs to employees’ privacy and autonomy. While surveillance of employees is not a new phenomenon, electronic surveillance allows employers to monitor workers with unprecedented efficiency. In his book The Naked Employee, Frederick Lane describes offline ways in which employers have been permitted to intrude on employees’ privacy for decades, such as drug testing, background checks, psychological exams, lie detector tests, and in-store video surveillance. The difference, Lane argues, between these old methods of data gathering and electronic surveillance involves quantity: 1

Double-spacing is ÕÃi`ÊÌÀÕ}ÕÌ°

740

60a

dd

Academic and business formatting

MLA ESSAY FORMAT (continued ) ½ 1

Orlov 6

Works Cited

i>`}ÊÃÊViÌiÀi`°

Adams, Scott. Dilbert and the Way of the Weasel. New York: Harper, 2002. Print. American Management Association and ePolicy Institute. “2005 ½

Electronic Monitoring and Surveillance Survey.” American Management Association. Amer. Management Assn., 2005. Web.

1

15 Feb. 2009. “Automatically Record Everything They Do Online! Spector Pro 5.0 FAQ’s.” Netbus.org. Netbus.Org, n.d. Web. 17 Feb. 2009. Flynn, Nancy. “Internet Policies.” ePolicy Institute. ePolicy Inst., n.d. Web. 15 Feb. 2009. Frauenheim, Ed. “Stop Reading This Headline and Get Back to Work.” CNET News.com. CNET Networks, 11 July 2005. Web. 17 Feb. 2009. Gonsalves, Chris. “Wasting Away on the Web.” eWeek.com. Ziff Davis Enterprise Holdings, 8 Aug. 2005. Web. 16 Feb. 2009. Kesan, Jay P. “Cyber-Working or Cyber-Shirking? A First Principles Examination of Electronic Privacy in the Workplace.” Florida Law Review 54.2 (2002): 289-332. Print.

Double-spacing is used throughout; no extra space between iÌÀiÃ°

Lane, Frederick S., III. The Naked Employee: How Technology Is Compromising Workplace Privacy. New York: Amer. Management Assn., 2003. Print. Tam, Pui-Wing, et al. “Snooping E-mail by Software Is Now a Workplace Norm.” Wall Street Journal 9 Mar. 2005: B1+. Print. Tynan, Daniel. “Your Boss Is Watching.” PC World. PC World Communications, 6 Oct. 2004. Web. 17 Feb. 2009. Verespej, Michael A. “Inappropriate Internet Surfing.” Industry Week. Penton Media, 7 Feb. 2000. Web. 16 Feb. 2009.

1

Ê«>«iÀÊvÀ>ÌÊ UÊ LÕÃiÃÃÊiÌÌiÀÃ

dd

60a

This style is usually preferred when the letter is typed on letterhead stationery, as in the example. Below the signature, aligned at the left, you may include the abbreviation Enc. to indicate that something is enclosed with the letter or the abbreviation cc followed by a colon and the name of someone who is receiving a copy of the letter. BUSINESS LETTER IN FULL BLOCK STYLE

March 16, 2009

Date

Jonathan Ross Managing Editor Latino World Today 2971 East Oak Avenue Baltimore, MD 21201 Dear Mr. Ross:

Inside address Salutation

Thank you very much for taking the time yesterday to speak to the University of Maryland’s Latino Club. A number of students have told me that they enjoyed your presentation and found your job search suggestions to be extremely helpful. As I mentioned to you when we first scheduled your appearance, the club publishes a monthly newsletter, Latino Voice. Our purpose is to share up-to-date information and expert advice with members of the university’s Latino population. Considering how much students benefited from your talk, I would like to publish excerpts from it in our newsletter.

Body

I have taken the liberty of transcribing parts of your presentation and organizing them into a question-and-answer format for our readers. When you have a moment, would you mind looking through the enclosed article and letting me know if I may have your permission to print it? I would be happy, of course, to make any changes or corrections that you request. I’m hoping to include this article in our next newsletter, so I would need your response by April 4. Once again, Mr. Ross, thank you for sharing your experiences with us. You gave an informative and entertaining speech, and I would love to be able to share it with the students who couldn’t hear it in person. Sincerely,

Close

Signature Jeffrey Richardson Associate Editor Enc.

741

742

60b

dd

Business formatting

60b Write effective résumés and cover letters. An effective résumé gives relevant information in a clear and concise form. You may be asked to produce a traditional résumé, a scannable résumé, or a Web résumé. The cover letter gives a prospective employer a reason to look at your résumé. The trick is to present yourself in a favorable light without including unnecessary details. Cover letters Always include a cover letter to introduce yourself, state the position you seek, and tell where you learned about it. The letter should also highlight past experiences that qualify you for the position and emphasize what you can do for the employer (not what the job will do for you). End the letter with a suggestion for a meeting, and tell your prospective employer when you will be available. Traditional résumés Traditional résumés are produced on paper, and they are screened by people, not by computers. Because screeners often face stacks of applications, they may spend very little time looking at each résumé. Therefore, you will need to make your résumé as reader-friendly as possible. Here are a few guidelines:

UÊ ÌÊÞÕÀÊÀjÃÕjÊÌÊiÊ«>}iÊvÊ«ÃÃLi]ÊÌÜÊ«>}iÃÊ>ÌÊ the most. (If your résumé is longer than a page, repeat your name at the top of the second page.) UÊ "À}>âiÊÞÕÀÊvÀ>ÌÊÌÊVi>ÀÊV>Ìi}ÀiÃÊpÊ `ÕV>Ì]Ê Experience, and so on. UÊ *ÀiÃiÌÊÌiÊvÀ>ÌÊÊi>VÊV>Ìi}ÀÞÊÊÀiÛiÀÃiÊ chronological order to highlight your most recent accomplishments. UÊ 1ÃiÊLÕiÌi`ÊÃÌÃÊÀÊÃiÊÌiÀÊÃ«i]ÊVi>ÀÊÛÃÕ>Ê device to organize information. UÊ 1ÃiÊÃÌÀ}]Ê>VÌÛiÊÛiÀLÃÊÌÊÃÌ>ÌiÊÞÕÀÊ>VV«ÃiÌÃ°Ê Use present-tense verbs (manage) for current activities and past-tense verbs (managed ) for past activities.

ÀjÃÕjÃÊ UÊ VÛiÀÊiÌÌiÀÃÊ UÊ Ã>«iÊÀjÃÕj

dd

60b

TRADITIONAL RÉSUMÉ

Jeffrey Richardson 121 Knox Road, #6 College Park, MD 20740 301–555–2651 [email protected]

OBJECTIVE

To obtain an editorial internship with a magazine

EDUCATION Fall 2006– present

University of Maryland G BA expected in June 2010 G Double major: English and Latin American studies G GPA: 3.7 (on a 4-point scale)

EXPERIENCE Fall 2008–

Associate editor, Latino Voice, newsletter of Latino Club

present

G Assign and edit feature articles G Coordinate community outreach

Fall 2007–

Photo editor, The Diamondback, college paper

present

G Shoot and organize photos for print and online publication G Oversee photo staff assignments; evaluate photos

Summer 2008

Intern, The Globe, Fairfax, Virginia G Wrote stories about local issues and personalities G Interviewed political candidates G Edited and proofread copy G Coedited “The Landscapes of Northern Virginia: A Photoessay”

Summers 2007, 2008

Tutor, Fairfax County ESL Program G Tutored Latino students in English as a Second Language G Trained new tutors

ACTIVITIES

Photographers’ Workshop, Latino Club

PORTFOLIO

Available at http://jrichardson.localhost/jrportfolio.htm

REFERENCES

Available on request

743

744

60b

dd

Business formatting

Scannable résumés Scannable résumés might be submitted on paper, by e-mail, or through an online employment service. The résumés are scanned and searched electronically, and a database matches keywords in the job description with keywords in the résumés. A human screener reads the résumés selected by the database. In general, follow these guidelines when preparing a scannable résumé:

UÊ VÕìÊ>ÊiÞÜÀ`ÃÊÃiVÌÊÌ>ÌÊÃÌÃÊÜÀ`ÃÊiÞÊÌÊLiÊ searched by a scanner. Use nouns (manager), not verbs (manage or managed). UÊ 1ÃiÊÃÌ>`>À`ÊÀjÃÕjÊi>`}ÃÊvÀÊiÝ>«i]Ê `ÕV>Ì]Ê Experience, References). UÊ Û`ÊÃ«iV>ÊV>À>VÌiÀÃ]Ê}À>«VÃ]ÊÀÊvÌÊÃÌÞiÃ° UÊ Û`ÊvÀ>ÌÌ}ÊÃÕVÊ>ÃÊÌ>LÃ]ÊìÌÃ]ÊVÕÃ]ÊÀÊÌ>LiÃ° Web résumés Posting your résumé on a Web site is an easy way to provide recent information about your goals and accomplishments. Most guidelines for traditional résumés apply to Web résumés; keep the following guidelines in mind as well.

UÊ >iÊÌiÊ«i}ÊÃVÀiiÊvÊÞÕÀÊ7iLÊÃÌiÊÃ«iÊ>`Ê concise. Provide links to your résumé and to any other relevant pages, such as an electronic portfolio. UÊ ÃìÀÊ«ÀÛ`}ÊÞÕÀÊÀjÃÕjÊÊ/ÊvÀ>ÌÊ>`Ê>ÃÊ a PDF file. UÊ VÕìÊÊÞÕÀÊ>i]Ê>``ÀiÃÃ]Ê«iÊÕLiÀ]Ê>`Êi>Ê address at the top of your résumé page. UÊ Ü>ÞÃÊÃÌÊÌiÊ`>ÌiÊÌ>ÌÊÞÕÊ>ÃÌÊÕ«`>Ìi`ÊÌiÊÀjÃÕj°

60c Write clear and concise memos. Usually brief and to the point, a memo reports information, makes a request, or recommends an action. The format of a memo, which varies from company to company, is designed for easy distribution, quick reading, and efficient filing.

ÀjÃÕjÃÊ UÊ iÃÊ UÊ sample business memo

dd

BUSINESS MEMO

CdbbdclZVai] PgZhh ldlnq`mctl February 26, 2009 To:

Editorial assistants, Advertising Department

cc:

Stephen Chapman

From:

Helen Brown

Subject:

New database software

The new database software will be installed on your computers next week. I have scheduled a training program to help you become familiar with the software and with our new procedures for data entry and retrieval. Training program A member of our IT staff will teach in-house workshops on how to use the new software. If you try the software before the workshop, please be prepared to discuss any problems you encounter. We will keep the training groups small to encourage hands-on participation and to provide individual attention. The workshops will take place in the training room on the third floor from 10:00 a.m. to 2:00 p.m. Lunch will be provided in the cafeteria. Sign-up Please sign up by March 1 for one of the following dates by adding your name in the department’s online calendar:

s

7EDNESDAY -ARCH

s

&RIDAY -ARCH

s

-ONDAY -ARCH

If you will not be in the office on any of those dates, please let me know by March 1.

60c

745

746

60d

dd

Business formatting

Most memos display the date, the name of the recipient, the name of the sender, and the subject on separate lines at the top. Many companies have preprinted forms for memos, and most word processing programs have memo templates. Memos are often distributed via e-mail. The subject line of a memo, on paper or in e-mail, should describe the topic as clearly and concisely as possible, and the introductory paragraph should get right to the point. In addition, the body of the memo should be well organized and easy to skim. To promote skimming, use headings where possible and set off any items that deserve special attention (in a list, for example, or in boldface). A sample memo appears on page 745.

60d Write effective e-mail messages. In business and academic contexts, you will want to show readers that you value their time. Your e-mail message may be just one of many that your readers have to wade through. Here are some strategies for writing effective e-mails: UÊ 1ÃiÊ>Êi>}vÕ]ÊVVÃiÊÃÕLiVÌÊiÊÌÊi«ÊÀi>ìÀÃÊ sort through messages and set priorities. UÊ *ÕÌÊÌiÊÃÌÊ«ÀÌ>ÌÊ«>ÀÌÊvÊÞÕÀÊiÃÃ>}iÊ>ÌÊÌiÊ beginning so it will be seen without scrolling. UÊ ÀÊ}]ÊìÌ>i`ÊiÃÃ>}iÃ]Ê«ÀÛìÊ>ÊÃÕ>ÀÞÊ>ÌÊÌiÊ beginning. UÊ 7ÀÌiÊVVÃiÞ]Ê>`Êii«Ê«>À>}À>«ÃÊv>ÀÞÊÃÀÌ° UÊ Û`ÊÜÀÌ}ÊÊ>ÊV>«Ì>ÊiÌÌiÀÃÊÀÊ>ÊÜiÀV>ÃiÊiÌÌiÀÃ° UÊ 1ÃiÊ>Ê>««À«À>ÌiÊÌi° UÊ ivÀiÊvÀÜ>À`}Ê>Êi>ÊiÃÃ>}i]ÊViVÊÌ>ÌÊÌiÊ original sender has no objections. UÊ iÊÃ«>À}ÊÜÌÊL`v>Vi]ÊÌ>VÃ]Ê>`ÊÃ«iV>ÊV>À>VÌiÀÃÆÊ not all e-mail systems handle such elements consistently. UÊ *ÀvÀi>`ÊvÀÊÌÞ«ÃÊ>`ÊLÛÕÃÊiÀÀÀÃÊÌ>ÌÊ>ÀiÊiÞÊÌÊ slow down readers.

Part XI

Grammar Basics 61 62 63 64

Parts of speech 748 Sentence patterns 763 Subordinate word groups 773 Sentence types 785

747

748

61

basic

61

Parts of speech

Parts of speech

Traditional grammar recognizes eight parts of speech: noun, pronoun, verb, adjective, adverb, preposition, conjunction, and interjection. Many words can function as more than one part of speech. For example, depending on its use in a sentence, the word paint can be a noun (The paint is wet) or a verb (Please paint the ceiling next). A quick-reference chart of the parts of speech appears on pages 760–62.

61a Nouns A noun is the name of a person, place, thing, or concept. N

N

N

The lion in the cage growled at the zookeeper.

Nouns sometimes function as adjectives modifying other nouns. Because of their dual roles, nouns used in this manner may be called noun/adjectives. N / ADJ

N / ADJ

The leather notebook was tucked in the student’s backpack.

Nouns are classified in a variety of ways. Proper nouns are capitalized, but common nouns are not (see 45a). For clarity, writers choose between concrete and abstract nouns (see 18b). The distinction between count nouns and noncount nouns can be especially helpful to multilingual writers (see 29a). Most nouns have singular and plural forms; collective nouns may be either singular or plural, depending on how they are used (see 21f and 22b). Possessive nouns require an apostrophe (see 36a). EXERCISE 61–1 Underline the nouns (and noun/adjectives) in the following sentences. Answers to lettered sentences appear in the back of the book. Example: The best part of dinner was the chef’s newest dessert.

ÕÃÊ UÊ «iÀÃÃ]Ê«>ViÃ]ÊÌ}Ã]Êì>ÃÊ UÊ pronouns (we]Êtheir]Êwho]Êanyone]ÊiÌV°®

a. b. c. d. e. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

basic

61b

The stage was set for a confrontation of biblical proportions. The courage of the mountain climber was an inspiration to the rescuers. The need to arrive before the guest of honor motivated us to navigate the thick fog. The defense attorney made a final appeal to the jury. A national museum dedicated to women artists opened in 1987. Truthfulness is a virtue lacking in many public officials. The Wright Brothers used a wind tunnel to test their airplane designs. The miners’ work clothes were clogged with fine black dust. Virginia Woolf wrote that women needed their own income and their own space. The child’s language was a charming combination of her father’s English and her mother’s French.

hackerhandbooks.com/bedhandbook > Grammar exercises > Grammar basics > E-ex 61–5 and 61–6

61b Pronouns A pronoun is a word used in place of a noun. Usually the pronoun substitutes for a specific noun, known as its antecedent. When the battery wears down, we recharge it.

Although most pronouns function as substitutes for nouns, some can function as adjectives modifying nouns. Because they have the form of a pronoun and the function of an adjective, such pronouns may be called pronoun/adjectives. PN / ADJ

This bird was at the same window yesterday morning.

Pronouns are classified as personal, possessive, intensive and reflexive, relative, interrogative, demonstrative, indefinite, and reciprocal. Personal pronouns Personal pronouns refer to specific persons or things. They always function as noun equivalents.

749

750

61b

basic

Parts of speech

Singular: I, me, you, she, her, he, him, it Plural: we, us, you, they, them

Possessive pronouns Possessive pronouns indicate ownership. Singular: my, mine, your, yours, her, hers, his, its Plural: our, ours, your, yours, their, theirs

Some of these possessive pronouns function as adjectives modifying nouns: my, your, his, her, its, our, their. Intensive and reflexive pronouns Intensive pronouns emphasize a noun or another pronoun (The senator herself met us at the door). Reflexive pronouns, which have the same form as intensive pronouns, name a receiver of an action identical with the doer of the action (Paula cut herself ). Singular: myself, yourself, himself, herself, itself Plural: ourselves, yourselves, themselves

Relative pronouns Relative pronouns introduce subordinate clauses functioning as adjectives (The writer who won the award refused to accept it). In addition to introducing the clause, the relative pronoun, in this case who, points back to a noun or pronoun that the clause modifies (writer). (See 63e.) who, whom, whose, which, that

Some textbooks also treat whichever, whoever, whomever, what, and whatever as relative pronouns. These words introduce noun clauses; they do not point back to a noun or pronoun. (See “Noun clauses” in 63e.) Interrogative pronouns Interrogative pronouns introduce questions (Who is expected to win the election?). who, whom, whose, which, what

pronouns (we]Êtheir]Êwho]Êanyone]ÊiÌV°®

basic

61b

Demonstrative pronouns Demonstrative pronouns identify or point to nouns. Frequently they function as adjectives (This chair is my favorite), but they may also function as noun equivalents (This is my favorite chair). this, that, these, those

Indefinite pronouns Indefinite pronouns refer to nonspecific persons or things. Most are always singular (everyone, each); some are always plural (both, many); a few may be singular or plural (see 21e). Most indefinite pronouns function as noun equivalents (Something is burning), but some can also function as adjectives (All campers must check in at the lodge). all another any anybody anyone

anything both each either everybody

everyone everything few many neither

nobody none no one nothing one

several some somebody someone something

Reciprocal pronouns Reciprocal pronouns refer to individual parts of a plural antecedent (By turns, the penguins fed one another). each other, one another NOTE: Pronouns can cause a variety of problems for writers. See

pronoun-antecedent agreement (22), pronoun reference (23), distinguishing between pronouns such as I and me (24), and distinguishing between who and whom (25). EXERCISE 61–2 Underline the pronouns (and pronoun/adjectives) in the following sentences. Answers to lettered sentences appear in the back of the book. Example: We were intrigued by the video that the fifth graders produced as their final technology project.

751

61c

752

a. b. c. d. e. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

basic

Parts of speech

The governor’s loyalty was his most appealing trait. In the fall, the geese that fly south for the winter pass through our town in huge numbers. Carl Sandburg once said that even he himself did not understand some of his poetry. I appealed my parking ticket, but you did not get one. Angela did not mind gossip as long as no one gossiped about her. The Tigers stood unhappily in front of their dugout while the victorious Jaguars tossed their hats in the air. Nothing fascinated the toddler like something that was not his. We understood that we were expected to submit our dissertations in triplicate. The trick-or-treaters helped themselves to their neighbors’ candy. She found herself peering into the mouth of a creepy cave.


61c Verbs The verb of a sentence usually expresses action ( jump, think) or being (is, become). It is composed of a main verb possibly preceded by one or more helping verbs. MV

The horses exercise every day. HV

MV

The task force report was not completed on schedule. HV

HV

MV

No one has been defended with more passion than our pastor.

Notice that words, usually adverbs, can intervene between the helping verb and the main verb (was not completed). (See 61e.)

Helping verbs There are twenty-three helping verbs in English: forms of have, do, and be, which may also function as main verbs; and nine modals, which function only as helping verbs. Have, do, and be change form to indicate tense; the nine modals do not.

ÛiÀLÃÊ UÊ i«}ÊÛiÀLÃÊÊhave, do, be, can, may, must]ÊiÌV°®Ê UÊ >ÊÛiÀLÃÊ

basic

61c

FORMS OF HAVE, DO, AND BE

have, has, had do, does, did be, am, is, are, was, were, being, been MODALS

can, could, may, might, must, shall, should, will, would

The verb phrase ought to is often classified as a modal as well.

Main verbs The main verb of a sentence is always the kind of word that would change form if put into these test sentences: BASE FORM

Usually I (walk, ride).

PAST TENSE

Yesterday I (walked, rode).

PAST PARTICIPLE

I have (walked, ridden) many times before.

PRESENT PARTICIPLE

I am (walking, riding) right now.

-S FORM

Usually he / she / it (walks, rides).

If a word doesn’t change form when slipped into the test sentences, you can be certain that it is not a main verb. For example, the noun revolution, though it may seem to suggest an action, can never function as a main verb. Just try to make it behave like one (Today I revolution . . . Yesterday I revolutioned . . .) and you’ll see why. When both the past-tense and the past-participle forms of a verb end in -ed, the verb is regular (walked, walked). Otherwise, the verb is irregular (rode, ridden). (See 27a.) The verb be is highly irregular, having eight forms instead of the usual five: the base form be; the present-tense forms am, is, and are; the past-tense forms was and were; the present participle being; and the past participle been. Helping verbs combine with the various forms of main verbs to create tenses. For a survey of tenses, see 27f. NOTE: Some verbs are followed by words that look like preposi-

tions but are so closely associated with the verb that they are a

753

61d

754

basic

Parts of speech

part of its meaning. These words are known as particles. Common verb-particle combinations include bring up, call off, drop off, give in, look up, run into, and take off. Sharon packed up her broken laptop and sent it off to the repair shop. TIP: You can find more information about using verbs in other sections of the handbook: active verbs (8), subject-verb agreement (21), standard English verb forms (27), verb tense and mood (27f and 27g), and ESL challenges with verbs (28).

EXERCISE 61–3 Underline the verbs in the following sentences, including helping verbs and particles. If a verb is part of a contraction (such as is in isn’t or would in I’d ), underline only the letters that represent the verb. Answers to lettered sentences appear in the back of the book. Example: The ground under the pine trees wasn’t wet from the rain. a. b. c. d. e. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

My grandmother always told me a soothing story before bed. There were fifty apples on the tree before the frost killed them. Morton brought down the box of letters from the attic. Stay on the main road and you’ll arrive at the base camp before us. The fish struggled vigorously but was trapped in the net. Do not bring that issue up again. Galileo lived the last years of his life under house arrest because of his revolutionary theories about the universe. Cynthia asked for a raise, but she didn’t expect one immediately. We should plant the roses early this year. The documentary was engrossing. It humanized World War II.


61d Adjectives An adjective is a word used to modify, or describe, a noun or pronoun. An adjective usually answers one of these questions: Which one? What kind of? How many?

>ìVÌÛiÃÊ UÊ ìÃVÀL}ÊÕÃ]Ê«ÀÕÃÊ UÊ >`ÛiÀLÃÊ UÊ ìÃVÀL}ÊÛiÀLÃ]Ê>ìVÌÛiÃ

basic

61e

ADJ

the frisky horse [Which horse?] ADJ

ADJ

cracked old plates [What kind of plates?] ADJ

nine months [How many months?]

Adjectives usually precede the words they modify. They may also follow linking verbs, in which case they describe the subject. (See 62b.) ADJ

The decision was unpopular.

The definite article the and the indefinite articles a and an are also classified as adjectives. ART

ART

ART

A defendant should be judged on the evidence provided to the jury, not on hearsay.

Some possessive, demonstrative, and indefinite pronouns can function as adjectives: their, its, this, all (see 61b). And nouns can function as adjectives when they modify other nouns: apple pie (the noun apple modifies the noun pie; see 61a). TIP: You can find more details about using adjectives in 26. If you are a multilingual writer, you may also find help with articles and specific uses of adjectives in 29, 30g, and 30h.

61e Adverbs An adverb is a word used to modify, or qualify, a verb (or verbal), an adjective, or another adverb. It usually answers one of these questions: When? Where? How? Why? Under what conditions? To what degree? Pull firmly on the emergency handle. [Pull how?] Read the text first and then work the exercises. [Read when? Work when?]

755

756

61e

basic

Parts of speech

Adverbs modifying adjectives or other adverbs usually intensify or limit the intensity of the word they modify. ADV

ADV

Be extremely kind, and you will probably have many friends.

Adverbs modifying adjectives and other adverbs are not movable. It is not correct to write “Be kind extremely” or “Extremely be kind.” Adverbs can modify prepositional phrases, subordinate clauses, or whole sentences (independent clauses). The budget is barely on target. We will try to attend, especially if you will be there. Certainly Joe did not intend to insult you.

The negators not and never are classified as adverbs. A word such as cannot contains the helping verb can and the adverb not. A contraction such as can’t contains the helping verb can and a contracted form of the adverb not. TIP: You can find more details about using adverbs in 26b–26d. Multilingual writers can find more about the placement of adverbs in 30f.

EXERCISE 61–4 Underline the adjectives and circle the adverbs in the following sentences. If a word is a noun or pronoun functioning as an adjective, underline it and mark it as a noun/adjective or pronoun/adjective. Also treat the articles a, an, and the as adjectives. Answers to lettered sentences appear in the back of the book. Example: Searching for an available room during the convention was not an easy task. a. b. c. d. e.

Generalizations lead to weak, unfocused essays. The Spanish language is wonderfully flexible. The wildflowers smelled especially fragrant after the steady rain. I’d rather be slightly hot than bitterly cold. The cat slept soundly in its wicker basket.

>`ÛiÀLÃÊ UÊ ìÃVÀL}ÊÛiÀLÃ]Ê>ìVÌÛiÃÊ UÊ prepositions ( in]Êat]Êfrom]Êto]Êunder]ÊiÌV°®

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

basic

61f

Success can be elusive to those who object to working hard. After three hours, the discussion had dwindled from a lively sprint to a tedious crawl. She made a fairly earnest attempt at solving the most difficult calculus problems. The black bear sniffed eagerly at the broken honeycomb. The bacteria in the dish grew steadily over twenty-four hours.

hackerhandbooks.com/bedhandbook > Grammar exercises > Grammar basics > E-ex 61–11 to 61–14

61f Prepositions A preposition is a word placed before a noun or pronoun to form a phrase modifying another word in the sentence. The prepositional phrase nearly always functions as an adjective or as an adverb. P

P

P

The road to the summit travels past craters from an extinct volcano.

To the summit functions as an adjective modifying the noun road; past craters functions as an adverb modifying the verb travels; from an extinct volcano functions as an adjective modifying the noun craters. (For more on prepositional phrases, see 63a.) English has a limited number of prepositions. The most common are included in the following list. about above across after against along among around as at before behind below

beside besides between beyond but by concerning considering despite down during except for

from in inside into like near next of off on onto opposite out

outside over past plus regarding respecting round since than through throughout till to

toward under underneath unlike until unto up upon with within without

757

758

61g

basic

Parts of speech

Some prepositions are more than one word long. Along with, as well as, in addition to, next to, and rather than are common examples. TIP: Prepositions are used in idioms such as capable of and try to

(see 18d). For a discussion of specific issues for multilingual writers, see 31.

61g Conjunctions Conjunctions join words, phrases, or clauses, and they indicate the relation between the elements joined. Coordinating conjunctions A coordinating conjunction is used to connect grammatically equal elements. The coordinating conjunctions are and, but, or, nor, for, so, and yet. The sociologist interviewed children but not their parents. Write clearly, and your readers will appreciate your efforts.

In the first sentence, but connects two noun phrases; in the second, and connects two independent clauses. Correlative conjunctions Correlative conjunctions come in pairs. Like coordinating conjunctions, they connect grammatically equal elements. either . . . or neither . . . nor not only . . . but also

whether . . . or both . . . and

Either the painting was brilliant or it was a forgery.

Subordinating conjunctions A subordinating conjunction introduces a subordinate clause and indicates the relation of the clause to the rest of the sentence. (See 63e.) The most common subordinating conjunctions are after, although, as, as if,

conjunctions ( and]Êbut]ÊeitherÊ°Ê°Ê°Êor]Êafter]Ê because]ÊiÌV°®Ê UÊ however]ÊiÌV°Ê UÊ iÝV>>ÌÃÊ

basic

61h

because, before, if, in order that, once, since, so that, than, that, though, unless, until, when, where, whether, and while. When the fundraiser ends, we expect to have raised more than half a million dollars.

Conjunctive adverbs Conjunctive adverbs connect independent clauses and indicate the relation between the clauses. They can be used with a semicolon to join two independent clauses in one sentence, or they can be used alone with an independent clause. The most common conjunctive adverbs are finally, furthermore, however, moreover, nevertheless, similarly, then, therefore, and thus. (See p. 762 for a longer list.) The photographer failed to take a light reading; therefore, all the pictures were underexposed. During the day, the kitten sleeps peacefully. However, when night falls, the kitten is wide awake and ready to play.

Conjunctive adverbs can appear at the beginning or in the middle of a clause. When night falls, however, the kitten is wide awake and ready to play. TIP: The ability to distinguish between conjunctive adverbs and coordinating conjunctions will help you avoid run-on sentences and make punctuation decisions (see 20, 32a, and 32b). The ability to recognize subordinating conjunctions will help you avoid sentence fragments (see 19).

61h Interjections An interjection is a word used to express surprise or emotion (Oh! Hey! Wow!). hackerhandbooks.com/bedhandbook > Grammar exercises > Grammar basics > E-ex 61–15 and 61–16

759

760

61h

basic

Parts of speech

Parts of speech U A nounÊ>iÃÊ>Ê«iÀÃ]Ê«>Vi]ÊÌ}]ÊÀÊVVi«Ì° N

N

N

RepetitionÊìÃÊÌÊÌÀ>ÃvÀÊ>Êlie into truth° U A pronounÊÃÕLÃÌÌÕÌiÃÊvÀÊ>ÊÕ° PN

PN

PN

ivÀiÊÌiÊ>ÌÌi`>ÌÊiÌÊusÊL>À`ÊÌiÊÃ>Ê«>i]Êhe weighed us PN

and ourÊL>}}>}i° Personal pronouns:Ê]Êi]ÊÞÕ]Êi]Ê]ÊÃi]ÊiÀ]ÊÌ]ÊÜi]ÊÕÃ]Ê ÌiÞ]ÊÌi Possessive pronouns:ÊÞ]Êi]ÊÞÕÀ]ÊÞÕÀÃ]ÊiÀ]ÊiÀÃ]ÊÃ]ÊÌÃ]Ê ÕÀ]ÊÕÀÃ]ÊÌiÀ]ÊÌiÀÃ Intensive and reflexive pronouns:ÊÞÃiv]ÊÞÕÀÃiv]ÊÃiv]Ê iÀÃiv]ÊÌÃiv]ÊÕÀÃiÛiÃ]ÊÞÕÀÃiÛiÃ]ÊÌiÃiÛiÃ Relative pronouns:ÊÌ>Ì]ÊÜV]ÊÜ]ÊÜ]ÊÜÃi Interrogative pronouns:ÊÜ]ÊÜ]ÊÜÃi]ÊÜV]ÊÜ>Ì Demonstrative pronouns:ÊÌÃ]ÊÌ>Ì]ÊÌiÃi]ÊÌÃi Indefinite pronouns > another any anybody anyone anything both

each either everybody everyone everything few

>Þ neither nobody none no one nothing

one ÃiÛiÀ> Ãi ÃiL`Þ Ãii ÃiÌ}

Reciprocal pronouns:Êi>VÊÌiÀ]ÊiÊ>ÌiÀ U A helping verbÊViÃÊLivÀiÊ>Ê>ÊÛiÀL° Modals:ÊV>]ÊVÕ`]Ê>Þ]Ê}Ì]ÊÕÃÌ]ÊÃ>]ÊÃÕ`]ÊÜ]ÊÜÕ`Ê (alsoÊÕ}ÌÊÌ®

6

parts of speech

basic

61h

Forms of be:ÊLi]Ê>]ÊÃ]Ê>Ài]ÊÜ>Ã]ÊÜiÀi]ÊLi}]ÊLii Forms of have: >Ûi]Ê>Ã]Ê>` Forms of do:Ê`]ÊìÃ]Ê`` /iÊvÀÃÊvÊbe] have]Ê>`ÊdoÊ>ÞÊ>ÃÊvÕVÌÊ>ÃÊ>ÊÛiÀLÃ°® U A main verbÊÃÜÃÊ>VÌÊÀÊ>ÊÃÌ>ÌiÊvÊLi}° MV

/iÊÛiÊopensÊÜÌÊ>ÊÌiÃiÊìÃVÀ«ÌÊvÊ>Ê}ÀÊÕÀìÀ]ÊLÕÌ HV

MV

the author does not maintainÊÌiÊÌ>ÊiÛiÊvÊÃÕÃ«iÃi°Ê Ê>ÊÛiÀLÊÜÊ>Ü>ÞÃÊV>}iÊvÀÊÜiÊ«ÕÌÊÌÊÌiÃiÊ«Ãtions in sentences: 1ÃÕ>ÞÊÊ Yesterday I I have Ê>Ê 1ÃÕ>ÞÊiÊ

Ê°

(walk] ride® (walked] rode® (walked] ridden® (walking] riding® (walks] rides®

Ê° Ê>ÞÊÌiÃÊLivÀi° ÊÀ}ÌÊÜ° Ê°

/iÊ}ÞÊÀÀi}Õ>ÀÊÛiÀLÊbeÊ>ÃÊi}ÌÊvÀÃ\Êbe]Êam] is] are] was] were] being] been° U An adjective `wiÃÊ>ÊÕÊÀÊ«ÀÕ]ÊÕÃÕ>ÞÊ>ÃÜiÀ}Ê iÊvÊÌiÃiÊµÕiÃÌÃ\Ê7VÊi¶Ê7>ÌÊ`Êv¶ÊÜÊ>Þ¶Ê /iÊ>ÀÌViÃÊa] an]Ê>`ÊtheÊ>ÀiÊ>ÃÊ>ìVÌÛiÃ° PN/ADJ

N/ADJ

ADJ

ADJ

PN/ADJ

Our family’s strong ties gave us welcome VvÀÌÊ our }Àiv° U An adverbÊ`wiÃÊ>ÊÛiÀL]Ê>Ê>ìVÌÛi]ÊÀÊ>Ê>`ÛiÀL]ÊÕÃÕ>ÞÊ answering one of these questions: When? Where? Why? How? Under what conditions? To what degree? ADV

ADV

9Õ}Ê«i«i often approach history skeptically. U A prepositionÊ`V>ÌiÃÊÌiÊÀi>ÌÃ«ÊLiÌÜiiÊÌiÊÕÊÀÊ «ÀÕÊÌ>ÌÊvÜÃÊÌÊ>`Ê>ÌiÀÊÜÀ`ÊÊÌiÊÃiÌiVi° P

P

A journey ofÊ>ÊÌÕÃ>`ÊiÃÊLi}ÃÊwithÊ>ÊÃ}iÊÃÌi«°

6

761

762

61h

basic

Parts of speech

Parts of speech, continued Common prepositions about above across after against along along with among around as as well as at because of before behind below beside

besides between beyond but by concerning considering despite down during except for from in in addition to inside into

like near next next to of off on onto opposite out outside over past plus rather than regarding respecting

since than through throughout till to toward under underneath unlike until unto up upon with within without

U A conjunction connects words or word groups. Coordinating conjunctions: and, but, or, nor, for, so, yet Subordinating conjunctions: after, although, as, as if, because, before, even though, if, in order that, once, since, so that, than, that, though, unless, until, when, where, whether, while Correlative conjunctions: either . . . or; neither . . . nor; not only . . . but also; both . . . and; whether . . . or Conjunctive adverbs: accordingly, also, anyway, besides, certainly, consequently, conversely, finally, furthermore, hence, however, incidentally, indeed, instead, likewise, meanwhile, moreover, nevertheless, next, nonetheless, now, otherwise, similarly, specifically, still, subsequently, then, therefore, thus U An interjection expresses surprise or emotion (Oh! Wow! Hooray! ).

«>ÀÌÃÊvÊÃ«iiVÊ UÊ ÃiÌiViÊ«>ÌÌiÀÃÊ UÊ V«iÌiÊ ÃÕLiVÌÊ UÊ Ü>ÌÊÌiÊÃiÌiViÊÃÊ>LÕÌ

62

basic

62a

Sentence patterns

Most English sentences flow from subject to verb to any objects or complements. The vast majority of sentences conform to one of these five patterns: subject / verb / subject complement subject / verb / direct object subject / verb / indirect object / direct object subject / verb / direct object / object complement subject / verb Adverbial modifiers (single words, phrases, or clauses) may be added to any of these patterns, and they may appear nearly anywhere — at the beginning, the middle, or the end. Predicate is the grammatical term given to the verb plus its objects, complements, and adverbial modifiers. For a quick-reference chart of sentence patterns, see page 769.

62a Subjects The subject of a sentence names who or what the sentence is about. The complete subject is usually composed of a simple subject, always a noun or pronoun, plus any words or word groups modifying the simple subject.

The complete subject To find the complete subject, ask Who? or What?, insert the verb, and finish the question. The answer is the complete subject. COMPLETE SUBJECT

The devastating effects of famine can last for many years.

Who or what lasts for many years? The devastating effects of famine.

763

764

62a

basic

Sentence patterns COMPLETE SUBJECT

Adventure novels that contain multiple subplots are often made into successful movies.

Who or what are made into movies? Adventure novels that contain multiple subplots. COMPLETE SUBJECT

Within one city neighborhood, income levels can vary greatly.

Who or what can vary greatly? Income levels. Notice that Within one city neighborhood, income levels is not a sensible answer to the question. Within one city neighborhood is a prepositional phrase modifying the verb can vary. Since sentences frequently open with such modifiers, it is not safe to assume that the subject must always appear first in a sentence.

The simple subject To find the simple subject, strip away all modifiers in the complete subject. This includes single-word modifiers such as the and devastating, phrases such as of famine, and subordinate clauses such as that contain multiple subplots. SS

The devastating effects of famine can last for many years. SS

Adventure novels that contain multiple subplots are often made into successful movies. SS

Within one city neighborhood, income levels can vary greatly.

A sentence may have a compound subject containing two or more simple subjects joined with a coordinating conjunction such as and, but, or or. SS

SS

Great commitment and a little luck make a successful actor.

Understood subjects In imperative sentences, which give advice or issue commands, the subject is understood but not actually present in

ÃÕLiVÌÊ UÊ ÕìÀÃÌ`ÊyouÊ UÊ ÃÕLiVÌÊ>vÌiÀÊÛiÀL

basic

62a

the sentence. The subject of an imperative sentence is understood to be you. [You] Put your clothes in the hamper.

Subject after the verb Although the subject ordinarily comes before the verb (the planes took off ) occasionally it does not. When a sentence begins with There is or There are (or There was or There were), the subject follows the verb. The word There is an expletive in such inverted constructions, an empty word serving merely to get the sentence started. SS

There are eight planes waiting to take off.

Occasionally a writer will invert a sentence for effect. SS

Joyful is the child whose school closes for snow.

Joyful is an adjective, so it cannot be the subject. Turn this sentence around and its structure becomes obvious. The child whose school closes for snow is joyful.

In questions, the subject frequently appears in an unusual position, sandwiched between parts of the verb. SS

Do Kenyan marathoners train year-round?

Turn the question into a statement, and the words will appear in their usual order: Kenyan marathoners do train year-round. (Do train is the verb.) For more about unusual sentence patterns, see 62c. TIP: The ability to recognize the subject of a sentence will help you edit for a variety of problems: sentence fragments (19), subject-verb agreement (21), choice of pronouns such as I and me (24), missing subjects (30b), and repeated subjects (30c).

765

62b

766

basic

Sentence patterns

EXERCISE 62–1 In the following sentences, underline the complete subject and write SS above the simple subject(s). If the subject is an understood you, insert you in parentheses. Answers to lettered sentences appear in the back of the book. Example:

44

44

Parents and their children often look alike. a. b. c. d. e.

The hills and mountains seemed endless, and the snow atop them glistened. In foil fencing, points are scored by hitting an electronic target. Do not stand in the aisles or sit on the stairs. There were hundreds of fireflies in the open field. The evidence against the defendant was staggering.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

The size of the new building caused an uproar in the town. Eat heartily. You need your strength. In the opinion of the court, siblings must be kept together. All of the books in the old library smelled like mothballs. There were no tour buses at the customs booth.


62b Verbs, objects, and complements Section 61c explains how to find the verb of a sentence. A sentence’s verb is classified as linking, transitive, or intransitive, depending on the kinds of objects or complements the verb can (or cannot) take.

Linking verbs and subject complements Linking verbs connect the subject to a subject complement, a word or word group that completes the meaning of the subject by renaming or describing it. They fit into the sentence pattern subject/verb/subject complement. If the subject complement renames the subject, it is a noun or noun equivalent (sometimes called a predicate noun). S

V

SC

An e-mail requesting personal information may be a scam.

ÛiÀLÃÊ UÊ LiVÌÃÊ UÊ V«iiÌÃÊ UÊ }ÊÛiÀLÃÊ UÊ `ÀiVÌÊLiVÌÃ

basic

62b

If the subject complement describes the subject, it is an adjective or adjective equivalent (sometimes called a predicate adjective). S

V

SC

Last month’s temperatures were mild.

Whenever they appear as main verbs (rather than helping verbs), the forms of be — be, am, is, are, was, were, being, been — usually function as linking verbs. In the preceding examples, for instance, the main verbs are be and were. Verbs such as appear, become, feel, grow, look, make, seem, smell, sound, and taste are sometimes linking, depending on the sense of the sentence. S

V

Before we knew it, our toddler’s disjointed words had become SC

sentences. S

V

SC

As it thickens, the sauce will look unappealing.

When you suspect that a verb such as becomes or looks is linking, check to see if the word or words following it rename or describe the subject. In the preceding examples, sentences renames words, and unappealing describes sauce.

Transitive verbs and direct objects A transitive verb takes a direct object, a word or word group that names a receiver of the action. It fits into the sentence pattern subject/verb/direct object. S

V

DO

The hungry cat clawed the bag of dry food.

The simple direct object is always a noun or pronoun, in this case bag. To find it, simply strip away all modifiers. Transitive verbs usually appear in the active voice, with the subject doing the action and a direct object receiving the action.

767

768

62b

basic

Sentence patterns

Active-voice sentences can be transformed into the passive voice, with the subject receiving the action instead. (See 62c.)

Transitive verbs, indirect objects, and direct objects The direct object of a transitive verb is sometimes preceded by an indirect object, a noun or pronoun telling to whom or for whom the action of the sentence is done. It fits into the sentence pattern subject/verb/indirect object/direct object. S

V

IO

DO

S

V

IO

DO

You give her some yarn, and she will knit you a scarf.

The simple indirect object is always a noun or pronoun. To test for an indirect object, insert the word to or for before the word or word group in question. If the sentence makes sense, the word or word group is an indirect object. You give [to] her some yarn, and she will knit [for] you a scarf.

An indirect object may be turned into a prepositional phrase using to or for: You give some yarn to her, and she will knit a scarf for you. Only certain transitive verbs take indirect objects. Some examples are ask, bring, find, get, give, hand, lend, make, offer, pay, promise, read, send, show, teach, tell, throw, and write.

Transitive verbs, direct objects, and object complements The direct object of a transitive verb is sometimes followed by an object complement, a word or word group that renames or describes the object. It fits into the sentence pattern subject/ verb/direct object/object complement. S

V

DO

OC

People often consider chivalry a thing of the past. S

V

DO

OC

The kiln makes clay firm and strong.

When the object complement renames the direct object, it is a noun or pronoun (such as thing). When it describes the direct object, it is an adjective (such as firm and strong).

LiVÌÃÊ UÊ V«iiÌÃÊ UÊ ÛiÀLÃÊÜÌÊÊLiVÌÃÊ UÊ subject/verb/object patterns

basic

62b

Sentence patterns Subject / linking verb / subject complement S

V SC

VÌ}ÊÃÊ>ÀÌ°ÊQArt Ài>iÃÊActing°R S

V

SC

`ÊÀiÃi>ÀViÀÃÊ>ÀiÊVÕÀÕÃ°ÊQCurious describes researchers°R

Subject / transitive verb / direct object S

V

DO

Ê>ÌÃÌ>iÊ>ÞÊ«ÀiÛiÌÊ>Ê>iÀ}VÊÀi>VÌ°

Subject / transitive verb / indirect object / direct object S

V

IO

DO

/iÊiiÛ>ÌÀ½ÃÊÀ>«`Ê>ÃViÌÊ}>ÛiÊÀ>Ê>Ê>ÌÌ>VÊvÊÛiÀÌ}°

Subject / transitive verb / direct object / object complement S

V

DO

OC

/iÊÀiÛiÜiÀÊV>i`ÊÌiÊwÊ>Ê>ÃÌiÀ«iVi°ÊQMasterpieceÊÀi>iÃÊ film°R S

V

DO

OC

/iÊiÜÊ`ÕLi}>âi`ÊÜ`ÜÃÊ>ìÊÌiÊÕÃiÊÜ>ÀiÀ°Ê QWarmer describes house°R

Subject / intransitive verb S

V

/iÊiÌÌiÊÜÃÌiÃ°

Intransitive verbs Intransitive verbs take no objects or complements. Their sentence pattern is subject/verb. S

V

The audience laughed. S

V

The driver accelerated in the straightaway.

769

770

62b

basic

Sentence patterns

Nothing receives the actions of laughing and accelerating in these sentences, so the verbs are intransitive. Notice that such verbs may or may not be followed by adverbial modifiers. In the second sentence, in the straightaway is an adverbial prepositional phrase modifying accelerated. NOTE: The dictionary will tell you whether a verb is transitive or

intransitive. Some verbs have both transitive and intransitive functions. TRANSITIVE

Sandra flew her small plane over the canyon.

INTRANSITIVE

A flock of migrating geese flew overhead.

In the first example, flew has a direct object that receives the action: her small plane. In the second example, the verb is followed by an adverb (overhead), not by a direct object. EXERCISE 62–2 Label the subject complements and direct objects in the following sentences, using the labels SC and DO. If a subject complement or direct object consists of more than one word, bracket and label all of it. Example:

%0

The sharp right turn confused most drivers. a. b. c. d. e. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Textbooks are expensive. Samurai warriors never fear death. Successful coaches always praise their players’ efforts. St. Petersburg was the capital of the Russian Empire for two centuries. The medicine tasted bitter. Solar flares emit UV radiation. The friends’ quarrel was damaging their relationship. Feng shui is the practice of achieving harmony between the physical and the spiritual in one’s environment. A well-made advertisement captures viewers’ attention. The island’s climate was neither too hot nor too rainy.

EXERCISE 62–3 Each of the following sentences has either an indirect object followed by a direct object or a direct object followed by an object complement. Label the objects and complements, using

Û>À>ÌÃÊÊÃiÌiViÊ«>ÌÌiÀÃÊ UÊ µÕiÃÌÃÊ UÊ V>`Ã

basic

62c

the labels IO, DO, and OC. If an object or a complement consists of more than one word, bracket and label all of it. Example:

%0

0$

Most people consider their own experience normal. a. b. c. d. e. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Stress can make adults and children weary. Zita has made community service her priority this year. Consider the work finished. We showed the agent our tickets, and she gave us boarding passes. The dining hall offered students healthy meal choices. Send the registrar your scholarship form today. The independent research institute gives its scholars the freedom to work without government or military interference. Computer viruses make networks vulnerable. Give me a book’s title, and I can tell you the author. The dire forecast made us extremely cautious about riding out the storm at home.


62c Pattern variations Although most sentences follow one of the five patterns in the chart on page 769, variations of these patterns commonly occur in questions, commands, sentences with delayed subjects, and passive transformations.

Questions and commands Questions are sometimes patterned in normal word order, with the subject preceding the verb. S

V

Who will have the most hits this season?

Just as frequently, however, the pattern of a question is inverted, with the subject appearing between the helping and main verb or after the verb.

771

772

62c HV

basic S

Sentence patterns

MV

Will he have the most hits this season? V

S

Why is the number of hits an important statistic?

In commands, the subject of the sentence is an understood you. S

V

[You] Pay attention to the road.

Sentences with delayed subjects Writers sometimes choose to delay the subject of a sentence to achieve a special effect such as suspense or humor. V

S

Behind the phony tinsel of Hollywood lies the real tinsel.

The subject of the sentence is also delayed in sentences opening with the expletive There or It. When used as expletives, the words There and It have no strict grammatical function; they serve merely to get the sentence started. V

S

There are thirty thousand spectators in the stadium. V

S

It is best to avoid trans fats.

The subject in the second example is an infinitive phrase. (See 63b.)

Passive transformations Transitive verbs, those that can take direct objects, usually appear in the active voice. In the active voice, the subject does the action and a direct object receives the action. S

ACTIVE

V

DO

The fireworks display dazzled the viewers on the Esplanade.

µÕiÃÌÃÊ UÊ V>`ÃÊ UÊ there are]Êit isÊ UÊ «>ÃÃÛiÊÛViÊ UÊ «Ài«ÃÌ>Ê«À>ÃiÃ

basic

63a

Sentences in the active voice may be transformed into the passive voice, with the subject receiving the action instead. S

PASSIVE

HV

MV

The viewers on the Esplanade were dazzled by the fireworks display.

What was once the direct object (the viewers on the Esplanade) has become the subject in the passive-voice transformation, and the original subject appears in a prepositional phrase beginning with by. The by phrase is frequently omitted in passive-voice constructions. PASSIVE

The viewers on the Esplanade were dazzled.

Verbs in the passive voice can be identified by their form alone. The main verb is always a past participle, such as dazzled (see 61c), preceded by a form of be (be, am, is, are, was, were, being, been): were dazzled. Sometimes adverbs intervene (were usually dazzled). TIP: Avoid using the passive voice when the active voice would be more appropriate (see 8a).

63

Subordinate word groups

Subordinate word groups include phrases and clauses. Phrases are subordinate because they lack a subject and a verb; they are classified as prepositional, verbal, appositive, and absolute (see 63a–63d). Subordinate clauses have a subject and a verb, but they begin with a word (such as although, that, or when) that marks them as subordinate (see 63e).

63a Prepositional phrases A prepositional phrase begins with a preposition such as at, by, for, from, in, of, on, to, or with (see 61f) and usually ends with a noun or noun equivalent: on the table, for him, by sleeping late. The noun or noun equivalent is known as the object of the preposition.

773

774

63a

basic


Prepositional phrases function either as adjectives modifying nouns or pronouns or as adverbs modifying verbs, adjectives, or other adverbs. When functioning as an adjective, a prepositional phrase nearly always appears immediately following the noun or pronoun it modifies. The hut had walls of mud.

Adjective phrases usually answer one or both of the questions Which one? and What kind of? If we ask Which walls? or What kind of walls? we get a sensible answer: walls of mud. Adverbial prepositional phrases that modify the verb can appear nearly anywhere in a sentence.

James walked his dog on a leash.

Sabrina will in time adjust to life in Ecuador.

During a mudslide, the terrain can change drastically.

If a prepositional phrase is movable, you can be certain that it is adverbial. In the cave, the explorers found well-preserved prehistoric drawings. The explorers found well-preserved prehistoric drawings in the cave.

Adverbial word groups usually answer one of these questions: When? Where? How? Why? Under what conditions? To what degree? James walked his dog how? On a leash. Sabrina would adjust to life in Ecuador when? In time.

«Ài«ÃÌ>Ê«À>ÃiÃÊinto the woods®Ê UÊ ÛiÀL>

basic

63a

The terrain can change drastically under what conditions? During a mudslide.

In questions and subordinate clauses, a preposition may appear after its object. What are you afraid of ? We avoided the bike trail that John had warned us about.

The object of a preposition might itself be modified by a prepositional phrase.

There are many paths to the top of the mountain.

The complete object of to is the top of the mountain. The prepositional phrase of the mountain modifies the noun top. And the prepositional phrase to the top of the mountain modifies the noun paths. EXERCISE 63–1 Underline the prepositional phrases in the following sentences. Tell whether each phrase is an adjective or an adverb phrase and what it modifies in the sentence. Answers to lettered sentences appear in the back of the book. Example: Flecks of mica glittered in the new granite floor. "EKFDUJWF QISBTFNPEJGZJOH¦'MFDLT§BEWFSCQISBTFNPEJGZJOH¦HMJUUFSFE§

a. b. c. d. e. 1. 2.

In northern Italy, some people speak German as their first language. William completed the hike through the thick forest with ease. To my boss’s dismay, I was late for work again. The traveling exhibit of Mayan artifacts gave viewers new insight into pre-Columbian culture. In 2002, the euro became the official currency in twelve European countries. The Silk Road was an old trade route between China and other parts of the world. Dough with too much flour yields heavy baked goods.

775

776

63b 3. 4. 5.

basic


On one side of the barricades were revolutionary students; on the other was a government militia. You can tell with just one whiff whether the milk is fresh. At first, we couldn’t decide whether to take the car or the train, but in the end we decided to take the train.


63b Verbal phrases A verbal is a verb form that does not function as the verb of a clause. Verbals include infinitives (the word to plus the base form of the verb), present participles (the -ing form of the verb), and past participles (the verb form usually ending in -d, -ed, -n, -en, or -t). (See 27a and 61c.) INFINITIVE

PRESENT PARTICIPLE

PAST PARTICIPLE

to dream to choose to build to grow

dreaming choosing building growing

dreamed chosen built grown

Instead of functioning as the verb of a clause, a verbal functions as an adjective, a noun, or an adverb. ADJECTIVE

Broken promises cannot be fixed.

NOUN

Constant complaining becomes wearisome.

ADVERB

Can you wait to celebrate?

Verbals with objects, complements, or modifiers form verbal phrases. In my family, singing loudly is more appreciated than singing well. Governments exist to protect the rights of minorities.

The verbal singing is modified by the adverbs loudly and well; the verbal to protect is followed by a direct object, the rights of minorities.

`wiÀÃÊ UÊ «>ÀÌV«iÊwaking early®Ê UÊ gerund (eating well®Ê UÊ ingÊÛiÀLÊvÀÃ

basic

63b

Like single-word verbals, verbal phrases function as adjectives, nouns, or adverbs. Verbal phrases are ordinarily classified as participial, gerund, and infinitive.

Participial phrases Participial phrases always function as adjectives. Their verbals are either present participles (such as dreaming, asking) or past participles (such as stolen, reached ). Participial phrases frequently appear immediately following the noun or pronoun they modify. Congress shall make no law abridging the freedom of speech or of the press. Truth kept in the dark will never save the world.

Unlike other adjectival word groups (prepositional phrases, infinitive phrases, adjective clauses), which must always follow the noun or pronoun they modify, participial phrases are often movable. They can precede the word they modify. Being a weight-bearing joint, the knee is among the most frequently injured.

They may also appear at some distance from the word they modify. Last night we saw a play that affected us deeply, written with profound insight into the lives of immigrants.

Gerund phrases Gerund phrases are built around present participles (verb forms that end in -ing), and they always function as nouns:

777

778

63b

basic


usually as subjects, subject complements, direct objects, or objects of a preposition. S

Rationalizing a fear can eliminate it. SC

The key to good sauce is browning the mushrooms. DO

Lizards usually enjoy sunning themselves. The American Heart Association has documented the benefits OBJ OF PREP

of diet and exercise in reducing the risk of heart attack.

Infinitive phrases Infinitive phrases, usually constructed around to plus the base form of the verb (to call, to drink), can function as nouns, as adjectives, or as adverbs. When functioning as a noun, an infinitive phrase may appear in almost any noun slot in a sentence, usually as a subject, subject complement, or direct object. S

To live without health insurance is risky. DO

The orchestra wanted to make its premier season memorable.

Infinitive phrases functioning as adjectives usually appear immediately following the noun or pronoun they modify. The Twentieth Amendment gave women the right to vote.

The infinitive phrase modifies the noun right. Which right? The right to vote. Adverbial infinitive phrases usually qualify the meaning of the verb, telling when, where, how, why, under what conditions, or to what degree an action occurred.

«À>ÃiÃÊ>ÃÊ`wiÀÃÊ UÊ wÌÛiÊto watch birds®Ê UÊ >««ÃÌÛi

basic

63c

Volunteers rolled up their pants to wade through the flood waters.

Why did they roll up their pants? To wade through the flood waters. NOTE: In some constructions, the infinitive is unmarked; in

other words, the to does not appear. (See 28f.) Graphs and charts can help researchers [to] present complex data.

EXERCISE 63–2 Underline the verbal phrases in the following sentences. Tell whether each phrase is participial, gerund, or infinitive and how each is used in the sentence. Answers to lettered sentences appear in the back of the book. Example: Do you want to watch that documentary? *O±OJUJWFQISBTF

VTFEBTEJSFDUPCKFDUPG¦%PXBOU§

a. b. c. d. e. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Updating your software will fix the computer glitch. The challenge in decreasing the town budget is identifying nonessential services. Cathleen tried to help her mother by raking the lawn. Understanding little, I had no hope of passing my biology final. Working with animals gave Steve a sense of satisfaction. Driving through South Carolina, we saw kudzu growing out of control along the roadside. Some people now use a patch to repel mosquitoes. We helped the schoolchildren find their way to the station. Painting requires the ability to keep a steady hand. My father could not see a weed without pulling it out of the ground.


63c Appositive phrases Though strictly speaking they are not subordinate word groups, appositive phrases function somewhat as adjectives do, to describe nouns or pronouns. Instead of modifying nouns or pronouns, however, appositive phrases rename them. In form they are nouns or noun equivalents.

779

780

63d

basic


Appositives are said to be “in apposition” to the nouns or pronouns they rename. Bloggers, conversationalists at heart, are the online equivalent of radio talk show hosts.

Conversationalists at heart is in apposition to the noun Bloggers.

63d Absolute phrases An absolute phrase modifies a whole clause or sentence, not just one word, and it may appear nearly anywhere in the sentence. It consists of a noun or noun equivalent usually followed by a participial phrase. Her words reverberating in the hushed arena, the senator urged the crowd to support her former opponent. The senator urged the crowd to support her former opponent, her words reverberating in the hushed arena.

63e Subordinate clauses Subordinate clauses are patterned like sentences, having subjects and verbs and sometimes objects or complements. But they function within sentences as adjectives, adverbs, or nouns. They cannot stand alone as complete sentences. A subordinate clause usually begins with a subordinating conjunction or a relative pronoun. The chart on page 783 classifies these words according to the kinds of clauses (adjective, adverb, or noun) they introduce.

Adjective clauses Like other word groups functioning as adjectives, adjective clauses modify nouns or pronouns. An adjective clause nearly always appears immediately following the noun or pronoun it modifies. A flower that is planted in summer will grow quickly. The coach chose players who would benefit from intense drills.

basic

>LÃÕÌiÊ UÊ V>ÕÃiÃÊLi}}ÊÜÌÊwho]Êthat]ÊiÌV°

63e

To test whether a subordinate clause functions as an adjective, ask the adjective questions: Which one? What kind of? The answer should make sense. Which flower? The flower that is planted in summer. What kind of players? Players who would benefit from intense drills. Most adjective clauses begin with a relative pronoun (who, whom, whose, which, or that), which marks them as grammatically subordinate. In addition to introducing the clause, the relative pronoun points back to the noun that the clause modifies. A book that goes unread is a writer’s worst nightmare.

Relative pronouns are sometimes “understood.” The things [that] we cherish most are the things [that] we might lose.

Occasionally an adjective clause is introduced by a relative adverb, usually when, where, or why. The aging actor returned to the stage where he had made his debut as Hamlet half a century earlier.

The parts of an adjective clause are often arranged as in sentences (subject/verb/object or complement). S

V

DO

Sometimes it is our closest friends who disappoint us.

Frequently, however, the object or complement appears first, violating the normal order of subject/verb/object. DO

S

V

They can be the very friends whom we disappoint. TIP: For punctuation of adjective clauses, see 32e and 33e. For advice about avoiding repeated words in adjective clauses, see 30d.

781

782

63e

basic


Adverb clauses Adverb clauses usually modify verbs. In such cases, they may appear nearly anywhere in a sentence—at the beginning, at the end, or in the middle. Like other adverbial word groups, they tell when, where, why, how, under what conditions, or to what degree an action occurred or a situation existed. When the sun went down, the hikers prepared their camp. Laurabeth would have made the basketball team if she hadn’t broken her ankle.

When did the hikers prepare their camp? When the sun went down. Under what conditions would Laurabeth have made the team? If she hadn’t broken her ankle. Adverb clauses are usually movable when they modify a verb. In the preceding examples, for instance, the adverb clauses can be moved without affecting the meaning of the sentences. The hikers prepared their camp when the sun went down. If she hadn’t broken her ankle, Laurabeth would have made the basketball team.

When an adverb clause modifies an adjective or an adverb, it is not movable; it must appear next to the word it modifies. In the following examples, the when clause modifies the adjective Uncertain, and the than clause modifies the adverb better. Uncertain when the baby would be born, Ray and Leah stayed close to home. Jackie can dance better than I can walk.

Adverb clauses always begin with a subordinating conjunction (see the chart on p. 783 for a list). Subordinating conjunctions introduce clauses and express their relation to the rest of the sentence.

V>ÕÃiÃÊÜÌÊif]Êwhen]Êwhere]ÊiÌV°Ê UÊ V>ÕÃiÃÊÜÌÊ that]Êwhat]ÊiÌV°Ê UÊ ÜÀ`ÃÊÌÀ`ÕV}ÊV>ÕÃiÃ

basic

63e

Words that introduce subordinate clauses Words introducing adverb clauses Subordinating conjunctions:Ê>vÌiÀ]Ê>ÌÕ}]Ê>Ã]Ê>ÃÊv]ÊLiV>ÕÃi]Ê LivÀi]ÊiÛiÊÌÕ}]Êv]ÊÊÀìÀÊÌ>Ì]ÊÃVi]ÊÃÊÌ>Ì]ÊÌ>]ÊÌ>Ì]Ê ÌÕ}]ÊÕiÃÃ]ÊÕÌ]ÊÜi]ÊÜiÀi]ÊÜiÌiÀ]ÊÜi

Words introducing adjective clauses Relative pronouns:ÊÌ>Ì]ÊÜV]ÊÜ]ÊÜ]ÊÜÃi Relative adverbs:ÊÜi]ÊÜiÀi]ÊÜÞ

Words introducing noun clauses Relative pronouns:ÊÌ>Ì]ÊÜV]ÊÜ]ÊÜ]ÊÜÃi Other pronouns: ÜiÛiÀ]ÊÜiÛiÀ]ÊÜ>Ì]ÊÜ>ÌiÛiÀ]ÊÜViÛiÀ Other subordinating words: Ü]Êv]ÊÜi]ÊÜiiÛiÀ]ÊÜiÀi]ÊÜiÀiÛiÀ]Ê ÜiÌiÀ]ÊÜÞ

Adverb clauses are sometimes elliptical, with some of their words being understood but not appearing in the sentence. When [it is] renovated, the dorm will hold six hundred students.

Noun clauses Because they do not function as modifiers, noun clauses are not subordinate in the same sense as adjective and adverb clauses are. They are called subordinate only because they cannot stand alone: They must function within a sentence, always as nouns. A noun clause functions just like a single-word noun, usually as a subject, subject complement, direct object, or object of a preposition. S

Whoever leaves the house last must double-lock the door. DO

Copernicus argued that the sun is the center of the universe.

783

63e

784

basic


A noun clause begins with a word that marks it as subordinate (see the list on p. 783). The subordinating word may or may not play a significant role in the clause. In the preceding example sentences, Whoever is the subject of its clause, but that does not perform a function in its clause. As with adjective clauses, the parts of a noun clause may appear out of their normal order (subject/verb/object). DO

S

V

New Mexico is where we live.

The parts of a noun clause may also appear in normal order. S

V

DO

Loyalty is what keeps a friendship strong.

EXERCISE 63–3 Underline the subordinate clauses in the following sentences. Tell whether each clause is an adjective, adverb, or noun clause and how it is used in the sentence. Answers to lettered sentences appear in the back of the book. Example: Show the committee the latest draft before you print the final report. "EWFSCDMBVTFNPEJGZJOH¦4IPX§

a. b. c.

d. e. 1. 2.

The city’s electoral commission adjusted the voting process so that every vote would count. A marketing campaign that targets baby boomers may not appeal to young professionals. After the Tambora volcano erupted in the southern Pacific in 1815, no one realized that it would contribute to the “year without a summer” in Europe and North America. The concept of peak oil implies that at a certain point there will be no more oil to extract from the earth. Details are easily overlooked when you are rushing. What her internship taught her was that she worked well with children with special needs. Whether you like it or not, you cannot choose your family.

V>ÕÃiÃÊÜÌÊthat]Êwhat]ÊiÌV°Ê UÊ ÃiÌiViÊ ÌÞ«iÃÊ UÊ ÃiÌiViÊÃÌÀÕVÌÕÀiÃÊ UÊ Ã«i

3.

4. 5.

basic

64a

The meteorologist who underestimated the total snowfall of the first winter storm was right on target about the second storm. If Ramon didn’t have to work every afternoon, he would be willing to sign up for the yoga class with Andrea. The book that we saw in the shop in Dublin was not available when we returned home.


64

Sentence types

Sentences are classified in two ways: according to their structure (simple, compound, complex, and compound-complex) and according to their purpose (declarative, imperative, interrogative, and exclamatory).

64a Sentence structures Depending on the number and types of clauses they contain, sentences are classified as simple, compound, complex, or compound-complex. Clauses come in two varieties: independent and subordinate. An independent clause contains a subject and a predicate, and it either stands alone or could stand alone. A subordinate clause also contains a subject and a predicate, but it functions within a sentence as an adjective, an adverb, or a noun; it cannot stand alone. (See 63e.)

Simple sentences A simple sentence is one independent clause with no subordinate clauses. INDEPENDENT CLAUSE

Without a passport, Eva could not visit her grandparents in Hungary.

785

786

64a

basic

Sentence types

This sentence contains a subject (Eva), a verb with an adverb modifier (could not visit), a direct object (her grandparents in Hungary), and two prepositional phrases (Without a passport and in Hungary). A simple sentence may contain compound elements — a compound subject, verb, or object, for example — but it does not contain more than one full sentence pattern. The following sentence is simple because its two verbs (comes in and goes out) share a subject (Spring). INDEPENDENT CLAUSE

Spring comes in like a lion and goes out like a lamb.

Compound sentences A compound sentence is composed of two or more independent clauses with no subordinate clauses. The independent clauses are usually joined with a comma and a coordinating conjunction (and, but, or, nor, for, so, yet) or with a semicolon. (See 14a.) INDEPENDENT CLAUSE

INDEPENDENT CLAUSE

The car broke down, but a rescue van arrived within minutes. INDEPENDENT CLAUSE

INDEPENDENT CLAUSE

A shark was spotted near shore; people left immediately.

Complex sentences A complex sentence is composed of one independent clause with one or more subordinate clauses. (See 63e.) SUBORDINATE CLAUSE

ADJECTIVE

The pitcher who won the game is a rookie. SUBORDINATE CLAUSE

ADVERB

If you leave late, take a cab home.

ÃiÌiViÃÊ UÊ V«iÝÊ UÊ V«Õ`Ê UÊ V«Õ` V«iÝÊ UÊ ì«iìÌÊ³ÊÃÕLÀ`>ÌiÊV>ÕÃiÃ

basic

64b

SUBORDINATE CLAUSE

What matters most to us is a quick commute.

NOUN

Compound-complex sentences A compound-complex sentence contains at least two independent clauses and at least one subordinate clause. The following sentence contains two full sentence patterns that can stand alone. INDEPENDENT CLAUSE

INDEPENDENT CLAUSE

Tell the doctor how you feel, and she will decide whether you can go home.

And each independent clause contains a subordinate clause, making the sentence both compound and complex. INDEPENDENT CLAUSE

INDEPENDENT CLAUSE

SUB CL

Tell the doctor how you feel, and she will decide whether SUB CL

you can go home.

64b Sentence purposes Writers use declarative sentences to make statements, imperative sentences to issue requests or commands, interrogative sentences to ask questions, and exclamatory sentences to make exclamations. DECLARATIVE

The echo sounded in our ears.

IMPERATIVE

Love your neighbor.

INTERROGATIVE

Did the better team win tonight?

EXCLAMATORY

We’re here to save you!

EXERCISE 64–1 Identify the following sentences as simple, compound, complex, or compound-complex. Identify the subordinate

787

64b

788

basic

Sentence types

clauses and classify them according to their function: adjective, adverb, or noun. (See 63e.) Answers to lettered sentences appear in the back of the book. Example: The deli in Courthouse Square was crowded with lawyers

a. b. c. d. e. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

at lunchtime. 4JNQMF

Fires that are ignited in dry areas spread especially quickly. The early Incas were advanced; they used a calendar and developed a decimal system. Elaine’s jacket was too thin to block the wintry air. Before we leave for the station, we always check the Amtrak Web site. Decide when you want to leave, and I will be there to pick you up. The fact is that the network outage could have been avoided. Those who lose a loved one in a tragic accident may find group therapy comforting. The outlets in the garment district are the best places to find Halloween costumes. There were six lunar Apollo missions, but people usually remember Apollo 13 best. Our generator kicks in whenever we lose power.

hackerhandbooks.com/bedhandbook > Grammar exercises > Grammar basics > E-ex 64–2

Glossary of Usage This glossary includes words commonly confused (such as accept and except), words commonly misused (such as aggravate), and words that are nonstandard (such as hisself ). It also lists colloquialisms and jargon. Colloquialisms are casual expressions that may be appropriate in informal speech but are inappropriate in formal writing. Jargon is needlessly technical or pretentious language that is inappropriate in most contexts. If an item is not listed here, consult the index. For irregular verbs (such as sing, sang, sung), see 27a. For idiomatic use of prepositions, see 18d. Grammar checkers can point out commonly confused words and suggest that you check your usage. It is up to you, however, to determine the correct word for your intended meaning. hackerhandbooks.com/bedhandbook > Language Debates > Absolute concepts such as unique bad versus badly however at the beginning of a sentence lie versus lay myself that versus which who versus which or that who versus whom you

a, an Use an before a vowel sound, a before a consonant sound: an apple, a peach. Problems sometimes arise with words beginning with h or u. If the h is silent, the word begins with a vowel sound, so use an: an hour, an honorable deed. If the h is pronounced, the word begins with a consonant sound, so use a: a hospital, a historian, a hotel. Words such as university and union begin with a consonant sound (a y sound), so use a: a union. Words such as uncle and umbrella begin with a vowel sound, so use an: an underground well. When an abbreviation or an acronym begins with a vowel sound, use an: an EKG, an MRI, an AIDS prevention program. accept, except Accept is a verb meaning “to receive.” Except is usually a preposition meaning “excluding.” I will accept all the packages except that one. Except is also a verb meaning “to exclude.” Please except that item from the list.

789

790

usage

Glossary of Usage

adapt, adopt Adapt means “to adjust or become accustomed”; it is usually followed by to. Adopt means “to take as one’s own.” Our family adopted a Vietnamese child, who quickly adapted to his new life. adverse, averse Adverse means “unfavorable.” Averse means “opposed” or “reluctant”; it is usually followed by to. I am averse to your proposal because it could have an adverse impact on the economy. advice, advise Advice is a noun, advise a verb. We advise you to follow John’s advice. affect, effect Affect is usually a verb meaning “to influence.” Effect is usually a noun meaning “result.” The drug did not affect the disease, and it had adverse side effects. Effect can also be a verb meaning “to bring about.” Only the president can effect such a dramatic change. aggravate Aggravate means “to make worse or more troublesome.” Overgrazing aggravated the soil erosion. In formal writing, avoid the use of aggravate meaning “to annoy or irritate.” Her babbling annoyed (not aggravated ) me. agree to, agree with Agree to means “to give consent to.” Agree with means “to be in accord with” or “to come to an understanding with.” He agrees with me about the need for change, but he won’t agree to my plan. ain’t Ain’t is nonstandard. Use am not, are not (aren’t), or is not (isn’t). I am not (not ain’t) going home for spring break. all ready, already All ready means “completely prepared.” Already means “previously.” Susan was all ready for the concert, but her friends had already left. all right All right is written as two words. Alright is nonstandard. all together, altogether All together means “everyone or everything in one place.” Altogether means “entirely.” We were not altogether certain that we could bring the family all together for the reunion. allude To allude to something is to make an indirect reference to it. Do not use allude to mean “to refer directly.” In his lecture, the professor referred (not alluded ) to several pre-Socratic philosophers. allusion, illusion An allusion is an indirect reference. An illusion is a misconception or false impression. Did you catch my allusion to Shakespeare? Mirrors give the room an illusion of depth. a lot A lot is two words. Do not write alot. Sam lost a lot of weight. See also lots, lots of. among, between See between, among. amongst In American English, among is preferred.

Glossary of Usage

usage

amoral, immoral Amoral means “neither moral nor immoral”; it also means “not caring about moral judgments.” Immoral means “morally wrong.” Until recently, most business courses were taught from an amoral perspective. Murder is immoral. amount, number Use amount with quantities that cannot be counted; use number with those that can. This recipe calls for a large amount of sugar. We have a large number of toads in our garden. an See a, an. and etc. Et cetera (etc.) means “and so forth”; and etc. is redundant. See also etc. and/or Avoid the awkward construction and/or except in technical or legal documents. angry at, angry with Use angry with, not angry at, when referring to a person. The coach was angry with the referee. ante-, anti- The prefix ante- means “earlier” or “in front of”; the prefix anti- means “against” or “opposed to.” William Lloyd Garrison was a leader of the antislavery movement during the antebellum period. Anti- should be used with a hyphen when it is followed by a capital letter or a word beginning with i. anxious Anxious means “worried” or “apprehensive.” In formal writing, avoid using anxious to mean “eager.” We are eager (not anxious) to see your new house. anybody, anyone Anybody and anyone are singular. (See 21e and 22a.) anymore Reserve the adverb anymore for negative contexts, where it means “any longer.” Moviegoers are rarely shocked anymore by profanity. Do not use anymore in positive contexts. Use now or nowadays instead. Summer jobs for high school students are so scarce nowadays (not anymore) that more students are turning to volunteer opportunities. anyone See anybody, anyone. anyone, any one Anyone, an indefinite pronoun, means “any person at all.” Any one, the pronoun one preceded by the adjective any, refers to a particular person or thing in a group. Anyone from the winning team may choose any one of the games on display. anyplace In formal writing, use anywhere. anyways, anywheres Anyways and anywheres are nonstandard. Use anyway and anywhere. as Do not use as to mean “because” if there is any chance of ambiguity. We canceled the picnic because (not as) it began raining. As here could mean “because” or “when.”

791

792

usage

Glossary of Usage

as, like See like, as. as to As to is jargon for about. He inquired about (not as to) the job. averse See adverse, averse. awful The adjective awful and the adverb awfully are not appropriate in formal writing. awhile, a while Awhile is an adverb; it can modify a verb, but it cannot be the object of a preposition such as for. The two-word form a while is a noun preceded by an article and therefore can be the object of a preposition. Stay awhile. Stay for a while. back up, backup Back up is a verb phrase. Back up the car carefully. Be sure to back up your hard drive. Backup is a noun meaning “a copy of electronically stored data.” Keep your backup in a safe place. Backup can also be used as an adjective. I regularly create backup disks. bad, badly Bad is an adjective, badly an adverb. They felt bad about ruining the surprise. Her arm hurt badly after she slid into second base. (See 26c.) being as, being that Being as and being that are nonstandard expressions. Write because instead. Because (not Being as) I slept late, I had to skip breakfast. beside, besides Beside is a preposition meaning “at the side of” or “next to.” Annie Oakley slept with her gun beside her bed. Besides is a preposition meaning “except” or “in addition to.” No one besides Terrie can have that ice cream. Besides is also an adverb meaning “in addition.” I’m not hungry; besides, I don’t like ice cream. between, among Ordinarily, use among with three or more entities, between with two. The prize was divided among several contestants. You have a choice between carrots and beans. bring, take Use bring when an object is being transported toward you, take when it is being moved away. Please bring me a glass of water. Please take these forms to Mr. Scott. burst, bursted; bust, busted Burst is an irregular verb meaning “to come open or fly apart suddenly or violently.” Its past tense is burst. The past-tense form bursted is nonstandard. Bust and busted are slang for burst and, along with bursted, should not be used in formal writing. can, may The distinction between can and may is fading, but some writers still observe it in formal writing. Can is traditionally reserved for ability, may for permission. Can you speak French? May I help you?

Glossary of Usage

usage

capital, capitol Capital refers to a city, capitol to a building where lawmakers meet. Capital also refers to wealth or resources. The capitol has undergone extensive renovations. The residents of the state capital protested the development plans. censor, censure Censor means “to remove or suppress material considered objectionable.” Censure means “to criticize severely.” The administrations’s policy of censoring books has been censured by the media. cite, site Cite means “to quote as an authority or example.” Site is usually a noun meaning “a particular place.” He cited the zoning law in his argument against the proposed site of the gas station. Locations on the Internet are usually referred to as sites. The library’s Web site improves every week. climactic, climatic Climactic is derived from climax, the point of greatest intensity in a series or progression of events. Climatic is derived from climate and refers to meteorological conditions. The climactic period in the dinosaurs’ reign was reached just before severe climatic conditions brought on an ice age. coarse, course Coarse means “crude” or “rough in texture.” The coarse weave of the wall hanging gave it a three-dimensional quality. Course usually refers to a path, a playing field, or a unit of study; the expression of course means “certainly.” I plan to take a course in car repair this summer. Of course, you are welcome to join me. compare to, compare with Compare to means “to represent as similar.” She compared him to a wild stallion. Compare with means “to examine similarities and differences.” The study compared the language ability of apes with that of dolphins. complement, compliment Complement is a verb meaning “to go with or complete” or a noun meaning “something that completes.” Compliment as a verb means “to flatter”; as a noun, it means “flattering remark.” Her skill at rushing the net complements his skill at volleying. Martha’s flower arrangements receive many compliments. conscience, conscious Conscience is a noun meaning “moral principles.” Conscious is an adjective meaning “aware or alert.” Let your conscience be your guide. Were you conscious of his love for you? continual, continuous Continual means “repeated regularly and frequently.” She grew weary of the continual telephone calls. Continuous means “extended or prolonged without interruption.” The broken siren made a continuous wail. could care less Could care less is nonstandard. Write couldn’t care less instead. He couldn’t (not could ) care less about his psychology final.

793

794

usage

Glossary of Usage

could of Could of is nonstandard for could have. We could have (not could of ) taken the train. council, counsel A council is a deliberative body, and a councilor is a member of such a body. Counsel usually means “advice” and can also mean “lawyer”; a counselor is one who gives advice or guidance. The councilors met to draft the council’s position paper. The pastor offered wise counsel to the troubled teenager. criteria Criteria is the plural of criterion, which means “a standard or rule or test on which a judgment or decision can be based.” The only criterion for the scholarship is ability. data Data is a plural noun technically meaning “facts or propositions.” But data is increasingly being accepted as a singular noun. The new data suggest (or suggests) that our theory is correct. (The singular datum is rarely used.) different from, different than Ordinarily, write different from. Your sense of style is different from Jim’s. However, different than is acceptable to avoid an awkward construction. Please let me know if your plans are different than (to avoid from what) they were six weeks ago. differ from, differ with Differ from means “to be unlike”; differ with means “to disagree with.” She differed with me about the wording of the agreement. My approach to the problem differed from hers. disinterested, uninterested Disinterested means “impartial, objective”; uninterested means “not interested.” We sought the advice of a disinterested counselor to help us solve our problem. Mark was uninterested in anyone’s opinion but his own. don’t Don’t is the contraction for do not. I don’t want any. Don’t should not be used as the contraction for does not, which is doesn’t. He doesn’t (not don’t) want any. due to Due to is an adjective phrase and should not be used as a preposition meaning “because of.” The trip was canceled because of (not due to) lack of interest. Due to is acceptable as a subject complement and usually follows a form of the verb be. His success was due to hard work. each Each is singular. (See 21e and 22a.) effect See affect, effect. e.g. In formal writing, replace the Latin abbreviation e.g. with its English equivalent: for example or for instance. either Either is singular. (See 21e and 22a.) For either . . . or constructions, see 21d and 22d.

Glossary of Usage

usage

elicit, illicit Elicit is a verb meaning “to bring out” or “to evoke.” Illicit is an adjective meaning “unlawful.” The reporter was unable to elicit any information from the police about illicit drug traffic. emigrate from, immigrate to Emigrate means “to leave one country or region to settle in another.” In 1903, my great-grandfather emigrated from Russia to escape the religious pogroms. Immigrate means “to enter another country and reside there.” More than fifty thousand Bosnians immigrated to the United States in the 1990s. eminent, imminent Eminent means “outstanding” or “distinguished.” We met an eminent professor of Greek history. Imminent means “about to happen.” The snowstorm is imminent. enthused Many people object to the use of enthused as an adjective. Use enthusiastic instead. The children were enthusiastic (not enthused) about going to the circus. etc. Avoid ending a list with etc. It is more emphatic to end with an example, and in most contexts readers will understand that the list is not exhaustive. When you don’t wish to end with an example, and so on is more graceful than etc. (See also and etc.) eventually, ultimately Often used interchangeably, eventually is the better choice to mean “at an unspecified time in the future,” and ultimately is better to mean “the furthest possible extent or greatest extreme.” He knew that eventually he would complete his degree. The existentialists considered suicide the ultimately rational act. everybody, everyone Everybody and everyone are singular. (See 21e and 22a.) everyone, every one Everyone is an indefinite pronoun. Every one, the pronoun one preceded by the adjective every, means “each individual or thing in a particular group.” Every one is usually followed by of. Everyone wanted to go. Every one of the missing books was found. except See accept, except. expect Avoid the informal use of expect meaning “to believe, think, or suppose.” I think (not expect) it will rain tonight. explicit, implicit Explicit means “expressed directly” or “clearly defined”; implicit means “implied, unstated.” I gave him explicit instructions not to go swimming. My mother’s silence indicated her implicit approval. farther, further Farther usually describes distances. Further usually suggests quantity or degree. Chicago is farther from Miami than I thought. I would be grateful for further suggestions.

795

796

usage

Glossary of Usage

fewer, less Use fewer for items that can be counted; use less for items that cannot be counted. Fewer people are living in the city. Please put less sugar in my tea. finalize Finalize is jargon meaning “to make final or complete.” Use ordinary English instead. The architect prepared final drawings (not finalized the drawings). firstly Firstly sounds pretentious, and it leads to the ungainly series firstly, secondly, thirdly, and so on. Write first, second, third instead. further See farther, further. get Get has many colloquial uses. In writing, avoid using get to mean the following: “to evoke an emotional response” (That music always gets to me); “to annoy” (After a while his sulking got to me); “to take revenge on” (I got back at her by leaving the room); “to become” (He got sick); “to start or begin” (Let’s get going). Avoid using have got to in place of must. I must (not have got to) finish this paper tonight. good, well Good is an adjective, well an adverb. (See 26c.) He hasn’t felt good about his game since he sprained his wrist last season. She performed well on the uneven parallel bars. graduate Both of the following uses of graduate are standard: My sister was graduated from UCLA last year. My sister graduated from UCLA last year. It is nonstandard, however, to drop the word from: My sister graduated UCLA last year. Though this usage is common in informal English, many readers object to it. grow Phrases such as to grow the economy and to grow a business are jargon. Usually the verb grow is intransitive (it does not take a direct object). Our business has grown very quickly. Use grow in a transitive sense, with a direct object, to mean “to cultivate” or “to allow to grow.” We plan to grow tomatoes this year. John is growing a beard. hanged, hung Hanged is the past-tense and past-participle form of the verb hang meaning “to execute.” The prisoner was hanged at dawn. Hung is the past-tense and past-participle form of the verb hang meaning “to fasten or suspend.” The stockings were hung by the chimney with care. hardly Avoid expressions such as can’t hardly and not hardly, which are considered double negatives. I can (not can’t) hardly describe my surprise at getting the job. (See 26e.) has got, have got Got is unnecessary and awkward in such constructions. It should be dropped. We have (not have got) three days to prepare for the opening.

Glossary of Usage

usage

he At one time he was commonly used to mean “he or she.” Today such usage is inappropriate. (See 17f and 22a.) he/she, his/her In formal writing, use he or she or his or her. For alternatives to these wordy constructions, see 17f and 22a. hisself Hisself is nonstandard. Use himself. hopefully Hopefully means “in a hopeful manner.” We looked hopefully to the future. Some usage experts object to the use of hopefully as a sentence adverb, apparently on grounds of clarity. To be safe, avoid using hopefully in sentences such as the following: Hopefully, your son will recover soon. Instead, indicate who is doing the hoping: I hope that your son will recover soon. however In the past, some writers objected to the conjunctive adverb however at the beginning of a sentence, but current experts allow placing the word according to the intended meaning and emphasis. All of the following sentences are correct. Pam decided, however, to attend Harvard. However, Pam decided to attend Harvard. (She had been considering other schools.) Pam, however, decided to attend Harvard. (Unlike someone else, Pam opted for Harvard.) (See 32f.) hung See hanged, hung. i.e. In formal writing, replace the Latin abbreviation i.e. with its English equivalent: that is. if, whether Use if to express a condition and whether to express alternatives. If you go on a trip, whether to Nebraska or Italy, remember to bring traveler’s checks. illusion See allusion, illusion. immigrate See emigrate from, immigrate to. imminent See eminent, imminent. immoral See amoral, immoral. implement Implement is a pretentious way of saying “do,” “carry out,” or “accomplish.” Use ordinary language instead. We carried out (not implemented) the director’s orders. imply, infer Imply means “to suggest or state indirectly”; infer means “to draw a conclusion.” John implied that he knew all about computers, but the interviewer inferred that John was inexperienced. in, into In indicates location or condition; into indicates movement or a change in condition. They found the lost letters in a box after moving into the house.

797

798

usage

Glossary of Usage

in regards to In regards to confuses two different phrases: in regard to and as regards. Use one or the other. In regard to (or As regards) the contract, ignore the first clause. irregardless Irregardless is nonstandard. Use regardless. is when, is where These mixed constructions are often incorrectly used in definitions. A run-off election is a second election held to break a tie (not is when a second election is held to break a tie). (See 11c.) its, it’s Its is a possessive pronoun; it’s is a contraction for it is. (See 36c and 36e.) It’s always fun to watch a dog chase its tail. kind(s) Kind is singular and should be treated as such. Don’t write These kind of chairs are rare. Write instead This kind of chair is rare. Kinds is plural and should be used only when you mean more than one kind. These kinds of chairs are rare. kind of, sort of Avoid using kind of or sort of to mean “somewhat.” The movie was somewhat (not sort of ) boring. Do not put a after either phrase. That kind of (not kind of a) salesclerk annoys me. lay, lie See lie, lay. lead, led Lead is a metallic element; it is a noun. Led is the past tense of the verb lead. He led me to the treasure. learn, teach Learn means “to gain knowledge”; teach means “to impart knowledge.” I must teach (not learn) my sister to read. leave, let Leave means “to exit.” Avoid using it with the nonstandard meaning “to permit.” Let (not Leave) me help you with the dishes. less See fewer, less. let, leave See leave, let. liable Liable means “obligated” or “responsible.” Do not use it to mean “likely.” You’re likely (not liable) to trip if you don’t tie your shoelaces. lie, lay Lie is an intransitive verb meaning “to recline or rest on a surface.” Its principal parts are lie, lay, lain. Lay is a transitive verb meaning “to put or place.” Its principal parts are lay, laid, laid. (See 27b.) like, as Like is a preposition, not a subordinating conjunction. It can be followed only by a noun or a noun phrase. As is a subordinating conjunction that introduces a subordinate clause. In casual speech, you may say She looks like she hasn’t slept or You don’t know her like I do. But in formal writing, use as. She looks as if she hasn’t slept. You don’t know her as I do. (See also 61f and 61g.) loose, lose Loose is an adjective meaning “not securely fastened.” Lose is a verb meaning “to misplace” or “to not win.” Did you lose your only loose pair of work pants?

Glossary of Usage

usage

lots, lots of Lots and lots of are informal substitutes for many, much, or a lot. Avoid using them in formal writing. mankind Avoid mankind whenever possible. It offends many readers because it excludes women. Use humanity, humans, the human race, or humankind instead. (See 17f.) may See can, may. maybe, may be Maybe is an adverb meaning “possibly.” May be is a verb phrase. Maybe the sun will shine tomorrow. Tomorrow may be brighter. may of, might of May of and might of are nonstandard for may have and might have. We might have (not might of ) had too many cookies. media, medium Media is the plural of medium. Of all the media that cover the Olympics, television is the medium that best captures the spectacle of the events. most Most is informal when used to mean “almost” and should be avoided. Almost (not Most) everyone went to the parade. must of See may of. myself Myself is a reflexive or intensive pronoun. Reflexive: I cut myself. Intensive: I will drive you myself. Do not use myself in place of I or me. He gave the flowers to Melinda and me (not myself ). (See also 24b.) neither Neither is singular. (See 21e and 22a.) For neither . . . nor constructions, see 21d and 22d. none None may be singular or plural. (See 21e.) nowheres Nowheres is nonstandard. Use nowhere instead. number See amount, number. of Use the verb have, not the preposition of, after the verbs could, should, would, may, might, and must. They must have (not must of ) left early. off of Off is sufficient. Omit of. The ball rolled off (not off of ) the table. OK, O.K., okay All three spellings are acceptable, but avoid these expressions in formal speech and writing. parameters Parameter is a mathematical term that has become jargon for “fixed limit,” “boundary,” or “guideline.” Use ordinary English instead. The task force worked within certain guidelines (not parameters). passed, past Passed is the past tense of the verb pass. Ann passed me another slice of cake. Past usually means “belonging to a former

799

800

usage

Glossary of Usage

time” or “beyond a time or place.” Our past president spoke until past midnight. The hotel is just past the next intersection. percent, per cent, percentage Percent (also spelled per cent) is always used with a specific number. Percentage is used with a descriptive term such as large or small, not with a specific number. The candidate won 80 percent of the primary vote. A large percentage of registered voters turned out for the election. phenomena Phenomena is the plural of phenomenon, which means “an observable occurrence or fact.” Strange phenomena occur at all hours of the night in that house, but last night’s phenomenon was the strangest of all. plus Plus should not be used to join independent clauses. This raincoat is dirty; moreover (not plus), it has a hole in it. precede, proceed Precede means “to come before.” Proceed means “to go forward.” As we proceeded up the mountain path, we noticed fresh tracks in the mud, evidence that a group of hikers had preceded us. principal, principle Principal is a noun meaning “the head of a school or an organization” or “a sum of money.” It is also an adjective meaning “most important.” Principle is a noun meaning “a basic truth or law.” The principal expelled her for three principal reasons. We believe in the principle of equal justice for all. proceed, precede See precede, proceed. quote, quotation Quote is a verb; quotation is a noun. Avoid using quote as a shortened form of quotation. Her quotations (not quotes) from current movies intrigued us. raise, rise Raise is a transitive verb meaning “to move or cause to move upward.” It takes a direct object. I raised the shades. Rise is an intransitive verb meaning “to go up.” Heat rises. real, really Real is an adjective; really is an adverb. Real is sometimes used informally as an adverb, but avoid this use in formal writing. She was really (not real ) angry. (See 26b.) reason . . . is because Use that instead of because. The reason she’s cranky is that (not because) she didn’t sleep last night. (See 11c.) reason why The expression reason why is redundant. The reason (not The reason why) Jones lost the election is clear. relation, relationship Relation describes a connection between things. Relationship describes a connection between people. There is a relation between poverty and infant mortality. Our business relationship has cooled over the years.

Glossary of Usage

usage

respectfully, respectively Respectfully means “showing or marked by respect.” Respectively means “each in the order given.” He respectfully submitted his opinion to the judge. John, Tom, and Larry were a butcher, a baker, and a lawyer, respectively. sensual, sensuous Sensual means “gratifying the physical senses,” especially those associated with sexual pleasure. Sensuous means “pleasing to the senses,” especially those involved in the experience of art, music, and nature. The sensuous music and balmy air led the dancers to more sensual movements. set, sit Set is a transitive verb meaning “to put” or “to place.” Its past tense is set. Sit is an intransitive verb meaning “to be seated.” Its past tense is sat. She set the dough in a warm corner of the kitchen. The cat sat in the doorway. shall, will Shall was once used in place of the helping verb will with I or we: I shall, we shall. Today, however, will is generally accepted even when the subject is I or we. The word shall occurs primarily in polite questions (Shall I find you a pillow?) and in legalistic sentences suggesting duty or obligation (The applicant shall file form A by December 31). should of Should of is nonstandard for should have. They should have (not should of ) been home an hour ago. since Do not use since to mean “because” if there is any chance of ambiguity. Because (not Since) we won the game, we have been celebrating with a pitcher of root beer. Since here could mean “because” or “from the time that.” sit See set, sit. site See cite, site. somebody, someone Somebody and someone are singular. (See 21e and 22a.) something Something is singular. (See 21e.) sometime, some time, sometimes Sometime is an adverb meaning “at an indefinite or unstated time.” Some time is the adjective some modifying the noun time and means “a period of time.” Sometimes is an adverb meaning “at times, now and then.” I’ll see you sometime soon. I haven’t lived there for some time. Sometimes I see him at the library. suppose to Write supposed to. sure and Write sure to. We were all taught to be sure to (not sure and) look both ways before crossing a street. take See bring, take.

801

802

usage

Glossary of Usage

than, then Than is a conjunction used in comparisons; then is an adverb denoting time. That pizza is more than I can eat. Tom laughed, and then we recognized him. that See who, which, that. that, which Many writers reserve that for restrictive clauses, which for nonrestrictive clauses. (See 32e.) theirselves Theirselves is nonstandard for themselves. The crash victims pushed the car out of the way themselves (not theirselves). them The use of them in place of those is nonstandard. Please take those (not them) flowers to the patient in room 220. then, than See than, then. there, their, they’re There is an adverb specifying place; it is also an expletive (placeholder). Adverb: Sylvia is lying there unconscious. Expletive: There are two plums left. Their is a possessive pronoun. Fred and Jane finally washed their car. They’re is a contraction of they are. They’re later than usual today. they The use of they to indicate possession is nonstandard. Use their instead. Cindy and Sam decided to sell their (not they) 1975 Corvette. this kind See kind(s). to, too, two To is a preposition; too is an adverb; two is a number. Too many of your shots slice to the left, but the last two were just right. toward, towards Toward and towards are generally interchangeable, although toward is preferred in American English. try and Try and is nonstandard for try to. The teacher asked us all to try to (not try and) write an original haiku. ultimately, eventually See eventually, ultimately. unique Avoid expressions such as most unique, more straight, less perfect, very round. Either something is unique or it isn’t. It is illogical to suggest degrees of uniqueness. (See 26d.) usage The noun usage should not be substituted for use when the meaning is “employment of.” The use (not usage) of insulated shades has cut fuel costs dramatically. use to Write used to. utilize Utilize means “to make use of.” It often sounds pretentious; in most cases, use is sufficient. I used (not utilized ) the laser printer. wait for, wait on Wait for means “to be in readiness for” or “to await.” Wait on means “to serve.” We’re only waiting for (not waiting on) Ruth to take us to the museum.

Glossary of Usage

usage

ways Ways is colloquial when used to mean “distance.” The city is a long way (not ways) from here. weather, whether The noun weather refers to the state of the atmosphere. Whether is a conjunction referring to a choice between alternatives. We wondered whether the weather would clear. well, good See good, well. where Do not use where in place of that. I heard that (not where) the crime rate is increasing. which See that, which and who, which, that. while Avoid using while to mean “although” or “whereas” if there is any chance of ambiguity. Although (not While) Gloria lost money in the slot machine, Tom won it at roulette. Here While could mean either “although” or “at the same time that.” who, which, that Do not use which to refer to persons. Use who instead. That, though generally used to refer to things, may be used to refer to a group or class of people. The player who (not that or which) made the basket at the buzzer was named MVP. The team that scores the most points in this game will win the tournament. who, whom Who is used for subjects and subject complements; whom is used for objects. (See 25.) who’s, whose Who’s is a contraction of who is; whose is a possessive pronoun. Who’s ready for more popcorn? Whose coat is this? (See 36c and 36e.) will See shall, will. would of Would of is nonstandard for would have. She would have (not would of ) had a chance to play if she had arrived on time. you In formal writing, avoid you in an indefinite sense meaning “anyone.” (See 23d.) Any spectator (not You) could tell by the way John caught the ball that his throw would be too late. your, you’re Your is a possessive pronoun; you’re is a contraction of you are. Is that your new bike? You’re in the finals. (See 36c and 36e.)

803

Answers to Tutorials and Lettered Exercises Tutorial 1, page xxviii 1. 2. 3. 4.

A verb has to agree with its subject. (21) Avoid sentence fragments. (19) It’s important to use apostrophes correctly. (36) If your sentence begins with a long introductory word group, use a comma to separate the word group from the rest of the sentence. (32b) 5. Watch out for dangling modifiers. (12e)

Tutorial 2, page xxviii 1. The index entry “each” mentions that the word is singular, so you might not need to look further to realize that the verb should be has, not have. The first page reference takes you to section 21, which explains in more detail why has is correct. The index entry “has vs. have” also leads you to section 21. 2. The index entry “lying vs. laying” takes you to section 27b, where you will learn that lying (meaning “reclining or resting on a surface”) is correct. 3. Look up “only” and you will be directed to section 12a, which explains that limiting modifiers such as only should be placed before the words they modify. The sentence should read We looked at only two houses before buying the house of our dreams. 4. Looking up “you, inappropriate use of” leads you to section 23d and the Glossary of Usage, which explain that you should not be used to mean “anyone in general.” You can revise the sentence by using a person or one instead of you, or you can restructure the sentence completely: In Saudi Arabia, accepting a gift is considered ill mannered. 5. The index entries “I vs. me” and “me vs. I” take you to section 24, which explains why her sister and me is correct.

Tutorial 3, page xxix 1. Section 32c states that, although usage varies, most experts advise using a comma between all items in a series — to prevent possible misreadings or ambiguities. To find this section, you would probably use the menu system. 2. You and the student would consult section 29, on articles. This section is easy to locate in the menu system. 3. In the menu system, you will find “Writing MLA papers” and then section 52, “Integrating sources.” 4. You can send your interns to sections 21 and 27c, which you can find in the menu system if you know to look under “Subject-verb agreement” or “Standard English verb forms.” If you aren’t sure about the grammatical terminology, you can look in the index under “-s, as verb ending” or “Verbs, -s form of.” 5. The index entry “Tenses, verb” contains a subentry “present, in writing about literature.” This leads you to discussions about present tense and

804

Answers to tutorials and lettered exercises about how to avoid shifting tenses. The entry “Literature, writing about” contains an entry “shifts in tense, avoiding,” which directs you to how and why to avoid shifting tenses.

Tutorial 4, page xxx 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Changing attitudes toward alcohol have affected the beer industry. It is human nature to think wisely and act foolishly. Correct Our goal this year is to increase our profits by 9 percent. Most sleds are pulled by no fewer than two dogs and no more than ten.

Tutorial 5, page xxxi Alim, H. Samy. “360 Degreez of Black Art Comin at You: Sista Sonia Sanchez and the Dimensions of a Black Arts Continuum.” BMa: The Sonia Sanchez Literary Review 6.1 (2000): 15-33. Print. Chang, Jeff. Can’t Stop, Won’t Stop: A History of the Hip-Hop Generation. New York: St. Martin’s, 2005. Print. Davis, Kimberly. “The Roots Redefine Hip-Hop’s Past.” Ebony June 2003: 162-64. Expanded Academic ASAP. Web. 13 Apr. 2008. Randall, Kay. “Studying a Hip Hop Nation.” University of Texas at Austin. U of Texas at Austin, 9 Oct. 2008. Web. 13 Aug. 2009. Sugarhill Gang. “Rapper’s Delight.” Sugarhill Gang. DBK Works, 2008. CD.

Exercise 6–1, page 128 a. hasty generalization; b. false analogy; c. biased language; d. faulty cause-and-effect reasoning; e. either . . . or fallacy

Exercise 8–1, page 146 Possible revisions: a. The Prussians defeated the Saxons in 1745. b. Ahmed, the producer, manages the entire operation. c. The travel guides expertly paddled the sea kayaks. d. Emphatic and active; no change e. Protesters were shouting on the courthouse steps.

Exercise 9–1, page 150 Possible revisions: a. Police dogs are used for finding lost children, tracking criminals, and detecting bombs and illegal drugs. b. Hannah told her rock climbing partner that she bought a new harness and that she wanted to climb Otter Cliffs. c. It is more difficult to sustain an exercise program than to start one. d. During basic training, I was told not only what to do but also what to think. e. Jan wanted to drive to the wine country or at least to Sausalito.

805

806

Answers to tutorials and lettered exercises

Exercise 10–1, page 155 Possible revisions: a. A grapefruit or an orange is a good source of vitamin C. b. The women entering VMI can expect haircuts as short as those of the male cadets. c. Looking out the family room window, Sarah saw that her favorite tree, which she had climbed as a child, was gone. d. The graphic designers are interested in and knowledgeable about producing posters for the balloon race. e. Reefs are home to more species than any other ecosystem in the sea.

Exercise 11–1, page 159 Possible revisions: a. Using surgical gloves is a precaution now taken by dentists to prevent contact with patients’ blood and saliva. b. A career in medicine, which my brother is pursuing, requires at least ten years of challenging work. c. The pharaohs had bad teeth because tiny particles of sand found their way into Egyptian bread. d. Recurring bouts of flu caused the team to forfeit a record number of games. e. This box contains the key to your future.

Exercise 12–1, page 164 Possible revisions: a. More research is needed to evaluate effectively the risks posed by volcanoes in the Pacific Northwest. b. Many students graduate from college with debt totaling more than fifty thousand dollars. c. It is a myth that humans use only 10 percent of their brains. d. A coolhunter is a person who can find the next wave of fashion in the unnoticed corners of modern society. e. Not all geese fly beyond Narragansett for the winter.

Exercise 12–2, page 168 Possible revisions: a. Though Martha was only sixteen, UCLA accepted her application. b. To replace the gear mechanism, you can use the attached form to order the part by mail. c. As I settled in the cockpit, the pounding of the engine was muffled only slightly by my helmet. d. After studying polymer chemistry, Phuong found computer games less complex. e. When I was a young man, my mother enrolled me in tap dance classes.

Exercise 13–3, page 175 Possible revisions: a. An incredibly talented musician, Ray Charles mastered R&B, soul, and gospel styles. He even performed country music well.

Answers to tutorials and lettered exercises b. c. d. e.

Environmentalists point out that shrimp farming in Southeast Asia is polluting water and making farmlands useless. They warn that governments must act before it is too late. We observed the samples for five days before we detected any growth. Or The samples were observed for five days before any growth was detected. In his famous soliloquy, Hamlet contemplates whether death would be preferable to his difficult life and, if so, whether he is capable of committing suicide. The lawyer told the judge that Miranda Hale was innocent and asked that she be allowed to prove the allegations false. Or The lawyer told the judge, “Miranda Hale is innocent. Please allow her to prove the allegations false.”

Exercise 13–4, page 175 Possible revisions: a. Courtroom lawyers have more than a touch of theater in their blood. b. The interviewer asked if we had brought our proof of citizenship and our passports. c. Reconnaissance scouts often have to make fast decisions and use sophisticated equipment to keep their teams from being detected. d. After the animators finish their scenes, the production designer arranges the clips according to the storyboard and makes synchronization notes for the sound editor and the composer. e. Madame Defarge is a sinister figure in Dickens’s A Tale of Two Cities. On a symbolic level, she represents fate; like the Greek Fates, she knits the fabric of individual destiny.

Exercise 14–1, page 181 Possible revisions: a. Williams played for the Boston Red Sox from 1936 to 1960, and he managed the Washington Senators and Texas Rangers for several years after retiring as a player. b. In 1941, Williams finished the season with a batting average of .406; no player has hit over .400 for a season since then. c. Although he acknowledged that Joe DiMaggio was a better all-around player, Williams felt that he was a better hitter than DiMaggio. d. Williams was a stubborn man; for example, he always refused to tip his cap to the crowd after a home run because he claimed that fans were fickle. e. Williams’s relationship with the media was unfriendly at best; he sarcastically called baseball writers the “knights of the keyboard” in his memoir.

Exercise 14–2, page 183 Possible revisions: a. The X-Men comic books and Japanese woodcuts of kabuki dancers, all part of Marlena’s research project on popular culture, covered the tabletop and the chairs. b. Our waitress, costumed in a kimono, had painted her face white and arranged her hair in a lacquered beehive.

807

808

Answers to tutorials and lettered exercises c. d. e.

Students can apply for a spot in the leadership program, which teaches thinking and communication skills. Shore houses were flooded up to the first floor, beaches were washed away, and Brant’s Lighthouse was swallowed by the sea. Laura Thackray, an engineer at Volvo Car Corporation, addressed women’s needs by designing a pregnant crash-test dummy.

Exercise 14–3, page 185 Possible revisions: a. These particles, known as “stealth liposomes,” can hide in the body for a long time without detection. b. Irena, a competitive gymnast majoring in biochemistry, intends to apply her athletic experience and her science degree to a career in sports medicine. c. Because students, textile workers, and labor unions have loudly protested sweatshop abuses, apparel makers have been forced to examine their labor practices. d. Developed in a European university, IRC (Internet relay chat) was created as a way for a group of graduate students to talk about projects from their dorm rooms. e. The cafeteria’s new menu, which has an international flavor, includes everything from enchiladas and pizza to pad thai and sauerbraten.

Exercise 14–4, page 188 Possible revisions: a. Working as an aide for the relief agency, Gina distributed food and medical supplies. b. Janbir, who spent every Saturday learning tabla drumming, noticed with each hour of practice that his memory for complex patterns was growing stronger. c. When the rotor hit, it gouged a hole about an eighth of an inch deep in my helmet. d. My grandfather, who was born eighty years ago in Puerto Rico, raised his daughters the old-fashioned way. e. By reversing the depressive effect of the drug, the Narcan saved the patient’s life.

Exercise 15–1, page 195 Possible revisions: a. Across the hall from the fossils exhibit are the exhibits for insects and spiders. b. After growing up desperately poor in Japan, Sayuri becomes a successful geisha. c. What caused Mount St. Helens to erupt? Researchers believe that a series of earthquakes in the area was a contributing factor. d. Ice cream typically contains 10 percent milk fat, but premium ice cream may contain up to 16 percent milk fat and has considerably less air in the product. e. If home values climb, the economy may recover more quickly than expected.


Exercise 16–1, page 202 Possible revisions: a. Martin Luther King Jr. set a high standard for future leaders. b. Alice has loved cooking since she could first peek over a kitchen tabletop. c. Bloom’s race for the governorship is futile. d. A successful graphic designer must have technical knowledge and an eye for color and balance. e. You will deliver mail to all employees.

Exercise 17–1, page 206 Possible revisions: a. When I was young, my family was poor. b. This conference will help me serve my clients better. c. The meteorologist warned the public about the possible dangers of the coming storm. d. Government studies show a need for after-school programs. e. Passengers should try to complete the customs declaration form before leaving the plane.

Exercise 17–4, page 214 Possible revisions: a. Dr. Geralyn Farmer is the chief surgeon at University Hospital. Dr. Paul Green is her assistant. b. All applicants want to know how much they will earn. c. Elementary school teachers should understand the concept of nurturing if they intend to be effective. d. Obstetricians need to be available to their patients at all hours. e. If we do not stop polluting our environment, we will perish.

Exercise 18–2, page 219 Possible revisions: a. We regret this delay; thank you for your patience. b. Ada’s plan is to acquire education and experience to prepare herself for a position as property manager. c. Tiger Woods, the ultimate competitor, has earned millions of dollars just in endorsements. d. Many people take for granted that public libraries have up-to-date computer systems. e. The effect of Gao Xinjian’s novels on Chinese exiles is hard to gauge.

Exercise 18–3, page 220 Possible revisions: a. Queen Anne was so angry with Sarah Churchill that she refused to see her again. b. Correct c. The parade moved off the street and onto the beach. d. The frightened refugees intend to make the dangerous trek across the mountains. e. What type of wedding are you planning?

809

810


Exercise 18–4, page 223 Possible revisions: a. John stormed into the room like a hurricane. b. Some people insist that they’ll always be available to help, even when they haven’t been before. c. The Cubs easily beat the Mets, who were in trouble early in the game today at Wrigley Field. d. We worked out the problems in our relationship. e. My mother accused me of evading her questions when in fact I was just saying the first thing that came to mind.

Exercise 19–1, page 233 Possible revisions: a. Listening to the CD her sister had sent, Mia was overcome with a mix of emotions: happiness, homesickness, nostalgia. b. Cortés and his soldiers were astonished when they looked down from the mountains and saw Tenochtitlán, the magnificent capital of the Aztecs. c. Although my spoken Spanish is not very good, I can read the language with ease. d. There are several reasons for not eating meat. One reason is that dangerous chemicals are used throughout the various stages of meat production. e. To learn how to sculpt beauty from everyday life is my intention in studying art and archaeology.

Exercise 20–1, page 241 Possible revisions: a. The city had one public swimming pool that stayed packed with children all summer long. b. The building is being renovated, so at times we have no heat, water, or electricity. c. The view was not what the travel agent had described. Where were the rolling hills and the shimmering rivers? d. All those gnarled equations looked like toxic insects; maybe I was going to have to rethink my major. e. City officials had good reason to fear a major earthquake: Most [or most] of the business district was built on landfill.

Exercise 20–2, page 242 Possible revisions: a. Wind power for the home is a supplementary source of energy that can be combined with electricity, gas, or solar energy. b. Correct c. In the Middle Ages, when the streets of London were dangerous places, it was safer to travel by boat along the Thames. d. “He’s not drunk,” I said. “He’s in a state of diabetic shock.” e. Are you able to endure extreme angle turns, high speeds, frequent jumps, and occasional crashes? Then supermoto racing may be a sport for you.


Exercise 21–2, page 255 a. b. c. d. e.

One of the main reasons for elephant poaching is the profits received from selling the ivory tusks. Correct A number of students in the seminar were aware of the importance of joining the discussion. Batik cloth from Bali, blue and white ceramics from Delft, and a bocce ball from Turin have made Angelie’s room the talk of the dorm. Correct

Exercise 22–1, page 261 Possible revisions: a. Every presidential candidate must appeal to a wide variety of ethnic and social groups to win the election. b. David lent his motorcycle to someone who allowed a friend to use it. c. The aerobics teacher motioned for all the students to move their arms in wide, slow circles. d. Correct e. Applicants should be bilingual if they want to qualify for this position.

Exercise 23–1, page 266 Possible revisions: a. Some professors say that engineering students should have hands-on experience with dismantling and reassembling machines. b. Because she had decorated her living room with posters from chamber music festivals, her date thought that she was interested in classical music. Actually she preferred rock. c. In my high school, students didn’t need to get all A’s to be considered a success; they just needed to work to their ability. d. Marianne told Jenny, “I am worried about your mother’s illness.” [or “. . . about my mother’s illness.”] e. Though Lewis cried for several minutes after scraping his knee, eventually his crying subsided.


Correct [But the writer could change the end of the sentence: . . . than he is.] Correct [But the writer could change the end of the sentence: . . . that she was the coach.] She appreciated his telling the truth in such a difficult situation. The director has asked you and me to draft a proposal for a new recycling plan. Five close friends and I rented a station wagon, packed it with food, and drove two hundred miles to Mardi Gras.

Exercise 25–1, page 279 a. b. c.

The roundtable featured scholars whom I had never heard of. [or . . . scholars I had never heard of.] Correct Correct

811

812

Answers to tutorials and lettered exercises d. e.

Daniel always gives a holiday donation to whoever needs it. So many singers came to the audition that Natalia had trouble deciding whom to select for the choir.

Exercise 26–1, page 286 Possible revisions: a. Did you do well on last week’s chemistry exam? b. With the budget deadline approaching, our office has hardly had time to handle routine correspondence. c. Correct d. The customer complained that he hadn’t been treated nicely. e. Of all my relatives, Uncle Roberto is the cleverest.


When I get the urge to exercise, I lie down until it passes. Grandmother had driven our new hybrid to the sunrise church service on Savage Mountain, so we were left with the station wagon. A pile of dirty rags was lying at the bottom of the stairs. How did the computer know that the gamer had gone from the room with the blue ogre to the hall where the gold was heaped? Abraham Lincoln took good care of his legal clients; the contracts he drew for the Illinois Central Railroad could never be broken.


The glass sculptures of the Swan Boats were prominent in the brightly lit lobby. Visitors to the glass museum were not supposed to touch the exhibits. Our church has all the latest technology, even a closed-circuit television. Christos didn’t know about Marlo’s promotion because he never listens. He is [or He’s] always talking. Correct

Exercise 27–3, page 307 Possible revisions: a. Correct b. Watson and Crick discovered the mechanism that controls inheritance in all life: the workings of the DNA molecule. c. When city planners proposed rezoning the waterfront, did they know that the mayor had promised to curb development in that neighborhood? d. Correct e. Correct


In the past, tobacco companies denied any connection between smoking and health problems. There is nothing in the world that TV has not touched on. I want to register for a summer tutoring session. By the end of the year, the state will have tested 139 birds for avian flu. The benefits of eating fruits and vegetables have been promoted by health care providers.



A major league pitcher can throw a baseball more than ninety-five miles per hour. The writing center tutor will help you revise your essay. A reptile must adjust its body temperature to its environment. Correct My uncle, a cartoonist, could sketch a face in less than two minutes.

Exercise 28–3, page 323 Possible revisions: a. The electrician might have discovered the broken circuit if she had gone through the modules one at a time. b. If Verena wins a scholarship, she will go to graduate school. c. Whenever there is a fire in our neighborhood, everybody comes out to watch. d. Sarah will take the paralegal job unless she gets a better offer. e. If I lived in Budapest with my cousin Szusza, she would teach me Hungarian cooking.


I enjoy riding my motorcycle. The tutor told Samantha to come to the writing center. The team hopes to work hard and win the championship. Ricardo and his brothers miss surfing during the winter. The babysitter let Roger stay up until midnight.


Doing volunteer work often brings satisfaction. As I looked out the window of the plane, I could see Cape Cod. Melina likes to drink her coffee with lots of cream. Correct I completed my homework assignment quickly. Or I completed the homework assignment quickly.


There are some cartons of ice cream in the freezer. I don’t use the subway because I am afraid. The prime minister is the most popular leader in my country. We tried to get in touch with the same manager whom we spoke to earlier. Recently there have been a number of earthquakes in Turkey.

Exercise 30–2, page 343 Possible revisions: a. Although freshwater freezes at 32 degrees Fahrenheit, ocean water freezes at 28 degrees Fahrenheit. b. Because we switched cable packages, our channel lineup has changed. c. The competitor confidently mounted his skateboard. d. My sister performs the legong, a Balinese dance, well. e. Correct

813

814



Listening to everyone’s complaints all day was irritating. The long flight to Singapore was exhausting. Correct After a great deal of research, the scientist made a fascinating discovery. That blackout was one of the most frightening experiences I’ve ever had.


an attractive young Vietnamese woman a dedicated Catholic priest her old blue wool sweater Joe’s delicious Scandinavian bread many beautiful antique jewelry boxes


Whenever we eat at the Centerville Café, we sit at a small table in the corner of the room. Correct On Thursday, Nancy will attend her first home repair class at the community center. Correct We decided to go to a restaurant because there was no fresh food in the refrigerator.


Alisa brought the injured bird home and fashioned a splint out of Popsicle sticks for its wing. Considered a classic of early animation, The Adventures of Prince Achmed used hand-cut silhouettes against colored backgrounds. If you complete the enclosed evaluation form and return it within two weeks, you will receive a free breakfast during your next stay. Correct Roger had always wanted a handmade violin, but he couldn’t afford one.


J. R. R. Tolkien finished writing his draft of The Lord of the Rings trilogy in 1949, but the first book in the series wasn’t published until 1954. In the first two minutes of its ascent, the space shuttle had broken the sound barrier and reached a height of over twenty-five miles. German shepherds can be gentle guide dogs, or they can be fierce attack dogs. Some former professional cyclists claim that the use of performanceenhancing drugs is widespread in cycling, and they argue that no rider can be competitive without doping. As an intern, I learned most aspects of the broadcasting industry, but I never learned about fundraising.

Exercise 32–3, page 360 a.

The cold, impersonal atmosphere of the university was unbearable.


An ambulance threaded its way through police cars, fire trucks, and irate citizens. Correct After two broken arms, three cracked ribs, and one concussion, Ken quit the varsity football team. Correct


NASA’s rovers on Mars are equipped with special cameras that can take close-up, high-resolution pictures of the terrain. Correct Correct Love, vengeance, greed, and betrayal are common themes in Western literature. Many experts believe that shark attacks on surfers are a result of the sharks’ mistaking surfboards for small injured seals.


Choreographer Alvin Ailey’s best-known work, Revelations, is more than just a crowd-pleaser. Correct Correct A member of an organization that provides job training for teens was also appointed to the education commission. Brian Eno, who began his career as a rock musician, turned to meditative compositions in the late seventies.


Cricket, which originated in England, is also popular in Australia, South Africa, and India. At the sound of the starting pistol, the horses surged forward toward the first obstacle, a sharp incline three feet high. After seeing an exhibition of Western art, Gerhard Richter escaped from East Berlin and smuggled out many of his notebooks. Corrie’s new wet suit has an intricate blue pattern. The cookies will keep for two weeks in sturdy, airtight containers.


On January 15, 2008, our office moved to 29 Commonwealth Avenue, Mechanicsville, VA 23111. Correct Ms. Carlson, you are a valued customer whose satisfaction is very important to us. Mr. Mundy was born on July 22, 1939, in Arkansas, where his family had lived for four generations. Correct

Exercise 33–1, page 377 a. b.

Correct Tricia’s first artwork was a bright blue clay dolphin.

815

816

Answers to tutorials and lettered exercises c. d. e.

Some modern musicians (trumpeter John Hassell is an example) blend several cultural traditions into a unique sound. Myra liked hot, spicy foods such as chili, kung pao chicken, and buffalo wings. On the display screen was a soothing pattern of light and shadow.


Do not ask me to be kind; just ask me to act as though I were. When men talk about defense, they always claim to be protecting women and children, but they never ask the women and children what they think. When I get a little money, I buy books; if any is left, I buy food and clothes. Correct Wit has truth in it; wisecracking is simply calisthenics with words.


Strong black coffee will not sober you up; the truth is that time is the only way to get alcohol out of your system. Margaret was not surprised to see hail and vivid lightning; conditions had been right for violent weather all day. There is often a fine line between right and wrong, good and bad, truth and deception. Correct Severe, unremitting pain is a ravaging force, especially when the patient tries to hide it from others.


Correct [Either It or it is correct.] If we have come to fight, we are far too few; if we have come to die, we are far too many. The travel package includes a round-trip ticket to Athens, a cruise through the Cyclades, and all hotel accommodations. The news article portrays the land use proposal as reckless, although 62 percent of the town’s residents support it. Psychologists Kindlon and Thompson (2000) offer parents a simple starting point for raising male children: “Teach boys that there are many ways to be a man” (p. 256).


Correct The innovative shoe fastener was inspired by the designer’s young son. Each day’s menu features a different European country’s dish. Sue worked overtime to increase her family’s earnings. Ms. Jacobs is unwilling to listen to students’ complaints about computer failures.

Exercise 37–1, page 398 a.

As for the advertisement “Sailors have more fun,” if you consider chipping paint and swabbing decks fun, then you will have plenty of it.


Correct After winning the lottery, Juanita said that she would give half the money to charity. After the movie, Vicki said, “The reviewer called this flick ‘trash of the first order.’ I guess you can’t believe everything you read.” Correct


A client has left his or her [or a] cell phone in our conference room. The films we made of Kilauea on our trip to Hawaii Volcanoes National Park illustrate a typical spatter cone eruption. Correct Correct Of three engineering fields — chemical, mechanical, and materials — Keegan chose materials engineering for its application to toy manufacturing.


Correct Some combat soldiers are trained by government diplomats to be sensitive to issues of culture, history, and religion. Correct How many pounds have you lost since you began running four miles a day? Denzil spent all night studying for his psychology exam.


The carpenters located three maple timbers, twenty-one sheets of cherry, and ten oblongs of polished ebony for the theater set. Correct Correct Eight students in the class had been labeled “learning disabled.” The Vietnam Veterans Memorial in Washington, DC, had 58,132 names inscribed on it when it was dedicated in 1982.


Howard Hughes commissioned the Spruce Goose, a beautifully built but thoroughly impractical wooden aircraft. The old man screamed his anger, shouting to all of us, “I will not leave my money to you worthless layabouts!” I learned the Latin term ad infinitum from an old nursery rhyme about fleas: “Great fleas have little fleas upon their back to bite ’em, / Little fleas have lesser fleas and so on ad infinitum.” Correct Neve Campbell’s lifelong interest in ballet inspired her involvement in the film The Company, which portrays a season with the Joffrey Ballet.

Exercise 44–1, page 431 a. b. c.

Correct The swiftly moving tugboat pulled alongside the barge and directed it away from the oil spill in the harbor. Correct

817

818

Answers to tutorials and lettered exercises d. e.

Your dog is well known in our neighborhood. Roadblocks were set up along all the major highways leading out of the city.


Assistant Dean Shirin Ahmadi recommended offering more world language courses. Correct Kalindi has an ambitious semester, studying differential calculus, classical Hebrew, brochure design, and Greek literature. Lydia’s aunt and uncle make modular houses as beautiful as modernist works of art. We amused ourselves on the long flight by discussing how spring in Kyoto stacks up against summer in London.

Exercise 61–1, page 748 a. stage, confrontation, proportions; b. courage, mountain (noun/adjective), climber, inspiration, rescuers; c. need, guest, honor, fog; d. defense (noun/ adjective), attorney, appeal, jury; e. museum, women (noun/adjective), artists, 1987

Exercise 61–2, page 751 a. his; b. that, our (pronoun/adjective); c. that, he, himself, some, his (pronoun/adjective); d. I, my (pronoun/adjective), you, one; e. no one, her

Exercise 61–3, page 754 a. told; b. were, killed; c. brought down; d. Stay, ’ll [will] arrive; e. struggled, was trapped

Exercise 61–4, page 756 a. Adjectives: weak, unfocused; b. Adjectives: The (article), Spanish, flexible; adverb: wonderfully; c. Adjectives: The (article), fragrant, the (article) steady; adverb: especially; d. Adjectives: hot, cold; adverbs: rather, slightly, bitterly; e. Adjectives: The (article), its (pronoun/adjective), wicker (noun/ adjective); adverb: soundly

Exercise 62–1, page 766 a. Complete subjects: The hills and mountains, the snow atop them, simple subjects: hills, mountains, snow; b. Complete subject: points; simple subject: points; c. Complete subject: (You); d. Complete subject: hundreds of fireflies; simple subject: hundreds; e. Complete subject: The evidence against the defendant; simple subject: evidence

Exercise 62–2, page 770 a. Subject complement: expensive; b. Direct object: death; c. Direct object: their players’ efforts; d. Subject complement: the capital of the Russian Empire; e. Subject complement: bitter


Exercise 62–3, page 770 a. Direct objects: adults and children; object complement: weary; b. Direct object: community service; object complement: her priority; c. Direct object: the work; object complement: finished; d. Indirect objects: agent, us; direct objects: our tickets, boarding passes; e. Indirect object: students; direct object: healthy meal choices

Exercise 63–1, page 775 a. In northern Italy, as their first language (adverb phrases modifying speak); b. through the thick forest (adjective phrase modifying hike); with ease (adverb phrase modifying completed ); c. To my boss’s dismay (adverb phrase modifying was); for work (adverb phrase modifying late); d. of Mayan artifacts (adjective phrase modifying exhibit); into pre-Columbian culture (adjective phrase modifying insight); e. In 2002, in twelve European countries (adverb phrases modifying became)

Exercise 63–2, page 779 a. Updating your software (gerund phrase used as subject); b. decreasing the town budget (gerund phrase used as object of the preposition in); identifying nonessential services (gerund phrase used as subject complement); c. to help her mother by raking the lawn (infinitive phrase used as direct object); raking the lawn (gerund phrase used as object of the preposition by); d. Understanding little (participial phrase modifying I); passing my biology final (gerund phrase used as object of the preposition of); e. Working with animals (gerund phrase used as subject)

Exercise 63–3, page 784 a. so that every vote would count (adverb clause modifying adjusted); b. that targets baby boomers (adjective clause modifying campaign); c. After the Tambora volcano erupted in the southern Pacific in 1815 (adverb clause modifying realized); that it would contribute to the “year without a summer” in Europe and North America (noun clause used as direct object of realized); d. that at a certain point there will be no more oil to extract from the earth (noun clause used as direct object of implies); e. when you are rushing (adverb clause modifying are overlooked)

Exercise 64–1, page 787 a. Complex; that are ignited in dry areas (adjective clause); b. Compound; c. Simple; d. Complex; Before we leave for the station (adverb clause); e. Compound-complex; when you want to leave (noun clause)

819

820

Acknowledgments

(continued from page iv) ACADEMIC ONEFILE screen shot. Results for Publication Search (JN “Literature-Film Quarterly”). Brief excerpt from “Tracking the Sounds of Franco Zeffirelli’s The Taming of the Shrew” (Critical essay) by David L. Kranz. Published in Literature-Film Quarterly 36.2 (April 2008): 94 (19). Copyright 2008 Salisbury State University. Copyright © Gale/Cengage Learning. Reproduced by permission. www.cengage.com/permissions. DILBERT: © Scott Adams/Dist. by United Feature Syndicate, Inc. Reprinted with permission. American Heritage Dictionary. Definition for “regard” from The American Heritage Dictionary of the English Language, Fourth Edition. Copyright © 2006 by Houghton Mifflin Harcourt Publishing Company. Reproduced by permission of Houghton Mifflin Harcourt Publishing Company. John Bailey. Excerpt from the foreword in The New Encyclopedia of Fishing. Copyright © 1994, 2001 Dorling Kindersley Limited, London. Reprinted by permission of Penguin Books Limited. Eugene Boe. Excerpt from “Pioneers to Eternity” in The Immigrant Experience, edited by Thomas C. Wheeler. Copyright © 1971 Thomas C. Wheeler. Published by Dial Press, an imprint of Random House, Inc. The Boston Globe Archive Search results (screen shot). Copyright © 2009 Globe Newspaper Company. Reprinted by permission of The Boston Globe. Columbia University LibraryWeb screen shot. Copyright © Columbia University Libraries. Reprinted by permission. www.columbia.edu/cu/1web. Emily Dickinson, from The Poems of Emily Dickinson, Thomas H. Johnson. Cambridge, MA: The Belknap Press of Harvard University Press. Copyright © 1951, 1955, 1979, 1983 by the President and Fellows of Harvard College. Reprinted by permission of the publishers and the Trustees of Amherst College. EBSCO Information Services. “Home Schooling” Search Results (3). Copyright © EBSCO Publishing, Inc. Reprinted by permission. All rights reserved. Thomas L. Friedman. Copyright information and Title page from Hot, Flat and Crowded by Thomas L. Friedman. Copyright © 2008 by Farrar, Straus and Giroux, LLC. Reprinted by permission of Farrar, Straus and Giroux, LLC. Title page and copyright information from Asian American Literature: An Anthology, First Edition, by Shirley Geok-Lim. Title page from “Guilty on Both Counts” by Mitsuye Yamada. © 2000 NTC Contemporary Publishing Group, Inc. Reprinted by Permission of The McGraw-Hill Companies. Stephen Jay Gould, excerpt from “Were Dinosaurs Dumb?” from The Panda’s Thumb: More Reflections in Natural History by Stephen Jay Gould. Copyright © 1978 by Stephen Jay Gould. Used by permission of W. W. Norton & Company, Inc. Massachusetts Nurses Association. “Labor Relations: Unionized Nurses Advocate for Our Patients” by Joe Twarog, Associate Director, Labor Education & Training. From Massachusetts Nurse, November/December 2005, Web page, www.massnurses.org./labor/education/2005/nov_dec/internet.htm. Copyright © Massachusetts Nurses Association. Reprinted by permission of Massachusetts Nurses Association. McDonald’s Corporation, “What makes your lettuce so crisp?” advertisement. Copyright (c) 2004 by McDonald’s Corporation. Reprinted with permission. Merriam-Webster Online. “regard” online dictionary entry screen shot from www.Merriam-Webster.com. Copyright © 2009 by Merriam-Webster, Incorporated. Reprinted by permission. University of Minnesota Libraries screen shots. Copyright © 2009 Regents of the University of Minnesota. Reprinted with permission. All rights reserved. New Bedford Whaling Museum. “Overview of American Whaling” screen shot with footer insert. © 2006 Old Dartmouth Historical Society/New Bedford Whaling Museum. www.whalingmuseum.org/library/index. html. Courtesy of the New Bedford Whaling Museum. Reprinted by permission. “Prestige to Professions” chart. From The New York Times, September 21, 2008. Copyright © 2008 The New York Times. Reprinted by permission. Nedra Reynolds and Rich Rice. Excerpt from Portfolio Keeping: A Guide for Students, Second Edition, 4–5; 48–51. Boston: Bedford, 2006. Adapted with permission of the authors. Anne Rudloe and Jack Rudloe. Excerpt from “Electric Warfare: The Fish That Kill with Thunderbolts.” From Smithsonian (July 1993), 94–105. Reprinted with permission of the authors. Constance M. Ruzich. “For the Love of Joe: The Language of Starbucks.” Article page (428) and The Journal of Popular Culture Title page. From The Journal of Popular Culture, Vol. 41, No. 3, 2008. © 2008 Constance M. Ruzich. Reprinted with the permission of Blackwell Publishing, Inc. Betsy Taylor. “Has the proliferation of large chain stores been beneficial to consumers and the communities in which they are built?” Originally appeared in CQ Researcher, November 1999. Reprinted by permission of the author. David Whitman. “An Appeal to Authority: The New Paternalism in Urban Schools.” Front page of article and the Table of Contents. From Education Next 8:4. www.educationnext.org. Reprinted with the permission of Education Next. Brenda Wineapple. Title Page with Copyright insert from White Heat: The Friendship of Emily Dickinson and Thomas Wentworth Higginson by Brenda Wineapple. Copyright © 2008 by Brenda Wineapple. Used by permission of Alfred A. Knopf, a division of Random House, Inc. Fred Zwicky. “Tornado Touch” photo by Fred Zwicky. Originally appeared in America 24/7 by Fred Zwicky. Copyright © 2004 by Fred Zwicky. Reprinted by permission of the author.

Index A a, an. See also Articles (a, an, the) a vs. an, 328, 789 choosing, with common nouns, 331 ESL challenges with, 327–28, 331–35 omission of, 155, 331–34 Abbreviations, 410–13 capitalization of, 436 familiar, 410 inappropriate, 412 Latin, 411–12 periods with, 401, 410 plurals of, 389–90 abide by (not with) a decision, 220 Absolute concepts, 285 Absolute phrases commas with, 367–68 defined, 780 Abstract nouns, 217–18 Abstracts in APA papers, 671, 675 in databases, 448, 470 Academic writing, 86–140 analysis papers, 86–103 argument papers, 104–18 audience for, 11 highlights of the research process, 572–82 manuscript formats, 738–40 questions asked in the disciplines, 130–32 research papers, 438–91 writing in the disciplines, 129–40. See also APA papers; Chicago papers; MLA papers

accept, except, 789 according to (not with), 220 Active reading, 86–89. See also Reading Active verbs, 142–47. See also Active voice Active voice changing to passive, 772–73 vs. passive, 143–44, 772–73 shifts between passive and, avoiding, 173 and wordy sentences, 201 adapt, adopt, 790 AD, BC, 411 Addresses commas with, 369 e-mail and Internet, dividing, 431 numbers in, 414 ad hominem fallacy, 126 Adjective clauses avoiding repetition in, 340–41 defined, 780–81 punctuation of, 363 words introducing, 783 Adjective phrases infinitive, 778–79 participial, 777 prepositional, 773–74 punctuation of, 364 restrictive vs. nonrestrictive, 364 Adjectives and absolute concepts, 285 and adverbs, 280–87 comparative and superlative forms of, 284–85 coordinate, commas with, 359 cumulative no commas with, 374 order of, 346–47

Index– 1

Index– 2 Adjectives (cont.) defined, 754–55 after direct object (object complement), 281–82 hyphenated, 428–29 after linking verbs such as is or seems (subject complement), 280–81 with prepositions (idioms), 351 adopt. See adapt, adopt, 790 Adverb clauses defined, 782 punctuation of, 355–56, 375 words introducing, 783 Adverb phrases infinitive, 778–79 prepositional, 774–75 Adverbs. See also Conjunctive adverbs and adjectives, 280–87 comparative and superlative forms of, 284–85 defined, 755–56 placement of, 343 relative introducing clauses, 340–41, 781 unnecessary repetition of, 340–41 adverse, averse, 790 Advertisements analyzing, 93–97 sample paper, 100–03 writing about, 86–97 advice, advise, 790 affect, effect, 790 aggravate, 790 Agreement of pronoun and antecedent, 256–62 with antecedents joined by and, 260 with antecedents joined by or or nor, 260–61 with collective nouns (audience, family, team, etc.), 258, 260 with generic nouns, 258 with indefinite pronouns, 256–68 and sexist language, avoiding, 257–59

Agreement of subject and verb, 243–55 with collective nouns (audience, family, team, etc.), 250–51 with company names, 254 with gerund phrases, 254 with indefinite pronouns, 249 with intervening words, 244, 247 with nouns of plural form, singular meaning (athletics, economics, etc.), 253 standard subject-verb combinations, 244, 245–46 with subject, not subject complement, 252 with subject after verb, 251 with subjects joined with and, 247–48 with subjects joined with or or nor, 248 with the number, a number, 250 with there is, there are, 251 with titles of works, 254 with units of measurement, 251 with who, which, that, 252–53 with words between subject and verb, 244, 247 with words used as words, 254 agree to, agree with, 220, 790 ain’t (nonstandard), 790 Aircraft, italics for names of, 417 Alignment of text in APA papers, 670 in Chicago papers, 714 and document design, 730 in MLA papers, 570 all, 249 all-, as prefix, with hyphen, 429 all ready, already, 790 all right (not alright), 790 all together, altogether, 790 allude, 790 allusion, illusion, 790 almost, placement of, 161 a lot (not alot), 790 already. See all ready, already, 790 alright (nonstandard). See all right, 790

Index– 3 although avoiding with but or however, 342–43 introducing subordinate clause, 758, 783 no comma after, 377 altogether. See all together, altogether, 790 American Psychological Association. See APA papers among, between. See between, among, 792 amongst, 790 amoral, immoral, 791 amount, number, 791 AM, PM, a.m., p.m., 411 am vs. is or are, 243–54, 296. See also Subject-verb agreement an, a. See a, an Analogy as argument strategy, 121 false, 121 as pattern of organization, 72 Analysis critical thinking, 86–91 of literature, 589–601 synthesizing sources APA style, 635–38 MLA style, 512–15 Analysis papers, 86–103. See also Literature, writing about and critical thinking, 86–91 evidence for, 93–97 interpretation in, 94–96 sample papers, 97–103 summaries in, 91–93, 96–97 thesis in, 94–97 and antecedents joined with, 260 comma with, 354–55 as coordinating conjunction, 148, 758 excessive use of, 184–85 no comma with, 372–73, 376 no semicolon with, 382 parallelism and, 148–49 subjects joined with, 247–48 and etc. (nonstandard), 791 and/or, avoiding, 407, 791

angry with (not at), 220, 791 Annotated bibliography, sample entry, 479 Annotating a text, 14–15, 86–89 sample annotated visual text, 89 sample annotated written texts, 88, 513, 577, 590 ante-, anti-, 791 Antecedent agreement of pronoun and, 256–62 defined, 256, 262, 749 pronoun reference, 262–67 singular vs. plural, 256–62 unclear or unstated, 264 of who, which, that, 252–53 Anthology, selection in APA citation of, 653 Chicago citation of, 704 MLA citation of, 525, 538–41 citation at a glance, 540–41 anti-, ante-. See ante-, anti-, 791 Antonyms (opposites), 422 a number, the number, 250 anxious, 791 any, 249 anybody (singular), 249, 257–58, 791 anymore, 791 anyone (singular), 249, 257–58, 791 anyone, any one, 792 anyplace, 791 anything (singular), 249, 257–58 anyways, anywheres (nonstandard), 791 APA papers, 621–84 abstracts in, 671, 675 authority in, 624 citation at a glance article from a database, 658–59 article in a periodical, 650 book, 654 section in a Web document, 662–63 citations, in-text directory to models for, 639 models for, 639–44 evidence for, 623–25

Index– 4 APA papers (cont.) manuscript format, 669–73 organizing, 622–23 plagiarism in, avoiding, 625–29 reference list directory to models for, 645–46 models for, 645–69 sample, 683 sample paper, 674–83 sources in citing, 625–29, 638–69 integrating, 629–38 synthesizing, 635–38 uses of, 623–25 supporting arguments in, 623–25, 636–37 thesis in, 621–22 title page formatting, 670 sample, for publication, 684 sample, for student papers, 674 Apostrophes, 387–91 in contractions, 389 misuse of, 390 in plurals, 389–90 in possessives, 387–88 Apposition, faulty, 158 Appositive phrases, 779–80 Appositives (nouns that rename other nouns) case of pronouns with, 270 colon with, 384 commas with, 364–65 dashes with, 404 defined, 270, 364, 779–80 no commas with, 374–75 as sentence fragments, 230 Appropriate language, 203–16 Archives, digital, 455–56 MLA citation of, 554–55 are vs. is, 243–54, 296. See also Subjectverb agreement Argument papers, 104–18. See also Arguments, evaluating

audience for, 106 common ground in, 107, 114 countering opposing arguments in, 111–14, 126–28 credibility in, 107 evidence in, 108–11 introduction to, 107 lines of argument in, 108 providing context in, 104–06 sample paper, 114–18 thesis in, 107 Arguments, evaluating, 118–29. See also Argument papers argumentative tactics, 118–26 assumptions, 123 claims, 123 deductive reasoning, 124–25 emotional appeals, 125–26 fairness, 125–28 inductive reasoning, 119–21 logical fallacies, 118–26 Article from a database, citing in paper. See also Articles in periodicals APA style, 658–59 citation at a glance, 658–59 Chicago style, 707, 708 MLA style, 552–54 citation at a glance, 552 Articles (a, an, the) a, an, use of, 328, 331–35 a vs. an, 328, 789 choosing, with common nouns, 332 defined, 327–28 ESL challenges with, 327–37 needed, 155 omitting, 328–35 the, 328–31, 335–36 Articles in periodicals. See also Article from a database capitalization for titles of, 434 APA style, 670, 673 Chicago style, 714 MLA style, 570

Index– 5 citation at a glance APA style, 650 MLA style, 546–47 citing, in paper APA style, 649–52, 656–59 Chicago style, 706–09 MLA style, 543–48, 553–54 finding, 446–50, 574 previewing, 467, 576–78 quotation marks for titles of, 394 APA style, 670, 673 Chicago style, 714 MLA style, 570 Artwork, italics for title of, 416 as ambiguous use of, 791 needed word, 154 parallelism and, 149–50 pronoun after, 271 as, like. See like, as, 798 Assignments understanding, 9, 130–32, 135–40 samples of, 136–40 Assumptions, in arguments, 123 as to, 792 at ESL challenges with, 348–49, 351–52 in idioms, 348–49, 351–52 audience. See Collective nouns Audience for argument paper, 106 assessing, 3, 10–11 and document design, 728 and global (big-picture) revision, 39–41 and level of formality, 210–11 Authority, establishing in research papers in APA papers, 624 in Chicago papers, 688 in MLA papers, 495–96 Auxiliary verbs. See Helping verbs averse. See adverse, averse, 790

awful, 792 awhile, a while, 792

B back up, backup, 792 bad, badly, 282–83, 792 Bandwagon appeal fallacy, 126 Base form of verb, 288, 753 modal with, 299, 314–17 in negatives with do, 319–20 BC, AD, 411 be, as irregular verb, 290, 296, 310–11 be, forms of, 245, 310–11, 752–53 vs. active verbs, 144–45 and agreement with subject, 243–54 in conditional sentences, 322 as helping verbs, 144, 312, 318, 752–53 as linking verbs, 144, 298–99, 337, 767 in passive voice, 143–44, 317–19, 773 in progressive forms, 312 and subjunctive mood, 306–07 in tenses, 301–02 as weak verbs, 144–45 because avoiding after reason is, 159, 801 avoiding with so or therefore, 342–43 introducing subordinate clause, 758 omission of, 150 Beginning of sentences capitalizing words at, 434–35 numbers at, 414 varying, 191–92 being as, being that (nonstandard), 792 beside, besides, 792 better, best, 284–85 between, among, 792 Bias, signs of, 472–74 Biased language, 126, 215–16. See also Sexist language Bible citing in paper APA style, 644, 655

Index– 6 Bible (cont.) citing in paper (cont.) Chicago style, 706 MLA style, 529, 542 no italics for, 417 punctuation between chapter and verse, 385 Bibliography. See also Reference list (APA); Works cited list (MLA) annotated, sample entry, 479 Chicago style directory to models for, 703 formatting, 716–17 models for, 701–13 sample, 726 working, 478–79, 480–81 information for, 480–81 Big picture, revising for (global revision), 35–49. See also Revising with comments Blog. See Weblog (blog) Body of essay, 32 Boldface, for emphasis, 730 Books capitalization for titles of, 434 APA style, 670, 673 Chicago style, 714 MLA style, 531, 570 citation at a glance, 536, 538–39, 654 citing in paper APA style, 652–55, 659 Chicago style, 701–06 MLA style, 535–43, 554–55 italics for titles of, 416 APA style, 670, 673 Chicago style, 714 MLA style, 531, 570 library catalog, 451–53, 465, 574 previewing, 467–68, 578 Borrowed language and ideas. See Citing sources; Plagiarism, avoiding both . . . and, 758 parallelism and, 149 Brackets, 405–06 APA style, 631

Chicago style, 695 MLA style, 506 Brainstorming, to generate ideas, 15–16 bring, take, 792 Broad reference, of pronouns, 263–64 burst, bursted; bust, busted (nonstandard), 792 Business writing, 738, 741–46 audience for, 11 e-mail, 746 letters, 738, 741–42 memos, 139, 744–46 résumés, 742–44 sample assignment and proposal, 137 but avoiding with although or however, 342–43 comma with, 354–55 as coordinating conjunction, 148, 758 excessive use of, 184–85 no comma with, 372–73, 376 no semicolon with, 382 parallelism and, 148–49 as preposition, 757 by, omission of, 150

C Call numbers, in library, 453 can, as modal verb, 314–16, 321, 753 can, may, 792 capable of (not to), 220 capital, capitol, 793 Capitalization, 432–36 of abbreviations, 436 after colon, 385, 435 of first word of sentence, 434–35 misuse of, 432–33 of proper nouns, 432–33 in quotations, 435 of titles of persons, 434 of titles of works, 434 APA style, 670, 673 Chicago style, 714 MLA style, 531, 570

Index– 7 capitol. See capital, capitol, 793 Case. See Pronoun case Case study. See Research process, highlights of Catalog, library, 451–53, 465, 574 Cause and effect as pattern of organization, 72–73 reasoning, 121–22 censor, censure, 793 Central idea. See Focus; Thesis cf., 411 Charts, using in documents, 733–37 in APA papers, 671–72 in Chicago papers, 715 in MLA papers, 571 Chicago Manual of Style, The, 490–91, 685, 701 Chicago papers, 685–726 authority in, 688 bibliography, 699–713 directory to models for, 703 models for, 701–13 sample, 726 evidence for, 687–89 footnotes or endnotes, 699–713 directory to models for, 703 models for, 701–13 sample, 724–25 manuscript format, 713–17 organizing, 686–87 plagiarism in, avoiding, 689–93 sample paper, 718–26 sources in citing, 689–90, 699–713 integrating, 693–99 uses of, 687–89 supporting arguments in, 687–89 thesis in, 685–86 Choppy sentences, 182–83 Citation at a glance APA style article from a database, 658–59 article in a periodical, 650 book, 654 section in a Web document, 662–63

MLA style article from a database, 552 article in a periodical, 546–47 book, 536 selection from an anthology, 540–41 short work from a Web site, 550–51 Citations. See Citation at a glance; Citing sources; Documenting sources cite, site, 793 Citing sources, 486–87, 502, 507. See also Documenting sources; Plagiarism, avoiding; Quotations APA style, 625–29, 638–69 Chicago style, 689–90, 699–713 choosing a citation style, 135, 488–91 MLA style, 498–503, 517–68 Claims. See Arguments, evaluating; Thesis class. See Collective nouns Classification, as pattern of organization, 73–74 Clauses. See Independent clauses; Subordinate clauses Clichés, 221–22 climactic, climatic, 793 Clustering, of ideas, 16, 17 coarse, course, 793 Coherence, 75–83 Collaborative writing. See Reviewers Collective nouns (audience, family, team, etc.) agreement of pronouns with, 258, 260 agreement of verbs with, 250–51 Colloquial words, 210, 422–23 Colons, 384–87 capitalization after, 385, 435 to correct run-on sentences, 238–39 misuse of, 385–86 with quotations, 384, 395–96 Combining sentences (coordination and subordination), 177–84 Commands. See Imperative mood; Imperative sentences

Index– 8 Commas, 354–72. See also Commas, unnecessary with absolute phrases, 367–68 in addresses, 369 with and, but, etc., 354–55 with contrasted elements, 368 between coordinate adjectives, 359 before coordinating conjunctions, 354–55 in dates, 369 with interrogative tags (he said etc.), 368 with interruptions, 366–67 after introductory elements, 355–56 with items in a series, 358–59 joining ideas with, 354–55 with mild interjections, 368 with modifiers, 359–65 with nonrestrictive elements, 361–65 with nouns of direct address, 368 in numbers, 370 with parenthetical expressions, 367 to prevent confusion, 370 with quotation marks, 368, 395 with semicolons, 381 with titles following names, 369–70 with transitional expressions, 366–67 before which or who, 363 with yes and no, 368 Commas, unnecessary, 372–78 between adjective and noun, 374 after although, 377 after and, but, etc., 376 between compound elements, 372–73 before concluding adverbial elements, 375 after a coordinating conjunction, 376 between cumulative adjectives, 374 with indirect quotations, 377 in an inverted sentence (verb before subject), 373 with mildly parenthetical elements, 374–75 before a parenthesis, 377

with a question mark or an exclamation point, 377 with restrictive elements, 374–75 before or after a series, 373 after a signal phrase, 376 between subject and verb, 376 after such as or like, 377 before than, 377 between verb and object, 376 Comma splices. See Run-on sentences Comments on a draft, understanding. See Revising with comments committee. See Collective nouns Common ground, establishing in argument, 107, 114 Common knowledge in APA papers, 627 in Chicago papers, 690–91 in MLA papers, 500 Common nouns, 328–31, 432–33 Company names abbreviations in, 412 agreement of verb with, 254 Comparative form of adjectives and adverbs, 284–85 compare to, compare with, 793 Comparisons with adjectives and adverbs, 284–85 needed words in, 153–54 parallel elements in, 149–50 as pattern of organization, 70–72 with pronoun following than or as, 271 complement, compliment, 793 Complements, object, 768 Complements, subject adjectives as, 280–81, 767 case of pronouns as, 268–69 defined, 766 and subject-verb agreement, 252 Complete subject, 763–64 Complex sentences, 786–87 compliment. See complement, compliment, 793 comply with (not to), 220

Index– 9 Compound antecedents, 260 Compound-complex sentences, 787 Compound elements case of pronoun in, 268–69 comma with, 354–55 needed words in, 152 no comma with, 372–73 parallelism and, 148–49 Compound nouns, plurals of, 388 Compound numbers, hyphens with, 429 Compound predicate fragmented, 231 no comma in, 355, 372–73 Compound sentences comma in, 354–55 defined, 786 excessive use of, 184–85 semicolon in, 379 Compound subjects agreement of pronoun with, 260–61 agreement of verb with, 247–48 defined, 764 Compound verb. See Compound predicate Compound words in dictionary entry, 419 hyphens with, 428 plural of, 426 Conciseness, 198–203 Conclusion in deductive reasoning, 124–25 of essay, 34–35 in inductive reasoning, 119–21 Concrete nouns, 217–18 Conditional sentences, 320–23. See also Subjunctive mood Confused words, 218–19. See also Glossary of Usage Conjunctions, 758–59. See also Conjunctive adverbs in coordination and subordination, 177–79 in fixing run-on sentences, 238 Conjunctive adverbs comma after, 366–67, 759

and coordination, with semicolon, 177–79 defined, 759 placement of, 759 semicolon with, 237, 239, 380–81, 759 Connotation (implied meaning of word), 216–17 conscience, conscious, 793 Consistency in mood and voice, 173 in paragraphs, 78–79 in phrasing of headings, 731–32 in point of view, 46–49, 169–71 in questions and quotations, 174 in verb tense, 171–72 Context, establishing, 104–06 continual, continuous, 793 Contractions, apostrophe in, 389 Contrary-to-fact clauses, 305–07, 320–23 Contrast, as pattern of organization, 70–72 Contrasted elements, comma with, 368 Conversation among sources. See Synthesizing sources Coordinate adjectives, comma with, 359 Coordinating conjunctions comma before, 354–55 coordination and, 177–79 to correct run-on sentences, 238 defined, 758 no comma with, 372–73, 376 no semicolon with, 382 parallelism and, 148–49 Coordination, 177–79, 184–85 Correlative conjunctions defined, 758 parallelism with, 149 could, as modal verb, 314–16, 753 could care less (nonstandard), 793 could of (nonstandard), 794 council, counsel, 794 Countering arguments, 111–14, 126–28 in APA papers, 624–25 in Chicago papers, 688–89 in MLA papers, 496

Index– 10 Count nouns, articles with, 328–30 couple. See Collective nouns course. See coarse, course, 793 Cover letters, 742 Credibility, establishing, 107. See also Authority criteria, 794 Critical reading. See Reading Critical thinking, 86–89, 118–29, 472–74 crowd. See Collective nouns Cumulative adjectives no comma with, 374 order of, 346–47 Cumulative sentences, 189–90 Cuts, in quotations. See Brackets; Ellipsis marks

D -d, -ed, verb ending, 297–98 Dangling modifiers, 165–69 Dashes, 403–04 to correct run-on sentences, 238–39 data, 794 Database, article from. See Article from a database, citing in paper Databases, for finding sources, 443–50, 574 Dates abbreviations in, 411, 412 commas with, 369 numbers in, 414 Days of the week abbreviations of, 412 capitalization of, 433 Deadlines, 4, 12, 438–39 Debates. See Argument papers; Arguments, evaluating Declarative sentences, 787 Deductive reasoning, 124–25 Definite article. See the Definition as pattern of organization, 74–75 of words, 216–17, 422

Degree. See Comparative form of adjectives and adverbs Demonstrative pronouns, 751 Denotation (dictionary definition of word), 216 Dependent clauses. See Subordinate clauses Description, as pattern of organization, 69 Descriptive word groups. See Adjective phrases; Adverb phrases desirous of (not to), 220 Detail, adequate, 33, 66–67, 110, 599–600 Determiners, 327–28 Development adequate, 33, 66–75, 110 methods of, 67–75 Diagrams, using in documents, 733–37 Dialects, 209–10 Dialogue paragraphing of, 392–93 quotation marks in, 392–93 quoting from a literary work, 392–93, 607–08 Diction. See Words Dictionaries guide to use of, 419–23 sample online entry, 421 sample print entry, 420 different from, different than, 220, 794 differ from, differ with, 794 Digital archives, 455–56 MLA citation of, 554–55 Digital file, MLA citation of, 558 Digital object identifier (DOI) in APA citations, 656–59 in Chicago citations, 701 Direct address, commas with, 368 Direct language, 199–201 Direct objects case of pronouns as, 269–70 defined, 767 followed by adjective or noun (object complement), 768

Index– 11 placement of adverbs and, 343 transitive verbs and, 767–68 Directories, to documentation models APA style, 639, 645–46 Chicago style, 703 MLA style, 519, 530–31 Directories, Web, 454–55 Direct questions. See Questions, direct and indirect Direct quotations. See Quotations, direct and indirect disinterested, uninterested, 794 Division, as pattern of organization, 73–74 Division of words in dictionary entry, 419 hyphen and, 430–31 do, as irregular verb, 290 do, forms of in forming negatives, 319–20 as helping verbs, 752–53 and subject-verb agreement, 245, 295–96 do vs. does, 243–54, 295–96. See also Subject-verb agreement Document design, 728–46 academic papers, 738–40 APA format, 669–73 Chicago format, 713–17 MLA format, 569–72, 739–40 business letters, 738, 741 e-mail, 746 format options, 12, 728–30 headings, 731–32 layout, 728 lists, displayed, 732–33 memos, 744–46 page setup, 728–30 résumés, 742–44 visuals, 733–37 Documenting sources APA style, 638–69 Chicago style, 699–713 choosing a documentation style, 488–90

in the disciplines, 135 MLA style, 517–68, 582 reviewer comments about, 507 does vs. do, 243–54, 295–96. See also Subject-verb agreement DOI (digital object identifier) in APA citations, 656–59 in Chicago citations, 701 don’t vs. doesn’t, 243–54, 295–96, 794 dots, ellipsis. See Ellipsis mark Double comparatives and superlatives, avoiding, 285 Double negatives, avoiding, 286 Doublespeak, avoiding, 205–06 Double subjects, avoiding, 339–40 Draft, comments on. See Revising with comments Drafting essays body, 32–34 conclusion, 34–35 introduction, 25–32 thesis, 19–21, 25–32 Drawing conclusions (deductive reasoning), 124–25 due to, 794

E each (singular), 249, 257–58, 794 economics (singular), 253 -ed, verb ending, 297–98 Editing sentences, 49–51 Effect. See Cause and effect effect. See affect, effect, 790 e.g., (meaning “for example”), 411, 794 either (singular), 249, 257–58, 794 either . . . or, 758 and parallelism, 149 and pronoun-antecedent agreement, 260–61 and subject-verb agreement, 248 either . . . or fallacy, 122–23 -elect, hyphen with, 429

Index– 12 Electronic documents, creating e-mail messages, 746 résumés, 744 Electronic sources abstracts, 448 archives, digital, 455–56 avoiding plagiarism from, 482, 485, 488 citation at a glance APA style, 658–59, 662–63 MLA style, 550–51, 552 citing in paper APA style, 656–69 Chicago style, 701, 706–11 MLA style, 548–68 databases, 443–50, 574 evaluating, 474–78 finding online, 453–58 in library catalog, 451–53, 465 previewing, 468–69 selecting appropriate versions of, 470–72 elicit, illicit, 795 Ellipsis mark, 406–07 APA style, 630–31 in arguments, 127–28 Chicago style, 694–95 MLA style, 505–06 Elliptical clause, 166 E-mail addresses, division of, 431 italics in, 416 writing effective, 746 emigrate from, immigrate to, 795 eminent, imminent, 795 Emotional appeals, in argument, 125–26 Emphasis, 176–91 active verbs for, 142–47 boldface for, 730 choppy sentences and, 182–83 colon for, 190, 384 dash for, 403 document design for, 730 exclamation point for, 190, 402 italics for, 730

parallel structure and, 190 sentence endings for, 189–90 short sentences for, 191 subordinating minor ideas for, 186–87 Encyclopedias, 458–59 Endnotes. See Footnotes or endnotes End punctuation, 400–03 English as a second language (ESL), 310–52 adjectives, 344–47 adjectives and adverbs, placement of, 346–47 articles (a, an, the), 327–37 idioms (common expressions), 348–52 omitted subjects or expletives, 338–40 omitted verbs, 337 nouns, types of, 328–36 participles, present vs. past, 344–45 prepositions with adjectives, 351 with nouns and -ing forms, 350 to show time and place (at, in, on), 348–49 with verbs, 351 repeated objects or adverbs, 183, 340–41 repeated subjects, 339–40 sentence structure, 337–47 verbs active voice, 311–13 conditional, 321–22 forms of, 310–13, 317–19 with gerunds or infinitives, 323–26 modals, 314–15 negative forms of, 319–20 passive voice, 317–19 tenses, 310–13, 317–22 enthused, 795 -er ending, 284–85 ESL. See English as a second language (ESL) especially, and sentence fragments, 231 -es, -s spelling rules, for plurals, 425 as verb ending, 244, 245–46, 294–95

Index– 13 Essays. See also Research process, highlights of; Sample essays drafting, 25–35 planning, 2–25 researching, 438–91, 573–82 revising, 35–59. See also Revising with comments -est ending, 284–85 et al. (“and others”), 411 in APA papers, 641, 647 in Chicago papers, 702 in MLA papers, 522, 533 etc., 411, 795 Etymology, 422 Euphemisms, 205–06 Evaluating arguments. See Arguments, evaluating Evaluating sources, 462–78, 575–78 even, placement of, 161 eventually, ultimately, 795 everybody, everyone, everything (singular), 249, 257–58, 795 everyone, every one, 795 Evidence adding for support, 33 in analysis papers, 93–97 in APA papers, 623–25 in argument papers, 108–11 in Chicago papers, 687–89 in MLA papers, 494–96 for papers in the disciplines, 132–33 ex-, hyphen with, 429 Exact language, 216–23 Examples as evidence, 33, 109–11 as pattern of organization, 67–68 as sentence fragments, 232 except. See accept, except, 789 Excerpts, of articles and books, online, 470–72 Exclamation points, 402 and MLA citation, 396, 519 no comma with, 377 with quotation marks, 396 Exclamations. See Interjections

Exclamatory sentence, 787 expect, 795 Expert opinion, 111 Explaining a point, 110 Expletives there, it and subject following verb, 338–39, 765, 772 and subject-verb agreement, 251 and wordy sentences, 201 explicit, implicit, 795 Expressions idiomatic (common), 219–20 regional, 208–10 transitional, 366–67, 380–81 trite. See Clichés worn-out. See Clichés

F Facts, using in APA papers, 623–24 in argument papers, 109 in Chicago papers, 687–88 in MLA papers, 494–95 Fairness, in arguments, 111–14, 125–28 Fallacies, logical, 118–26 False analogy, 121 family. See Collective nouns farther, further, 795 Faulty apposition, 158 Faulty predication, 158 Feedback, using. See Revising with comments fewer, less, 796 Field research, 460–62 Figures. See Numbers; Visuals Figures of speech, 222 finalize, 796 firstly, 796 First-person point of view, 49, 169–70 Flow. See Coherence Flowcharts, using in documents, 733–37 Focus. See also Thesis of essay, 4–6, 19–21, 25–32, 40, 43 of paragraph, 62–66

Index– 14 Fonts (typeface), 730 Footnotes or endnotes APA style, 670–71, 676 Chicago style, 490–91, 699–713 directory to models for, 703 models for, 701–13 sample, 724–25 MLA style, 568–69 for comma before, 354–55 as coordinating conjunction, 148, 758 as preposition, 757 Foreign words, italics for, 417 for example, and sentence fragments, 232 Formality, level of, 210–11 Formal outline, 22–25 Format, manuscript. See Document design Fractions, numerals for, 414 Fragments, sentence acceptable, 232–33 clauses as, 229–30 for emphasis or effect, 232–33 examples as, 232 finding and recognizing, 226–28 fixing, 228–32 lists as, 231 phrases as, 230 predicates as, 231 testing for, 226–28 Freewriting, 16–17 Full stop. See Periods further. See farther, further, 795 Fused sentences. See Run-on sentences Future perfect tense, 301, 319 Future progressive forms, 302, 319 Future tense, 301, 312, 318

G Gender, and pronoun agreement, 257–59 Gender-neutral language, 211–15, 257–59 Generalization, hasty, 119, 121 Generic he, 212, 257–59, 797

Generic nouns, 258 Geographic names, the with, 335–36 Gerund phrases agreement of verb with, 254 defined, 777–78 Gerunds (-ing forms) following prepositions, 350 following verbs, 323–24 possessive as modifier of, 272–73 get, 796 Global (big-picture) revisions, 35–49. See also Revising with comments Glossary of Usage, 789–803 good, well, 282–83, 796 Government Web sites, 456–57 graduate, 796 Grammar, mixed. See Mixed constructions Grammar checkers, general advice about, 51 Graphic narrative, MLA citation of, 537 Graphs, using in documents, 733–37 grow, 796

H hanged, hung, 796 hardly, 796 with negative word, avoiding, 286 placement of, 161 has got, have got, avoiding, 796 Hasty generalization, 119, 121 has vs. have, 245, 295. See also Subjectverb agreement have, as irregular verb, 290 have, forms of as helping verbs, 313, 318–19, 752–53 and passive voice, 317–19 and perfect tenses, 313, 318–19 and subject-verb agreement, 245, 295 have vs. has, 245, 295. See also Subjectverb agreement Headings in APA papers, 622–23, 671 in Chicago papers, 686–87, 715

Index– 15 and document design, 731–32 in MLA papers, 571 to organize ideas, 622–23, 686–87 parallel phrasing of, 731–32 placement of, 732 planning with, 22, 622–23, 686–87 style of, 732 he, him, his, sexist use of, 212, 257–59, 797 Helping verbs contractions with, 299 defined, 299, 752–53 and forming passive voice, 289, 317–19 and forming perfect tenses, 289, 301, 304, 313, 318–19 and forming verb tenses, 289, 312–13, 318–19 modals as, 299, 314–17, 752–53 needed, 299 and progressive forms, 312, 318 here, not used as subject, 339 her vs. she, 268–74 he said, she said, comma with, 368 he/she, his/her, 407, 797 he vs. him, 268–74 Highlights of the research process. See Research process, highlights of hisself (nonstandard), 797 Homophones (words that sound alike), 423 Hooks, in introductions, 26, 45, 497 hopefully, 797 however avoiding with but or although, 342–43 at beginning of sentence, 797 comma with, 366–67 semicolon with, 380–81 HTML documents, as sources, 471 Humanities, writing in the, 129–35. See also Chicago papers; Literature, writing about; MLA papers hung. See hanged, hung, 796 Hyphens, 428–32 with adjectives, 428–29

to avoid confusion, 430 in compound words, 428 and division of words, 430–31 to form dash, 403 in fractions, 429 in numbers, 429 with prefixes and suffixes, 429 in a series, 429 and Web addresses, 431

I I vs. me, 268–74 point of view, 40, 49, 169–70 shifts with you, he, or she, avoiding, 169–70 Ideas borrowed. See Citing sources; Plagiarism, avoiding clustering, 16, 17 coordinating and subordinating, 177–88 explaining, 110 exploring, for essay, 13–19 joining with colon, 385 with comma and coordinating conjunction, 354–55 with semicolon, 379 listing, 15–16 names of. See Nouns organizing. See Organization paired, 148–50 parallel, 147–51 repetition of, unnecessary, 198–99 synthesizing in APA papers, 635–38 in MLA papers, 512–15 transitions between, 79–83 Idioms adjective + preposition combinations, 351 with prepositions showing time and place (at, on, in), 348–49

Index– 16 Idioms (cont.) standard, 219–20 verb + preposition combinations, 351–52 i.e. (meaning “that is”), 411, 797 -ie, -ei, spelling rule, 424 if clauses, 305–07, 320–23 if, whether, 797 illicit. See elicit, illicit, 795 illusion. See allusion, illusion, 790 Illustrated book, MLA citation of, 537 Illustrations (examples). See also Visuals as evidence, 109–11 as pattern of organization, 67–68 Images. See Visuals immigrate. See emigrate from, immigrate to, 795 imminent. See eminent, imminent, 795 immoral. See amoral, immoral, 791 Imperative mood, 305 Imperative sentences defined, 764–65, 787 you understood in, 48, 338, 764–65, 772 implement, 797 implicit. See explicit, implicit, 795 Implied meaning, of words (connotation), 216–17 imply, infer, 797 in, in idioms with adjectives, 351 vs. at, on, to show time and place, 348–49 with verbs, 351–52 Inclusive language, 211–15, 256–59 Incomplete comparison, 153–54 Incomplete construction, 151–56 Incomplete sentences. See Sentence fragments Indefinite articles. See a, an Indefinite pronouns agreement of verb with, 249 as antecedents, 256–58 apostrophe with, 388 defined, 751

Indenting in APA references, 672 in Chicago bibliography, 716–17 in Chicago notes, 716 of long quotations, 393–94 APA style, 631–32, 670–71, 682 Chicago style, 695–96, 714–15, 720 MLA style, 506–08, 570, 584, 606–08, 616 no quotation marks with, 393–94 in MLA works cited, 572 Independent clauses colon between, 385 combined with subordinate clauses, 786–87 and comma with coordinating conjunction, 354–55 defined, 785 and run-on sentences, 235–38 semicolon between, 380–81 Indexes to periodicals, print, 450 Indicative mood, 305 Indirect objects case of pronouns as, 269–70 defined, 768 Indirect questions no question mark after, 401–02 and shifts to direct questions, avoiding, 174 Indirect quotations no comma with, 377 no quotation marks with, 398 shifts to direct quotations, avoiding, 174 Inductive reasoning, 119–21 infer. See imply, infer, 797 Infinitive phrases, 778–79 Infinitives case of pronouns with, 272 dangling, 166 following verbs, 323–26 marked (with to), 323–25, 350 and sequence of tenses, 304–05 split, 164

Index– 17 subject of, objective case for, 272 to, infinitive marker vs. preposition, 350 unmarked (without to), 326 Inflated phrases, 199–200 Informal language, 210–11 Informal outline, 21–22 Information, for essay finding, 6–7, 438–91, 574–76 managing, 478–88, 578 Information notes (MLA), 568–69 -ing verb ending. See Gerunds; Present participles in, into, 797 in regards to, 798 Inserted material, in quotations. See Brackets Institutional review board (IRB), for research subjects, 460 Instructor’s comments, responding to. See Revising with comments Integrating sources, 486–87, 502 in APA papers, 629–38 in Chicago papers, 693–99 in MLA papers, 504–16 highlights of one student’s research process, 578–81 intend to do (not on doing), 220 Intensive pronouns, 750 Interjections (exclamations) comma with, 368 defined, 759 exclamation point with, 402 Internet addresses. See URLs avoiding plagiarism from, 485, 488 citation at a glance APA style, 662–63 MLA style, 550–51 citing in paper APA style, 656–69 Chicago style, 701, 706–11 MLA style, 548–68 evaluating sources from, 468–72, 474–78, 576

finding sources on, 443–45, 453–58, 574–75 previewing sources on, 468–69 searching, 443–45, 453–58, 574–75 scanning results, 464–66 topic directories, 454–55 Interpretation in analysis papers, 94–97 of literature, 593–95 of visual texts, 86–97 of written texts, 86–100 Interrogative pronouns defined, 750 who, whom, 275–79 Interrogative sentences, 787 Interrogative tags (he said etc.), commas with, 368 Interruptions, commas with, 366–67 Interviews, as information source, 7, 460–61 In-text citations. See also Integrating sources APA style directory to models for, 639 models for, 639–44 choosing a documentation style for, 488–90 MLA style directory to models for, 519 models for, 517–29 into. See in, into, 797 Intransitive verbs, 769–70 not used in passive voice, 319 Introducing sources. See Signal phrases Introduction. See also Thesis in argument paper, 107 of essay, 25–32 of literature paper, 598–99 of research paper, 496–97 revising, 45 Introductory word groups, comma with, 355–56 Invented words, 208 Invention. See Ideas, exploring, for essay

Index– 18 Inverted sentence order for emphasis, 189 with expletives there, it, 251, 338–39, 765, 772 no comma with, 373 and position of subject, 765, 772 in questions, 765, 771–72 and subject-verb agreement, 251 for variety, 193–94 IRB (institutional review board), for research subjects, 460 irregardless (nonstandard), 798 Irregular verbs, 288–93 be, am, is, are, was, were, 296 do, does, 295–96 have, has, 295 lie, lay, 292–93, 798 is vs. are, 243–54, 296. See also Subjectverb agreement is when, is where, avoiding, 159, 798 it broad reference of, 263–64 as expletive (placeholder), 338–39 indefinite use of, 265 as subject of sentence, 338 Italics, 416–18 in e-mail, 416 for emphasis, 730 for foreign words, 417 for names of ships, spacecraft, and aircraft, 417 for titles of works, 416–17 in APA papers, 670, 673 in Chicago papers, 700, 714 in MLA papers, 531, 570 for words as words, 417 its, it’s, 389, 390, 423, 798

J Jargon, 204–05 Journal, keeping a, 18–19 Journalist’s questions, 17–18 Journals. See Periodicals jury. See Collective nouns

just, placement of, 161 Justified margins, 730. See also Alignment of text

K Key words, repeating for coherence, 76–77 Keyword searching in databases, 448–50 example of, 575 in library catalog, 451–53 scanning results of, 464–66 in search engines, 448–50, 454 kind(s), 798 kind of, sort of, 798

L Labels for visuals, 735 APA style, 671–72 Chicago style, 715 MLA style, 571 Language. See also Tone; Words appropriate, 203–16 biased, 215–16 borrowed. See Citing sources; Plagiarism, avoiding clichés, 221–22 direct, 199–201 doublespeak, avoiding, 205–06 euphemisms, avoiding, 205–06 exact, 216–23 formality of, 210–11 idioms, 219–20 invented, 208 jargon, 133–35, 204–05 nonstandard English, avoiding, 208–10 obsolete, 208 offensive, avoiding, 215–16 plain, 204–08 pretentious, avoiding, 205–06 regionalisms, avoiding, 208–10 sexist, avoiding, 211–15

Index– 19 slang, avoiding, 208–10 specialized, 133–35 wordy, 198–203 Latin abbreviations, 411–12 laying vs. lying, 292–93 lay, lie, 292–93, 798 Layout of documents. See Document design lead, led, 798 learn, teach, 798 leave, let, 798 Length of papers, 4, 12 of paragraphs, 83–84 less. See fewer, less, 796 let. See leave, let, 798 Letters, business, 738, 741–42 Letters, of the alphabet capitalization of, 432–36 as letters, italics for, 417 as letters, plural of, 389–90 liable, 798 Library resources. See also Electronic sources articles in periodicals, 446–50 databases, 443–50, 574 print index, 450 bibliographies, 459–60 books, 451–53 catalog, 451–53, 465, 574 reference librarians, 442–43, 573 reference works, 458–59 scholarly citations, 459–60 Web page, library, 443 lie, lay, 292–93, 798 like no comma after, 377 and sentence fragments, 231 like, as, 798 Limiting modifiers (only, almost, etc.), 161 Line spacing in APA paper, 670 in Chicago paper, 714 and document design, 729 in MLA paper, 570

Linking verbs adjective after, 281, 766–67 defined, 766 omission of, 298–99, 337 pronoun after, 269 Listing ideas, 15–16 List of sources. See Bibliography, Chicago style; Reference list (APA); Works cited (MLA) Lists. See also Series with colon, 384 with dash, 404 and document design, 732–33 as fragments, 231 parallelism and, 147–48 Literary present tense, 134, 171–72, 601–02, 604–05 Literature, writing about, 589–620 active reading for, 589–92 conventions (standard practices) in, 601–02 details from the work in, 599–600 evidence in, 599–600 interpretation in, 593–95 introduction for, 598–99 MLA style for, 602–03 outline for, 597–98 plot summary, avoiding in, 600–01 questions to ask about literature, 593–95 quotations from the work citing, 602–03, 605–08 context for, 604 formatting, 605–08 integrating, 602–08 quotations within quotations, 605 sample papers, 611–13, 615–20 secondary sources in, 609–10 avoiding plagiarism, 610 documenting, 609–10 shifts in tense, avoiding, 171–72, 601–02, 604–05 summary in, excessive, avoiding, 96–97 thesis in, 595–97

Index– 20 Literature review, sample paper (APA style), 674–83 Logic, 118–26 analogies, 121 cause-and-effect reasoning, 121–22 deductive reasoning, 124–25 fallacies, 118–26 inductive reasoning, avoiding, 119–21 of sentences, 148–59 loose, lose, 798 lots, lots of, 799 -ly ending on adverbs, 280 lying vs. laying, 292–93

M Magazines. See Periodicals Main clauses. See Independent clauses Main idea. See Focus; Thesis Main point. See Focus; Thesis; Topic sentence Main verbs, 310, 753–54 with modals, 299, 314–17 man, sexist use of, 212–13 mankind, sexist use of, 213, 799 Manuscript format. See also Document design academic formats, 738–40 APA style, 669–73 Chicago style, 713–17 MLA style, 569–72, 739–40 business formats, 738, 741–46 electronic formats, 744, 746 Mapping. See Outlines Maps, using in documents, 733–37 Margins in APA papers, 670 in Chicago papers, 714 and document design, 729 in MLA papers, 570 Mass nouns. See Noncount nouns mathematics (singular), 253 may. See can, may, 792 may, as modal verb, 314–16, 321, 753

maybe, may be, 799 may of, might of (nonstandard), 799 measles (singular), 253 media, medium, 799 Memos, 744–46 Metaphor, 222–23 me vs. I, 268–74 might, as modal verb, 314–16, 321, 753 might of. See may of, might of, 799 Minor ideas. See Subordination Misplaced modifiers, 160–63 Missing claims, in arguments, 123 Missing words. See Needed words Misspelled words, common, 426–27 Misuse of words, 218–19 Mixed constructions, 156–60 Mixed metaphors, 222–23 MLA Handbook for Writers of Research Papers, 517, 569 MLA papers, 491–620. See also Literature, writing about; Research process, highlights of authority in, 495–96, 510 citation at a glance article from a database, 552 article in a periodical, 546–47 book, 536 selection from an anthology, 540–41 short work from a Web site, 550–51 citations, in-text, 517–29 directory to models for, 519 models for, 518–29 evidence for, 494–96 footnotes or endnotes (optional), 568–69 highlights of one student’s research process (case study), 572–82 literary analysis, 589–620 manuscript format, 569–72, 739–40 organizing, 493–94 plagiarism, avoiding, 498–503, 578–82

Index– 21 sample papers analysis, 98–100, 101–03 argument, 115–18 literature, 611–13, 615–20 research, 583–88 sources in citing, 498–503, 578–82 integrating, 504–16, 578–81 synthesizing, 512–15 uses of, 494–96, 574 supporting arguments in, 494–96 thesis in, 492–93 voice (tone) in, 497–98 works cited list, 529–68, 571–72 directory to models for, 530–31 medium of publication in, 532 models for, 532–68 sample, 588, 620 Web addresses (URLs) in, 548–49 Modal verbs, 299, 314–17, 752–53. See also Helping verbs Modern Language Association. See MLA papers Modifiers adjectives as, 280–87, 754–55 adverbs as, 280–87, 755–56 commas with, 359–65 dangling, 165–69 of gerunds, 272–73 limiting, 161 misplaced, 160–63 redundant, 198–99 squinting, 161–62 Money, abbreviations for, 411 Mood of verbs, 305–07. See also Conditional sentences shifts in, avoiding, 173 more, most, 284–85 moreover comma with, 366–67 semicolon with, 380–81 most, 799 Multilingual writers. See English as a second language (ESL) must, as modal verb, 314–16, 753

must of. See may of, might of, 799 myself, 270, 799

N namely, and sentence fragments, 231 Narration, as pattern of organization, 68–69 Narrowing a subject, 3, 5, 441–42, 573 N.B., 411 nearly, placement of, 161 Needed words, 151–56 articles (a, an, the), 155, 327–33 in comparisons, 153–54 in compound structures, 152 it, 338–39 in parallel structures, 150 subjects, 338–39 that, 153 there, 338–39 verbs, 298–99, 337 Negatives adverbs not and never, 756 double, avoiding, 320 forming, 319–20 neither (singular), 249, 257–58, 799 neither . . . nor, 758 and parallel structure, 149 and pronoun-antecedent agreement, 260–61 and subject-verb agreement, 248 never as adverb, 756 in double negatives, avoiding, 286 nevertheless comma with, 366–67 semicolon with, 380–81 news (singular), 253 Newspapers. See Periodicals News sites, 456–57 no comma with, 368 in double negatives, avoiding, 286, 320 nobody (singular), 249, 257–58 Noncount nouns, 328–30, 333–34

Index– 22 none, 249, 799 Nonrestrictive elements, commas with, 361–65 Non sequitur, 123 Nonsexist language, 211–15, 256–59 Nonstandard English, avoiding, 208–10 no one (singular), 249, 257–58 nor comma with, 354–55 as coordinating conjunction, 148, 758 parallelism and, 148–49 and pronoun-antecedent agreement, 260–61 and subject-verb agreement, 248 not as adverb, 319–20, 756 in double negatives, avoiding, 286 in forming negatives, 319–20 placement of, 161 Notes. See Footnotes or endnotes; Information notes (MLA) Note taking for analysis, 86–89 and avoiding plagiarism, 482–88, 577–81, 590–91 to generate ideas, 14–15 nothing (singular), 249, 257–58 not only . . . but also, 149, 758 Noun/adjectives, 748, 755 Noun clauses, 783–84 words introducing, 783 Noun markers, 327–28 Nouns. See also Nouns, types of adjectives with, 755–56 articles with, 327–28 capitalization of, 432–33 defined, 748 of direct address, comma with, 368 plural form, singular meaning (athletics, economics, etc.), 253 plural of, 425–26 after prepositions, 350 renaming other nouns. See Appositives

Nouns, types of. See also Nouns abstract, 217–18 collective (audience, family, team, etc.), 250–51, 258, 260 common, 328–30, 332, 432–33 concrete, 217–18 count, 329, 331–33 generic, 258 noncount, 329, 333–34 possessive, 387–88, 748 proper, 329, 335, 432–33 singular and plural, 329–30 specific, concrete, 217–18 specific vs. general, 329–30 Novels, titles of capitalization of, 434 italics for, 416 nowheres (nonstandard), 799 number. See amount, number, 791 number, agreement of verb with, 250 Number and person shifts in, avoiding, 169–71 and subject-verb agreement, 243–46 Numbers commas in, 370 spelled out vs. numerals, 413–14 APA style, 414 Chicago style, 413 consistency of, 414 MLA style, 413 Numbers used as numbers italics for, 417 plural of, 389

O Object complements, 768 adjectives as, following direct object, 281–82 Objections, to arguments, 111–14 Objective case, of pronouns for objects, 269–70 for subjects and objects of infinitives, 272 whom, 275–79

Index– 23 Objectivity assessing in sources, 126–28, 472–74 in writing a summary, 93 Objects direct, 767 indirect, 768 of infinitives, 272 no comma between verb and, 376 objective case for, 269–70, 275–79 of prepositions, 773–75 pronouns as, 269–70 unnecessary repetition of, 340–41 Observation, as information source, 7, 462 Obsolete words, 208 of, after could, would, may, etc. (nonstandard), 799 Offensive language, 215–16 off of (nonstandard), 220, 799 OK, O.K., okay, 799 Omission of needed words. See Needed words Omissions of letters and words, indicated by apostrophe, 389 comma, 370 ellipsis mark, 406–07 on ESL challenges with, 348–49 in idioms, 348–49, 351–52 one of the, agreement of verb with, 253 Online sources. See Electronic sources only, placement of, 160 only one of the, agreement of verb with, 253 Opinion, expert, 111 Opposing arguments, 111–14, 126–28 Opposites (antonyms), 422 or comma with, 354–55 as coordinating conjunction, 148, 758 excessive use of, 184–85 parallelism and, 148–49 and pronoun-antecedent agreement, 260–61 and subject-verb agreement, 248

Organization. See also Outlines of APA papers, 622–23 of Chicago papers, 686–87 improving, 43–44 of literature papers, 597–98 of MLA papers, 493–94 patterns of, 67–75 Other sides or views, in arguments, 111–14, 126–28 ought to, as modal verb, 753 Outlines for essay, 21–25 for literature paper, 597–98 for MLA paper, 493–94 for summary or analysis, 90–91 Ownership. See Possessive case

P Page setup. See Document design; Manuscript format Pagination of APA papers, 670 of Chicago papers, 714 of MLA papers, 569 Paired ideas, parallelism and, 148–50 Paragraph patterns. See also Paragraphs analogy, 72 cause and effect, 72–73 classification, 73–74 comparison and contrast, 70–72 definition, 74–75 description, 69 division, 73–74 examples, 67–68 illustrations, 67–68 narration, 68–69 process, 70 Paragraphs, 62–84. See also Paragraph patterns coherence in, 73–83 concluding, 34–35 development of, 66–75, 110 focus of, 64–66 introductory, 25–32

Index– 24 Paragraphs (cont.) length of, 83–84 too many points in, 65 topic sentences in, 44, 62–66 transitions in, 79–83 unity of, 64–66 Parallelism for emphasis, 190 in headings, 731–32 in paragraphs, 77 in sentences, 147–51 parameters, 799 Paraphrase in APA papers, 628–29, 634–35, 640 in Chicago papers, 687–88, 691–93, 698 integrating, 486–87, 502, 580 in MLA papers, 494–96, 499–503, 508–12, 516, 580 no quotation marks for, 392 and note taking, 484, 580 Parentheses, 404–05 no comma before, 377 Parenthetical citations. See In-text citations Parenthetical elements commas with, 367 dashes with, 403 Participial phrases. See also Past participles; Present participles dangling, 165–69 defined, 777 Participles. See Past participles; Present participles Particles, with verbs, 753–54 Parts of speech, 748–62 adjectives, 754–55 adverbs, 755–56 conjunctions, 758–59 in dictionary entry, 422 interjections (exclamations), 759 nouns, 748–49 prepositions, 757–58 pronouns, 749–52 verbs, 752–54 passed, past, 799

Passive voice vs. active, 142–44, 772–73 appropriate uses of, 142–44 forming, 317–19 shifts between active and, avoiding, 173 and wordy sentences, 201 past. See passed, past, 799 Past participles as adjectives, 344–45 defined, 288 of irregular verbs, 288–92 in participial phrases, 777 and passive voice, 317–19, 773 and perfect tenses, 301, 304, 313, 318 vs. present participles, 344–45 of regular verbs, 288, 297–98 as verbals, 776–77 Past perfect tense, 301, 304, 313, 319 Past progressive forms, 302, 312–13, 318 Past tense and -d, -ed endings, 297–98 defined, 301, 312, 318 of irregular verbs, 288–92 vs. past perfect, 304 of regular verbs, 288, 297 Patterns of organization. See Paragraph patterns PDF documents, as sources, 471 Peer reviewers. See Reviewers; Revising with comments Percentages, numerals for, 414. See also Statistics percent, per cent, percentage, 800 Perfect progressive forms, 302, 313, 319 Perfect tenses, 301, 304, 313, 318–19 Period, 400–01 with abbreviations, 401, 410 with ellipsis mark, 406 to end a sentence, 400–01 with quotation marks, 395 Periodicals. See also Articles in periodicals capitalization for titles of, 434 APA style, 670, 673 italics for titles of, 416

Index– 25 Personal pronouns case of, 268–74 defined, 749–50 Person and number shifts in, avoiding, 169–71 and subject-verb agreement, 243–46 Persons, names of. See Nouns Persuasive writing. See Argument papers phenomena, 800 Photographs, using in documents, 733–37 Phrasal verbs. See Particles, with verbs Phrases. See also Phrases, types of dangling, 165–69 empty or inflated, 199–200 fragmented, 230 introductory, comma after, 355–56 misplaced, 161–62 as modifiers, 776–79 nonrestrictive, with commas, 361–65 restrictive, with no commas, 361–65, 374–75 separating subject and verb, 163 Phrases, types of. See also Phrases absolute, 780 appositive, 779–80 gerund, 777–78 infinitive, 778–79 participial, 777 prepositional, 773–75 verbal, 776–79 physics (singular), 253 Pictures, using in documents, 733–37 Places, names of. See Nouns Plagiarism, avoiding in APA papers, 625–29 in Chicago papers, 689–93 and drafting, 34 and integrating sources, 486–87, 578–81 and Internet sources, 485, 488, 735 in literature papers, 610 in MLA papers, 498–503, 580–82 and note taking, 482–88, 507, 578–81 reviewer comments about, 507

Planning an essay, 2–25, 597–98. See also Outlines plan to do (not on doing), 220 Plays, titles of capitalization of, 434 italics for, 416 Plot summary, avoiding, in writing about literature, 600–01 Plurals. See also Agreement of pronoun and antecedent; Agreement of subject and verb of abbreviations, 389–90 of compound nouns, 388 of letters used as letters, 389 of numbers used as numbers, 389 spelling of, 425–26 of words used as words, 389–90 plus, 800 PM, AM, p.m., a.m., 411 Podcast, citing in paper APA style, 661 Chicago style, 710–11 MLA style, 559 Poems slash to separate lines of, 407, 606–07 titles of capitalization of, 434 quotation marks for, 394 Point, main. See Focus; Thesis Point of view consistency in, 40, 46–49, 78–79, 169–71 in humanities papers, 134 opposing, in arguments, 111–14, 126–28 in science and social science papers, 134 in writing for different disciplines, 49, 134 politics (singular), 253 Portfolio, preparing process vs. evaluation portfolio, 59–60 reflective essay for, 60–61 Position, stating, 30

Index– 26 Possessive case apostrophe for, 387–88 used with gerund, 272–73 Possessive pronouns defined, 750 no apostrophe in, 390 post hoc fallacy, 122 precede, proceed, 800 Predicate compound, 231 defined, 231, 763 fragmented, 231 Predicate adjective. See Subject complement Predicate noun. See Subject complement Predication, faulty, 158 preferable to (not than), 220 Prefixes, hyphen after, 429 Premises, in deductive reasoning, 124–25 Prepositional phrases defined, 773–74 fragmented, 230 restrictive vs. nonrestrictive, 364 between subject and verb, 247 Prepositions after adjectives, 351 at, in, on to show time and place, 348–49 defined, 757–58 followed by nouns or -ing forms, not verbs, 350 in idioms, 219–20, 348–52 list of, 757 objects of, 773–75 repeating, for parallel structure, 150 after verbs, 351–52, 753–54 Present participles as adjectives, 344–45 in gerund phrases, 777–78 in participial phrases, 777 vs. past participles, 344–45 and progressive forms, 302, 312–13 and sequence of tenses, 304–05 Present perfect tense, 301, 304, 313, 318

Present progressive form, 302, 312, 318 Present tense, 301, 311 in science writing, 302–03 subject-verb agreement, 243–54 and tense shifts, avoiding, 171–72, 604–05 in writing about literature, 134, 171–72, 302–03, 601–02, 604–05 Pretentious language, 205–06 Previewing sources, 467–69, 578 Prewriting strategies, 13–19 Primary sources in literature papers, 609, 611–13, 615–20 vs. secondary sources, 469–70 principal, principle, 800 Print indexes, of periodicals, 450 prior to (not than), 220 proceed. See precede, proceed, 800 Process as pattern of organization, 70 of writing an essay drafting, 25–35 planning, 2–25 revising, 35–59 of writing a research paper, highlights of, 572–82 Progressive forms, 302, 312–13, 318–19 Pronoun/adjectives, 749 Pronoun-antecedent agreement, 256–62 with collective nouns (jury, class, etc.), 258–60 with compounds with and, 260 with compounds with either . . . or, neither . . . nor, 260–61 with indefinite pronouns (anyone, each, etc.), 256–57 sexist language with, avoiding, 259 Pronoun case I vs. me etc., 268–74 who vs. whom, 275–79 you vs. your etc., 272–73 Pronoun reference, 262–67 ambiguous, 262–63 broad this, that, which, it, 263–64

Index– 27 implied, 264 indefinite they, it, you, 265 remote, 262–63 unstated antecedent, 264 who (not that, which) for persons, 265–66, 803 Pronouns. See also Pronouns, types of adjectives with, 754–55 agreement of verbs with, 243–55 agreement with antecedents, 256–62 as appositives, 270 case (I vs. me etc.), 268–74 defined, 749 lists of, 750–51 as objects, 269–70 pronoun/adjectives, 749 reference, 262–67 shifts in person and number, avoiding, 169–71 singular vs. plural, 256–62 as subjects, 268–69 who, whom, 275–79 Pronouns, types of, 749–51. See also Pronouns demonstrative, 751 indefinite, 751 intensive, 750 interrogative, 750 personal, 749–50 possessive, 272–73, 750 reciprocal, 751 reflexive, 750 relative, 750, 781, 783 Pronunciation, in dictionary entry, 420–21 Proofreading, 51 Proper nouns, 329, 748 capitalization of, 432–33 the with, 334–35 Public writing, audience for, 11 Punctuation, 354–408 apostrophe. See Apostrophes brackets. See Brackets colon. See Colons

comma. See Commas; Commas, unnecessary dash. See Dashes ellipsis mark. See Ellipsis mark for emphasis, 190 exclamation point. See Exclamation points parentheses. See Parentheses period. See Periods quotation marks. See Quotation marks with quotation marks, 395–97 semicolon. See Semicolons Purpose in writing, 3, 7–8, 463

Q Quantifiers with noncount nouns, 333–34 Question mark, 401–02 and MLA citation, 396, 519 no comma with, 377 with quotation marks, 396 Questionnaires, as information source, 7, 461–62 Questions adding for variety, 194 direct and indirect, 174, 401–02 pronouns for, 750 punctuation of, 401–02 recognizing in assignments, 9 subject in, 765, 771–72 Questions to ask for assignments in the disciplines, 130–32 to generate ideas, 17–18 about literature, 593–95, 596 about a research subject, 440–42, 573, 622, 686 Quotation marks, 392–400. See also Quotations to avoid plagiarism, 486–87 with direct quotations (exact language), 392–93, 485 misuses of, 398

Index– 28 Quotation marks (cont.) not used with indented quotations, 393–94 other punctuation with, 395–97 single, 394 with titles of works, 394 APA style, 670 Chicago style, 714 MLA style, 570 with words used as words, 394–95 quotation, quote. See quote, quotation, 801 Quotations. See also Quotation marks adding for variety, 194 in APA papers accuracy of, 630–31 appropriate use of, 629–31 avoiding plagiarism in, 626–28 brackets with, 631 citing, 625–26, 638–69 dropped, avoiding, 632–34 ellipsis mark with, 630–31 embedding, 635 indenting, 631–32 integrating, 629–35 long (indented), 631–32, 670–71, 682 quotation marks for, 627–28 sic for errors in, 631 signal phrase with, 632–34, 635 synthesizing, 635–38 in argument papers, 127–28 capitalization in, 435 in Chicago papers accuracy of, 694–95 appropriate use of, 693–96 avoiding plagiarism in, 690–93 brackets with, 695 citing, 689–90, 699–713 dropped, avoiding, 696–98 ellipsis mark with, 694–95 embedding, 698–99 indenting, 695–96 integrating, 693–99 long (indented), 695–96, 714–15, 720

quotation marks for, 691 sic for errors in, 695 with signal phrase, 696–99 direct and indirect, 174, 392–93, 398 ellipsis marks to indicate cuts in, 406–07 integrating, 485–87, 502 from literature, 602–08 long (indented), 393–94 in MLA papers accuracy of, 505–06 appropriate use of, 504–08 avoiding plagiarism in, 498–503 brackets with, 506 citing, 498–503, 517–68 dropped, avoiding, 509–10 ellipsis mark with, 505–06 embedding, 512 indenting, 506–08 integrating, 504–10, 512–16, 580–81 long (indented), 506–08, 570, 584, 606–08, 616 quotation marks for, 500–01 sic for errors in, 506 with signal phrase, 508–10, 512, 581 synthesizing, 512–15 punctuation of, 392–400 within quotations, 394 quote, quotation, 800

R raise, rise, 800 Readability, document design for, 729–33 Readers, engaging, 26, 45 Reading active and critical, 86–89, 589–92 evaluating arguments, 118–29 evaluating sources, 462–78, 576–78 previewing sources, 467–69, 576, 578 real, really, 282–83, 800

Index– 29 Reasoning. See also Argument papers deductive, 124–25 inductive, 119–21 logical fallacies, 118–26 reason . . . is because (nonstandard), 159, 800 reason why (nonstandard), 800 Reciprocal pronouns, 751 Red herring fallacy, 126 Redundancies, 198–99 Reference list (APA) directory to models for, 645–46 formatting, 672–73 models for, 647–69 sample, 683 Reference of pronouns. See Pronoun reference Reference works, 458–59 Reflective writing, for a portfolio, 59–61 Reflexive pronouns, 750 Regional expressions, 208–10 Regular verbs -d, -ed endings on, 297–98 defined, 288, 753 -s form of, 294–95 relation, relationship, 800 Relative adverbs defined, 781 introducing adjective clauses, 340–41, 781 Relative pronouns in adjective clauses, 340–41, 781 agreement with verb, 252–53 defined, 750, 783 in noun clauses, 783 who, whom, 275–79 Repetition of function words, for parallel structure, 150 of key words, 76–77 unnecessary ideas, 198–99 nouns and pronouns, 339–40 objects or adverbs, 340–41 words, 199

Requests, subjunctive mood for, 307 Researched writing. See also Researching a topic; Research process, highlights of APA papers, 621–84 Chicago papers, 685–726 MLA papers, 491–620 sample student papers, 583–88, 611–13, 615–20, 674–83, 718–26 Researching a topic, 438–91. See also Researched writing; Research process, highlights of bibliography annotated, sample entry, 479 scholarly, 459–60 working, 478–79, 480–81 catalog, library, 451–53, 465, 574 databases and indexes, 443–50, 574 documentation styles, differences in, 488–90 evaluating sources, 462–78, 576–78 field research, 460–62 getting started, 438–39, 573–74 keeping records and copies of sources, 478–82, 582 keyword searches, 448–50, 451–53, 575 library resources, 442–53, 458–60, 574 library Web site, 443 managing information, 478–88, 578 narrowing the focus, 441–42 note taking, 482–88, 577–81 planning, 438–39, 573–74 questionnaires, 461–62 reading critically, 472–74, 576–78 reading selectively, 464–70 reference librarians, 442–43, 573 reference works, 458–59 research questions, 440–42, 573 schedule for, 438–39 search strategy, 442–46, 574 shortcuts to related sources, 459–60 Web resources, 453–58

Index– 30 Research process, highlights of, 572–82 keyword searches, 575 note taking, 577–81 paraphrases, 580 plagiarism, avoiding, 580–82 planning, 573–74 quotations, 580–81 research question, 573 sources documenting, 582 evaluating, 576–78 finding, 574–75 integrating, 578–81 previewing, 575–78 selecting, 575–76 uses of, 573–74 summaries, 578–80 respectfully, respectively, 801 Restrictive elements, no commas with, 374–75 Résumés, 742–44 Reviewers, 4, 12, 38, 42. See also Revising with comments Review of the literature (APA style), sample, 674–83 Revising with comments “Be specific,” 33 “Cite your sources,” 507 “Consider opposing viewpoints,” 113 “Develop more,” 110 “More than one point in this paragraph,” 65 “Narrow your introduction,” 45 “Need a transition,” 80 “Summarize less, analyze more,” 96–97 “Unclear thesis,” 30 “Your words?” 502 Revision 35–59. See also Revising with comments global (big-picture), 35–49 sentence-level, 37, 49–51 software tools for, 51, 419 rise. See raise, rise, 800 Run-on sentences finding, 235–37

fixing with comma and coordinating conjunction, 238 by making two sentences, 240 by restructuring, 240–41 with semicolon, 238–39

S -s and apostrophe, 387–91 and spelling, 425–26 as verb ending, 244, 245–46, 294–95 Sample essays. See also Research process, highlights of analysis writing about a literary text, 611–13, 615–20 writing about a text, 98–100 writing about a visual, 100–03 argument, 115–18 in the disciplines, excerpts business proposal, 139 lab report, 138 nursing practice paper, 137 psychology literature review, 136 research APA style, 674–83 Chicago style, 718–26 MLA style, 583–88 Scholarly sources, 468 Sciences, writing in the, 129–35, 137–38 Scientific facts, and verb tense, 302–03 Scores, numerals for, 414 Search engines, 449, 454 Search strategy, 442–46 Secondary sources in literature paper, 609–10, 615–20 vs. primary sources, 469–70 Second-person point of view, 46–49, 169–70 self-, hyphen with, 429 Self-assessment, in portfolio, 59–61 Semicolons, 379–84 with commas, 381

Index– 31 to correct run-on sentences, 238–39 and independent clauses, 379 misuse of, 381–82 with quotation marks, 395 with series, 381 transitional expressions with, 380–81 sensual, sensuous, 801 Sentence endings, for emphasis, 189–90 Sentence fragments, 226–34 Sentence purposes, 787 Sentences. See also Sentence types choppy, coordination and subordination for, 182–83 conditional, 320–23 fragments. See Fragments fused. See Run-on sentences incomplete, 226–34 inverted (verb before subject), 193–94, 251, 338–39, 765, 772 logical, 158–59 patterns of, 763–73 revising and editing, 49–51 run-on. See Run-on sentences short, for emphasis, 191 thesis. See Thesis topic, 62–66 transitional, 79–82 variety in, 191–96 wordy, 198–203 Sentence structure ESL challenges with adjectives, placement of, 346–47 adverbs, placement of, 343 although, because, 342–43 linking verb between subject and subject complement, 337 present participle vs. past participle, 344–45 repetition of object or adverb, avoiding, 340–41 repetition of subject, avoiding, 339–40 subject, needed, 338–39 there, it, 338–39

mixed constructions, 156–60 simplifying, 200–01 variety in, 191–96 Sentence types, 785–88 complex, 786–87 compound, 786 compound-complex, 787 declarative, 787 exclamatory, 787 imperative, 787 interrogative, 787 simple, 785–86 Series commas with, 358–59 parallelism and, 147–48 parentheses with, 405 questions in, 402 semicolon with, 381 set, sit, 801 Sexist language, avoiding, 211–15, 257–59 shall, as modal verb, 314–16, 753 shall, will, 801 she, her, hers, sexist use of, 212 she said, he said, comma with, 368 she vs. her, 268–74 Shifts, avoiding from indirect to direct questions or quotations, 174 in mood or voice, 173 in point of view (person and number), 169–71 in verb tense, 171–72, 604–05 Ships, italics for names of, 417 Short stories, titles of capitalization of, 434 quotation marks for, 394 should, as modal verb, 314–16, 321, 753 should of (nonstandard), 801 Showing, not telling, 96–97 sic, 405 in APA paper, 631 in Chicago paper, 695 in MLA paper, 506

Index– 32 Signal phrases APA style, 632–35 Chicago style, 696–99 MLA style, 508–12, 581 Simile, 222–23 Simple sentences, 785–86 Simple subjects, 764 Simple tenses, 301, 311–12, 318 since, 801 sit. See set, sit, 801 site. See cite, site, 793 Slang, avoiding, 208–10 Slash with lines of poetry, 407, 606–07 with paired terms, 407 so comma with, 354–55 as coordinating conjunction, 758 Social sciences, writing in, 129–36. See also APA papers Software. See Word processing programs some, 249 somebody, someone, something (singular), 249, 257–59, 801 something (singular), 801 sometime, some time, sometimes, 801 Songs, titles of, quotation marks for, 394 sort of. See kind of, sort of, 798 Sound-alike words. See Homophones Sources documenting, 507. See also APA papers; Chicago papers; MLA papers evaluating, 462–78, 575–78 finding, 446–60, 574–75 integrating, 486–87, 502 in APA papers, 629–38 in Chicago papers, 693–99 in MLA papers, 504–16, 578–81 introducing. See Signal phrases list of. See Bibliography, Chicago style; Reference list (APA); Works cited (MLA) and purpose of research project, 445–46, 573–74 scholarly, 468 selecting, 464–72, 575–76

synthesizing in APA papers, 635–38 in MLA papers, 512–15 uses of, 463 in APA papers, 623–25 in Chicago papers, 687–89 in MLA papers, 494–96 of visuals, crediting, 735 Spacecraft, italics for names of, 417 Spacing. See Line spacing Specific nouns, 217–18 the with, 328–31 Spell checkers, 51, 419 Spelling, 418–28 Split infinitives, 164 Squinting modifiers, 161–62. See also Misplaced modifiers Standard English, 208–10 Statements contrary to fact, 305–07, 320–23 statistics (singular), 253 Statistics in APA papers, 634–35 in argument papers, 109 in Chicago papers, 698 in MLA papers, 511–12 numerals for, 414 Stereotypes, avoiding, 119, 215–16 Strategies for revising. See Revising with comments Straw man fallacy, 127 Student essays. See Sample essays Subject, grammatical and agreement with verb, 243–55 case of, 268–69 complete, 763–64 compound, 764 following verb, 193–94, 251, 338–39, 765, 772 identifying, 252 of infinitive, 272 naming the actor (active voice), 143, 145–46, 772 naming the receiver (passive voice), 143, 145–46, 773 pronoun as, 268–69

Index– 33 in questions, 765, 771–72 repeated, 339–40 required in sentences, 338–39 separated from verb, 163 simple, 764 singular vs. plural, 294–95 understood (you), 338, 764–65, 772 Subject, of paper exploring, 3, 4–6, 13–19 narrowing, 3, 5, 441–42 of research paper, 440–42 Subject complements adjectives as, 280–81, 767 case of pronouns as, 268–69 defined, 766 and subject-verb agreement, 252 Subjective case, of pronouns, 268–69 who, whom, 275–79 Subjects, of field research, 460 Subject-verb agreement. See Agreement of subject and verb Subjunctive mood, 305–07. See also Conditional sentences Subordinate clauses, 780–85 adjective (beginning with who, that, etc.), 780–81 adverb (beginning with if, when, where, etc.), 782–83 avoiding repeated elements in, 340–41 combined with independent clauses, 786–87 defined, 780, 785 fragmented, 229–30 minor ideas in, 186–87 misplaced, 161–62 noun, 783–84 and sentence types, 786–87 words introducing, 781, 783–84 Subordinate word groups, 773–85 Subordinating conjunctions, 758, 782 Subordination for combining ideas of unequal importance, 177–83 of major ideas, avoiding, 186–87 overuse of, 187

for restructuring run-on sentences, 240–41 for restructuring sentence fragments, 228–32 Subtitles of works capitalization of, 434 APA style, 673 colon between title and, 385 such as no colon after, 386 no comma after, 377 and sentence fragments, 231 Suffixes hyphen before, 429 spelling rules for, 424–25 Summary vs. analysis, 96–97 in APA papers, 628–29, 634–35, 640 in Chicago papers, 691–92, 698 integrating, 486–87, 502 in MLA papers, 499–503, 508–12, 578–79 no quotation marks for, 392 and note taking, 483–84, 578–79 writing, 91–93, 578–79 superior to (not than), 220 Superlative form of adjectives and adverbs, 284–85 Support. See Evidence suppose to (nonstandard), 801 sure and (nonstandard), 220, 801 Surveys, as information source, 461–62 Syllables, division of words into, 419, 430–31 Synonyms, 216–17 Synthesizing sources in APA papers, 635–38 in MLA papers, 512–15

T Tables, using in documents, 733–37 in APA papers, 671–72, 679 in Chicago papers, 715 in MLA papers, 571

Index– 34 take. See bring, take, 792 Taking notes. See Note taking Talking and listening, to generate ideas, 14, 591–92 teach. See learn, teach, 798 Teacher’s comments, responding to. See Revising with comments team. See Collective nouns Tenses, verb, 300–05, 310–14 in active voice, 311–13 and agreement with subject, 243–55 in APA papers, 303, 632 in Chicago papers, 696 conditional, 320–22 in the disciplines, 134 ESL challenges with, 310–13, 318–22 in literature papers, 601–02, 604–05 in MLA papers, 302–03, 508–12 in passive voice, 318–19 present in writing about literature, 134, 171–72, 302–03, 601–02, 604–05 in writing about science, 302–03 sequence of, 304–05 shifts in, avoiding, 171–72, 604–05 Texts, visual analyzing, 93–97 sample paper, 100–03 writing about, 86–97 Texts, written analyzing, 93–97 sample paper, 97–100 writing about, 86–97 than needed words in comparisons with, 153–54 no comma before, 377 parallelism with, 149 pronoun after, 271 than, then, 802 that agreement of verb with, 252–53 broad reference of, 263–64 needed word, 150, 152

vs. which, 363, 803 vs. who, 265–66, 803 the. See also Articles (a, an, the) ESL challenges with, 327–31, 332, 334–36 with geographic names, 335–36 omission of, 155, 334–35 with proper nouns, 335 their misuse of, with singular antecedent, 256–58 vs. there, they’re, 802 vs. they, 802 theirselves (nonstandard), 802 them vs. they, 268–74 them vs. those, 802 then, than. See than, then, 802 the number, a number, 250 there, as expletive (placeholder) not used as subject, 339 and sentence order (verb before subject), 338–39, 765, 772 and subject-verb agreement, 251 with verb, 338–39 and wordy sentences, 201 therefore comma with, 366–67 semicolon with, 380–81 there, their, they’re, 802 Thesis in analysis papers, 94–97 in APA papers, 621–22 in argument papers, 107 in Chicago papers, 685–86 drafting, 19–21, 573–74, 578 in essays, 19–21, 25–32, 43 in literature paper, 595–97 in MLA papers, 492–93, 496–97, 573–74 revising, 27–32 testing, 21 working, 19–21 they indefinite reference of, 265 vs. I or you, 169–70

Index– 35 misuse of, with singular antecedent, 256–58 nonstandard for their, 802 vs. them, 268–74 they’re. See there, their, they’re, 802 Third-person point of view, 46–49, 169–70 this, broad reference of, 263–64 this kind. See kind(s), 798 Time abbreviations for, 411 colon with, 385 numerals for, 415 Title page for APA paper formatting, 670 sample, for publication, 684 sample, for student paper, 675 for Chicago paper formatting, 714 sample, 718 for MLA paper (optional) formatting, 569 Titles of persons abbreviations with names, 410 capitalization of, 434 comma with, 369–70 Titles of works capitalization of, 434 in APA papers, 670, 673 in Chicago papers, 714 in MLA papers, 531, 570 italics for, 416–17 in APA papers, 670, 673 in Chicago papers, 714 in MLA papers, 531, 570 quotation marks for, 394 in APA papers, 670, 673 in Chicago papers, 714 in MLA papers, 531, 570 treated as singular, 254 to needed word, 150 as preposition vs. infinitive marker, 350

Tone (voice). See also Language in argument paper, 105 in e-mail, 746 and global revision, 41 in research paper, 497–98 Topic exploring, 4–6 narrowing, 3, 5, 45, 441–42 Topic sentence, 62–66 to, too, two, 802 toward, towards, 802 Transfer fallacy, 126 Transitional expressions commas with, 366–67 list of, 380 semicolon with, 380–81 Transitions, for coherence, 79–83 Transitive verbs, 319, 767–68, 772 Trite expressions. See Clichés troop. See Collective nouns try and (nonstandard), 220, 802 Tutors, working with. See Reviewers; Revising with comments two. See to, too, two, 802 type of (not of a), 220 Typing. See Document design

U ultimately. See eventually, ultimately, 795 Unclear thesis, revising, 30 Underlining. See Italics Understood subject (you), 338, 764–65, 772 uninterested. See disinterested, uninterested, 794 unique, 285, 802 Unity. See Focus URLs (Web addresses) citing APA style, 656 Chicago style, 701 MLA style (optional), 548–49

Index– 36 URLs (Web addresses) (cont.) dividing, 431 APA style, 673 Chicago style, 715 MLA style, 570–71, 572 Usage Glossary of, 789–803 labels in dictionary, 422–23 usage, 802 use to (nonstandard), 802 Using sources in APA papers, 623–25 in Chicago papers, 687–89 in MLA papers, 494–96 highlights of one student’s research process, 574, 578–81 Using the library. See Library resources us vs. we, 268–74 utilize, 802

V Vague thesis, revising, 30 Variety in sentences, 191–96 in signal phrases, 509, 633, 697 Verbal phrases, 776–79 fragmented, 230 gerund, 777–78 infinitive, 778–79 participial, 777 Verbs. See also Verbs, types of adverbs as modifiers, 755–56 agreement with subjects, 243–55 be, forms of, vs. active, 144–45 compound predicates, 231 in conditional sentences, 320–23 -d, -ed ending on, 297–98 defined, 752 ESL challenges with. See English as a second language (ESL), verbs followed by gerunds or infinitives, 323–26 forms of, 310–14, 319–20 mood of, 305–07

needed, 298–99 negative forms of, 319–20 without objects, 769–70 with prepositions (idioms), 351–52 separated from subjects, 163 -s form of, 244, 245–46, 294–95 shifts in tense, mood, voice, avoiding, 171–73 in signal phrases APA style, 633 Chicago style, 697 MLA style, 509 with singular vs. plural subjects, 294–95 standard forms of, 288–92 strong, vs. be and passive verbs, 142–45, 200–01 before subjects (inverted sentence), 193–94, 251, 338–39, 765 tenses of. See Tenses, verb two-word, 753–54 voice (active, passive), 142–44, 317–19, 772–73 Verbs, types of. See also Verbs active, 142–47, 311–13, 772–73 helping. See Helping verbs intransitive (no direct object), 769–70 irregular, 288–92, 310–11, 753 linking, 280–81, 337, 766–67 main, 243, 300–05, 314–15, 753–54 modal. See Modal verbs passive, 142–44, 317–19, 773 phrasal. See Particles, with verbs regular, 288, 297–98, 310–11, 753 transitive (with direct object), 767–68, 772 Video clip, online, citing in paper APA style, 664 Chicago style, 711 MLA style, 556 Viewpoints, differing, in arguments, 111–14, 126–28 Visuals, in documents choosing, 733–34, 736–37 citing sources of, 735

Index– 37 and document design, 733–37 labeling, 735 APA style, 671–72 Chicago style, 715 MLA style, 571 placement of, 735 purposes for, 736–37 Visual texts. See Texts, visual Vocabulary, specialized, 133–35 Voice active vs. passive, 142–44, 311–13, 317–19, 767–68, 772–73 shifts between active and passive, avoiding, 173

W wait for, wait on, 802 was vs. were, 245 in conditional sentences, 320–23 and subject-verb agreement, 243–55, 296 and subjunctive mood, 305–07 ways, 803 we vs. us, 268–74 vs. you or they, 169–70 weather, whether, 803 Web, World Wide. See Electronic sources; Internet Weblog (blog) citing in paper APA style, 661 Chicago style, 710 MLA style, 555–56 to explore ideas, 19 as information source, 457, 576 well, good, 282–83. See also good, well, 796 were, in conditional sentences, 305–07, 322 were vs. was. See was vs. were when clauses, 305–07, 320–23 where vs. that, 803 whether. See if, whether, 797; weather, whether, 803

whether . . . or, 149, 758 which agreement of verb with, 252–53 broad reference of, 263–64 vs. that, 363, 802, 803 vs. who, 265–66, 803 while, 803 who agreement of verb with, 252–53 omission of, 152 vs. which or that, 265–66, 803 vs. whom, 275–79, 803 who’s, whose, 423, 803 Wiki APA citation of, 664 as information source, 457–58 MLA citation of, 558 Wikipedia, as source, 457–58 will, as modal verb, 314–15, 317, 321, 753 will, shall. See shall, will, 801 Wishes, subjunctive mood for, 307 Word groups. See Dependent clauses; Independent clauses; Phrases Wordiness, 198–203 Word processing programs and automatic division of words, 430–31 and document design, 728–30 grammar checkers, general advice about, 51 spell checkers, 51, 419 Words. See also Language; Spelling abstract vs. concrete, 217–18 antonyms (opposites), 422 colloquial, 210, 422–23 compound, 419, 428 confused, 218–19. See also Glossary of Usage connotation and denotation of, 216–17 division of, 419, 430–31 foreign, italics for, 417 general vs. specific, 217–18 homophones (sound-alike), 423 invented, 208

Index– 38 Words (cont.) meaning of, 216–17, 422 misuse of, 218–19 needed. See Needed words obsolete, 208 origin of (etymology), 422 sound-alike. See Homophones spelling of, 418–28 suffixes (endings) of, 424, 429 synonyms (words with similar meanings), 216–17, 422 unnecessary repetition of, 199 using your own, 92–93, 501–03 Words used as words italics for, 417 plural of, 389–90 quotation marks for, 394–95 treated as singular, 254 Work in an anthology. See Anthology, selection in Working bibliography, 478–79 Working thesis. See Thesis, drafting Works cited list (MLA) directory to models for, 530–31 formatting, 571–72 models for, 532–68 sample, 588, 620 World Wide Web. See Electronic sources; Internet Worn-out expressions. See Clichés would, as modal verb, 314–15, 317, 753 would of (nonstandard), 803 Writing in the disciplines. See also Academic writing

asking questions, 130–32 assignments business proposal, 137 lab report, 138 nursing practice paper, 139–40 psychology literature review, 136 choosing a citation style, 135 language conventions, 133–35 using evidence, 132–33 Writing process. See also Research process, highlights of drafting, 25–35 planning, 2–25 revising, 35–39 Writing situation, 2–13 Writing tutors, working with. See Revising with comments

Y yes, no, commas with, 368 yet comma before, 354–55 as coordinating conjunction, 758 you appropriate use of, 169–70, 265 inappropriate use of, 265, 803 vs. I or they, 169–70 and shifts in point of view, avoiding, 169–70 understood, 338, 764–65, 772 your, you’re, 803 YouTube, as source. See Video clip

ESL Menu A complete section on major ESL challenges:

ESL and Academic English notes in other sections:

VI Challenges for ESL and Multilingual Writers

I The Writing Process

28 a b c d e f

Verbs

310

Form and tense Base form after modal Passive voice Negative forms Conditional sentences With gerunds or infinitives

310 314 317 319 320

The writing situation Using a direct approach Choosing transitions

II Academic Writing Making an argument 105 Avoiding hasty generalizations 121

323

III Clear Sentences

29 Articles a Articles and other noun markers b When to use the c When to use a or an d When not to use a or an e With general nouns f With proper nouns

327

Passive voice Missing words Articles Double subjects, repeated objects Adverb placement Repeated objects or adverbs

30 Sentence structure a Linking verb with subject and complement b Omitted subjects c Repeated nouns, pronouns d Repeated objects, adverbs e Mixed constructions f Adverb placement g Present and past participles h Order of adjectives

337

327 328 331 333 334 335

3 27 79

142 151 155 158 163 183

IV Word Choice Idioms

220

V Grammatical Sentences 337 338 339 340 342 343 344 346

31 Prepositions and

Omitted subjects, verbs Pronoun-antecedent gender agreement Adjective and adverb placement No plural adjectives Omitted verbs Verb tenses

228 256 280 280 299 302

VIII Mechanics American and British English spelling

idiomatic expressions

348

a at, on, in b Noun (-ing form) after preposition c Adjective + preposition d Verb + preposition

348

IX Researched Writing

350 351 351

Researching with an open mind Recognizing intellectual property

425

472 483

A List of Charts Anticipating and countering objections

112

Revising with comments: Consider opposing viewpoints

113

Testing inductive reasoning

120

21

Evidence typically used in various disciplines

133

Guidelines for constructing an outline

24

Point of view and verb tense in academic writing

134

Revising with comments: Unclear thesis

30

III Clear Sentences

Revising with comments: Be specific

33

Checking for dangling modifiers

167

Guidelines for peer reviewers

38

Checklist for global revision

40

Guidelines for using reviewers’ comments

Using coordination to combine sentences of equal importance

179

42

Revising with comments: Narrow your introduction

45

Using subordination to combine sentences of unequal importance

180

Writing a reflective opening statement for your portfolio

61

Revising with comments: More than one point in this paragraph

65

Revising with comments: Need a transition

80

Common transitions

81

When to use the -s (or -es) form of a present-tense verb 246

I The Writing Process Checklist for assessing the writing situation

3

Ways to narrow a subject to a topic

5

Understanding an assignment

9

Testing a working thesis

V Grammatical Sentences

II Academic Writing

Test for fragments

227

Recognizing run-on sentences

236

Subject-verb agreement at a glance

245

Choosing a revision strategy that avoids sexist language

259

Checking for problems with who and whom

278

Guidelines for active reading

87

Guidelines for writing a summary

93

Guidelines for analyzing a text

95

Revising with comments: Summarize less, analyze more

96

Verb tenses commonly used in the active voice

311

110

Modals and their meanings

316

Revising with comments: Develop more

VI Challenges for ESL and Multilingual Writers Basic verb forms

311

Verb tenses commonly used in the passive voice

318 329

MLA citation at a glance: Selection from an anthology

Types of nouns

540

Choosing articles for common nouns

332

MLA citation at a glance: Article in a periodical

546

333

MLA citation at a glance: Short work from a Web site

550

MLA citation at a glance: Article from a database

552

Questions to ask about literature

594

Using signal phrases in APA papers

634

Directory to APA in-text citation models

639

IX Researched Writing

Directory to APA references (bibliographic entries)

645

Refining keyword searches

650

Commonly used noncount nouns the with geographic nouns

336

Order of cumulative adjectives 347 at, on, in to show time and place

349

Adjective + preposition combinations

351

Verb + preposition combinations

352

449

APA citation at a glance: Article in a periodical

Determining if a source is scholarly

468

APA citation at a glance: Book

654

Evaluating all sources

473

Evaluating Web sources

475

APA citation at a glance: Article from a database

658

Information for a working bibliography

480

APA citation at a glance: Section in a Web document

662

486

Using signal phrases in Chicago papers

697

Directory to Chicago-style notes and bibliography entries

703

Integrating and citing sources to avoid plagiarism Revising with comments: Your words?

502

Revising with comments: Cite your sources

507

Using signal phrases in MLA papers

509

Reviewing an MLA paper: Use of sources

516

Directory to MLA in-text citation models

519

Directory to MLA works cited models

Parts of speech

760

530

Sentence patterns

769

536

Words that introduce subordinate clauses

783

MLA citation at a glance: Book

X Document Design Choosing visuals to suit your purpose

736

XI Grammar Basics

Revision Symbols Boldface numbers refer to sections of the handbook.

BCCS BEK BEE BEW BHS BQQS BSU BXL DBQ DBTF DMJDIn DPI DPPSE DT EFW EN FE FNQI &4FYBDU GSBH GT HMVT IZQI JEJPN JOD

Q ? OP

punctuation comma 32 no comma 33 semicolon 34 colon 35 © apostrophe 36 Ò ¦§ quotation marks 37 period, question mark 38 exclamation point 38 ¥ dash, parentheses 39 brackets, ellipsis mark 39 slash 39 new paragraph 3e QBTT ineffective passive 8 QOBHS pronoun agreement 22 QSPPG proofreading problem 2b SFG pronoun reference 23 SVOPO run-on sentence 20 T -s ending 27c, 21 TFYJTU sexist language 17f, 22a TIJGU distracting shift 13 TM slang 17d TQ misspelled word 43 TVC subordination 14 TWBHS subject-verb agreement 21, 27c U verb tense 27f, 28a USBOT transition needed 3d VTBHF see Glossary of Usage W voice 8a, 28c WBS lack of variety in sentence structure 14, 15 WC verb problem 27, 28 X wordy 16 parallelism 9 insert ? insert space close up space

JSSFH JUBM KBSH MD NJY NN NPPE OPOTU OVN PN

abbreviation 40 misuse of adjective 26 add needed word 10 misuse of adverb 26 agreement 21, 22 inappropriate language 17 article (a, an, the) 29 awkward capital letter 45 pronoun case 24, 25 cliché 18e coherence 3d coordination 14 comma splice 20 inadequate development 3b dangling modifier 12e -ed ending 27d emphasis 14 English as a second language 28–31 inexact language 18 sentence fragment 19 fused sentence 20 see Glossary of Usage hyphen 44 idioms 18d incomplete construction 10 irregular verb 27a italics 42 jargon 17a lowercase 45 mixed construction 11 misplaced modifier 12a–d mood of verb 27g nonstandard usage 17d, 27 use of numbers 41 omitted word 10, 29, 30a–b

A List of Grammatical Terms Boldface numbers refer to sections of the handbook. absolute phrase 63d active voice 8a, 62c adjective 61d adjective clause 63e adverb 61e adverb clause 63e agreement 21, 22 antecedent 22, 23, 61b appositive phrase 63c article (a, an, the) 29 case 24, 25 clause 63e, 64a comparative 26d complement 62b complete subject 62a complex sentence 64a compound-complex sentence 64a compound sentence 64a compound subject 62a conjunction 61g conjunctive adverb 61g coordinating conjunction 61g correlative conjunction 61g demonstrative pronoun 61b dependent clause (See subordinate clause.) determiner 29 direct object 62b expletive 62a, 62c future tense 27f gerund 63b gerund phrase 63b helping verb 61c

indefinite pronoun 61b independent clause 64a indirect object 62b infinitive 63b infinitive phrase 63b intensive pronoun 61b interjection 61h interrogative pronoun 61b intransitive verb 62b inverted sentence pattern 62a irregular verb 27a linking verb 62b main clause (See independent clause.) main verb 61c modal 28b, 61c mood 27g noun 61a noun/adjective 61a noun clause 63e object complement 62b object of the preposition 63a particle 61c participial phrase 63b participle, present and past 27a, 30g, 61c parts of speech 61 passive voice 8a, 62c past tense 27f perfect tense 27f personal pronoun 61b possessive pronoun 61b

predicate 62 predicate adjective (See subject complement.) predicate noun (See subject complement.) preposition 61f prepositional phrase 61f, 63a present tense 27f progressive forms 27f pronoun 61b pronoun/ adjective 61b reciprocal pronoun 61b reflexive pronoun 61b regular verb 27a, 61c relative adverb 63e relative pronoun 61b, 63e -s form of verbs 21, 27c sentence patterns 62 sentence types 64 simple sentence 64a simple subject 62a subject 62a subject complement 62b subordinate clause 63e subordinate word group 63 subordinating conjunction 61g, 63e superlative 26d tense 27f transitive verb 62b understood subject 62b verb 27, 28, 61c, 62b verbal phrase 63b

The Bedford Handbook, 8th Edition

The Speaker's Handbook, 8th Edition

The Wadsworth Handbook, 8th Edition

The Bedford Handbook with 2009 MLA and 2010 APA Updates, 8th Edition

IS Management Handbook, 8th Edition

Handbook of Information Management, 8th Edition

Natural Disasters. 8th Edition

Men's Lives (8th Edition)

Economics, 8th Edition

Elementary Statistics (8th Edition)

Psychology, 8th Edition

College Algebra, 8th Edition

Men's Lives (8th Edition)

Biology, 8th Edition

Elementary Statistics (8th Edition)

Exploring Psychology (8th Edition)

Physics, 8th Edition

Precalculus, 8th Edition

Business Statistics (8th Edition)

Business Statistics (8th Edition)

Frommer's Scotland, 8th Edition

Managerial Accounting, 8th Edition

Human Genetics, 8th Edition

College Algebra, 8th Edition

Cancer Medicine, 8th Edition

Digital Fundamentals (8th Edition)

Exploring Psychology (8th Edition)

Biology, 8th Edition

Beginning Algebra, 8th Edition

Records Management, 8th Edition

Biology, 8th Edition

The Bedford Handbook, 8th Edition

The Speaker's Handbook, 8th Edition

The Wadsworth Handbook, 8th Edition

The Bedford Handbook with 2009 MLA and 2010 APA Updates, 8th Edition

IS Management Handbook, 8th Edition

Handbook of Information Management, 8th Edition

Natural Disasters. 8th Edition

Men's Lives (8th Edition)

Economics, 8th Edition

Elementary Statistics (8th Edition)

Psychology, 8th Edition

College Algebra, 8th Edition

Men's Lives (8th Edition)

Biology, 8th Edition

Elementary Statistics (8th Edition)

Exploring Psychology (8th Edition)

Physics, 8th Edition

Precalculus, 8th Edition

Business Statistics (8th Edition)

Business Statistics (8th Edition)

Frommer's Scotland, 8th Edition

Managerial Accounting, 8th Edition

Human Genetics, 8th Edition

College Algebra, 8th Edition

Cancer Medicine, 8th Edition

Digital Fundamentals (8th Edition)

Exploring Psychology (8th Edition)

Biology, 8th Edition

Beginning Algebra, 8th Edition

Records Management, 8th Edition

Biology, 8th Edition

Recommend Documents